Jy997d16601r PDF

FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition
Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction
Edition
Manual No. JY997D16601

Revision R
Date 4/2021
Foreword
This manual contains text, diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader through the safe and
correct installation, use, and operation of the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series programmable controller.
It should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which
may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
1
Outline Precautions
• This manual provides information for the use of the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable
Controllers. The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel. The definition of
such a person or persons is as follows;
1) Any engineer who is responsible for the planning, design and construction of automatic equipment
using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature, trained and qualified
to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role. These engineers should be fully aware of
all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment.
2) Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to the
local and national standards required to fulfill that job. These engineers should also be trained in the
use and maintenance of the completed product. This includes being completely familiar with all
associated documentation for the said product. All maintenance should be carried out in accordance
with established safety practices.
3) All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and
coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices. The operators should also be
familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment.
Note: The term 'completed equipment' refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses
the product associated with this manual
• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been
designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
• Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine
or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product
where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe
functions in the system.
• When combining this product with other products, please confirm the standard and the code, or regulations
with which the user should follow. Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system,
machine, and apparatus with which a user is using.
• If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical
engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards. If in doubt about the operation or
use, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
• Since the examples indicated by this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as a reference,
please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will
accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples.
• This manual content, specification etc. may be changed without a notice for improvement.
• The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, you
have noticed a doubtful point, a doubtful error, etc., please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric
representative.
Registration
Microsoft, Microsoft Access, ActiveX, Excel, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual Studio, Windows,
Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Anywire and AnyWireASLINK are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Anywire Corporation.
The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.
In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.
2
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Related manuals ............................................................................................................................. 14

Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals .................................................................. 21
1. Introduction 23
1.1 Programming Language in PLCs ........................................................................................................... 23

1.1.1 Types of programming languages........................................................................................................... 23
1.1.2 Applicability of programming languages in programming software......................................................... 24
1.1.3 Compatibility among programs ............................................................................................................... 24
2. Overview (Sequence Program) 25
2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions..................................................................................................... 25

2.1.1 Convenient functions for input processing .............................................................................................. 25
2.1.2 Convenient functions for output processing ............................................................................................ 26
2.1.3 Functions for supporting sequence control ............................................................................................. 26
2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions ........................................................................................................ 27
2.2.1 Major applied instructions ....................................................................................................................... 28
2.3 Analog/Positioning Special Control ........................................................................................................ 29
2.4 Link and Communication........................................................................................................................ 30
2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC ............................................................................................. 31
2.5.1 Relationship among devices ................................................................................................................... 31
2.5.2 Device list................................................................................................................................................ 32
2.6 Program Memory and Devices............................................................................................................... 34
2.6.1 Memory structure .................................................................................................................................... 34
2.6.2 Memory operations and latched (battery or EEPROM backed) devices
(power ON/OFF and RUN/STOP) ........................................................................................................... 37
2.6.3 Types of backup methods against power failure..................................................................................... 43
2.6.4 Change between general devices and latched (battery backed) devices ............................................... 44
2.6.5 How to initialize devices (battery backed) ............................................................................................... 44
2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters........................................................................................................... 45
2.7.1 Parameter list .......................................................................................................................................... 45
2.7.2 Parameter initial values and available tools for changing parameter values .......................................... 46
2.7.3 Memory capacity setting range ............................................................................................................... 49
2.7.4 Compatible optional memory model........................................................................................................ 50
2.7.5 Keyword (entry code) .............................................................................................................................. 51
2.7.6 Special unit initial value setting ............................................................................................................... 59
2.7.7 Positioning instruction setting.................................................................................................................. 59
2.7.8 Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup (dedicated to FX3UC-32MT-LT-2).................................................................. 59
2.7.9 Parameter settings .................................................................................................................................. 59
3. Instruction List 71
3.1 Basic Instructions ................................................................................................................................... 71

3.2 Step Ladder Instructions ........................................................................................................................ 73
3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number.................................................................. 73
4. Devices in Detail 84
4.1 Device Number List................................................................................................................................ 84

4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y]..................................................................................................................................... 90
4.2.1 Numbers of I/O relays ............................................................................................................................. 90
4.2.2 Functions and roles................................................................................................................................. 91
4.2.3 Operation timing of I/O relays ................................................................................................................. 92
4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M] ................................................................................................................................. 93
4.3.1 Numbers of auxiliary relays..................................................................................................................... 93
4.3.2 Functions and operation examples ......................................................................................................... 93
3
4.4 State Relay [S] ....................................................................................................................................... 95

4.4.1 Numbers of state relays .......................................................................................................................... 95
4.5 Timer [T]................................................................................................................................................. 98
4.5.1 Numbers of timers................................................................................................................................... 98
4.5.3 Set value specification method ............................................................................................................. 100
4.5.4 Cautions on routines ............................................................................................................................. 100
4.5.5 Details on timer operation and timer accuracy...................................................................................... 100
4.5.6 Program examples [off-delay timer and flicker timer]............................................................................ 101
4.5.7 Handling timers as numeric devices ..................................................................................................... 102
4.6 Counter [C]........................................................................................................................................... 103
4.6.1
Numbers of counters............................................................................................................................. 103
4.6.2
Features of counters ............................................................................................................................. 103
4.6.3
Related devices (to specify counting direction) [32-bit counter]............................................................ 104
4.6.4
Functions and operation examples ....................................................................................................... 104
4.6.5
Set value specification method ............................................................................................................. 105
4.6.6
Response speed of counters ................................................................................................................ 106
4.6.7
Handling counters as numeric devices ................................................................................................. 106
4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs) .......................................................................... 108
4.7.1 Types and device numbers of high-speed counters ............................................................................. 108
4.7.2 Input assignment for high-speed counters ............................................................................................ 110
4.7.3 Handling of high-speed counters .......................................................................................................... 111
4.7.4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value.............................................................. 111
4.7.5 Related devices..................................................................................................................................... 111
4.7.6 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function ........................................................... 112
4.7.7 Response frequency of high-speed counters........................................................................................ 113
4.7.8 Cautions on use .................................................................................................................................... 115
4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) ...................................................................................... 117
4.8.1 Types and device numbers of high-speed counters ............................................................................. 117
4.8.2 Input assignment for high-speed counters ............................................................................................ 119
4.8.3 Handling of high-speed counters .......................................................................................................... 120
4.8.4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value.............................................................. 122
4.8.5 Related devices..................................................................................................................................... 123
4.8.6 Changing the logic of external reset input signal .................................................................................. 124
4.8.7 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function ........................................................... 124
4.8.8 How to use 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255 with 4 edge counting ................................ 125
4.8.9 Conditions for hardware counters to be handled as software counters ................................................ 126
4.8.10 Response frequency of high-speed counters...................................................................................... 127
4.8.11 Cautions on use .................................................................................................................................. 129
4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] ..................................................................................................... 131
4.9.1 Numbers of data registers and file registers ......................................................................................... 131
4.9.2 Structures of data registers and file registers........................................................................................ 132
4.9.3 Functions and operation examples of data registers ............................................................................ 133
4.9.4 Functions and operation examples of file registers............................................................................... 135
4.9.5 Cautions on using file registers ............................................................................................................. 138
4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] .................................................................. 139
4.10.1 Numbers of extension registers and extension file registers............................................................... 139
4.10.2 Data storage destination and access method ..................................................................................... 139
4.10.3 Structures of extension registers and extension file registers............................................................. 140
4.10.4 Initialization of extension registers and extension file registers .......................................................... 140
4.10.5 Functions and operation examples of extension registers .................................................................. 141
4.10.6 Functions and operation examples of extension file registers ............................................................ 142
4.10.7 Cautions on using extension file registers........................................................................................... 144
4.10.8 Registration of data in extension registers and extension file registers .............................................. 145
4.11 Index Register [V and Z] .................................................................................................................... 149
4.11.1 Numbers of index registers ................................................................................................................. 149
4.11.2 Functions and structures..................................................................................................................... 149
4.11.3 Indexing of devices ............................................................................................................................. 149
4.12 Pointer [P and I] ................................................................................................................................. 150
4.12.1 Numbers of pointers............................................................................................................................ 150
4.12.2 Functions and operation examples of pointers for branch .................................................................. 150
4.12.3 Functions and operation examples of pointers for interrupt ................................................................ 151
4
5. How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions 154
5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLC (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers) ......................... 154
5.1.1 Types of numeric values ....................................................................................................................... 154
5.1.2 Conversion of numeric values............................................................................................................... 155
5.1.3 Handling of numeric values in floating point operations........................................................................ 156
5.2 Specification of Constants K, H and E (Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Number) ............................. 158
5.2.1 Constant K (decimal number) ............................................................................................................... 158
5.2.2 Constant H (hexadecimal number) ....................................................................................................... 158
5.2.3 Constant E (real number)...................................................................................................................... 158
5.3 Character Strings ................................................................................................................................. 159
5.3.1 Character string constant ("ABC")......................................................................................................... 159
5.3.2 Character string data............................................................................................................................. 159
5.4 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices (Kn[ ]***).................................................................................... 160
5.5 Bit Specification of a Word Device (D[ ].b) ........................................................................................... 161
5.6 Direct Specification of Buffer Memory (U[ ]\G[ ]) .................................................................................. 161
5.7 Indexing................................................................................................................................................ 162
5.7.1 Indexing in basic instructions ................................................................................................................ 162
5.7.2 Indexing in applied instructions ............................................................................................................. 163
5.7.3 Indexing example for instruction with limited number of use................................................................. 165
6. What to Understand before Programming 166
6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions ............................................................................................. 166

6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs................................................................................. 169
6.2.1 Programming procedure and execution order....................................................................................... 169
6.2.2 Double output (double coil) operation and countermeasures ............................................................... 170
6.2.3 Circuits which cannot be programmed and countermeasures .............................................................. 171
6.3 I/O Processing and Response Delay ................................................................................................... 171
6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions.......................................................... 172
6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions................................................................................................. 174
6.5.1 Expression and operation type of applied instructions.......................................................................... 174
6.5.2 Handling of general flags ...................................................................................................................... 176
6.5.3 Handling of operation error flag............................................................................................................. 178
6.5.4 Handling functions of extension flag ..................................................................................................... 178
6.5.5 Limitation in the number of instructions and limitation in simultaneous instruction instances............... 179
6.6 Symbolic information storage and block password .............................................................................. 180
6.6.1 Storage of symbolic information............................................................................................................ 180
6.6.2 Block password ..................................................................................................................................... 180
7. Basic Instruction 181
7.1 LD, LDI ................................................................................................................................................. 183

7.2 OUT...................................................................................................................................................... 185
7.3 AND, ANI.............................................................................................................................................. 188
7.4 OR, ORI ............................................................................................................................................... 191
7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF .................................................................................................. 194
7.6 ORB ..................................................................................................................................................... 200
7.7 ANB...................................................................................................................................................... 201
7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP ................................................................................................................................. 202
7.9 MC, MCR ............................................................................................................................................. 205
7.10 INV ..................................................................................................................................................... 208
7.11 MEP, MEF.......................................................................................................................................... 209
7.12 PLS, PLF............................................................................................................................................ 211
7.13 SET, RST ........................................................................................................................................... 214
7.14 NOP ................................................................................................................................................... 217
7.15 END.................................................................................................................................................... 218
7.16 Number of Instruction Steps and Specified Devices .......................................................................... 219
5
8. Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 220
8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump.......................................................................................................... 221

8.1.1 CJ instruction and operations of contact and coil.................................................................................. 225
8.1.2 Relationship between master control instruction and jump instruction ................................................. 227
8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine ........................................................................................................ 228
8.2.1 Cautions on subroutines and interrupt routines .................................................................................... 230
8.3 FNC 02 – SRET / Subroutine Return ................................................................................................... 232
8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return ........................................................................................................ 233
8.5 FNC 04 – EI / Enable Interrupt............................................................................................................. 235
8.6 FNC 05 – DI / Disable Interrupt............................................................................................................ 236
8.7 FNC 06 – FEND / Main Routine Program End..................................................................................... 237
8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh.......................................................................................... 239
8.9 FNC 08 – FOR / Start a FOR/NEXT Loop ........................................................................................... 241
8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop......................................................................................... 242
9. Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 244
9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare ................................................................................................................... 245

9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare........................................................................................................... 247
9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move......................................................................................................................... 249
9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move .............................................................................................................. 252
9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement.............................................................................................................. 254
9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move............................................................................................................. 256
9.6.1 Function of transfer between file registers and data registers .............................................................. 258
9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move ................................................................................................................. 260
9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange .................................................................................................................. 262
9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal ....................................................................... 264
9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary ................................................................................................ 267
10. Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 270
10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition ................................................................................................................... 271

10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction .............................................................................................................. 273
10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication ........................................................................................................... 275
10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division ..................................................................................................................... 278
10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment.................................................................................................................. 281
10.6 FNC 25 – DEC / Decrement............................................................................................................... 283
10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND ............................................................................................... 284
10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR.................................................................................................... 286
10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR........................................................................................... 288
10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation................................................................................................................ 290
11. Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 292
11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right ......................................................................................................... 293

11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left ............................................................................................................ 295
11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry ........................................................................................ 297
11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry ........................................................................................... 299
11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right......................................................................................................... 301
11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left............................................................................................................ 303
11.6.1 Replacement of SFT instruction in F1 and F2 Series.......................................................................... 305
11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right ................................................................................................... 306
11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left ...................................................................................................... 308
11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control]............................................................................ 310
11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control] ................................................................................... 313
6
12. Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 315
12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset............................................................................................................ 316

12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode ................................................................................................................. 320
12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode ................................................................................................................. 323
12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits................................................................................................... 325
12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status...................................................................................... 328
12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean .................................................................................................................... 330
12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set............................................................................................ 332
12.8 FNC 47 – ANR / Annunciator Reset................................................................................................... 334
12.9 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root............................................................................................................ 335
12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point .................................................................................. 336
13. High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 338
13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh .................................................................................................................... 339

13.1.1 What should be understood before using the REF instruction............................................................ 342
13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust....................................................................................... 343
13.2.1 What should be understood before using REFF instruction................................................................ 345
13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix ............................................................................................................. 346
13.3.1 Operation and cautions for the MTR instruction.................................................................................. 349
13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set....................................................................................... 350
13.4.1 Common cautions on using instructions for high-speed counter ........................................................ 353
13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset .................................................................................. 356
13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare....................................................................... 359
13.6.1 Program in which comparison result is set to ON when power is turned ON
[ZCP (FNC 11) instruction].................................................................................................................. 363
13.6.2 Table high-speed comparison mode (M8130) .................................................................................... 365
13.6.3 Frequency control mode (HSZ and PLSY instructions) (M8132) ........................................................ 368
13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection...................................................................................................... 371
13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output ...................................................................................................... 375
13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation ......................................................................................... 380
13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup ......................................................................... 383
14. Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 388
14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State ................................................................................................................ 389

14.1.1 IST instruction equivalent circuit ......................................................................................................... 391
14.1.2 Example of IST instruction introduction (example of workpiece transfer mechanism)........................ 392
14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack ............................................................................................... 399
14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer.................................................................................... 402
14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer ................................................................................ 405
14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer..................................................................................................... 407
14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer........................................................................................................ 409
14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State ......................................................................................................... 411
14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value ........................................................................................... 413
14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control ............................................................................................ 415
14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data ........................................................................................ 418
15. External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 421
15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input .......................................................................................................... 422

15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input................................................................................................... 425
15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)......................................................................... 429
15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder ..................................................................................... 432
15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch................................................................................... 434
15.5.1 How to select a seven-segment display unit ....................................................................................... 437
15.5.2 How to select parameter "n" based on seven-segment display specifications ................................... 437
15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch ........................................................................................................ 439
15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input............................................................................................ 443
15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code) ..................................................................................................... 445
7
15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block .................................................................. 448
15.9.1 Common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction (details) ............................................ 451
15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block .......................................................................... 453
16. External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 455
16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication................................................................................................ 456

16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode) .................................................................................... 458
16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion ......................................................................... 460
16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion .......................................................................... 463
16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code ............................................................................................................ 466
16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read......................................................................................................... 469
16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale ........................................................................................................ 471
16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2........................................................................................... 473
16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop ...................................................................................................... 476
17. Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 480
17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register.............................................................................. 481

17.2 FNC103 – ZPOP/Batch POP of Index Register ................................................................................. 484
18. Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 485
18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare....................................................................................... 487

18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare .............................................................................. 488
18.3 FNC112 – EMOV / Floating Point Move ............................................................................................ 490
18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion..................................................... 491
18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion ..................................................... 497
18.6 FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion.................................................. 502
18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion ................................................... 503
18.8 FNC120 – EADD / Floating Point Addition......................................................................................... 505
18.9 FNC121 – ESUB / Floating Point Subtraction.................................................................................... 506
18.10 FNC122 – EMUL / Floating Point Multiplication ............................................................................... 507
18.11 FNC123 – EDIV / Floating Point Division......................................................................................... 508
18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent ....................................................................................... 509
18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm ....................................................................... 511
18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm................................................................... 513
18.15 FNC127 – ESQR / Floating Point Square Root ............................................................................... 515
18.16 FNC128 – ENEG / Floating Point Negation ..................................................................................... 516
18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion...................................................................... 517
18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine................................................................................................. 519
18.19 FNC131 – COS / Floating Point Cosine........................................................................................... 520
18.20 FNC132 – TAN / Floating Point Tangent ......................................................................................... 521
18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine........................................................................................ 522
18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine .................................................................................. 524
18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent................................................................................. 526
18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion ................................................... 528
18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion ................................................... 530
19. Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 531
19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data.............................................................................................. 532

19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE .................................................................................................. 534
19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD .................................................................................................. 536
19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data ....................................................................................... 538
19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data.................................................................................... 540
19.6 FNC147 – SWAP / Byte Swap ........................................................................................................... 542
19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2........................................................................................ 543
8
20. Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 547
20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return...................................................................................... 548

20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning............................................................................................... 550
20.3 FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode.................................................................................. 552
20.4 FNC155 – ABS / Absolute Current Value Read................................................................................. 553
20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return ............................................................................................................ 554
20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output ............................................................................... 556
20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment................................................................................................. 558
20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute ................................................................................................. 560
21. Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 562
21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare............................................................................................. 563

21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare .................................................................................... 565
21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition ............................................................................................... 567
21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction .......................................................................................... 569
21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion................................................................................. 571
21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion................................................................................. 573
21.7 FNC166 – TRD / Read RTC data ...................................................................................................... 575
21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data......................................................................................................... 576
21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter .......................................................................................................... 578
22. External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 580
22.1 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion ........................................................................ 581

22.2 FNC171 – GBIN / Gray Code to Decimal Conversion ....................................................................... 582
22.3 FNC176 – RD3A / Read form Dedicated Analog Block ..................................................................... 583
22.4 FNC177 – WR3A / Write to Dedicated Analog Block......................................................................... 584
23. Introduction of Alternate Instructions – FNC180 585
23.1 Instruction correspondence table ....................................................................................................... 585
24. Others – FNC181 to FNC189 586
24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data ........................................................................... 587

24.2 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation................................................................................. 589
24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation ..................................................................................... 590
24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check ..................................................................................... 592
24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move............................................................................... 596
25. Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 600
25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition................................................................................................. 601

25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction .......................................................................................... 604
25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare.................................................. 607
26. Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 611
26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion ....................................................................... 612

26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion........................................................................ 617
26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings ............................................................................................... 622
26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection ......................................................................... 624
26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right ................................................ 626
26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left ..................................................... 628
26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings ............................................................... 630
9
26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings ........................................................ 633

26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search....................................................................................... 636
26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer .................................................................................. 638
27. Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 640
27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables.................................................................................... 641

27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables ........................................................................................ 643
27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] ...................................................................... 645
27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry......................................................................................... 648
27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry............................................................................................ 650
28. Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 652
28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison ................................................................ 654
28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison ............................................................. 656
28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison ............................................................... 658
29. Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 660
29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control ......................................................................................................... 661

29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control .............................................................................................. 664
29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control ........................................................................................................ 667
29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) ........................................................................ 670
29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion ...................................................................... 674
29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion ...................................................................... 677
29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)...................................................................... 680
30. External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 684
30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check............................................................................................ 685

30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive......................................................................................................... 687
30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read....................................................................................... 689
30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write ...................................................................................... 691
30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write.......................................................................... 693
30.6 FNC275 – IVMC / Inverter Multi Command ....................................................................................... 695
30.7 FNC276 - MODBUS Read/Write Instruction ...................................................................................... 697
30.7.1 Command Code and Command Parameters...................................................................................... 698
31. Data Transfer 3 – FNC277 to FNC279 701
31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read .............................................................................................. 702

31.1.1 Common items between RBFM (FNC278) instruction and WBFM (FNC279) instruction................... 703
31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write.............................................................................................. 706
32. High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 708
32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table.................................................. 709
33. Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 714
33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER ................................................................................................... 715

33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER ........................................................................................................ 718
33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER................................................................................................ 726
33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER ............................................................................................... 729
33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER...................................................................................................... 733
33.6 FNC295 – INITER / Initialize ER ........................................................................................................ 739
10
34. FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 742
34.1 FNC300 – FLCRT / File create•check ............................................................................................... 743

34.1.1 Detailed explanation of setting data .................................................................................................... 744
34.2 FNC301 – FLDEL / File delete•CF card format ................................................................................. 745
34.3 FNC302 – FLWR / Data write ............................................................................................................ 747
34.4 FNC303 – FLRD / Data read.............................................................................................................. 750
34.5 FNC304 – FLCMD / FX3U-CF-ADP command .................................................................................. 752
34.6 FNC305 – FLSTRD / FX3U-CF-ADP status read .............................................................................. 754
35. SFC Program and Step Ladder 757
35.1 SFC Program ..................................................................................................................................... 757

35.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................. 757
35.1.2 Explanation of function and operation................................................................................................. 757
35.1.3 SFC program creating procedure........................................................................................................ 759
35.1.4 Handling and role of initial state relay ................................................................................................. 762
35.1.5 Latched (battery backed) type state relays ......................................................................................... 762
35.1.6 Role of the RET instruction ................................................................................................................. 763
35.1.7 Preliminary knowledge for creating SFC program .............................................................................. 763
35.1.8 SFC flow formats................................................................................................................................. 769
35.1.9 Program of branch/recombination state relays ................................................................................... 772
35.1.10 Rule for creating branch circuit ......................................................................................................... 773
35.1.11 Program examples ............................................................................................................................ 777
35.2 Step Ladder........................................................................................................................................ 786
35.2.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................. 786
35.2.2 Explanation of function and operation................................................................................................. 786
35.2.3 Expression of step ladder.................................................................................................................... 788
35.2.4 Creation of step ladder program (SFC program → STL program)...................................................... 789
35.2.5 Preliminary knowledge for creating step ladder programs .................................................................. 790
35.2.6 Program with state relays in branches and recombination ................................................................. 793
35.2.7 Program examples .............................................................................................................................. 797
36. Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function 803
36.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................ 803

36.2 Common Items................................................................................................................................... 804
36.2.1 How to disable interrupt function......................................................................................................... 804
36.2.2 Related items ...................................................................................................................................... 805
36.2.3 Cautions on use (common) ................................................................................................................. 805
36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] ............................. 808
36.3.1 Input interrupt (interrupt triggered by external signal) [without delay function].................................... 808
36.3.2 Examples of practical programs (programs to measure short pulse width) ........................................ 812
36.4 Input interrupt (Interrupt by External Signal) [With Delay Function] ................................................... 814
36.5 Timer Interrupt (Interrupt in Constant Cycle)...................................................................................... 814
36.5.1 Timer interrupt (interrupt in constant cycle)......................................................................................... 814
36.5.2 Examples of practical program (timer interrupt programs using applied instruction) .......................... 816
36.6 Counter Interrupt - Interrupt Triggered by Counting Up of High-Speed Counter ............................... 819
36.7 Pulse Catch Function [M8170 to M8177] ........................................................................................... 820
36.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] ..................... 821
11
37. Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) 825
37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) ............................................................................................. 825

37.1.1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511) ......................................................................................... 825
37.1.2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)............................................................................................ 843
37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) .................................................................... 865
37.2.1 RUN monitor and initial pulse [M8000 to M8003]................................................................................ 865
37.2.2 Watchdog timer [D8000] ..................................................................................................................... 866
37.2.3 Battery voltage low detection [M8005 and M8006] ............................................................................. 866
37.2.4 Power failure detection time [D8008, M8008 and M8007] .................................................................. 867
37.2.5 Scan time (monitor) [D8010 to D8012]................................................................................................ 867
37.2.6 Internal clock [M8011 to M8014] ......................................................................................................... 867
37.2.7 Real time clock [M8015 to M8019 and D8013 to D8019].................................................................... 868
37.2.8 How to set real time clock ................................................................................................................... 869
37.2.9 Input filter adjustment [D8020] ............................................................................................................ 871
37.2.10 Battery [BATT (BAT)] LED and [ALM] LED OFF command [M8030]................................................ 872
37.2.11 Built-in analog volume [D8030 and D8031]....................................................................................... 873
37.2.12 Clear command [M8031 and M8032]................................................................................................ 873
37.2.13 Memory hold stop [M8033] (output hold in STOP mode).................................................................. 873
37.2.14 All outputs disable [M8034] ............................................................................................................... 874
37.2.15 Individual operation for RUN/STOP input [M8035 to M8037] ........................................................... 874
37.2.16 Constant scan mode [M8039 and D8039]......................................................................................... 875
37.2.17 State control in program with STL instruction/SFC chart [M8040] .................................................... 875
37.2.18 Analog expansion boards [M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279] ................................................. 876
37.2.19 Analog special adapters [M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299].................................................... 878
38. Error Check Method and Error Code List 885
38.1 States and Colors of LEDs PLC Operation Status............................................................................. 885

38.1.1 POWER (POW) LED [lit, flickering or unlit] ......................................................................................... 886
38.1.2 RUN LED [lit or unlit] ........................................................................................................................... 886
38.1.3 BATT (BAT) LED [lit or unlit] [FX3U/FX3UC]........................................................................................ 886
38.1.4 ALM LED [lit or unlit] [FX3G/FX3GC] ................................................................................................... 886
38.1.5 ERROR (ERR) LED [lit, flickering or unlit]........................................................................................... 887
38.1.6 L RUN LED [FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)] ...................................................................................................... 887
38.1.7 L ERR LED [FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)] ...................................................................................................... 888
38.2 Error Code Check Method and Indication .......................................................................................... 889
38.2.1 Error code check method by display module ...................................................................................... 889
38.2.2 Error code check method by GX Works2............................................................................................ 890
38.2.3 Error indication .................................................................................................................................... 891
38.3 Supplementary Explanation of Devices for Error Detection ............................................................... 892
38.3.1 Error detection (M8060 to/D8060 to)................................................................................................... 892
38.3.2 Operations of special devices for error detection................................................................................ 893
38.3.3 Error detection timing .......................................................................................................................... 893
38.4 Error Code List and Action ................................................................................................................. 894
Appendix A: Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History 902
Appendix A-1 Programming Tool Applicability ........................................................................................... 902

Appendix A-1-1 Programming tool applicability ............................................................................................. 902
Appendix A-1-2 Cautions on writing during RUN ........................................................................................... 905
Appendix A-1-3 Precautions on Use of (Built-in USB) Programming Port ..................................................... 910
Appendix A-1-4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series ....................... 911
Appendix A-1-5 Cautions on using transparent (2-port) function of GOT-F900 Series.................................. 912
Appendix A-2 Peripheral product applicability (except programming tools)............................................... 913
Appendix A-2-1 Peripheral product applicability ............................................................................................ 913
Appendix A-3 Version Upgrade History ..................................................................................................... 915
Appendix A-3-1 Manufacturer's serial number check method ....................................................................... 915
Appendix A-3-2 Version check....................................................................................................................... 916
Appendix A-3-3 Version upgrade history [FX3S]............................................................................................ 916
Appendix A-3-4 Version upgrade history [FX3G]............................................................................................ 916
Appendix A-3-5 Version upgrade history [FX3GC] ......................................................................................... 917
Appendix A-3-6 Version upgrade history [FX3U]............................................................................................ 917
Appendix A-3-7 Version upgrade history [FX3UC] ......................................................................................... 918
12
Appendix B: Instruction Execution Time 920
Appendix B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time ........................................................................................ 920

Appendix B-2 Step Ladder Instruction Execution Time.............................................................................. 928
Appendix B-3 Label (P/I) Execution Time .................................................................................................. 928
Appendix B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time ..................................................................................... 929
Appendix B-5 Execution Time of Pulse Generation Instruction P in Each Applied Instruction .................. 944
Appendix B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing................................. 947
Appendix B-6-1 Basic instruction (LD/LDI/AND/ANI/OR/ORI) execution time ............................................... 947
Appendix B-6-2 Applied instruction execution time........................................................................................ 947
Appendix C: Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] 952
Appendix C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] ............................................................................. 952

Appendix C-2 Applied instructions [in alphabetical order].......................................................................... 956
Appendix D: Discontinued models 959
Warranty ........................................................................................................................................ 961

Revised History............................................................................................................................. 962
13
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Related manuals
Related manuals
For detailed explanation of programming (basic instructions, applied instructions and step ladder instructions) in FX3S/
FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, refer to this manual.
For hardware information on the PLC main unit, special extension units, etc., refer to each associated manual.
For acquiring manuals, contact the representative you have purchased the product from.
 Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation
Manual Model name
Manual name Contents
number code
Manuals for PLC main unit
FX3S PLC main unit
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the PLC
main unit FX3S extracted from the FX3S Series
Supplied FX3S Series
 JY997D48301 User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. For detailed −
with product Hardware Manual
explanation, refer to the FX3S Series User’s Manual
- Hardware Edition.
I/O specifications, built-in analog specifications,
wiring and installation of the PLC main unit FX3S-
Supplied FX3S-30M/E-2AD 30M/E-2AD extracted from the FX3S Series
 JY997D51701 −
with product Hardware Manual User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. For detailed
explanation, refer to the FX3S Series User’s Manual
- Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O
Additional FX3S Series User’s Manual
 JY997D48601 specifications, wiring, installation and maintenance 09R535
Manual - Hardware Edition
of the FX3S PLC main unit.
FX3G PLC main unit
main unit FX3G extracted from the FX3G Series
Supplied FX3G Series
explanation, refer to the FX3G Series User’s Manual
- Hardware Edition.
Additional FX3G Series User’s Manual
of the FX3G PLC main unit.
FX3GC PLC main unit
main unit FX3GC extracted from the FX3GC Series
Supplied FX3GC Series
explanation, refer to the FX3GC Series User’s
Manual - Hardware Edition.
Additional FX3GC Series User’s Manual
of the FX3GC PLC main unit.
FX3U PLC main unit
main unit FX3U extracted from the FX3U Series
Supplied FX3U Series
explanation, refer to the FX3U Series User’s Manual
- Hardware Edition.
Additional FX3U Series User’s Manual
of the FX3U PLC main unit.
FX3UC PLC main unit
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
Supplied FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series
 JY997D50501 main unit FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) extracted from the −
FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
Supplied FX3UC-32MT-LT-2
 JY997D31601 main unit FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 extracted from the −
FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
Additional FX3UC Series User’s Manual
of the FX3UC PLC main unit.
14
Manual Model name
number code
Programming
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Items related to programming in PLCs including
Additional Series Programming Manual explanation of basic instructions, applied
 JY997D16601 09R517
Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction instructions and various devices in FX3S/FX3G/
Edition (this manual) FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured
Additional Programming methods, specifications, functions,
 Programming Manual SH-080782ENG 13JW06
Manual etc. required to create structured programs
(Fundamentals)
FXCPU Structured
Additional Devices, parameters, etc. provided in structured
 Programming Manual JY997D26001 09R925
Manual projects of GX Works2
[Device & Common]
FXCPU Structured
Additional Sequence instructions provided in structured
Manual projects of GX Works2
[Basic & Applied Instruction]
FXCPU Structured
Additional Application functions provided in structured projects
Manual of GX Works2
[Application Functions]
Terminal block
Supplied FX INPUT AND OUTPUT
 JY992D50401 Terminal block handling procedures. −
with product TERMINAL BLOCKS
Manuals for communication control
Common
Details about N : N Network, parallel link, computer
Additional FX Series User’s Manual
 JY997D16901 link and non-protocol communication (RS 09R715
Manual - Data Communication Edition
instruction and FX2N-232IF).
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Additional Series User’s Manual Explains the MODBUS serial communication
 JY997D26201 09R626
Manual - MODBUS Serial network in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
Communication Edition
Communication via RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485/USB
When using each product, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each product is
connected and the FX Series User’s Manual - Communication Control Edition.
Refer to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series User’s Manual - MODBUS Serial Communication Edition for MODBUS
communication.
Items about the system configuration of USB
Supplied FX3U-USB-BD
 JY997D13501 communication expansion board and the driver −
with product User’s Manual
installation method.
Supplied FX3G-232-BD Handling procedures of the RS-232C
 JY997D32001 −
with product Installation Manual communication expansion board.
Supplied FX3U-232-BD Handling procedures of the RS-232C
 JY997D12901 −
with product Installation Manual communication expansion board.
Supplied FX3U-232ADP-MB Handling procedures of the RS-232C
 JY997D26401 −
with product Installation Manual communication special adapter.
Supplied FX3U-232ADP Handling procedures of the RS-232C
 JY997D13701 −
with product Installation Manual communication special adapter.
Supplied FX2N-232IF Handling procedures of the RS-232C
 JY992D73501 −
with product Hardware Manual communication special function block.
Supplied FX3G-422-BD Handling procedures of the RS-422 communication
 JY997D32101 −
with product Installation Manual expansion board.
Supplied FX3U-422-BD Handling procedures of the RS-422 communication
 JY997D13101 −
Supplied FX3G-485-BD Handling procedures of the RS-485 communication
 JY997D32201 −
Supplied FX3G-485-BD-RJ Handling procedures of the RS-485 communication
 JY997D51501 −
Supplied FX3U-485-BD Handling procedures of the RS-485 communication
 JY997D13001 −
Supplied FX3U-485ADP-MB Handling procedures of the RS-485 communication
 JY997D26301 −
with product Installation Manual special adapter.
Supplied FX3U-485ADP Handling procedures of the RS-485 communication
 JY997D13801 −
with product Installation Manual special adapter.
Supplied FX-485PC-IF Handling procedures of the RS-232C/RS-485
 JY992D81801 −
with product Hardware Manual conversion interface.
15
Manual Model name
number code
Ethernet, CC-Link, MELSEC I/O LINK, AnyWireASLINK and AS-i system
When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each product is
connected.
Describes installation specifications for the
FX3U-ENET-ADP Ethernet communication special
Supplied FX3U-ENET-ADP
 JY997D47401 adapter extracted from the FX3U-ENET-ADP User's −
with product Installation Manual
Manual.
For details, refer to FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual.
Additional FX3U-ENET-ADP Describes Ethernet communication special adapter
 JY997D45801 09R725
Manual User’s Manual details.
Handling procedures of the CC-Link master special
Supplied FX3U-16CCL-M
 JY997D43401 function block. −
For use, refer to the FX3U-16CCL-M User’s Manual.
Additional FX3U-16CCL-M Details about the CC-Link master special function
 JY997D43601 09R724
Manual User’s Manual block.
Handling procedures of the CC-Link master special
Supplied FX2N-16CCL-M
 JY992D93201 function block. −
For use, refer to the FX2N-16CCL-M User’s Manual.
Additional FX2N-16CCL-M Details about the CC-Link master special function
 JY992D93101 09R710
Handling procedures of the CC-Link interface
Supplied FX3U-64CCL
 JY997D29801 special function block. −
For use, refer to the FX3U-64CCL User’s Manual.
Additional FX3U-64CCL Handling procedures of the CC-Link interface
 JY997D30401 09R718
Manual User’s Manual special function block.
Supplied FX2N-32CCL Handling procedures of the CC-Link remote device
 JY992D71801 09R711
with product User’s Manual station special function block.
Remote I/O station, remote
Supplied As for the remote I/O station, remote device station and intelligent
 device station and intelligent
with product device station for CC-Link, refer to each manual and the related data.
device station for CC-Link
Handling procedures of the CC-Link/LT master
FX2N-64CL-M
Supplied special function block.
 User’s Manual JY997D05401 −
with product For use, refer to the FX2N-64CL-M User’s Manual
[Hardware Volume]
[Detailed Volume].
FX2N-64CL-M
Additional Details about the CC-Link/LT master special
 User’s Manual JY997D08501 −
Manual function block.
[Detailed Volume]
Remote I/O station, remote
As for the remote I/O station, remote device station, power supply
Supplied device station, power supply
 adapter and dedicated power supply for CC-Link/LT, refer to each
with product adapter and dedicated power
manual and the related data.
supply for CC-Link/LT
Supplied FX2N-16LNK-M Handling procedure of the master special function
 JY992D73701 09R709
with product User's Manual block for the MELSEC I/O LINK
Handling procedures of the AnyWireASLINK
Supplied FX3U-128ASL-M system master block.
 JY997D51901 −
with product Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX3U-128ASL-M User's
Manual.
Additional FX3U-128ASL-M Details about the AnyWireASLINK system master
 JY997D52101 09R731
Manual User's Manual block.
Supplied FX2N-32ASI-M Handling procedure of the master special function
 JY992D76901 −
with product User’s Manual block for the AS-i system.
Manuals for analog control
Common
Details about the analog special function block
Additional (FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3UC-4AD), analog
 User’s Manual JY997D16701 09R619
Manual special adapter (FX3U-∗∗∗∗-ADP) and analog
- Analog Control Edition
expansion board (FX3G-∗∗∗-BD).
16
Manual Model name
number code
Analog input, temperature input and temperature control
connected.
Handling procedures of the 2-channel analog input
Supplied FX3G-2AD-BD expansion board.
 JY997D33501 −
with product Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Series User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Supplied FX2N-2AD Handling procedures of the 2-channel analog input
 JY992D74701 −
with product User’s Guide special function block.
Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
Supplied FX3U-4AD input special function block.
 JY997D20701 −
Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog input
Supplied FX3U-4AD-ADP special adapter.
 JY997D13901 −
Supplied FX3UC-4AD input special function block.
 JY997D14901 −
 JY992D65201 −
with product User’s Guide special function block.
Supplied FX2NC-4AD Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog input
 JY997D07801 −
with product User’s Manual special function block.
 JY992D86001 09R608
with product User’s Manual (and thermocouple input) special function block.
Handling procedures of the 4-channel Pt100
Supplied FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP temperature sensor input special adapter.
 JY997D14701 −
with product User’s Manual For use, refer to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Handling procedures of the 4-channel Pt100
Supplied FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP temperature sensor input special adaptor.
 JY997D29101 −
Supplied FX2N-4AD-PT Handling procedures of the 4-channel Pt100
 JY992D65601 −
with product User’s Guide temperature sensor input special function block.
Handling procedures of the 4-channel
Pt1000/Ni1000 temperature sensor input special
Supplied FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
 JY997D29201 adaptor. −
with product User’s Manual
For use, refer to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Handling procedures of the 4-channel
Supplied FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP thermocouple input special adapter.
 JY997D14801 −
Supplied FX2N-4AD-TC Handling procedures of the 4-channel
 JY992D65501 −
with product User’s Guide thermocouple input special function block.
Handling procedures of the 4-channel temperature
Supplied FX3U-4LC
 JY997D38901 control special function block. −
For use, refer to the FX3U-4LC User’s Manual
Additional FX3U-4LC Detail about the 4-channel temperature control
 JY997D39101 09R625
Handling procedures of the 2-channel temperature
Supplied FX2N-2LC
 JY992D85601 control special function block. −
with product User’s Guide
For use, refer to the FX2N-2LC User’s Manual.
Additional FX2N-2LC Details about the 2-channel temperature control
 JY992D85801 09R607
17
Manual Model name
number code
Analog output
connected.
Supplied FX3G-1DA-BD output expansion board.
 JY997D33601 −
Supplied FX2N-2DA Handling procedures of the 2-channel analog
 JY992D74901 −
with product User’s Guide output special function block.
Supplied FX3U-4DA output special function block.
 JY997D20801 −
Supplied FX3U-4DA-ADP output special adapter.
 JY997D14001 −
Supplied FX2N-4DA Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
 JY992D65901 −
with product User’s Guide output special function block.
Supplied FX2NC-4DA Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
 JY997D07601 −
with product User’s Manual output special function block.
Analog I/O (mixed)
connected.
Handling procedures of the 2-channel analog input/
Supplied FX3U-3A-ADP 1-channel analog output special adapter.
 JY997D35601 −
Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Supplied FX0N-3A Handling procedures of the 2-channel analog input/
 JY992D49001 −
with product User’s Guide 1-channel analog output special function block.
Supplied FX2N-5A Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog input/
 JY997D11401 09R616
with product Users Manual 1-channel analog output special function block.
Manuals for high-speed counter
High-speed counter
connected.
Supplied FX3U-4HSX-ADP Handling procedure of the special high-speed input
 JY997D16301 −
with product Installation Manual adapter.
Supplied FX3U-2HC Handling procedure of the 2-channel high-speed
 JY997D36701 −
with product User’s Manual counter special function block.
Supplied FX2N-1HC Handling procedures of the 1-channel high-speed
 JY992D65401 −
with product User’s Guide counter special function block.
Supplied FX2NC-1HC Handling procedures of the 1-channel high-speed
 JY997D30701 −
with product User’s Manual counter special function block.
Manuals for positioning control
Common
Additional Details about the positioning function built in the
 Series User’s Manual JY997D16801 09R620
Manual FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series.
- Positioning Edition
18
Manual Model name
number code
Pulse output and positioning
connected.
Handling procedure of the special high-speed
Supplied FX3U-2HSY-ADP output adapter.
 JY997D16401 −
Series User’s Manual - Positioning Edition.
Handling procedures of the 1-axis pulse output
Supplied FX3U-1PG
 JY997D47101 block. −
For use, refer to the FX3U-1PG User’s Manual.
Additional FX3U-1PG
 JY997D47301 Details about the 1-axis pulse output block. 09R629
Manual User’s Manual
Supplied FX2N-1PG-E
 JY997D50601 block. −
For use, refer to the FX2N/FX-1PG User’s Manual.
Additional FX2N/FX-1PG Handling procedures of the 1-axis pulse output
 JY992D65301 09R610
Supplied FX2N-10PG
 JY992D91901 block. −
For use, refer to the FX2N-10PG User’s Manual.
Additional FX2N-10PG
 JY992D93401 Details about the 1-axis pulse output block. 09R611
Manual User’s Manual
Handling procedures of the 1-axis positioning
Supplied FX2N-10GM special extension unit.
 JY992D77701 −
with product User’s Guide For use, refer to the FX2N-10GM/FX2N-20GM
Hardware/Programming Manual
Supplied FX2N-20GM special extension unit.
 JY992D77601 −
with product User’s Guide For use, refer to the FX2N-10GM/FX2N-20GM
Hardware/Programming Manual
FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM
Additional Details on the 1-axis/2-axis positioning special
 Hardware/Programming JY992D77801 09R612
Manual function unit.
Manual
Programmable cam switch
connected.
Supplied FX2N-1RM-E-SET Handling procedures of the programmable cam
 JY992D71101 09R614
with product User’s Manual switch special extension unit.
Manuals for FX3U-20SSC-H positioning Block
Supplied FX3U-20SSC-H
 JY997D21101 special function block. -
For use, refer to the FX3U-20SSC-H User's Manual.
Additional FX3U-20SSC-H
 JY997D21301 Describes FX3U-20SSC-H Positioning block details. 09R622
Manual User's Manual
Supplied FX Configurator-FP Describes operation details of FX Configurator-FP
 JY997D21801 09R916
with product Operation Manual Configuration Software.
Manuals for FX3U-CF-ADP CF card special adapter
Describes installation specifications for the
Supplied FX3U-CF-ADP FX3U-CF-ADP CF card special adapter extracted
 JY997D35201 -
with product Installation Manual from the FX3U-CF-ADP User's Manual.
For details, refer to FX3U-CF-ADP User's Manual.
Additional FX3U-CF-ADP Describes details of the FX3U-CF-ADP CF card
 JY997D35401 09R720
Manual User's Manual special adapter.
Manuals for FX-30P
Describes FX-30P specification extracted from the
Supplied FX-30P
 JY997D34201 FX-30P Operation manual. −
For details, refer to FX-30P Operation manual.
Additional FX-30P Describes Handy Programming Panel FX-30P
 JY997D34401 09R924
Manual Operation Manual details.
19
Manual Model name
number code
Other manuals
connected.
Connector conversion
Supplied FX3S-CNV-ADP Handling procedures of the conversion adapter for
 JY997D48801 −
with product Installation Manual special adapter connection.
Supplied FX3G-CNV-ADP Handling procedures of the conversion adapter for
 JY997D32301 −
with product Installation Manual special adapter connection.
Supplied FX3U-CNV-BD Handling procedures of the connector conversion
 JY997D13601 −
with product Installation Manual expansion board for special adapter connection.
Input extension
Supplied FX3G-4EX-BD Handling procedures of the 4 points input
 JY997D51301 −
with product User's Manual expansion board.
Output extension
Supplied FX3G-2EYT-BD Handling procedures of the 2 points transistor
 JY997D51401 −
with product User's Manual output expansion board.
Analog volume
When using each product, refer also to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic and Applied
Instruction Edition.
Supplied FX3G-8AV-BD Handling procedures of the 8-channel analog
 JY997D33701 −
with product Installation Manual volume expansion board.
Supplied FX3U-8AV-BD Handling procedures of the 8-channel analog
 JY997D40901 −
with product User's Manual volume expansion board.
Battery (maintenance option)
Supplied
 FX3U-32BL Battery JY997D14101 Battery life and handling procedures. −
with product
Display module
Supplied FX3G-5DM Procedures for mounting and handling the display
 JY997D33801 −
with product Installation Manual module.
Supplied FX3U-7DM Procedures for mounting and handling the display
 JY997D17101 −
with product User's Manual module.
Display module holder
Supplied FX3U-7DM-HLD Procedures for mounting and handling the display
 JY997D15401 −
with product User's Manual module holder.
Memory cassette
Memory cassette
Supplied Specifications and operating procedures of the
 FX3G-EEPROM-32L JY997D32401 −
with product memory cassette.
Installation Manual
Supplied FX3U-FLROM-16/64/64L/1M Specifications and operating procedures of the
 JY997D12801 −
with product Hardware Manual memory cassette.
Extension power supply unit
Supplied FX3U-1PSU-5V Specifications and operating procedures of the
 JY997D22501 −
with product Installation Manual extension power supply unit.
Supplied FX3UC-1PS-5V Specifications and operating procedures of the
 JY997D12201 −
with product Installation Manual FX3UC-1PS-5V.
20
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals
Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals

Abbreviation/generic name Name
Programmable controllers
FX3S Series Generic name of FX3S Series PLCs
FX3S PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3S Series PLC main units
FX3G Series Generic name of FX3G Series PLCs
FX3G PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3G Series PLC main units
FX3GC Series Generic name of FX3GC Series PLCs
FX3GC PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3GC Series PLC main units
FX3U Series Generic name of FX3U Series PLCs
FX3U PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3U Series PLC main units
FX3UC Series Generic name of FX3UC Series PLCs
FX3UC PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3UC Series PLC main units
FX2N Series Generic name of FX2N Series PLCs
FX2NC Series Generic name of FX2NC Series PLCs
FX1S Series Generic name of FX1S Series PLCs
FX1N Series Generic name of FX1N Series PLCs
FX1NC Series Generic name of FX1NC Series PLCs
Expansion boards
Generic name of expansion boards (The models shown below):
FX3G-4EX-BD, FX3G-2EYT-BD, FX3G-232-BD, FX3G-422-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ,
Expansion board
FX3G-2AD-BD, FX3G-1DA-BD, FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-USB-BD, FX3U-8AV-BD and FX3U-CNV-BD
Special adapters
Generic name of special high-speed I/O adapters, special communication adapters, CF card special
analog adapters, and special analog adapters
Special adapter
Connectable equipment may vary depending on the main unit. For connectable equipment, refer to the
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Generic name of special high-speed I/O adapters (The models shown below):
Special high-speed I/O adapter
FX3U-2HSY-ADP and FX3U-4HSX-ADP
Generic name of special communication adapters (The models shown below):
Special communication adapter
FX3U-232ADP(-MB), FX3U-485ADP(-MB) and FX3U-ENET-ADP
CF card special adapter Generic name of CF card special adapters:
CF-ADP FX3U-CF-ADP
Generic name of special analog adapters (The models shown below):
Special analog adapter FX3U-4AD-ADP, FX3U-4DA-ADP, FX3U-3A-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP,
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP and FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
Generic name of special adapter connection conversion adapter (The models shown below):
Connector conversion adapter
FX3S-CNV-ADP and FX3G-CNV-ADP
Extension equipment
Generic name of I/O extension equipment and special extension equipment
Extension equipment Connectable equipment may vary depending on the main unit. For connectable equipment, refer to the
Generic name of FX2N Series I/O extension units, FX2N Series I/O extension blocks, FX2N Series I/O
extension blocks, and FX0N Series I/O extension blocks
I/O extension equipment
Special function unit/block or special Generic name of special extension units and special function blocks
extension equipment
Special extension unit Generic name of special extension units
Special function block Generic name of special function blocks
Open field networks CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
CC-Link equipment Generic name of CC-Link master station and CC-Link remote stations
Generic name of CC-Link master station (having following model name):
CC-Link master (station)
FX3U-16CCL-M, FX2N-16CCL-M
CC-Link remote station Generic name of remote I/O stations and remote device stations
Generic name of CC-Link interface block (having following model name):
CC-Link intelligent device station
FX3U-64CCL
21
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals
Abbreviation/generic name Name

Generic name of CC-Link/LT master station, CC-Link/LT remote I/O stations, CC-Link/LT remote device
CC-Link/LT equipment
stations, power supply adapters, and dedicated power supplies
CC-Link/LT master Generic name of built-in type CC-Link/LT master and (additional) CC-Link/LT master
Built-in type CC-Link/LT master Generic name of built-in type CC-Link/LT master built in FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
Generic name of CC-Link/LT master station (having following model name):
(Additional) CC-Link/LT master
FX2N-64CL-M
Power supply adapter Generic name of units connected to supply the power to the CC-Link/LT system
Dedicated power supply Generic name of power supplies connected to supply the power to the CC-Link/LT system
MELSEC I/O LINK
Generic name of MELSEC I/O LINK master station (having following model name):
MELSEC I/O LINK master
FX2N-16LNK-M
AnyWireASLINK
Generic name of AnyWireASLINK master block (having following model name):
AnyWireASLINK master
FX3U-128ASL-M
AS-i system
Generic name of AS-i system master station (having following model name):
AS-i master
FX2N-32ASI-M
Ethernet
Generic name of Ethernet communication special adapter (having following model name):
Ethernet adapter
FX3U-ENET-ADP
Options
Extension power supply unit FX3UC-1PS-5V (for FX3GC, FX3UC series), FX3U-1PSU-5V (for FX3G, FX3U series)
Memory cassette FX3G-EEPROM-32L, FX3U-FLROM-16, FX3U-FLROM-64, FX3U-FLROM-64L, and FX3U-FLROM-1M
Battery FX3U-32BL
Peripheral equipment
Peripheral equipment Generic name of programming software, handy programming panels, and display units
Programming tools
Programming tool Generic name of programming software and handy programming panels
Programming software Generic name of programming software
GX Works2 Abbreviation of programming software packages SWDNC-GXW2-J and SWDNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer Abbreviation of programming software packages SWD5C-GPPW-J and SWD5C-GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN(-E) Abbreviation of programming software packages FX-PCS/WIN and FX-PCS/WIN-E
Handy programming panel (HPP) Generic name of programming panels FX-30P, FX-20P(-E) and FX-10P(-E)
RS-232C/RS-422 converter FX-232AW, FX-232AWC, and FX-232AWC-H
RS-232C/RS-485 converter FX-485PC-IF-SET and FX-485PC-IF
USB/RS-422 converter FX-USB-AW
Display units
GOT1000 Series Generic name of GT16, GT15, GT14, GT11 and GT10
GOT-900 Series Generic name of GOT-A900 and GOT-F900 Series
GOT-A900 Series Generic name of GOT-A900 Series
GOT-F900 Series Generic name of GOT-F900 Series
ET-940 Series Generic name of ET-940 Series
Manuals
FX3S Hardware Edition FX3S Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition
FX3G Hardware Edition FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition
FX3GC Hardware Edition FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition
FX3U Hardware Edition FX3U Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition
FX3UC Hardware Edition FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition
Programming Manual FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition
Data Communication Edition FX Series User’s Manual - Data Communication Edition
MODBUS Communication Edition FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series User’s Manual - MODBUS Serial Communication Edition
Analog Control Edition FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition
Positioning Control Edition FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Positioning Edition
ENET-ADP Manual FX3U-ENET-ADP User’s Manual
CF-ADP Manual FX3U-CF-ADP User’s Manual
FX-30P Manual FX-30P Operation Manual
22
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 1 Introduction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs
Introduction
1. Introduction
This chapter explains basic items related to programming in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC programmable 2
controllers (PLCs).
Overview
1.1 Programming Language in PLCs
This section explains the features of programming in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
3
1.1.1 Types of programming languages
List
Instruction
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs support the following six types of programming languages:
1. List programming
1) Features
In this method, sequence instructions are input in the form of instruction words such as "LD", "AND" and "OUT".
4
in Detail
Devices
This input method is the basis of sequence programs.
2) Example of list display
Step Instruction Device number

0000 LD X000
0001 OR Y005 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
0002 ANI X002
0003 OUT Y005
…
2. Circuit programming
1) Features 6
In a circuit program, a sequence circuit is drawn on the graphic screen by sequence formats and device numbers.
Programming
Before
Because a sequence circuit is expressed with contact symbols and coil symbols, the contents of a program can
be understood easily.
In the circuit display status, the PLC operations can be monitored.
2) Example of circuit display
X000 X002 7
Y005
Instruction
Basic
Y005
The above list program is expressed in

the circuit diagram.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
3. SFC (STL <step ladder>) programming

1) Features
In an SFC (sequential function chart) program, sequences can be designed in accordance with the flow of
machine operations.
2) Compatibility between SFC programs and other programs
SFC programs can be converted into another program format. And when list programs and circuit programs are 9
created according to certain rules, they can be converted inversely into SFC programs.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
23
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 1 Introduction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs
4. ST (structured text)
1) Features
The ST language is a text language with a similar grammatical structure to the C language.
The ST language can describe control achieved by syntax using selective branches with conditional statements
and repetition by repetitive statements in the same way as high-level languages such as the C language.
By using the ST language, you can create simple programs that are easy to understand.
5. Structured ladder
1) Features
The structured ladder language is a graphic language developed based on the relay ladder programming
technique.
The structured ladder language is a graphic language for writing programs using ladder symbols such as contact,
coils, functions, and function blocks.
Since it can be understood intuitively, it is commonly used for the sequence programming.
A circuit always starts from the bus line located on the left side.
6. FBD (Function Block Diagram)

1) Features
The FBD (function block diagram) language is a graphic language for writing programs using parts for special
processing (functions and function blocks), variables and constants.
You can create programs easily by connecting parts along the flow of data and signals, and improve the
programming efficiency.
1.1.2 Applicability of programming languages in programming software

The table below shows the applicability of programming languages in GX Works2 and GX Developer:
Programming Language GX Works2 GX Developer
List programming – 
Circuit programming  
SFC programming  
ST  –
Structured ladder/FBD  –
1.1.3 Compatibility among programs

All sequence programs created by list programming, circuit programming or SFC programming are stored in the form
of instruction words (contents at the time of list programming) in the program memory inside the PLC.
• Programs created by these three types of input methods can be converted mutually, and then displayed and edited
as shown in the figure below.
List
Circuit SFC
It is not possible to display or edit sequence programs created using ST, structured ladder or FBD programming by
converting them from the form of instruction words (contents at the time of list programming).
For displaying and editing such sequence programs using ST, structured ladder or FBD programming, the symbolic
information (data indicating the program configuration such as structure and labels) is required.
→ Refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) for the details on symbolic information.
24
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions
Introduction
2. Overview (Sequence Program)
This chapter explains the basic functions of FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 2
This chapter includes not only the features of PLCs but also introduction of representative functions, parameters and
Overview
memory to utilize the functions of PLCs. Read this chapter before designing sequences.
2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions

FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs have the following instruction functions. 3
List
Instruction
2.1.1 Convenient functions for input processing
1. "High-speed counter" function of 1-phase or 2-phase for counting high-speed inputs*1

High-speed counters can count regardless of the scan time because they process high-speed pulses from specific
input relays as interrupts.
The counting result can be immediately handled as high-speed counter output interrupts by specific program
4
in Detail
Devices
processing and high-speed counter counted values by comparison instructions dedicated to high-speed counters.
• 1-phase high-speed counters
- FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs: up to 60 kHz
- FX3U/FX3UC PLCs: up to 100 kHz (200 kHz when a special high-speed input adapter*2 is used)
• 2-phase high-speed counters
- FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs: up to 30 kHz 5
- FX3U/FX3UC PLCs: up to 50 kHz (100 kHz when a special high-speed input adapter*2 is used)
Constant
Device &
Specified the
*1. This function is supported only for DC input type.
*2. Can only be connected to the FX3U PLC.
→ Related instructions: High-speed counter compare; HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54),
HSZ (FNC 55) and HSCT (FNC280)
If the number of high-speed counters is insufficient, FX3U-2HC can be connected. 6
FX3U-2HC*3,
Programming
Before
By extending hardware counters in the high-speed pulses at up to 200 kHz can be received (except 2
and 4 edge count).
*3. Can only be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
→ For details, refer to FX3U-2HC User's Manual.
2. "I/O refresh" function for receiving the latest input information
The input terminal information of the PLC in the batch refresh method is input all at once by the input image memory
7
Instruction
Basic
before step 0. The output information is output at one time when END instruction is executed.
I/O refresh instruction can get the latest input information and immediately output the operation result during sequence
operation.
→ Related instruction: Refresh REF (FNC 50)
3. "Input filter adjustment" function for changing the time constant of input relays*4
Input relays in the main unit are equipped with a C-R filter of approximately 10 ms as countermeasures against 8
*5
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
chattering and noise in input signals. Because a digital filter is adopted for the input relays X000 to X017 , however,
the filter value can be changed in sequence programs.
*5. X000 to X007 in the FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
→ Related instruction: Refresh and filter adjust instruction REFF (FNC 51)
9
4. "Pulse catch" function*6
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
The pulse catch function is provided as a method to receive short-time pulse signals.
The pulse catch function monitors signals from specific input relays, and sets special auxiliary relays in the interrupt
processing as soon as signals are input.
The pulse catch function can be used in a wide range of applications because even narrow pulses can be easily
received.
When complicated operations should be processed with high priority as interrupt by using specific trigger signals, the 10
"interrupt" function described later is suitable.
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

→ Refer to Section 36.7.
25
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions
5. Three types of "interrupt" functions for receiving short-period pulses and priority processing
→ Refer to Chapter 36.
*1
1) Input interrupt
Signals from specific input relays are monitored. At the rising edge or falling edge of the monitored input, a
specified interrupt routine is executed with highest priority.
2) Timer interrupt
Specified interrupt routines are executed with highest priority at every specified time.
3) Counter interrupt *1*2
Depending on the present value of a high-speed counter, a specified interrupt routine is executed with highest
priority.
*2. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
6. Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function*3

The pulse width or pulse period of pulses input from input terminals (X000, X001, X003 and X004) of the main unit can
be measured in units of 10μs.
The pulse width/pulse period measurement function is available in a wide range of applications because the pulse
width or pulse period can be easily taken in accordance with the setting of special auxiliary relays.
The input signal delay time can be measured using two or more input terminals.
*3. This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
2.1.2 Convenient functions for output processing
1. "I/O refresh" function for outputting the latest input information

The input terminal information of the PLC in the batch refresh method is input at one time by the input image memory
before operation in the step 0. The output information is output at one time when END instruction is executed.
I/O refresh instruction can get the latest input information and immediately output the operation result during sequence
operation.
→ Related instruction: Refresh REF (FNC 50)
2. "Pulse output" function for pulse train output control

→ Related instructions: Pulse Y Output PLSY (FNC 57) and
Acceleration/Deceleration Setup PLSR (FNC 59)
3. "Positioning" function for positioning control

→ Related instructions: DOG Search Zero Return DSZR (FNC150),
Interrupt Positioning DVIT (FNC151), ZRN (FNC156),
Variable Speed Pulse Output PLSV (FNC157),
Drive to Increment DRVI (FNC158) and
Drive to Absolute DRVA (FNC159)
2.1.3 Functions for supporting sequence control
1. "Constant scan" mode for making the operation cycle of the PLC constant
The operation cycle in the PLC adopting the cyclic operation method varies depending on the contents of the program
execution.
In the constant scan mode (M8039 and D8039), the operation cycle can be made constant. As a result, instructions
executed in synchronization with the operation can be processed in a constant cycle.
2. "All outputs disable" mode for turning OFF all output signals
When the special auxiliary relay M8034 is driven, the output latch memory is cleared. Accordingly, all output relays (Y)
turn OFF while the PLC is continuing its operation.
However, the status of output relays (Y) in each device image memory is not cleared. As a result, when devices are
monitored using a programming tool, they may be regarded as the ON status.
3. "Memory hold stop" function for holding the output status during the RUN mode even in the
STOP mode
When the special auxiliary relay M8033 is driven, the PLC stops and holds the output status during the RUN mode.
26
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions
1
4. Registration of "entry code" for protecting programs
Introduction
The entry code can be registered to prevent erroneous read/incorrect write protection of created sequence programs.
With regard to online operations from GX Works2, GX Developer (Ver. 8.24A or later) and handy programming panels,
the program protection level can be set by the entry code specification method. In this case, such specification that
"changes of a program are disabled, but monitoring and changes of present values are enabled" is available.
→ Refer to the manual of the used programming tool.
2
5. Addition of "comments" for a sequence program
Overview
By setting parameters, the device comment area (where Katakana, Kanji and alphanumeric characters are available)
can be secured in the program memory.
6. Writing programs in the RUN mode

Programs can be changed while the PLC is operating (RUN mode). 3
By this function, programs can be adjusted and changed efficiently without stopping the machine.
List
Instruction
7. Symbolic information storage

The FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 3.00 or later can store symbolic information (data indicating the program configuration
such as structure and labels).
By using this function, you can read the symbolic information from the PLC, and edit labels, function blocks, etc. 4
GX Works2 Ver. 1.62Q or later is required to store symbolic information.
in Detail
Devices
2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions
1. Excellent fundamental performance

5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs are equipped with not only fundamental applied functions for data transfer, data
comparison, arithmetic operations, logical operations, data rotation, and data shift but also high-speed processing
instructions for I/O refresh, interrupt, comparison dedicated to high-speed counters, and high-speed pulse output as
well as initial state instructions by which standard operations for machine control are made into packages in the SFC
control. In this way, FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs have the specifications offering fundamental functions, high-
speed processing, and good operability. 6
Programming
Before
2. Advanced control easily available
In addition, FX PLCs offer many handy instructions by which complicated sequence control is made into packages to
mitigate the load for creating sequence programs and save the number of I/O points.
FX PLCs also offer floating point arithmetic operations and PID operations to cope with more advanced control.
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
27
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions
2.2.1 Major applied instructions

This subsection introduces representative ones among many applied instructions.
1. Program flow 4. Rotation and shift operation

• Conditional jump (CJ/FNC 00) • Rotation right (ROR/FNC 30)
• Call subroutine (CALL/FNC 01) • Rotation left (ROL/FNC 31)
• Enable interrupt (EI/FNC 04) • Rotation right with carry (RCR/FNC 32)
• Disable interrupt (DI/FNC 05) • Rotation left with carry (RCL/FNC 33)
• Start a FOR/NEXT loop (FOR/FNC 08) • Bit shift right (SFTR/FNC 34)
→ Refer to Chapter 8. • Bit shift left (SFTL/FNC 35)
• Word shift right (WSFR/FNC 36)
2. Move and compare • Word shift left (WSFL/FNC 37)
• Compare (CMP/FNC 10) → Refer to Chapter 11.
• Data comparison (FNC224 to FNC246) 5. Data operation
• Floating point compare • Zone reset (ZRST/FNC 40)
(ECMP/FNC110 and EZCP/FNC111)
• Decode (DECO/FNC 41)
• Zone compare (ZCP/FNC 11)
• Encode (ENCO/FNC 42)
• High-speed counter compare (FNC 53 to FNC 55)
• Sum of active bits (SUM/FNC 43)
• High-speed counter compare with data table
• Mean (MEAN/FNC 45)
(HSCT/FNC280)
• Word to byte (WTOB/FNC141) and byte to word
• Move (MOV/FNC 12)
(BTOW/FNC142)
• Floating point move (EMOV/FNC112)
• 4-bit linking/grouping of word data
• High-speed counter move (HCMOV/FNC189) (FNC143 and FNC144)
• Conversion to binary-coded decimal • Limit control (LIMIT/FNC256)
(BCD/FNC 18)
• Dead band control (BAND/FNC257)
• Conversion to binary (BIN/FNC 19)
• Zone control (ZONE/FNC258)
• Decimal to gray code conversion (FNC170) and
• Block data operation (FNC192 to FNC199)
gray code to decimal conversion (FNC171)
→ Refer to Chapter 9, Chapter 13, Chapter 18, • Character string control (FNC200 to FNC209)
Chapter 22, Chapter 24, Chapter 28 and → Refer to Chapter 12, Chapter 19, Chapter 25,
Chapter 32. Chapter 26 and Chapter 29.
3. Arithmetic and logical operations 6. High-speed processing

• Addition (ADD/FNC 20) • Refresh (REF/FNC 50)
• Subtraction (SUB/FNC 21) • Refresh and filter adjust (REFF/FNC 51)
• Multiplication (MUL/FNC 22) • Speed detection (SPD/FNC 56)
• Division (DIV/FNC 23) • Pulse Y output (PLSY/FNC 57)
• Increment (INC/FNC 24) • Pulse ramp (PLSR/FNC 59)
• Square root (SQR/FNC 48)
• Trigonometry (FNC130 to FNC135)
• Conversion from/to floating point
(FNC 49, FNC118, FNC119 and FNC129)
• Floating point arithmetic operations
(FNC120 to FNC123)
• Floating point square root (ESQR/FNC127)
→ Refer to Chapter 10, Chapter 12 and
Chapter 18.
28
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.3 Analog/Positioning Special Control
1
7. Handy instructions and instructions for • Hour meter (HOUR/FNC 169)
Introduction
external devices • Timing pulse generation (DUTY/FNC186)
• Initial state (IST/FNC 60) • Logging R and ER (LOGR/FNC293)
• Teaching timer (TTMR/FNC 64) → Refer to Chapter 14, Chapter 15, Chapter 16,
Chapter 21, Chapter 24, Chapter 30,
• Alternate state (ALT/FNC 66)
• Ramp variable value (RAMP/FNC 67)
Chapter 31 and Chapter 33. 2
Overview
• Rotary table control (ROTC/FNC 68) 8. Complicated control
• Ten-key input (TKY/FNC 70) • Search a data stack (SER/FNC 61)
• Digital switch (thumbwheel input) (DSW/FNC 72) • Sort tabulated data (FNC 69 and FNC149)
• Seven-segment decoder (SEGD/FNC 73) • PID control loop (PID/FNC 88)
• Seven-segment with latch (SEGL/FNC 74)
→ Refer to Chapter 14, Chapter 16 and
Chapter 19.
3
• ASCII code data input (ASC/FNC 76)
List
Instruction
• BFM Read, BFM Write (FNC 78, FNC 79, 9. Positioning control
FNC278, and FNC279) • Dog search zero return (DSZR/FNC150)
• Serial communication (FNC 80 and FNC 87) • Interrupt positioning (DVIT/FNC151)
• Analog volume (FNC 85 and FNC 86) • Batch data positioning mode (TBL/FNC152)
• Inverter communication (FNC270 to FNC275) • Absolute present value read (ABS/FNC155)
4
in Detail
Devices
• MODBUS communication (ADPRW/FNC276) • Zero return (ZRN/FNC156)
• Hexadecimal to ASCII conversion (ASCI/FNC 82) • Variable speed pulse output (PLSV/FNC157)
• ASCII to hexadecimal conversion (HEX/FNC 83) • Drive to increment (DRVI/FNC158)
• Cyclic redundancy check (CRC/FNC188) • Drive to absolute (DRVA/FNC159)
• Random number generation (RND/FNC184) → Refer to Chapter 20.
→ Refer to the Positioning Control Manual.
5
• Real time clock control (FNC160 to FNC167)
Constant
Device &
Specified the
2.3 Analog/Positioning Special Control
For details, refer to the manual of each product.
6
1. Analog I/O control
Programming
Before
• Analog input
• Analog output
• Pt100 temperature sensor input
• Thermocouple temperature sensor input
• Block dedicated to temperature control
7
Instruction
Basic
2. Positioning control
• SSCNETΙΙΙ - Positioning Block.
• Pulse output block (controlled by sequence
program)
• Positioning unit (controlled by instructions 8
dedicated to positioning)
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
• Cam switch (resolver detection)
3. High-speed counter
• High-speed counter (hardware counter equipped
with multiplication function) 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.4 Link and Communication
2.4 Link and Communication

FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs support the following communication functions:
1. CC-Link 7. N : N Network
The CC-Link system can be constructed with an Up to eight FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs are
FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs working as the connected, and data is automatically transferred
master station. among them.
An A or QnA PLC can work as the master station, → Refer to the Data Communication Edition.
and FX PLCs can be connected as remote device
stations. 8. Parallel link
A Q PLC can work as the master station, and FX Two PLCs are connected, and data is automatically
PLCs can be connected to remote device stations or transferred between them.
intelligent device stations. → Refer to the Data Communication Edition.
The CC-Link is an open network allowing connection
of not only FX PLCs but also inverters, AC servo 9. Computer link
systems, and sensors. A computer such as personal computer works as the
→ Refer to the respective product manual. master station, up to sixteen FX and A PLCs are
connected to the master station, the master station
2. CC-Link/LT directly specifies devices in the PLC, and then data is
The CC-Link/LT system can be constructed with an transferred.
FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs working as the Protocols in the computer link support the formats 1
master station. and formats 4.
General X (input) and Y (output) devices are By using MX Component and MX Sheet, monitoring
assigned to remote I/O units, and operated by and logging for the PLC system can be easily set by
programs for general-purpose I/O. Excel.
→ Refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition for the → Refer to the Data Communication Edition.
built-in type CC-Link/LT master. → For MX Component and MX Sheet, refer to the
→ Refer to the product manual for the respective product manual.
FX2N-64CL-M.
10.Non-protocol communication
3. MELSEC I/O LINK Non-protocol serial communication is available
The MELSEC I/O LINK is a remote I/O system between an FX PLCs and interface equipment in
whose master station is an FX3U/FX3UC (D, DS, accordance with RS-232C/RS-485 such as bar code
DSS) PLCs. reader, printer, personal computer and measuring
Units for MELSEC I/O LINK remote I/O system (A instrument.
PLCs) can be used as remote units. → Refer to the Data Communication Edition.
→ Refer to the respective product manual.
11.Inverter communication
4. AnyWireASLINK An FX PLCs can control up to eight inverters via
Use FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC as a master to communication in accordance with RS-485.
construct AnyWireASLINK system. → Refer to the Data Communication Edition.
12.MODBUS communication
5. AS-i system MODBUS serial communication is available between
A network system at the actuator or sensor level can an FX PLCs and interface equipment in accordance
be constructed with an FX3U/FX3UC PLCs working as with RS-232C/RS-485.
the master station in the AS-i system. → Refer to the MODBUS Serial Communication
Refer to the respective product manual. Edition.
6. Ethernet communication
An FX PLC can be connected to the host system
such as personal computer or workstation via
Ethernet (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T) using TCP/IP,
UDP/IP or UDP communication protocol.
30
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC
1
2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC
Introduction
Many relays, timers, and counters are built into an FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, with many NO (normally
open) contacts and NC (normally closed) contacts.
These contacts and coils are connected to make a sequence circuit.
A PLC is also equipped with data registers (D) and extension data registers (R) functioning as memory devices to
store numeric data values.
2
Overview
2.5.1 Relationship among devices
Arrows show transfer of signals.
List
Instruction
Input terminal or
input connector
Input relay: X
Input relays function as receiving ports when the PLC receives signals from external
input switches.
The assigned device mnemonic is "X".
4
in Detail
Devices
The PLC has built-in input relays in accordance with its size.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
1234
Programming
Before
Counter: C
Auxiliary relay: M Output relay: Y
There are many
There are many counters inside the Output relays
auxiliary relays PLC. function as ports
inside the PLC. when the PLC
The assigned drives external
The assigned device mnemonic
device mnemonic
is "M". Timer: T
is "C".
loads.
There are many 7
output relays inside
Instruction
Basic
There are many
timers inside the the PLC.
State relay: S The assigned
PLC.
There are many device mnemonic
state relays inside The assigned
device mnemonic is "Y".
the PLC.
is "T".
8
The assigned
device mnemonic
is "S".
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Contact for external output from output relay

(one normally open contact)
Output terminal
The PLC has built-in output contacts in accordance with its
or output
connector
size. 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
31
2.5.2 Device list
1. Input relays (X) and output relays (Y) 5. Counters (C)

→ Refer to Section 4.2. The following types of counters are provided, and
• Input relay and output relay numbers are can be used in accordance with the purpose or
assigned to each main unit in octal "X000 to X007, application.
X010 to X017 …, Y000 to Y007, Y010 to Y017 …" 1) For latched (battery or EEPROM backed)
The input relay (X) numbers and output relay (Y) counters
numbers in extension units and extension blocks → Refer to Section 4.6.
are also sequential numbers in octal respectively Counters are provided for internal signals of the
in the order of connection to the main unit. PLC, and their response speed is usually tens of
• A digital filter is applied to the input filter of specific Hz or less.
input relays, and the filter value can be changed - 16-bit counter: Provided for up-counting,
by a program. Accordingly, for a purpose requiring counting range: 1 to 32767
high-speed receiving, assign such input relay - 32-bit counter: Provided for up-counting
numbers. and down-counting, counting range:
(Refer to explanation of filter adjustment, input −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
interrupt, high-speed counter, various applied
instructions, etc.) 2) For latched (battery or EEPROM backed) high-
speed counters
2. Auxiliary relays (M) → Refer to Section 4.7 or 4.8.
→ Refer to Section 4.3. High-speed counters can execute counting at
several kHz regardless of operations in the PLC.
• Relays built into the PLC are auxiliary relays, and
are used for programs. Different from I/O relays, - 32-bit counter: Provided for up-counting
auxiliary relays cannot receive external inputs or and down-counting, counting range:
directly drive external loads. −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 (1-
• There are latched (battery or EEPROM backed) phase 1-counting, 1-phase 2-counting and
type relays whose ON/OFF status is stored even if 2-phase 2-counting), assigned to specific
the PLC turns OFF. input relays
3. State relays (S) 6. Data registers (D)

→ Refer to Section 4.4. → Refer to Section 4.9.
Data registers store numeric data values.
• State relays are used in the step ladder or as
All data registers in FX PLCs are 16-bit type (whose
process numbers in the SFC expression.
most significant bit is positive or negative). When two
• When a state relay is not used as a process consecutive registers are combined, they can handle
number, it can be programmed as a general 32-bit numeric value (whose most significant bit is
contact/coil in the same way as an auxiliary relay. positive or negative).
• State relays can be used as annunciators for (For the numeric value range, refer to "Counter" on
external fault diagnosis. the previous page.)
In the same way as other devices, data registers are
4. Timers (T) classified into general type and latched type (battery
→ Refer to Section 4.5. or EEPROM backed).
• A timer adds and counts clock pulses of 1, 10 or
100 ms, and turns its output contact ON or OFF 7. Extension registers (R) and extension file
when the counted result reaches a specified set registers (ER)
value. → Refer to Section 4.10.
A timer can count from 0.001 to 3276.7 seconds Extension registers (R) are the extended form of data
depending on the clock pulse. registers (D). They are protected by the battery
against power failure in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
• In the FX3S PLC, 100 ms timers T32 to T62 are
In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, general type devices can be
changed to 10 ms timers when the special
protected against power failure when the optional
auxiliary relay M8028 is driven in the program.
battery is connected.
• The timers T192 to T199 are dedicated to In FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, the contents of
subroutines and interrupt routines. extension registers (R) can be stored in extension file
The timers T250 to T255 (T132 to T137 in FX3S registers (ER).
PLC) are retentive type base clock timers for 100 In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, extension file registers (ER)
ms pulses. This means that the present value is can only be used while a memory cassette is
retained even after the timer coil drive input turns mounted.
OFF. And when the drive input turns ON again, a
retentive type timer will continue its counting from
where it left off.
32
1
8. Index registers (V)(Z)
Introduction
Among registers, there are index type registers V
and Z used for modification.
A data register V or Z is added to another device as
follows:
[In the case of "V0, Z0 = 5"] 2
D100V0 = D105, C20Z0 = C25 ← Device number +
Overview
V or Z value
Data registers and index registers are used for
indirectly specifying the set value of timers and
counters, or used in applied instructions.
9. Pointers (P)(I) 3
List
Instruction
Pointers are classified into branch pointers and
interrupt pointers.
• A branch pointer (P) specifies the jump
destination of the conditional jump CJ (FNC 00) or
the call subroutine CALL (FNC 01) instruction.
4
• An interrupt pointer (I) specifies the routine of an
in Detail
Devices
input interrupt, timer interrupt or counter interrupt.
10.Constants (K)(H)(E)
Constant numerical values used in the PLC, "K"
indicates a decimal integer value, "H" indicates a
hexadecimal value, and "E" indicates a real number
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
(floating point data).
Constants are used as set values or present values
of timers and counters, or operands for applied
instructions.
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
33
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices
2.6 Program Memory and Devices
2.6.1 Memory structure
1. In FX3S PLC
FX3S PLC are equipped with the EEPROM memory as standard.
1) When using the built-in memory (without attached memory cassette)
CPU System ROM
Built-in device memory (RAM, EEPROM)

[Bit device memory] [Data memory]
Contact image memory · Data register (D)
· Input relay (X) · Output relay (Y) · Timer present value register (T)
· Auxiliary relay (M) · State relay (S) · Counter present value register (C)
Timer contact, time counting coil, and reset coil (T) · Index register (V, Z)
Counter contact, counting coil, and reset coil (C)
Built-in program memory

Memory cassette
(EEPROM) (EEPROM)
Parameter
Sequence program
Comment Not attached
File register (D)
2) When using an attached memory cassette (without using the built-in program memory)
CPU System ROM

Built-in program memory Memory cassette

(EEPROM) (EEPROM)
Parameter
Sequence program
Not used Comment
The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of a File register (D)

memory cassette (when the power is turned ON),
and disconnects the built-on program memory.
(The priority is given to the memory cassette.)
34
1
2. In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Introduction
FX3G/FX3GC PLCs are equipped with the EEPROM memory as standard.
CPU System ROM

2
Overview
· Auxiliary relay (M) · State relay (S) · Counter present value register (C) 3
List
Instruction
· Extension register (R)

Memory cassette
(EEPROM)
4
Transfer and initialization by
(EEPROM)
Parameter
in Detail
Devices
Sequence program instructions
Comment Not attached

File register (D)
Special setting
5
Extension file register (ER)
Constant
Device &
Specified the
2) When using an attached memory cassette*1 (without using the built-in program memory)
CPU System ROM 6
Programming
Before
· Input relay (X) · Output relay (Y) · Timer present value register (T) 7
Instruction
Basic
Counter contact, counting coil, and reset coil (C) · Extension register (R)
Built-in program memory Memory cassette

(EEPROM)
8
(EEPROM)
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
instructions
Parameter
Sequence program
Not used Comment
The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of a File register (D)

9
memory cassette (when the power is turned ON), Special setting
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

(The priority is given to the memory cassette.) Extension file register (ER)
*1. A memory cassette can be connected only to FX3G PLC.

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
35
3. In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
FX3U/FX3UC PLCs are equipped with the RAM memory as standard.
By mounting a memory cassette, the memory type can be changed.
CPU System ROM
Built-in device memory (RAM)

· Extension register (R)
Memory cassette
(Flash memory)
(RAM)
Parameter
Sequence program
Not attached
Comment
File register (D)
Special setting
Symbolic information*1
2) When using an attached memory cassette (does not use the built-in program memory)
CPU System ROM
Built-in device memory (RAM)

Counter contact, counting coil, and reset coil (C) · Extension register (R)
Memory cassette
(Flash memory)
instructions
(RAM) Parameter
Sequence program
Comment
Not used File register (D)
The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of a Special setting

memory cassette (when the power is turned ON), Symbolic information*1
(Priority is given to the memory cassette.) Extension file register (ER)
*1. Supported in Ver. 3.00 or later.
36
1
2.6.2 Memory operations and latched (battery or EEPROM backed) devices
Introduction
(power ON/OFF and RUN/STOP)
1. Backup operation
The operations of the data memory, bit device memory and program memory in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
are classified as shown below: 2
1) Types of program memory
Overview
Power
Item Power OFF STOP→RUN RUN→STOP
OFF→ON
Parameter Does not change.*2
Sequence program Does not change.*2
Comment Does not change.*2
3
List
Instruction
Can be secured by
File register
parameter setting. Does not change.*2
Special setting Does not change.*2
Symbolic information*1 Does not change.*2
*1. Symbolic information is supported in the FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 3.00 or later. 4
*2. The contents of the program memory and device values are not backed up correctly in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
in Detail
Devices
when the battery voltage becomes lower than the holding voltage if a memory cassette is not attached.
2) Types of word device memory
a) FX3S PLC
Power
OFF→ON
Does not change. Cleared.
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
General type Cleared.
Does not change while M8033 is ON.
Latched (EEPROM
Does not change.
Data register (D) backed) type
File type Does not change.
Special type Cleared.

Set to initial
values.*3
Does not change.*3 6
Programming
Before
Index register (V, Z) V, Z Cleared. Does not change.
For 100 ms Cleared.
For 10 ms Cleared.
Timer present value

7
For 1 ms Cleared.
Instruction
Basic
register (T)
Retentive type for 100 ms
Does not change.
(EEPROM backed)
Does not change.
(EEPROM backed)
Does not change. Cleared. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Counter present value Latched (EEPROM
register (C) Does not change.
backed) type
High-speed type
Does not change.
(EEPROM backed)
Clock data Present value Does not change.*4 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
*3. Some devices are cleared when the PLC status switches from STOP to RUN.
→ For special data registers, refer to Chapter 37.
*4. The clock data is held by the electricity charged in the large-capacity capacitor built in the PLC.
When the voltage of the large-capacity capacitor becomes low, the clock data is not held correctly.
The capacitor can hold the clock data for 10 days (when the ambient temperature is 25°C) in the full charge state
(achieved by powering ON the PLC for 30 minutes or more).
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
37
b) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Power
OFF→ON
General type Cleared.*1
Latched (EEPROM
Does not change.
Data register (D) backed) type
Set to initial
Special type Cleared. Does not change.*2
values.*2
Extension register (R) General type Cleared.*1 Does not change.
Extension file register
(ER)
For 100 ms Cleared.
For 10 ms Cleared.
Timer present value Does not change. Cleared.
register (T) For 1 ms Cleared.
Does not change.
(EEPROM backed)
Does not change.
(EEPROM backed)
Counter present value Latched (EEPROM
register (C) Does not change.
backed) type
High-speed type
Does not change.
(EEPROM backed)
Clock data Present value Does not change.*3
*1. These registers can be changed from the general type to the latched (battery backed) type by the parameter
setting when the optional battery is installed.
*3. The clock data is held by the electricity charged in the large-capacity capacitor built in the PLC.
When the voltage of the large-capacity capacitor becomes low, the clock data is not held correctly.
The capacitor can hold the clock data for 10 days (when the ambient temperature is 25°C) in the full charge state
(achieved by powering ON the PLC for 30 minutes or more).
The clock data is backed up by the battery when the optional battery is installed and the battery mode is selected
in the parameter setting.
38
1
c) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Introduction
Power
OFF→ON
Latched (battery
backed) type
Does not change.*1
2
Data register (D)
Overview
File type Does not change.*2
Set to initial
Special type Cleared. Does not change.*3
values.*3
Latched (battery
Extension register (R) Does not change.*1

backed) type
3
List
Instruction
(ER)*4
For 100 ms Cleared.
Timer present value

For 10 ms Cleared.
4
in Detail
Devices
register (T)
Does not change.*1
(battery backed)
(battery backed) Does not change.*1

Does not change while M8033 is ON. 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Counter present value Latched (battery
register (C) Does not change.*1
backed) type
High-speed type
(battery backed) Does not change.*1
Clock data Present value Does not change.*1
*1. Device values are not backed up correctly when the battery voltage becomes lower than the holding voltage. 6
Programming
Before
*2. The contents of the program memory and device values are not backed up correctly when the battery voltage
becomes lower than the holding voltage if a memory cassette is not attached.
*4. An optional memory cassette is required.
Caution
7
Instruction
Basic
Programs (when a memory cassette is not attached), latched (battery backed) type device values and clock data is not
backed up correctly when the battery voltage becomes low due to expiration of the battery life or another reason.
In such a case, clear latched (battery backed) type devices, transfer programs again (when a memory cassette is not
attached), and then set initial values and clock data if necessary.
→ For a rough guide to the life and replacement of the battery, refer to the PLC User’s Manual
[Hardware Edition]. 8
→ For the latched type device initialization method, refer to Subsection 2.6.5.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
39
3) Types of bit device memory

a) FX3S PLC
Power
OFF→ON
Does not
Cleared.
change.
Input relay (X) Cleared.
Does not change while M8033 is
ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
Output relay (Y) Cleared.
ON.
Contact image Does not

Cleared.
memory change.
General type auxiliary relay (M) Cleared.
(X, Y, M, S) Does not change while M8033 is
ON.
Latched (EEPROM backed) type
Does not change.
auxiliary relay (M)
Set to initial
Special type auxiliary relay (M) Cleared. Does not change.*1
values.*1
General type state relay (S) Cleared. Does not change.
Does not change.
state relay (S)
Does not
Cleared.
change.
For 100 ms Cleared.
ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
For 10 ms Cleared.
Timer contact Does not change while M8033 is
Time counting coil ON.
Reset coil (T)
Does not
Cleared.
change.
For 1 ms Cleared.
ON.
Retentive type for 100 ms Does not change.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
Counter contact Does not change while M8033 is
Counting coil ON.
Reset coil (C)
Latched (EEPROM backed) type Does not change.
High-speed type Does not change.
40
1
b) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Introduction
Power
OFF→ON
Does not
Cleared.
change.
2
ON.
Overview
Does not
Cleared.
change.
ON.
Does not
change.
Cleared. 3
Contact image
Cleared.*1
List
Instruction
General type auxiliary relay (M)
memory Does not change while M8033 is
(X, Y, M, S) ON.
Does not change.
auxiliary relay (M)
Special type auxiliary relay (M) Cleared.

Set to initial
values.*2
Does not change.*2 4
in Detail
Devices
General type state relay (S) Cleared.*1 Does not change.
Does not change.
state relay (S)
Annunciator (S) Does not change.
Does not
change.
Cleared. 5
For 100 ms Cleared.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
For 10 ms Cleared.
Timer contact Does not change while M8033 is
Time counting coil
Reset coil (T)
ON. 6
Does not
Programming
Before
Cleared.
change.
For 1 ms Cleared.
ON.
Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change. 7
Does not
Instruction
Basic
Cleared.
change.
Counting coil ON.
Reset coil (C)
Latched (EEPROM backed) type Does not change.
8
*1. These registers can be changed from the general type to the latched (battery backed) type by the parameter
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
setting when the optional battery is installed.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
41
c) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Power
OFF→ON
Does not
Cleared.
change.
ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
General type auxiliary relay (M) Cleared.
Contact image Does not change while M8033 is
memory ON.
(X, Y, M, S) Latched (battery backed) type
Does not change.
auxiliary relay (M)
Set to initial
Special type auxiliary relay (M) Cleared. Does not change.*1
values.*1
Does not
Cleared.
change.
General type state relay (S) Cleared.
ON.
Latched (battery backed) type
Does not change.
state relay (S)
Annunciator (S) Does not change.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
For 100 ms Cleared.
ON.
Timer contact Does not
Time counting coil Cleared.
change.
Reset coil (T) For 10 ms Cleared.
ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
Counting coil ON.
Reset coil (C)
Latched (battery backed) type Does not change.
→ For special auxiliary relay names and definitions, refer to Chapter 37.
42
1
2.6.3 Types of backup methods against power failure
Introduction
There are the following types of latch (battery backup) for the program memory and built-in PLC devices.
1. Battery backup method

a) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
2
Item Description
Overview
Latched contents The optional battery backs up the RAM memory built in the PLC and clock data.
The battery life is around 5 years, (when the ambient temperature is 25°C).
Maintenance
For replacement information, refer to the Users Manual [Hardware Edition] of each PLC.
Cautions When the optional battery voltage becomes low, the RAM memory built in the PLC and clock data is lost.
b) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs 3
List
Instruction
Item Description
Latched contents The battery backs up the RAM memory built in the PLC, latched (battery backed) type devices and clock data.
The battery life is around 5 years, (when the ambient temperature is 25°C).
Maintenance
For replacement information, refer to the Users Manual [Hardware Edition] of each PLC.
1) When the battery voltage becomes low, sequence programs and other latched (battery backed) contents are 4
lost.
in Detail
Devices
Cautions
2) When an optional memory cassette (flash memory) is mounted, it is not necessary to back up sequence
programs by the battery.
2. Memory cassette backup method

a) FX3S/FX3G PLCs 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Item Description
Latched contents The EEPROM memory built in the memory cassette backs up sequence programs.
Maintenance Maintenance is not necessary.
The upper limit is set to the number of times for overwriting.
Cautions
(Refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.) 6
b) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Programming
Before
Item Description
1) The flash memory built into the memory cassette backs up sequence programs.
Latched contents
2) A battery is required to back up latched (battery backed) devices and clock data from failure.
Maintenance Maintenance is not necessary. 7
Instruction
Basic
Cautions
(Refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.)
3. EEPROM memory (built in PLC) backup method

a) FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
8
Item Description
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
The EEPROM memory built in the PLC backs up latched (EEPROM backed) type devices and sequence
Latched contents
programs.
Maintenance Maintenance is not necessary.
Cautions
(Refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.) 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
43
2.6.4 Change between general devices and latched (battery backed) devices
1. When using latched (battery backed) type devices as non-latch type devices
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, some latched (battery backed) type devices can be changed into non-latch type devices by the
parameter settings.
Devices dedicated to latched type cannot be changed into non-latch type devices even by the parameter settings.
Such devices can be handled as non-latch type devices by clearing all latched (battery backed) type devices by the
initial pulse (M8002) in a program.
2. When using non-latch type devices as latched (battery backed) type devices
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, non-latch type devices can be changed into latched (battery backed) type devices by the
parameter settings.
In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, non-latched type devices can be changed to latched (battery backed) type devices when the
optional battery is installed and the battery mode is selected in the parameter setting.
2.6.5 How to initialize devices (battery backed)

Latched type devices can be initialized by clearing the entire PLC memory using peripheral equipment, clearing all
latched memory using the special auxiliary relay M8032, or executing the ZRST instruction.
This subsection describes two major methods.
1. M8032 (latch memory all clear)

When M8032 is turned ON, all latched type devices*1 (including reset coils of timers and counters) are cleared.
M8032 can be turned ON and OFF using the forced ON/OFF operation from peripheral equipment or within the
sequence program. Note that latched type devices cannot be turned ON while M8032 is ON.
When turning ON M8032 within the sequence program, note that latched type devices are cleared during END
processing after M8032 is turned ON.
Program example: This program clears all latched type devices.
M8002
M8032
Initial pulse
→ For details, refer to Subsection 37.2.12.
*1. Includes general type devices in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs whose type is changed to the latched (battery backed)
type when the optional battery is installed.
2. ZRST (FNC 40) instruction (zone reset)

The ZRST instruction can clear multiple devices all at once.
(Because only a limited device range can be specified for the ZRST instruction, only a part of the latched type devices
can be cleared at a time.)
Program example: This program clears latched (battery backed) type devices in the ranges shown in the table below
in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
Clear input FNC 40 M500 M7679 Latched (battery backed) type device range
ZRST
Auxiliary relay M500~M7679
FNC 40 S500 S4095 State S500~S4095
ZRST
Timer T246~T255
FNC 40 T246 T255 C100~C199,
Counter
ZRST C220~C255
Data register D200~D7999
FNC 40 C100 C199
ZRST
FNC 40 C220 C255

ZRST
FNC 40 D200 D7999

ZRST
→ For details on the ZRST (FNC 40) instruction, refer to Section 12.1.
→ For details on latched type devices, refer to Subsection 2.6.2 and Chapter 4.
44
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters
1
2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters
Introduction
Setting of parameters means setting the environment where the PLC operates.
Almost all FX PLC can be used with factory default values.
However, when it is necessary to attach a memory cassette, set the comment capacity, set the communication
condition for serial ports, etc., the parameter settings must be changed using a programming tool such as personal
computer.
2
Overview
Some items cannot be set depending on the used PLC or programming tool. Refer to the manual of the used PLC and
programming tool for details.
2.7.1 Parameter list

The following items may be set in the parameter settings. 3
List
Instruction
Classification Item Description
This parameter specifies the maximum value for the number of steps to which a sequence
program can be input.
Memory
1) The upper limit is determined by the capacity of the built-in memory or optional memory.
capacity
2) The program memory, file register, comment area, and other special setting capacities are
contained in this memory capacity. 4
This parameter incorporates comments into the program memory.
in Detail
Devices
1) Because comments remain in the PLC, the contents can be easily understood at the time of
Comment area maintenance.
2) Up to 50 comments can be input when one block is specified, but the comment area requires
500 steps in the memory capacity.
This parameter incorporates data registers into the program memory.
Memory capacity
File register
1) A sequence program and control data such as machining set values can be handled
together, which is convenient.
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
2) Up to 500 file registers can be created when one block is specified, but the file registers
require 500 steps in the memory capacity.
1) This parameter sets whether or not the special unit/block initial value setting function is used.
When this function is used, this function requires 4000 steps (8 blocks) in the memory
capacity.
Other special
setting
capacity
2) This parameter sets whether or not the positioning setting (constants and setting table) in
TBL (FNC152) instruction is used. When this setting is used, this setting requires 9000 steps 6
(18 blocks) in the memory capacity.
Programming
Before
3) This parameter sets whether or not the built-in CC-Link/LT function is used.
When this function is used, this function requires 500 steps (1 block) in the memory capacity.
Latch range This parameter enables to change the latched (battery backed) device range and the non-latch
Device setting
setting device range inside the PLC.
I/O assignment
setting
I/O assignment
setting
This setting is not written to the PLC.
When the I/O range is set according to the system configuration, however, inputs and outputs are 7
checked by the program check in GX Developer.
Instruction
Basic
This parameter sets the initial values of the buffer memory (BFM) for each special unit/block
Special unit
number.
setting
Special unit It is necessary to set the memory capacity.
setting Built-in
This parameter sets the transmission speed, point mode and station information. The memory
CC-Link/LT
Setup
capacity setting is required to set the station information. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
This parameter sets the PLC operation mode without a battery.

Batteryless When the baterryless mode is set, detection of battery voltage low level error is stopped
mode automatically, and consequently, contents of latched devices becomes inconsistent and are
initialized automatically.
This parameter sets the PLC operation mode with a battery.
PLC system
Battery mode When the check box "Use Battery" is checked, general type devices are changed to latched
(battery backed) type devices. 9
setting
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Modem This parameter automatically sends a specified AT command as an initialization command to a

initialization modem connected to the serial port.
RUN terminal
This parameter sets whether one input terminal in the PLC is used for RUN input.
input setting
RUN terminal This parameter specifies the input number of the RUN input described above.
input number X000 to X017 (Up to the built-in input number of main unit)
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
45
Classification Item Description

This parameter sets the communication setting of the serial port.
Serial port
PLC system Setting of communication format (D8120, D8400 and D8420)
operation
setting Setting of station number (D8121 and D8421)
setting
Setting of timeout check (D8129, D8409 and D8429)
This parameter sets interrupt inputs for the maximum speed, bias speed, creep speed, zero
Constant
Positioning return speed, acceleration time, deceleration time, and the DVIT instruction.
setting
instruction It is necessary to set the memory capacity.
setting This parameter sets the operation table.
Detailed setting
It is necessary to set the memory capacity.
Ethernet port
Special setting Special parameters are used in special adapters, special function blocks, etc.
parameters Network They are stored in the main unit.
parameter
This parameter sets protection to prevent erroneous read/incorrect write protection of a sequence
program. The entry code (8 characters), 2nd entry code (8 characters) and the customer keyword
Keyword
Others (16 characters) can each be specified in characters in the ranges of A to F and 0 to 9.
In addition, a permanent PLC lock can be specified.
Program title This parameter enables a character string to be set as the program title.
2.7.2 Parameter initial values and available tools for changing parameter values
1) FX3S PLC
GX Works2 Setting Programming tool Display unit

Item
Initial value range FX-30P GOT1000*1
16000 4000 16000
Program capacity
4000 4000 4000
(steps)
Memory Refer to
Comment capacity Subsection 2.7.3.
capacity 24 0 –
(blocks)
File register capacity
0 0 0
(blocks)
Program title Not registered – –
Entry code Not registered Not registered –
Refer to
Modem initialization Not set NONE –
Subsection 2.7.1.
RUN terminal input OFF INVALID OFF
Serial port operation setting Not set No –
*1. Parameter values can not be changed by the GT1020 and GT1030.
46
1
2) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Introduction
Programming tool Display unit
FX-10P
GX Works2 GX Developer Setting GOT GOT-F900
Item (-E)*2 FX-PCS/
Initial value Initial value*1 range FX-30P 1000
FX-20P
(-E)*2
WIN(-E)*2 *3
Series*2*4
2
Overview
Program capacity
8000 8000 8000 2000 8000 8000 8000
(steps)
Comment capacity
0 0 Refer to 0 0 0 – –
Memory (blocks)
Subsection
capacity File register capacity
(blocks)
0 0 2.7.3. 0 0 0 0 0
3
Positioning
List
Instruction
Not used Not used – – – – –
instruction setting
Not Not Not
Program title – – – –
registered registered registered
Not Not Not Not Not
Entry code – –
Battery mode
registered
OFF
registered
OFF
Refer to
Subsection
No – OFF – –
4
in Detail
Devices
Modem initialization Not set Not set 2.7.1. NONE – Not set – –
Not used
RUN terminal input OFF OFF INVALID Not used OFF –
(X0)
Serial port operation setting Not set Not set No – Not set – –
*1. In the case of FX3GC PLC, select "FX3G" as the PLC type. 5
*2. These programming tools are not applicable to FX3G/FX3GC PLCs. The initial values in FX1N PLC are shown
Constant
Device &
Specified the
above.
*4. Parameter values can be changed only by the F940WGOT, F94GOT and F94 handy GOT.
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
47
3) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Programming tool Display unit

GX FX-10P
GX Works2 Setting FX-PCS/ GOT
Item Developer (-E)*2 GOT-F900
Initial value range FX-30P WIN(-E) 1000
Initial value FX-20P Series*4
*2 *3
(-E)*2
Program capacity
16000 16000*1 8000 2000 8000 16000 8000
(steps)
Comment capacity
0 0 0 0 0 – –
(blocks)
File register capacity
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(blocks) Refer to
Memory
Subsection
capacity Special unit initial
Not used Not used 2.7.3 – – – – –
value setting*5
Positioning instruction
setting*5
Built-in CC-Link/LT
Setup*6
Auxiliary relay [M] 500 to 1023 500 to 1023 0 to 1023 500 to 1023
Latch State relay [S] 500 to 999 500 to 999 0 to 999 500 to 999
range
Counter [C] (16 bits) 100 to 199 100 to 199 0 to 199 100 to 199
(battery
backed) Counter [C] (32 bits) 220 to 255 220 to 255 200 to 255 220 to 255
Data register [D] 200 to 511 200 to 511 0 to 511 200 to 511
Not Not Not
Program title – – – –
Not Not Not Not Not
Entry code – –
registered registered registered registered registered
Refer to
Batteryless mode OFF OFF Subsection No – OFF – –
Modem initialization Not set Not set 2.7.1. NONE – Not set – –
Not used
RUN terminal input OFF OFF INVALID Not used OFF –
(X0)
Serial port operation setting Not set Not set No – Not set – –
*1. The initial value is 8000 steps in GX Developer Ver. 8.18U to Ver. 8.22Y.
*2. These programming tools are not applicable to FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. The initial values in FX2N PLC are shown
above.
*4. Parameter values can be changed only by the F940WGOT, F94GOT and F94 handy GOT.
*5. GX Developer Ver. 8.24A or later is applicable.
*6. This item is supported only in the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2, and can be set using GX Developer Ver. 8.68W or later.
48
1
2.7.3 Memory capacity setting range
Introduction
Cautions on setting the memory capacity
• After changing the memory capacity setting, make sure to write both the programs and parameters to the PLC.
If only the parameters are written to the PLC, program errors (such as parameter error, circuit error and grammar
error) may occur in the PLC. 2
Overview
• When one block is set in each capacity setting, the memory capacity is reduced by 500 steps.
Each setting should satisfy the following expression:
Memory capacity 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
> Comment + File register + Special unit initial + Positioning + Built-in CC-Link/LT
setting range capacity setting capacity setting value setting instruction setting Setup
3
1) With regard to the comment capacity, up to 50 device comments can be set in one block.
List
Instruction
2) With regard to the file register capacity, up to 500 (16-bit) file registers can be set in one block.
3) In the special unit initial value setting, 8 blocks (4000 steps) are used.
4) In the positioning instruction setting, 18 blocks (9000 steps) are used.
5) In the built-in CC-Link/LT setup, 1 block (500 steps) are used.
1. FX3S PLC 4
 Built-in memory capacity  Can be set by changing parameter
in Detail
Devices
Memory capacity
Comment capacity setting File register capacity setting
setting
Unit: Block Unit: Block
Unit: Step
2000  0 to 3 0 to 3
4000
16000


0 to 7
20 to 24
0 to 4
0 to 4
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Caution
When the memory capacity of the FX3S is 16,000 steps, the program capacity is fixed to 4,000 steps, and the total of
the comment capacity and the file register capacity is limited to 12,000 steps (24 blocks).
The comment capacity is automatically set when the file register capacity is set.
6
Programming
Before
2. FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Memory capacity
Comment capacity setting File register capacity setting Built-in positioning setting
setting
Unit: Block Unit: Block Unit: Block
Unit: Step
2000
4000


0 to 3
0 to 7
0 to 3
0 to 7
–
–
7
Instruction
Basic
8000  0 to 15 0 to 14 –
16000  0 to 31 0 to 14 18
32000  0 to 63 0 to 14 18
Caution
FX3G/FX3GC PLCs operate in the extension mode when the program capacity is 16,001 steps or more, and operate in 8
the standard mode when the program capacity is 16,000 steps or less. The instruction execution time is longer in the
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
extension mode than in the standard mode.
Example: Time required to execute the basic instruction "LD"

Standard mode: 0.21 μs Extension mode: 0.42 μs
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
49
3. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Memory capacity Comment capacity File register Special unit initial Built-in Built-in
setting setting capacity setting value setting positioning setting CC-Link/LT Setup
Unit: Step Unit: Block Unit: Block Unit: Block Unit: Block Unit: Block
2000  0 to 3 0 to 3 – – 1
4000  0 to 7 0 to 7 – – 1
8000  0 to 15 0 to 14 8 – 1
16000  0 to 31 0 to 14 8 18 1
32000  0 to 63 0 to 14 8 18 1
64000  0 to 127 0 to 14 8 18 1
Caution
• The FX3U/FX3UC PLCs can store symbolic information in the following capacity:
- The FX3U-FLROM-1M (memory cassette) has an area dedicated to the storage of symbolic information, and can
store up to 1300 kB.
- When storing the symbolic information in any memory cassette other than the FX3U-FLROM-1M or to the built-in
memory, make sure that amount of the symbolic information to be stored does not exceed the available memory
capacity.
It is recommended to use the FX3U-FLROM-1M when there is a large amount of symbolic information to be
stored.
Symbolic information capacity = Maximum capacity of memory cassette - Memory capacity set by parameters
It is possible to check the symbolic information capacity using the memory capacity calculation (offline) of GX Works2.
→ Refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) for details.
• When symbolic information is stored, it is deleted if the memory capacity set by parameters is changed.
After changing the memory capacity, write the symbolic information again.
2.7.4 Compatible optional memory model
1. FX3S/FX3G PLCs
Maximum number of Allowable number of

Model name Memory type Remarks
steps times of writing
EEPROM Write-protect switch and loader
FX3G-EEPROM-32L 32000*1 10000 times
memory function are provided.
*1. The FX3S Series PLC can hold 16,000 steps of memory, but user program capacity is limited to 4,000 steps.
2. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Maximum number of Allowable number of

Model name Memory type Remarks
steps times of writing
FX3U-FLROM-64 64000 Flash memory 10000 times Write-protect switch is provided.
FX3U-FLROM-16*2 16000 Flash memory 10000 times Write-protect switch is provided.

Write-protect switch and loader
FX3U-FLROM-64L*2 64000 Flash memory 10000 times
function are provided.
Write-protect switch and there is an
FX3U-FLROM-1M*3 64000 Flash memory 10000 times area (1300 kB) dedicated to the
storage of symbolic information.
*2. Can be used with FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.20 or later.

*3. Ver. 3.00 or later is applicable.
50
1
2.7.5 Keyword (entry code)
Introduction
By registering the entry code in a PLC, the functions of programming tools, display modules, and display units to
change programs, monitor devices, and the current value changing function in the PLC can be restricted (access
restriction).
→ For the operations and restricted functions of display modules,
refer to the PLC main unit Hardware Edition. 2
→ For the operations and restricted functions of display units,
Overview
refer to the respective display unit manual.
1. Differences in operations caused by the entry code type

The operations to change, cancel (delete) and reset the registered entry code vary depending on the entry code type.
Registered
entry code
Entered entry code Change Cancel Disable Outline 3
List
Instruction
Permanent
– – – – The permanent PLC lock cannot be changed, canceled or reset.
PLC lock
Entry code Entry code    The entry code can be changed, canceled and reset.
Entry code +
Entry code + The entry code and second entry code can be changed, canceled
Second entry   
Second entry code and reset.
code
Entry code + Entry code + The entry code, second entry code and customer entry code can
4
  
in Detail
Devices
Second entry Second entry code be changed, canceled and reset.
code +
Customer Customer keyword – –  The entry code can be reset.
keyword
2. Correspondence between PLC and peripheral equipment

FX-10P
5
Number of
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Available GX GX GOT GOT- (-E) FX-PCS
registered Applicable PLC FX-30P
characters Works2 Developer 1000 F900 FX-20P /WIN(-E)
characters
(-E)
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC
Permanent (From first product) Ver. 1.08J Ver. 8.72A Not Not Not Not
– – Applicable
PLC lock FX3U/FX3UC
(Ver. 2.61 or later)
or later or later applicable applicable applicable applicable
6
Programming
Before
Only reset
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
0 to 9 and Ver. 1.08J Ver. 2.00A of entry
Entry code 8 FX3U/FX3UC Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable
A to F or later or later code is
(From first product)
allowed
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC
8 (16 total
Second 0 to 9 and (From first product) Ver. 1.08J Ver. 8.24A Not Not Not
entry code A to F
including
entry code)
FX3U/FX3UC or later or later
Applicable
applicable
Applicable
applicable applicable 7
Instruction
Basic
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC
Customer 0 to 9 and (From first product) Ver. 1.08J Ver. 8.72A Not Not Not
16 Applicable Applicable
keyword A to F FX3U/FX3UC or later or later applicable applicable applicable
The security provided by the entry code, second entry code and customer keyword is limited, and is not always 8
perfect.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
51
3. Entry code setting and access restriction

Setting status Peripheral equipment and access restriction
The programming tool performs the following operations in accordance with the selected registration
condition:
Once the permanent PLC lock is set, it cannot be reset.
To reset the permanent PLC lock or write programs again to the PLC, all-clear the PLC memory.
When the permanent PLC lock is Program Present value

Registration condition Monitoring
selected Read Write change
Write prohibited  –  
Read and write prohibited – –  
All online operations prohibited – – – –
condition:
It is not possible to cancel the entry code using the customer keyword.
Program Present value
When the customer keyword is set Read Write change
condition:
Program Present value
When both the entry code and Read Write change
second entry code are set
1) When using handy programming panel FX-10P(-E)/FX-20P(-E)

The programming tool performs the following operations in accordance with the head character
of the entry code (in 8 characters):
Head character Program Present value

Monitoring
of entry code Read Write change
All operations
A,D to F,0 to 9 – – – –
When only the entry code is set prohibited
Read/Incorrect
B – –  
write protection
Erroneous write
C  –  
prohibited
2) When using any programming tool or data access unit other than the FX-10P(-E)/FX-20P(-E)
Read/Incorrect write protection is set for all entry codes.
When no entry code is set All operations are enabled.
Caution on selecting the permanent PLC lock
• Once the permanent PLC lock is set, it cannot be reset.

To reset the permanent PLC lock or write programs again to the PLC, all-clear the PLC memory.
Caution on registering the entry code
• The entry codes are provided to restrict access from peripheral equipment to programs created by the user. Take
care to save/remember the entry codes.
If a registered entry code is forgotten, the online operations from the programming tool to the PLC are disabled
depending on the programming tool type and the contents of the registered entry code.
• In an FX3U/FX3UC PLC whose version is earlier than Ver. 2.61, do not use a memory cassette where the customer
keyword and permanent PLC lock are set.
If a memory cassette where the permanent PLC lock is set is used in an FX3U/FX3UC PLC whose version is earlier
than Ver. 2.61, the PLC does not function normally.
If the PLC memory is cleared or the keyword is canceled in an FX3U/FX3UC PLC whose version is earlier than Ver.
2.61 for a memory cassette where the customer keyword and permanent PLC lock are set, access restrictions set
by the keyword may not be able to be removed normally.
52
1
Registering and changing the entry codes
Introduction
This section explains the operating procedure of GX Works2, GX Developer.
→ For the entry code registration/change procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), FX-30P,
and FX-PCS/WIN(-E), refer to the manual of each product.
1. Set the PLC to the STOP mode.

2
2. Open New keyword registration dialog box.
Overview
• GX Works2
Select [Online]→[Password/Keyword]→[New...] to open New Keyword Registration dialog box.
• GX Developer
Select [Online]→[Keyword setup]→[Register...] to open New keyword register dialog box.
3. Set the function selection, keyword input, protection level.

3
List
Instruction
The setting method is different between GX Works2 and GX Developer.
• GX Works2
in Detail
Devices
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Set item Contents of setting Remarks
When "Permanent PLC lock" is selected, it cannot be
Select one of the following.
• Keyword Protection(16 digits)
reset.
To reset the permanent PLC lock or write programs again
6
Function Selection
Programming
Before
• Keyword Protection(8 digits) to the PLC, all-clear the PLC memory.
• Permanent PLC Lock To use two keywords, select "Keyword Protection(16
digits)".
Input 16 characters. Available Set 8 characters in the first field, and set 8 characters in
Keyword(16 digits)
characters are A to F and 0 to 9. the second field.
Keyword(8 digits)
Input 8 characters. Available
characters are A to F and 0 to 9.
Set 8 characters in the first field. 7
Instruction
Basic
Keyword Retype Keyword Set the same keyword. This input is required for confirmation.
Input Put a check mark in the check box "Customer keyword is
Input 16 characters. Available used(16 digits)".
Customer Keyword
characters are A to F and 0 to 9. Set 8 characters in the former area, and set 8 characters
in the latter area.
Retype Keyword Set a same keyword. This input is required for confirmation.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
• Read/Write Protection To select "Protection Level", set "Keyword Protection(16

Protection Level
• Write Protection digits)" or "Permanent PLC Lock" in "Function Selection".
• All Online Operation Protection
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
53
• GX Developer

When "Permanent PLC lock" is selected, it cannot be
reset.
Function Selection • Keyword Protection
To reset the permanent PLC lock or write programs
• Permanent PLC Lock
again to the PLC, all-clear the PLC memory.
Input 8 characters. Available characters
Keyword -
are A to F and 0 to 9.
Keyword Input 8 characters. Available characters Before setting the second entry code, set the entry code
2nd Keyword
Input are A to F and 0 to 9. first.
Input 16 characters. Available Before setting the customer keyword, set the entry code
Customer keyword
characters are A to F and 0 to 9. and second entry code first.
Select one of the following:
Before setting the protection level, set the second entry
• Read/Write protection
Protection level code or select "Permanent PLC lock" in "Function
• Write protection
selection".
• All online operation protection
Caution on registering the entry code

The entry codes are provided to restrict access from peripheral equipment to programs created by the users. Keep the
entry codes carefully.
If a registered entry codes is forgotten, the online operations from a programming tool to the PLC are disabled
depending on the programming tool type and the contents of the registered entry code.
4. Register the keyword to the PLC.

• GX Works2
Click the [Execute] button to register the keyword to the PLC.
When "Permanent PLC Lock" is selected, however, the following dialog box appears when the [Execute] button is
clicked.
Click the [OK] button to register protection to the PLC.
54
1
• GX Developer
Introduction
Click [Execution] button to open Keyword confirmation dialog box.
Enter the same keyword again, and click the [OK] button to register the keyword to the PLC.
Overview
When "Permanent PLC Lock" is selected, however, the following dialog box appears when the [Execute] button is
clicked.
Click the [OK] button to register protection to the PLC. 3
List
Instruction
4
in Detail
Devices
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
55
Reading/writing a program from/to a PLC with the entry codes registered

→ For the program reading/writing procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), FX-30P, and FX-PCS/WIN(-E),
refer to the manual of each product.
1. Select [Online]→[Read from PLC...]/[Write to PLC...] to open Input current keyword dialog box.
2. Input the keyword (8 digits, 16 digits), 2nd keyword or customer keyword currently registered in
the PLC.
• GX Works2

Enter only the first 8 digits when "Keyword Protection (8 digits)" is registered.
Keyword When the customer keyword is set, 16 characters for the customer keyword are
available.
• GX Developer

Input 8 characters. Available When cancelling the keyword using the customer keyword instead of entering
Keyword
characters are A to F and 0 to 9. the keyword, enter the former 8 characters of the customer keyword.
Input 8 characters. Available When cancelling the 2nd keyword using the customer keyword instead of entering
2nd Keyword
characters are A to F and 0 to 9. the 2nd keyword, enter the latter 8 characters of the customer keyword.
3. Click [Execution] button to verify the keywords you have input with the keywords currently
registered in the PLC.
• When the entry code inputs are verified, the PLC executes "Read from PLC" or "Write to PLC".
• When the entry code inputs are not verified, the PLC does not execute "Read from PLC" or "Write to PLC".
56
1
Canceling the entry codes
Introduction
→ For the entry code canceling (deletion) procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), FX-30P, and FX-PCS/WIN(-E),
1. Set the PLC to the STOP mode.

2
2. Open Keyword cancel dialog box.
Overview
• GX Works2
Select [Online]→[Password/Keyword]→[Delete...] to open Keyword Delete dialog box.
• GX Developer
Select [Online]→[Keyword setup]→[Delete...] to open Keyword cancel dialog box.
3. Input the keyword (8 digits, 16 digits) and 2nd keyword currently registered in the PLC. 3
List
Instruction
• GX Works2
in Detail
Devices
Keyword
Enter only the first 8 digits when "Keyword Protection (8 digits)" is registered.
It is not possible to cancel the keyword using the customer keyword.
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
• GX Developer
Programming
Before
Keyword
2nd Keyword
It is not possible to cancel the keyword using the customer keyword.
7
Instruction
Basic
4. Click [Execution] button to verify the entry codes you have input with the entry codes currently
registered in the PLC.
• When the entry code inputs are verified, the PLC executes "Keyword Cancel".
• When the entry code inputs are not verified, the PLC does not execute "Keyword Cancel". 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
57
Resetting the entry codes, and validating the reset entry codes (Keyword Protect)
→ For the entry code reset procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), FX-30P, and FX-PCS/WIN(-E),
1. Open Keyword disable dialog box.

• GX Works2
Select [Online]→[Password/Keyword]→[Disable...] to open Keyword Disable dialog box.
• GX Developer
Select [Online]→[Keyword setup]→[Disable...] to open Keyword Disable dialog box.
2. Input the keyword (8 digits, 16 digits), 2nd keyword or customer keyword currently registered in
the PLC.
• GX Works2

Enter only the first 8 digits when "Keyword
Protection (8 digits)" is registered.
Input 16 characters. When cancelling the keyword using the
Keyword Disable Keyword
Available characters are A to F and 0 to 9. customer keyword instead of entering the
keyword, enter the former 8 characters of the
customer keyword.
Keyword Protect Reset entry codes are made valid again. -
• GX Developer

When the customer keyword is set in the FX3S/
Input 8 characters.
Keyword FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, its former 8
Available characters are A to F and 0 to 9.
characters are available.
Keyword Disable
When the customer keyword is set in the FX3S/
Input 8 characters.
2nd Keyword FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, its latter 8
Available characters are A to F and 0 to 9.
characters are available.
Keyword Protect Reset entry codes are made valid again. -
3. Click [Execution] button to reset the entry codes or validate the reset entry codes again.
58
1
2.7.6 Special unit initial value setting
Introduction
The initial values of the buffer memory (BFM) in special function units/blocks connected to an FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or
later and FX3U PLC can be set as a parameter in GX Works2 or GX Developer. 2
When this parameter is used, it is not necessary to execute initial setting in a user program for special function units/
Overview
blocks requiring initial setting. The special unit initial value setting uses 4000 steps (8 blocks) in the memory capacity.
→ For the setting procedure, refer to Subsection 2.7.9.
→ For GX Developer, refer to the GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual.
2.7.7 Positioning instruction setting 3
List
Instruction
In the positioning instruction setting available in all FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U PLCs,
constants can be set in the table for the TBL (FNC152) instruction. Make sure to set this parameter when using TBL
(FNC152) instruction.
The positioning instruction setting for TBL (FNC152) instruction uses 9000 steps (18 blocks) in the memory capacity.
4
in Detail
Devices
→ For details on TBL (FNC152) instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Manual.
→ For the setting procedure, refer to the Positioning Control Manual or Subsection 2.7.9.
2.7.8 Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup (dedicated to FX3UC-32MT-LT-2)

5
The set item "Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup" is dedicated to the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
The CC-Link/LT setting (transmission speed, point mode and station information) is available in the parameter setting
using GX Works2 or GX Developer.
The built-in CC-Link/LT setup uses 500 steps (1 block) in the memory capacity.
→ For the setting procedure, refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition or Subsection 2.7.9.
6
2.7.9 Parameter settings
Programming
Before
This subsection explains the parameter setting procedures by GX Works2.
→ For network parameter setting, refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common).
→ For Ethernet adapter setting, refer to FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual.
7
1 Opening the parameter setting screen
Instruction
Basic
In the project view area provided on the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] → [PLC parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View] → [Docking Window] → [Navigation] from the menu
bar.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
59
2 Setting memory capacity
Set item Contents of setting Setting range

Memory Capacity Set the program memory capacity.
Set the capacity of comments to be stored in the PLC.
Comments Capacity
50 device comments/block (500 steps)
Refer to
The symbolic information capacity when the built-in memory or a memory cassette is used is
Subsection
Symbolic Information displayed here based on the "Memory Capacity" value.
2.7.2 or
Capacity Press the [Check Other Items] button to display the symbolic information capacity when a
Subsection
memory cassette is used.
2.7.3
Set the file register capacity.
File Register Capacity
500 file registers/block (500 steps)
Program Capacity The number of steps available for sequence program is displayed here.
Special Function Set whether "Special Function Block Settings", "Positioning Instruction Settings", "Built-in
–
Memory Capacity CC-Link/LT Settings" should be enabled.
Special Function
Selects the initial value setting function for special function unit/block. –
Block Settings
Positioning
Validates the TBL (FNC152) instruction setting function. –
Instruction Settings
Built-in CC-Link/LT
Validates the CC-Link/LT station information setting function. –
Settings
Caution
• When the memory capacity of the FX3S is 16,000 steps, the program capacity is fixed to 4,000 steps, and the total
of the comment capacity and the file register capacity is limited to 12,000 steps (24 blocks).
The comment capacity is automatically set when the file register capacity is set.
• FX3G/FX3GC PLCs operate in the extension mode when the program capacity is 16,001 steps or more, and operate
in the standard mode when the program capacity is 16,000 steps or less.
The instruction execution time is longer in the extension mode than in the standard mode.
Example: Time required to execute the basic instruction "LD"

Standard mode: 0.21 μs Extension mode: 0.42 μs
• In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, when symbolic information is stored, it is deleted if the memory capacity set by parameters is
changed.
60
1
3
Introduction
Setting devices
1. Click [Device] tab, and set devices.
Overview
3
List
Instruction
4
in Detail
Devices
Supplemental Relay Set the latched (battery backed) auxiliary relay range. Initial value: 500 to 1023 0 to 1023
State Set the latched (battery backed) state relay range. Initial value: 500 to 999 0 to 999
Timer
Counter (16bit)
The setting displayed here cannot be changed.
Set the latched (battery backed) 16-bit counter range. Initial value: 100 to 199
–
0 to 199
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Counter (32bit) Set the latched (battery backed) 32-bit counter range. Initial value: 220 to 255 200 to 255
Data Register Set the data register range (battery backed). Initial value: 200 to 511 0 to 511
All extension registers are latched (battery backed).
Extended Register –
This setting is fixed, and cannot be changed.
4 Setting the PLC name 6
Programming
Before
1. Click [PLC Name] tab, and input the program title.
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Input the program title in up to 32 half-width characters 32 half-width characters
Title
(or 16 full-width characters). (or 16 full-width characters)
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
61
5 Setting special function block

1. Click the [Special Function Block] tab, and then set the special function unit/block and built-in
CC-Link/LT.
In order to use the "Special Function Block" field, the "Special Function Block Settings" box in the [Memory Capacity]
tab must be checked first.
When setting the station information in "Built-in CC-Link/LT Setting", it is necessary to put a check mark to "Built-in
CC-Link/LT Settings" on the [Memory Capacity] tab.

Unit No. This is the unit number of each special function unit/block. –
32 half-width
Set the name of each special function unit/block whose initial values are to be characters
Unit Name
set. (or 16 full-width
Special characters)
Function Block
Up This button moves the cursor to the upper line (transposes the upper line). –
Settings
(It is necessary Down This button moves the cursor to the lower line (transposes the lower line). –
to set the This button displays Special Function Block Settings dialog box of the selected
memory Setting unit number. –
capacity.) →Refer to the next page.
Delete This button deletes the setting of the selected unit number. –
Delete All This button deletes all existing setting in "Special Unit" field. –
Read PLC Data This button reads "Special Unit" field from the connected PLC. –
Built-in
CC-Link/LT Setting This button displays the Built-in CC-Link/LT Setting dialog box. –
Setting
62
1
2. On Special Function Block Settings dialog box, set the initial values of special function units/
Introduction
blocks.
Overview
3
List
Instruction
4
in Detail
Devices
Unit No. tab Select the unit number of a special function unit/block to be set. –
32 half-width
characters
5
Unit Name Set the name of a special function unit/block whose initial values are to be set.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
(or 16 full-width char-
acters)
This column indicates the order of initial value setting in the selected unit
No. number. –
Numbers 1 to 98 can be set.
Address
Set the buffer memory address (BFM number) in a decimal value whose initial
value is to be set.
*1 6
Programming
Before
This column is displayed when device comments are registered.
Comment On the above screen, "Input mode of CH1 to CH4" is registered as the device –
comment for "U0\G0" (unit No. 0, BFM#0).
Set a value to be set as the initial value of the buffer memory address (BFM
Value number). *2
Set the data length and type of the set value in "Size/Type" column.
Select the size and type of a value set to the buffer memory among the
7
Instruction
Basic
following:
16bit/DEC
Size/Type –
32bit/DEC
16bit/HEX
32bit/HEX
Insert
Delete
This button inserts a line in the currently selected position.
This button deletes the currently selected line.
–
–
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Down This button moves the cursor to the lower line (transposes the lower line). –
Check the Identification Code Check mark this box to check the model code of the special function unit/block
–
Before Initializing before initialization.
Identification Code
*1.
Set the model code of the special function unit/block
Input buffer memory addresses (BFM numbers) that in the connected special function unit/block hold.
*3
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
*2. To each buffer memory address (BFM number), set a value within the allowed range in the connected special
function unit/block.
*3. Refer to the manual of the connected special function unit/block.
3. Click [OK] button to finish the setting and close Special Function Block Settings dialog box.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
63
6 Set the Built-in CC-Link/LT

1. Set the built-in CC-Link/LT on the Built-in CC-Link/LT Setting dialog box.

Select one of the following supported built-in CC-Link/LT transmission rates:
2.5Mbps
Transmission Speed –
625kbps
156kbps
Select one of the following supported point modes:
Point Mode 16-point mode –
4-point mode
This item indicates the station number of the built-in CC-Link/LT module.
Station No. –
Station numbers 1 to 64 are available.
Select one of the following station type:
Remote I/O station (Input)
Station Type Remote I/O station (Output) –
Remote I/O station (Input/Output)
Remote device station*1
Select one of the following supported I/O point counts for each remote
I/O Points 1 to 16, 32, 48, 64*2
I/O and remote device station: 1 to 16, 32, 48, 64*2
Select whether or not the Built-in CC-Link/LT station is specified as a reserved
Specify Reserved Station –
station.
Down This button moves the cursor to the lower line (transposes the lower line). –
Insert Row This button inserts a line in the currently selected position. –
Delete Row This button deletes the currently selected line. –
Click this button to read the transmission rate, point mode and station
Read Buffer Memory –
information of the built-in CC-Link/LT module.
*1. Select 16-point mode when using remote device stations. Remote device stations cannot be set in 4-point
mode.
Only station numbers 40 to 64 are available for remote device stations.
*2. The station numbers 32, 48 and 64 are available when a remote device station is selected in Station type.
2. Click the [OK] button to finish the setup and close the Built-in CC-Link/LT setup dialog box.
64
1
7
Introduction
Setting the PLC system (1)
Click on the [PLC System(1)] tab to setup "Battery Less Mode", "Battery Mode", "MODEM Initialized", and
"RUN Terminal Input".
1) FX3S/FX3U/FX3UC PLC
2
Overview
3
List
Instruction
4
in Detail
Devices
5
2) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Select this to operate the PLC without using the battery.
When a check mark is put here, the battery error indicator lamp is automatically
Battery Less Mode*1
turned off and devices in the latched (battery backed) area are automatically
cleared.
–
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Battery Mode*2 Select this item to operate the PLC with the battery. –
Set this item to automatically initialize a connected modem when the PLC power
MODEM Initialized –
is turned ON.
Set this item to use an input terminal (X) to switch the PLC between STOP and None
RUN Terminal Input
*1.
RUN.
This area can be set only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
X000 to X017*3
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
*2. This area can be set only in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.

*3. Up to the built-in input number of main unit.
65
8 Setting the PLC system (2)

1. Click [PLC System(2)] tab.
2. Only when a latch (battery backed) area for a serial port exists through an extended PLC, select
a channel to be set and put a check mark next to "Operate Communication Setting".
When not performing the communication setting for a serial port, do not put a check mark next
to "Operate Communication Setting".
Channel selection

Channel selection Select a channel in which a serial port is set. CH1,CH2*1
Check mark this box when using the selected serial port in "computer link",
"non- protocol communication" or "inverter communication".
Operate Communication
Do not put a check mark when transferring and monitoring sequence programs –
Setting
in GX Works2 or when using the selected serial port in N : N Network, parallel
link, MODBUS communication or FX3U-ENET-ADP.
Protocol
Data length
Parity
Stop Bit
Transmission Speed
Header
Terminator
Set each item in accordance with application.
Control Line → For details on each item, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
H/W Type
Control Mode
Sum Check
Transmission Control
Procedure
Station Number Setting
Time Out Judge Time
*1. Ch2 is not available in FX3S PLC.
66
1
9
Introduction
Setting positioning
1. Click [Positioning] tab.
In order to use the [Positioning] tab, the "Positioning Instruction Settings" box in the [Memory Capacity] tab must be
checked first.
2
2. Set the positioning constants in TBL (FNC152) instruction.
Overview
→ For TBL (FNC152) instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Manual.
List
Instruction
4
in Detail
Devices
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
67
Set item Contents of setting Set range

Set the bias speed for each set of output pulses. 1/10 or less of the
Bias Speed [Hz]
Initial value: 0 maximum speed
Set the maximum speed for each set of output pulses.
Max. Speed [Hz] *1
Initial value: 100,000
Set the creep speed in DSZR (FNC150) instruction for each set of output pulses.
Creep Speed [Hz]
Initial value: 1000 10 to 32767*2
Set the zero point return speed in DSZR (FNC150) instruction for each set of
Zero Return Speed [Hz] output pulses. *1
Initial value: 50000
Set the acceleration time for each set of output pulses.
Acceleration Time [ms] 50 to 5000
Initial value: 100
Set the deceleration time for each set of output pulses.
Deceleration Time [ms] 50 to 5000
Initial value: 100
Set the interrupt input*3 for DVIT (FNC151) instruction for each set of output
pulses. Specify a user interrupt command device (M) for a pulse output
destination device not used in DVIT instruction.
Interruption Input of DVIT Initial setting: Setting range:
As shown on the left
Instruction*4 Pulse output destination Y000: X000 X000 to X007, M8460
Pulse output destination Y001: X001 X000 to X007, M8461
Pulse output destination Y002: X002 X000 to X007, M8462
Pulse output destination Y003*6: X003 X000 to X007, M8463
Y0 Setting for Fixed pulse output destination terminal Y000. –
Y1 Setting for Fixed pulse output destination terminal Y001. –
Y2*5 Setting for Fixed pulse output destination terminal Y002. –
Y3*6 Setting for Fixed pulse output destination terminal Y003. –

This button displays "Positioning instruction settings" dialog box for setting the
Individual Setting table used in TBL (FNC152) instruction. –
→For the setting procedure, refer to the next page.
*1. The setting range is from 10 to 100,000 Hz in FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
The setting range is from 10 to 200,000 Hz in FX3U PLC when the pulse output destination is the high-speed
output special adapter.
*2. The creep speed should satisfy the relationship "Bias speed ≤ Creep speed ≤ Maximum speed".
*3. An interrupt input set here cannot be used jointly with a high-speed counter, input interrupt, pulse catch input,
input in SPD (FNC 67) instruction, or interrupt input in DVIT (FNC151) instruction.
*4. This area can be set only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
*5. Y002 is not set in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type) and FX3GC PLC.
*6. Note that this item can only be set if two high-speed output special adapters are connected to the FX3U PLC.
68
1
3. Click [Individual setting] button to display Positioning Instruction Settings dialog box.
Introduction
In this dialog box, set the positioning table for each pulse output destination.
Overview
3
List
Instruction
4
in Detail
Devices
Y0 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y000. –
Y1 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y001. –
Y2*1 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y002. – 5
Y3*2 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y003. –
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Set the relay number of the rotation direction output signal.
FX3U/FX3UC:
Initial setting: Pulse output destination Y000: Y010
Y000 to Y357
Pulse output destination Y001: Y011
Rotation Direction Signal
Pulse output destination Y002*1: Y012
FX3G/FX3GC:
Pulse output destination Y003*2: Y013
→Refer to the Positioning Control Manual.
Y000 to Y177 6
Programming
Before
Set the head number of devices storing the set data (pulse number and FX3U/FX3UC:
frequency). D0 to D6400
1600 devices (FX3U and FX3UC) or 1200 devices (FX3G and FX3GC) are R0 to R31168
Head Address occupied starting from the head device number set here regardless of the
number of axes. FX3G/FX3GC:
Initial setting: R0 D0 to D6400
→Refer to the Positioning Control Manual. R0 to R22800
7
This column shows the table number.
No. –
Instruction
Basic
Numbers 1 to 100 can be set.
Select the positioning type among the following:
DDVIT (Interrupt positioning instruction)*3
DPLSV (Variable speed output pulse instruction)
Positioning Instruction –
DDRVI (Relative positioning instruction)
DDRVA (Absolute positioning instruction)
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Set the pulse number output by the operation (instruction) set in "Positioning Refer to the
Pulse (Pls) Instruction" column. Positioning Control
→Refer to the Positioning Control Manual. Manual.
Set the speed (pulse frequency) output by the operation (instruction) set in Refer to the
Frequency [Hz] "Positioning Instruction" column. Positioning Control
Up
This button transposes the selected line to the upper line.
Manual.
–
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Down This button transposes the selected line to the lower line. –
Insert Row This button inserts a line in the currently selected position. –
Delete Row This button deletes the currently selected line. –
This button deletes the entire setting of the positioning table for the selected
Delete all Rows –
pulse output destination.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
69

A check mark here means not to transfer the positioning setting when PLC turns
Positioning table settings will ON.
not be initialized when the PLC Check mark this box when changing the positioning setting from a display unit, –
is powered on etc., and then using the changed contents even after restoring power. In this
case, set a latched (battery backed) type device to "Head Address".
This button writes the contents of the positioning table created here to up to
Write 1600 devices (FX3U and FX3UC) or 1200 devices (FX3G and FX3GC) starting –
from "Head Address".
This button reads the contents of the existing positioning table from all pulse
output destinations, up to 1600 devices (FX3U and FX3UC) or 1200 devices
Read –
(FX3G and FX3GC) starting from "Head Address", but does not read device
numbers without the "positioning instruction" setting.
*1. Y002 is not set in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type) and FX3GC PLC.
*2. Note that this item can only be set if two high-speed output special adapters are connected to the FX3U PLC.
*3. This area can be set only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
10 Transferring parameters (and sequence program) to the PLC

1. Select [Online] → [Write to PLC...] from the menu bar to display the online data operation dialog
box.
2. Check mark the "Parameter" box, and click [Execute] button.

The selected contents are transferred to the PLC.
The transferred parameters become valid when the PLC switches from RUN to STOP.
When the communication setting is changed in step 8 [PLC System(2)], cycle the PLC power.
Caution
After changing the memory capacity, make sure to write both the programs and parameters to the PLC.
If only the parameters are written to the PLC, program errors (such as parameter error, circuit error and grammar
error) may occur in the PLC.
70
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.1 Basic Instructions
Introduction
3. Instruction List
This chapter introduces a list of instructions available in programming. 2
Overview
3.1 Basic Instructions
The basic instructions are provided in the following series. The table below shows differences in applicable devices.
Applicable PLC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC 3
List
Instruction
Basic instructions other than MEP and
         
MEF instructions
Ver. 2.30 Ver. 2.30
MEP and MEF instructions    – – – – –
or later or later
Absence/presence of applicable devices
– – –   – – – – –
(D. b)
4
Absence/presence of applicable
–     – – – – –
in Detail
Devices
devices (R)
Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference
Contact Instruction
Initial logical operation
5
Applicable devices
Constant
Device &
Specified the
LD Load contact type NO X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.1
(normally open)
Applicable devices Initial logical operation

LDI Load Inverse contact type NC X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.1
(normally closed)
LDP Load Pulse

Applicable devices Initial logical operation of
X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.5
6
Rising edge pulse
Programming
Before
LDF Load Falling Pulse X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.5
Falling/trailing edge pulse
Applicable devices Serial connection of NO

AND AND
(normally open) contacts
7
Instruction
Basic
Applicable devices Serial connection of NC
ANI AND Inverse X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.3
(normally closed) contacts
Applicable devices Serial connection of Rising

ANDP AND Pulse X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.5
edge pulse
Applicable devices Serial connection of

8
ANDF AND Falling Pulse X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.5
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Parallel connection of NO
OR OR X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.4
Applicable devices (normally open) contacts
ORI OR Inverse
Parallel connection of NC
9
Applicable devices (normally closed) contacts
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Parallel connection of
ORP OR Pulse X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.5
Applicable devices Rising edge pulse
ORF OR Falling Pulse

Applicable devices
X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.5 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
71
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.1 Basic Instructions
Connection Instruction
Serial connection of
ANB AND Block – Section 7.7
multiple parallel circuits
ORB OR Block – Section 7.6
multiple contact circuits
Stores the current result of

Memory Point
MPS the internal PLC Section 7.8
Store
MPS operations
Reads the current result of
MRD Memory Read MRD the internal PLC – Section 7.8
operations
Pops (recalls and
MPP Memory POP MPP removes) the currently Section 7.8
stored result
INV Invert the current result of

INV Inverse the internal PLC – Section 7.10
operations
Conversion of
MEP MEP operation result – Section 7.11
to leading edge pulse
Conversion of operation
MEF MEF – Section 7.11
result to trailing edge pulse
Out Instruction
Applicable devices Final logical operation type

OUT OUT Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.2
coil drive
SET SET SET Applicable devices SET Bit device latch ON Y,M,S,D.b Section 7.13
Y,M,S,D.b,T,C,
RST Reset RST Applicable devices RESET Bit device OFF Section 7.13
D,R,V,Z
PLS Pulse PLS Applicable devices Rising edge pulse Y,M Section 7.12
PLF Pulse Falling PLF Applicable devices Falling/trailing edge pulse Y,M Section 7.12
Master Control Instruction
Denotes the start of a master

MC Master Control MC N Applicable devices Y,M Section 7.9
control block
Master Control Denotes the end of a master

MCR MCR N – Section 7.9
Reset control block
Other Instruction
NOP No Operation No operation or null step – Section 7.14
End Instruction
Program END, I/O refresh

END END END – Section 7.15
and Return to Step 0
72
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.2 Step Ladder Instructions
1
3.2 Step Ladder Instructions
Introduction
STL Step Ladder STL Applicable devices Starts step ladder S Chapter 35
2
Overview
RET Return RET Completes step ladder – Chapter 35
3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number

3
Applied instructions such as Arithmetic operation, Rotation and Shift, Handy instructions etc. are used especially when
List
Instruction
numeric data is handled.
*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *7: The instruction is provided in the FX3U/FX3UC Series Ver. 2.61 or later.
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver. 1.30 or later. *8: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver. 1.40 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver. 1.30 or later. *9: The instruction is provided in the FX3U/FX3UC Series Ver. 2.70 or later.
*4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver. 2.20 or later. *10: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver. 1.30 or later.
*5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver. 2.20 or later *11: The instruction is provided in the FX3U/FX3UC Series Ver. 2.40 or later. 4
*6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver. 1.10 or later..
in Detail
Devices
Applicable PLC
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
Program Flow
5
00 CJ CJ Pn Conditional Jump           Section 8.1
Constant
Device &
Specified the
01 CALL CALL Pn Call Subroutine           Section 8.2
02 SRET SRET Subroutine Return           Section 8.3 6
Programming
Before
03 IRET IRET Interrupt Return           Section 8.4
04 EI EI Enable Interrupt           Section 8.5
7
05 DI DI Disable Interrupt           Section 8.6
Instruction
Basic
06 FEND FEND Main Routine Program End           Section 8.7
07 WDT WDT Watchdog Timer Refresh           Section 8.8 8

Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
08 FOR FOR S Start a FOR/NEXT Loop           Section 8.9
Section
09 NEXT NEXT End a FOR/NEXT Loop          
8.10
9
Move and Compare
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10 CMP CMP S1 S2 D Compare           Section 9.1
11 ZCP ZCP S1 S2 S D Zone Compare           Section 9.2

10
12 MOV MOV S D Move           Section 9.3
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
73
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number
Applicable PLC
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
Move and Compare
13 SMOV SMOV S m1 m2 D n Shift Move      – – –   Section 9.4
14 CML CML S D Complement      – – –   Section 9.5
15 BMOV BMOV S D n Block Move           Section 9.6
16 FMOV FMOV S D n Fill Move      – – –   Section 9.7
17 XCH XCH D1 D2 Exchange – – –   – – –   Section 9.8
Conversion to Binary
18 BCD BCD S D           Section 9.9
Coded Decimal
Section
19 BIN BIN S D Conversion to Binary          
9.10
Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, –, ×, ÷)
Section
20 ADD ADD S1 S2 D Addition          
10.1
Section
21 SUB SUB S1 S2 D Subtraction          
10.2
Section
22 MUL MUL S1 S2 D Multiplication          
10.3
Section
23 DIV DIV S1 S2 D Division          
10.4
Section
24 INC INC D Increment          
10.5
Section
25 DEC DEC D Decrement          
10.6
Section
26 WAND WAND S1 S2 D Logical Word AND          
10.7
Section
27 WOR WOR S1 S2 D Logical Word OR          
10.8
Section
28 WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D Logical Exclusive OR          
10.9
Section
29 NEG NEG D Negation – – –   – – –  
10.10
Rotation and Shift Operation
Section
30 ROR ROR D n Rotation Right      – – –  
11.1
Section
31 ROL ROL D n Rotation Left      – – –  
11.2
Section
32 RCR RCR D n Rotation Right with Carry – – –   – – –  
11.3
Section
33 RCL RCL D n Rotation Left with Carry – – –   – – –  
11.4
74
1
Applicable PLC
Introduction
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
Rotation and Shift Operation
34 SFTR SFTR S D n1 n2 Bit Shift Right          

Section
11.5
2
Overview
Section
35 SFTL SFTL S D n1 n2 Bit Shift Left          
11.6
Section
36 WSFR WSFR S D n1 n2 Word Shift Right      – – –  
11.7
3
Section
List
Instruction
37 WSFL WSFL S D n1 n2 Word Shift Left      – – –  
11.8
Shift write Section

38 SFWR SFWR S D n          
[FIFO/FILO control] 11.9
39 SFRD SFRD S D n Shift Read [FIFO Control]          

Section
11.10
4
in Detail
Devices
Data Operation
Section
40 ZRST ZRST D1 D2 Zone Reset          
12.1
41 DECO DECO S D n Decode          

Section
12.2 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Section
42 ENCO ENCO S D n Encode          
12.3
Section
43 SUM SUM S D Sum of Active Bits      – – –  
12.4
Section
6
44 BON BON S D n Check Specified Bit Status      – – –  
Programming
Before
12.5
Section
45 MEAN MEAN S D n Mean      – – –  
12.6
Section
46 ANS ANS S m D Timed Annunciator Set –     – – –  
12.7 7
Instruction
Basic
Section
47 ANR ANR Annunciator Reset –     – – –  
12.8
Section
48 SQR SQR S D Square Root – – –   – – –  
12.9
Conversion to Floating Section 8

49 FLT FLT S D Point
 *6    – – –  
12.10
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
High-speed Processing
Section
50 REF REF D n Refresh          
13.1
51 REFF REFF n Refresh and Filter Adjust – – –   – – –  

Section 9
13.2
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Section
52 MTR MTR S D1 D2 n Input Matrix          
13.3
Section
53 HSCS HSCS S1 S2 D High-speed Counter Set          
13.4
10
Section
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
54 HSCR HSCR S1 S2 D High-speed Counter Reset          

13.5
75
Applicable PLC
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
High-speed Processing
High-speed Counter Zone Section

55 HSZ HSZ S1 S2 S D Compare
     – – –  
13.6
Section
56 SPD SPD S1 S2 D Speed Detection          
13.7
Section
57 PLSY PLSY S1 S2 D Pulse Y Output          
13.8
Section
58 PWM PWM S1 S2 D Pulse Width Modulation          
13.9
Acceleration/Deceleration Section
59 PLSR PLSR S1 S2 S3 D Setup
         
13.10
Handy Instruction
Section
60 IST IST S D1 D2 Initial State          
14.1
Section
61 SER SER S1 S2 D n Search a Data Stack      – – –  
14.2
Section
62 ABSD ABSD S1 S2 D n Absolute Drum Sequencer          
14.3
Incremental Drum Section

63 INCD INCD S1 S2 D n Sequencer
         
14.4
Section
64 TTMR TTMR D n Teaching Timer – – –   – – –  
14.5
Section
65 STMR STMR S m D Special Timer – – –   – – –  
14.6
Section
66 ALT ALT D Alternate State          
14.7
Section
67 RAMP RAMP S1 S2 D n Ramp Variable Value          
14.8
Section
68 ROTC ROTC S m1 m2 D Rotary Table Control – – –   – – –  
14.9
Section
69 SORT SORT S m1 m2 D n SORT Tabulated Data – – –   – – –  
14.10
External FX I/O Device
Section
70 TKY TKY S D1 D2 Ten Key Input – – –   – – –  
15.1
Section
71 HKY HKY S D1 D2 D3 Hexadecimal Input – – –   – – –  
15.2
Digital Switch Section

72 DSW DSW S D1 D2 n (Thumbwheel Input)
         
15.3
Section
73 SEGD SEGD S D Seven Segment Decoder – – –   – – –  
15.4
Section
74 SEGL SEGL S D n Seven Segment With Latch          
15.5
76
1
Applicable PLC
Introduction
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
External FX Device
75 ARWS ARWS S D1 D2 n Arrow Switch – – –   – – –  

Section
15.6
2
Overview
Section
76 ASC ASC S D ASCII Code Data Input – – –   – – –  
15.7
Section
77 PR PR S D Print (ASCII Code) – – –   – – –  
15.8
3
Read From A Special Section
List
Instruction
78 FROM FROM m1 m2 D n –     –    
Function Block 15.9
Write To A Special Section

79 TO TO m1 m2 S n Function Block
–     –    
15.10
80 RS RS S m D n Serial Communication          
Section
16.1
4
in Detail
Devices
Section
81 PRUN PRUN S D Parallel Run (Octal Mode)          
16.2
Hexadecimal to ASCII Section

82 ASCI ASCI S D n Conversion
         
16.3
5
ASCII to Hexadecimal Section
83 HEX HEX S D n          
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Conversion 16.4
Section
84 CCD CCD S D n Check Code          
16.5
85 VRRD VRRD S D Volume Read  *6 – *9 *9   –  –

Section
16.6 6
Programming
Before
Section
86 VRSC VRSC S D Volume Scale  *6 – *9 *9   –  –
16.7
Section
87 RS2 RS2 S m D n n1 Serial Communication 2      – – – – –
16.8
Section
7
88 PID PID S1 S2 S3 D PID Control Loop          
Instruction
Basic
16.9
Data Transfer 2
Batch Store of Index Section

102 ZPUSH ZPUSH D Register
– – –  *5 – – – – –
17.1
Section 8
103 ZPOP ZPOP D Batch POP of Index Register – – –  *5 – – – – –
17.2
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Floating Point
Section
110 ECMP ECMP S1 S2 D Floating Point Compare  *6    – – –  
18.1
111 EZCP EZCP S1 S2 S D

Floating Point Zone
– – –   – – –  
Section 9
Compare 18.2
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Section
112 EMOV EMOV S D Floating Point Move  *6    – – – – –
18.3
Floating Point to Character Section

116 ESTR ESTR S1 S2 D – – –   – – – – –
String Conversion 18.4
10
Character String to Section
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
117 EVAL EVAL S D – – –   – – – – –

Floating Point Conversion 18.5
77
Applicable PLC
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
Floating Point
Floating Point to Scientific Section

118 EBCD EBCD S D Notation Conversion
– – –   – – –  
18.6
Scientific Notation to Section

119 EBIN EBIN S D – – –   – – –  
Floating Point Conversion 18.7
Section
120 EADD EADD S1 S2 D Floating Point Addition  *6    – – –  
18.8
Section
121 ESUB ESUB S1 S2 D Floating Point Subtraction  *6    – – –  
18.9
Floating Point Section

122 EMUL EMUL S1 S2 D  *6    – – –  
Multiplication 18.10
Section
123 EDIV EDIV S1 S2 D Floating Point Division  *6    – – –  
18.11
Section
124 EXP EXP S D Floating Point Exponent – – –   – – – – –
18.12
Floating Point Natural Section

125 LOGE LOGE S D – – –   – – – – –
Logarithm 18.13
Floating Point Common Section

126 LOG10 LOG10 S D – – –   – – – – –
Logarithm 18.14
Section
127 ESQR ESQR S D Floating Point Square Root  *6    – – –  
18.15
Section
128 ENEG ENEG D Floating Point Negation – – –   – – – – –
18.16
Floating Point to Integer Section

129 INT INT S D Conversion
 *6    – – –  
18.17
Section
130 SIN SIN S D Floating Point Sine – – –   – – –  
18.18
Section
131 COS COS S D Floating Point Cosine – – –   – – –  
18.19
Section
132 TAN TAN S D Floating Point Tangent – – –   – – –  
18.20
Section
133 ASIN ASIN S D Floating Point Arc Sine – – –   – – – – –
18.21
Section
134 ACOS ACOS S D Floating Point Arc Cosine – – –   – – – – –
18.22
Section
135 ATAN ATAN S D Floating Point Arc Tangent – – –   – – – – –
18.23
Floating Point Degrees to Section

136 RAD RAD S D Radians Conversion
– – –   – – – – –
18.24
Floating Point Radians to Section

137 DEG DEG S D Degrees Conversion
– – –   – – – – –
18.25
Data Operation 2
Section
140 WSUM WSUM S D n Sum of Word Data – – –  *5 – – – – –
19.1
Section
141 WTOB WTOB S D n WORD to BYTE – – –  *5 – – – – –
19.2
78
1
Applicable PLC
Introduction
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
Data Operation 2
142 BTOW BTOW S D n BYTE to WORD – – –  *5 – – – – –

Section
19.3
2
Overview
Section
143 UNI UNI S D n 4-bit Linking of Word Data – – –  *5 – – – – –
19.4
4-bit Grouping of Word Section

144 DIS DIS S D n Data
– – –  *5 – – – – –
19.5
3
Section
List
Instruction
147 SWAP SWAP S Byte Swap – – –   – – –  
19.6
Section
149 SORT2 SORT2 S m1 m2 D n Sort Tabulated Data 2 – – –  *5 – – – – –
19.7
Positioning Control
Section
4
150 DSZR DSZR S1 S2 D1 D2 DOG Search Zero Return     *4 – – – – –
in Detail
Devices
20.1
*2, Section
151 DVIT DVIT S1 S2 D1 D2 Interrupt Positioning – – – 
4
– – – – –
20.2
152 TBL TBL D n

Batch Data Positioning
Mode
–    *5 – – – – –
Section
20.3 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Absolute Current Value Section
155 ABS ABS S D1 D2 Read
        *1 *1
20.4
Section
156 ZRN ZRN S1 S2 S3 D Zero Return     *4    – –
20.5
Variable Speed Pulse Section

6
157 PLSV PLSV S D1 D2         – –
Programming
Before
Output 20.6
Section
158 DRVI DRVI S1 S2 D1 D2 Drive to Increment         – –
20.7
Section
159 DRVA DRVA S1 S2 D1 D2 Drive to Absolute         – –
20.8 7
Instruction
Basic
Real Time Clock Control
Section
160 TCMP TCMP S1 S2 S3 S D RTC Data Compare          
21.1
Section
161 TZCP TZCP S1 S2 S D RTC Data Zone Compare          
21.2
8
Section
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
162 TADD TADD S1 S2 D RTC Data Addition          

21.3
Section
163 TSUB TSUB S1 S2 D RTC Data Subtraction          
21.4
164 HTOS HTOS S D

Hour to Second
Conversion
– – –   – – – – –
Section
21.5 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Second to Hour Section

165 STOH STOH S D Conversion
– – –   – – – – –
21.6
Section
166 TRD TRD D Read RTC data          
21.7
167 TWR TWR S Set RTC data          

Section 10
21.8
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
Section
169 HOUR HOUR S D1 D2 Hour Meter         *1 *1
21.9
79
Applicable PLC
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
External Device
Decimal to Gray Code Section

170 GRY GRY S D Conversion
     – – –  
22.1
Gray Code to Decimal Section

171 GBIN GBIN S D Conversion
     – – –  
22.2
Read form Dedicated Section

176 RD3A RD3A m1 m2 D –     –   *1 *1
Analog Block 22.3
Write to Dedicated Analog Section

177 WR3A WR3A m1 m2 S Block
–     –   *1 *1
22.4
Extension Function
External ROM Function

180 EXTR EXTR S SD1 SD2 SD3 (FX2N/FX2NC)
– – – – – – – – *1 *1 –
Others
Section
182 COMRD COMRD S D Read Device Comment Data – – –  *5 – – – – –
24.1
Random Number Section

184 RND RND D Generation
– – –   – – – – –
24.2
Section
186 DUTY DUTY n1 n2 D Timing Pulse Generation – – –  *5 – – – – –
24.3
Section
188 CRC CRC S D n Cyclic Redundancy Check – – –   – – – – –
24.4
Section
189 HCMOV HCMOV S D n High-speed Counter Move – – –  *4 – – – – –
24.5
Block Data Operation
Section
192 BK+ BK+ S1 S2 D n Block Data Addition – – –  *5 – – – – –
25.1
Section
193 BK- BK- S1 S2 D n Block Data Subtraction – – –  *5 – – – – –
25.2
Block Data Compare Section

194 BKCMP= BKCMP= S1 S2 D n – – –  *5 – – – – –
25.3
S1 = S2

195 BKCMP> BKCMP> S1 S2 D n – – –  *5 – – – – –
25.3
S1 > S2

196 BKCMP< BKCMP< S1 S2 D n – – –  *5 – – – – –
25.3
S1 < S2

197 BKCMP<> BKCMP<> S1 S2 D n – – –  *5 – – – – –
S1 ≠ S2 25.3

198 BKCMP<= BKCMP<= S1 S2 D n – – –  *5 – – – – –
S1 ≤ S2 25.3

199 BKCMP>= BKCMP>= S1 S2 D n – – –  *5 – – – – –
25.3
S1 ≥ S2
Character String Control
BIN to Character String Section

200 STR STR S1 S2 D Conversion
– – –  *5 – – – – –
26.1
Character String to BIN Section

201 VAL VAL S D1 D2 Conversion
– – –  *5 – – – – –
26.2
80
1
Applicable PLC
Introduction
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
Character String Control
202 $+ $+ S1 S2 D Link Character Strings – – –   – – – – –

Section
26.3
2
Overview
Character String Length Section
203 LEN LEN S D Detection
– – –   – – – – –
26.4
Extracting Character String Section

204 RIGHT RIGHT S D n Data from the Right
– – –   – – – – –
26.5
3
Extracting Character String Section
List
Instruction
205 LEFT LEFT S D n Data from the Left
– – –   – – – – –
26.6
Random Selection of Section

206 MIDR MIDR S1 D S2 Character Strings
– – –   – – – – –
26.7
207 MIDW MIDW S1 D S2

Random Replacement of
Character Strings
– – –   – – – – –
Section
26.8
4
in Detail
Devices
Section
208 INSTR INSTR S1 S2 D n Character string search – – –  *5 – – – – –
26.9
Section
209 $MOV $MOV S D Character String Transfer – – –   – – – – –
26.10
Data Operation 3
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Section
210 FDEL FDEL S D n Deleting Data from Tables – – –  *5 – – – – –
27.1
Section
211 FINS FINS S D n Inserting Data to Tables – – –  *5 – – – – –
27.2
Shift Last Data Read Section

6
212 POP POP S D n – – –   – – – – –
Programming
Before
[FILO Control] 27.3
Section
213 SFR SFR D n Bit Shift Right with Carry – – –   – – – – –
27.4
Section
214 SFL SFL D n Bit Shift Left with Carry – – –   – – – – –
27.5 7
Instruction
Basic
Data Comparison
Load Compare Section
224 LD= LD= S1 S2          
28.1
S1 = S2

225 LD> LD> S1 S2          
S1 > S2 28.1
8
Load Compare
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Section
226 LD< LD< S1 S2          
28.1
S1 < S2

228 LD<> LD<> S1 S2          
28.1
S1 ≠ S2
229 LD<= LD<= S1 S2

Load Compare
         
Section 9
S1 ≤ S2 28.1
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

230 LD>= LD>= S1 S2          
28.1
S1 ≥ S2
AND Compare Section

232 AND= AND= S1 S2          
S1 = S2 28.2
10
AND Compare Section
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
233 AND> AND> S1 S2          

28.2
S1 > S2
81
Applicable PLC
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
Data Comparison
AND Compare Section
234 AND< AND< S1 S2          
28.2
S1 < S2
AND Compare Section

236 AND<> AND<> S1 S2          
28.2
S1 ≠ S2
AND Compare Section

237 AND<= AND<= S1 S2          
28.2
S1 ≤ S2
AND Compare Section

238 AND>= AND>= S1 S2          
28.2
S1 ≥ S2
OR Compare Section
240 OR=          
OR= S1 S2 S1 = S2 28.3
OR Compare Section
241 OR>          
OR> S1 S2 S1 > S2 28.3
OR Compare Section
242 OR<          
OR< S1 S2 S1 < S2 28.3
OR Compare Section
244 OR<>          
OR<> S1 S2 S1 ≠ S2 28.3
OR Compare Section
245 OR<=          
OR<= S1 S2 S1 ≤ S2 28.3
OR Compare Section
246 OR>=          
OR>= S1 S2 S1 ≥ S2 28.3
Data Table Operation
Section
256 LIMIT LIMIT S1 S2 S3 D Limit Control – – –   – – – – –
29.1
Section
257 BAND BAND S1 S2 S3 D Dead Band Control – – –   – – – – –
29.2
Section
258 ZONE ZONE S1 S2 S3 D Zone Control – – –   – – – – –
29.3
Scaling Section
259 SCL SCL S1 S2 D (Coordinate by Point Data)
– – –   – – – – –
29.4
Decimal ASCII to BIN Section

260 DABIN DABIN S D Conversion
– – –  *5 – – – – –
29.5
BIN to Decimal ASCII Section

261 BINDA BINDA S D Conversion
– – –  *5 – – – – –
29.6
Scaling 2 Section
269 SCL2 SCL2 S1 S2 D (Coordinate by X/Y Data)
– – –  *3 – – – – –
29.7
External Device Communication
Section
270 IVCK IVCK S1 S2 D n Inverter Status Check  *6    – – – – –
30.1
82
1
Applicable PLC
Introduction
FX3GC
FX3UC
FNC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3S
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
No.
External Device Communication
271 IVDR IVDR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Drive  *6    – – – – –

Section
30.2
2
Overview
Section
272 IVRD IVRD S1 S2 D n Inverter Parameter Read  *6    – – – – –
30.3
Section
273 IVWR IVWR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Parameter Write  *6    – – – – –
30.4
3
Inverter Parameter Block Section
List
Instruction
274 IVBWR IVBWR S1 S2 S3 n Write
– – –   – – – – –
30.5
Section
275 IVMC IVMC S1 S2 S3 D n Inverter Multi Command  *8  *9 *9 – – – – –
30.6
276 ADPRW ADPRW S S1 S2 S3 S4/D MODBUS Read / Write 

*
10

* *
11 11
– – – – –
Section
30.7
4
in Detail
Devices
Data Transfer 3
Section
278 RBFM RBFM m1 m2 D n1 n2 Divided BFM Read – – –  *5 – – – – –
31.1
279 WBFM WBFM m1 m2 S n1 n2 Divided BFM Write – – –  *5 – – – – –

Section
31.2 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
High-speed Processing 2
High-speed Counter Section

280 HSCT HSCT S1 m S2 D n Compare With Data Table
– – –   – – – – –
32.1
Extension File Register Control
290 LOADR LOADR S n Load From ER –     – – – – –

Section 6
33.1
Programming
Before
Section
291 SAVER SAVER S m D Save to ER – – –   – – – – –
33.2
Section
292 INITR INITR S n Initialize R and ER – – –   – – – – –
33.3
7
Instruction
Basic
Section
293 LOGR LOGR S m D1 n D2 Logging R and ER – – –   – – – – –
33.4
Section
294 RWER RWER S n Rewrite to ER –    *3 – – – – –
33.5
295 INITER INITER S n Initialize ER – – –  *3 – – – – –

Section
33.6
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions
Section
300 FLCRT FLCRT S1 S2 S3 n File create / check – – – *7 *7 – – – – –
34.1
301 FLDEL FLDEL S1 S2 n File delete / CF card format – – – *7 *7 – – – – –

Section
34.2 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Section
302 FLWR FLWR S1 S2 S3 D n Data write – – – *7 *7 – – – – –
34.3
Section
303 FLRD FLRD S1 S2 D1 D2 n Data read – – – *7 *7 – – – – –
34.4
304 FLCMD FLCMD S n FX3U-CF-ADP command – – – *7 *7 – – – – –

Section 10
34.5
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
Section
305 FLSTRD FLSTRD S D n FX3U-CF-ADP status read – – – *7 *7 – – – – –
34.6
83
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List
4. Devices in Detail
This chapter explains how numeric values are handled in the PLC as well as the roles and functions of various built-in
devices including I/O relays, auxiliary relays, state relays, counters and data registers.
The following content provides a basis for handling the PLC.
4.1 Device Number List

Device numbers are assigned as shown below.
For input relay numbers and output relay numbers when I/O extension equipment and special extension equipment
are connected to the PLC main unit, refer to the Hardware Edition.
1) FX3S PLC
Device name Description Reference
I/O relay
Input relay X000 to X017 16 points
Device numbers are octal. Section 4.2
Output relay Y000 to Y015 14 points
Auxiliary relay
General type M0 to M383 384 points
EEPROM keep type M384 to M511 128 points Section 4.3
Special type*1 M8000 to M8511 512 points Chapter 37

State relay
Initial state type
S0 to S9 10 points
(EEPROM keep)
Section 4.4
EEPROM keep type S10 to S127 118 points
General type S128 to S255 128 points
Timer (on-delay timer)
100 ms T0 to T31 32 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
0.1 to 3,276.7 sec/0.01 to 327.67 sec
100 ms/10 ms T32 to T62 31 points They can be switched from 100 ms to 10 ms by
driving the special auxiliary relay M8028.
1 ms T63 to T127 65 points 0.001 to 32.767 sec Section 4.5
T128 to T131 4 points 0.001 to 32.767 sec
(EEPROM keep)
T132 to T137 6 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
(EEPROM keep)
Counter
General type up counter
C0 to C15 16 points Counts 0 to 32,767
(16 bits)
EEPROM keep type up
counter (16 bits) Section 4.6
General type
bi-directional counter C200 to C234 35 points −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 counts
(32 bits)
*1. For applicable functions, refer to Chapter 37.

For handling of the latched area, refer to Section 2.6.
84
1
Introduction
High-speed counter
1-phase 1-counting input
Bi-directional (32 bits) C235 to C245
(EEPROM keep)

−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 counts
Software counter
2
Bi-directional (32 bits) C246 to C250 Section 4.7
1 phase: 60 kHz × 2 points, 10 kHz × 4 points
Overview
(EEPROM keep)
2 phases: 30 kHz × 1 point, 5 kHz × 1 point
Bi-directional (32 bits) C251 to C255
(EEPROM keep)
Data register (32 bits when used in pair form)
General type (16 bits) D0 to D127 128 points
3
List
Instruction
EEPROM keep type
D128 to D255 128 points
(16 bits)
General type (16 bits) D256 to D2999 2744 points Section 4.9
Among 2000 latched type data registers backed
EEPROM keep type up by the EEPROM, D1000 and later can be set
(16 bits) <file register>
D1000 to D2999 2000 points
as file registers in units of 500 points by the
parameter setting.
4
in Detail
Devices
Special type (16 bits)*1 D8000 to D8511 512 points Chapter 37
Index type (16 bits) V0 to V7, Z0 to Z7 16 points Section 4.11
Pointer
For jump and branch call P0 to P255 256 points For CJ and CALL instructions
Input interrupt I0 to I5 6 points Section 4.12 5
Timer interrupt I6 to I8 3 points
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Nesting
For master control N0 to N7 8 points For MC instruction
Constant
16 bits −32,768 to +32,767
Decimal (K)
32 bits −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 6
Programming
Before
16 bits 0 to FFFF
Hexadecimal (H)
32 bits 0 to FFFFFFFF Chapter 5
−1.0 × 2128 to −1.0 × 2−126, 0, 1.0 × 2−126 to 1.0 × 2128

Real number (E) 32 bits Both the decimal point expression and the exponent expression
are available.

7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
85
2) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs

I/O relay
Input relay X000 to X177 128 points Device numbers are octal.
Section 4.2
Output relay Y000 to Y177 128 points The total number of inputs and outputs is 128.
Auxiliary relay
EEPROM keep type M384 to M1535 1152 points Section 4.3
General type*1 M1536 to M7679*2 6144 points

State relay
Initial state type
S0 to S9 10 points
(EEPROM keep)
EEPROM keep type S10 to S899 890 points
Section 4.4
Annunciator type
S900 to S999 100 points
(EEPROM keep)
General type*1 S1000 to S4095 3096 points

100 ms [for subroutine or
T192 to T199 8 points 0.1 to 3,276.7sec
interrupt routine]
10 ms T200 to T245 46 points 0.01 to 327.67 sec
Retentive type for 1 ms Section 4.5
T246 to T249 4 points 0.001 to 32.767 sec
(EEPROM keep)
(EEPROM keep)
Counter
(16 bits)
EEPROM keep type up
counter (16 bits)
Section 4.6
General type
C200 to C219 20 points −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 counts
bi-directional counter (32 bits)
EEPROM keep bi-directional
C220 to C234 15 points −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 counts
counter (32 bits)
High-speed counter
1-phase 1-counting input Bi-
directional (32 bits) C235 to C245
(EEPROM keep)
−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 counts
Software counter
directional (32 bits) C246 to C250 Section 4.7
1 phase: 60 kHz × 4 points, 10 kHz × 2 points
(EEPROM keep)
2 phases: 30 kHz × 2 points, 5 kHz × 1 point
directional (32 bits) C251 to C255
(EEPROM keep)
*1. When the optional battery is installed, general type devices can be changed to latched (battery backed) type
devices by the parameter setting. However, the latched range cannot be set.
*2. Operation varies when M2800 to M3071 are used in the LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP and ORF instructions.
Refer to Section 7.5 for the details.
86
1
Introduction
General type (16 bits) D0 to D127 128 points
EEPROM keep type
(16 bits)
General type (16 bits)*1 D1100 to D7999 6900 points Section 4.9
2
Overview
Among 7000 latched type data registers backed
EEPROM keep type up by the EEPROM, D1000 and later can be set
D1000 to D7999 7000 points
(16 bits) <file register> as file registers in units of 500 points by the
parameter setting.
Index type (16 bits) V0 to V7, Z0 to Z7 16 points Section 4.11 3
Extension register/Extension file register
List
Instruction
Extension register
R0 to R23999 24000 points
(16 bits)*1
Extension file register Section 4.10
(16 bits) ER0 to ER23999 24000 points
(EEPROM keep)
Pointer
4
in Detail
Devices
For jump and branch call P0 to P2047 2048 points For CJ and CALL instructions
Input interrupt I0 to I5 6 points Section 4.12
Nesting
For master control
Constant
N0 to N7 8 points For MC instruction
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
16 bits −32,768 to +32,767
Decimal (K)
32 bits −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
16 bits 0 to FFFF
Hexadecimal (H)
32 bits 0 to FFFFFFFF Chapter 5
−1.0 × 2128 to −1.0 × 2−126, 0, 1.0 × 2−126 to 1.0 × 2128 6

Real number (E)*3 32 bits Both the decimal point expression and the exponent expression
Programming
Before
are available.
*1. When the optional battery is installed, general type devices can be changed to latched (battery backed) type
devices by the parameter setting. However, the latched range cannot be set.
For handling of the latched area, refer to Section 2.6. 7
*3. Available in Ver. 1.10 or later.
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
87
3) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs

I/O relay
Input relay X000 to X367*1 248 points Device numbers are octal.
Section 4.2
Output relay Y000 to Y367 *1 248 points The total number of inputs and outputs is 256.
Auxiliary relay
General type [variable] M0 to M499 500 points The setting can be changed between the latched
Latched (battery backed) (battery backed) type and the non-latched type
M500 to M1023 524 points using parameters.
type [variable] Section 4.3
Latched (battery backed)
M1024 to M7679*2 6656 points
type [fixed]
State relay
Initial state (general type
S0 to S9 10 points
[variable])
General type [variable] S10 to S499 490 points
The setting can be changed between the latched
S500 to S899 400 points
type [variable] using parameters. Section 4.4
Annunciator
(latched (battery backed) S900 to S999 100 points
type [variable])
Latched (battery backed)
S1000 to S4095 3096 points
type [fixed]
100 ms [for subroutine or
interrupt routine]
10 ms T200 to T245 46 points 0.01 to 327.67 sec Section 4.5
Retentive type for 1 ms T246 to T249 4 points 0.001 to 32.767 sec
Retentive type for 100 ms T250 to T255 6 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
Counter
(16 bits) [variable]
The setting can be changed between the latched
type up counter C100 to C199 100 points using parameters.
General type Section 4.6
bi-directional counter C200 to C219 20 points −2,147,483,648 to
(32 bits) [variable] +2,147,483,647 counts
Latched (battery backed) The setting can be changed between the latched
type (battery backed) type and the non-latched type
C220 to C234 15 points using parameters.
bi-directional counter
*1. Available device numbers vary depending on the PLC. For details, refer to Section 4.2.
*2. Operation varies when M2800 to M3071 are used in the LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP and ORF instructions.
Refer to Section 7.5 for the details.
*3. For supported functions, refer to Chapter 37.
For handling of the latched (battery backed) area, refer to Section 2.6.
88
1
Introduction
High-speed counter
8 points maximum can be used among C235 to C255 [latched
1-phase 1-counting input (battery backed) type].
C235 to C245
Bi-directional (32 bits) The setting can be changed between the latched (battery

backed) type and the non-latch type using parameters.
−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 counts 2
C246 to C250
Hardware counter*1
Overview
Bi-directional (32 bits)
1 phase: 100 kHz × 6 points, 10 kHz × 2 points Section 4.8
2 phases: 50 kHz (1 edge count),
50 kHz (4 edge count)
2-phase 2-counting input Software counter
C251 to C255
Bi-directional (32 bits) 1 phase: 40 kHz
2 phases: 40 kHz (1 edge count),
10 kHz (4 edge count)
3
List
Instruction
General type (16 bits)
[variable] The setting can be changed between the latched
latched (battery backed) (battery backed) type and the non-latched type
type (16 bits) D200 to D511 312 points using parameters.
[variable]
Section 4.9
4
latched (battery backed) D512 to D7999 7488 points Among the 7488 fixed latched (battery backed)
in Detail
Devices
type (16 bits) <D1000 to <7000 type data registers, D1000 and later can be set as
[fixed] <file register> D7999> points> file registers in units of 500 points.

Index type (16 bits) V0 to V7, Z0 to Z7 16 points Section 4.11
Extension register/Extension file register 5
Extension register
Constant
Device &
Specified the
R0 to R32767 32768 points latched (battery backed)
(16 bits)
Section 4.10
Extension file register Available only while a memory cassette is
ER0 to ER32767 32768 points
(16 bits) mounted
Pointer
For jump and branch call
Input interrupt
P0 to P4095 4096 points For CJ and CALL instructions
6
I0 to I5 6 points
Programming
Before
Input delay interrupt Section 4.12
Counter interrupt I010 to I060 6 points For HSCS instruction
Nesting
For master control
Constant
N0 to N7 8 points For MC instruction
7
Instruction
Basic
16 bits −32768 to +32767
Decimal (K)
32 bits −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
16 bits 0 to FFFF
Hexadecimal (H)
32 bits 0 to FFFFFFFF
Real number (E) 32 bits

−1.0 × 2128 to −1.0 × 2−126, 0, 1.0 × 2−126 to 1.0 × 2128
Both the decimal point expression and the exponent expression
Chapter 5 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
are available.
Specify characters by quotation marks.
Character string (" ") Character string In a constant of an instruction, up to 32 half-width characters are
available.
*1. When the FX3U-4HSX-ADP is connected to an FX3U PLC, the maximum input frequency is set as follows:
1 phase: 200 kHz 9
2 phases: 100 kHz (1 edge count). 100 kHz (4 edge count)
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
*2. For supported functions, refer to Chapter 37.

For handling of the latched (battery backed) area, refer to Section 2.6.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y]
4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y]

Some input relays and output relays are secured in the main unit, and others are assigned to extension devices
according to the connection order. Because I/O replays are numbered in octal, numeric values such as "8" and "9" do
not exist.
4.2.1 Numbers of I/O relays

The table below shows input relay (X) and output relays (Y) numbering. (Relay numbers are assigned in octal.)
Model
FX3S-10M FX3S-14M FX3S-20M FX3S-30M
name
30
FX3S X000 to X005 X000 to X007 X000 to X013 X000 to X017
Input points in
PLC 6 points 8 points 12 points 16 points
total
Y000 to Y003 Y000 to Y005 Y000 to Y007 Y000 to Y015
Output
4 points 6 points 8 points 14 points
Model
FX3G-14M FX3G-24M FX3G-40M FX3G-60M When extended
name
X000 to X007 X000 to X015 X000 to X027 X000 to X043 X000 to X177 128
FX3G
Input *1 points in
PLC 8 points 14 points(16) 24 points 36 points(40)*1 128 points
total
Y000 to Y005 Y000 to Y011 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y027 Y000 to Y177
Output
6 points(8)*1 10 points(16)*1 16 points 24 points 128 points
Model FX3GC-32MT/
When extended
name D(SS)
128
FX3GC X000 to X017 X000 to X177
Input points in
PLC 16 points 128 points
total
Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y177
Output
16 points 128 points
Model When
FX3U-16M FX3U-32M FX3U-48M FX3U-64M FX3U-80M FX3U-128M
name extended
256
FX3U X000 to X007 X000 to X017 X000 to X027 X000 to X037 X000 to X047 X000 to X077 X000 to X367
Input points in
PLC 8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points 248 points
total
Y000 to Y007 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y027 Y000 to Y037 Y000 to Y047 Y000 to Y077 Y000 to Y367
Output
8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points 248 points
)
Model When
FX3UC-16M FX3UC-32M FX3UC-64M FX3UC-96M
name extended
256
X000 to X007 X000 to X017 X000 to X037 X000 to X057 X000 to X367
FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLC Input points
8 points 16 points 32 points 48 points 248 points
in total
Y000 to Y007 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y037 Y000 to Y057 Y000 to Y367
Output
8 points 16 points 32 points 48 points 248 points
Model FX3UC-32MT-LT
When extended
name (-2)
256
X000 to X017 X000 to X357
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC Input points in
total
Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y357
Output
*1. A number inside ( ) indicates the number of occupied points. The difference from the number of valid points is
unused.
90
1
4.2.2 Functions and roles
Introduction
Examples of terminal names and wiring (sink input) are for the FX3U Series PLC.
0V
External power
24V
supply 2
COM1
Overview
Program example
S/S
Input X000 X001
signal Y000 Y000
X000 X000
Load
Y000
X000 Y000
NO contact
3
Input
List
Instruction
terminal X000 Y000 Output terminal
PLC NC contact
The PLC receives signals from external switches

through input terminals.
The PLC outputs signals to external loads through
output terminals. Contacts for external output
4
in Detail
Devices
An input relay (X) connected to an input terminal (output devices such as relay contacts, triacs and
inside the PLC is an electronic relay isolated transistors) of output relays are connected to output
optically, and has many NO contacts and NC terminals inside the PLC. An output relay has many
contacts. These contacts can be arbitrarily used electronic NO contacts and NC contacts. These
inside the PLC. contacts can be arbitrarily used inside the PLC.
These input relays cannot be driven by the program. Differences in operations between external output
contacts (output devices) and internal contacts are
explained on the next page. 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
91
4.2.3 Operation timing of I/O relays

The PLC executes sequence control by repeatedly executing the following processing procedure. In this batch I/O
method, not only are there driving times of input filters and output devices but also response delays caused by
operation cycles. (Refer to Section 6.3.)
1) 2) 3) .... 6) indicate the processing order.
Input processing
1) Read-in Input processing
Before executing a program, the PLC reads the ON/
X000 OFF status of all input terminals inside the PLC into
X001 the input image memory.
Even if inputs change while the program is
Input terminal
X002 Input executed, the contents of the input image memory

remain unchanged, but the changes in inputs are
Image read during the input processing in the next cycle.
Even if an input contact changes from ON to OFF or
Memory from OFF to ON, its ON/OFF status is judged after
the response delay (approximately 10 ms) caused
by the input filter.
(When the input filter is a digital type input terminal ,
its value can be overwritten by a sequence
program.)
2) Read-out Program processing Program processing

The PLC reads the ON/OFF status of each device
X000 from the input image memory and other device
Y000 image memories according to the contents of
3) Write
instructions in the program memory, executes
4) Read- Device operations in sequence from step 0, and then writes
out the operation result to the image memory.
M0 Image Accordingly, the contents of the image memory for
Y000 5) Write each device change as the program is executed.
Memory The operation of a contact inside an output relay is
Auxiliary determined by the contents of the output image
relay memory.
(scan time).]
operation is called operation cycle
[The time required for a cyclic
Repeated operation
Output processing Output processing

6) Output
When execution of all instructions is finished, the
ON/OFF status of the image memory of outputs (Y)
Y000 is transferred to the output latch memory. This is
Y001 the actual output of the PLC.
External output contacts inside the PLC operate
Output terminal
Output Y002 after the response delay time of the output devices.
Latch
Memory
The above method is called the batch I/O method (or refresh method).
92
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M]
1
4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M]
Introduction
There are many auxiliary relays inside the PLC. Coils of auxiliary relays are driven by contacts of various devices
inside the PLC in the same way as output relays.
Auxiliary relays have many electronically NO contacts and NC contacts which can be used arbitrarily inside the PLC.
However, external loads cannot be driven directly by these contacts. External loads should be driven by output relays. 2
Overview
4.3.1 Numbers of auxiliary relays
The table below shows auxiliary relay (M) numbers. (Numbers are assigned in decimal.)
1. FX3S PLC
General type
Fixed latched
General type Special type
3
(EEPROM keep) type
List
Instruction
M0 to M383 M384 to M511 M512 to M1535 M8000 to M8511
2. FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
General type
Fixed latched
(EEPROM keep) type
General type Special type 4
in Detail
Devices
384 points 1152 points 6144 points*1 512 points
3. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
General type
Latched
(battery backed) type
Fixed latched
Special type 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
500 points*2 524 points*3 6656 points*4 512 points
*1. These registers can be changed to the latched (battery backed) type by the parameter setting when the
optional battery is used. However, the latched range cannot be set.
*2. This area is not latched (battery backed). It can be changed to a latched (battery backed) area by setting the
parameters. 6
Programming
Before
*3. This area is latched (battery backed). It can be changed to a non-latched (non-battery-backed) area by setting
the parameters.
*4. The characteristics of latch (battery backup) cannot be changed in the parameters.
When N : N Network or parallel link is used, some auxiliary relays are occupied for the link.
→ Refer to the Data Communication Edition manual. 7
Instruction
Basic
4.3.2 Functions and operation examples
1. General type
All of general type auxiliary relays turn OFF when the PLC turns OFF.
M100 When the ON/OFF status of auxiliary relays just before power failure is 8
required in control, use latched (battery backed) type auxiliary relays.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
M100
NO contact
M100
NC contact
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Auxiliary relay circuit
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
93
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M]
2. Latched (battery backed) type

When the power is turned OFF while the PLC is operating, all of the output relays and general type auxiliary relays
turn OFF.
When restoring the power again, all of the output relays and general type auxiliary relays remain OFF except those
whose input condition is ON. In some output relays and auxiliary relays, however, the ON/OFF status just before
power failure should be stored and then replicated when restoring the power, depending on control targets. In such a
case, use latched (battery backed) type auxiliary relays.
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, latched (battery backed) type devices are backed up by the battery built into the PLC.
In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, latched type devices are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC. When the optional
battery is installed in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the battery backs up some general type devices.
→ For details on backup method against power failure,

refer to Section 2.6.
X000 X001
The figure on the left shows an operation example of M600
M600 (latched [battery backed] type device) in a self-holding
circuit.
M600 When X000 turns ON and M600 turns ON in this circuit,
M600 holds its operation by itself even if X000 is opened.
PLC Because M600 is a latched (battery backed) type device, it
Backup against power failure remains activated when the operation is restarted even after
(self-holding circuit)
X000 has turned OFF due to power failure. If an NC contact
of X001 is opened when the operation is restarted, however,
M600 is deactivated.
X000
SET M600 The figure on the left shows a circuit using the SET and RST
instructions.
X001
RST M600
PLC
Backup against power failure
(set/reset circuit)
1) Application example of latched (battery backed) type auxiliary relays

Limit switch Limit switch In some cases, the table should be restarted in the same
Left limit Right limit direction as the direction selected just before power failure.
LS1 (X000) LS2 (X001)
Table in reciprocating motion

Motor with brake
X000 X001 X000 = ON (at the left limit) → M600 = ON→ The table is
M600 Rightward driven rightward. → The power is turned OFF. → The table
drive is stopped in an intermediate position. → The table is
M600 command restarted (M600 = ON). → X001 = ON (at the right limit) →
M600 = OFF, M601 = ON → The table is driven leftward.
X001 X000
M601 Leftward drive
command
M601
2) Method for using a fixed latched (battery backed) type auxiliary relay as a general type auxiliary relay
When using a fixed latched (battery backed) type auxiliary relay as a general type auxiliary relay, provide a reset
circuit shown in the figure below around the head step in the program.
Ex. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
M8002
FNC 40 M1024 M1999
ZRST
Initial pulse
M1024 to M1999 are initialized.
94
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.4 State Relay [S]
1
4.4 State Relay [S]
Introduction
State relays (S) are important devices to program stepping type process control simply, and combined with the step
ladder instruction STL.
State relays can be used in the SFC (sequential function chart) programming method.
→ For programming by the step ladder instruction and SFC method, refer to Chapter 35. 2
Overview
4.4.1 Numbers of state relays
The table below shows state relay (S) numbers. (Numbers are assigned in decimal.)
1. FX3S PLC
Initial state type Fixed latched
General type
3
(EEPROM keep) (EEPROM keep) type
List
Instruction
S0 to S9 S10 to S127 S128 to S255
10 points 118 points 128 points
2. FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Initial state type
(EEPROM keep)
Fixed latched
(EEPROM keep) type
Annunciator type
(EEPROM keep)
General type 4
in Detail
Devices
S0 to S9 S10 to S899 S900 to S999 S1000 to S4095
10 points 890 points 100 points 3096 points*1
3. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Initial state type General type
Latched
Fixed latched
Annunciator type 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
S0 to S9 S0 to S499 S500 to S899 S1000 to S4095 S900 to S999
10 points*2 500 points*2 400 points*3 3096 points*4 100 points*3
*2. This area is not latched (battery backed). It can be changed to a latched (battery backed) area by setting the
parameters. 6
Programming
Before
the parameters.
*4. The characteristics of latch (battery backup) cannot be changed in the parameters.
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
95
1. General type
Initial state In the stepping type process control shown in the left
S 2 figure, when the start signal X000 turns ON, the state relay
Start S20 is set (turned ON) and the solenoid valve Y000 for
X000 moving down turns on.
TRAN
Start When the lower limit switch X001 turns ON the state relay
Moving down S21 is set (turned ON) and the solenoid valve Y001 for
S 20 Y000 clamping turns on.
When the clamp confirmation limit switch X002 turns ON,
Lower limit the state relay S22 is set (turned ON).
X001
Lower TRAN When the operation proceeds to the next step, the state
limit relay in the preceding step is automatically reset (turned
Clamping OFF).
S 21 Y001
When the PLC turns OFF, all of general type state relays
Clamping
X002 are turned OFF.
Clamping TRAN When the ON/OFF status just before power failure is
required, use latched (battery backed) type state relays.
Moving up
S 22 Y002
Upper limit
Upper X003
limit TRAN
State relays have many NO contacts and NC contacts in the same way as X001
auxiliary relays, and such contacts can be used arbitrarily in sequence S10
programs.
When state relays (S) are not used for step ladder instructions, they can be used S10
in general sequences in the same way as auxiliary relays (M) (as shown in the M30
figure on the right).
Y005
2. Latched (battery backed) type

• Latched (battery backed) type state relays store their ON/OFF status even if the power is shut down while the PLC
is operating, so the operation can be restarted from the last point in the process.
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, latched (battery backed) type devices are backed up by the battery built into the PLC.
In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, latched type devices are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC. When the
optional battery is installed in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the battery backs up some general type devices.
→ For details on backup against power failure, refer to Chapter 2.6.
• When using latched (battery backed) type state relays as general Ex. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
type state relays, provide a reset circuit shown in the right figure
around the head step in the program. M8002
0 FNC 40 S1000 S1200
ZRST
Initial pulse
S1000 to S1200 are initialized.
96
1
3. Annunciator type
Introduction
Annunciator type state relays can be used as outputs for external fault diagnosis.
For example, when an external fault diagnosis circuit shown in the figure below is created and the contents of the
special data register D8049 are monitored, the smallest number out of the active state relays S900 to S999 is stored in
D8049.
If two or more faults have occurred, the smallest state number having a fault is displayed at first. When the fault is 2
cleared, the next smallest state number having a fault is stored.
Overview
M8000
• When the special auxiliary relay M8049 is driven,
M8049 monitoring becomes valid.
RUN monitor
3
Y000 X000
List
Instruction
FNC 46 • If the forward end detection input X000 is not
T 0 K 10 S900 activated within 1 second after the forward output
ANS
Y000 is driven, S900 is activated.
X001 X002
FNC 46 T 1 K 20 S901
• If both the upper limit detection input X001 and the
lower limit detection input X002 are deactivated at the
4
ANS
in Detail
Devices
same time for 2 seconds or more, S901 is activated.
X003 X004 • In a machine whose tact time is less than 10 seconds,

FNC 46 T 2 K100 S902 if the switch X004 which is designed to be activated
ANS during one-cycle operation of the machine is not
activated while the continuous operation mode input 5
X003 is ON, S902 is activated.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
M8048
• When any annunciator among S900 to S999 turns
Y010 ON, the special auxiliary relay M8048 is activated and
the fault display output Y010 is activated.
6
X005 • The state relays activated by the external fault
Programming
Before
FNC 47 diagnosis program can be turned OFF by the reset
ANRP button X005.
Every time X005 is set to ON, the active annunciator
with the smallest number is reset in turn.
While the special auxiliary relay M8049 is not driven, annunciator type state relays can be used as latched (battery
backed) type state relays in sequence programs in the same way as general type state relays. 7
In the SFC programming mode in the FX-PCS/WIN(-E), however, S900 to S999 cannot be programmed as a
Instruction
Basic
processes flow in SFC diagrams.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
97
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T]
4.5 Timer [T]

Timers add and count clock pulses of 1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, etc. inside the PLC. When the counted value reaches a
specified set value, the output contact of the timer turns on.
A set value can be directly specified by a constant (K) in the program memory, or indirectly specified by the contents of
a data register (D).
4.5.1 Numbers of timers
The table below shows timer (T) numbers. (The numbers are assigned in decimal.)
1. FX3S PLC
For 100/10 ms
Retentive type for Retentive type for Potentiometer type
For 100 ms pulses pulses For 1 ms pulses
1 ms pulses 100 ms pulses 0 to 255
0.1 to 3276.7 sec 0.1 to 3276.7 sec 0.001 to 32.767 sec
0.001 to 32.767 sec 0.1 to 3276.7 sec (numeric value)
0.01 to 327.67 sec
T128 to T131 2 built-in points*2
T132 to T137
T0 to T62 T32 to T62 T63 to T127 4 points
6 points
63 points 31 points 65 points Interrupt execution Stored in D8030 and
Latched type*1
Latched type*1 D8031
2. FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Retentive type for Retentive type for Potentiometer type
For 100 ms pulses For 10 ms pulses For 1 ms pulses
1 ms pulses 100 ms pulses 0 to 255
0.1 to 3276.7 sec 0.01 to 327.67 sec 0.001 to 32.767 sec
0.001 to 32.767 sec 0.1 to 3276.7 sec (numeric value)
T0 to T199
200 points T246 to T249 2 built-in points*3
T250 to T255
------------- T200 to T245 4 points for T256 to T319
6 points
Routine program 46 points Interrupt execution 64 points Stored in D8030 and
Latched type*1
type Latched type*1 D8031
T192 to T199
3. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Retentive type for Retentive type for
For 100 ms pulses For 10 ms pulses For 1 ms pulses
0.1 to 3276.7 sec 0.01 to 327.67 sec 1 ms pulses*4 100 ms pulses*4 0.001 to 32.767 sec
0.001 to 32.767 sec 0.1 to 3276.7 sec
T0 to T199 T246 to T249
T250 to T255
200 points 4 points for
T200 to T245 6 points T256 to T511
------------- Interrupt execution
46 points Latched (battery 256 points
Routine program type Latched (battery
backed) type*4
T192 to T199 backed) type*4
Timer numbers not used for timers can be used as data registers for storing numeric values.
*1. In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, retentive type timers are backed up by the EEPROM memory.
*2. This function is not supported in the FX3S-30M/E-2AD PLC.
*3. This function is supported only in FX3G PLC.
*4. In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, retentive type timers are backed up by the battery.
1. General type
X000 When the drive input X000 of the timer coil T200 turns ON, the current
T200 K123 value counter for T200 adds and counts clock pulses of 10 ms. When
T200 Set value the counted value becomes equivalent to the set value K123, the
Y000 (constant) output contact of the timer turns on.
A data register In other words, the output contact turns on 1.23 seconds after the coil
can be
specified also. is driven.
1.23 sec When the drive input X000 turns OFF or when the power is turned off
X000 the timer is reset and the output contact returns.
Current Set value
value
Y000
[The program of 100 ms/10 ms type timer of the FX3S PLC]

M8000 For FX3S, driving M8028 ON, timers T32 to T62 are changed to
M8028 10 ms resolution.
RUN monitor
X003
T32 K100
1-second timer
98
1
2. Retentive type
Introduction
X001 Set value When the drive input X001 of the timer coil T250 turns ON, the current
T250 K345 (constant) value counter for T250 adds and counts clock pulses of 100 ms.
T250 A data register When the counted value becomes equivalent to the set value K345,
Y001 can be the output contact of the timer turns on.
specified also.
Even if the drive input X001 turns OFF or the power is turned off
X002
RST T250 during counting, the timer continues counting when the operation 2
restarts. The retentive operating time is 34.5 seconds.
Overview
When the reset input X002 turns ON, the timer is reset and the output
Retentive time contact is returned.
t1 t2
t1 + t2 = 34.5 sec
X001
Set value
Current
value 3
Y001
List
Instruction
X002
3. Potentiometer type
1) When variable analog potentiometers built in the FX3S/FX3G PLCs are used*1 4
Values of variable analog potentiometers built
in Detail
Devices
[Basic example]
in FX3S/FX3G PLCs as standard are stored as
X003 numeric data ranging from 0 to 255 in the
T10 D08030
following special registers in accordance with
the scale position.
This register stores the 0 to 25.5 sec An obtained numeric value can be specified
value (0 to 255) of variable
analog potentiometer.
as the indirectly specified value for a timer to 5
make a variable potentiometer type analog
Constant
Device &
Specified the
timer.
[Applied example] •VR1 → D8030 (Integer from 0 to 255)
M8000 •VR2 → D8031 (Integer from 0 to 255)
FNC 22
D8031 K2 DO (D1)
RUN monitor MUL
"D8030 (VR2) value x 2" is transferred to D0 (D1). 6
(0 to 51 sec)
Programming
Before
X003
T10 D0
The set value range can be
changed (up to 32,767) by multiplying
the register value by "n".
Do not use D1 in other programs. 7
Instruction
Basic
*1. This function is not supported in the FX3S-30M/E-2AD PLC.
2) When variable analog potentiometers (expansion board) are used

The value of a variable analog potentiometer board
volume Read
which can be built in an FX3S/FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC-
X000
FNC 85
number destination
32MT-LT(-2) PLC can be obtained as numeric data 8
K0 D0 ranging from 0 to 255 in accordance with the scale
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
VRRD
position.
An obtained numeric value can be specified as the
indirectly specified value for a timer to make a
X001
T0
D0 variable potentiometer type analog timer.
Use the FNC 85 (VRRD) instruction to take the
value of a variable analog potentiometer into the 9
Example of application as analog timer PLC.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
→ For FNC 85 (VRRD), refer to Section 16.6.

Use the FNC 86 (VRSC) instruction to take the
The analog value of the potentiometer No. 0 is converted into
value of a variable analog potentiometer as a
binary 8-bit data, and a numeric value ranging from 0 to 255
is transferred to D0.
numeric value ranging from 0 to 10.
→ For FNC 86 (VRSC), refer to Section 16.7.
In this application example, the value of D0 is used as the set
value of a timer.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
99
4.5.3 Set value specification method
1. Specifying a constant (K)

Constant
T10 is a 100 ms (0.1 sec) type timer.
X003 (decimal integer) When the constant "100" is specified, T10 works as a 10-
T10 K100 10-second timer second timer (0.1 sec × 100 = 10 sec).
2. Indirectly specifying a data register

Turns on when T10 reaches the indirectly specified value of
X001 the defined data register, previously set by a digital switch.
FNC 12 K100 D 5
MOV Note that the set value of a latched (battery backed) type
register is not held correctly sometimes when the battery
D5 = K100 voltage becomes low.
X003 10-second
T10 D5 timer
4.5.4 Cautions on routines
1) Use timers T192 to T199 in subroutines and interrupt routines. These timers execute counting when a coil
instruction or END instruction is executed.
When such a timer reaches the set value, its output contact turns on when a coil instruction or END instruction is
executed.
Because general type timers execute counting only when a coil instruction is executed (Refer to "4.5.5 Details on
timer operation and timer accuracy" below), they do not execute counting and do not operate normally if they are
used in subroutines or interrupt routines in which a coil instruction is executed only in a certain condition.
2) When a retentive timer for 1 ms pulses (T246 to T249) is used in a subroutine or interrupt routine, note that its
output contact turns on when the first coil instruction is executed after the retentive timer has reached the set
value.
4.5.5 Details on timer operation and timer accuracy

A timer (except interrupt execution type) starts counting when a coil is driven, and its output contact turns on when the
first coil instruction is executed after the timer has reached timeout.
Counting operation (If the operation cycle is long,
it automatically counts two or more clocks.)
Contact is not
Input processing X010 = OFF→ON activated at this point
X010 Timer starts counting
T 0
T 0 Contact is
K12 1.2 sec activated
time-
out
T 0 Y010
Y010 ON
1st cycle 2nd cycle "n"th cycle "n+1"th cycle
As shown in the above operation diagram, the accuracy of operation of the timer contact after the coil is driven until the
contact turns on is shown in the following outline:
T
+T0 α : 0.001 sec (timer for 1 ms), 0.01 sec (timer for 10 ms) or 0.1 sec (timer for 100 ms)
−α T : Timer set value (sec)
T0: Operation cycle (sec)
If the contact is programmed before the timer coil, "+2T0" is obtained in the worst case.
When the timer set value is "0", the output contact turns on when a coil instruction is executed in the next cycle. An
interrupt execution type timer for 1 ms pulses counts clock pulses of 1 ms as an interrupt processing after a coil
instruction has been executed.
100
1
4.5.6 Program examples [off-delay timer and flicker timer]
Introduction
Off-delay timer
X001 T5
Y000 X001 2
Overview
Y000 X001
T 5 K200 Y000 T5 (20 sec)
Flicker timer (blink)

3
X001
List
Instruction
X001 T2 2 1 2
T 1 K20 sec sec sec
T1 T2 T1
T 1
T 2 K10 Y000
T 2 One
4
operation
in Detail
Devices
Y000 ( )
cycle
In addition, the flicker operation can be performed by the ALT (FNC 66) instruction.
Multi-timer by the applied instruction STMR (FNC 65) <FX3U/FX3UC PLC>

By this instruction, off-delay timers, one-shot timers and flicker timers can be easily created. 5
→ For details, refer to Section 14.6.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Off-delay timer and one-shot timer
S m D
X000
FNC 65 • A value specified by "m" becomes the set value
T 10 K100 M0
STMR of the timer specified by S  . 10-second in this
example.
6
Programming
Before
X000
10 10 • M0 is an off-delay timer.
M0
sec sec
M1 10 10 • M1 is a one-shot timer after "ON → OFF" 7

sec sec operation.
Instruction
Basic
M2 10 • M2 and M3 are provided for a flicker timer, and
sec connected as shown in the program example for
flicker timer (below).
M3
8
Flicker timer
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
X000 M 3 • When M3 is connected as shown in the left

FNC 65 T 10 K100 M0
STMR figure, M2 and M1 become flicker outputs.
X000 • When X000 is set to OFF, M0, M1 and M3 are

turned OFF and T10 is reset after the set time. 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
M 2
M 1 • Do not use the timers here in other general

circuits again.
In addition, the timer time can be set according to the switch input time by the teaching timer instruction TTMR (FNC 10
64).
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
101
4.5.7 Handling timers as numeric devices

In timers, the output contact operating in accordance with the set value is used in some cases, and the present value
is used as numeric data for control in other cases.
The figures below show the structure of the timer present value registers. When a timer number is specified in an
operand of an applied instruction, the timer is handled as a device storing 16-bit or 32-bit data in the same way as data
registers.
1. Structure of timer present value register

1) 16-bit
High 16 bits Low Available numeric value range
order order 16-bit : 0 to 32,767
b15 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b0 32-bit : -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
*1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
*1 The sign is valid only when a timer is handled as a substitute for data register.
2) 32-bit
High 32 bits Low
order order
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
b31 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b0
1,073,741,824
536,870,912
268,435,456
134,217,728
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216
8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
2. Use examples in applied instructions

For the full use of timers as numeric devices, refer to the explanation of applied instructions later.
102
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C]
1
4.6 Counter [C]
Introduction
4.6.1 Numbers of counters
The table below shows counter (C) numbers. (Numbers are assigned in decimal.) 2
Overview
1. FX3S PLC
→ For high-speed counters, refer to Section 4.7.
16-bit up counter 32-bit bi-directional counter
Counting range: 0 to 32767 Counting range: −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
General type Fixed latched (EEPROM keep) type General type
C0 to C15 C16 to C31 C200 to C234 3
List
Instruction
2. FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
16-bit up counter 32-bit bi-directional counter
Counting range: 0 to 32767 Counting range: −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
General type Fixed latched (EEPROM keep) type General type Fixed latched (EEPROM keep) type 4
C0 to C15 C16 to C199 C200 to C219 C220 to C234
in Detail
Devices
3. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
16-bit up counter
Counting range: 0 to 32767
32-bit bi-directional counter
Counting range: −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Latched (battery backed) Latched (battery backed)
General type type (protected by battery against General type type (protected by battery against
power failure) power failure)
C0 to C99 C100 to C199 C200 to C219 C220 to C234
100 points*1 100 points*2 20 points*1 15 points*2
*1. This area is not latched (battery backed). It can be changed to a latched (battery backed) area by setting the 6
parameters.
Programming
Before
the parameters.
Counter numbers not used as counters can be converted as data registers for storing numeric values.
7
4.6.2 Features of counters
Instruction
Basic
The table below shows the features of 16-bit counters and 32-bit counters. They can be used in accordance with the
operating condition such as the counting direction switching and counting range, etc.
Item 16-bit counter 32-bit counter
Up-counting and down-counting can be switched (as
Counting direction Up-counting
shown in Subsection 4.6.3) 8
Set value 1 to 32767 −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Set value specification Constant (K) or data register Constant (K) or a pair of data registers
Current value change Does not change after counting up Changes even after counting up (ring counter)
Output contact Latches after counting up Latches (in up-counting), or reset (in down-counting)
Reset operation When RST instruction is executed, current value of counter is reset to "0" and output contact returns
Current value register 16 bits 32 bits 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
103
4.6.3 Related devices (to specify counting direction) [32-bit counter]

When an auxiliary relay for switching the counting direction is set to ON, the counter executes down-counting, and
when set to OFF, the counter executes up-counting.
Counting Counting Counting Counting
direction direction direction direction
Counter No. Counter No. Counter No. Counter No.
switching switching switching switching
relay relay relay relay
C200 M8200 C209 M8209 C218 M8218 C227 M8227
C201 M8201 C210 M8210 C219 M8219 C228 M8228
C202 M8202 C211 M8211 C220 M8220 C229 M8229
C203 M8203 C212 M8212 C221 M8221 C230 M8230
C204 M8204 C213 M8213 C222 M8222 C231 M8231
C205 M8205 C214 M8214 C223 M8223 C232 M8232
C206 M8206 C215 M8215 C224 M8224 C233 M8233
C207 M8207 C216 M8216 C225 M8225 C234 M8234
C208 M8208 C217 M8217 C226 M8226
1. General type and latched (battery backed) type 16-bit up counters

• The valid set range of 16-bit binary up counter is from K1 to K32767 (decimal constant).
K0 provides the same operation as K1, and the output contact turns on at the first counting.
• In general type counters, the counter value is cleared when the PLC turns off. In latch type counters, however, the
counter value just before power failure is stored (backed up by the battery); The counter value in the subsequent
operations can be added to the last counter value.
• Every time the coil C0 is driven by the counting input X011, the current value of the counter increases. When a coil
instruction is executed 10 times, the output contact turns on.
After that, the current value of the counter does not change even if the counting input X011 turns on after that.
When the RST input X010 turns ON and then RST instruction is executed, the current value of the counter is reset
to "0" and the output contact returns.
X010 X010
RST C 0
X011 X011
C 0 K10 10
9
C 0 Set value (constant) 8
Y000 7
It can be specified Current 6
indirectly also. value 5
4
3
2
1
0
Y000
• The counter set value can be set by a constant (K) as shown above, or indirectly specified by a data register
number. For example, when D10 is specified and the contents of D10 are "123", it is equivalent to "K123".
• If data beyond the set value is written to the current value register by MOV instruction, etc., the OUT coil turns ON
and the current value register becomes the set value when the next counting input is received.
• For latched (battery backed) type counters, the current value, output contact operation and reset status are backed
up against power failure.
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, latched type counters are backed up by the battery built into the PLC.
In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, latched type counters are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC.
→ For details on backup methods against power failure, refer to Section 2.6.
104
1
2. General type and latched (battery backed) type 32-bit bi-directional counters
Introduction
The valid set range of 32-bit binary bi-directional counters is from −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 (decimal
constant). The counting direction (up or down) is specified by special auxiliary relays M8200 to M8234.
• When M8 is driven for C, a counter executes down-counting. When M8 is not driven, a counter
executes up-counting. (Refer to the previous page.)
• The set value (positive or negative) can be specified by a constant (K) or the contents of data registers (D). 2
When data registers are used, 32-bit data composed of paired serial devices are treated as set values.
Overview
For example, when D0 is specified, D1 and D0 provide a 32-bit set value.
• When the coil C200 is driven by the counting input X014, a counter starts up-counting or down-counting.
When the current value of a counter increases from "−6" to "−5", the output contact is set. When the current value
decreases from "−5" to "−6", the output contact is reset.
X012 X012 Up counting Down counting Up counting 3

M8200
X013
List
Instruction
X013 X014
RST C200
45 4
Current 3 3
X014 value 2 2
1 1
C200 K-5 0 0 0
−1
4
C200 −2
−3−4 −4−3
in Detail
Devices
Y001 Set value (constant) When output has
−5
It can be specified been already −6 −6−5
indirectly also. activated. −7 −7
−8
Y001
• The current value increases or decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact. When a counter
executes up-counting from "+2,147,483,647", the counter value becomes "−2,147,483,648". In the same way, 5
when a counter executes down-counting from "−2,147,483,648", the counter value becomes "+2,147,483,647".
Constant
Device &
Specified the
(This type of counter is called ring counter.)
• When the reset input X013 turns ON and then RST instruction is executed, the current value of the counter is reset
to "0" and the output contact returns.
• For latched (battery backed) type counters, the current value, output contact operation and reset status are backed
up against power failure.
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, latched type counters are backed up by the battery built into the PLC.
6
Programming
Before
In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, latched type counters are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC.
→ For details on backup methods against power failure, refer to Section 2.6.
• A 32-bit counter can be used as a 32-bit data register. 32-bit counters cannot be handled as target devices in 16-bit
applied instructions.
• If data beyond the set value is written to the current value register by DMOV instruction, etc., the counter continues
counting and the contact does not change when the next counting input is received. 7
Instruction
Basic
4.6.5 Set value specification method
1. 16-bit counter
1) Specification by constant (K) 8
Constant (decimal constant): 1 to 32767
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
X003 100 counts

C0 K100
2) Indirect specification (D)
Counts to the indirectly specified value of the defined data 9

X001 register, previously set by a digital switch.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
FNC 12 K100 D 5 Note that the set value of a latched (battery backed) type
MOV register is not held correctly sometimes when the battery
voltage becomes low.
X003
C0 D5
D5 = 100 10
100 counts
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
105
2. 32-bit counter
1) Specification by constant (K)
Constant (decimal constant):
X003 −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
C200 K43,210 43210 counts
2) Indirect specification (D)
X001 Pairs of data registers are used for indirect specification.

FNC 12 K43210 D5(D6) Use a 32-bit instruction for writing the set value, and make
DMOV sure that the latter of paired registers (D6 in this example)
does not overlap with other programs because it is not
X003 shown in ladder format.
C200 D5(D6)
4.6.6 Response speed of counters

Counters execute counting by cyclic operating for contact operations of internal signals X, Y, M, S, C, etc. inside the
PLC.
For example, when X011 is specified as counting input, its ON duration and OFF duration should be longer than the
scan time of the PLC (which is tens of Hz or less usually).
On the other hand, high-speed counters described later execute counting as an interrupt processing for specific input,
and can execute counting at 5 k to 6 kHz regardless of the scan time.
→ For high-speed counters, refer to Section 4.7 or 4.8.
4.6.7 Handling counters as numeric devices

Counters use output contacts operating in accordance with the set value or use the counter value (current value) as
numeric data for control.
The figure below shows the structure of the current value register of a counter. When a counter number is specified in
an operand of an applied instruction in execution, the counter is handled as a device storing 16-bit or 32-bit data in the
same way as data register.
A 32-bit counter is handled as 32-bit data.
1. Structure of register storing current value of counter

1) 16-bit
High 16 bits Low Available numeric value range

order order 16-bit counter: 0 to 32767
b15 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b0 32-bit counter: −2,147,483,648 to
+2,147,483,647
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
*1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
*1. The sign is valid only when a counter is handled as a substitute for data register.
2) 32-bit
High 32 bits Low

order 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 order
b31 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b0
1,073,741,824
536,870,912
268,435,456
134,217,728
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216
8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
106
1
2. Examples in applied instructions
Introduction
For the full use of counters as numeric devices, refer to the explanation of applied instructions later.
FNC 12 C 20 D 10 C20 (current value) is transferred to D10.
MOV
FNC 10
CMP K100 C 30 M 0
A decimal integer "100" is compared with C30
(current value), and the result is output to M0 to M2.
2
Overview
The contents of C10 (current value) are converted into
FNC 18 BCD, and output to Y000 to Y007.
BCD C 10 K2Y000
(Seven-segment display unit is controlled.)
FNC 22
MUL
C 5 K 2 D4(D5)
C5 (current value) is multiplied by 2, and transferred
to (D5, D4). 3
List
Instruction
FNC 12 C200 D0(D1) C 200 (current value) is transferred to (D1, D0).
DMOV
*1
C200 (current value) is compared with a decimal
FNC 11 integer zone 100 to 20000, and the result is output to
DZCP K100 K20000 C200 M10
M10 and M12. 4
in Detail
Devices
*1. Make sure to use 32-bit operation instructions for 32-bit counters.
3. Caution on simultaneous instances of the ZRST instruction and a counter

The ZRST instruction resets also the last stage and reset state of T and C coils.
Accordingly, if the drive contact of X000 is ON in the following program, the counter executes counting after the ZRST
instruction is executed.
Circuit program 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
M0 FNC 40
C0 C100
ZRST
RST M0
6
K10
Programming
Before
X000
C0
Timing chart
one operation one operation one operation one operation
cycle
ON
cycle cycle cycle
ON
7
Instruction
Basic
X000 OFF OFF
ON
M0 OFF
3 4
2
8
Current 1
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
value 0 Counting is
of C0 executed when
X000 is ON.
OUT instruction ZRST instruction OUT instruction OUT instruction
execution execution execution execution
Program in the following way to disable counting after execution of the ZRST instruction: 9
Circuit program
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
M0 FNC 40
C0 C100
ZRST
RST M0
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
K10
X000
C0
107
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs)
4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs)
4.7.1 Types and device numbers of high-speed counters
1. Types of high-speed counters

The main unit has built-in 32-bit high-speed bi-directional counters (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-phase 2-
count). Some high-speed counters are capable of using an external reset input terminal and an external start input
terminal (for counting start).
2. Classification of high-speed counters according to counting method

These types of counters execute counting as CPU interrupt processing.
Observe both the restriction in response frequency for each counter and the restriction in total frequency when using
high-speed counters.
→ For the limitation of response frequency depending on the total frequency, refer to Subsection 4.7.7.
3. Types of high-speed counters and input signal forms

The table below shows the types (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-phase 2-count) and input signals
(waveforms) of high-speed counters.
Input signal form Counting direction
Down-count or up-count is specified by
1-phase turning on or off M8235 to M8245.
1-count input UP/DOWN ON: Down-counting
OFF: Up-counting
A counter executes up-count or down-
+1 +1 +1 count as shown on the left.
1-phase UP The counting direction can be checked
2-count input −1 −1 −1 with M8246 to M8250.
ON: Down-counting
DOWN
OFF: Up-counting
A counter automatically executes up-
count or down-count according to
A phase A phase changes in the input status of the A/B
2-phase +1 +1 −1 −1 phase as shown on the left.
2-count input B phase B phase The counting direction can be checked
with M8251 to M8255.
Up-counting Down-counting ON: Down-counting
OFF: Up-counting
4. Cautions on counterpart equipment connected to high-speed counter inputs

General-purpose inputs X000 to X007 are used for high-speed counter inputs. An encoder*1 adopting the output
method shown in the table below can be connected depending on the connected terminal.
Encoders adopting the voltage output method and absolute encoders cannot be connected to high-speed counter
inputs.
→ For the wiring, refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Output method of encoder which can be directly connected to input
Open collector transistor output method compatible with 24V DC
terminal in main unit
*1. A rotary encoder adopting the output method shown above may not operate correctly depending on the
electrical compatibility. Check the specifications before connecting an encoder.
108
1
5. High-speed counter device list
Introduction
External reset External start
Classification Counter No. Data length
input terminal input terminal
C235
C236
C237
C238
Not provided Not provided
2
C239 32-bit
1-phase
Overview
C240 bi-directional
1-count input
C241 counter
C242 Provided Not provided
C243
C244
Provided Provided
C245
C246
Not provided Not provided
3
C248(OP)*1
List
Instruction
32-bit
1-phase C247
bi-directional Provided Not provided
2-count input C248 counter
C249
Provided Provided
C250
C251
C253(OP)*1
C254(OP)*2 32-bit
Not provided Not provided 4
2-phase
in Detail
Devices
C252 bi-directional
2-count input Provided Not provided
C253 counter
C254
Provided Provided
C255
*1. C248 and C253 are usually used as counters having reset input, but can be used as counters C248 (OP) and
C253 (OP) not having reset input when used together with special auxiliary relays M8388 and M8392. 5
→ For the method to switch the counter function, refer to Subsection 4.7.6.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
*2. C254 is usually used as a counter having reset input and start input, but can be used as a counter C254 (OP)
not having reset input or start input when used together with special auxiliary relays M8388 and M8395.
This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
Notation of high-speed counter devices

6
Programming
Before
In some high-speed counters in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the input terminal assignment is changed over when used
together with special auxiliary relays.
Such high-speed counter devices are classified below. Note that description as (OP) is not available in programming.
Standard Device Numbers Switched Device Numbers
C248 C248(OP)
7
C253 C253(OP)
Instruction
Basic
C254 C254(OP)
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
109
4.7.2 Input assignment for high-speed counters

Inputs X000 to X007 are assigned as shown in the table below according to each high-speed counter number.
When a high-speed counter is used, the filter constant of a corresponding input number in the main unit automatically
changes.
• FX3S PLC
X000, X001: 10 μs
X002, X003, X004, X005, X006, X007: 50 μs
• FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
X000, X001, X003, X004: 10 μs
X002, X005, X006, X007: 50 μs
Input terminals not used for high-speed counters, however, can be used as general inputs.
→ For the input specifications of the main unit, refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Input terminal assignment
Counter No.
X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007
C235 U/D
C236 U/D
C237 U/D
C238 U/D
1-phase C239 U/D
1-count C240 U/D
input C241 U/D R
C242 U/D R
C243 U/D R
C244 U/D R S
C245 U/D R S
C246 U D
C247 U D R
1-phase C248 U D R
2-count
input C248(OP) U D
C249 U D R S
C250 U D R S
C251 A B
C252 A B R
2-phase C253 A B R
2-count C253(OP) A B
input C254 A B R S
C254(OP) A B
C255 A B R S
U: Up-counting input D: Down-counting input A: A phase input

B: B phase input R: External reset input S: External start input
Restriction to overlap input numbers

Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high-speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/ZRN/DSZR instructions and
general-purpose inputs. When assigning functions, there should be no overlap between those input terminals.
110
1
4.7.3 Handling of high-speed counters
Introduction
High-speed counters in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs operate in the same way as high-speed counters in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
For details, refer to Subsection 4.8.3.
4.7.4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value

2
Overview
1. Current value update timing
When pulses are input to an input terminal for a high-speed counter, the high-speed counter executes up-counting or
down-counting. The current values of devices are updated when counting is input.
2. Comparison of the Current value

The following two methods are available to compare and output the current value of a high-speed counter. 3
1) Using the comparison instruction (CMP), zone comparison instruction (ZCP) or comparison contact instruction
List
Instruction
Use the comparison instruction (CMP), band comparison instruction (ZCP) or contact comparison instruction if the
comparison result is necessary at counting. Use these instructions only when high-speed processing is not
required because these instructions are processed in the operation cycle of the PLC, and operation delay is
generated before the comparison output result is obtained.
If it is necessary to execute comparison to update an output contact with the high-speed counter's changing value,
2)
use comparison instructions for high-speed counters HSCS, HSCR and HSZ.
Using comparison instructions for high-speed counters (HSCS, HSCR or HSZ)
4
in Detail
Devices
The comparison instructions for high-speed counters (HSCS, HSCR and HSZ) execute a comparison and output
the comparison result during high-speed counting. These instructions have limitations on the number of
simultaneously driven instructions as shown in the following table.
When an output relay is specified for the comparison result, the comparison result is directly updated at the ON/
OFF status of the output regardless of the output refresh by END instruction.
Mechanical operation delay (about 10 ms) cannot be avoided in a relay output type PLC. Use a transistor output
type PLC. 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Instruction Limitation in number of instructions driven at same time
HSCS
HSCR 6 instructions
HSZ
4.7.5 Related devices 6
Programming
Before
1. Devices used to switch the counting direction of 1-phase 1-count input counters
Type Counter No. Specifying device Up-counting Down-counting
C235 M8235
C236
C237
M8236
M8237
7
Instruction
Basic
C238 M8238
C239 M8239
1-phase
C240 M8240 OFF ON
1-counting input
C241 M8241
C242 M8242
C243 M8243 8
C244 M8244
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
C245 M8245
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
111
2. Devices used to check the counting direction of 1-phase 2-count input counters and
2-phase 2-count input counters
Type Counter No. Monitoring device OFF ON
C246 M8246
C247 M8247
1-phase
C248 M8248
2-counting input
C249 M8249
C250 M8250
Up-counting Down-counting
C251 M8251
C252 M8252
2-phase
C253 M8253
2-counting input
C254 M8254
C255 M8255
3. Devices used to switch the high-speed counter function

Device No. Name Description
Contact for changing function of
M8388 Changes the function of high-speed counter.
high-speed counter
Switches the function of C248 and C253.
M8392 Function switching (For details, refer to Subsection 4.7.6.)
device
M8395 Switches the function of C254. (For details, refer to Subsection 4.7.6.)
4.7.6 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function

When the counters C248, C253 and C254 are combined with the following special auxiliary relays, the allocation of the
input terminals and functions are changed.
In a program, put a special auxiliary relay just before a target counter.
When using assignment of counter input terminal and
Counter No. Description
switching of function
M8388
M8392
C248(OP) • Reset input is not provided.
K{{{
C248
M8388
M8392
K{{{
C253
M8388 • The input count (2-phase 2-count) changes

M8395 as follows:
Phase A: Changes from X000 to X006.
C254(OP)
K{{{ Phase B: Changes from X001 to X007.
C254 • Reset input is not provided.
• Start input is not provided.
112
1
4.7.7 Response frequency of high-speed counters
Introduction
1. Response frequency and overall frequency
When any of the following functions/instructions is used, the overall frequency is restricted regardless of the operand
of the instruction.
Consider this restriction when examining the system or creating programs, and observe the specified overall 2
frequency range.
Overview
• When two or more high-speed counters are used
• When the HSCS, HSCR, HSZ, PLSY, PLSR, DSZR, TBL*1, ZRN, PLSV, DRVI or DRVA instruction is used
• When the pulse width/pulse period measurement function is used.*1
*1. This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs. 3
In FX3S PLC
List
Instruction
Overall frequency determined by condition of used instruction
Response
Counter type When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction is
frequency
instruction is not used used
C235, C236, C241 60kHz
1-phase
1-counting C237, C238, C239, 4
input C240, C242, C243, 10kHz
in Detail
Devices
C244, C245
C246 60kHz 200 kHz
1-phase 60 kHz
C247, C248, - Number of positioned axes*2
2-counting - Number of positioned axes*2 x 5 kHz
C248(OP), C249, 10kHz x 40 kHz
input
C250
2-phase C251 30kHz 5
2-counting C252, C253, C254,
Constant
Device &
Specified the
input 5kHz
C253(OP), C255
*2. Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions:

PLSY (FNC 57), PLSR (FNC 59), DSZR (FNC150), ZRN (FNC156), PLSV (FNC157), DRVI (FNC158), DRVA
(FNC159)
In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
6
Programming
Before
Overall frequency determined by condition of used instruction
Response
Counter type When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction is
frequency
instruction is not used used
C235, C236, C238,
1-phase 60kHz
C239, C241
1-counting
input C237, C240, C242,
10kHz
7
C243, C244, C245 200 kHz
Instruction
Basic
60 kHz
C246, C248(OP) 60kHz - (Number of positioned axes*3
1-phase - (Number of positioned axes*3 x 5 kHz)
2-counting + Number of pulse width/period
C247, C248, - (Number of pulse width/period
10kHz measurement inputs)
input C249,C250 measurement inputs x 20 kHz)
x 40 kHz
2-phase C251, C253(OP) 30kHz
2-counting
input
C252, C253, C254,
C254(OP), C255
5kHz 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
*3. Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions:

PLSY (FNC 57), PLSR (FNC 59), DSZR (FNC150), TBL (FNC152), ZRN (FNC156), PLSV (FNC157), DRVI
(FNC158), DRVA (FNC159)
2. Calculation of the total frequency

Obtain the overall frequency using the following expression: 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Total frequency ≥ [(Sum of used frequency of 1-phase counters) + (Sum of used frequency of 2-phase counters)]
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
113
3. Calculation example
Example1: When the HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used, and the instructions related to the number of
positioning axes (DRVI instruction [Y000], DRVA instruction [Y001]) are used in the FX3G PLC
Overall frequency: 200 kHz - (2 axes x 40 kHz) = 120 kHz
<Counter No.> <Contents of use>

C235(1-phase 1-counting) 50 kHz is input.
Total 115kHz ≤ 120kHz(Overall frequency)
Example2: When the HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used, and instructions related to the number of
positioning axes (DRVI instruction [Y000]) and the number of pulse width/pulse period measurement inputs
[X003] are used in the FX3G PLC
Overall frequency: 200 kHz - (1 axes + 1 input) x 40 kHz = 120 kHz
<Counter No.> <Contents of use>

Total 100kHz ≤ 120kHz(Overall frequency)
114
1
4.7.8 Cautions on use
Introduction
• For a contact to drive the coil of a high-speed counter, use a contact which is normally ON during high-speed
counting.
Example: M8000 (RUN monitor NO contact)

2
Input number corresponding to
X000 C235
C235 C235
Overview
Program a contact which is If a number of input relay for counting is specified,
normally ON during counting. high-speed counter cannot execute accurate counting.
• If the operation of a high-speed counter is triggered by a device such as a switch, the counter may malfunction due
to extra noise from switch chattering or contact bounce.
3
List
Instruction
• The input filter of an input terminal for a high-speed counter in the main unit is automatically set to 10 μs or 50 μs.
Accordingly, it is not necessary to use special data register D8020 (input filter adjustment).
The input filter for input relays not being used for high-speed counters remains at 10 ms (initial value).
• The inputs X000 to X007 are used for high-speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/DSZR/ZRN
instructions and general-purpose inputs. There should be no overlap between each input number.
• When a counting pulse is not provided, none of the high-speed counter output contacts will turn ON, even if the 4
PLC executes an instruction where "present value = set value".
in Detail
Devices
• Counting may be started or stopped for a high-speed counter when the output coil (OUT C***) is set to ON or OFF.
Program this output coil in the main routine. If the output coil is programmed in a step ladder (SFC) circuit,
subroutine or interrupt routine, counting cannot be started or stopped until the step ladder or routine is executed.
• Make sure that the signal speed for high-speed counters does not exceed the response frequency described
above. If an input signal exceeds the response frequency, a WDT error may occur, or the communication functions 5
such as a parallel link may malfunction.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
• The response frequency changes depending on the number of used counters, but the input filter value is fixed to 10
μs or 50 μs. Note that noise above the response frequency may be counted depending on the filter value of the
used input.
• When a high-speed counter is reset by the RST instruction, it cannot count until the RST instruction is set to OFF.
1) Program example 6
Programming
Before
X010
RST C235 C235 is reset while X010 turns ON.
2) Timing chart
X000 7
Instruction
Basic
The current value does not change
3 even if pulses are input because the 3
Current 2 C235 reset instruction is valid. 2
value of C235 1 1
X010 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
RST
C235 C235 remains reset
"RST C235" is set to ON "RST C235" is set to OFF

because the contact turns ON. because the contact turns OFF.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
115
• Write the following program to "reset only the current value of a high-speed counter (and does not turn OFF the
contact)".
1) Program example
X010*1
FNC 12 K0 C235 The current value of C235 is cleared (to "0").
DMOV
*1. When the driving contact is the continuous execution type, the current value of the counter is reset to "0"
at each scan while X010 remains ON.
2) Timing chart
X000
4
3 3
Current 2 2
value of C235 1 1
X010
Because X010 turns ON, Because the driving contact is the

"FNC 12 DMOV" is executed. pulse execution type, C235 executes
The current value of C235 is counting normally after that.
reset to "0".
• Write the following program to "turn OFF the contact and reset the current value of a high-speed counter".
1) Program example
X010*2
RST C235 ----- A
M8001
RST C235 ----- B
RUN Monitor
(normally OFF)
and the counter reset status is cleared at each scan while X010 remains ON.
2) Timing chart
X000
4
3 3
Current 2 2
value of C235 1 1
Because the reset instruction
is deactivated, C235 executes
X010 counting.
RST
C235
Counter is reset Counter reset instruction is

(part A in above deactivated
program). (part B in above program).
116
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)
1
4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)
Introduction
High-speed counter only available in DC input type main units.
4.8.1 Types and device numbers of high-speed counters

2
Overview
1. Types of high-speed counters
The main unit has built-in 32-bit high-speed bi-directional counters (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-phase 2-
count). These high-speed counters are classified into hardware type or software type according to the counting
method. Some high-speed counters are capable of using an external reset input terminal and an external start input
terminal (for counting start).
2. Classification of high-speed counters according to counting method 3
List
Instruction
• Hardware counters: These types of counters execute counting by hardware, but may be switched to software
counters depending on the operating condition.
→ For the condition handled as software counters, refer to Subsection 4.8.9.
• Software counters: These types of counters execute counting as CPU interrupt processing.
It is necessary to use each software counter within both limitations of maximum response
frequency and total frequency.
→ For the limitation of response frequency depending on the total frequency, refer to Subsection 4.8.10.
4
in Detail
Devices
3. Types of high-speed counters and input signal forms
The table below shows the types (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-phase 2-count) and input signals
(waveforms) of high-speed counters.
Input signal form Counting direction
Down-count or up-count is specified by 5
1-phase UP/DOWN turning on or off M8235 to M8245.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
1-count input ON: Down-counting
OFF: Up-counting
A counter executes up-count or down-
+1 +1 +1 count as shown on the left.
1-phase UP The counting direction can be checked
2-count input
DOWN
−1 −1 −1 with M8246 to M8250.
ON: Down-counting 6
OFF: Up-counting
Programming
Before
A phase A phase
1 edge +1 +1 −1 −1
count A counter automatically executes up-
B phase B phase
count or down-count according to
2-phase
2-count +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 −1 −1 −1 −1 −1
changes in the input status of the A/B
phase as shown on the left. 7
The counting direction can be checked
Instruction
Basic
input A phase A phase with M8251 to M8255.
4 edge ON: Down-counting
count B phase B phase OFF: Up-counting
+1 +1 +1 +1 −1 −1 −1 −1
8
4. Cautions on counterpart equipment connected to high-speed counter inputs
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
General-purpose inputs X000 to X007 are used for high-speed counter inputs. An encoder*1 adopting the output
method shown in the table below can be connected depending on the connected terminal.
Encoders adopting the voltage output method and absolute encoders cannot be connected to high-speed counter
inputs.
Output method of encoder which can be directly connected to input
Open collector transistor output method compatible with 24V DC
9
terminal in main unit
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Output method of encoder which can be directly connected to input Differential line driver output method
terminal in FX3U-4HSX-ADP (output voltage: 5V DC or less)
*1. A rotary encoder adopting the output method shown above may not operate correctly depending on the
electrical compatibility. Check the specifications before connecting an encoder.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
117
5. High-speed counter device list

External reset External start
Classification Counter No. Edge count Data length
input terminal input terminal
C235*2
C236*2
C237*2
−
C238*2
Hardware counter*1 Not provided Not provided
C239*2
C240*2 32-bit
1-phase
bi-directional
1-count input C244(OP)*3
− counter
C245(OP)*3
C241
C242 − Provided*5 Not provided
Software counter C243
C244*3
− Provided*5 Provided
C245*3
C246*2
Hardware counter*1 − Not provided Not provided
C248(OP)*2*3
32-bit
1-phase C247
− bi-directional Provided*5 Not provided
2-count input C248*3
Software counter counter
C249
C250
− Provided*5 Provided
1*4
C251*2 Not provided
4*4
Hardware counter*1 Not provided
1*4
C253*2 Provided*5
4*4
32-bit
2-phase 1*4
C252 bi-directional Provided*5
2-count input 4*4 counter Not provided
1*4
Software counter C253(OP)*6 Not provided
4*4
C254 1*4
C255 Provided*5 Provided
4*4
*1. They are handled as software counters depending on the operating condition. When they are handled as
software counters, they have limitations on both maximum response frequency and total frequency.
→ For the condition handled as software counters, refer to Subsection 4.8.9.
→ For the total frequency, refer to Subsection 4.8.10.
*2. Cautions on wiring should be considered for these high-speed counters.
*3. C244, C245 and C248 are usually used as software counters, but can be used as hardware counters C244
(OP), C245 (OP) and C248 (OP) by combining a special auxiliary relay (M8388, M8390 to M8392).
*4. 2-phase 2-input counter is usually 1 edge count counter, but can be used as a 4 edge count counter by
combining a special auxiliary relay (M8388, M8198 or M8199).
→ For the method to use a 2-phase 2-input 4 edge count counter, refer to Subsection 4.8.8.
*5. The external reset input is usually reset by turning ON, but can be changed to be reset by turning OFF by
combining special auxiliary relays (M8388 and M8389).
→ For the method to change the logic of the external reset input, refer to Subsection 4.8.6.
*6. The counter C253 is usually used as a hardware counter, but can be used as the counter C253 (OP) not
equipped with reset input by combining special auxiliary relays (M8388 and M8392).
In this case, C253 (OP) is handled as a software counter.
Notation of high-speed counter devices

For some high-speed counters in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the assignment of input terminals will switch when special
auxiliary relays are used.
Such high-speed counter devices are classified below. Note that description as (OP) is not available in programming.
Standard Device Numbers Switched Device Numbers Standard Device Numbers Switched Device Numbers
C244 C244(OP) C248 C248(OP)
C245 C245(OP) C253 C253(OP)
118
1
4.8.2 Input assignment for high-speed counters
Introduction
Inputs X000 to X007 are assigned as shown in the table below according to each high-speed counter number.
When a high-speed counter is used, the filter constant of a corresponding input number in the main unit automatically
changes (X000 to X005: 5 μs, X006 and X007: 50 μs). Input terminals not used for high-speed counters, however, can
be used as general inputs.
When FX3U-4HSX-ADP unit is connected to an FX3U PLC, input terminals inside bold-line frames in the table below 2
are assigned to the first FX3U-4HSX-ADP unit, and other input terminals are assigned to the second FX3U-4HSX-ADP
Overview
unit.
→ For the input specifications of the FX3U-4HSX-ADP, refer to the FX3U Hardware Edition.
→ For the input specifications of the main unit, refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Classifica- Input terminal assignment
Counter No.
tion X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 3
C235*1 H/W*2 U/D
List
Instruction
C236*1 H/W*2 U/D
C237*1 H/W*2 U/D
C238*1 H/W*2 U/D
C239*1 H/W*2 U/D
1-phase C240*1 H/W*2 U/D
4
1-count
in Detail
Devices
C241 S/W U/D R
input
C242 S/W U/D R
C243 S/W U/D R
C244 S/W U/D R S
C244(OP)*3 H/W*2 U/D
C245 S/W U/D R S 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
C245(OP)*3 H/W*2 U/D
C246*1 H/W*2 U D
C247 S/W U D R
1-phase C248 S/W U D R
2-count
C248(OP)*1*3 H/W*2
6
input U D
C249 S/W U D R S
Programming
Before
C250 S/W U D R S
C251*1 H/W*2 A B
C252 S/W A B R
2-phase
C253*1 H/W*2 A B R
2-count
7
*3 S/W A B
input*4 C253(OP)
C254 S/W A B R S
Instruction
Basic
C255 S/W A B R S
H/W: Hardware counter S/W: Software counter U: Up-counting input D: Down-counting input
A: A phase input B: B phase input R: External reset input S: External start input
*1. Cautions on wiring should be considered for these high-speed counters.
→ For the wiring, refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit. 8
*2. Hardware counters are switched to software counters when a comparison set/reset instruction for high-speed
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
counter (DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ or DHSCT) is used.

The counter C253 is switched to a software counter when the logic of the external reset input signal is
reversed.
→ For the condition under which it is handled as a software counter, refer to Subsection 4.8.9.
*3. When a special auxiliary relay is driven in a program, the input terminals and their associated functions are
switched. 9
→ For the method to use a software counter as a hardware counter, refer to Subsection 4.8.7.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
*4. In a 2-phase 2-count input counter, the edge count is usually 1. But the edge count can be set to 4 by
combining a special auxiliary relay.
→ For the method on how to use a 2-phase 2-count input counter with on edge count of 4,
refer to Subsection 4.8.8.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
119
Restriction to overlap input numbers
• Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high-speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/ZRN/DSZR/DVIT
instructions and general-purpose inputs. When assigning functions, there should be no overlap between those
input terminals.
• Since the FX3U-4HSX-ADP and FX3UC PLC main unit share the same assigned input terminal numbers, only one of
them may be used in operation. If both input terminals are used, intended operation is not enabled because the
inputs of the FX3U-4HSX-ADP and PLC main unit operate in an "OR" relationship.
4.8.3 Handling of high-speed counters
1. 1-phase 1-count input

X010 • C235 counts "OFF→ ON" of the input X000 while X012 is
M8235 Down/up count ON.
• When X011 turns ON and then RST instruction is executed,
X011
Reset
C235 is reset.
RST C235
• The counting direction of the counters C235 to C245 is
X012 switched to down-count or up-count when M8235 to M8245
C235 K-5 turns ON or OFF.
• C244 immediately starts counting when the input X006 turns

X010 ON while X012 is ON. The counting input is X000. In this
M8244 Down/up count example, the set value is indirectly specified by the contents
of data registers (D1 and D0).
X011
• A high-speed counter can be reset using X011 in a sequence
RST C244 Reset
as shown in the figure, but C244 immediately reset without
X012 any program when X001 is closed. So a program with X011 is
C244 D0(D1) not necessary.
• The counting direction of the counters C235 to C245 is
switched to down-count or up-count when M8235 to M8245
Set value is (D1, D0) turns ON or OFF.
Operation example
The counter C235 shown above operates as follows:
X010 Up counting Down counting Up counting
X011 Reset input
X012 Start input
X000
Counting
input 5
4 4
C235 3 3
2 2
Current 1 1
value 0 0 0
−1
−2
When output has −3 −3
already been activated −4 −4
−5 −5
−6 −6
−7 −7
−8
C235 output contact
When counting with input X000, C235 executes up-count or down-count as an interrupt.
• When the current value of a counter increases from "−6" to "−5", the output contact is set. When the current value
decreases from "−5" to "−6", the output contact is reset.
• The current value increases or decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact. When a counter
executes up-count from "+2,147,483,647", the counter value becomes "−2,147,483,648". In the same way, when a
counter executes down-count from "−2,147,483,648", the counter value becomes "+2,147,483,647". (This type of
counter is called a ring counter.)
• When the reset input X011 turns ON and RST instruction is executed, the current value of the counter is reset to "0"
and the output contact is restored.
• In a latch type high-speed counter, the current value, output contact operation and reset status of the counter are
latched (battery backed) by the backup battery built in the PLC.
120
1
Introduction
These counters are 32-bit binary bi-directional counters, and the operation of the output contact for the current value is
equivalent to that in 1-phase 1-count input type high-speed counters described above.
X011 • While X012 is ON, C246 executes up-count when the input X000
RST C246 turns from OFF to ON, and executes down-count when the input
X012
X001 turns from OFF to ON.
2
• The up/down-count operation of C246 to C250 can be checked with
Overview
C246 D2(D3) M8246 to M8250.
ON status: Down-counting
Set value is (D3,D2) OFF status: Up-counting
• While X012 is ON, C249 immediately starts counting when the input
X006 turns ON.
X011
RST C249 The up-count input is X000, and the down-count input is X001. 3
List
Instruction
• A high-speed counter can be reset by X011 in a sequence as shown
X012
in the figure, but C249 is immediately reset without any program
C249 K1234
when X002 is closed. So a program with X011 is not necessary.
• The up/down-count operation of C246 to C250 can be checked with
M8246 to M8250.
ON status: Down-counting 4
OFF status: Up-counting
in Detail
Devices
These counters are 32-bit binary bi-directional counters, and the operation of the output contact for the current value is
equivalent to that in 1-phase high-speed counters described above.
X011 • While X012 is ON, C251 counts the operation of the inputs X000 (A 5
RST C251 phase) and X001 (B phase) as interrupt.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
When X011 turns ON a RST instruction is executed and C251 is
X012 reset.
C251 K1234 • When the current value becomes equivalent to or larger than the set
C251 value, Y002 turns ON. When the current value becomes equivalent
Y002 to or smaller than the set value, Y002 turns OFF.
• Y003 turns ON (for down-count) or OFF (for up-count) according to
6
M8251
Programming
Before
the counting direction.
Y003
• When X006 turns ON while X012 is ON, C254 immediately starts

X011 counting. Its counting inputs are X000 (A phase) and X001 (B
RST C254 phase).
X012
• In addition to reset by X011 in a sequence, C254 is reset 7
immediately when X002 turns ON.
Instruction
Basic
C254 D0(D1)
• When the current value becomes equivalent to or larger than the set
C254 value (D1, D0), Y004 turns ON. When the current value becomes
Y004 equivalent to or smaller than the set value, Y004 turns OFF.
M8254 • Y005 turns ON (for down-count) or OFF (for up-count) according to
Y005 the counting direction. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
121
• A 2-phase encoder generates outputs for the A phase and B phase by a phase difference of 90°. With these
outputs, a high-speed counter automatically executes up-count and down-count as shown in the figure below.
- When the counter is operating at the 1 edge count
A phase A phase
+1 +1 −1 −1
B phase B phase
- When the counter is operating at the 4 edge count
+1 +1 +1 +1 +1 −1 −1 −1 −1 −1
A phase A phase
B phase B phase
+1 +1 +1 +1 −1 −1 −1 −1
• The down/up-count operation of C251 to C255 can be checked with M8251 to M8255.
ON status: Down-counting
OFF status: Up-counting
4.8.4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value
1. Current value update timing

A high-speed counter executes up-count or down-count when a pulse is input to its input terminal, but the current
value is updated at the timing shown in the table below. When using the current value of a hardware counter in a MOV,
CMP or applied instruction such as the comparison instruction, special care must be taken since the current value
update timing is affected by the ladder scans as shown in the table.
Current value update timing
Hardware counter When OUT or HCMOV instruction is executed for the counter
Software counter Every time a pulse is input
2. Comparison of the Current value

The following two methods are available to compare and output the current value of a high-speed counter.
1) Using the comparison instruction (CMP), zone comparison instruction (ZCP) or comparison contact instruction
When the comparison result is necessary during counting operation*1, comparison may be executed in the main
program if the HCMOV instruction is used just before the comparison instruction (CMP or ZCP) or comparison
contact instruction.
*1. If it is necessary to execute comparison to update an output contact with the high-speed counter's
changing value, use comparison instructions for high-speed counters (HSCS, HSCR, HSZ or HSCT).
2) Using comparison instructions for high-speed counters (HSCS, HSCR, HSZ or HSCT)
The comparison instructions for high-speed counters (HSCS, HSCR, HSZ and HSCT) execute a comparison and
output the comparison result during high-speed counting. These instructions have limitations on the number of
simultaneously driven instructions as shown in the following table. The HSCT instruction can only be used once in
any program.
When an output relay is specified for the comparison result, the comparison result is directly updated at the ON/
OFF status of the output regardless of the output refresh by END instruction.
Mechanical operation delay (about 10 ms) cannot be avoided in a relay output type PLC. Use a transistor output
type PLC.
HSCS
HSCR 32 instructions including HSCT instruction
HSZ*2
HSCT*2 Only 1 (This instruction can only be used once.)
*2. When HSZ or HSCT instruction is used, the maximum response frequency and total frequency of all
software counters are affected.
→ For the maximum response frequency and total frequency of software counters,
122
1
4.8.5 Related devices
Introduction
1. Devices used to switch the counting direction of 1-phase 1-count input counters
Type Counter No. Specifying device Up-counting Down-counting
C235
C236
M8235
M8236 2
Overview
C237 M8237
C238 M8238
C239 M8239
1-phase
C240 M8240 OFF ON
1-counting input
C241 M8241
C242 M8242 3
C243 M8243
List
Instruction
C244 M8244
C245 M8245
2. Devices used to check the counting direction of 1-phase 2-count input counters and
2-phase 2-count input counters
Type Counter No. Monitoring device OFF ON
4
in Detail
Devices
C246 M8246
C247 M8247
1-phase
C248 M8248
2-counting input
C249 M8249
C250 M8250
C251 M8251
5
C252 M8252
Constant
Device &
Specified the
2-phase
C253 M8253
2-counting input
C254 M8254
C255 M8255
3. Devices used to switch the high-speed counter function

Device No. Name Description
6
Programming
Before
Contact for changing function of
M8388 Changes the function of high-speed counter.
high-speed counter
Switches the logic of the external reset input.
M8389
(For details, refer to Subsection 4.8.6.)
M8390 Switches the function of C244. (For details, refer to Subsection 4.8.7.)
M8391 Switches the function of C245. (For details, refer to Subsection 4.8.7.) 7
Function switching Switches the function of C248 and C253.
Instruction
Basic
M8392 device (For details, refer to Subsection 4.8.7.)
Switches the edge count (between 1 and 4) of C251, C252 and C254.
M8198
Switches the edge count (between 1 and 4) of C253, C255 and C253 (OP).
M8199
4. Operation status of hardware counters and software counters

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Device No. Name Description ON OFF

*1 Operation status of C235, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, C252 or C254
M8380
M8381*1 Operation status of C236
M8382*1 Operation status of C237, C242 or C245
M8383*1 Operation Operation status of C238, C248, C248(OP), C250, C253 or C255 Software
Hardware
9
M8384*1 status flag Operation status of C239 or C243 counter
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
M8385*1 Operation status of C240

M8386*1 Operation status of C244(OP)
M8387*1 Operation status of C245(OP)
*1. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN. 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
123
4.8.6 Changing the logic of external reset input signal

The counters C241 to C245, C247 to C250 and C252 to C255 are usually reset when the external reset input turns
ON.
By using the program shown below, the logic can be inverted so that these counters are reset when the external reset
input turns OFF.
Counter No. When inverting logic of external reset input signal Description
M8388
The logic of the external reset input is inverted
C241 to C245 M8389
so that the counters are reset when the input
C247 to C250
C252 to C255
K{{{ turns OFF.
C2 (The logic is inverted for all target counters.)
Caution
The counter C253 is switched to a software counter when the logic of the external reset input signal is inverted.
4.8.7 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function

The assignment of the input terminal and the function of the software counters C244, C245, C248 and C253 are
changed as shown below when combined with the following special auxiliary relays.
In a program, put a special auxiliary relay just before a target counter.
Counter No. When using software counter as hardware counter Description
M8388 • The counting input is changed from X000 to

M8390 X006.
K{{{ • Start input is not provided.
C244 • It operates as a hardware counter.
M8388 • The counting input is changed from X002 to

M8391 X007.
K{{{ • Start input is not provided.
C245 • It operates as a hardware counter.
M8388
M8392
• Reset input is not provided.
C248(OP)
K{{{ • It operates as a hardware counter.
C248
M8388
M8392
• Reset input is not provided.
C253(OP)
K{{{ • It operates as a software counter.
C253
124
1
4.8.8 How to use 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255 with
Introduction
4 edge counting
For the 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255, the edge count is usually set to 1. By using the programs
shown in the table below, the edge count may be set to 4.
Counter No.
When using 2-phase 2-count input counters with 4 edge
counting
Description 2
Overview
M8000
M8198
C251
K{{{
C251
1 edge count (before change)
3
List
Instruction
M8000 A phase
M8198 +1 +1
C252 B phase
K{{{
C252 Up-counting
4
in Detail
Devices
M8000 A phase
M8199 −1 −1
C253
K{{{ B phase
C253 Down-counting
↓
4 edge count (after change)
5
M8000
Constant
Device &
Specified the
M8199 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1
M8388 A phase
C253(OP) M8392
K{{{ B phase
C253 +1 +1 +1 +1
Up-counting 6
Programming
Before
−1 −1 −1 −1 −1
M8000 A phase
M8198
C254
K{{{ B phase
C254 −1 −1 −1 −1
Down-counting 7
Instruction
Basic
M8000
M8199
C255
K{{{
C255
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
125
4.8.9 Conditions for hardware counters to be handled as software counters

High-speed counters are classified into hardware counters and software counters. In some conditions, however,
hardware counters are handled as software counters.
In this case, use hardware counters within the range of maximum response frequency and total frequency as
determined for software counters.
Conditions under which counters are handled as software counters

Hardware
Condition in which hardware counters are handled as software counters
counter No.
Because hardware counters execute counting at the hardware level of the FX3U/FX3UC, they can execute counting
regardless of the total frequency.
However, when hardware counters are handled as software counters with the following conditions, their maximum
response frequency and total frequency are limited in the same way as the software counters.
Use M8380 to M8387 to verify that high-speed counters are handled as hardware counters or software counters.
• When DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54), DHSZ (FNC 55) or DHSCT (FNC280) instruction is used for a
hardware counter number, the hardware counter is handled as a software counter.
Example: C235
K{{{
C235
C235
C236 DHSCS K100 C235 Y000
C237
C238 In this case, C235 is handled as a software counter.
C239
C240 • When an index register is used for a counter number specified in DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR
C244(OP) (FNC 54), DHSZ (FNC 55) or DHSCT (FNC280) instruction, all hardware counters are handled as software
C245(OP) counters.
C246 Example: C235Z0
C248(OP)
C251 DHSCS K100 C235Z0 Y000
C253
• C253 (hardware counter) is handled as a software counter by inverting the logic using the external reset input
signal logic changing function.
Example: The logic of the C253 external reset input signal is inverted.
→For logic inversion of the external reset input signal, refer to Subsection 4.8.6.
M8388
M8389
K{{{
C253
126
1
4.8.10 Response frequency of high-speed counters
Introduction
1. Response frequency of hardware counters
The table below shows the maximum response frequency of hardware counters.
When hardware counters are handled as software counters in some operating conditions, their maximum response
frequency becomes equivalent to that of software counters, and thus hardware counters are some times subject to 2
restrictions in total frequency.
Overview
→ For the conditions in which hardware counters are handled as software counters,
refer to the previous page.
Maximum response frequency
Counter type Counter No.
Main unit FX3U-4HSX-ADP

C235, C236, C237, C238, C239, C240
C244(OP), C245(OP)
100 kHz
10 kHz 200 kHz
3
List
Instruction
1-phase 2-counting input C246, C248(OP) 100 kHz
2-phase 2-counting 1 edge count 50 kHz 100 kHz
C251, C253
input 4 edge count 50 kHz 100 kHz
2. Response frequency and total frequency of software counters

The table below shows the maximum response frequency and total frequency of software counters. 4
When using the HSZ or HSCT instruction in a program, both the maximum response frequency and the total frequency
in Detail
Devices
are limited for all software counters without regarding the operands of the instruction. When examining a system or
creating a program, consider the limitations, and use software counters within the allowable range of maximum
response frequency and total frequency.
→ For the conditions handled as software counters, refer to the previous page.
1) When special analog adapters and FX3U/FX3UC Series special function units/blocks are not used
Response frequency and total frequency according to instructions used
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
When HSZ and HSCT
Following Magnifica- When only HSCT When only HSZ When both HSZ and HSCT
instructions are not
software tion for instruction is used instruction is used instructions are used
used
Software counter with calculating
Counter type total Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
counter HSCS, HSCR, Total Total Total Total
HSZ or HSCT frequency response response response response
frequency frequency frequency frequency
instruction*1 frequency frequency frequency frequency
(kHz) (kHz) (kHz) (kHz)
C241, C242, C235, C236,

6
Programming
Before
1-phase C243, C244, C237, C238, ×1 40 30
1-counting C245 C239, C240
input C244(OP), 40 - (Num-
− ×1 10 10 30-(Number
C245(OP) ber of
80− of instruc- 60−
1-phase instruc-
C247, C248, C246, 1.5×(Num tion)*2 1.5×(Num
tion)*2
2-counting
input
C249, C250 C248(OP)
×1 40
80
30
60 ber of
instruc-
ber of
instruc-
7
Instruction
Basic
1 edge tion) tion)
2- ×1 40 30
phase
count C252,
2- C253(OP), (40-Num-
C251, C253 (30-Number
count- 4 edge C254, ber of
ing ×4 10 7.5 of instruc-
count C255 instruc-
input tion) ÷ 4
tion) ÷ 4
*1. When an index register is added to a counter number specified by a HSCS, HSCR, HSZ or HSCT instruction,
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
all hardware counters are switched to software counters.

*2. The high-speed counters C244 (OP) and C245 (OP) can count up to 10 kHz.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
127
2) When special analog adapters and FX3U/FX3UC Series special function units/blocks are used
Counter type Response frequency and total frequency according to instruction use condition
When HSZ and HSCT
Following Magnifica- When only HSCT When only HSZ When both HSZ and HSCT
instructions are not
software tion for instruction is used instruction is used instructions are used
used
Software counter with calculating
counter HSCS, HSCR, total Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
Total Total Total Total
HSZ or HSCT frequency response response response response
frequency frequency frequency frequency
instruction*1 frequency frequency frequency frequency
C241, C242, C235, C236,
C243, C244, C237, C238, ×1 30 25
1-phase C245 C239, C240
1-counting input 30 - (Num-
C244(OP), 25-(Number
− ×1 10 10 ber of
C245(OP) 50− of instruc- 50−
instruc-
1-phase C247, C248, C246, 1.5×(Num tion)*2 1.5×(Num
×1 30 25 tion)*2
2-counting input C249, C250 C248(OP) 60 50 ber of ber of
1 edge instruc- instruc-
2- ×1 30 25 tion) tion)
count C252,
phase
2- C253(OP), (30-Num-
C251, C253 (25-Number
count- 4 edge C254, ber of
ing ×4 7.5 6.2 of instruc-
count C255 instruc-
input tion) ÷ 4
tion) ÷ 4
*1. When an index register is added to a counter number specified by a HSCS, HSCR, HSZ or HSCT instruction,
all hardware counters are switched to software counters.
*2. The high-speed counters C244 (OP) and C245 (OP) can count up to 10 kHz.
3. Calculation of the total frequency

Total frequency ≥ Sum of "Response frequency of high-speed counter × Magnification for calculating total frequency"
4. Calculation example
When only HSZ instruction is used 6 times in a program, the total frequency and response frequency are calculated as
follows in accordance with the columns for "When only HSZ instruction is used" shown above.
This calculation example is provided for a system configuration not including special analog adapters and FX3U/FX3UC
Series special function units/blocks.
Magnification for
Input Maximum response frequency Used
Used high-speed counter No. calculating total
frequency calculation instruction
frequency
Operates as
C237 30 kHz 40 − 6 (times) = 34 kHz ×1
software counter HSZ
C241 20 kHz 40 − 6(times) = 34 kHz ×1 instruction × 6
C253(OP) Software counter times
4 kHz {40 − 6(times)} ÷ 4 = 8.5 kHz ×4
[4 edge count]
1) Since only HSZ instruction is used for 6 times, the total frequency is as follows:
Total frequency = 80 − 1.5 × 6 = 71 kHz
2) The sum of the response frequencies of the high-speed counters
being used is calculated as follows:
"30 kHz × 1[C237]" + "20 kHz × 1[C241]" + "4kHz × 4[C253(OP)]" = 66 kHz ≤ 71 kHz
128
1
4.8.11 Cautions on use
Introduction
• For a contact to drive the coil of a high-speed counter, use a contact which is normally ON during high-speed
counting.
Example: M8000 (RUN monitor NO contact)

2
Input number corresponding to
X000 C235
C235 C235
Overview
Program a contact which is If a number of input relay for counting is specified,
normally ON during counting. high-speed counter cannot execute accurate counting.
• If the operation of a high-speed counter is triggered by a device such as a switch, the counter may malfunction due
to extra noise from switch chattering or contact bounce.
3
List
Instruction
• The input filter of an input terminal for a high-speed counter in the main unit is automatically set to 5 μs (X000 to
X005) or 50 μs (X006 and X007).
Accordingly, it is not necessary to use the REFF instruction or special data register D8020 (input filter adjustment).
The input filter for input relays not being used for high-speed counters remains at 10 ms (initial value).
• The inputs X000 to X007 are used for high-speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/DSZR/DVIT/ZRN
instructions and general-purpose inputs. There should be no overlap between each input number. 4
• When a counting pulse is not provided, none of the high-speed counter output contacts will turn ON, even if the
in Detail
Devices
PLC executes an instruction where "present value = set value".
• Counting may be started or stopped for a high-speed counter when the output coil (OUT C***) is set to ON or OFF.
Program this output coil in the main routine. If the output coil is programmed in a step ladder (SFC) circuit,
subroutine or interrupt routine, counting cannot be started or stopped until the step ladder or routine is executed.
• Make sure that the signal speed for high-speed counters does not exceed the response frequency described 5
above. If an input signal exceeds the response frequency, a WDT error may occur, or communication functions
Constant
Device &
Specified the
such as a parallel link may malfunction.
• The response frequency changes depending on number of used counters, but the input filter value is fixed to 5 μs
(X000 to X005) or 50 μs (X006 and X007).
Note that noise above the response frequency may be counted depending on the filter value of the used input.
• When a high-speed counter is reset by the RST instruction, it cannot count until the RST instruction is set to OFF.
6
1) Program example
Programming
Before
X010
RST C235 C235 is reset while X010 turns ON.
2) Timing chart
X000
7
Instruction
Basic
The current value does not change
3 even if pulses are input because the 3
Current 2 C235 reset instruction is valid. 2
value of C235 1 1
8
X010
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
RST
C235 C235 remains reset
"RST C235" is set to ON "RST C235" is set to OFF

because the contact turns ON. because the contact turns OFF. 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
129
• Write the following program to "reset only the current value of a high-speed counter (and does not turn OFF the
contact)".
1) Program example
X010*1
FNC 12 K0 C235 The current value of C235 is cleared (to "0").
DMOV
at each scan while X010 remains ON.
2) Timing chart
X000
4
3 3
Current 2 2
value of C235 1 1
X010
Because X010 turns ON, Because the driving contact is the

"FNC 12 DMOV" is executed. pulse execution type, C235 executes
The current value of C235 is counting normally after that.
reset to "0".
• Write the following program to "turn OFF the contact and reset the current value of a high-speed counter".
1) Program example
X010*2
RST C235 ----- A
M8001
RST C235 ----- B
RUN Monitor
(normally OFF)
and the counter reset status is cleared at each scan while X010 remains ON.
2) Timing chart
X000
4
3 3
Current 2 2
value of C235 1 1
is deactivated, C235 executes
X010 counting.
RST
C235
Counter is reset Counter reset instruction is

(part A in above deactivated
program). (part B in above program).
130
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]
1
4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]
Introduction
Data registers are devices for storing numeric data. File registers are handled as the initial values of data registers.
Each data register or file register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign).
Two data registers combined or file registers can store 32-bit numeric data (whose most significant bit specifies the
positive or negative sign).
→ For the functions and operations of file registers, refer to Subsection 4.9.4.
2
Overview
4.9.1 Numbers of data registers and file registers
The table below shows numbers of data registers and file registers. (Numbers are assigned in decimal.)
1. FX3S PLC 3
Data registers
List
Instruction
File registers
Fixed latched (latched (EEPROM
General type General type Special type keep) type)
(EEPROM keep) type
D0 to D127 D128 to D255 D256 to D2999 D8000 to D8511 D1000*1 and later
128 points 128 points 2744 points 512 points 2000 points maximum
2. FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
4
in Detail
Devices
Data registers File registers
Fixed latched (latched (EEPROM
General type General type Special type keep) type)
(EEPROM keep) type
128 points 972 points 6900 points*2 512 points 7000 points maximum
5
3. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Data registers
Latched Fixed latched File registers
(battery backed) type (battery backed) type (latched (battery
General type Special type backed) type)
(backed up by battery (backed up by battery
against power failure) against power failure) 6
Programming
Before
200 points*3 312 points*4 7488 points*1*5 512 points 7000 points maximum
*1. Data registers D1000 and later can be used as file registers in units of 500 points by setting parameters.
*2. These registers can be changed to the latched type by the parameter setting when the optional battery is
used. However, the latched range cannot be set.
*3. This area is not latched (battery backed). It can be changed to the latched (battery backed) area by setting 7
parameters.
Instruction
Basic
*4. This area is latched (battery backed). It can be changed to the non-latched (non-battery-backed) area by
setting parameters.
*5. The latch (battery backup) characteristics cannot be changed using parameters.
When N : N Network or parallel link is used, some data registers are occupied for the link. 8
→ Refer to the Data Communication Edition.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
131
4.9.2 Structures of data registers and file registers
1) 16-bit type
One (16-bit) data register or file register can store a numeric value ranging from -32,768 to +32,767.
High D 0 (16 bits) Low

order 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 order
b15 b0
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
A numeric value can be read from or written to a data register by an applied instruction usually.
Or a numeric value can be directly read from or written to a data register from a display unit, display module, or
programming tool.
2) 32-bit type
Two serial data registers or file registers can express 32-bit data.
- A data register with a larger device number handles high-order bits, and a data register with a smaller device
number handles low-order bits.
- In the index type, V handles high-order bits, and Z handles low-order bits.
Two data registers or file registers can store a numeric value ranging from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647.
High D1 (high-order 16 bits) D0 (low-order 16 bits) Low

order 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 order
b31 b0
1,073,741,824
536,870,912
268,435,456
134,217,728
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216
8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
In the case of 32-bit type, when a data register or file register on the low-order side (example: D0) is specified, the
subsequent number on the high-order side (example: D1) is automatically occupied.
Either an odd or even device number can be specified for the low-order side, but it is recommended to specify an
even device number for the low-order side under consideration of the monitoring function of display units, display
modules, and programming tools.
132
1
4.9.3 Functions and operation examples of data registers
Introduction
Data registers are devices for storing numeric data.
Each data register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign). Two data
registers combined can store 32-bit numeric data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign).
1. General type and latched (battery backed) type data registers 2

• Once data is written to a data register it does not change unless other data overwrite it.
Overview
When the PLC mode switches from "RUN" to "STOP" or when the power is interrupted, however, all data stored in
general type data registers is cleared to "0".
If the special auxiliary relay M8033 has been driven in advance, data is held even when the PLC mode switches
from "RUN" to "STOP".
• Latched (battery backed) type data registers hold their contents even when the PLC mode switches from "RUN" to
"STOP" or when the power is interrupted.
3
List
Instruction
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, the contents of data registers are backed up by the battery built into the PLC.
In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the contents of data registers are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC. When
the optional battery is installed, the battery backs up the contents of some general type data registers against
power failure.
The contents of data registers are backed up by the battery built in the PLC.
→ For details on each backup method, refer to Section 2.6. 4
• When using fixed latched (battery backed) type data registers as general type data registers, provide the following
in Detail
Devices
reset circuit by RST or ZRST instruction at the head step in a program.
Ex. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
M8002
FNC 40 Data stored in D512 to D999 are
D512 D999
Initial pulse
ZRST cleared to "0".
5
→ For file registers, refer to Subsection 4.9.4.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
2. Special type data registers
• Special type data registers contain informative, special purpose data and are sometimes written to during program
operation.
The contents of special type data registers are cleared to their initial values when restoring the power.
(Generally, these data registers are cleared to "0" at first, and then the initial values (if there are any) are written by
6
Programming
Before
the system ROM.)
• For example, the watchdog timer time is set initially to D8000 by the system ROM. When changing the contents,
write a desired time to D8000 by transfer instruction MOV (FNC 12).
M8002
FNC 12
Initial pulse
MOV
K250 D8000 The watchdog timer is set to 250 ms.
7
Instruction
Basic
FNC 07 The watchdog timer is refreshed.
WDT
→ For the data backup characteristics of special data registers, refer to Section 2.6 and Chapter 37.
→ For the types and functions of special data registers, refer to Chapter 37.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
133
3. Operation examples
Data registers can be used in various control with numeric data.
This section explains the operations of representative basic instructions and applied instructions among various
applications.
For the full use of data registers, refer to the explanation of applied instructions later.
1) Data registers in basic instructions
Specifying the set value of a timer or counter
T 2 D0 A counter or timer operates while regarding the

contents of a specified data register as its set value.
C 10 D 20
2) Data registers using applied instructions

Operation examples using MOV (FNC 12) instruction
a) Changing the current value of a counter
FNC 12 The current value of the counter C2 is changed to

D 5 C 2 the contents stored in D5.
MOV
b) Reading the current value of a timer or counter to a data register
FNC 12 The current value of the counter C10 is transferred

C 10 D 4 to D4.
MOV
c) Storing a numeric value to data registers

16-bit
FNC 12 K200 D 10 "200 (decimal value)" is transferred to D10.
MOV
32-bit
"80000 (decimal value)" is transferred to D10 and D11.
FNC 12 K80000 D10(D11) Because a numeric value larger than 32767 is 32-bit
DMOV data, a 32-bit operation is required. When a data
register on the low-order side (D10) is specified, a
data register on the high-order side (D11) is
automatically occupied.
d) Transferring the contents of a data register to another data register
FNC 12 D 10 D 20 The contents of D10 are transferred to D20.

MOV
3) Using unoccupied timers and counters as data registers

Timers and counters not in a program can be used as devices for storing 16-bit or 32-bit numeric values (data
registers).
FNC 12 K300 T 10 "300 (decimal value)" is transferred to T10.

MOV
FNC 12 The contents of T10 are transferred to the current

T 10 C 20 value register of C20.
MOV In this case, T10 is not working as a timer, but is
working as a data register.
C 20 K300
As in the case of data registers, when 16-bit timers or counters are used as 32-bit devices, two timers or two
counters (example: C1 and C0) store 32-bit numeric data.
One 32-bit counter (example: C200) can store 32-bit numeric data.
134
1
4.9.4 Functions and operation examples of file registers
Introduction
A file register is a device for setting the initial value of a data register with the same number.
Each file register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign). Two file
registers combined can store 32-bit numeric data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign).
Up to 7000 data registers starting from D1000 can be specified as file registers by the parameter setting.
The number of file registers varies depending on the model. 2
Refer to Subsection 2.7.3 for the file register setting range.
Overview
• In parameter settings, 1 to 14 blocks can be specified. One block secures 500 file registers, but uses the program
memory area by 500 steps.
• When some of data registers starting from D1000 are specified as file registers, the remaining data registers not
specified as file registers can be used as data registers.
3
This section explains how to handle file registers.
List
Instruction
1. Operation of file registers
• The contents of the file register area [A] set inside the built-in memory or memory cassette are batch-transferred to
the data memory area [B] inside the system RAM when the PLC power is turned ON or when the PLC mode
switches from STOP to RUN.
When data registers are specified as file registers by the parameter setting, the contents of the file register area [A] 4
inside the program memory are transferred when the PLC power is turned ON or when the PLC mode switches
in Detail
Devices
from STOP to RUN. This means that the contents changed in the data memory are initialized every time when the
PLC turns ON or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
When it is necessary to save data changed in the data memory using a sequence program, update the file register
area [A] to the changed values by the same-number register update mode in BMOV
(FNC 15) instruction described later.
5
Inside built-in memory Inside system
Constant
Device &
Specified the
or RAM
memory cassette
D0
Program Data
memory When power memory
Program/
is turned ON
When PLC Data register 6
comment mode is For devices D1000 and later specified
Programming
Before
D1000 changed D1000 as operands in applied instructions other
500 points from STOP than BMOV (FNC 15) , indirectly
File register to RUN Data register Write
14 blocks specified values for timers, counters or
maximum [A] [B] devices in RST instructions can be read
(7000 points Read from and written to the data register
Data register area [B] in the same way as general
maximum)
D7999 data registers. 7
Instruction
Basic
The remaining area can be used as data registers for general purpose.
• Difference between BMOV (FNC 15) instruction and other instructions

The table below shows the differences between the BMOV (FNC 15) instruction and other applied instructions.
Instruction Transferred contents
Data can be read from and written to the file register
Remarks
8
BMOV instruction −
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
area [A] inside the program memory.

Applied Because the data register area [B] is provided inside the
Data can be read from and written to the data
instructions other system RAM in the PLC, its contents can be arbitrarily
register area [B] inside the image memory in the
than BMOV changed without being limited by the optional memory
same way as general data registers.
instruction format.
The data stored in data registers set as file registers are automatically copied from the file register area [A] to the 9
data register area [B] when restoring the power.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
• When a file register is monitored from peripheral equipment, the data register area [B] inside the data memory is
read.
When "file register device current value change", "file register device forced reset" or "PLC memory all clear" is
executed from peripheral equipment, the file register area [A] inside the program memory is changed, and then the
data is automatically transferred to the data register area [B].
Accordingly, when file registers are to be overwritten, the program memory should be "built-in memory" or "memory
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
cassette whose protect switch is set to OFF". (The memory cassette cannot be overwritten from peripheral
equipment if its protect switch is set to ON.)
135
2. File register ↔ Data register <updating the same number registers by BMOV (FNC 15)
instruction>
When the same file register is specified for both S and D in BOMV (FNC 15) instruction, this instruction
specifies the same-number register update mode and executes the following operation:
Inside built-in Inside system Read

memory or RAM BMOV
memory cassette OFF
D0 direction
M8024
Program Data inverse:
memory memory OFF
S D n
Program/ Data register X002
FNC 15
comment
BMOVP D1100 D1100 K400
D1000 D1100 D1100
500 points × File register Data register Same file register number is specified.
Read
14 blocks
[A] [B] •When X002 is set to ON while BMOV instruction direction
maximum D1499 D1499
(7000 points reverse flag M8024 is OFF, the contents of a file register are
maximum) Data register transferred to the data register area [B] inside the data memory
D7999
as shown in the figure on the left.
Write
Inside built-in Inside system BMOV
memory or X001
RAM direction
memory cassette M8024
D0 ON inverse:
Program Data ON
memory memory S D n
X003
Data FNC 15
Program/
BMOVP D1100 D1100 K400
comment register
D1000 D1100 D1100 Same file register number is specified.
500 points × File Data
14 blocks register Write register M8001 BMOV
maximum M8024 direction
[A] D1499 D1499 [B] inverse:
(7000 points Always OFF
maximum) Data register during operation OFF
D7999
•When X003 is set to ON while BMOV instruction direction
reverse flag M8024 is ON, the contents of a data register inside
the data memory are written to the file register area inside the
program memory as shown in the figure on the left.
• When updating the contents of a file register in the same-number register update mode, make sure that the file
register numbers at S and D are equal to each other. Also make sure that the number of transfer points
specified by "n" does not exceed the file register area. If the number of transfer points exceeds the file register area,
an operation error occurs and the instruction is not executed.
• When S and D are indexed, the instruction is executed if the actual device number is within the file
register area and if the number of transfer points is within the file register area also.
136
1
3. Data register → File register <writing by BMOV (FNC 15) instruction>
Introduction
When a file register (D1000 or later) is specified for the destination of BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, it is possible to
directly write data to the file register area [A] inside the program memory.
Write
Inside built-in Inside system
memory or
memory cassette
RAM
OFF
M8024 2
D0 S D n
Overview
Program Data D200 X001
FNC 15
memory memory
BMOVP D200 D1100 K400
D599
Program/
Write
Data register
comment • When X001 is set to ON, data is transferred to the
D1000
500 points ×
D1100 D1100 data register area [B] and file register area [A] as
shown in the figure on the left.
3
File register Write Data register
List
Instruction
14 blocks If data cannot be written to the file register area [A]
maximum [A] [B]
D1499 D1499 because the protect switch of the memory cassette is
(7000 points ON, data is written to only the data register area [B].
maximum) Data register
D7999 When a file register device is specified for D in a
general applied instruction, data is transferred to only
the data register area [B]. 4
• A file register can be specified for
S . If D is
in Detail
Devices
the same as S , the same-number register
update mode is selected.
→ For the same-number register update mode, refer
to the previous page.
• By controlling BMOV instruction direction reverse flag M8024 for BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, data can be 5
transferred in both directions in one program (as shown in the figure below).
Constant
Device &
Specified the
X001 BMOV S  → D  Batch transfer of data registers
M8024 direction M8024(OFF):D1100 D200
inverse
S D n
X000
FNC 15
BMOVP D1100 D200 K400
S ← D  Batch transfer of data registers
and writing to file register
6
Programming
Before
M8024(ON) :D1100 D200
M8001 BMOV
M8024
direction
Always OFF during
inverse: OFF
operation
Cautions on reading 7
When a file register (D1000 or later) is specified for the source of BMOV (FNC 15) instruction and the same number
Instruction
Basic
file register is not specified for the destination, the contents of the file register area [A] inside the program memory are
not read.
1) When a file register is specified for the source and a data register is specified for the destination
Batch transfer of data registers

Inside built-in
memory or
Inside system
RAM
8
memory cassette M8024
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
D0 OFF
Program D200 Data S D n
memory memory X000
FNC 15
BMOVP D1100 D200 K400
Program/ D599 Data register
Read
D1000
comment
• When X000 is set to ON, the data register area [B] is 9
500 points × D1100 Data register read as shown in the figure on the left.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
File register
14 blocks
maximum [A] [B] • A file register can be specified for
D . If S is
D1499
(7000 points the same as D , the same-number register
maximum) Data register update mode is selected.
D7999
→ For the same-number register update mode,
refer to the previous page. 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
137
2) When file registers of different device numbers are specified for the source and destination
Write
Inside built-in Inside system
memory or RAM M8024
memory cassette OFF
D0 S D n
Program Data X001
memory memory FNC 15
BMOVP D1100 D1400 K100
Program/ Data register
comment • When X001 is set to ON, the contents of the data
D1000 Write D1100 register area [B] are transferred to the data register
500 points × area [B] and file register area [A] as shown in the
Write
File register Data register D1199
14 blocks D1400
[A] [B] D1400 figure on the left.
maximum If data cannot be written to the file register area [A]
(7000 points D1499 D1499
Data register because the protect switch of the memory cassette is
maximum)
D7999 ON, data is written to only the data register area [B].
4.9.5 Cautions on using file registers
1. Cautions on using a memory cassette

When changing the contents of file registers stored in the memory cassette, confirm the following conditions:
• Set to OFF the protect switch in the memory cassette.
• Do not turn OFF the power while the contents of file registers are changed.
If the power is turned OFF during the change, the data stored in file registers may be filled with unexpected values,
or a parameter error may occur.
2. Execution time for writing data to file registers

• In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
It takes 66 to 132 ms to write data in one continuous block (500 points) to the memory cassette (flash memory).
Execution of the program is paused during this period. Because the watchdog timer is not refreshed during this
period, it is necessary to take proper countermeasures such as inserting the WDT instruction into the sequence
program.
It takes longer time to write data to file registers stored in a memory cassette (flash memory) compared to writing
data to file registers stored in the built-in memory.
• In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
It takes 80 ms to write data in one continuous block (500 points) to file registers.
Note that execution of the program is paused during this period, but the watchdog timer is automatically refreshed.
The time for writing data is same between file registers stored in the built-in memory and file registers stored in a
memory cassette (EEPROM).
3. Allowable number of writes to the memory

Data can be written to the memory cassette up to 10,000 times, and to the memory (EEPROM) built in FX3S/FX3G/
FX3GC PLCs up to 20,000 times.
When a continuous operation type instruction is used for data writing in a program, data is written to the memory in
every operation cycle of the PLC. To prevent this, make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction (BMOVP).
Writing data to the memory is executed also by writing data to file registers from peripheral equipment (programming
software, handy programming panels, and display units).
4. Cautions on handling file registers in the same-number register update mode in BMOV (FNC 15)
instruction
• When updating the contents of the same number file register, make sure that the file register number at S and
D are equal to each other.
• Make sure that the number of transfer points specified by "n" does not exceed the file register area.
• If the number of transfer points specified by "n" exceeds the file register area, an operation error (M8067) occurs
and the instruction is not executed.
• In the case of indexing
When S and D are indexed, the instruction is executed if the actual device number is within the file
register area and the number of transfer points is within the file register area also.
138
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]
1
4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]
Introduction
Extension registers (R) are the extended form of data registers (D).
The contents of extension registers (R) can be stored in extension file registers (ER). In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, extension
file registers (ER) are available only while the memory cassette is attached.
2
4.10.1 Numbers of extension registers and extension file registers
Overview
The table below shows numbers of extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER).
(Numbers are assigned in decimal.)
1. FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Extension register (R) Extension file register (ER) 3
(General type) (file type)
List
Instruction
R0 to R23999 ER0 to ER23999
24000 points*1 24000 points*2
2. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Extension register (R)
(latched [battery backed] type)
Extension file register (ER)
(file type)
4
in Detail
Devices
R0 to R32767 ER0 to ER32767
32768 points 32768 points*3
*2. These registers are stored in the EEPROM built in the PLC, or in the EEPROM in the memory cassette when 5
the memory cassette is attached.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
*3. Available only while a memory cassette is mounted (because they are stored in the flash memory inside a
memory cassette.)
4.10.2 Data storage destination and access method

Because the memory for storing data is different between extension registers and extension file registers, the access
6
Programming
Before
method is different as shown in the table below:
Data storage destination

Device PLC Data storage destination
FX3G/FX3GC Built-in RAM
Extension register
FX3U/FX3UC Built-in RAM (latched [battery backed] area) 7
Instruction
Basic
FX3G Built-in EEPROM or EEPROM in memory cassette
Extension file register FX3GC Built-in EEPROM
FX3U/FX3UC Memory cassette (flash memory)
Difference in the access method
Access method
Extension
8
register
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Only dedicated instructions are

Reading in program 
enabled
Only dedicated instructions are
Writing in program 
enabled
Display module
Test operation in online mode of GX Works2, GX Developer



×
9
Data change
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Batch writing by GX Works2, GX Developer  

method
Computer link function  ×
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
139
4.10.3 Structures of extension registers and extension file registers

One extension register consists of 16 bits. Extension registers can be used in 16-bit and 32-bit applied instructions in
the same way as data registers.
1) 16-bit type
One extension register (consisting of 16 bits) can handle a numeric ranging from −32768 to +32767.
High R0, ER0 (16 bits) Low
order 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 order
b15 b0
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
A numeric value is usually read from and written to an extension register by applied instructions.
However, a numeric value can also be directly read from and written to an extension register from a display unit,
display module, or programming tool.
2) 32-bit type
Two serial extension registers (consisting of 32 bits) can express a 32-bit numeric value ranging from
−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647. (A larger number register handles high-order 16 bits, and a smaller number
register handles low-order 16 bits.)
High R1, ER1 (high-order 16 bits) R0, ER0 (low-order 16 bits) Low
order 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 order
b31 b0
1,073,741,824
536,870,912
268,435,456
134,217,728
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216
8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
• In the case of 32 bit type, when an extension register on the low-order side (example: R0) is specified, the
subsequent serial number on the high-order side (example: R1) is automatically occupied.
Either an odd or even device number can be specified for the low-order side, but it is recommended to specify an
even device number for the convenience of the monitoring function for display units, display modules, and
programming tools.
4.10.4 Initialization of extension registers and extension file registers

The contents of extension registers are backed up by the battery even when the power is turned OFF or when the PLC
mode switches from STOP to RUN in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs and in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs if extension registers are changed
to the latched (battery backed) type and the optional battery is installed.
When initializing the contents of extension registers, clear them using a sequence program, GX Works2 or GX
Developer.
1. When clearing the data using a program

• When initializing some extension registers (R)
Example: When initializing (clearing) R0 to R199
Command
FNC 16 K0 R0 K200
FMOVP
• When initializing extension registers and extension file registers in sector units
Sectors are not provided for extension registers and extension file registers in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
Example: When initializing R0 to R4095 and ER0 to ER4095 (initializing two sectors starting from R0 and ER0)
Ex. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Command
FNC292 The current value in Ro to R4095 is initialized
R0 K2 to "FFFFH".
INITRP
2. When clearing the data using GX Works2

Select [Online] → [PLC Memory Operation] → [Clear PLC memory...] in GX Works2, and clear [Data device].
This operation initializes the contents of timers, counters, data registers, file registers and extension registers.
140
1
4.10.5 Functions and operation examples of extension registers
Introduction
Extension registers can be used in various controls with numeric data the same as data registers.
This subsection explains operations in representative basic instructions and applied instructions among various
applications.
For the full use of extension registers, refer to the explanation of applied instructions described later.
2
1. Extension registers in basic instructions
Overview
• Specifying an extension register as the set value of a timer or counter
T 2 R 0 A counter or timer operates with regards to the contents of a

specified extension register as the set value.
3
C 10 R 20
List
Instruction
2. Extension registers in applied instructions
• Changing the current value of a counter 4
The current value of the counter C2 is changed to the contents
in Detail
Devices
FNC 12 R 5 C 2
MOV of R5.
• Reading the current value of a counter to an extension register
FNC 12 C 10 R 4
The current value of the counter C10 is transferred to R4. 5
MOV
Constant
Device &
Specified the
• Storing a numeric value to extension registers
"200 (decimal value)" is transferred to R10.
16 bits
FNC 12
MOV
K200 R 10 6
Programming
Before
"80000 (decimal value)" is transferred to R10 and R11.
32 bits
Because a numeric value larger than 32767, the 32-bit
FNC 12 K80000 R10(R11) operation (double D instruction) is required. When an
DMOV extension register on the low-order side (R10) is specified, an
extension register on the high-order side (R11) is
automatically occupied. 7
• Transferring the contents of a data register to extension register
Instruction
Basic
The contents of D10 are transferred to R20.
FNC 12 D 10 R 20
MOV
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
141
4.10.6 Functions and operation examples of extension file registers

Extension file registers (ER) are usually used as log data storage destinations and set data storage destinations.
Extension file registers can be handled only with dedicated instructions shown in the table below. When using data
contents with other instructions, transfer them to an extension register of the same device number, and then use the
extension register.
However, extension file registers (ER) are available in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs only when the memory cassette is attached.
• FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Instruction Description
LOADR (FNC290) This (transfer) instruction reads data of extension file registers (ER)*1 to extension registers (R).
This (transfer) instruction writes specified extension registers (R) to extension file registers (ER)
RWER (FNC294)
Use this instruction to store the contents of any extension register (R) in extension file registers (ER)*1.
*1. When the memory cassette is attached, extension file registers in the memory cassette are accessed.
When the memory cassette is not attached, extension file registers in the EEPROM built in the PLC are
accessed.
• FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
LOADR (FNC290) This (transfer) instruction reads data of extension file registers (ER)*2 to extension registers (R).
This (transfer) instruction writes data of extension registers (R) to extension file registers (ER)*2 in 2048 point (1
SAVER (FNC291) sector) units. Use this instruction to store newly created sectors (2048 points) of data to extension file registers
(ER)*2.
This instruction initializes extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER)*2 in 2048 point (1 sector) units.
INITR (FNC292) Use this instruction to initialize extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER)*2 before starting to log data
by the LOGR instruction.
LOGR (FNC293) This instruction logs specified data, and writes it to extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER)*2.
This (transfer) instruction writes specified extension registers (R) to extension file registers (ER)*2.This instruction is
RWER (FNC294) supported in FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later. Use this instruction to store the contents of any extension register (R) to
extension file register (ER)*2.
This instruction initializes extension file registers (ER)*2 in 2048 point (1 sector) units. This instruction is supported
INITER (FNC295) in FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later. Use this instruction to initialize extension file registers (ER)*2 before executing
SAVER instruction.
*2. Extension file registers are only accessible when a memory cassette is mounted.
1. Relationship between extension file registers and extension registers

Extension file registers and extension registers have the following positional relationship inside the PLC.
a) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Extension register (R) Extension file register (ER)

Available in built-in RAM Available in attached memory
General-purpose device cassette or built-in EEPROM*3
(sequence program) RWER instruction
R0 (arbitrary number of points) ER0
General
applied LOADR instruction
instruction (point units)
R23999 ER23999
All points are Nonvolatile
written at one memory
time
Programming tool
GX Works2, GX Developer
*3. Memory cassette cannot be connected to FX3GC PLCs.
142
1
b) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Introduction
Extension register (R) Extension file register (ER)
Available in built-in RAM Available with a memory
cassette mounted
SAVER instruction
(sector units)
RWER instruction
2
(point units)
Overview
R0 2048 ER0 2048
points points 1 sector
General-purpose device R2048 ER2048
General 2048 2048
(sequence program) applied points LOADR instruction points
instruction R4096 (point units) ER4096
2048 2048
points points 3
INITER instruction ER6144 2048
List
Instruction
INITER (initialization) points
LOGR (sector units) 16
instruction sectors
INITR instruction
(initialization) All points are
4
written at one
in Detail
Devices
(sector units)
R30720 time ER30720
R32767 ER32767
Nonvolatile
memory
Programming tool
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
GX Works2, GX Developer
2. Sectors of extension registers and extension file registers

In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, extension registers and extension file registers are divided into sectors in the data configuration.
One sector consists of 2,048 devices. The table below shows the head device number in each sector. 6
In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, sectors are not provided for extension registers and extension file registers.
Programming
Before
Head Head
Sector No. Device range Sector No. Device range
device No. device No.
Sector 0 R0 ER0 to ER2047, R0 to R2047 Sector 8 R16384 ER16384 to ER18431, R16384 to R18431
Sector 2 R4096 ER4096 to ER6143, R4096 to R6143 Sector 10 R20480 ER20480 to ER22527, R20480 to R22527 7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
143
4.10.7 Cautions on using extension file registers
1. Cautions on writing data to extension file registers (FX3U/FX3UC PLCs)

Because extension file registers are stored in the flash memory inside a memory cassette, pay attention to the
following points:
• When writing data to extension file registers by SAVER instruction
Initialize sectors to be written before executing this instruction. After initialization, store data to be written to
extension registers.
In FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later, it is not necessary to initialize sectors to be written when using RWER instruction.
• When writing data to extension file registers by LOGR instruction
Initialize sectors to be written before starting to log data.
• When using INITR instruction
This instruction initializes the contents of specified extension registers and extension file registers.
When initializing only extension file registers by this instruction, make sure to temporarily move the contents of
extension registers to unused extension registers or unused data registers before executing this instruction.
When initializing only extension file registers in FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later, use INITER instruction.
2. Initialization of extension file registers

Because the contents of extension file registers are stored in the memory cassette or built-in EEPROM, use the data
clear operation in a sequence program, GX Works2 or GX Developer to initialize them.
For writing data to extension file registers in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, it is necessary to initialize the target area to be written
in advance.
For writing data to extension file registers in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, it is not necessary to initialize the target area to be
written in advance.
1) When initializing extension file registers in a program (required only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs)
a) Initializing only extension file registers in sector units [Ver. 1.30 or later]
Example: When initializing ER0 to ER4095 (initializing two sectors starting from ER0)
Command input
FNC295 The current value is initialized to "FFFFH" in ER0
R0 K2 to ER4095.
INITERP
b) Initializing extension registers and extension file registers in sector units

Example: When initializing R0 to R4095 and ER0 to ER4095 (initializing two sectors starting from R0 and
ER0)
Command input
FNC292 R0 K2 The current value is initialized to "FFFFH" in R0 to R4095 and
INITRP ER0 to ER4095.
2) When initializing extension file registers using GX Works2

Select [Online] → [PLC Memory Operation] → [Clear PLC memory...] in GX Works2, and clear [Data device].
This operation initializes the contents of timers, counters, data registers, file registers and extension registers.

Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers.
Data can be written to the memory cassette (flash memory) up to 10,000 times.
Every time the INITR (FNC292), RWER (FNC294) or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is counted as a
write to the memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
When a continuous operation type instruction is used, data is written to the memory in every operation cycle of the
PLC. To prevent this, make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction.
Writing data to the memory is executed also by writing data to file registers from peripheral equipment
(programming software, handy programming panels, and display units).
Execution of the LOADR (FNC290), SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction is not counted as a write to
the memory. However, it is necessary to initialize the writing target sector before executing the SAVER (FNC291)
or LOGR (FNC293) instruction.
Every time the INITR (FNC292) or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is counted as a write to the memory.
Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
• In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Data can be written to the memory cassette (EEPROM) up to 10,000 times, and to the built-in memory (EEPROM)
up to 20,000 times.
Every time the RWER (FNC294) instruction is executed, it is counted as a write to the memory. Make sure not to
exceed the allowable number of writes.
Execution of the LOADR (FNC290) instruction is not counted as a write to the memory.
144
1
4.10.8 Registration of data in extension registers and extension file registers
Introduction
This subsection explains the operating procedures of GX Works2.
→ For details on GX Developer operating procedures, refer to GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual.
1 Setting the project type, PLC type and programming language 2
Overview
Select [Project]→[New].
List
Instruction
4
in Detail
Devices
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
145
2 Creating the device memory

This operation is not required when using the device memory offered as the default.
1. Right-click [Device Memory] in the project data list to open the submenu.
2. Click [Add New Data] to open the New Data dialog box.
3. Input the data name, and click the [OK] button to display the dialog box for Device Memory.
146
1
3
Introduction
Setting the data
1. Select [Edit]→[Input Device] to open the Input Device dialog box.
2. Set the "Device", "Range", "Display Mode" and "Register".

2
Overview
3
List
Instruction
4
3. Set the data.
in Detail
Devices
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
147
4 Writing (transferring) the data to the PLC

1. Select [Online]→[Write to PLC] to open the Online Data Operation dialog box.
2. Check the Device Memory to Write (transfer) the data.
3. Click the [Detail] button in the Online Data Operation dialog box to open the Device Data Detail
Setting dialog box.
Check the "Ext. file register".
Click the blank

space to
change it into
" ".
4. Click the [Execute] button in the Online Data Operation dialog box to write (transfer) to the PLC.
148
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.11 Index Register [V and Z]
1
4.11 Index Register [V and Z]
Introduction
Index registers can be used in the same way as of data registers. But they are special registers since they can change
the contents of device numbers and numeric values by program when combined with another device number or
numeric value in operands of applied instructions.
2
4.11.1 Numbers of index registers
Overview
The table below shows numbers of index registers (V and Z). (Numbers are assigned in decimal.)
When only "V" or "Z" is specified, it is handled as "V0" or "Z0" respectively.
Index type
V0 (V) to V7, Z0 (Z) to Z7
16 points*1
3
List
Instruction
*1. The characteristics related to protection against power failure cannot be changed by parameters.
4.11.2 Functions and structures
1. 16-bit type 4
Index registers have the same structures as data registers.
in Detail
Devices
16 bits 16 bits
V Z
V0 to V7: Z0 to Z7:
8 points 8 points
2. 32-bit type 5
Make sure to use Z0 to Z7 when indexing a device in a 32-bit applied instruction or handling a numeric value outside
Constant
Device &
Specified the
the 16-bit range.
32 bits This is because FX PLCs handle Z as the low-order side of a 32-bit
V0 (high-order side) Z0 (low-order side) register as shown in combinations of V and Z in the figure on the left.
Even if V0 to V7 on the high-order side is specified, indexing is not
V1 (high-order side) Z1 (low-order side) executed.
When index registers are specified as a 32-bit device, both V (high-
6
V2 (high-order side) Z2 (low-order side)
Programming
Before
order side) and Z (low-order side) are referred to at the same time.
V3 (high-order side) Z3 (low-order side) If a numeric value for another purpose remains in V (high-order side),
consequently the numeric value here becomes extremely large, thus
V4 (high-order side) Z4 (low-order side) an operation error occurs.
Example of writing to 32-bit index registers
V5 (high-order side) Z5 (low-order side)
V6 (high-order side) Z6 (low-order side) FNC 12

DMOV
K300 Z2 7
Instruction
Basic
V7 (high-order side) Z7 (low-order side) K300→(V2,Z2)
Even if an index value in a 32-bit applied instruction does not exceed
the 16-bit numeric range, use a 32-bit operation instruction such as
DMOV for writing a numeric value to Z as shown in the above figure
so that both V (high-order side) and Z (low-order side) are overwritten
at the same time. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
4.11.3 Indexing of devices

Available devices and the contents of indexing are as described below:
→ For indexing method and cautions, refer to Section 5.7.
Decimal devices/numeric values: M, S, T, C, D, R, KnM, KnS, P and K
For example, when "V0 = K5" is specified and "D20V0" is executed, an instruction is executed for the device number
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
D25 (D20 + 5).

Constants can be indexed also. When "K30V0" is specified, an instruction is executed for decimal value K35 (30 + 5).
Octal devices: X, Y, KnX and KnY
For example, when "Z1 = K8" is specified and "X0Z1" is executed, an instruction is executed for the device number
X10 (X0 + 8: addition of octal value). When indexing for a device whose device number is handled in octal, a numeric
value converted into octal is added for the contents of V and Z.
Accordingly, note that when "Z1 = K10" is specified "X0Z1" indicates that X12 is specified, and X10 is not specified. 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
Hexadecimal numeric values: H

For example, when "V5 = K30" is specified and a constant "H30V5" is specified, it is handled as H4E (30H + K30).
When "V5 = H30" is specified and a constant "H30V5" is specified, it is handled as H60 (30H + 30H).
149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I]
4.12 Pointer [P and I]
4.12.1 Numbers of pointers

The table below shows numbers of pointers (P and I). (Numbers are assigned in decimal.)
When using a pointer for input interrupt, an input number assigned to it cannot be used together with a "high-speed
counter" or "speed detection (FNC 56)" which uses the same input range.
1. FX3S PLC
For branch For input interrupt For timer interrupt
For jump to END step
I00(X000) I30(X003) I6
P0 to P62
P63 I10(X001) I40(X004) I7
P64 to P255
1 point I20(X002) I50(X005) I8
255 points
6 points 3 points
2. FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
For branch For input interrupt For timer interrupt
For jump to END step
I00(X000) I30(X003) I6
P0 to P62
P63 I10(X001) I40(X004) I7
P64 to P2047
1 point I20(X002) I50(X005) I8
2047 points
6 points 3 points
3. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
For input interrupt/input delay For counter
For branch For timer interrupt
For jump to END step interrupt interrupt
I00(X000) I30(X003) I6 I010 I040
P0 to P62
P63 I10(X001) I40(X004) I7 I020 I050
P64 to P4095
1 point I20(X002) I50(X005) I8 I030 I060
4095 points
4.12.2 Functions and operation examples of pointers for branch

The roles and operations of pointers for branch are as described below.
Because all of these pointers are combined with applied instructions, refer to the explanation of each instruction for the
detailed method.
→ For details on interrupt function, refer to Chapter 36.
1. Applied instructions using pointers for branch (P)

• CJ (FNC 00) (conditional jump)
X001
FNC 00 P 0 When X001 turns ON, the PLC jumps to a label
CJ position specified by CJ (FNC 00) instruction,
and executes the subsequent program.
Jump
Label
P0
• CALL (FNC 01) call subroutine

X001
FNC 01 P 1 When X001 turns ON, the PLC executes a
CALL subroutine in the label position specified by
Main program CALL (FNC 01) instruction, and then returns to
Jump the original position by SRET (FNC 02)
FNC 06 instruction.
FEND
Label
P1 Subroutine
FNC 02 program
SRET Return
150
1
• Role of pointer P63 for jump to the END step
Introduction
P63 is a special pointer for jumping to the END step
FNC 00 P 63 when the CJ (FNC 00) instruction is executed.
CJ Note that a program error will occur when P63 is
programmed as a label.
→ Refer to "5. Label unnecessary for the
pointer P63" in Section 8.1. 2
Label
Overview
P63 END
Should not be programmed.
4.12.3 Functions and operation examples of pointers for interrupt 3
List
Instruction
→ For details on interrupt function, refer to Chapter 36.
There are three types of pointers for interrupt. When in use, they are combined with IRET (FNC 03), EI (FNC 04) and
DI (FNC 05) for interrupt return, enabling interrupt and disabling interrupt.
1. Pointers for input interrupt (delay interrupt): 6 points

→ For details on input interrupt function, refer to Section 36.3 and Section 36.4. 4
The PLC can receive input signals from specific input numbers without influence of the operation cycle of the PLC. By
in Detail
Devices
using these input signals as triggers, the PLC executes interrupt routine programs.
Because pointers for input interrupt can handle signals shorter than the operation cycle, use them for high priority
processing during sequence control and for control handling short pulses.
Pointer for input interrupt ON duration or OFF duration of input signal
Input Interrupt at rising Interrupt at falling Interrupt disabling flag
FX3S FX3G/FX3GC FX3U/FX3UC
5
edge edge
Constant
Device &
Specified the
X000 I001 I000 M8050*1
10 μs or more 10 μs or more
X001 I101 I100 M8051*1
X002 I201 I200 M8052*1 50 μs or more
5 μs or more
M8053*1
X003
X004
I301
I401
I300
I400 M8054*1
50 μs or more 10 μs or more 6
Programming
Before
X005 I501 I500 M8055*1 50 μs or more
*1. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP.
Non-overlap of input numbers
Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high-speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/ZRN/DSZR/DVIT instructions
and general-purpose inputs. When assigning functions, there should be no overlap between those input terminals.
7
Instruction
Basic
Delay function of input interrupt (Only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs)
This input interrupt has a function to delay the execution of interrupt routine in units of 1ms.
The delay time is specified by the following pattern program.
This delay function can electrically adjust the mounting position of sensors for input interrupts without shifting the
actual position.
8
Contact for setting delay time
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
I
M8393
FNC 12 • Delay time specifying program
K{{{* D8393 Make sure to describe the delay time specifying
MOV
program shown on the left at the head of an
[1] Delay time (unit: ms) interrupt routine program.
Because this is a pattern program, change only
Program to be processed by input interrupt
the delay time [1].
Only a constant (K) or data register (D) can be
9
used to specify the delay time*.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
FNC 03 • Interrupt program is finished

IRET
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
151
Operations
FNC 04 • Interrupt is usually disabled in the PLC.

If interrupt is enabled by EI instruction, when
EI X000 or X001 turns ON while a program is
scanned, the PLC executes the interrupt
Interrupt enabled routine [1] or [2], and then returns to the main
range program by IRET instruction.
FNC 06
Pointer for FEND
interrupt Rising edge of X000 is detected
I001 • Make sure to program a pointer for interrupt
(I***) as a label after FEND instruction.
Interrupt routine [1]
FNC 03
IRET
Pointer for
interrupt Rising edge of X001 is detected
I101
Interrupt routine [2]

FNC 03
IRET
END
2. Pointers for timer interrupt: 3 points

→ For details on timer interrupt function, refer to Section 36.5.
The PLC executes an interrupt routine program at every specified interrupt cycle time (10 to 99 ms).
Use these pointers for control requiring cyclic processing regardless of the operation cycle of the PLC.
Input No. Interrupt cycle (ms) Interrupt disabling flag
I6 M8056*1
An integer ranging from 10 to 99 is put in "" portion of the pointer name.
I7
Ex: I610 = Timer interrupt at every 10 ms M8057*1
I8 M8058*1
Caution
It is recommended to set the timer interrupt time to 10 ms or more. When the timer interrupt time is set to 9 ms or less,
the timer interrupt processing may not be executed at an accurate cycle in the following cases:
• When the processing time of the interrupt program is long
• When an instruction requiring long processing time is used in the main program
152
1
Operations
Introduction
Step FNC 04 Interrupt is • Timer interrupt is enabled after EI instruction.
0 enabled It is not necessary to program DI (disable
EI interrupt) instruction when no zone to disable
timer interrupt is needed.
Main
program
2
Overview
FNC 06 Main program • "FEND" indicates the end of the main
FEND is finished program.
Make sure to describe an interrupt routine
Pointer for
after "FEND". 3
Interrupt at every 20 ms
List
Instruction
interrupt
• The PLC executes an interrupt routine at every
I620 Interrupt 20 ms.
routine The PLC returns to main program by IRET
instruction.
FNC 03
IRET
Interrupt return 4
in Detail
Devices
END
3. Pointers for counter interrupt: 6 points*1

→ For details on counter interrupt function, refer to Section 36.6. 5
The PLC executes an interrupt routine based on the comparison result obtained by the comparison set instruction for
Constant
Device &
Specified the
high-speed counter (DHSCS instruction).
Use these pointers for control requiring an interrupt routine based on the counting result from high-speed counters.
Pointer No. Interrupt disabling flag Pointer No. Interrupt disabling flag
I010 I040
I020 M8059*2 I050 M8059*2 6
I030 I060
Programming
Before
Operations
Step
0 FNC 04 • Enable interrupt after EI instruction, and 7
EI describe the main program.
Instruction
Basic
M8000
C255 K2,147,483,647 • Drive the coil of a high-speed counter, and
specify an interrupt pointer in DHSCS (FNC 53)
RUN
monitor FNC 53
DHSCS K1000 C255 I010
instruction.
8
• When the current value of C255 changes from
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
"999" to "1000" or from "1001" to "1000", the

Interrupt pointer interrupt routine is executed.
FNC 06 number is For example of interrupt program, refer to an
FEND input interrupt described above.
specified
Pointer for
interrupt Counter interrupt is specified
9
I010
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Interrupt routine
(interrupt program)
FNC 03 Interrupt return

IRET
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
END
153
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLC (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers)
5. How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions

This chapter explains how to specify sources and destinations in sequence instructions which are the basis for
handling PLC instructions.
• Specifying constants as decimal, hexadecimal and real numbers
• Specifying digits of bit devices
• Specifying bit positions in data registers
• Directly specifying BFM (buffer memory) in special function units/blocks
• Indexing with index registers
5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLC

(Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers)
FX PLCs handle five types of numeric values according to the application and purpose.
This section explains the roles and functions of these numeric values.
5.1.1 Types of numeric values
1. Decimal numbers (DEC)

• Set value (constant K) of timers and counters
• Device numbers of auxiliary relays (M), timers (T), counters (C), state relays (S), etc.
• Numeric values in operands and instruction operations in applied instructions (constant K)
2. Hexadecimal numbers (HEX)

• Numeric values in operands and instruction operations in applied instructions (constant H)
3. Binary numbers (BIN)

For a timer, counter or data register, a numeric value is specified in Input from
decimal or hexadecimal as described above. But all of these numeric Example of decimal keyboard
number input (decimal) K 7 8 9
values are handled in binary format inside PLCs.
When these devices are monitored in peripheral equipment, they are 0: Positive value
automatically converted into the decimal format as shown in the figure 1: Negative value
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
on the right (or can be converted into the hexadecimal format).
• Handling of negative value (binary)
A negative value is expressed in complement of PLCs.
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
For details, refer to the explanation of NEG (FNC 29)
Automatic
• instruction. 1+4+16+256+512 conversion
= 789 (decimal) K 7 8 9
4. Octal numbers (OCT) Monitoring in programming tool
In FX PLCs, device numbers of input relays and output relays are
assigned in octal.
Because "8" and "9" do not exist in octal, device numbers are carried in the way "0 to 7, 10 to 17, 70 to 77, 100 to
107".
5. Binary coded decimal (BCD)

BCD format expresses each numeric value from 0 to 9 constructing each digit of a decimal number in a 4-bit binary
number.
Because handling of each digit is easy, this format is adopted in controlling digital switches of BCD output type and
seven-segment display units.
6. Real numbers (floating point data)

FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs have the floating point operation function to achieve high accuracy
operation.
In floating point operations, binary floating points (real numbers) are used, and scientific notation (real numbers) are
used for monitoring them.
154
1
5.1.2 Conversion of numeric values
Introduction
Numeric values handled in FX PLCs can be converted as shown in the table below:
Hexadecimal number
Decimal number (DEC) Octal number (OCT) Binary number (BIN) BCD
(HEX)
0 0 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 2
1 1 01 0000 0001 0000 0001
Overview
2 2 02 0000 0010 0000 0010
3 3 03 0000 0011 0000 0011
4 4 04 0000 0100 0000 0100
5 5 05 0000 0101 0000 0101
6 6 06 0000 0110 0000 0110 3
7 7 07 0000 0111 0000 0111
List
Instruction
8 10 08 0000 1000 0000 1000
9 11 09 0000 1001 0000 1001
10 12 0A 0000 1010 0001 0000
11 13 0B 0000 1011 0001 0001
12 14 0C 0000 1100 0001 0010 4
13 15 0D 0000 1101 0001 0011
in Detail
Devices
14 16 0E 0000 1110 0001 0100
15 17 0F 0000 1111 0001 0101
16 20 10 0001 0000 0001 0110
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
99 143 63 0110 0011 1001 1001 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
Major applications
Hexadecimal number
Decimal number (DEC) Octal number (OCT) Binary number (BIN) BCD
(HEX)
Constants (K) and
numbers of internal Numbers of internal Processing inside
BCD digital switches 6
Constants (H) and seven-segment
Programming
Before
devices except I/O I/O relays PLC
display units
relays
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
155
5.1.3 Handling of numeric values in floating point operations
Handling of numeric values in floating point operations

Binary integers are handled inside PLCs.
During division of integers, the answer "40 ÷ 3 = 13 ... 1" is obtained, for example.
During square root extraction operations, decimal points are ignored.
In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, floating point operations are available to achieve higher accuracy in
such operations.
Binary floating point (real number)

When handling a binary floating point (real number) in data registers, use a pair of data registers having consecutive
device numbers.
When D11 and D10 are used, for example, a binary floating point is handled as shown below:
D 11(b15 to b0) D 10(b15 to b0)
27 26 25 21 20 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-21 2-22 2-23
S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A2 A1 A0
b31 b30 b29 b28 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b2 b1 b0
8 bits in 23 bits in
exponent part mantissa part
E0 to E7 = 0 or 1 A0 to A22 = 0 or 1
Sign for mantissa part 0 in case "b0 to b31 = 0"
(0: Positive, 1: Negative)
Binary floating point (real number) = ± (20 + A22 × 2−1 + A21 × 2−2 + ... + A0 × 2−23)
× 2 (E7 × 2 + E6 × 2 + ... + E0 × 2 )/2127
Example: A22=1 , A21=0, A20=1, A19 to A0=0, E7=1, E6 to E1=0, E0=1
Binary floating point (real number) = ± (20 + 1 × 2−1 + 0 × 2−2 + 1 × 2−3 + ... + 0 × 2−23)
× 2 (1 × 2 + 0 × 2 + ... + 1 × 2 )/2127
= ±1.625 × 2129/2127 = ±1.625 × 22
The sign bit b31 states whether data is positive or negative, but is not handled as a complement.
Number of significant figures

The number of significant figures of binary floating point is approximately 7 when expressed in decimal. The binary
floating point range is as follows:
- Least absolute value: 1175494 × 10-44

- Most absolute value: 3402823 × 1032
Handling of the zero (M8020), borrow (M8021) and carry (M8022) flags
These flags operate as follows in floating point operations.
- Zero flag : 1 when the result is 0

- Borrow flag : 1 when the result does not reach the minimum unit but is not 0
- Carry flag : 1 when the absolute value of the result exceeds the available numeric value range.
Monitoring of binary floating point (real number)

A programming software supporting the display of floating point such as GX Works2 and GX Developer can directly
monitor binary floating point (real number).
A programming tool not supporting the display of floating point can monitor binary floating point (real number) when it
is converted into scientific notation (real number).
156
1
Scientific notation (real number)
Introduction
Because binary floating point (real number) is difficult to understand for users, it can be converted into scientific
notation (real number). But internal operations are executed using binary floating point (real number).
Scientific notation (real number) is handled by a pair of data registers having serial device numbers. Different from
binary floating point (real number), a data register having a smaller device number handles the mantissa part, and the
other data register having a larger device number handles the exponent part.
For example, when data registers D1 and D0 are used, they handle scientific notation as shown below. Data can be 2
written to D0 and D1 by MOV instruction.
Overview
Scientific notation (real number) = [Mantissa D0] × 10 [Exponent D1]
Mantissa D0 = ± (1000 to 9999) or 0
Exponent D1 = −41 to +35
The most significant bit of D0 and D1 specifies the positive or negative sign respectively, and is handled as the 3
complement of 2 respectively.
List
Instruction
The mantissa D0 does not allow "100", for example. In the case of "100", it is handled as "1000 × 10−1".
The scientific notation (real number) range is as follows:
- Minimum absolute value: 1175 × 10−41

- Maximum absolute value: 3402 × 1035 4
in Detail
Devices
Number of significant figures
The number of significant figures of scientific notation is approximately 4 when expressed in decimal. The scientific
notation range is as described above.
Scientific notation (real number) is valid in the following instructions:

- Conversion from binary floating point (real number) into scientific notation (real number): FNC118 ([D]EBCD) 5
- Conversion from scientific notation (real number) into binary floating point (real number): FNC119 ([D]EBIN)
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
157
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.2 Specification of Constants K, H and E (Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Number)
5.2 Specification of Constants K, H and E

(Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Number)
When handling constants in a sequence program, use constant K (decimal), H (hexadecimal) or E (floating point).
In peripheral equipment for programming, add "K" to a decimal number, "H" to a hexadecimal number and "E" to a
floating point (real number) for operations associated with numeric values in instructions. (Examples: K100 (decimal
number), H64 (hexadecimal number) and E1.23 (or E1.23 + 10) (real number))
The roles and functions of constants are described below.
5.2.1 Constant K (decimal number)

"K" indicates a decimal integer, and is mainly used to specify the set value of timers and counters and numeric values
as operands in applied instructions. (Example: K1234)
The decimal constant specification range is as follows:
- When word data (16 bits) is used ...... K-32768 to K32767

- When double data (32 bits) is used ... K-2,147,483,648 to K2,147,483,647
5.2.2 Constant H (hexadecimal number)

"H" indicates a hexadecimal number, and is mainly used to specify numeric values as operands in applied instructions.
(Example: H1234)
When using digits 0 to 9, the bit status (1 or 0) of each bit is equivalent to the BCD code, so BCD data can be specified
also.
(Example: H1234 ... When specifying BCD data, specify each digit of hexadecimal number in 0 to 9.)
The hexadecimal constant setting range is as follows:
- When word data (16 bits) is used ...... H0 to HFFFF (H0 to H9999 in the case of BCD data)
- When double data (32 bits) is used ... H0 to HFFFFFFFF (H0 to H99999999 in the case of BCD data)
5.2.3 Constant E (real number)
"E" indicates a real number (floating point data), and is mainly used to specify numeric values as operands in applied
instructions. (Example: E1.234 or E1.234 + 3)
The real number setting range is from −1.0 × 2128 to −1.0 × 2−126, 0 and 1.0 × 2−126 to 1.0 × 2128.
In a sequence program, a real number can be specified in two methods, "normal expression" and "exponent
expression".
- Normal expression: .................. Specify a numeric value as it is.

For example, specify "10.2345" in the form "E10.2345".
- Exponent expression: .............. Specify a numeric value in the format "(numeric value) × 10n".
For example, specify "1234" in the form "E1.234 + 3".
"+3" in "E1.234 + 3" indicates "103".
158
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.3 Character Strings
1
5.3 Character Strings
Introduction
Character strings are classified into character string constants which directly specify character strings in operands in
applied instructions and character string data. 2
Overview
5.3.1 Character string constant ("ABC")
A device "character string" directly specifies a character string in a sequence program.
Put half-width characters inside quotation marks (example: "ABCD1234") in specification.
JIS8 code is available.
Up to 32 characters can be specified as a character string. 3
List
Instruction
5.3.2 Character string data
With regard to character string data, a specified device to the NULL code (00H) is handled as one character string in
1-byte units.
When expressing (recognizing) character string data by bit devices with digit specification, however, 16 bits are
required for data including the NULL code (00H) specifying the end of the character string data because the instruction 4
length is 16 bits. (Refer to Example 2 in the step 2 below.)
in Detail
Devices
In the following cases, an operation error occurs in the applied instruction (error code: K6706):
• When "00H" is not specified in the corresponding device range after the source device number specified in an
applied instruction
• When there are insufficient devices for storing character string data (including "00H" or "0000H" indicating the end
1)
of the character string data) in the destination devices specified in an applied instruction
Character string data stored in word devices
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
• Example of data which can be • Example of data which cannot be
recognized as character string data recognized as character string data
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D100 2nd character 1st character D100 2nd character 1st character
D101 4th character 3rd character D101 4th character 3rd character
D102 6th character 5th character D102 6th character 5th character 6
…
Programming
Before
D110 00H 21st character D7999 "n"th character "(n-1)"th character
"00H" indicating the end of "00H" indicating the end of character string
the character string can be cannot be detected from the specified
detected. device to the end device number.
2) Character string data stored in bit devices with digit specification

• Example of data which can be • Examples of data which cannot be
7
Instruction
Basic
recognized as character string data recognized as character string data
16 bits <Example 1> 16 bits
M115 to M100 2nd character 1st character M115 to M100 2nd character 1st character
M131 to M116 4th character 3rd character M131 to M116 4th character 3rd character
M147 to M132 6th character 5th character M147 to M132 6th character 5th character
8
…
…
M7679 to
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
M211 to M196 00H 13th character M7664 "n"th character "(n-1)"th character
"00H" indicating the "00H" indicating the end of character string
end of the character cannot be detected from the specified
string can be device to the end device number.
detected. <Example 2> 16 bits
M7623 to M7608 2nd character 1st character 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
M7639 to M7624 4th character 3rd character

M7655 to M7640 6th character 5th character
M7671 to M7656 8th character 7th character
M7679 to M7672 00H
Because the data "00H" indicating the end
of the character string does not reach 16
bits, the end of the character string cannot
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
be recognized.
159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.4 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices (Kn[ ]***)
5.4 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices (Kn[ ]***)
Handling of bit devices

Devices which handle only the ON/OFF information such as X, Y, M and S are called bit devices.
On the other hand, devices handling numeric values such as T, C, D and R are called word devices.
Even bit devices can handle a numeric value when they are combined. In this case, the number of digits Kn and the
head device number are combined.
The number of digits is expressed in 4 bit units (digits); K1 to K4 are used for 16-bit data, and K1 to K8 are used for 32-
bit data.
For example, "K2M0" indicates two-digit data expressed by M0 to M7.
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Sign bit (0 = Positive, 1: Negative) D0 Low order
Transferred
Do not change
K2M0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
Transferred
Sign bit (0 = Positive, 1: Negative) D1 Low order
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
When 16-bit data is transferred to K1M0 to K3M0, the highest-order bits are not transferred due to insufficient data
length.
32-bit data is transferred in the same way.
When the number of digits specified for bit devices is K1 to K3 (or K1 to K7) in a 16-bit (or 32-bit) operation, the
insufficient high-order bits are always regarded as "0". It means that such data is always positive.
M0 Two-digit BCD data expressed by X004 to X013 is converted into binary

FNC 19 K2X004 D0
BIN data, and then transferred to D0.
A bit device number can be specified arbitrarily, but it is recommended to set the least significant digit to "0" for X or Y.
(In other words, it is recommended to specify "X000, X010, X020 ... Y000, Y010, Y020 ...")
For M and S, multiples of "8" are ideal, but it is recommended to specify "M0, M10, M20 ..." to prevent confusion.
Specification of consecutive words

A series of data registers starting from D1 means "D1, D2, D3, D4 ....."
In the case of word devices with digit specification, when such word devices are handled as a series, they are
specified as shown below:
• K1X000, K1X004, K1X010, K1X014 .....

• K2Y010, K2Y020, K2Y030 .....
• K3M0, K3M12, M3M24, K3M36 .....
• K4S16, K4S32, K4S48 .....
Use the above devices in digit units so that devices are not skipped.
When "K4Y000" is used in a 32-bit operation, the high-order 16 bits register as "0".
It is necessary to use "K8Y000" when 32-bit data is required.
160
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.5 Bit Specification of a Word Device (D[ ].b)
1
5.5 Bit Specification of a Word Device (D[ ].b)
Introduction
By specifying a bit of a word device, the specified bit can be used as bit data.
When specifying a bit of a word device, use a word device number and bit number (hexadecimal). 2
(Example: D0.0 ... Indicates the bit 0 of data register (D).)
Overview
Indexing is not available for both device numbers and bit numbers.
Target word device : Data register or special data register

Bit number : 0 to F (hexadecimal)
D0.F
D0.3 3
List
Instruction
D0 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16 bits 4
in Detail
Devices
5.6 Direct Specification of Buffer Memory (U[ ]\G[ ])
Constant
Device &
Specified the
A buffer memory (BFM) of a special function units/blocks can be specified directly.
BFM is 16-bit or 32-bit word data, and is mainly used for operands in applied instructions.
For specifying a BFM, specify the unit number (U) of a special function units/blocks and the BFM number (\G)
consecutively.
(Example: U0\G0 ... Indicates the BFM #0 in the special function units/blocks whose unit number is 0.)
Indexing is available for BFM numbers.
The specification range is as follows:
6
Programming
Before
Unit number (U).................... 0 to 7
BFM number (\G) ................ 0 to 32766
Example of MOV Transfer Transfer
instruction
FNC 12
source destination 7
K10 U0\G10
Instruction
Basic
MOV
Unit number BFM #10
Example of indexing
BFM number
Transfer Transfer 8
source destination
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
FNC 12 K20 U0\G10Z0

MOV
Unit number BFM #(10 + Z0)

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
161
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing
5.7 Indexing
The functions and structures of index registers are explained in detail in "4.11 Index Register [V and Z]".
Refer to Section 4.11 in advance.
5.7.1 Indexing in basic instructions
In the case of bit devices

Bit devices [X, Y, M (except special auxiliary relays), T, and C (C0 to C199)] used in LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI,
OUT, SET, RST, PLS, and PLF instructions can be indexed with index registers.
The figure shown on the right explains an indexing operation with the
X030
index register Z(0) for X000 and M0 in the LD instruction. FNC 12 K5 Z(0)
Transfer K5 or K10 to the index register Z(0) in advance. MOVP
If Z(0) is "5", "X(0+5) = X005". When X005 turns ON, Y000 turns ON and K5 → Z(0)
"M(0+5) = M5". When M5 turns ON, Y001 turns ON.
X030
If Z(0) is "10", "X(0+10) = X012*1". When X012*1 turns ON, Y000 turns ON FNC 12 K10 Z(0)
and "M(0+10) = M10". When M10 turns ON, Y001 turns ON. MOVP
K10 → Z(0)
*1. Refer to the caution 3) below.
X000Z(0)
• The index registers Z0 to Z7 and V0 to V7 can be used for indexing.
Y000
• In OUT instruction for a timer or counter, the timer number (or counter
number) and the device specified for the set value can be indexed. M0Z(0)
Cautions Y001
Z(0)=5 : X005=ON → Y000=ON
1) 32-bit counters and special auxiliary relays cannot be indexed with M5=ON → Y001=ON
index registers. Z(0)=10 : X012*2=ON → Y000=ON
M10=ON → Y001=ON
2) It is not permitted to use 16-bit counters as 32-bit counters by
*2 Refer to the caution 3).
executing indexing.
3) When an octal device number of X or Y is indexed with an index
register, the contents of the index register are converted into octal, and then added to the device number.
For example, when the value of an index register added to the input X000 is changed in the order "K0 → K8 →
K16", the device number converted into octal is added to the input X000 and the input number is changed in the
order "X(000+0) = X000 → X(000+8) = X10 → X(000+16) = X20".
In the case of word devices and constants

The set value of word devices used in OUT instruction of T and C(0~199) can be indexed with index registers.
The indexing operation is explained in an example in which the set value
D0 of T0 used in the index register V2 indexes OUT instruction (as shown X030
FNC 12 K0 V2
in the right figure). MOVP
Transfer K0 or K10 to the index register V2 in advance. K0 → V2
When X001 is set to ON, "D(0+0) = D0" if V2 is "0", and T0 operates with
the set value D0. X030
FNC 12 K10 V2
When X001 is set to ON, "D(0+10) = D10" if V2 is "10", and T0 operates MOVP
with the set value D10. K10 → V2
Caution X001
T0
1) When a 32-bit counter is used in OUT instruction, the set value
cannot be indexed with an index register. D0V2
V2 = 0 : The set value of T0 is the
present value of D0.
V2 = 10 : The set value of T0 is the
present value of D10.
162
1
5.7.2 Indexing in applied instructions
Introduction
Expression of applied instructions allowing indexing
In the explanation of applied instructions, "  " is added to the source S or destination D symbol to indicate
operands allowing indexing as shown in the figure below so that such operands can be discriminated from operands 2
not allowing indexing.
Overview
Indicates that indexing is allowed.
S D
FNC 12 K100 D 10
MOV
3
List
Instruction
In the case of bit devices
The indexing operation is explained in an example in which the
X000
comparison result M0 in CMP (FNC 10) instruction is indexed with the FNC 12 K0 V1
index register V1 (as shown in the figure on the right). MOVP
Transfer K0 or K10 to the index register V1 in advance. K0 → V1
When X001 is set to ON, "M(0+0) = M0" and the comparison result is
X000
4
output to M0 to M2 if V1 is "0". FNC 12 K10 V1
in Detail
Devices
On the other hand, "M(0+10) = M10" and the comparison result is output MOVP
to M10 to M12 if V1 is "10". K10 → V1
• The index registers Z0 to Z7 and V0 to V7 can be used for indexing. X001
FNC 10 D0 D1 M0V1
CMP
V1=0 V1=10 5
D0>D1 → M0=ON M10=ON
Constant
Device &
Specified the
In the case of word devices D0=D1 → M1=ON M11=ON
D0<D1 → M2=ON M12=ON
1. indexing operands in 16-bit instructions
The indexing operation is explained in an example in which the transfer
X000
destination D0 in MOV instruction is indexed with the index register V3 (as FNC 12 K0 V3
shown in the figure on the right).
Transfer K0 or K10 to the index register V3 in advance.
MOVP
K0 → V3
6
Programming
Before
When X001 is set to ON, "D(0+0) = D0" if V3 is "0", and K500 is X000
transferred to D0. FNC 12 K10 V3
When X001 is set to ON, "D(0+10) = D10" if V3 is "10", and K500 is MOVP
transferred to D10. K10 → V3
X001
FNC 12
MOV
K500 D0V3 7
Instruction
Basic
V3=0 : K500 → D0 (D0+0)
V3=10 : K500 → D10 (D0+10)
2. indexing operands in 32-bit instructions
In a 32-bit instruction, it is also necessary to specify a 32-bit index register
in the instruction. X002
FNC 12 K0 Z4
When an index register Z (Z0 to Z7) is specified in a 32-bit instruction, the
specified Z and its counterpart V (V0 to V7) work together as 32-bit
DMOVP 8
K0 → V4,Z4
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
registers.
X002
The indexing operation is explained in an example in which the transfer FNC 12 K10 Z4
destinations [D1, D0] in DMOV instruction are indexed with the index DMOVP
registers [V4, Z4] (as shown in the figure on the right). K10 → V4,Z4
Transfer K0 or K10 to the index registers [V4, Z4] in advance.
When X003 is set to ON, "[D(1+0), D(0+0)] = [D1, D0]" if [V4, Z4] is "0",
and K69000 is transferred to [D1, D0].
X003
FNC 12 K69000 D0Z4 9
DMOVP
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
When X003 is set to ON, "[D(1+10), D(0+10)] = [D11, D10]" if [V4, Z4] is V4,Z4=0 : K69000 → D1 ,D0 (D0+0)
"10", and K69000 is transferred to [D11, D10]. V4,Z4=10 : K69000 → D11,D10 (D0+10)
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
163
Cautions
1) When even if a numeric value written to index registers does not exceed the 16-bit numeric value range (0 to
32767), make sure to overwrite both V and Z using a 32-bit instruction. If only Z is overwritten and another
numeric value remains in V, the numeric value will be extremely large. Thus an operation error occurs.
2) It is not permitted to use 16-bit counters as 32-bit counters by executing indexing.
When 32-bit counters are required, add Z0 to Z7 to counters C200 and later.
3) It is not permitted to index V and Z themselves.
4) Direct specification of buffer memory in special function units/blocks
In the direct specification of buffer memory "U\G", the buffer memory number can be indexed with index
registers.
The unit number cannot be indexed with index registers.
("U0\G0Z0" is valid, but "U0Z0\G0" is invalid.)
5) Indexing in bit digit specification
It is not permitted to index "n" in "Kn" used for digit specification.
("K4M0Z0" is valid, but "K0Z0M0" is invalid.)
6) Indexing of I/O relays (octal device numbers)
X030
When octal device numbers of X, Y, KnX, and KnY are indexed with FNC 12 K0 V3
index register, the contents of an index register are converted into MOVP
octal, and then added to the device number. K0→V3
In the example shown in the figure on the right, Y007 to Y000 are X031
FNC 12 K8 V3
output by MOV instruction, and inputs are switched by indexing X007 MOVP
to X000, X017 to X010, and X027 to X020.
K8→V3
When rewriting the index value as "K0", "K8", "K16", the device X032
number converted into octal is added "X000 + 0 = X000", "X000 + 8 = FNC 12 K 16 V3
X10", "X000 + 16 = X20", and the input terminal working as the MOVP
source is changed accordingly. K16 → V 3
X033
FNC 12 K2X0V3 K2Y0
MOV
V3=0 : X7 to X0 → Y7 to Y0
V3=8 : X17 to X10 → Y7 to Y0
V3=16 : X27 to X20 → Y7 to Y0
Display example of timer present value

A sequence to display the present value of the timers T0 to T9 can be programmed index registers.
M8000
FNC 19 K1X000 Z0 Digital switch input
BIN 5
for setting timer
RUN monitor
(X003 to X000)BCD→(Z0)BIN number X003 to X000
FNC 18 PLC
T 0Z0 K4Y000
BCD
(T0Z0)BIN→(Y017 to Y000)BCD
"T0Z0 = T0 to T9" according to "Z0 = 0 to 9"
Seven-segment display unit

output for displaying
timer current value
Y017 to Y000
In the case of constants

The indexing operation is explained in an example in which the transfer
destination in MOV instruction is indexed with the index register V6 (as X004
FNC 12 K0 V6
shown in the figure on the right). MOVP
Transfer K0 or K20 to the index register V6 in advance.
K0 → V6
When X005 is set to ON, "K(6+0) = K6" if V6 is "0", and K6 is transferred
to D10. X004
FNC 12 K20 V6
When X005 is set to ON, "K(6+20) = K26" if V6 is "20", and K26 is MOVP
transferred to D10.
K20 → V6
X005
FNC 12 K6V6 D10
MOVP
V6=0 : K6 (K6+0) → D10
V6=20 : K26(K6+20) → D10
164
1
5.7.3 Indexing example for instruction with limited number of use.
Introduction
By modifying the target device numbers using index registers V and Z, the target device numbers can be changed
using the program. In this way, an instruction with a limited number of uses per program can be used with multiple
devices.
2
Example using the TKY instruction (FNC 70)
Overview
Two groups of key entries (numeric keypad from 0 to 9) X010
store the input data to D0 and D2. Although the TKY FNC 12 K0 V0 (K0) → (V0)
instruction (FNC 70) can only be programmed once, MOVP
modifying the head device number of the input data, FNC 12 K0 V1 (K0) → (V1)
storage destination and pressed key information, the MOVP
information can be input from the two groups of keys
FNC 12
3
(numeric keypad from 0 to 9). Furthermore, even if V is K0 V2 (K0) → (V2)
List
Instruction
MOVP
changed while this instruction is being executed, this
change is invalid. X012
FNC 12 K16 V0 (K16) → (V0)
The change is invalid until the instruction is no longer MOVP
being driven.
FNC 12 K2 V1 (K2) → (V1)
MOVP 4
FNC 12 (K20) → (V2)
in Detail
Devices
K20 V2
MOVP
X013
FNC 70 X000V0 D0V1 M0V2
TKY
TKY
Instruction
Input Data Data
Head Storage
Head Device
Number of 5
Device Destinati Pressed Key
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Number on Information
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
165
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions
6. What to Understand before Programming

This chapter explains the I/O processing, relationship among instructions and programming method which should be
understood before creating sequence programs.
6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions

In this manual, applied instructions are explained in the following form.
For the expression methods and basic rules for applied instructions, read in advance "6.5 General rules for applied
instructions" described later.
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (, , u, y) – FNC 20 to FNC 29

Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition
1
10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition Indicates applicable
Introduction
PLC versions.
Outline
This instruction executes addition by two values to obtain the result (A + B = C). 2 Applicable
oFor the floating point addition instruction EADD (FNC120), refer to Section 18.8.
series
Overview
1. Instruction format
FNC 20 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition Expression of applicable versions
D P
ADD
– → Ver. 2.20: before Ver. 2.20
Continuous Continuous
7 steps ADD
ADDP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
13 steps DADD
DADDP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
3
Operation Operation
– Ver. 2.20 →: Ver. 2.20 or later
List
Instruction
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Data for addition or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
4
in Detail
Devices
D Word device number storing the addition result 16- or 32-bit binary
3. Applicable devices
Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
5
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Type
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G V Z Modify K H E "" P
S1        S1 S2     
S2        S1 S2     
D       S1 S2    6
Programming
Before
S1: This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (ADD and ADDP) 7
The contents of S2 are added to S1 in binary format, and the addition result is transferred to D .
Instruction
Basic
Command
input FNC 20 S1  S2  D S1  + S2  o D 
ADD
• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data is added algebraically.
5 + (8) = 3
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
• When a constant (K) is specified in S1 or S2 , it is automatically converted into binary format.
2. 32-bit operation (DADD and DADDP)

The contents of [ S2 +1, S2 ] are added to [ S1 +1, S1 ] in binary format, and the addition result is
transferred to [ D1
Command
+1, D1 ].
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
input FNC 20 S1  S2  D [ S1  +1, S1  ] + [ S2  +1, S2  ] o>

D  1, D  ]
DADD
5500 + (8540) = 3040
• When a constant (K) is specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted into binary 10
format.
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
265
The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.
166
1
Outline
Introduction
1) The applied instruction number (FNC No.) and instruction mnemonic are indicated. The table below shows the
meaning of simplified expression.
Applicable
2
Overview
Mark Description instruction
(example)
FNC 12 No. Dotted lines on the upper left and lower left sides indicate an independent instruction
WDT (FNC 07)
Instruction
MOV name P not associated with the 16-bit or 32-bit type.
List
Instruction
FNC 12
No. Continuous lines on the upper left side indicates that 16-bit type is available. "D" on the
MOV (FNC 12)
D Instruction
MOV name P lower left side indicates that the 32-bit type is available.
FNC 12 No. Dotted lines on the lower left side indicate that the 32-bit type does not exist.
CJ (FNC 00)
D MOV name
Instruction P Continuous lines on the upper left side indicate that only the 16-bit type is available.
4
in Detail
Devices
FNC 12 No. Dotted lines on the upper left side indicate that the 16-bit type does not exist. "D" on the
HSCS (FNC 53)
D MOV name
Instruction P lower left side indicates that only the 32-bit type is available.
FNC 12 No. Continuous lines on the upper right side indicate that the continuous operation type is
available. "P" on the lower right side indicates that the pulse operation type is available.
CMP (FNC 10) 5
D MOV name P
Instruction
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Dotted lines on the lower right side indicate that the pulse operation type does not exist.
FNC 12 No.
Continuous line on the upper right side indicate that only the continuous operation type MTR (FNC 52)
DInstruction
MOV name P is available.
" "on the upper right side indicates that the contents of the destination change in
6
FNC 12 No.
Programming
Before
every operation cycle when the continuous operation type is used. INC (FNC 24)
DInstruction
MOV name P When operation should be executed only during the driving of an instruction, use the
pulse operation type indicated by "P" on the lower right side.
2. Set data
The contents of devices that can be specified as operands in instructions and available data types are described
below:
7
Instruction
Basic
1) Contents
The contents of operands in each instruction are described below.
2) Indexing of the source and destination
In operands to which "  " is added such as S and S1 , indexing is available.
Operands not allowing indexing are expressed as S and S1 . 8
3) Data types
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
- Bit : Bit device

- 16-bit BIN : 16-bit binary code
- 16/32-bit BIN : 16-bit or 32-bit binary code
- 32/64-bit BIN : 32-bit or 64-bit binary code 9
- 4-digit BCD : 4-digit (16-bit) BCD code
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
- 8-digit BCD : 8-digit (32-bit) BCD code

- 4/8-digit BCD : 4-digit (16-bit) or 8-digit (32-bit) BCD code
- Character string : Character code such as ASCII code and shift JIS code
- Character string (only ASCII) : ASCII code
- Real number (binary) : Binary floating point
- Real number (decimal) : Scientific notation 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
167
Applicable devices
Devices which can be specified in operands of instructions are shown.
When a device supports an instruction, "" is added to the device.
1) Bit devices 2) Word devices

•X : Input relay (X) •K : Decimal integer
•Y : Output relay (Y) •H : Hexadecimal integer
•M : Auxiliary relay (M) •KnX: Input relay (X) with digit specification*1
•S : State relay (S)
•KnY: Output relay (Y) with digit specification*1
etc.
•KnM: Auxiliary relay (M) with digit specification*1
•KnS: State relay (S) with digit specification*1
•T : Timer (T) current value
•C : Counter (C) current value
•D : Data register (file register)
•V, Z: Index register
•Modify: Availability of indexing using index register
etc.
*1. Kn without specification indicates K1 to K4 for 16 bits, and K1 to K8 for 32 bits.

The function of each instruction is explained.
Cautions
Cautions on using each instruction are described.
Errors
Major errors that are possible to occur in each instruction are described.
For details on errors, refer to "Chapter 38. Error Check Method and Error Code List".
Program examples
Concrete program examples using each instruction are described.
168
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs
1
6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs
Introduction
This section explains cautions on programming.
6.2.1 Programming procedure and execution order

2
Overview
1. Contact configuration and steps
Even for a sequence circuit offering the same operation, the program can be simplified and the number of steps can
be saved depending on the contact configuration method.
1) It is recommended to write a circuit with many serial contacts in an upper position.
(1)LD (1)LD (2)AND
3
List
Instruction
(5)OUT (4)OUT
(2)LD (3)AND (4)ORB (3)OR
ORB instruction is not necessary 4
in Detail
Devices
2) It is recommended to write a circuit with many parallel contacts in a left position.
(1)LD (2)LD (1)LD (3)AND
(5)OUT (4)OUT 5
(4)ANB
Constant
Device &
Specified the
(3)OR (2)OR
ANB instruction is not necessary
2. Program execution and programming order 6

A sequence program is executed "from top to bottom" and "from left to right".
Programming
Before
Code the sequence instruction list according to this rule.
Executed 7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3)
(7) (9) (10) 9
(6)
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
(4)
(8)
(11)
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs
6.2.2 Double output (double coil) operation and countermeasures
1. Operation of double outputs

When a coil gives double outputs (double coils) in a sequence program, the priority is given to the latter one.
Suppose that the same coil Y003 is used in two positions as shown in
the figure on the right. Input processing
For example, suppose the X001 is ON and X002 is OFF. X001 = ON X002 = OFF
In the first coil Y003, the image memory turns ON and the output First
X001
Y004 turns ON also because the input X001 is ON. Y003
In the second coil Y003, however, the image memory is set to OFF
because the input X002 is OFF.
Accordingly, the actual output to the outside is "Y003 = OFF, Y004 = Y003
ON". Y004
Second
X002
Y003
Output processing
Y003 = OFF Y004 = ON
2. Countermeasures against double outputs

Double outputs (double coils) do not cause illegal input (program error), but the operation is disrupted as described
above.
Change the program as shown in the example below.
A B
A B Y000
Y000
C E
.....
Ignored D
C E
Y000
D
A B
M100
.....
or
C E
M101
D
.....
M100
Y000
M101
SET, RST or jump instruction can be used instead, or the same output coil can be programmed at each state by step
ladder instructions.
When step ladder instructions are used, if an output coil located in the main routine is also used in a state, it is handled
as a double coil. It is better to avoid such programming.
170
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.3 I/O Processing and Response Delay
1
6.2.3 Circuits which cannot be programmed and countermeasures
Introduction
1. Bridge circuit
A circuit in which the current flows in both directions should be changed as shown in the figure on the right (so that a
circuit without D and a circuit without B are connected in parallel).
A B C E B
2
Overview
F F
A
E
A E D
C D
3
List
Instruction
C
2. Coil connection position

• Do not write a contact on the right side of a coil. 4
• It is recommended to program a coil between contacts first.
in Detail
Devices
The number of steps can be saved when a coil (E) between the contacts A and B is programmed first.
A B D A
C E
E
B D
C 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6.3 I/O Processing and Response Delay
1. Operation timing of I/O relays and response delay 6

FX PLCs execute the I/O processing by repeating the
Programming
Before
(1) [Input The ON/OFF status of input
process (1) to process (3). processing] terminals is received at one time.
Accordingly, the control executed by PLCs contains not Input image
Input image is read,
only the drive time of input filters and output devices but memory is read
and operation is
also the response delay caused by the operation cycle. (2) [Program processing] executed according
Scan time to program.
7
(operation Image memory of
cycle) each device is
Acquiring the latest I/O information updated
Instruction
Basic
For acquiring the latest input information or immediately (3) [Output processing]
Result is Output
outputting the operation result in the middle of the transferred to devices
operation cycle shown above, the I/O refresh instruction Batch I/O method
output latch
memory are driven
is available. (refresh method)
2. Short pulses cannot be received. 8

The ON duration and OFF duration of inputs in PLCs require longer time than "PLC scan time + Input filter response
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
delay".
When the response delay of the input filter "10 ms" is considered and the scan time is supposed as "10 ms", the ON
duration and OFF duration should be at least 20 ms respectively.
Accordingly, PLCs cannot handle input pulses at 25 Hz (1000 / (20 + 20) = 25) or more. However, the situation can be
improved by PLC special functions and applied instructions.
Convenient functions for improvement

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
By using the following functions, PLCs can This "input ON" can be received
receive pulses shorter than the operation "Input ON" cannot This "input OFF"
cycle: be received cannot be received
• High-speed counter function OFF ON ON OFF
• Input interrupt function
• Pulse catch function
Program
processing
Program
processing
Program
processing
Program
processing 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
• Input filter value adjustment function Input processing

Operation cycle
Output processing ( Time)
171
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions
6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions

The table below shows the mutual relationship among various program flow control instructions.
In the table below, " " indicates containment relationship, and " " indicates that zones are partially
overlapped.
Instruction in top line Instruction in top line

Instruction in Instruction in
left line left line
Example 1: MC −− CJ −− P −− MCR Example 2: MC −− CJ −− MCR −− P
Top line
MC-MCR CJ-P EI-DI FOR-NEXT STL-RET
Left line
octet Example
1
MC-MCR
Example
2

CJ-P

EI-DI

quintet
FOR-NEXT
*2
inside
one
STL
STL-RET

P-SRET

I-IRET

FEND-END
*1

O-FEND

O-END
(no FEND)
*1
172
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions
Introduction
2
Overview
:This combination can be used without any problem.
× :This combination is not allowed; Operation error may be occurs.
:This combination is allowed, but is better not to be used because the operation will be complicated.
P-SRET I-IRET FEND-END Remarks

3
List
Instruction
*1 The DI skip status occurs, but this is not an
error.
*2 4
FOR FOR NEXT NEXT
in Detail
Devices

The operation indicated by continuous lines is
*1 described.
 
5
   *3 The first FEND or END is valid, but the intended
Constant
Device &
Specified the
processes will not occur. But this is not an
error.
Programming
Before
Instructions having containment relationship can
be combined except some combinations as
follows: 7
Instruction
Basic
1) MC-MCR cannot be used in FOR-NEXT, STL-RET,
P-SRET and I-RET.
2) STL-RET cannot be used in FOR-NEXT, P-SRET

and I-IRET.
8
3) MC-MCR, FOR-NEXT, P-SRET and I-IRET cannot
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
*3
  be interrupted by I, IRET, SRET, FEND, END, etc.
*3
*3
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
*3
*3
*3
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
173
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions
6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions
6.5.1 Expression and operation type of applied instructions
Instructions and operands

- Both a function number FNC 00 to FNC  and a symbol (mnemonic) indicating the contents are given to
each applied instruction.
For example, a mnemonic "SMOV (shift move)" is assigned to FNC 13 instruction.
- Some applied instructions function only with their instruction part, but many instructions consist of the instruction
part and following operands.
Command
input FNC 13 S m1 m2 D n
SMOV
S : An operand whose contents do not change by execution of the instruction is called "source", and is
indicated by this symbol.
When a device number can be indexed with index registers, the source is expressed as S
with addition of "  ".
When there are two or more sources, they are expressed as S1 , S2 , etc.
D : An operand whose contents change by execution of the instruction is called "destination", and
indicated by this symbol.
When indexing is allowed and there are two or more destinations, they are expressed as D1 ,
D2 , etc. in the same way as sources.
m, n : Operands not falling under source or destination are expressed as m and n.
When indexing is allowed and there are two or more such operands, they are expressed as m1 ,
m2 , n1 , n2 ,etc. in the same way as sources and destinations.
- In applied instructions, the program step of the instruction part always occupies 1 step, but each operand
occupies 2 or 4 steps depending on whether the instruction is 16-bit type or 32-bit type.
Devices handled as operands

- Bit devices themselves such as X, Y, M and S may be handled.
- Combined bit devices, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, etc, may be handled as numeric value data.
- Data registers (D) and current value registers for timers (T) and counters (C) may be handled.
- Though data registers (D) are the 16-bit type, two serial data registers are combined when 32-bit data is
handled.
For example, when a data register D0 is specified as an operand in a 32-bit instruction, D1 and D0 are combined
to handle 32-bit data. (D1 handles high-order 16 bits, and D0 handles low-order 16 bits.)
When current value registers for T and C are used as general data registers, they are handled in the same way.
However, each of 32-bit counters C200 to C255 can handle 32-bit data, and cannot be specified as an operand
in a 16-bit instruction.
174
1
Instruction form and operation type
Introduction
Applied instructions are classified into "16-bit type" or "32-bit type" by the size of handled numeric values. And by the
operation type, applied instructions are classified into "continuous operation type" or "pulse operation type".
Some applied instructions have every combination of this form and type, and others do not.
1. 16-bit type and 32-bit type

- Applied instructions handling numeric values are classified into the 16-bit type or the 32-bit type by the bit length
2
of the numeric value data.
Overview
Command 1
FNC 12 D10 D12 This instruction transfers the contents of D10 to D12.
MOV
Command 2
FNC 12
DMOV
D20 D22 This instruction transfers the contents of D21 and D20 to D23
and D22. 3
List
Instruction
- In a 32-bit type instruction, the symbol "D" is added (example: DMOV).
- Either an odd or even device number can be specified, and a specified device is combined with a device having
the subsequent larger number (in the case of word devices such as T, C and D).
For avoiding confusion, it is recommended to specify an even device number (which will be the low-order side)
for an operand in a 32-bit instruction.
4
in Detail
Devices
- 32-bit counter (C200 to C255) is regarded as 32 bits, and cannot be used as an operand in a 16-bit instruction.
2. Pulse operation type and continuous operation type

Pulse operation type
In the example shown in the figure on the right, when X000 turns from
OFF to ON , the instruction is executed only once, and is not executed
X000
FNC 12 D10 D12
5
in any other case. MOVP
Constant
Device &
Specified the
When it is not necessary to continually execute an instruction, use the
pulse operation type.
The symbol "P" indicates the pulse operation type.
"DMOVP" indicates also the pulse operation type.
Continuous operation type

X001
6
The figure on the right shows a continuous operation type instruction. FNC 12
Programming
Before
D10 D12
While X001 is ON, the instruction is executed in every operation cycle. MOV
In the continuous operation type of some instructions such as INC (FNC 24) and DEC (FNC 25), the contents of the
destination change in every operation cycle.
For applied instructions requiring attention in using the continuous operation type, the symbol " " is added to the
7
Instruction
Basic
title of the explanation of such instructions as shown in the figure below.
FNC 12 No.
D MOV name P
Instruction
In any case, instructions are not executed while the drive input X000 or X001 is OFF. And the destinations do not 8
change except when instructions specify otherwise.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
175
6.5.2 Handling of general flags

In some types of applied instructions, the following flags operate:
Examples: M8020: Zero flag M8021: Borrow flag
M8022: Carry flag M8029: Instruction execution complete flag
M8090: Block comparison signal M8328: Instruction non-execution flag
M8329: Instruction execution abnormal complete flag M8304: Zero Flag
M8306:Carry Flag
These flags turn ON or OFF every time various instructions turn ON, but do not change when various instructions turn
OFF not driven or when errors have occurred.
Because these flags turn ON or OFF in many instructions, the ON/OFF status of flags change every time such
instructions are executed.
Program flag contacts directly under each instruction while referring to the examples below.
1. Program containing many flags (example of instruction execution complete flag M8029)
When two or more instruction execution complete flags M8029 are programmed together for applied instructions, it is
difficult to determine which instruction executes which flag.
For using flags in any positions other than directly under applied instructions, refer to the next page.
Good example
...
M8000
FNC 72 X10 Y10 D0 K1
DSW
M8029
FNC 22 D0 K10 D20
Execution is MUL
M8029 works as completed
a flag to indicate
...
that execution of
DSW is
completed.
X000
SET M0
M0
FNC 57 K1000 D20 Y000
DPLSY
M8029 works as
a flag to indicate
that execution of M8029
DPLSY is RST M0
completed. Execution is
completed
Bad example M8029 works as M8029

a flag to indicate Program for the second DPLSY
that execution of RST M0
instruction
...
the second Execution is

DPLSY is completed
completed.
M8000
FNC 72 X10 Y10 D0 K1
DSW
M8029 works as
a flag to indicate X000
DSW is SET
completed.
M0
FNC 57 K1000 D20 Y000 First DPLSY instruction
DPLSY
M8029 works as
a flag to indicate
FNC 22 Program for DSW
the first DPLSY D0 K10 D20
is completed. Execution is MUL instruction
completed
M1
FNC 57 Second DPLSY
K1000 D22 Y001
DPLSY instruction
176
1
2. Introduction of method for using flags in any positions other than directly under applied
Introduction
instructions
When two or more applied instructions are programmed, general flags turn ON or OFF when each applied instruction
turns ON.
Accordingly, when using a flag in any position other than directly under an applied instruction, set to ON or OFF
another device just under the applied instruction, and then use the contact of the device as the command contact.
2
...
Overview
M8000
FNC 72 X10 Y10 D0 K1
DSW
DSW execution M8029 3

complete flag
M100
List
Instruction
M8029 is Execution is
changed to completed
M100.
M0
FNC 57 K1000 D20 Y000
DPLSY
DPLSY M8029
4
execution
in Detail
Devices
complete flag RST M0
Execution is
M8029 is completed
changed to
M200.
M200
5
...
It works as DSW
Constant
Device &
Specified the
execution
complete flag.
M100
FNC 22 D0 K10 D20
MUL
It works as
DPLSY execution 6
complete flag.
Programming
Before
M200
Y030
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
177
6.5.3 Handling of operation error flag

When there is an error in the applied instruction configuration, target device or target device number range and an
error occurs while operation is executed, the following flag turns ON and the error information is stored.
1. Operation error
Error detected step number storage device

Error flag Error code storage device
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
D8315, D8314
M8067 D8067 D8069
D8069
• When an operation error has occurred, M8067 turns ON and D8067 stores the operation error code number.
• In the FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, D8315 and D8314 (32 bits in total) store the step number in which the error has occurred.
When the error occurrence step number is up to 32767, the error occurrence step can be checked also in D8069
(16 bits).
• In the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, D8069 stores the error occurrence step number.
• If another error occurs in another step, the stored data is updated in turn to the error code and step number of the
new error. (These devices are set to OFF when errors are cleared.)
• When the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN, these devices are cleared instantaneously, and then set to ON
again if errors have not been cleared.
2. Operation error latch
Error detected step number storage device

Error flag Error code storage device
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
D8313, D8312
M8068 − D8068
D8068
• When an operation error has occurred, M8068 turns ON.

• In the FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, D8313 and D8312 (32 bits in total) store the step number in which the error has occurred.
When the error occurrence step number is up to 32767, the error occurrence step can be checked also in D8068
(16 bits).
• In the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, D8068 stores the error occurrence step number.
• Even if another error has occurred in another step, the stored data is not updated, and remains held until these
devices are forcibly reset or until the power turns OFF.
• When the error occurrence step is up to the 32767th step, the error occurrence step can be checked in D8068 (16
bits).
6.5.4 Handling functions of extension flag

In some applied instructions, the function can be extended by combining a specific special auxiliary relay determined
for each applied instruction. An example is explained below.
- When X000 turns ON, this instruction exchanges the X000

contents of D10 and D11 with each other. FNC 17 D10 D11
XCHP
- If M8160 has been driven before the XCH instruction and X000
the source and destination of the XCH instruction are M8160 Function extension flag
specified to the same device, high-order 8 bits and low- for the XCH instruction
order 8 bits are exchanged with each other inside the
device. FNC 17 D10 D10
XCHP
- For returning this XCH instruction to the normal XCH
Same number
instruction, it is necessary to set M8160 to OFF. M8160
When using an instruction requiring the function extension flag in an interrupt program, program DI instruction (for
disabling interrupt) before driving the function extension flag, and program EI instruction (for enabling interrupt) after
turning OFF the function extension flag.
178
1
6.5.5 Limitation in the number of instructions and limitation in simultaneous instruction
Introduction
instances
Limitation in the number of instructions

Some applied instructions can only be used up to the specified number of times.
Allowable number of times of
2
Instruction name Remarks
Overview
use
FNC 52 (MTR) 1 MTR instruction can only be used once in program.
Pay attention so that this instruction does not overlap the input numbers of in DVIT
FNC 56 (SPD) 8 (1 instruction/1 input or less) instruction, DOG inputs in ZRN instruction, zero point signal in DSZR instruction,
input interrupt numbers and high-speed counter input numbers.
FNC 60 (IST) 1 − 3
FNC 69 (SORT) 1 −
List
Instruction
FNC 70 (TKY) 1 −
FNC 71 (HKY) 1 −
FNC 75 (ARWS) 1 −
FNC 77 (PR) 2 −
FNC149 (SORT2) 2 − 4
FNC186 (DUTY) 5 (1 instruction/1 input or less) −
in Detail
Devices
FNC280 (HSCT) 1 −
When using above instructions beyond the allowable number of times of use
For instructions whose operands allow indexing, device numbers and numeric values in such instructions can be
changed by index registers.
By indexing, when driving multiple instances simultaneously is not required, such instruction can be used as if they 5
were used beyond the allowable number of times.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
→ Refer to "Subsection 5.7.3. Indexing example for instruction with limited number of use.".
Limitation in simultaneous instances of instructions

Some applied instructions can be programmed two or more times, but the number of simultaneous instances is
limited.
Even in instructions not shown below, if two or more instructions are driven at the same time for the same I/O number,
6
Programming
Before
it is regarded as double outputs. In some combinations of instructions, the operation may be disrupted, or the
instructions cannot be executed.
For details, refer to the caution described in each instruction page.
For combinations of instructions, refer to "6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions".
1. Positioning instructions
Do not drive FNC 57 (PLSY), FNC 58 (PWM), FNC 59 (PLSR), FNC150 (DSZR), FNC151 (DVIT), FNC156 (ZRN), 7
FNC157 (PLSV), FNC158 (DRVI) and FNC159 (DRVA) instructions at the same time for the same output number.
Instruction
Basic
2. High-speed processing instructions
• FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
The FNC 53 (HSCS), FNC 54 (HSCR) and FNC 55 (HSZ) instructions can be driven up to 6 times in total at the
same time.
• FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
In FNC 53 (HSCS), FNC 54 (HSCR) and FNC 55 (HSZ) instructions (including FNC280 (HSCT) instruction), make
sure that up to 32 instructions are driven at the same time. [FNC280 (HSCT) instruction can only be used once.]
Note that "FNC280 (HSCT) instruction", "table high-speed comparison mode of FNC 55 (HSZ) instruction)" and
"frequency control mode of FNC 55 (HSZ) instruction" can each only be used once.
3. External device communication instructions

9
• In FNC 80 (RS) and FNC 87 (RS2) instructions, do not drive two or more instructions at the same time for the same
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
port.
• It is impossible to combine and use "FNC 80 (RS), FNC 87 (RS2)", "FNC270 (IVCK) to FNC275 (IVMC)", "FNC276
(ADPRW)", "FNC300 (FLCRT) to FNC305 (FLSTRD)" instructions for the same port.
• In FNC270 (IVCK) to FNC275 (IVMC) instructions, two or more instructions can be driven at the same time for the
same port.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
179
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.6 Symbolic information storage and block password
6.6 Symbolic information storage and block password
6.6.1 Storage of symbolic information

The FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 3.00 or later can store symbolic information (data indicating the program configuration such
as structure and labels).
By using this function, you can read symbolic information from the PLC, and edit labels, function blocks, etc.
GX Works2 Ver. 1.62Q or later is required to store symbolic information.
Cautions
• When symbolic information is stored, it is deleted if the memory capacity set by parameters is changed.
• Memory cassettes (except for the FX3U-FLROM-1M) which save symbolic information are also supported
by FX3U/FX3UC PLCs whose version is earlier than Ver. 3.00. In that case, the FX3U/FX3UC PLC operates,
but the written symbolic information is invalid.
• For writing symbolic information and changing the set values of timers and counters using a peripheral
device, it is recommended to create programs with set values specified indirectly.
If the set values are specified directly, programs cannot be restored from symbolic information after the set
values are changed.
6.6.2 Block password

In GX Works2, program parts can be protected by setting the block password.
In the FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 3.00 or later, the setting "Read-protect the execution program" is available for the block
password.
→ Refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) for the details on the block password.
Cautions
• In the PLC written by the computer using a project including a block password for which the setting "Read-
protect the execution program" is valid, restoration of programs is enabled only when the PLC stores the
symbolic information.
For editing programs using a peripheral device which cannot read symbolic information (only supported by
GX Works2 Ver. 1.62Q or later), do not use a block password for which the setting "Read-protect the
execution program" is valid.
• When a peripheral device tries to read an execution program from the PLC that has been written to by a
computer using a project including a block password for which the setting "Read-protect the execution
program" is valid, a communication error occurs and reading is disabled.
• For writing a program using a peripheral device other than GX Works2 (Ver. 1.62Q or later) to a PLC that
has been written to by a computer using a project including a block password for which the setting "Read-
protect the execution program" is valid, execute "Clear PLC memory" to clear programs before writing.
If a program is written without executing "Clear PLC memory" in advance, the written program cannot be
read.
• It is not possible to write programs including the block password for which the setting "Read-protect the
execution program" is valid to the FX3U/FX3UC PLC whose version is earlier than 3.00.
• If a memory cassette which saves programs including a block password for which the setting "Read-
protect the execution program" is valid is used for the FX3U/FX3UC PLC whose version is earlier than 3.00,
the FX3U/FX3UC PLC does not run normally.
180
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction
Introduction
7. Basic Instruction
This chapter explains types and functions of basic sequence instructions. 2
For beginners to sequence control, we offer "Introduction Course" and "Relay Ladder Course" learning texts for
Overview
reference.
We can also offer the PLC learning software "Beginner Course".
Contact Instruction
3
Applicable devices
List
Instruction
LD Load contact type NO (normally X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.1
open)
Applicable devices
LDI Load Inverse contact type NC (normally X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.1
closed)
LDP Load Pulse

4
rising edge pulse
in Detail
Devices
LDF Load Falling Pulse X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.5
falling/trailing edge pulse
Applicable devices Serial connection of NO

AND AND X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.3
(normally open) contacts
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Applicable devices Serial connection of NC
ANI AND Inverse X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.3
(normally closed) contacts
Applicable devices Serial connection of rising

ANDP AND Pulse X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.5
edge pulse
ANDF AND Falling Pulse

Applicable devices Serial connection of falling/
6
trailing edge pulse
Programming
Before
Parallel connection of NO
OR OR X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.4
Applicable devices (normally open) contacts
ORI OR Inverse
Parallel connection of NC
7
Applicable devices (normally closed) contacts
Instruction
Basic
Parallel connection of rising
ORP OR Pulse X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.5
Applicable devices edge pulse
ORF OR Falling Pulse

Applicable devices
Parallel connection of falling/
trailing edge pulse
X,Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.5 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
181
Connection Instruction
Serial connection of multiple

ANB AND Block − Section 7.7
parallel circuits
ORB OR Block − Section 7.6
multiple contact circuits
Memory Point Stores the current result of

MPS Section 7.8
Store MPS the internal PLC operations
Reads the current result of

MRD Memory Read MRD − Section 7.8
the initial PLC operations
Pops (recalls and removes)

MPP Memory POP MPP Section 7.8
the currently stored result
INV Invert the current result of

INV Inverse the internal PLC − Section 7.10
operations
Conversion of
MEP MEP operation result − Section 7.11
to leading edge pulse
Conversion of
MEF MEF operation result − Section 7.11
to trailing edge pulse
Out Instruction
Applicable devices Final logical operation type

OUT OUT Y,M,S,D.b,T,C Section 7.2
coil drive
SET SET SET Applicable devices Set bit device latch ON Y,M,S,D.b Section 7.13
Y,M,S,D.b,T,C,
RST Reset RST Applicable devices Reset bit device OFF Section 7.13
D,R,V,Z
PLS Pulse PLS Applicable devices Rising edge pulse Y,M Section 7.12
PLF Pulse Falling PLF Applicable devices Falling/trailing edge pulse Y,M Section 7.12
Master Control Instruction
Denotes the start of a master

MC Master Control MC N Applicable devices Y,M Section 7.9
control block
Master Control Denotes the end of a master

MCR MCR N − Section 7.9
Reset control block
Other Instruction
NOP No Operation No operation or null step − Section 7.14
End Instruction
Program end, I/O refresh and

END END END − Section 7.15
return to step 0
182
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.1 LD, LDI
1
7.1 LD, LDI
Introduction
Outline
LD and LDI instructions are contacts connected to bus lines.
When combined with ANB instruction described later, LD and LDI instructions can be used for the start of branches. 2
Overview
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

LD Continuous
LD Operation
Load − Pulse (Single)
Operation 3
List
Instruction
LDI Continuous
LDI Operation
Load − Pulse (Single)
Operation
Inverse
→ For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.16. 4
in Detail
Devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G V Z Modify K H E "" P 5
  
Constant
Device &
Specified the
LD    3 4
1 1 2
  
LDI    3 4
1 1 2
1: Special auxiliary relays (M) and 32-bit counters (C) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
2: State relays (S) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z). 6
3: "D.b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
Programming
Before
4: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

1. LD instruction (initial logical operation, NO contact type)
Circuit program List program
7
Instruction
Basic
LD instruction
X000 0000 LD X000 Connection to bus line
Y000 0001 OUT Y000
Bus line
Timing chart
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
X000 ON ON
Y000 ON ON
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
183
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.1 LD, LDI
2. LDI instruction (initial logical operation, NC contact type)

LDI instruction
X000 0000 LDI X000 Connection to bus line
Y000 0001 OUT Y000
Bus line
Timing chart
X000 ON ON
Y000 ON ON
3. Indexing*1
Devices used in LD and LDI instructions allow indexing with index registers (V and Z).
(State relays (S), special auxiliary relays (M), 32-bit counters (C), and "D.b" cannot be indexed.)
Circuit program List program V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are available in indexing.

When used devices are inputs (X) and outputs
(Y), values of index registers (V and Z) are
converted into octal numbers, and then added.
X000V0 0000 LD X000V0 Example: When the value of V0 is 10, LD contact
Y000 0003 OUT Y000
is set to ON (becomes conductive) or
OFF (becomes non-conductive) by
X012.
4. Bit specification of data register (D)

A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in LD and LDI instructions.
Circuit program List program When specifying a bit in data register, input "."
after a data register (D) number, and then input a
bit number (0 to F) consecutively.
Only 16-bit data registers are available.
D0.3 0000 LD D0.3 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ... F"
Y000 0003 OUT Y000
from the least significant bit.
Example: In the example shown on the left, LD
contact is set to ON (becomes
conductive) or OFF (becomes non-
conductive) by bit 3 of D0.
Errors
• When an I/O number used in LD or LDI instruction does not exist due to indexing, M8316 (Non-existing I/O
specification error) turns ON.
• When the device number of a device (M, T or C) other than I/O used in LD or LDI instruction does not exist due to
indexing, an operation error (error code: 6706) occurs.
184
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.2 OUT
1
7.2 OUT
Introduction
Outline
OUT instruction drives coils of output relays (Y), auxiliary relays (M), state relays (S), timers (T) and counters (C).
2
Overview
OUT Continuous
OUT Operation
OUT − Pulse (Single)
Operation
→ For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.16. 3
List
Instruction
  
in Detail
Devices
OUT   3 5
1 1 2
Set 
 5 
value 4
2: State relays (S) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z). 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
4: This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

1. When a bit device is used 6
A device described in OUT instruction turns ON or OFF according to the driven contact status.
Programming
Before
Parallel OUT instructions can be used consecutively as many times as necessary.
In the program example shown below, OUT M100 and OUT M101 are parallel.
If two or more OUT instructions are executed for the same device number, however, it results in a double output
(double coil) operation.
7
Drive contact of
Instruction
Basic
OUT instruction
OUT instruction
X000 0000 LD X000
Y000 0001 OUT Y000
0002 LDI X001
OUT instruction 0003 OUT M100
X001 0004 OUT M101
M100 8
OUT instruction
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Program step numbers are

M101 automatically controlled.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
185
Timing chart
ON ON
X000
OUT instruction Y000 ON ON
X001 ON ON
OUT instruction M100 ON
OUT instruction M101 ON
2. When a timer or counter is used

The set value is required after OUT instruction for the counting coil of a timer or counter.
The set value can be specified directly by a decimal number (K) or indirectly using a data register (D) or extension
register (R).
1) Direct specification
The set value of a timer or counter can be
specified directly by a decimal number (K).
X000 K30
0000 LD X000
T0 0001 OUT T0
(SP) K30
X001 K30 0004 LDI X001
T1 0005 OUT T1
(SP) K30
0008 OUT C0
K50 (SP) K50
C0
2) Indirect specification
The set value of a timer or counter can be set
by a data register (D) or extension data
X000 D10
0000 LD X000 register (R). At this time, the current value of
T10 0001 OUT T10 the data register (D) or extension register (R)
(SP) D10 is regarded as the set value of the timer or
X001 R15 0004 LDI X001 counter.
T11 0005 OUT T11
(SP) R15 It is necessary to write the set value to a data
0008 OUT C10 register (D) or extension register (R) used for
D20 (SP) D20 the set value by MOV instruction, DSW
C10 instruction or display unit before driving the
timer or counter.
3) Setting range of timers and counters

The table below shows the set value range of timers and counters, the actual timer constants and the number of
program steps (including the set value) for OUT instruction.
Setting range
Timer/counter Actual set value Number of steps
(Value of K or current value of D or R)
1 ms timer 1 to 32767 0.001 to 32.767 sec 3
10 ms timer 0.01 to 327.67 sec
1 to 32767 3
100 ms timer 0.1 to 3276.7 sec
16-bit counter 1 to 32767 Same as left 3
32-bit counter −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 Same as left 5
186
1
*1
3. Indexing
Introduction
Devices used in OUT instruction can be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
Circuit program List program The index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are

available for indexing.
When a used device is an input (X) or output (Y),
2
Overview
the value of an index register (V or Z) is
X000 0000 LD X000 converted into an octal number, and then added.
Y000Z0 0001 OUT Y000Z0
Example: When the value of Z0 is "20", Y024
turns ON or OFF.
3
4. Bit specification of data register (D)*1
List
Instruction
A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in OUT instruction.
When specifying a bit in data register, input "."

0000 LD X000
Only 16-bit data registers are available. 4
X000 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ... F"
in Detail
Devices
D0.3 0001 OUT D0.3
Example: In the example shown on the left, the
bit 3 of D0 turns ON or OFF when X000
turns ON or OFF.

5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Caution
• When a special internal relay (M), timer or counter is used, program steps increase as described in "Setting range
of timers and counters" on the previous page.
• Do not use the last bit number of a data register (D) or extension register (R) as the set value of a 32-bit counter.
6
Programming
Before
Errors
• When an I/O number used in OUT instruction does not exist due to indexing, M8316 (Non-existing I/O specification
error) turns ON.
• When the device number of a device (M, T or C) other than I/O used in OUT instruction does not exist due to
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
187
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.3 AND, ANI
7.3 AND, ANI
Outline
AND and ANI instructions connect one contact in series.
The number of contacts connected in series is not limited, so AND and ANI instructions can be used consecutively as
many times as necessary.
Output to another coil by way of a contact after the OUT instruction is called cascade output.
Such a cascade output can be repeated as many times as necessary as long as the order is correct.

AND Continuous
AND Operation
− Pulse (Single)
AND Operation

ANI Continuous
ANI Operation
− Pulse (Single)
AND Inverse Operation
→ For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.16.
  
AND    3 4
1 1 2
  
ANI    3 4
1 1 2
2: State relays (S) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

1. AND instruction (serial connection of NO (normally open) contacts)
AND instruction
X002 X000 0000 LD X002
Y003 0001 AND X000 Contact connected
0002 OUT Y003 in series
Timing chart
LD instruction X002 ON ON
AND instruction X000 ON ON
Y003 ON
188
1
2. ANI instruction (serial connection of NC (normally closed) contacts)
Introduction
ANI instruction
X002 X000 0000 LD X002
Y003 0001 ANI X000
0002 OUT Y003
Contact connected
in series 2
Overview
Timing chart
3
List
Instruction
ANI instruction X000 ON ON
Y003 ON ON
4
*1
3. Indexing
in Detail
Devices
Devices used in AND and ANI instruction can be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

When a used device is an input (X) or output (Y), 5
the value of an index register (V, Z) is converted
Constant
Device &
Specified the
X002 X000V0 0000 LD X002 into an octal number, and then added.
Y003 0001 AND X000V0
0004 OUT Y003 Example: When the value of V0 is "10", AND
contact is set to ON or OFF by X012.
Programming
Before
4. Bit specification of data register (D)*1

A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in AND and ANI instructions.
Circuit program List program When specifying a bit in data register, input "." 7
Instruction
Basic
X002 D0.3 0000 LD X002 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ... F"
Y003 0001 AND D0.3
0004 OUT Y003 from the least significant bit.
Example: In the example shown on the left, AND
contact turns ON (becomes 8
conductive) when the bit 3 of D0 turns
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
ON.
Errors 9
• When an I/O number used in AND or ANI instruction does not exist due to indexing, M8316 (Non-existing I/O
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

• When the device number of a device (M, T or C) other than I/O used in AND or ANI instruction does not exist due to
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
189
Program examples
AND instruction
0000 LD X000
X000 X001 0001 AND X001 Contact connected
Y003 0002 OUT Y003 in series
ANI instruction 0003 LD X002
0004 ANI X003 Contact connected
X002 X003 0005 OUT Y004 in series
Y004 0006 AND X004 Contact connected
0007 OUT T0 in series
(SP) K30
AND instruction 0010 LD X005
K30 0011 ANI T0 Contact connected
X004 0012 OUT Y005 in series
T0
ANI instruction
X005 T0
Y005
190
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.4 OR, ORI
1
7.4 OR, ORI
Introduction
Outline
OR and ORI instructions are used to connect one contact in parallel.
If two or more contacts are connected in series, use ORB instruction described later to connect such a serial circuit 2
block to another circuit in parallel.
Overview
A step containing OR or ORI instruction is connected in parallel to a preceding step containing LD or LDI instruction.
There is no limitation in the number of times of parallel connection.
OR
Continuous
3
OR
List
Instruction
Operation
− Pulse (Single)
OR Operation

ORI
ORI Continuous
Operation 4
− Pulse (Single)
in Detail
Devices
OR Inverse Operation
Instruc-
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
  
OR    3 4
1 1 2
  
ORI  
1

1 2
3 4 6
Programming
Before
2: State relays (S) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
Explanation of function and operation 7
Instruction
Basic
1. OR instruction (parallel connection of NO (normally open) contacts)
X000 0000 LD X000

0001 OR X001
8
Y000
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
0002 OUT Y000

X001
Timing chart
LD instruction ON ON
9
X000
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
OR instruction X001 ON ON
Y000 ON ON ON 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
191
2. ORI instruction (parallel connection of NC (normally closed) contacts)

X000 0000 LD X000

Y001 0001 ORI X002
0002 OUT Y001
X002
Timing chart
ORI instruction ON ON ON
X002
Y001 ON ON ON
3. Relationship with ANB instruction

ANB The parallel connection by OR or ORI instruction
LD LD is connected to the preceding LD or LDI
instruction in principle. After ANB instruction,
however, the parallel connection by OR or ORI
instruction is connected to the second preceding
LD or LDI instruction.
OR OR
Before ANB
OR instruction
OR
After ANB instruction
4. Indexing*1
Devices used in OR and ORI instruction can be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
(State relays (S), special auxiliary relays (M), 32-bit counters, and "D.b" cannot be indexed.)

When the used device is an input (X) or output
(Y), the value of an index register (V or Z) is
X000 0000 LD X000 converted into an octal number, and then added.
Y000 0001 OR X001V0
0004 OUT Y000 Example: When the value of V0 is "10", OR
X001V0 contact is set to ON (becomes
conductive) by X013.
192
1
*1
5. Bit specification of data register (D)
Introduction
A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in OR and ORI instructions.

2
X000 0000 LD X000
Overview
Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ... F"
Y000 0001 OR D0.3
0004 OUT Y000 from the least significant bit.
D0.3 Example: In the example shown on the left, OR
contact is set to ON (becomes
conductive) by bit 3 of D0. 3
List
Instruction
Errors
• When an I/O number used in OR or ORI instruction does not exist due to indexing, M8316 (Non-existing I/O
• When the device number of a device (M, T or C) other than I/O used in OR or ORI instruction does not exist due to 4
in Detail
Devices
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
193
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF
7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF
Outline
LDP, ANDP, and ORP instructions for contacts detect the rising edge, and become active during one operation cycle
only at the rising edge of a specified bit device (that is, when the bit device turns from OFF to ON).
Contact instructions LDF, ANDF and ORF detect the falling edge, and become active during one operation cycle only
at the falling edge of a specified bit device (that is, when the bit device turns from ON to OFF).

LDP − Continuous
Operation
Load Pulse LDP Pulse (Single)
Operation

LDF − Continuous
Operation
Load Falling Pulse LDF Pulse (Single)
Operation

ANDP − Continuous
Operation
AND Pulse ANDP Pulse (Single)
Operation

ANDF − Continuous
Operation
AND Falling Pulse ANDF Pulse (Single)
Operation

ORP − Continuous
Operation
OR Pulse ORP Pulse (Single)
Operation

ORF − Continuous
Operation
OR Falling Pulse ORF Pulse (Single)
Operation
LDP       
LDF       
ANDP       
ANDF       
ORP       
ORF       
: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
194
1
Introduction
1. LDP, ANDP, and ORP instructions (initial logical operation of rising edge pulse, serial
connection of rising edge pulse, and parallel connection of rising edge pulse)
2
LDP instruction
Overview
X000 0000 LDP X000
M0 0002 ORP X001
ORP instruction 0004 OUT M0
X001
0005 LD M8000
0006 ANDP X002
M8000 X002
ANDP instruction
0008 OUT M1 3
M1
List
Instruction
RUN monitor
Timing chart
LDP instruction X000 ON ON

4
in Detail
Devices
ORP instruction X001 ON ON
ON during one
M0 operation cycle
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
M8000 ON
ANDP instruction X002 ON ON ON
ON during
one opera-
6
M1
Programming
Before
tion cycle
In the example shown above, M0 or M1 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 to X002 turn from OFF to
ON.
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
195
2. LDF, ANDF, and ORF instructions (initial logical operation of falling/trailing edge pulse, serial
connection of falling/trailing edge pulse, and parallel connection of falling/trailing edge pulse)
LDF instruction
X000
0000 LDF X000
M0
0002 ORF X001
X001 0004 OUT M0
ORF instruction 0005 LD M8000
ANDF instruction 0006 ANDF X002
M8000 X002 0008 OUT M1
M1
RUN monitor
Timing chart
LDF instruction X000 ON ON
ORF instruction X001 ON ON
ON during
one opera-
M0 tion cycle
M8000 ON
ANDF instruction X002 ON ON ON
ON during
one opera-
M1 tion cycle
In the example shown above, M0 or M1 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 to X002 turn OFF from ON.
3. Bit specification of a data register (D)*1

A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP and ORF instructions.
Circuit program List program When specifying a bit in a data register, input "."
D0.3 0000 LDP D0.3 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ... F"
Y000 0003 OUT Y000
Example: In the example shown on the left, LDP
contact turns ON (becomes
conductive) when bit 3 of D0 turns ON
or OFF.
196
1
4. Output drive side
Introduction
The following two circuits offer the same operation:
<OUT instruction> <Pulse instruction>

X010 X010
M6 = PLS M6
2
Overview
X010
Operation Operation
M 6 cycle cycle
In each circuit, M6 is ON during only one operation cycle when X010 turns from OFF to ON. 3
List
Instruction
<Rising edge detection> <Pulse instruction (applied instruction)>
X020 X020
FNC 12
MOV
K10 D0 = FNC 12
MOVP
K10 D0
In each circuit, MOV instruction is executed only once when X020 turns from OFF to ON. 4
in Detail
Devices
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
197
5. Differences in the operation caused by auxiliary relay (M) numbers

When an auxiliary relay (M) is specified as a device in LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP and ORF instructions, the
operation varies depending on the device number range as shown in the figure below.
<M0 to M2799, M3072 to M7679>

[1]
After M0 is driven by X000, all contacts [1] to [4] corresponding to
M0 M0 are activated.
SET M50
•The contacts [1] to [3] detect the rising edge of M0.
X000 •Because of LD instruction, the contact [4] is conductive
M0 while M0 is ON.
[2]M0
SET M51
[3]
M0
SET M52
[4]M0
M53
<M2800 to M3071>
From M2800 driven by X000, the program is divided into the upper
M2800 block (block A) and the lower block (block B). In each of the blocks
SET M0
A and B, only the first contact which detects the rising or falling edge
M2800 Block A is activated.
SET M1 Because of LD instruction, the contact in the block C is conductive
while M2800 is ON.
X000 By utilizing these characteristics, "transition of state by same signal"
M2800 in a step ladder circuit can be efficiently programmed.
M2800
SET M2
M2800
SET M3
Block B
M2800
SET M4
M2800
SET M5
M2800
SET M6
M2800
M7 Block C
198
1
Cautions
Introduction
1. Cautions when the LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, or ORF instruction programmed in the same
step is executed two or more times within one operation cycle
When LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP or ORF instruction programmed in the same step is executed two or more times
within one operation cycle, the following operation results:
2
Programs executed two or more times
Overview
• Program between FOR and NEXT instructions
FNC 08 K
• Program which executes the same subroutine program from two or more FOR
CALL instructions during one operation cycle X000
• Program which jumps to a label (P) in a smaller step number by CJ
instruction
FNC 09
3
List
Instruction
Operation NEXT
1) When a device turns from OFF to ON
1st time: LDP, ANDP or ORP instruction turns ON.
2nd time and later: When the device status is the same as the time when the instruction was executed last, the
instruction turns OFF.
2) When a device turns OFF from ON 4
1st time: LDF, ANDF or ORF instruction turns ON.
in Detail
Devices
2nd time and later: When the device status is the same as the time when the instruction was executed last, the
instruction turns OFF.
2. Cautions on writing during RUN

1) Instructions for falling edge pulse
When writing is completed during RUN for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse (LDF, ANDF, or
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
ORF instruction), the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed regardless of the ON/OFF status of the
target device of the instruction for falling edge pulse.
When writing is completed during RUN for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse (PLF instruction),
the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed regardless of the ON/OFF status of the operation condition
device.
It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for
executing the instruction for falling edge pulse.
6
Programming
Before
2) Instructions for rising edge pulse
When writing is completed during RUN for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse, the instruction for
rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the operation condition
device is ON.
Target instructions for rising edge pulse: LDP, ANDP, ORP, and pulse operation type applied instructions (such
as MOVP) 7
Instruction
Basic
Contact ON/OFF status
Instruction for rising edge pulse Instruction for falling edge pulse
(while writing is executed during RUN)
OFF Not executed Not executed
ON Executed*1 Not executed
8
*1. PLS instruction is not executed.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.6 ORB
7.6 ORB
Outline
A circuit in which two or more contacts are connected in series is called serial circuit block.

ORB Continuous
ORB Operation
1 step
OR Block − Pulse (Single)
Operation
ORB There are no applicable devices.

1. ORB instruction (parallel connection of multiple contact circuits)
When connecting serial circuit blocks in parallel, use LD or LDI instruction at the start of branch, and use ORB
instruction at the end of branch.
ORB instruction is an independent instruction not associated with any device number in the same way as ANB
instruction described later.
When there are many parallel circuits, ORB instruction can be used for each circuit block to connect them.
X000 X001 Appropriate program Inappropriate program

Y006 0000 LD X000 0000 LD X000
0001 AND X001 0001 AND X001
0002 LD X002 0002 LD X002
ORB instruction
0003 AND X003 0003 AND X003
X002 X003 0004 ORB 0004 LDI X004
0005 LDI X004 0005 AND X005
0006 AND X005 0006 ORB
ORB instruction 0007 ORB 0007 ORB
0008 OUT Y006 0008 OUT Y006
X004 X005
Serial circuit block
Caution
There is no limitation in the number of parallel circuits which can be connected by ORB instructions (in the case of
appropriate program shown above).
Though ORB instructions can be used at one time, note that the repeated use of LD or LDI instruction is limited to 8 or
less (in the case of inappropriate program shown above).
200
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.7 ANB
1
7.7 ANB
Introduction
Outline
Use ANB instruction to connect a branch circuit (parallel circuit block) to the preceding circuit in series.
Use LD or LDI instruction at the start of branch. After completing a parallel circuit block, connect the parallel circuit 2
block to the preceding circuit in series by ANB instruction.
Overview
When there are many parallel circuits, ANB instruction can be used in each circuit block to connect them.

ANB
1 step
ANB Continuous
Operation
3
Pulse (Single)
List
Instruction
AND Block − Operation
Instruc-
tion
System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 4
in Detail
Devices
ANB There are no applicable devices.

1. ANB instruction (serial connection of multiple parallel circuits)
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
LD
ANB
X000 X002 X003 0000 LD X000
Y007 0001
0002
OR
LD
X001
X002 Branch start point
6
X001 X004 X005
Programming
Before
0003 AND X003
ORB 0004 LDI X004
X006 0005 AND X005
0006 ORB Parallel block is completed.
0007 OR X006
0008
0009
ANB
OR X003
It is connected to the
preceding circuit in series.
7
Parallel block
Instruction
Basic
X003 0010 OUT Y007
OR instruction before ANB instruction

OR instruction after ANB instruction
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Caution
There is no limitation in the number of ANB instruction.
Though ANB instructions can be used at one time, note that the repeated use of LD or LDI instruction is limited to 8 or
less in the same way as ORB instruction.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
201
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP
7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP
Outline
FX3G, FX3U FX3GC and FX3UC PLCs have 11 memories called "Stack" which store the intermediate result (ON or OFF)
of operations.

MPS MPS Continuous
1 step Operation
Memory Point Store Pulse (Single)
− Operation

MRD MRD Continuous
1 step Operation
Memory Read − Pulse (Single)
Operation

MPP MPP Continuous
1 step Operation
Memory POP − Pulse (Single)
Operation
MPS There are no applicable devices.
MRD There are no applicable devices.
MPP There are no applicable devices.

These instructions are convenient in programming branched multi-output circuits.
1. MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions (stores the current result of the internal PLC operations, reads
the current result of the internal PLC operations, and pops (recalls and removes) the currently
stored result)
MPS
X004 X005 0018 LD X004
18 Y002
0019 MPS MPP
X006 1 [2]
0020 AND X005 MRD
Y003 2 [1]
0021 OUT Y002
MRD 3 MPS
Y004 0022 MRD
0023 AND X006
MRD X007 MPP
Y005 0024 OUT Y003
0025 MRD
MPP 10
0026 OUT Y004
11
0027 MPP
Stack
0028 AND X007
0029 OUT Y005
0030 END
• Use MPS instruction to store the intermediate result of operation, and then drive the output Y002.
• Use MRD instruction to read the stored data, and then drive the output Y003.
MRD instruction can be programmed as many times as necessary.
• In the final output circuit, use MPP instruction instead of MRD instruction.
MPP instruction reads the stored data described above, and then resets it.
Error
MPS instruction can be used two or more times.
However, the difference between number of MPS instructions and the number of MPP instructions should be 11 or
less, and should be 0 at the end.
202
1
Program examples
Introduction
1) Program example 1: One stack
Only one stack is used in this example.
MPS
X000 X001 X002 0000 LD X000
2
Y000
Overview
0001 AND X001
0002 MPS
Y001 0003 AND X002
0004 OUT Y000
MPP 0005 MPP
MPS 0006 OUT Y001 3
X003 X004 0007 LD X003
List
Instruction
Y002 0008 MPS
X005 0009 AND X004
Y003 0010 OUT Y002
0011 MPP
MPP 0012 AND X005 4
0013 OUT Y003
in Detail
Devices
MPS 0014 LD X006
X006 X007 0015 MPS
Y004 0016 AND X007
0017 OUT Y004
X010
Y005
0018
0019
MRD
AND X010
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
MRD X011 0020 OUT Y005
Y006 0021 MRD
0022 AND X011
MRD X012
Y007 0023 OUT Y006
0024 MPP
MPP 0025 AND X012 6
Programming
Before
0026 OUT Y007
2) Program example 2: One stack with ANB and ORB instructions

MPS
X000 X001 7
Y000
Instruction
Basic
0000 LD X000
X002 0001 MPS
0002 LD X001
0003 OR X002
X003 X004
0004 ANB
Y001
0005 OUT Y000 8
X005 X006
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
MRD 0006 MRD

0007 LD X003
X007 0008 AND X004
Y002 0009 LD X005
0010 AND X006
MPP X010
Y003
0011 ORB 9
0012 ANB
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
X011 0013 OUT Y001

0014 MPP
0015 AND X007
0016 OUT Y002
0017 LD X010 10
0018 OR X011
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
0019 ANB
0020 OUT Y003
203
3) Program example 3: Two stacks

X000 X001 X002 0000 LD X000

Y000 0001 MPS
X003 0002 AND X001
MPS MPS
Y001 0003 MPS
MPP 0004 AND X002
X004 X005 0005 OUT Y000
Y002 0006 MPP
0007 AND X003
MPP MPS X006
0008 OUT Y001
Y003
0009 MPP
MPP 0010 AND X004
0011 MPS
0012 AND X005
0013 OUT Y002
0014 MPP
0015 AND X006
0016 OUT Y003
4) Program example 4: Four stacks

MPS MPS MPS MPS

X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 0000 LD X000 0009 OUT Y000
Y000 0001 MPS 0010 MPP
0002 AND X001 0011 OUT Y001
Y001 0003 MPS 0012 MPP
0004 AND X002 0013 OUT Y002
MPP
0005 MPS 0014 MPP
Y002
0006 AND X003 0015 OUT Y003
MPP 0007 MPS 0016 MPP
Y003 0008 AND X004 0017 OUT Y004
MPP
Y004
MPP
X000 0000 LD X000

Y004 0001 OUT Y004
X001 0002 AND X001
Y003 0003 OUT Y003
0004 AND X002
X002
0005 OUT Y002
Y002
0006 AND X003
X003 0007 OUT Y001
Y001 0008 AND X004
X004 0009 OUT Y000
Y000
In programming a circuit on the upper side, it is necessary to MPS instruction three times.
By changing the circuit on the upper side into the circuit on the lower side, the same contents can be programmed
easily without MPS instruction.
204
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.9 MC, MCR
1
7.9 MC, MCR
Introduction
Outline
When MC instruction is executed, the bus line (LD or LDI point) is moved to a position after MC contact.
The bus line can be returned to the original position by MCR instruction. 2
By changing a device (Y or M) number, MC instruction can be used as many times as necessary.
Overview
If the same device number is used twice, however, it results in the double coil operation in the same way as OUT
instruction.
MC
Continuous
3
MC
List
Instruction
Operation
Master Control − Pulse (Single)
Operation

MCR MCR Continuous
Master Control
2 steps
−
Operation
Pulse (Single)
4
Operation
in Detail
Devices
Reset
→ For the number of steps of MC instruction, refer to Section 7.16.
Instruc-
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
MC  
MCR There are no applicable devices.
: Except special auxiliary relays (M)

6
Programming
Before
1. MC and MCR instructions (denotes the start of a master control block and denotes the end of a
master control block)
When MC instruction is executed, the bus line is moved to a position after MC contact.
Drive instructions connected to the bus line after the MC contact execute each operation only when the MC instruction
is executed, and execute each operation in the contact OFF status regardless of the contact status before drive
7
Instruction
Basic
instructions when a MC instruction is not executed. If an instruction (such as FOR/NEXT, EI and DI instruction) not
requiring a contact instruction exists in a circuit using master control, such an instruction is executed regardless of the
MC instruction execution command.
In the program example below, the instructions from MC to MCR are executed as they are while the input X000 is ON.
However, while the input X000 is OFF, each driven device offers the following operation:
Timers (except retentive type timers) and devices driven by OUT instruction: Turn OFF.
Retentive type timers, counters and devices driven by SET/RST instruction: Hold the current status.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
The expressions of circuit programs used to explain operations are circuits (for reading or monitoring) of GX Works2
and GX Developer.
9
0000 LD X000
X000 0001 MC N000
MC N 0 M100 Three-step instruction
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
SP M100
N0 M100 0004 LD X001
X001 0005 OUT Y000
Y000
0006 LD X002
X002 0007 OUT Y001
Y001 0008 MCR N 0 ← Two-step instruction 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
MCR N 0 ← Write MCR N0 instruction.
205
Caution
1. A circuit error (Error code: 6611) occurs when an instruction connected the bus line (such as LD
and LDI) is not present just after the MC instruction.

The PLC cannot detect errors if an instruction is added between the MC instruction and the N instruction by write
during RUN.
The PLC can detect errors after it is set to the STOP mode once and then to the RUN mode again.
Program examples
1) When the nesting structure is not adopted
0000 LD X000
X000
MC N 0 M100 0001 MC N000
Three-step instruction
SP M100
N0 M100 0004 LD X001
0005 OUT Y000
X001 0006 LD X002
Y000 0007 OUT Y001
0008 MCR N000 ← Two-step instruction
X002
Y001
MCR N 0 ← Return to the bus line ("N0" shows the

nest level.)
X003
MC N 0 M150 ← When not adopting the nesting structure,
use "N0" again. There is no limitation in
N0 M150 the number of "N0".
Only in the nesting structure, increase
the nest level "N" in the way "N0 →
X004 N1 ... N6 → N7" as shown in the
Y002 example 2 on the next page.
X005
Y003
MCR N 0
206
1
2) When the nesting structure is adopted
Introduction
When using MC instructions inside MC instruction, increase the nest level "N" in turn in the way "N0 → N1 → N2
→ N3 → N4 → N5 → N6 → N7".
For returning from the nesting structure, reset the nest levels from the highest one in turn using MCR instruction in
the way "N7 → N6 → N5 → N4 → N3 → N2 → N1 → N0".
For example, if "MCR N5" is programmed without programming "MCR N6" and "MCR N7", the nest level is
returned to 5 immediately. 2
Available nest levels are from N0 to N7 (eight layers).
Overview
Circuit program
While X000
is OFF X000 N0
MC N 0 M100
[A] 3
N0 M100
List
Instruction
X001 Level N0
Y000
The bus line B is active while X000 is ON.
[B]
While
X002 is X002
4
OFF N1
in Detail
Devices
MC N 1 M101
N1 M101
X003 Level N1
[C]
Y001 The bus line C is active while both X000 and
X002 are ON. 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
While
X004 X004
is OFF N2
MC N 2 M102
N2 M102
6
Level N2
Programming
Before
X005
Y002 The bus line D is active while all of X000,
X002 and X004 are ON.
[D]
MCR N 2
N2
7
Instruction
Basic
X006
Y003 Level N1
The bus line returns to the status of the bus
line C by "MCR N2".
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
[C] MCR N 1
N1
X007
Y004 Level N0
The bus line returns to the status of the bus
[B]
line B by "MCR N1". 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
MCR N 0
N0
Initial status
X010 The bus line returns to the initial status of the
Y005 bus line A by "MCR N0". Accordingly, Y005
turns ON or OFF by turning ON or OFF of 10
X010 regardless of X000, X002 and X004.
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
[A]
207
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.10 INV
7.10 INV
Outline
1. Instruction Format
INV instruction inverts the operation result up to just before INV instruction, and does not require device number
specification.
INV INV Continuous
1 step Operation
Inverse − Pulse (Single)
Operation
INV There are no applicable devices.

1. INV instruction (inverts the result of operations)
Circuit program List program Timing chart
ON
0 LD X000 X000 OFF OFF
X000
Y000 1 INV
2 OUT Y000
Y000 ON OFF
ON
Operation result until just Operation result after INV

before INV instruction instruction is executed
OFF ON
ON OFF
Inverted
In the figure above, Y000 turns ON when X000 is OFF, and Y000 turns OFF when X000 is ON.
INV instruction can be used in the same position as serial contact instructions (AND, ANI, ANDP and ANDF).
Different from LD, LDI, LDP and LDF instructions shown in the list, INV instruction cannot execute connection to bus
lines. Different from OR, ORI, ORP and ORF instructions, INV instruction cannot be used independently in parallel to
a contact instruction.
2. Operation range of INV instruction
When INV instruction is used in a complicated circuit containing ORB and ANB instructions, the operation range of INV
instruction is as shown in the figure below:
LD LD
LD LD
LD LD
INV instruction inverts the operation result after LD, LDI, LDP or LDF instruction located before INV instruction.
Accordingly, if INV instructions are used inside ORB and ANB instructions, blocks after LD, LDI, LDP or LDF
instruction seen from each INV instruction are regarded as the target of INV operation.
208
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.11 MEP, MEF
1
7.11 MEP, MEF
Introduction
Outline
MEP and MEF commands are instructions that change the operation results to pulses so that device numbers do not
have to be specified. 2
1) MEP
Overview
The operation results up to the MEP instruction become conductive when the driving contacts turn from OFF to
ON.
The use of MEP instructions simplifies the process of changing driving contacts to pulses when multiple contact
points connect in a series.
2) MEF
The operation results up to the MEF instruction become conductive when the driving contacts turn from ON to
3
List
Instruction
OFF.
The use of MEF instructions simplifies the process of changing driving contacts to pulses when multiple contact
points connect in a series.

4
MEP
in Detail
Devices
− Continuous
1 step Operation
MEP MEP Pulse (Single)
Operation

MEF
1 step − Continuous
Operation 5
Pulse (Single)
Constant
Device &
Specified the
MEF MEF Operation
Instruc-
tion
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 6
Programming
Before
MEP There are no applicable devices.
MEF There are no applicable devices.

7
1. MEP instruction (ON during rising edge of driving contacts results)
Instruction
Basic
Circuit Program List program Timing chart
X000 X001 0 LD X000 OFF ON

X000
SET M0 1 AND X001
2
3
MEP
SET M0 X001 OFF ON 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
M0 OFF ON
2. MEF instruction (ON during falling edge of driving contacts results)

9
X000 X001 0 LD X000 OFF ON OFF
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
X000
SET M0 1 AND X001
2 MEP
3 SET M0 X001 OFF ON OFF
M0 OFF ON
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.11 MEP, MEF
Caution
1. MEP and MEF instructions may not operate normally if the indexed contact is modified and
changed to pulses by sub-routine programs, the FOR and NEXT instructions, etc.
2. As the MEP and MEF instructions operate using the operation results immediately before them,
use at the list program as the AND instruction.
The MEP and MEF instructions cannot be used at the list program as LD or OR.
3. When programmed in a branch, the MEP/MEF instruction judges the rising/falling edge based on
the rung status up to just before the MEP/MEF instruction in the branch.
M0 M1 0 LD M0
SET Y001 1 LD M1
M2 2 MEP
3 OR M2
4 ANB
5 SET Y001
Judges the rising/falling edge based on the rung status in this range.
4. Caution on writing during RUN

1) Pulse command during rising edge of operation (MEP instruction) results
After writing to the circuit with MEP instructions during RUN, the MEP instruction result turns ON (conductive)
while the operation results up to the MEP instruction are ON.
2) Pulse instruction during falling edge of operation (MEF command) results
After writing to the circuit with MEF instructions during RUN , the MEF instruction result turns OFF (non-
conductive), regardless of the operation results up to the MEF instruction. The operation results of MEF
instruction turns ON (conductive) when the operation results up to the MEF instruction turn OFF.
Operation Results up to MEP/MEF Instruction
MEP Instruction MEF Instruction
OFF OFF (non-conductive) OFF (non-conductive)
ON ON (conductive) OFF (non-conductive)
Error
• There are no calculation errors in the MEP and MEF instructions.
210
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.12 PLS, PLF
1
7.12 PLS, PLF
Introduction
Outline
When PLS instruction is executed, an applicable device is activated during only one operation cycle after a drive input
turns ON. 2
When PLF instruction is executed, an applicable device is activated during only one operation cycle after a drive input
Overview
turns OFF.

PLS
− Continuous
Operation
3
Pulse (Single)
List
Instruction
Pulse PLS Operation

PLF − Continuous
Operation
Pulse Falling PLF Pulse (Single)
Operation 4
in Detail
Devices
tion
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the

PLS  2
1

PLF  2
1
1: Except special auxiliary relays (M) 6

Programming
Before
1. PLS instruction (rising edge pulse)
Circuit program List program Timing chart 7
X000 ON
Instruction
Basic
0000 LD X000 X000
PLS M0 0001 PLS M 0 ON during
PLS one operation
instruction M 0 cycle
In the figure above, M0 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 changes from OFF to ON.
8
2. PLF instruction (falling/trailing edge pulse)
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

X000 0000 LD X000 X000 ON
PLF M1 0001 PLF M 1 ON during
one operation
PLF
instruction M 1 cycle 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
In the figure above, M1 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 changes from ON to OFF.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
211
3. Output drive side

The following two circuits result the same operation.
<OUT instruction> <PLS instruction>

X000 M1
M0 X000
X000 = PLS M0
M1
X000 ON
ON during
one operation
M 0 cycle
M 1 ON
In each case, M0 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 changes from OFF to ON.
<PLS instruction> <Pulse operation type applied instruction>

X000 X000
FNC 12
PLS M0 MOVP K10 D0
M0
FNC 12
MOV K10 D0
In each case, MOV instruction is executed only once when X000 changes from OFF to ON.
Caution
1) Instructions for falling edge pulse
When writing is completed during RUN for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse (LDF, ANDF, or
ORF instruction), the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed regardless of the ON/OFF status of the
target device of the instruction for falling edge pulse.
When writing is completed during RUN for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse (PLF instruction),
the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed regardless of the ON/OFF status of the operation condition
device.
It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for
executing the instruction for falling edge pulse.
2) Instructions for rising edge pulse
When writing is completed during RUN for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse, the instruction for
rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the operation condition
device is ON.
Target instructions for rising edge pulse: LDP, ANDP, ORP, and pulse operation type applied instructions (such
as MOVP)
Contact ON/OFF status

Instruction for rising edge pulse Instruction for falling edge pulse
OFF Not executed Not executed
ON Executed*1 Not executed
*1. PLS instruction is not executed.
2. Cautions on using latched (battery or EEPROM backed) type devices

When PLC mode is changed in the way "RUN → STOP → RUN" while a drive input remains ON, "PLS M0" operates,
but "PLS M600 (latched device)" does not operate (when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN) because the
status of M600 is latched even while the PLC is in the STOP mode.
212
1
3. Caution for simultaneous instances of the ZRST instruction and the PLS instruction
Introduction
The ZRST instruction resets the last stage for the PLS instruction and PLF instruction of the applicable device. In
addition, the reset state of T and C is also reset.
Circuit program
M0
ZRST M0 M100 2
Overview
X000
PLS M0
Timing chart
X000 3
List
Instruction
one operation one operation
cycle cycle
M 0
in Detail
Devices
ZRST instruction PLS instruction
execution execution
PLS instruction ZRST instruction

execution execution
5
Please program in the following way to turn on M0 only once.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Circuit program
M0
ZRST M0 M100
X000 6
M0
Programming
Before
When the PLC mode is switched in the way "RUN → STOP → RUN (or power supply ON (RUN) → power supply OFF
→ power supply ON (RUN))" while a drive input remains ON, PLS M600 does not operate. However, it is possible to
operate PLS M600 (latched device) by resetting once using the ZRST instruction.
7
Instruction
Basic
Circuit program Timing chart
M8002 X000
ZRST M600 M700
X000 RUN STOP RUN

8
RUN/STOP
PLS M600
PLS M600 ON during one ON during one
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
instruction (latched device) operation cycle operation cycle
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
213
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.13 SET, RST
7.13 SET, RST
Outline
1) Setting a bit device (SET instruction (set bit device latch ON))
When the command input turns ON, SET instruction sets to ON an output relay (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state relay
(S) and bit specification (D.b) of word device.
Even if the command input turns OFF after that, the device which was set to ON by SET instruction remains ON.
2) Resetting a bit device (RST instruction (reset bit device OFF))
RST instruction resets an output relay (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state relay (S), Timer (T), counter (C) or bit
specification (D.b) of a word device.
Use the RST instruction to reset (set to OFF) a device which was set to ON by SET instruction.
3) Clearing the present value of a word device (RST instruction reset bit device OFF))
RST instruction clears the current value of a timer (T), counter (C), data register (D), extension register (R) or
index register (V)(Z).
RST instruction can be used to clear to "0" the contents of a data register (D) or index register (V)(Z). (The same
result can be obtained by MOV instruction which transfers the constant K0.)
RST instruction can be used also to reset the current value and return the contact of retentive type timers T246 to
T255.
SET and RST instructions can be used for the same device as many times as necessary in an arbitrary order.

SET
SET Continuous
Operation
SET
− Pulse (Single)
Operation

RST
RST Continuous
Operation
Reset
− Pulse (Single)
Operation
  2
SET  4
1 2 4
   2   2  
RST 
1

1 2 4  1 2 3 2 2
4
2: Index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
214
1
Introduction
SET instruction drives the coil for an output relay (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state relay (S) and bit specification of data
register (D).
1. When using a bit device

SET instructions located in parallel can be used consecutively as many times as necessary.
In the program example shown below, "RST Y000" after "SET Y000" corresponds to this usage. 2
Overview
X000 X000 ON
0 LD X000
SET Y000 1 SET Y000
2 LD X001 X001 ON
X001
RST Y000 3 RST Y000 3
Y000 ON
List
Instruction
SET RST
instruction instruction
2. When using a word device (timer or counter)

Use RST instruction to reset a counter or retentive type timer. 4
1) Program example of an internal counter
in Detail
Devices
X010 C0 up-counts the number of times X011 turns from OFF to ON.
RST C 0 When the counting result reaches the set value K10, the output
contact C0 is activated. Even if X011 changes from OFF to ON after
X011 K10 that, the current value of the counter remains unchanged and the
C 0 output contact remains activated.
For clearing the counter and returning the output contact, X010 is set 5
C 0 to ON.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Y000
It is necessary to specify a constant K or data register number for
indirect specification after OUT C instruction.
In the case of latched (battery backed) type counters, the current
value and the operation status/reset status of the output contact are
latched even after power failure.
6
Programming
Before
2) Program example of a high-speed counter
For 1-phase 1-input counters C235 to C245, use special auxiliary
Counting direction
X010 relays M8235 to M8245 for specifying the counting direction.
M8 X010 in ON status: Specifies down counting.
X010 in OFF status: Specifies up counting.
Sequence reset
When X011 turns ON, the output contact of the counter C is
returned and the current value of the counter C is reset to "0".
7
Instruction
Basic
circuit In counters with reset input (C241, C242 ...), the same situation is
X011 achieved by interrupt operation when the corresponding reset input
RST C
turns ON, but any program is not required for this operation.
When X012 turns ON, turning ON/OFF of a counting input X000 to
X005 determined according to the counter number is counted.
X012
Counting coil In counters having start input (C244, C245 ...), counting is started
only after the corresponding input turns ON.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
C When the current value of a counter increases and reaches the set
value (K or contents of D), the output contact is set. When the
K or D
current value decreases and reaches the set value, the output
contact is reset.
C
Y002 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
As a contact driving the counting coil of a high-speed counter, program a contact which is normally ON when high-
speed counting is executed. 10
If an input relay (X000 to X005) assigned for high-speed counters is used for driving the counting coil, accurate
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
counting cannot be achieved.
215
Cautions on using RST instruction for a jumped program, subroutine program or interrupt program
When RST instruction for a timer or counter is executed in a jumped program, subroutine program or interrupt
program, the timer or counter may be kept in the reset status and the timer or counter may be disabled.
For details, refer to the following sections:
→ For a jumped program, refer to Subsection 8.1.1.
→ For a subroutine program, refer to Subsection 8.2.1.
→ For an interrupt program, refer to Subsection 36.2.3.
3. Indexing*1
Devices used in SET and RST instructions can be indexed with index registers (V)(Z).
(State relays (S), special auxiliary relays (M), 32-bit counters, "D.b", and word devices cannot be indexed.)
V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are available for indexing.

When a used device is an input (X) or output (Y),
X000 0000 LD X000 the value of an index register (V or Z) is converted
SET Y000Z0 0001 SET Y000Z0 into octal, and then added.
0004 LD X001 Example: When Z0 is "20", Y024 turns ON or
X001 0005 RST Y000Z0
OFF.
RST Y000Z0
4. Bit specification of a data register (D)*1

A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in SET or RST instruction.

X000 0000 LD X000 bit number (0 to F) consecutively.
SET D0.3 0001 SET D0.3 Only 16-bit data registers are available.
0004 LD X001 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ... F"
X001 0005 RST D0.3
RST D0.3 Example: In the example shown on the left, when
X000 turns ON once, the bit 3 of D0
turns ON. When X001 turns ON, the bit
3 of D0 turns OFF.
Caution
When SET and RST instructions are executed for an output relay (Y) in the same operation, the result of the
instruction located nearest the END instruction (which specifies the end of program) is output.
Errors
• When an I/O number used in SET or RST instruction does not exist due to indexing, M8316 (Non-existing I/O
• When the device number of a device (M, T or C) other than I/O used in SET or RST instruction does not exist due
to indexing, an operation error (error code: 6706) occurs.
216
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.14 NOP
1
7.14 NOP
Introduction
Outline
NOP instruction specifies no operation.
When a program is erased completely, all steps are replaced with NOP instructions. 2
When NOP instruction is located between general instructions, PLCs ignore NOP instruction.
Overview
If NOP instructions are put in the middle of a program, fluctuation of step numbers is minimized when the program is
changed or added. But excessive program steps are required.
Note that circuits are considerably changed if already written instructions are replaced with NOP instructions.
3
NOP
List
Instruction
Continuous
1 step NOP Operation
− Pulse (Single)
No Operation Operation
4
in Detail
Devices
NOP There are no applicable devices.

5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
1. NOP instruction (no operation or null step)
NOP instruction specifies no operation.
If NOP operation is written in the middle of a program, PLCs ignore it in executing the program.
When an existing program is replaced with NOP instructions, it means that former instructions are deleted.
OUT → NOP (error) 6
Programming
Before
AND → NOP ANI → NOP
OR → NOP
Contact becomes Circuit is
short-circuit. disconnected. 7
ORI → NOP
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
217
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.15 END
7.15 END
Outline
END instruction specifies the end of a program.
(Do not write the END instruction in the middle of a program.)
END Continuous
1 step END Operation
− Pulse (Single)
END Operation
END There are no applicable devices.

1. END instruction (program end, I/O refresh and return to step 0)
PLCs repeat "input processing → program execution → output processing". When END instruction is written at the
end of a program, PLCs immediately execute the output processing without executing steps after END instruction.
If END instruction is not written at the end of a program, PLCs execute the program until the END step, and then
execute the output processing.
At the first execution after the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN, PLCs start from END instruction. When END
instruction is executed, the watchdog timer (which checks the operation cycle) is refreshed.
Input processing
Step 000
001 LD X000
002
OUT Y000
END
NOP
NOP
NOP
Output processing
Caution
Do not write END instruction in the middle of a program.
When a program is transferred from a programming tool, all steps after END instruction are replaced with NOP (no
operation) instructions.
218
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.16 Number of Instruction Steps and Specified Devices
1
7.16 Number of Instruction Steps and Specified Devices
Introduction
The table below shows the number of steps of basic instructions. Available devices and device ranges vary depending
on the PLC. For details on devices, refer to Chapter 4.
For ORB, ANB, MPS, MRD, MPP, MCR, INV, MEP, MEF, NOP and END instructions, refer to pages explaining these
instructions. 2
Instruction
Overview
LDP, LDF,
LD, LDI,
ANDP,
Device AND, ANI, OUT SET RST PLS, PLF MC
ANDF, ORP,
OR, ORI
ORF
X000 to X357 1 − − − − 2 −
Y000 to Y357 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3
List
Instruction
M0 to M1535 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
M1536 to M3583 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
M3584 to M7679 3 3 3 3 3 3 4
S0 to S1023 1 2 2 2 − 2 −
− −
S1024 to S4095
T0 to T191,
2 2 2 2 2
4
Bit devices 1 3 − 2 − 2 −
T200 to T245
in Detail
Devices
T192 to T199,
1 3 − 2 − 2 −
T246 to T511
C0 to C199 1 3 − 2 − 2 −
C200 to C255 1 5 − 2 − 2 −
Special auxiliary relays
1 2 2 2 − 2 −
5
M8000 to M8255
Constant
Device &
Specified the
2 2 2 2 − 2 −
M8256 to M8511
X000 to X357 3 − − − − − −
Y000 to Y357 3 3 3 3 3 − −
M0 to M7679
T0 to T511
3
3
3
4
3
−
3
−
3
−
−
−
−
−
6
Bit devices
Programming
Before
with index S0 to S4095 − − − − − − −
C0 to C199 3 4 − 3 − − −
C200 to C255 − − − − − − −
3 3 3 3 − − −
M8000 to M8511
D0 to D7999,
7
Instruction
Basic
Special data registers − − − 3 − − −
Word devices D8000 to D8511
R0 to R32767 − − − 3 − − −
D0 to D7999,
Word devices Special data registers
− − − − − − −
with index D8000 to D8511,
R0 to R32767
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
D.b,
Bit specification
Special auxiliary relays 3 3 3 3 − 3 −
in word device
D.b
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
219
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
8. Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09

FNC 00 to FNC 09 provide instructions mainly related to control flow of sequence programs such as conditional
program execution and priority processing.
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference
00 CJ CJ Pn Conditional Jump Section 8.1
01 CALL CALL Pn Call Subroutine Section 8.2
02 SRET SRET Subroutine Return Section 8.3
03 IRET IRET Interrupt Return Section 8.4
04 EI EI Enable Interrupt Section 8.5
05 DI DI Disable Interrupt Section 8.6
06 FEND FEND Main Routine Program End Section 8.7
07 WDT WDT Watchdog Timer Refresh Section 8.8
08 FOR FOR S Start a FOR/NEXT Loop Section 8.9
09 NEXT NEXT End a FOR/NEXT Loop Section 8.10
220
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump
1
8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump
Introduction
Outline 2
CJ or CJP instruction jumps to a pointer (P); The sequence program steps between CJ or CJP instruction and the
Overview
pointer are not executed.
CJ and CJP instructions reduce the scan time, and allow programs with double coils.
FNC 00 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 3
CJ P 3 steps CJ
Continuous

List
Instruction
Operation
CJP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type 4
Pointer number (P) indicating the label number for the jump destination
in Detail
Devices
Pn (FX3S: n=0 to 255, FX3G/FX3GC: n=0 to 2047, FX3U/FX3UC: n=0 to 4095) Pointer number
(P63 jumps to END instruction.)
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Type
Pn  

6
1. 16-bit operation (CJ and CJP)
Programming
Before
While the command input is ON, CJ or CJP instruction executes a program with a specified label (pointer number).
1) In the case of CJ instruction
User program
7
Command
FNC 00 Pn  Command ON
Instruction
Basic
Jumps to the pointer while the CJ input
command is ON.
CJ Executed in every scan.

User program
which is skipped and is not executed when the command turns ON
Label 8
Pn  User program
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
2) In the case of CJP instruction
User program
9
Command Command ON
FNC 00
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Pn
Pn input
Jumps to the pointer only in one CJP
operation while the command is ON.
User program
CJP
which is skipped and is not executed in one operation cycle
when the command turns ON Executed in one scan.
Label
10
User program
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
Pn 
221
Cautions
1. Relationship between the label input position and the list program
The figure below shows programming of a label.
When creating a circuit program, move the cursor to the left side of the bus line in the ladder diagram, and input a label
(P) at the head of the circuit block.
X030 FNC 00 P 20 LD X030
CJ CJ P 20
X031 Pointer
Y010 LD X031
OUT Y010
X032 P 20
Label
P 20 Y011 LD X032
Bus OUT Y011
line Label
2. Programming a label in a smaller number step than CJ instruction

A label can be programmed in a smaller number step than CJ instruction. However, note that a watchdog timer error
occurs when the scan time exceeds 200 ms (default setting).
Label
P 10
X022
FNC 00 P 10
CJ
3. Jumping to one label from two or more CJ instructions

When the pointer number in operands is same and there is one label, the following operation is caused:
When X020 turns ON, the program execution jumps from CJ instruction corresponding to X020 to the label P9. When
X020 turns OFF and X021 turns ON, the program execution jumps from CJ instruction corresponding to X021 to the
label P9.
X020
FNC 00 P 9
CJ
X021
FNC 00 P 9
CJ
Label
P 9
4. Using a label (P) two or more times

When a label number (including labels for CALL instructions described later) is used two or more times, an error is
caused.
X020
FNC 00
CJ
P9 Good
X030 FNC 00
CJ
P9 Good
Label
P9 User program
Label
Bad P9 User program
END
222
1
5. Label unnecessary for the pointer P63
Introduction
The pointer P63 specifies jump to END step. Do not program P63.
If P63 is programmed, PLCs will display the error code 6507 (defective label definition) and stop.
FNC 00 P 63
CJ
2
Overview
Label
P 63 END
Do not program P63.
6. When jumping to a pointer for subroutine 3

Any label cannot be shared by CALL instruction and CJ instruction.
List
Instruction
Command
FNC 00
CJ
P15 Bad
X000 FNC 01
4
P15 Good
in Detail
Devices
CALLP
X001 K10
C0
FNC 06
Label M8000
FEND Subroutine program
dedicated to CALL 5
instruction
P15
Constant
Device &
Specified the
User program
RUN monitor Program a label (P) after
(normally ON) FEND instruction.
FNC 02
SRET
7. Unconditional jump if the command contact is normally ON 6

Because M8000 is normally ON while a PLC is operating, unconditional jump is specified when M8000 is used in the
Programming
Before
following example:
M8000 FNC 00 P5
RUN monitor CJ
7
User program
Instruction
Basic
(It is skipped, and is not executed.)
Label
P5 User program
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
223
Program example
1. When a jump is necessary after OFF processing
In one operation cycle after X023 changes from OFF to ON, the CJ P7 instruction becomes valid.
By using this method, jump can be executed after all outputs between the CJ P7 instruction and the label P7 turn OFF.
X023
PLS M0
M0
FNC 00 P7
CJ
X023
Label
P7 User program
224
1
8.1.1 CJ instruction and operations of contact and coil
Introduction
In the program example shown below, when X000 turns ON, the program execution jumps from CJ instruction in the
first circuit to the label P8.
While X000 is OFF, jump is not executed; The program is executed from the 1st step in turn, and then the program
execution jumps from CJ instruction in the 11th circuit to the label P9.
Instructions skipped by jump are not executed. 2
Overview
1. Circuit example 1 for explaining operations
X000 • Double coil operation of output Y001
1st FNC 00 P 8
circuit 0 While X000 is OFF, output Y001 is activated by X001.
CJ
X001 While X000 is ON, output Y001 is activated by X012.
4 Y001 Even in a program divided by conditional jumps, if the same
coil (Y000 in this case) is programmed two or more times
3
X002
List
Instruction
6 M1 within the jump area or outside the jump area, such a coil is
handled as double coil.
X003
8 S1
X004
11 T0 K 10 • When the reset (RST) instruction for the retentive type timer
X005
T246 is located outside the jump area 4
15 RST T246 Even if the counting coil (OUT T246) is jumped, reset (return
in Detail
Devices
of the contact and clearing of the current value) is valid.
X006
18 T246 K1000
X007
22 RST C 0 • When the reset (RST) instruction for the counter C0 is
located outside the jump area
25
X010
C0 K 20
Even if the counting coil is jumped, reset (return of the 5
contact and clearing of the current value) is valid.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
X011
FNC 12 K 3 D 0
29
MOV
Label • Operation of the routine timers T192 to T199
P 8 A routine timer continues its operation even if it is jumped
X000
11th
circuit
35
FNC 00
CJ
P 9
after the coil is driven, and the output contact is activated.
6
X012
Programming
Before
40 Y001
• Operation of the high-speed counters C235 to C255
Label A high-speed counter continues its operation even if it is
P 9 jumped after the coil is driven, and the output contact is
X013 activated.
42 RST T246
7
Instruction
Basic
RST C 0
When each input changes during jump in the above program, each coil executes the following operation:
Classification Contact status before jump Coil operation during jump
Y, M, S X001, X002, X003 OFF Y001, M1 and S1 turn OFF. 8
(Y001, M1, S1) X001, X002, X003 ON Y001, M1 and S1 turn ON
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
10 ms timer and X004 OFF Timer is not activated.

100 ms timer (T0) X004 ON Counting is paused (, and is restarted after X000 turns OFF).
X005 OFF Timer is not activated.
1 ms timer X006 OFF The deactivation status is reset when X013 turns ON.
(T246) X005 OFF
X006 ON
Counting is continued (, and the contact is activated after X000 turns OFF). 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
X007 OFF Counting is not activated.

Counter X010 OFF The deactivation status is reset when X013 turns ON.
(C0) X007 OFF
Counting is paused (, and is restarted after X000 turns OFF).
X010 ON
Applied instruction X011 OFF FNC instruction is not executed during jump.
(MOV) X011 ON But instructions FNC 52 to FNC 58 continue their operations.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
225
2. Circuit example 2 for explaining operations (when only an RST instruction for a timer or counter
is jumped)
When X011 turns ON while the RST instruction for the
X012 K10
C0 counter C0 is operating (X010 is ON), the program
execution jumps past the RST instruction due to the CJ
X011 FNC 00 (FNC 00) instruction.
P0 In this jump status, the counter C0 remains reset.
CJ
Accordingly, the current value of C0 remains "0" even if
X010
RST C0 X012 turns ON.
To clear this reset status, it is necessary to turn OFF
Label the RST instruction for counter C0. (Refer to the
P0
program shown below.)
Timing chart
Jump operation by CJ
instruction driven by X011
X012
Because C0 remains
Counter reset, its current value
3 is reset. remains unchanged
Current 2 even if X012 turns ON. 2
value of C0 1 1
X010 ON
RST
C0 Remains reset.
Program example for activating a timer and counter even during a jump
X012 K10
C0
X011 FNC 00 P0
CJ
X010
RST C0
Label
P0
M8000
RST C0 Clears the reset status of
counter C0 during jump.
Timing chart
Jump operation by CJ
instruction driven by X011
X012
5
Counter 4
3 is reset. 3
Current 2 2
value of C0 1 1
X010 ON
RST
C0 *1 In the same operation cycle as the
reset, the reset status of counter
*1 C0 is cleared.
226
1
8.1.2 Relationship between master control instruction and jump instruction
Introduction
The figure below shows the contents of operation and the relationship between the master control instruction.
Avoid using [2], [4] and [5] because the operation will be complicated.
CJ P 0
[1] Jump from outside MC 2
to outside MC
Overview
Jump is available
CJ P 1 arbitrarily.
MC N 0 M 1
Master control
[2] Jump from outside MC
to inside MC
MC N 0 M 0 Jump is executed CJ P 4
regardless of the MC [5] Jump from
P 1
operation.
Even if M0 is OFF, M0 MCR N 0
inside MC
to inside
3
is regarded as ON after
List
Instruction
another
P1. MC
MC N 0 M 2
Master control
[3] Jump from inside MC to

CJ P 2 inside MC
Master control
Jump is disabled while
M0 is OFF.
P 4
4
P 2
in Detail
Devices
MCR N 0
[4] Jump from inside MC to

outside MC
CJ P 3 Jump is disabled while
M0 is OFF. Jump is enabled while M1 is ON. 5
Jump is executed while In circuits after jump, M2 is regarded as ON
Constant
Device &
Specified the
M0 is ON, but MCR is
MCR N 0 invalid. regardless of the actual ON/OFF status of M2.
And the first MCR N0 is ignored.
P 3
6
P 0
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
227
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine
8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine
Outline
This instruction calls and executes a program which should be processed commonly in a sequence program.
This instruction reduces the number of program steps, and achieves efficient program design.
For creating a subroutine program, FEND (FNC 06) and SRET (FNC 02) instructions are required.
FNC 01 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
CALL P 3 steps CALL
Continuous
Operation

CALLP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Pointer number (P) indicating the label number for the jump destination
Pn (FX3S: P0 to P62 and P64 to P255, FX3G/FX3GC: P0 to P62 and P64 to P2047, Pointer number
FX3U/FX3UC: P0 to P62 and P64 to P4095)
P63 is dedicated to CJ (FNC 00) instruction (for jump to END step), it cannot be used as a pointer for CALL (FNC 01)
instruction.
Oper-
Type
Pn  

1. 16-bit operation
While the command input is ON, CALL instruction is executed and the program execution jumps to a step with a label
Pn .
Then, a subroutine program with the label Pn is executed.
When SRET (FNC 02) instruction is executed, the program execution returns to the step after CALL instruction.
• At the end of the main program, put FEND instruction.
• Put a label (P) for CALL instruction after FEND instruction.
User program
Command
FNC 01 Pn
Pn
CALL Main program
Program area from the step 0 to FEND
User program instruction
FNC 06
FEND
Label M8000
Pn  User program
RUN monitor Subroutine program
(normally ON) Program area from a label Pn  to SRET
FNC 02 instruction
SRET
228
1
Caution
Introduction
1. Using a label (P) number two or more times
In CALL instructions, the same number can be used two or more times in operands (P).
However, do not use a label (P) and number used in another instruction (CJ instruction).
X020 FNC 00 P9
2
CJ
Overview
X030 FNC 01
CALLP
P9 Bad
Label 3
P9 User program
List
Instruction
Program examples
1. Example of fundamental use (no nesting)
4
X000
FNC 01
in Detail
Devices
P 10
CALL
Main program
While X000 is ON, the program execution jumps to a
step with the label P10.
FNC 06
Label
FEND 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
P 10
Subroutine program
When SRET instruction is executed after the subroutine
program has executed, the program execution returns to
FNC 02 the original step +1.
SRET 6
Programming
Before
END
2. Example of multiple CALL instructions in subroutines (multiple nesting)

CALL instruction can be used up to 4 times in subroutine programs. Nesting of up to five layers is allowed.
7
Instruction
Basic
X001
FNC 01 P 11
CALLP Main program
When X001 turns from OFF to ON, the program execution
FNC 06 jumps to the label P11 only once.
FEND
Label
P 11 Subroutine program 1 8
When SRET instruction is executed, the program
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
X002
FNC 01 P 12 execution returns to the main program.
CALL If X002 is ON while the subroutine program 1 is
FNC 02 executed, the program execution jumps to a step with the
SRET label P12.
Label X003
P 12
Subroutine program 2
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
FNC 02 The subroutine program with P12 is executed, and then

SRET the program execution returns to the subroutine program
with P11 by SRET instruction.
END
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
229
8.2.1 Cautions on subroutines and interrupt routines

This section explains cautions on creating programs in subroutines and interrupt routines.
The explanation below is given for subroutines, but the situation also applies to interrupt routines.
1. When using timers in subroutines (or interrupt routines)
Use retentive type timers T192 to T199 in subroutines.
(FX3S PLCs are not equipped with timers for subroutine program.)
These timers execute counting when the coil instruction or END instruction is executed.
After a timer reaches the set value, the output contact is activated when the coil instruction or END instruction is
executed.
Because general timers execute counting only when the coil instruction is executed, they do not execute counting if
they are used in subroutines in which the coil instruction is executed only under some conditions.
2. When using retentive type 1 ms timers in subroutines (or interrupt routines)
If a retentive type 1 ms timer is used in a subroutine, note that the output contact is activated when the first coil
instruction (or subroutine) is executed after the timer reaches its set value.
3. Countermeasures against latches of devices used in subroutines (or interrupt routines)
Devices which were set to ON in a subroutine are latched in the ON status even after the subroutine is finished. (Refer
to the program example shown below.)
When RST instruction for a timer or counter is executed, the reset status of the timer or counter is latched also.
For turning OFF such a device latched in the ON status or for canceling such a timer or counter latched in the reset
status, reset such a device in the main program after the subroutine is finished, or program a sequence for resetting
such a device or for deactivating RST instruction in the subroutine.
(Refer to the program example shown on the next page.)
Example in which outputs are latched
In the following program example, the counter C0 is provided to count X001. When X000 is input, the subroutine P0 is
executed only in one scan, and then the counter is reset and Y007 is output.
1) Program example
X000 FNC 01 P0
CALLP
X001 K10
C0
FNC 06
FEND
X000
P0 RST C0
Y007
FNC 02
SRET
2) Timing chart
Execution of Subroutine is executed.
subroutine P0
triggered by X000
X001

Counter for C0 is valid, the current value
3 is reset.
Current 2
of C0 remains unchanged even
value of C0 1
if pulses are input.
RST
C0 Remains reset.
Y007 Y007 is being output.
Outputs are held.
230
1
Example for resetting held outputs (countermeasures)
Introduction
1) Program example
X000 FNC 01 P0
CALLP
X001
C0
K10 2
Overview
X002
RST Y007 Y007 is reset at an arbitrary timing.
FNC 06
FEND 3
List
Instruction
X000
P0 RST C0 A
M8001 B
RST C0
RUN monitor
The preceding RST C0 instruction is
deactivated in the subroutine. 4
(normally OFF)
in Detail
Devices
Y007
FNC 02
SRET
5
2) Timing chart
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Subroutine is
Execution of P0 is executed.
triggered by X000
X001 6
Programming
Before
3 4
Current 3
2 2
value of C0 1 1
Counter is reset (part Counter reset instruction is deactivated
RST A in above program). (part B in above program).
C0 7
Instruction
Basic
Y007
X002 Y007 is reset.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
231
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.3 FNC 02 – SRET / Subroutine Return
8.3 FNC 02 – SRET / Subroutine Return
Outline
This instruction returns the program execution from a subroutine to the main program.
FNC 02 Independent Inst. Mnemonic Operation Condition
SRET Continuous This instruction is the independent type, and
1 step SRET Operation does not require drive contact.
2. Set data
– There is no set data. –
Oper-
Type
– There are no applicable devices.

When CALL instruction in the main program is executed, the program execution jumps to a subroutine.
SRET instruction returns the program execution to the main routine.
232
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return
1
8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return
Introduction
Outline 2
This instruction returns the program execution from an interrupt routine to the main program.
Overview
IRET This instruction is the independent type, and
1 step IRET Continuous
Operation does not require drive contact. 3
List
Instruction
2. Set data
4
in Detail
Devices
Oper-
Type
– There are no applicable devices. 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
When an interrupt (input, timer or counter) is generated while the main program is executed, the program execution
jumps to an interrupt (I) routine.
IRET instruction returns the program execution to the main routine.
The table below shows three types of jump to an interrupt routine. 6
1. Types of interrupt function
Programming
Before
Function Interrupt No. Description Reference
Executes the interrupt processing when an input (X) signal turns ON or Section 36.3 and
Input interrupt I00* to I50*
OFF. Section 36.4
Executes the interrupt processing at a specified time interval (constant
Timer interrupt I6** to I8**
cycle).
Section 36.5
7
Executes the interrupt processing when a high-speed counter reaches
Instruction
Basic
Counter interrupt*1 I010 to I060
it’s set value.
Section 36.6

→ For the interrupt function, refer to Chapter 36.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
233
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return
Program example
Interrupts are usually disabled in PLCs.

FNC 04
EI Use EI instruction to enable interrupts.
When X000 turns ON while the main program is executed,
M8000 instructions after the interrupt routine pointer I001 are
C255
executed, and the program execution returns to the original
Main program main program by IRET instruction.
FNC 06
FEND
Interrupt
pointer The rising edge of X000 is detected.
I001
Input interrupt The timer interrupt of the pointer I620 is executed every timer
routine time of 20 ms, and the program execution is returned to the
FNC 03
original main program by IRET instruction each time.
IRET
Interrupt
pointer Interrupt every 20 ms The high-speed counter interrupt of the pointer I010 is
I620 executed when the current value of a high-speed counter
becomes equivalent to a value specified by DHSCS (FNC 53)
Timer interrupt
routine instruction.
FNC 03 The program execution returns to the original main program by
IRET IRET instruction.
Interrupt
pointer High-speed counter
Make sure to program an interrupt pointer (I***) as a label after
I010 FEND instruction.
High-speed counter
routine
FNC 03
IRET
END
234
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.5 FNC 04 – EI / Enable Interrupt
1
8.5 FNC 04 – EI / Enable Interrupt
Introduction
Outline 2
Interrupts are usually disabled in PLCs.
Overview
This instruction enables interrupts in PLCs.
Use this instruction for using the input interrupt, timer interrupt and counter interrupt functions.
FNC 04 Independent Inst. Mnemonic Operation Condition 3
EI Continuous This instruction is the independent type, and
List
Instruction
1 step EI Operation does not require drive contact.
2. Set data
in Detail
Devices
Oper-
Type
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G V
Unit
Z Modify K
stant
H
Number ter String
E "" P
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the

EI instruction is the independent type, and does not require command (drive) contact.
→ For the interrupt function, refer to Chapter 36. 6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
235
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.6 FNC 05 – DI / Disable Interrupt
8.6 FNC 05 – DI / Disable Interrupt
Outline
This instruction disables interrupts after interrupts were enabled by EI (FNC 04) instruction.
DI Continuous This instruction is the independent type, and
1 step DI Operation does not require drive contact.
2. Set data
Oper-
Type

DI instruction is the independent type, and does not require command (drive) contact.
→ For the interrupt function, refer to Chapter 36.
Cautions
Interrupts (requests) generated after DI instruction are processed after EI (FNC 04) instruction is executed
236
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.7 FNC 06 – FEND / Main Routine Program End
1
8.7 FNC 06 – FEND / Main Routine Program End
Introduction
Outline 2
This instruction indicates the end of the main program.
Overview
FEND
1 step FEND Continuous
Operation
This instruction is the independent type, and
does not require drive contact. 3
List
Instruction
2. Set data
4
in Detail
Devices
Oper-
Type
– There are no applicable devices. 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
FEND instruction works in the same way as END instruction.
When FEND instruction is executed, output processing, input processing and watchdog timer refresh are executed,
and then the program execution returns to the step 0.
FEND instruction is required in creating subroutine programs and interrupt programs. 6
1. In the case of CJ instruction
Programming
Before
0 Main routine
program
When X010 is OFF
X010
FNC 00
CJ
P 20 7
Instruction
Basic
Main routine
Jump
program
FNC 06
FEND 8
When X010 is ON
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
P20 Main routine

program
FNC 06
FEND
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
END
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
237
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.7 FNC 06 – FEND / Main Routine Program End
2. In the case of CALL instruction

0 Main routine
program
When X011
When X011 is OFF

is ON X011
FNC 01 P 21
CALL
Main routine
program
FNC 06
FEND
P21 Subroutine
program
I100
Interrupt routine
program
END
Cautions
1. When FEND instruction is programmed two or more times
Put a subroutine program or interrupt routine program between last FEND instruction and END instruction.
2. When CALL or CALLP instruction is used

Put a label after FEND instruction. And the SRET instruction is required in every case.
3. When CALL or CALLP instruction is used

If FEND instruction is executed after CALL or CALLP instruction was executed and before SRET instruction is
executed, an error is caused.
4. When FOR instruction is used

If FEND instruction is executed after FOR instruction was executed and before NEXT instruction is executed, an error
is caused.
5. When the interrupt function (I) is used

Make sure to program an interrupt label (pointer) after FEND instruction. And IRET instruction is required in every
case.
238
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh
1
8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh
Introduction
Outline
This instruction refreshes the watchdog timer in a sequence program. 2
Overview
WDT P WDT Continuous
1 step Operation
WDTP Pulse (Single)
Operation
3
2. Set data
List
Instruction
Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 4
in Detail
Devices
Type

When the operation cycle (time until END or FEND instruction is executed after the step 0) of a PLC exceeds 200 ms,
Constant
Device &
Specified the
a watchdog timer error (indicating abnormal operation) occurs; The ERROR (ERR) LED lights, and the PLC stops.
When the operation cycle is long, insert WDT instruction in the middle of the program to avoid the watchdog timer
error.
Command
contact
Command
input
FNC 07 6
WDTP One scan is executed.
Programming
Before
Command
contact
Command
input
FNC 07
WDT
Each scan is
7
Instruction
Basic
executed.
Related device
Device
D8000
Name
Watchdog timer time
Description
Up to 32767 ms can be set in units of ms (initial value: 200 ms).
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Cautions
1. When a watchdog timer error occurs
A watchdog timer error may occur in the following cases. To avoid the error, input a program shown below near the
head step to extend the watchdog timer time, or shift FROM/TO instruction execution timing. 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
1) Caution when many special extension devices are connected

In such configuration that many special extension devices (such as positioning units, cam switches, analog units
and link units) are connected, the buffer memory initialization time may become longer, thus the operation time
may become longer, and a watchdog timer error may occur.
2) Caution when many FROM/TO instructions are driven at one time
When many FROM/TO instructions are executed or when many buffer memories are transferred, the scan time 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
3) Caution when there are many high-speed counters (software counters)

When many high-speed counters are provided and high frequency are counted at one time, the operation time
239
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh
2. The watchdog timer time can be changed.

→ For details on changing watchdog timer time, refer to Subsection 37.2.2.
By overwriting the contents of D8000 (watchdog timer time), the watchdog timer detection time (initial value: 200 ms)
can be changed.
By inputting the program shown below, the sequence program after this insertion is monitored by a new watchdog
timer time.
M8002
FNC 12 K300 D8000 Watchdog timer time: 300 ms
0
MOV
Initial pulse
Watchdog timer refresh
FNC 07 If WDT (FNC 07) instruction is not programmed, the value of
WDT D8000 is valid during END processing.
Program examples
1. When the operation cycle is long and causes an error
For example, by dividing a program whose operation cycle is 240 ms into two portions and inserting WDT instruction
between them, the operation cycle becomes less than 200 ms in both the former half portion and the latter half portion.
Program whose
Program operation cycle
whose is 120 ms
operation cycle
is 240 ms FNC 07
WDT
Program whose
END operation cycle
is 120 ms
END
2. When a label (P) of CJ instruction is located in a step number smaller than the step number of CJ
instruction
Put WDT instruction after the label (P).
If an input relay (X) is used as the command
M8000 contact, input refresh is disabled, so the
Label FNC 07
Pn RUN monitor WDT program execution cannot be returned from
the area between P and CJ.
When the command As the command contact, use such device
Program contact turns ON
that can be set to OFF in a program being
Command jumped.
FNC 00
Pn
CJ
3. When FOR/NEXT instruction is repeated many times

Put WDT instruction between FOR and NEXT instructions.
FNC 08
K30000
FOR
Program
FNC 07
WDT
FNC 09
NEXT
240
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.9 FNC 08 – FOR / Start a FOR/NEXT Loop
1
8.9 FNC 08 – FOR / Start a FOR/NEXT Loop
Introduction
Outline
FOR instruction specifies the number of repetition of the loop between FOR and NEXT (FNC 09) instructions. 2
Overview
FOR Continuous
3 steps FOR Operation 
3
List
Instruction
2. Set data
Number of repetition of the loop between FOR and NEXT instructions
S [ S = K1 to K32767] 16-bit binary
(A value from −32768 to 0 is handled as "1".) 4
in Detail
Devices
Oper-
Type
S        1 2     
Constant
Device &
Specified the

→ For details, refer to NEXT (FNC 09) instruction.
6
Programming
Before
Related instruction
FOR instruction and NEXT (FNC 09) instruction are set as a pair in programming.
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
241
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop
8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop
Outline
NEXT instruction specifies the end position of the loop.

NEXT Continuous This instruction is the independent type, and
1 step NEXT Operation does not require drive contact.
2. Set data
Oper-
Type

The loop between FOR and NEXT instructions is repeated "n" times (which is specified by the source data).
After the loop is repeated by the specified number of times, steps after NEXT instruction are executed.
FNC 08 S
FOR
Repeated " S  "
times.
FNC 09
NEXT
Related instruction
NEXT instruction and FOR (FNC 08) instruction are set as a pair in programming.
Caution
1. Limitation in the number of nesting
FOR-NEXT loop can be nested up to 5 levels.
FNC 08 FNC 08
FOR FOR
FNC 08 FNC 08
FOR FOR
1st
level
FNC 08 FNC 09
FOR NEXT
1st 2nd 3rd 2nd
level level level level
FNC 09 FNC 08
NEXT FOR
1st
level
FNC 09 FNC 09
NEXT NEXT
FNC 09 FNC 09
NEXT NEXT
242
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop
1
Errors
Introduction
1. Watchdog timer error
When FOR-NEXT loop is repeated many times, the operation cycle (D8010) is too long, and a watchdog timer error
may occur. In such a case, change the watchdog timer time or reset the watchdog timer.
→ For details on changing the watchdog timer time, refer to Subsection 37.2.2.
→ For resetting the watchdog timer, refer to WDT (FNC 07) instruction. 2
Overview
2. Examples of wrong programs
The following programs are regarded as errors.
When NEXT instruction is located before FOR When NEXT instruction does not exist
instruction
FNC 09
NEXT
FNC 08
FOR
3
List
Instruction
FNC 08 FNC 09 ← Not programmed
FOR NEXT
When number of FOR instructions is not When NEXT instruction is located after FEND or
equivalent to the number of NEXT instructions END instruction
4
FNC 08 FNC 08
in Detail
Devices
FOR FOR
FNC 08 FNC 06
FOR FEND
FNC 09 FNC 09
5
NEXT
Constant
Device &
Specified the
NEXT
FNC 09
← Not programmed END
NEXT
FNC 09 6
NEXT
Programming
Before
Program example
1. Program with three FOR-NEXT loops
7
Instruction
Basic
FNC 08 K 4
FOR
The loop [3] is repeated 4 times.
FNC 08 D 0Z
8
FOR
When the data value (current value) of D0Z
X010
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
FNC 00 (D4 when Z is "4") is "6", the loop [2] is

P 22 repeated 6 times.
CJ
FNC 08 K1X000 When X010 is OFF

FOR
[1] [2] [3] When K1X000 is "7", the loop [1] is repeated
7 times. 9
When X010 is ON
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
FNC 09
NEXT 7 The program execution jumps to the pointer P22,
times and the loop [1] is skipped.
P 22
FNC 09 Number of times of repeating the loops [1],

NEXT 6 [2] and [3]
times
X010 = OFF X010 = ON 10
7 × 6 × 4 =168 times
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
FNC 09 4 [1] 0 time

NEXT times [2] 6 × 4 = 24 times 24 times
[3] 4 times 4 times
243
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
9. Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19

FNC 10 to FNC 19 provide fundamental data processing instructions such as data transfer and data comparison which
are regarded as most important in applied instructions.
10 CMP CMP S1 S2 D Compare Section 9.1
11 ZCP ZCP S1 S2 S D Zone Compare Section 9.2
12 MOV MOV S D Move Section 9.3
13 SMOV SMOV S m1 m2 D n Shift Move Section 9.4
14 CML CML S D Complement Section 9.5
15 BMOV BMOV S D n Block Move Section 9.6
16 FMOV FMOV S D n Fill Move Section 9.7
17 XCH XCH D1 D2 Exchange Section 9.8
18 BCD BCD S D Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal Section 9.9
19 BIN BIN S D Conversion to Binary Section 9.10
244
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare
1
9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare
Introduction
Outline
This instruction compares two values, and outputs the result (smaller, equal or larger) to bit devices (3 points). 2
→ For the contact comparison instruction, refer to Chapter 28.
Overview
→ For floating point comparison, refer to Section 18.1.
D CMP P 7 steps
CMP
CMPP
Continuous
Operation 13 steps
DCMP
DCMPP
Continuous
Operation 3
Pulse (Single) Pulse (Single)
List
Instruction
Operation Operation
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Data or device number handled as comparison value 16- or 32-bit binary 4

S2 Data or device number handled as comparison source 16- or 32-bit binary
in Detail
Devices
D Head bit device number to which comparison result is output Bit
Oper-
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Type
S1        2 3     
S2        2 3     
D    1  6
Programming
Before

1. 16-bit operation (CMP and CMPP)
Instruction
Basic
The comparison value S1 and the comparison source S2 are compared with each other. According to the
result (smaller, equal or larger), either one among D , D +1 or D +2 turns ON.
• The source data S1 S2 are handled as binary values.
• Comparison is executed algebraically. Example: −10 < 2 8
Command Command
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
input input
FNC 10
S1  S2  D 51
CMP
50
D Turns ON in the case of 49
" [ S1  > S2  ] ". S2  48 S1 
D  +1 Turns ON in the case of

D
9
" [ S1  = S2  ] ".
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Latched
D  +1
" [ S1  < S2  ] ".
Latched
D  +2
10
Latched
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
Even if the command input turns OFF and CMP instruction is not executed, D  , D  +1 and D  +2 latch
the status just before the command input turns OFF from ON.
245
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare
2. 32-bit operation (DCMP and DCMPP)

The comparison value [ S1 +1, S1 ] and the comparison source [ S2 +1, S2 ] are compared with each other.
According to the result (smaller, equal or larger), either D , D +1 or D +2 turns ON.
• The source data [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 ] are handled as binary values.
• Comparison is executed algebraically. Example: −125400 < 22466
Command
Command input
input 51
FNC 10 50
S1  S2  D
DCMP 49
S2  +1, S2  48 S1  +1, S1 
D Turns ON in the case of
" [ S1  +1, S1  ] > [ S2  +1, S2  ] ".
D
" [ S1  +1, S1  ] = [ S2  +1, S2  ] ". Latched
D  +1
" [ S1  +1, S1  ] < [ S2  +1, S2  ] ". Latched
D  +2
Latched
Even if the command input turns OFF and DCMP instruction is not executed, D , D  +1 and D  +2 latch
Caution
1. Number of occupied devices
From the device specified as D , three devices are occupied. Make sure not to use those devices in another control.
Program examples
1. When comparing the current value of a counter
S1  S2  D
X000 X000
FNC 10
K100 C 20 M 0 101
CMP
100
M 0 99
Turns ON in the case of C20
"K100 > C20 (Current value)" .
M 1 M0
Turns ON in the case of
"K100 = C20 (Current value)" .
M1
M 2 Turns ON in the case of
"K100 < C20 (Current value)" . M2
Latched Latched Latched
in the in the in the
ON ON ON
status. status. status.
If it is necessary to clear the comparison result when the instruction is not executed, add the following contents under
the above program.
1) RST instruction
X000
RST M0
RST M1
RST M2
2) ZRST instruction
X000
FNC 40
M0 M2 M0 to M2 are reset.
ZRST
246
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare
1
9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare
Introduction
Outline
This instruction compares two values (zone) with the comparison source, and outputs the result (smaller, equal or 2
larger) to bit devices (3 points).
Overview
→ For the contact comparison instruction, refer to Chapter 28.
→ For floating point comparison, refer to Section 18.2.
3
D ZCP P 9 steps
ZCP Continuous
17 steps
DZCP Continuous
List
Instruction
Operation Operation
ZCPP Pulse (Single) DZCPP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
Operand Type
S1
Description
Data or device number handled as lower comparison value
Data Type
16- or 32-bit binary
4
in Detail
Devices
S2 Data or device number handled as upper comparison value 16- or 32-bit binary
S Data or device number handled as comparison source 16- or 32-bit binary
D Head bit device number to which comparison result is output Bit
3. Applicable devices 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Oper-
Type
S1        2 3     
6
S2        2 3     
Programming
Before
S        2 3     
D    1 
2: This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 7
Instruction
Basic
1. 16-bit operation (ZCP and ZCPP)
The lower comparison value S1 and upper comparison value S2 are compared with the comparison source
S . According to the result (smaller, within zone or larger), either D , D +1 or D +2 turns ON. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
• Comparison is executed algebraically. Example: −10 < 2 <10

Command
input
FNC 11 S1  S2  S D
ZCP
D Turns ON in the case of 9
" [ S1  > S  ] ".
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

" [ S1  ≤ S  ≤ S2  ] ".
>
"[ S S2  ] ".
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
Even if the command input turns OFF and ZCP instruction is not executed, D  , D  +1 and D  +2 latch
247
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare
2. 32-bit operation (DZCP and DZCPP)

The lower comparison value [ S1 +1, S1 ] and upper comparison value [ S2 +1, S2 ] are compared with the
comparison source [ S +1, S ]. According to the result (smaller, within zone or larger), either D , D +1
or D +2 turns ON.
• Comparison is executed algebraically. Example: −125400 < 22466 < 1015444
Command
input
FNC 11
S1  S2  S D
DZCP
D Turns ON in the case of
" [ S1  +1, S1  ] > [ S  +1, S  ] ".
" [ S1  +1, S1  ] ≤ [ S  +1, S  ] ≤ [ S2  +1, S2  ] ".
" [ S  +1, S  ] > [ S2  +1, S2  ] ".
Even if the command input turns OFF and DZCP instruction is not executed, D , D  +1 and D  +2 latch
Cautions
From the device specified as D , three devices are occupied. Make sure not to use devices used in another
control.
2. Upper comparison value and lower comparison value

The lower comparison value S1 should be smaller than the upper comparison value S2 .
1) When the lower comparison value S1 is smaller than the upper comparison value S2
S1  S2  S D X000
X000
FNC 11 K100 K120 C30 M3 121
ZCP 120
119
M 3 …
Turns ON in the case of 100
"K100 > C30 (Current value)" . C30 99
M 4
Turns ON in the case of M3
"K100 ≤ C30 (Current value) ≤ K120" .
M 5 M4
"K120 < C30 (Current value)" .
M5
2) When the lower comparison value S1 is larger than the upper comparison value S2
S1  S2  S D
X000
X000
FNC 11 K120 K100 C30 M3 121
ZCP 120
119
…
It is handled as
100
K120 S1  . C30 99
M 3
"K120 > C30 (Current value)" . M3
M 4
Turns ON in the case of M4
"K120 = C30 (Current value)" .
M 5 M5
"K120 < C30 (Current value)" .
248
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move
1
9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move
Introduction
Outline
This instruction transfers (copies) the contents of a device to another device. 2
Overview
D MOV P 5 steps
MOV Continuous
9 steps
DMOV Continuous
Operation Operation
MOVP Pulse (Single) DMOVP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation 3
List
Instruction
2. Set data
S Transfer source data or device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
D Transfer destination device number 16- or 32-bit binary

4
in Detail
Devices
Oper-
Type
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T
   
C D
   1
R U\G V
2  
Z Modify K
  
H E "" P
5
S
Constant
Device &
Specified the
D       1 2   


6
Programming
Before
1. 16-bit operation (MOV and MOVP)
The contents of the transfer source S are transferred to the transfer destination D .
• While the command input is OFF, the transfer destination D does not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source S , it is automatically converted into binary. 7
Command
Instruction
Basic
input
FNC 12 → D
S D S
MOV
When specifying digits of a bit device (K1X000 → K1Y000)

The bit device transfers a maximum of 16 points(multiple of 4).
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Command
input
FNC 12 K1X000 K1Y000
MOV
Before
S  :K1X000
X3 X2 X1 X0
D  :K1Y000
Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
Command contact ON
9
execution X000 ON
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
ON OFFOFF ON ON ON ON OFF
X001 OFF
S
Transfer X002 OFF
After X3 X2 X1 X0 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
execution X003 ON
ON OFFOFF ON ON OFFOFF ON
Y000 OFF ON 10
Y001 ON OFF
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
D
Y002 ON OFF
Y003 ON
249
When a word device is specified

The word device transfers 1 point.
Command
input
FNC 12 D10 D50
MOV
S :D10 D  :D50 Command contact ON

Before
execution K50 K0
S 50
Transfer
After
execution K50 K50 D 0 50
2. 32-bit operation (DMOV and DMOVP)

The contents of the transfer source [ S +1, S ] are transferred to the transfer destination [ D +1, D ].
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source [ S +1, S ], it is automatically converted into binary.
Command
input
FNC 12 S D [ ]→[
S  +1, S  D  +1, D  ]
DMOV
When specifying digits of a bit device (K8X000 → K8Y000)

The bit device transfers a maximum of 32 points (multiple of 4).
Command
input
FNC 12 K8X000 K8Y000
DMOV
S  :K8X000 D  :K8Y000 ON
Command contact
Before X37 to X1 X0 Y37 to Y1 Y0
execution X000 ON
ON OFFOFF ON ON ON ON OFF
X001 OFF
Transfer S
…
After OFF
X37 to X1 X0 Y37 to Y1 Y0
execution X037 ON
ON OFFOFF ON ON OFFOFF ON
Y000 OFF ON
Y001 ON OFF
D
ON OFF
…
Y037 ON
When a word device is specified

The word device transfers 1 point.
Command
input
FNC 12 D10 D50
DMOV
S :D11,D10 D  :D51,D50 Command contact ON

Before
execution K500000 K4321
S 500000
Transfer
After
execution K500000 K500000 D 4321 500000
250
1
Program examples
Introduction
1. When reading the current value of a timer and counter
X001 (Current value of T0) → (D20)
FNC 12 T 0 D 20
MOV The operation is the same as a counter.
2
Overview
2. When indirectly specifying the set value of a timer or counter
As the set value of the timer T20, two values can be specified by turning ON or OFF the switch X002.
For specifying more than two set values, more than one switch is required.
X002
FNC 12
MOV
K100 D 10 (K100) → (D 10)
3
X002
List
Instruction
FNC 12 K 50 D 10 (K50) → (D 10)
MOV
M 0
T 20 D 10 When X002 is ON, D10 = K100 (10-second timer).
When X002 is OFF, D10 = K50 (5-second timer).
4
3. When transferring a bit device
in Detail
Devices
The program written by basic instructions shown on the right can be expressed using MOV instruction as shown
below.
X000
Y000
X001
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Y001 M8000
FNC 12 K1X000 K1Y000
X002 MOV
Y002 RUN monitor
X003
Y003 6
Programming
Before
4. When transferring 32-bit data
Make sure to use DMOV instruction for transferring the operation result of an applied instruction (such as MUL) whose
operation result is output in 32 bits, and for transferring a 32-bit numeric value or transferring the current value of a
high-speed counter (C235 to C255) which is a 32-bit device.
Command
7
Instruction
Basic
input
FNC 12 D0(D1) D10(D11) (D 1,D 0) → (D 11,D 10)
Command
DMOV
input
FNC 12 C235 D20(D21) (Current value of C235) → (D21, D20)
DMOV
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
251
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move
9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move
Outline
This instruction distributes and composes data in units of digit (4 bits).
SMOV P SMOV Continuous 

11 steps Operation
SMOVP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Word device number storing data whose digits will be moved 16-bit binary
m1 Head digit position to be moved 16-bit binary
m2 Number of digits to be moved 16-bit binary
D Word device number storing data whose digits are moved 16-bit binary
n Head digit position of movement destination 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S        1 2   
m1  
m2  
D       1 2   
n  

252
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move
1
Introduction
1. 16-bit operation (SMOV and SMOVP)
The contents of the transfer source S and transfer destination D are converted into 4-digit BCD (0000 to
9999) respectively. "m2" digits starting from the "m1"th digit are transferred to the transfer destination D starting
from the "n"th digit, converted into binary, and then stored to the transfer destination D . 2
Overview
• When the command input turns ON, only the specified digits in the transfer destination D are changed. The
transfer source S and unspecified digits in the transfer destination D do not change.
Command
input
FNC 13
S m1 m2 D n
3
SMOV
List
Instruction
In the case of "m1 = 4, [1] S is converted from binary into BCD.
4th digit 3rd digit 2nd digit 1st digit m2 = 2, n = 3".
[2] "m2" digits starting from the "m1"th digit are
S  (16-bit binary data)
↓ Data is automatically
converted. [1]
transferred to
digit.
D ’ starting from the "n"th
4
in Detail
Devices
S ' (4-digit BCD data) The digits of 103 and 100 of D ’ are not
103 102 101 100
Command contact = ON affected even if data is transferred from
↓ Digits are moved. [2] S ’.
103 102 101 100 D  ' (4-digit BCD data) [3] The composed data (BCD) is converted into
Do not change. ↓ Data is automatically

converted. [3]
binary, and stored to D . 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
D  (16-bit binary data)
2. Extension function
When M8168 is set to ON first and then SMOV instruction is executed, conversion from binary to BCD is not executed.
Data is moved in units of 4 bits. 6
Programming
Before
M8168
X010
FNC 13 D 1 K 4 K 2 D 2 K 3
SMOV
M8168 M8168 is used for other instructions also. 7

After using M8168 for SMOV instruction, return it to OFF.
Instruction
Basic
X010
Program example
The data on three-digit digital switches are composed, and stored as binary data to D2.
102 101 100 M8000

FNC 19 (X020 to X027) 2-digit BCD
8
K2X020 D 2
BIN → D2 (binary)
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
7 6 5
FNC 19 K1X000 D 1 (X000 to X003) 1-digit BCD
BIN → D1 (binary)
8 1 8 1
8 1
X003 to X000 X027 to X020
FNC 13
SMOV
D 1 K 1 K 1 D 2 K 3 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
1-digit BCD data of D1 is transferred to

PLC the 3rd digit (BCD data) of D2, and
automatically converted into binary data.
Data on three digital switches
connected to non-consecutive input
terminals are composed.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
253
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement
9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement
Outline
This instruction inverts data in units of bit, and then transfers (copies) the inverted data.
D CML P 5 steps
CML Continuous
9 steps
DCML Continuous
Operation Operation
CMLP Pulse (Single) DCMLP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Data to be inverted or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
D Word device number storing inverted data 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S        1 2     
D       1 2   


1. 16-bit operation (CML and CMLP)
Each bit of a device specified as S is inverted (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0), and then transferred to D .
• When a constant (K) is specified as S , it is automatically converted into binary.
• This operation is useful when a logically inverted output is required as an output from a PLC.
Command
input
FNC 14 → D
S D S
CML
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 n5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

S 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
Sign bit (0: Positive, 1: Negative)
When command contact turns ON
D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
Inverted data is transferred.
254
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement
1
2. 32-bit operation (DCML and DCMLP)
Introduction
Each bit of devices specified as [ S +1, S ] is inverted (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0), and then transferred to
[ D +1, D ].
• When a constant (K) is specified as [ S +1, S ], it is automatically converted into binary.
• This operation is useful when a logically inverted output is required as an output from a PLC.
2
Command
Overview
input
FNC 14 S  +1, S  → D +1, D 
S D
DCML
S
b31
1
b30
0
b29
1
b28
0
b27
1
b26
0
b25
1
to b7
0
b6
0
n5
1
b4
1
b3
1
b2
0
b1
1
b0
0
3
List
Instruction
D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
Inverted data is transferred. 4
in Detail
Devices
Program examples
1. When receiving an inverted input
The sequence program shown below can be written by CML instruction.
X000 X000
5
M0 M0
Constant
Device &
Specified the
X001 X001
M1 M1
X002 X002
M2 M2 6
Programming
Before
X003 X003
M3 M3
Instruction
Basic
M8000
FNC 14 K1X000 K1M0
CML
RUN monitor
2. When four bits are specified for a device with digit specification
8
S D
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
X000
FNC 14 D 0 K1Y000 (D 0) → (K1Y000)
CML
S
b15
1
b14
0
b13
1
b12
0
b11
1
b10
0
b9
1
b8
0
b7
1
b6
0
n5
1
b4
0
b3
1
b2
0
b1
1
b0
0
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
D0 Sign bit (0: Positive, 1: Negative) X000 = ON
D 0 1 0 1
K1Y000 Y017 Y016 Y015 Y014 Y013 Y012 Y011 Y010 Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004 Y003 Y002 Y001 Y000
Do not change.
10
Inverted data is
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
transferred.
255
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move
9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move
Outline
This instruction transfers (copies) a specified number of data all at once.
BMOV P BMOV Continuous 

7 steps Operation
BMOVP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Transfer source data or device number storing data 16-bit binary
D Transfer destination device number 16-bit binary

n Number of transferred points [n ≤ 512] 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S        1 2 
D       1 2 
n   


BMOV instruction transfers "n" points of data from S to D all at once.
• If the device number range is exceeded, data is transferred within the possible range.
Command
input
FNC 15 n S D
S D
BMOV S  +1 D  +1
"n" points
…
S  +(n-1) D  +(n-1)
Transfer is enabled even if the transfer number range is overlapped.

To prevent overwriting before transfer of source data, data is automatically transferred in the order "[1] → [2] → [3]"
according to the number overlap status.
X001 [1]
FNC 15 D10 D9 K3 D10 D9
BMOV [2]
D11 D10
[3]
D12 D11
X002 [3]
FNC 15 D10 D11
D10 D11 K3 [2]
BMOV D11 D12
[1]
D12 D13
256
1
Extension function (bi-directional transfer function)
Introduction
By controlling the direction inverse flag M8024*1 for BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, data can be transferred in two
directions in one program.
X001 *1
BMOV
M8024 BMOV direction inverse Transfer
direction
inverse flag
flag direction S , D 2
S D n D5 → D10
Overview
X000 M8024*1 : OFF S → D D6 → D11
FNC 15 D7 → D12
BMOVP D5 D10 K3
D5 ← D10
M8001 *1BMOV M8024*1 : ON S ← D D6 ← D11
M8024 direction D7 ← D12
Normally OFF
during operation
inverse flag:
OFF
3
List
Instruction
*1. M8024 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
Caution
When specifying digits of bit devices, specify the same number of digits for S and D . 4
in Detail
Devices
S D n
M8000
FNC 15 K1M0 K1Y000 K 2 M 0 Y000
BMOV M 1 Y001
M 2 Y002
Specify the same number M 3 Y003 5
of digits.
Constant
Device &
Specified the
n=2
(Example: K1)
M 4 Y004
M 5 Y005
M 6 Y006
M 7 Y007 6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
257
9.6.1 Function of transfer between file registers and data registers

BMOV (FNC 15) instruction has a special function for file registers (D1000 and later).
→ For details on file registers, refer to Section 4.9.
1. What are file registers

In the parameters, D1000 to D7999 can be set as file registers, and written to and read from the program memory
area. D1000 to D2999 in the FX3S PLC.
1) Outline of setting
File registers (D1000 to D7999) do not exist in the initial status. They are valid only when some number of file
registers are secured by parameter setting in a programming tool.
2) Number of file registers
In parameter setting, set 500 file registers as 1 block.
1 to 14 blocks*1 (each of which has 500 file registers) can be set.
1 block occupies 500 steps in the program memory area.
*1. 1 to 4 blocks in the FX3S PLC.
3) Difference between BMOV (FNC 15) instruction and other instructions
The table below shows the difference between BMOV (FNC 15) instruction and other instructions with regard to
file registers (D1000 and later).
Instruction Contents of transfer Remarks

Can read from and write to the file register area [A]
BMOV instruction −
inside the program memory.
Can read from and write to the data register area Because the data register area [B] is provided inside the
Other applied
[B] inside the program memory in the same way as system RAM in PLCs, its contents can be arbitrarily
instructions
general data registers. changed regardless of the memory cassette format
When restoring the power, data registers set as file registers are automatically copied from the file register area
[A] to the data register area [B].

or memory cassette RAM
D0
Program When power Data
memory is turned ON memory
When PLC Devices D1000 and later specified as
Program/ Data register
mode is operands in applied instructions other
comment
changed from than BMOV (FNC 15) , indirectly
D1000 D1000
STOP to specified values for timers or
500 points × File register RUN Data register Write counters or devices in RST
14 blocks
[A] [B] instruction are read from and written
maximum
to the area [B] in the same way as
(7000 points Read
Data register general data registers.
maximum) D7999
The remaining area can be used as general purpose

data registers.
2. Cautions on use
1) When updating the contents of a file register with the same number (same-number register update mode), make
sure that the file register number is equivalent between S and D .
2) When using file registers in the same-number register update mode, make sure that the number of transfer points
specified by "n" does not exceed the file register area.
3) If the file register area is exceeded while file registers are used in the same-number register update mode, an
operation error (M8067) is caused and the instruction is not executed.
4) In the case of indexing (in the same-number register update mode)
When S and D are indexing with index, the instruction is executed if the actual device number is within
the file register area and the number of transfer points does not exceed the file register area.
258
1
5) Handling of the memory cassette
Introduction
When changing the contents of file registers secured inside the memory cassette, confirm the following
conditions:
- Set the protect switch of the memory cassette to OFF.
- Do not turn OFF the power while the contents of file registers are changed.
If the power is turned OFF during the change, the data stored in file registers may be filled with unexpected
values, or a parameter error may occur. 2
Overview
6) Execution time for writing data to file registers
- In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
It takes 66 to 132 ms to write data in one continuous block (500 points) to the memory cassette (flash memory).
Execution of the program is paused during this period. Because the watchdog timer is not refreshed during this
period, it is necessary to take proper countermeasures such as inserting the WDT instruction into the sequence
program. 3
It takes longer time to write data to file registers stored in a memory cassette (flash memory) compared to writing
List
Instruction
data to file registers stored in the built-in memory.
- In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
It takes 80 ms to write data in one continuous block (500 points) to file registers.
Note that execution of the program is paused during this period, but the watchdog timer is automatically
refreshed.
The time for writing data is same between file registers stored in the built-in memory and file registers stored in a 4
memory cassette (EEPROM).
in Detail
Devices
7) Allowable number of times of writing to the memory
Data can be written to the memory cassette up to 10,000 times, and to the memory (EEPROM) built in FX3S/
FX3G/FX3GC PLCs up to 20,000 times.
When a continuous operation type instruction is used for data writing in a program, data is written to the memory
in every operation cycle of the PLC. To prevent this, make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction
(BMOVP). 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
8) File register operation
File registers are secured inside the built-in memory or memory cassette.
Different from general data registers, file registers can be read and written only by peripheral equipment or BMOV
(FNC 15) instruction. 6
9) If a file register is not specified as the destination in BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, the file register is not accessed.
Programming
Before
a) Outline of memory operation

or memory cassette RAM
D0
D200
Program
memory
Image
memory
7
Instruction
Basic
Program/
D599 Data register
comment
Read
D1000
500 points × File register D1100 Data register
14 blocks
maximum
[A]
D1499
[B]
8
(7000 points Data register
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
maximum) D7999
b) Program example
When X000 is set to ON, the data register area [B] is read.
X000
S D n
9
FNC 15
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
BMOVP D1100 D200 K400
A file register can be specified as D . But if the same number with S is specified, the same-number
register update mode is selected.
However, even if a file register having different number is specified for S and D respectively, data
cannot be transferred from the file register area to another file register area. In such a case, read the contents
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
of a file register specified as S in the same-number register update mode to the data register area [B]
once, and then write the data.
→ For the same-number register update mode of file registers, refer to Subsection 4.9.4.
259
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move
9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move
Outline
This instruction transfers same data to specified number of devices.
D FMOV P 7 steps
FMOV Continuous
13 steps
DFMOV Continuous
Operation Operation
FMOVP Pulse (Single) DFMOVP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Transfer source data or device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
Head word device number of transfer destination (Same data is transferred from the
D 16- or 32-bit binary
transfer source at one time.)
n Number of transfer points [K1≤n≤K512, H1≤n≤H1FF] 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S        1 2     
D       1 2 
n  


1. 16-bit operation (FMOV and FMOVP)
The contents of S are transferred to "n" devices starting from D .
• The contents will be same among all of "n" devices.
• If the number of points specified by "n" exceeds the device number range, data is transferred within the possible
range.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer source S does not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source S , it is automatically converted into binary.
Command
input
FNC 16 n
S D
FMOV
S D
D  +1
D  +2 n
D  +3
D  +4
260
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move
1
2. 32-bit operation (DFMOV and DFMOVP)
Introduction
The contents of [ S +1, S ] are transferred to "n" 32-bit devices starting from [ D +1, D ].
• The contents will be the same among all of "n" 32-bit devices.
• If the number of points specified by "n" exceeds the device number range, data is transferred within the possible
range.
• While the command input is OFF, the transfer destination [ D +1, D ] does not change.
2
Overview
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer source [ S +1, S ] does not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source [ S +1, S ], it is automatically converted into binary.
X000
FNC 16 S D n
DFMOV 3
List
Instruction
S  +1, S  D  +1, D 
D  +3, D  +2
4
D  +5, D  +4 n
in Detail
Devices
D  +7, D  +6
D  +9, D  +8
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Program example
1. When writing specified data to two or more devices
X000
S D n
6
FNC 16
Programming
Before
K 0 D 0 K 5
FMOV
Before After
S D execution execution
K0 K0 …… K 3 → K 0
D0
7
……
Instruction
Basic
K0 D1 K 5 → K 0
K0 D2 …… K 65 → K 0
K0 D3 …… K 7 → K 0 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
K0 D4 …… K100 → K 0
Values before execution are

shown as examples.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
261
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange
9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange
Outline
This instruction exchanges data between two devices.
D XCH P XCH Continuous DXCH Continuous

5 steps Operation 9 steps Operation
XCHP Pulse (Single) DXCHP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
D1 Device number storing data to be exchanged. 16- or 32-bit binary
D2 Device number storing data to be exchanged. 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
D1           
D2           

1. 16-bit operation (XCH and XCHP)
Data is exchanged between D1 and D2 .
Command
input
FNC 17
D1  D2  D1  D2 
XCHP
Before After
execution execution
D1  = K10 K36 = D1 
D2  = K36 K10 = D2 
Exchange
2. 32-bit operation (DXCH and DXCHP)

Data is exchanged between [ D1 +1, D1 ] and [ D2 +1, D2 ].
Command
input
FNC 17 D1  D2  D1  +1, D1  D2  +1, D2 
DXCHP
Before execution After execution
D1  +1, D1  = K10000 K1433600 = D1  +1, D1 
D2  +1, D2  = K1433600 K10000 = D2  +1, D2 

Exchange
262
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange
1
Extension function (function compatible between the FX2 Series and the FX2C Series)
Introduction
When the instruction is executed while M8160 is ON, high-order 8 bits (byte) and low-order 8 bits (byte) of a word
device are exchanged with each other.
Because this instruction works in the same way as SWAP (FNC147) instruction, use SWAP instruction when
programming a new exchange.
In a 32-bit operation, high-order 8 bits (byte) and low-order 8 bits (byte) of each word device are exchanged for each
other.
2
Overview
X000
M8160 SWAP
FNC 17
DXCH
D10 D10
3
D11 D10
List
Instruction
M8000
M8160 High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits
Error 4
An operation error occurs in the following case. The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
in Detail
Devices
• When M8160 is ON, and the device number is different between D1 and D2
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
263
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal
9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal
Outline
This instruction converts binary (BIN) data into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data.
Binary data is used in operations in PLCs. Use this instruction to display numeric values on the seven-segment display
unit equipped with BCD decoder.
D BCD P 5 steps
BCD Continuous
9 steps
DBCD Continuous
Operation Operation
BCDP Pulse (Single) DBCDP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Word device number storing the conversion source (binary) data 16- or 32-bit binary
D Word device number of the conversion destination (binary-coded decimal) data 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S        1 2   
D       1 2   


1. 16-bit operation (BCD and BCDP)
This instruction converts the binary (BIN) data of S into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data, and transfers the
converted BCD data to D .
• The data of S can be converted if it is ranging from K0 to K9999 (BCD).
• The table below shows digit specification for S and D .
Command
input BIN
FNC 18 S D PLC
BCD BCD (FNC 18)
Y014 … Y010 …Y004…Y000 …

When "K4Y000" is specified
Y017 … Y013…Y007…Y003 …
BCD
D Number of digits Data range
K1Y000 1 0 to 9
K2Y000 2 00 to 99
K3Y000 3 000 to 999
K4Y000 4 0000 to 9999
264
1
2. 32-bit operation (DBCD and DBCDP)
Introduction
This instruction converts the binary (BIN) data of [ S +1, S ] into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data, and
transfers the converted BCD data to [ D +1, D ].
• The data of [ S +1, S ] can be converted if it is ranging from K0 to K99999999 (BCD).
• The table below shows digit specification for [ S +1, S ] and [ D +1, D ]. 2
Command
Overview
input
FNC 18 BIN
S D PLC
DBCD DBCD (FNC 18)
When "K8Y000" is specified Y034…Y030…Y024…Y020…Y014 …Y010 …Y004…Y000 …

Y037 Y033 Y027 Y023 Y017 Y013 Y007 Y003 3
List
Instruction
BCD
in Detail
Devices
[ D +1, D ] Number of digits Data range
K1Y000 1 0 to 9
K2Y000 2 00 to 99
K3Y000 3 000 to 999
K4Y000 4 0000 to 9999 5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
K5Y000 5 00000 to 99999
K6Y000 6 000000 to 999999
K7Y000 7 0000000 to 9999999
K8Y000 8 00000000 to 99999999
6
Related instruction
Programming
Before
Instruction Function
BIN (FNC 19) Converts binary-coded decimal (BCD) data into binary (BIN) data.
Cautions
7
1. When using SEGL (FNC 74) or ARWS (FNC 75) instruction
Instruction
Basic
Because conversion between binary-coded decimal data and binary data is automatically executed in SEGL (FNC 74)
and ARWS (FNC 75) instructions, BCD instruction is not required.
2. Handling of BCD inputs and outputs

Binary data is used in all operations in PLCs including arithmetic operations (+, −, × and ÷), increment and decrement
instructions. 8
• When receiving the digital switch information in the binary-coded decimal (BCD) format into a PLC, use BIN (FNC
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
19) instruction for converting BCD data into binary data.

• When outputting data to the seven-segment display unit handling binary-coded decimal (BCD) data, use BCD (FNC
18) instruction for converting binary data into BCD data.
Errors 9
In BCD or BCDP (16-bit type) instructions, an operation error occurs when the S value is outside the range from 0
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
to 9999.
In DBCD or DBCDP (32-bit type) instructions, an operation error occurs when the S value is outside the range
from 0 to 99,999,999.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
265
Program examples
1. When the seven-segment display unit has 1 digit
X000
FNC 18 D0 K1Y000 PLC
BCD
2. When the seven-segment display unit has 2 to 4 digits

X000
FNC 18 D0 K2Y000 PLC
BCD
In the case of 2 digits: K2 Output

In the case of 3 digits: K3 destination
In the case of 4 digits: K4
K4 K3 K2 K1
3. When the seven-segment display unit has 5 to 8 digits

X000
FNC 18 PLC
DBCD D0 K5Y000
D1,D0 Output
destination
K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1
266
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary
1
9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary
Introduction
Outline
This instruction converts binary-coded decimal (BCD) data into binary (BIN) data. 2
Use this instruction to convert a binary-coded decimal (BCD) value such as a value set by a digital switch into binary
Overview
(BIN) data and to receive the converted binary data so that the data can be handled in operations in PLCs.
D BIN P 5 steps
BIN Continuous
Operation 9 steps
DBIN Continuous
Operation
3
BINP DBINP
List
Instruction
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Word device number storing the conversion source (binary-coded decimal) data 16- or 32-bit binary 4
in Detail
Devices
D Word device number of the conversion destination (binary) 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 5
Type
Constant
Device &
Specified the
S        1 2   
D       1 2   

6
Programming
Before
1. 16-bit operation (BIN and BINP)
This instruction converts the binary-coded decimal (BCD) data of S into binary (BIN) data, and transfers the
converted binary data to D . 7
Instruction
Basic
• The data of S can be converted if it is ranging from K0 to K9999 (BCD).
• The table below shows digit specification for S and D .
Command
input BCD
FNC 19
BIN
S D
6 7 8 9 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
When "K4X000"
is specified
X014…X010…X004…X000…
X017 X013 X007 X003
BIN (FNC 19)

BIN 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
PLC
S Number of digits Data range
K1X000 1 0 to 9
K2X000 2 00 to 99 10
K3X000 3 000 to 999
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
K4X000 4 0000 to 9999
267
2. 32-bit operation (DBIN and DBINP)

This instruction converts the binary-coded decimal (BCD) data of [ S +1, S ] into binary (BIN) data, and
transfers the converted binary data to [ D +1, D ].
• The data of [ S +1, S ] can be converted if it is ranging from 0 to 99,999,999 (BCD).
• The table below shows digit specification for [ S +1, S ] and [ D +1, D ].
Command
input BCD
FNC 19 S D
DBIN 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
When "K8X000"
is specified
X034…X030…X024…X020…X014 …X010 …X004…X000…

X037 X033 X027 X023 X017 X013 X007 X003
BIN
DBIN (FNC 19)
PLC
[ S +1, S ] Number of digits Data range
K1X000 1 0 to 9
K2X000 2 00 to 99
K3X000 3 000 to 999
K4X000 4 0000 to 9999
K5X000 5 00000 to 99999
K6X000 6 000000 to 999999
K7X000 7 0000000 to 9999999
K8X000 8 00000000 to 99999999
Related instruction
Instruction Function
BCD (FNC 18) Converts binary (BIN) data into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data.
Cautions
1. When using DSW (FNC 72) instruction
Because conversion between binary-coded decimal data and binary data is automatically executed in DSW (FNC 72)
instruction, BIN instruction is not required.
2. Handling of BCD inputs and outputs

Binary data is used in all operations in PLCs including arithmetic operations (+, −, × and ÷), increment and decrement
instructions.
• When receiving the digital switch information in the binary-coded decimal (BCD) format into a PLC, use BIN (FNC
19) instruction for converting BCD data into binary data.
• When outputting data to the seven-segment display unit handling binary-coded decimal (BCD) data, use BCD (FNC
18) instruction for converting binary data into BCD data.
Error
When the data of S is not binary-coded decimal (BCD), M8067 (operation error) turns ON. But M8068 (operation
error latch) does not turn ON.
268
1
Program examples
Introduction
1. When the digital switch has 1 digit
X000
FNC 19 K1X000 D0
BIN 6
2
MOV instruction can be used instead.
Overview
X000
FNC 12 K1X000 D0
MOV PLC
2. When the digital switch has 2 to 4 digits

3
List
Instruction
X000 K4 K3 K2 K1
FNC 19 K2X000 D0
BIN
6 7 8 9
destination
In the case of 4 digits: K4 Digital switch 4
input
in Detail
Devices
PLC
3. When the digital switch has 5 to 8 digits

X000
FNC 19
K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 5
K5X000 D0
Constant
Device &
Specified the
DBIN
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
In the case of 6 digits: K6 destination
In the case of 7 digits: K7 Digital switch
In the case of 8 digits: K8 input
PLC
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
269
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
10. Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) –

FNC 20 to FNC 29
FNC 20 to FNC 29 provide instructions for arithmetic operations and logical operations of numeric data.
20 ADD ADD S1 S2 D Addition Section 10.1
21 SUB SUB S1 S2 D Subtraction Section 10.2
22 MUL MUL S1 S2 D Multiplication Section 10.3
23 DIV DIV S1 S2 D Division Section 10.4
24 INC INC D Increment Section 10.5
25 DEC DEC D Decrement Section 10.6
26 WAND WAND S1 S2 D Logical Word AND Section 10.7
27 WOR WOR S1 S2 D Logical Word OR Section 10.8
28 WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D Logical Exclusive OR Section 10.9
Section
29 NEG NEG D Negation
10.10
Floating point operation instructions

FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs offer not only arithmetic operation instructions in binary format but also
arithmetic operation instructions in the floating point format.
FNC No. Instruction mnemonic Contents of processing
120 [D]EADD Addition of binary floating point
121 [D]ESUB Subtraction of binary floating point
122 [D]EMUL Multiplication of binary floating point
123 [D]EDIV Division of binary floating point
For details, refer to the explanation of each instruction.

→ For the floating point operation, refer to Chapter 18.
270
1
10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition
Introduction
Outline
This instruction executes addition by two values to obtain the result (A + B = C). 2
→ For the floating point addition instruction EADD (FNC120), refer to Section 18.8.
Overview
D ADD P Continuous Continuous
7 steps ADD
ADDP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
13 steps DADD
DADDP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
3
Operation Operation
List
Instruction
2. Set data
4
in Detail
Devices
D Word device number storing the addition result 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Type
S1        1 2     
S2        1 2     
D       1 2    6
Programming
Before

1. 16-bit operation (ADD and ADDP) 7
Instruction
Basic
The contents of S2 are added to S1 in binary format, and the addition result is transferred to D .
Command
input FNC 20 S1  S2  D S1  + S2  → D 
ADD
• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data is added algebraically. 8
5 + (−8) = −3
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
2. 32-bit operation (DADD and DADDP)

The contents of [ S2 +1, S2 ] are added to [ S1 +1, S1 ] in binary format, and the addition result is transferred
to [ D1 +1, D1 ]. 9
Command
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
input FNC 20 S1  S2  D [ S1  +1, S1  ] + [ S2  +1, S2  ] → [ D  +1, D  ]

DADD
5500 + (−8540) = −3040
• When a constant (K) is specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted into binary 10
format.
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
271
Related devices
1. Relationship between the flag operation and the sign (positive or negative) of a numeric value
→ For the flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
ON : When the operation result is 0
M8020 Zero
OFF : When the operation result is not 0
ON : When the operation result is less than −32768 (in 16-bit operation) or −2,147,483,648 (in 32-bit operation)
M8021 Borrow
OFF : When the operation result is not less than −32768 (in 16-bit operation) or −2,147,483,648 (in 32-bit operation)
ON : When the operation result is more than 32767 (in 16-bit operation) or 2,147,483,647 (in 32-bit operation)
M8022 Carry
OFF : When the operation result is not more than 32767 (in 16-bit operation) or 2,147,483,647 (in 32-bit operation)
Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
−2, −1, 0, −32768 −1, 0, 1 32767, 0, 1, 2
Borrow flag The most The most Carry flag

significant bit of significant bit
data becomes of data
Zero flag "1". becomes "0". Zero flag
−2, −1, 0, −2,147,483,648 −1, 0, 1 2,147,483,647, 0, 1, 2
Borrow flag Zero flag Carry flag
Cautions
1. When using a 32-bit operation instruction (DADD or DADDP)
When specifying word devices, a 16-bit word device on the low-order side is specified first, and a word device with the
subsequent device number is automatically set for the high-order 16 bits.
To prevent number overlap, it is recommended to always specify an even number, for example.
2. When specifying the same device in the source and destination

The same device number can be specified for both the source and the destination.
In this case, note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle if a continuous operation type instruction
(ADD or DADD) is used.
X001
FNC 20 D 0 K 25 D 0 (D 0) + 25→(D 0)
ADD
Program example
1. Difference between ADD instruction and INC instruction caused by a program for adding "+1"
When ADD[P] is executed, "1" is added to the contents of D0 every time X001 turns from OFF to ON.
ADD[P] instruction is similar to INCP instruction described later except the contents shown in the table below:
ADD, ADDP, DADD or DADDP
INC, INCP, DINC, DINCP instruction
instruction
Flag (zero, borrow or carry) Operates Does not operate
16-bit S +(+1)= D +32767→0→+1→+2→ +32767→−32768→−32767

Operation result
operation ←−2←−1←0←−32768 ⎯
S +(−1)= D
32-bit S +(+1)= D +2,147,483,647→0→+1→+2→ +2,147,483,647→−2,147,483,648→−2,147,483,647

operation ←−2←−1←0←−2,147,483,648 ⎯
S +(−1)= D
S1  S2  D
X001
FNC 20 D 0 K 1 D 0 (D 0) + 1→(D 0)
ADDP
X001
FNC 24 D 0 (D 0) + 1→(D 0)
INCP
272
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction
1
10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction
Introduction
Outline
This instruction executes subtraction using two values to obtain the result (A − B = C). 2
→ For the floating point subtraction instruction ESUB (FNC121), refer to Section 18.9.
Overview
D SUB P 7 steps SUB
Continuous
13 steps DSUB
Continuous
SUBP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
DSUBP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
3
List
Instruction
2. Set data
S1 Data for subtraction or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Data for subtraction or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
4
in Detail
Devices
D Word device number storing the subtraction result 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 5
Type
Constant
Device &
Specified the
S1        1 2     
S2        1 2     
D       1 2   
6
Programming
Before

1. 16-bit operation (SUB and SUBP) 7
The contents of S2 are subtracted from S1 in binary format, and the subtraction result is transferred to D .
Instruction
Basic
Command
input FNC 21 S1  S2  D S1  − S2  → D 
SUB
• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data is subtracted
algebraically. 8
5 − (−8) = 13
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
2. 32-bit operation (DSUB and DSUBP)

The contents of [ S2 +1, S2 ] are subtracted from [ S1 +1, S1 ] in binary format, and the subtraction result is
transferred to [ D1 +1, D1 ]. 9
Command
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
input FNC 21 S1  S2  D [ S1  +1, S1  ] − [ S2  +1, S2  ] → [ D  +1, D  ]

DSUB
• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data is subtracted
algebraically.
5500 − (−8540) = 14040 10
• When a constant (K) is specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted into binary
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
format.
273
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction
Related devices
1. Relationship between the flag operation and the sign (positive or negative) of a numeric value
→ For the flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
ON : When the operation result is 0
M8020 Zero
OFF : When the operation result is other than 0
ON : When the operation result is less than −32768 (in 16-bit operation) or −2,147,483,648 (in 32-bit operation)
M8021 Borrow
OFF : When the operation result is not less than −32768 (in 16-bit operation) or −2,147,483,648 (in 32-bit operation)
ON : When the operation result is more than 32767 (in 16-bit operation) or 2,147,483,647 (in 32-bit operation)
M8022 Carry
OFF : When the operation result is not more than 32767 (in 16-bit operation) or 2,147,483,647 (in 32-bit operation)
Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
−2, −1, 0, −32768 −1, 0, 1 32767, 0, 1, 2
Borrow flag The most The most Carry flag

significant bit of significant bit
data becomes of data
Zero flag "1". becomes "0". Zero flag
−2, −1, 0, −2,147,483,648 −1, 0, 1 2,147,483,647, 0, 1, 2
Borrow flag Zero flag Carry flag
Cautions
1. When using a 32-bit operation instruction (DSUB or DSUBP)
When specifying word devices, a 16-bit word device on the low-order side is specified first, and then a word device
with the subsequent device number is automatically set for the high-order 16 bits.
To prevent number overlap, it is recommended to always specify an even number, for example.
2. When specifying the same device in the source and destination

The same device number can be specified for both the source and the destination.
In this case, note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle if a continuous operation type instruction
(SUB or DSUB) is used.
X001
FNC 21 D 0 K 25 D 0 (D 0) − 25→(D 0)
SUB
Program example
1. Difference between the SUB instruction and the DEC instruction used by a program for
subtracting "1"
When SUB[P] is executed, "1" is subtracted from the contents of D0 every time X001 turns from OFF to ON.
SUB[P] instruction is similar to DECP instruction described later except the contents shown in the table below:
[D] SUB [P] instruction [D] DEC [P] instruction
Flag (zero, borrow or carry) Operates Does not operate
16-bit S −(+1)= D ←−2←−1←0←−32768 −32,768→+32,767→+32,766

Operation result
operation +32767→0→+1→+2→ ⎯
S −(−1)= D
32-bit S −(+1)= D ←−2←−1←0←−2,147,483,648 −2,147,483,648→+2,147,483,647→+2,147,483,646

operation +2,147,483,647→0→+1→+2→ ⎯
S −(−1)= D
S1  S2  D
X001
FNC 21 D 0 K 1 D 0 (D 0) − 1→(D 0)
SUBP
X001
FNC 25 D 0 (D 0) − 1→(D 0)
DECP
274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication
1
10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication
Introduction
Outline
This instruction executes multiplication by two values to obtain the result (A x B = C). 2
→ For the floating point multiplication instruction EMUL (FNC122), refer to Section 18.10.
Overview
D MUL P Continuous Continuous
7 steps MUL
MULP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
13 steps DMUL
DMULP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
3
Operation Operation
List
Instruction
2. Set data
S1 Data for multiplication or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
4
S2 Data for multiplication or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
in Detail
Devices
D Head word device number storing the multiplication result 32- or 64-bit binary
Oper-
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Type
S1        1 2    
S2        1 2    
D       1 2 3  6
Programming
Before
3: Available only in 16-bit operations (Not available in 32-bit operations)

1. 16-bit operation (MUL and MULP)
Instruction
Basic
The contents of S1 are multiplied by S2 in binary format, and the multiplication result is transferred to 32-bit
[ D +1, D1 ].
Command BIN BIN BIN
input FNC 22
MUL
S1  S2  D ( S1  ) × ( S2  ) → ( D  +1, D  )
16 bits 16 bits 32 bits
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data is multiplied
algebraically.
5 × (−8) = −40
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
275
• When a digit (K1 to K8) is specified for [ D +1, D ]

A digit can be specified ranging from K1 to K8.
For example, when K2 is specified, only the low-order 8 bits can be obtained out of the product (32 bits).
S1  S2  D
Command
input FNC 22 K53 K15 K2Y000
MUL
S1  K53(H0035)
×
S2  K15(H000F)
K795(H031B)
Y027 Y026 Y025 … Y013 Y012 Y011 Y010 Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004 Y003 Y002 Y001 Y000
D 0 0 0 … 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
Not output Operation result is output to K2Y000.
2. 32-bit operation (DMUL and DMULP)

The contents of [ S1 +1, S1 ] are multiplied by [ S2 +1, S2 ] in binary format, and the multiplication result is
transferred to 64-bit [ D +3, D +2, D +1, D ] (four word devices).
Command
input FNC 22 S1  S2  D
DMUL
BIN BIN BIN

[ S1  +1, S1  ] × [ S2  +1, S2  ] → [ D  +3, D  +2, D  +1, D ]
32 bits 32 bits 64 bits
• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data is multiplied
algebraically.
5500 × (−8540) = −46,970,000
format.
• When a digit (K1 to K8) is specified for [ D +3, D +2, D +1, D ]
The result is obtained only for low-order 32 bits, and is not obtained for high-order 32 bits.
Transfer the data to word devices once, then execute the operation.
S1 S2 D
Command
input FNC 22 (D51,D50) (D103,D102,D101,D100)
D50 K150 D100 K100 × K150 → K15000
DMUL
FNC 12 D100 is output to Y017 to Y000

D100 K8Y000 D101 is output to Y037 to Y020
DMOV
FNC 12 D102 is output to Y057 to Y040

D102 K8Y040 D103 is output to Y077 to Y060
DMOV
Related devices
1. Relationship between flag operation and numeric value
ON: When the operation result is 0.
M8304 Zero
OFF: When the operation result is a number other than 0.
276
1
Cautions
Introduction
1. Devices specified in D
• In a 32-bit operation (by DMUL or DMULP), Z cannot be specified in D .
2. When monitoring the operation result in a programming tool

Even if word devices are used, the operation result (64 bits) cannot be monitored at one time.
2
Overview
In such a case, floating point operation is recommended.
→ For the floating point operation, refer to Chapter 18.
Program examples
1. 16-bit operation 3
List
Instruction
S1  S2  D
X000
FNC 22 D 0 D 2 D 4 (D 0) × (D 2) → (D 5,D 4)
MUL 8 9 72
2. 32-bit operation 4
S1  S2  D
in Detail
Devices
X001
FNC 22 (D 1,D 0) × (D 3,D 2) → (D 7,D 6,D 5,D 4)
D 0 D 2 D 4 1756 327 574,212
DMUL
Function Changes According to Versions

5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
The function of the FNC 22 instruction varies depending on the PLC version shown in the table below.
Compatible Versions
Item Function Summary
FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC
Ver. 1.00 Ver. 1.00 Ver. 1.40 Ver. 2.30 Ver. 2.30 Turns M8304 ON when the operation result of MUL instruc-
Zero Flag
or later or later or later or later or later tion is 0.
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
277
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division
10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division
Outline
This instruction executes division by two values to obtain the result (A ÷ B = C ... ).
→ For the floating point division instruction EDIV (FNC123), refer to Section 18.11.
D DIV P 7 steps DIV
Continuous
13 steps DDIV
Continuous
Operation Operation
DIVP Pulse (Single) DDIVP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Data for division or word device number storing data (dividend) 16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Data for division or word device number storing data (divisor) 16- or 32-bit binary
D Head word device number storing the division result (quotient and remainder) 32- or 64-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S1        1 2    
S2        1 2    
D       1 2 3 
1:This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

2:This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
3: Available only in 16-bit operations (Not available in 32-bit operations)

1. 16-bit operation (DIV and DIVP)
S1 indicates the dividend, S2 indicates the divisor, the quotient is transferred to D , and the remainder is
transferred to D +1.
Command
input Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder
FNC 23 S1  S2  D
DIV BIN BIN BIN BIN
( S1  ) ÷ ( S2  ) → ( D  ) ... ( D  +1)
16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits
• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data is divided algebraically.
36 ÷ (−5) = −7 (quotient) ... 1 (remainder)
• Two devices in total starting from D are occupied to store the operation result (quotient and remainder). Make
sure that these two devices are not used for another control.
• When a constant (K) is specified as S1 or S2 , it is automatically converted into binary format.
278
1
2. 32-bit operation (DDIV and DDIVP)
Introduction
[ S1 +1, S1 ] indicates the dividend, [ S2 +1, S2 ] indicates the divisor, the quotient is transferred to
[ D +1, D ]), and the remainder is transferred to [ D +3, D +2].
Command
input FNC 23
DDIV
S1 S2 D
2
Overview
Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder
BIN BIN BIN BIN
[ S1 +1, S1 ] ÷ [ S2 +1, S2 ] → [ D +1, D ] ... [ D +3, D +2]
32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits
• Four devices in total starting from D are occupied to store the operation result (quotient and remainder). Make 3
sure that these four devices are not used for another control.
List
Instruction
• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data is divided algebraically.
5500 ÷ (−540) = −10 (quotient) ... 100 (remainder)
format.
4
Related devices
in Detail
Devices
ON : When the operation result is 0.
M8304 Zero
OFF : When the operation result is a number other than 0.
ON : Carry flag operates when the operation result is over 32,767 (16-bit operation) or
M8306 Carry
2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation).
OFF : When the operation result is less than 32,767 (16-bit operation) or 2,147,483,647
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
(32-bit operation).
Cautions
1. Operation result
• The most significant bit of the quotient and remainder indicates the sign (positive: 0, negative: 1) respectively. 6
Programming
Before
• The quotient is negative when either the dividend or divisor is negative.
The remainder is negative when the dividend is negative.
2. Device specified as D
• The remainder is not obtained when a bit device is specified with digit specification.
• In a 32-bit operation (by DDIV or DDIVP), Z cannot be specified as D . 7
Instruction
Basic
Error
• When the divisor S2 is "0", an operation error is caused and the instruction is not executed.
• A operation error results when the operation result is over 32,767 (16-bit operation) or 2,147,483,647 (32-bit
operation). (Turns the carry flag ON.) 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
279
Program examples
1. 16-bit operation
S1  S2  D
X000 Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder
FNC 23 D 0 D 2 D 4 (D 0) ÷ (D 2) → (D 4) ... (D 5)
DIV 100 33 3 1
2. 32-bit operation
S1  S2  D
X001 Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder
FNC 23 D 0 D 2 D 4 (D 1,D 0) ÷ (D 3,D 2) → (D 5,D 4) ... (D 7,D 6)
DDIV 100,000 3333 30 10

Compatible Versions
Turns M8304 ON when the operation result of DIV
Zero Flag
instruction is 0.
Turns M8306 ON when the operation result of DIV
Ver. 1.00 Ver. 1.00 Ver. 1.40 Ver. 2.30 Ver. 2.30 instruction overflows.
or later or later or later or later or later 16-bit operation: Only when the maximum negative value
Carry Flag
(-32,768) is divided by -1.
32-bit operation: Only when the maximum negative value
(-2,147,483,648) is divided by -1.
280
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment
1
10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment
Introduction
Outline
This instruction increments the data of a specified device by "1". 2
Overview
D INC P 3 steps INC
Continuous
5 steps DINC
Continuous
Operation Operation
INCP Pulse (Single)
Operation
DINCP Pulse (Single)
Operation 3
List
Instruction
2. Set data
D Word device number storing data to be incremented by "1" 16- or 32-bit binary
4
in Detail
Devices
Oper-
Type
D       1 2    5
Constant
Device &
Specified the

1. 16-bit operation (INC and INCP) 6
The contents of D are incremented by "1", and the increment result is transferred to D .
Programming
Before
Command
input FNC 24 D D +1→ D
INCP
2. 32-bit operation (DINC and DINCP)

7
Instruction
Basic
The contents of [ D +1, D ] are incremented by "1", and the increment result is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 24 D [ D +1, D ] + 1 → [ D + 1, D ]
DINCP
8
Cautions
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
1. Note that data is incremented in every operation cycle in a continuous operation type
instruction.
2. Flag operations
1) 16-bit operation 9
When "+32767" is incremented by "1", the result is "−32768". Flags (zero, carry and borrow) are not activated at
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
this time.
2) 32-bit operation
When "+2,147,483,647" is incremented by "1", the result is "−2,147,483,648". Flags (zero, carry and borrow) are
not activated at this time.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
281
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment
Program example
X010
FNC 12 K 0 Z 0 → (Z) Z is cleared by the reset input X010.
MOVP
M 1
The current values of counters C0 to C9

FNC 18 C 0Z K4Y000 (C 0Z) → (K4Y000) are converted into BCD format, and
BCDP BIN BCD output to K4Y000.
X011
FNC 24 Every time X011 is set to ON, the current
Z (Z) + 1 → (Z) values of C0, C1 ... C9 are output one at
INCP
a time.
FNC 10 When Z is "10",
K 10 Z M 0 M1 turns ON.
CMPP
282
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.6 FNC 25 – DEC / Decrement
1
10.6 FNC 25 – DEC / Decrement
Introduction
Outline
This instruction decrements the data of a specified device by "1". 2
Overview
D DEC P 3 steps DEC
Continuous
5 steps DDEC
Continuous
Operation Operation
DECP Pulse (Single)
Operation
DDECP Pulse (Single)
Operation 3
List
Instruction
2. Set data
D Word device number storing data to be decremented by "1" 16- or 32-bit binary
4
in Detail
Devices
Oper-
Type
D       1 2    5
Constant
Device &
Specified the

1. 16-bit operation (DEC and DECP) 6
The contents of D are decremented by "1", and the decremented result is transferred to D .
Programming
Before
Command
input FNC 25 D D −1→ D
DECP
2. 32-bit operation (DDEC and DDECP)

7
Instruction
Basic
The contents of [ D +1, D ] are decremented by "1", and the decremented result is transferred to [ D +1,
D ].
Command
input FNC 25 D [ D  +1, D  ] − 1 → [ D  + 1, D  ]
DDECP
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
Cautions
1. Flag operations
1) 16-bit operation
When "−32768" is decremented by "1", the result is "+32767". Flags (zero, carry and borrow) are not activated at
this time.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
2) 32-bit operation
When "−2,147,483,648" is decremented by "1", the result is "+2,147,483,647". Flags (zero, carry and borrow) are
not activated at this time.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
283
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND
10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND
Outline
This instruction executes the logical product (AND) operation of two numeric values.
W FNC 26 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D AND P 7 steps WAND
Continuous
13 steps DAND
Continuous
Operation Operation
WANDP Pulse (Single) DANDP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Data used for logical product or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Data used for logical product or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
D Word device number storing the logical product result 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S1        1 2     
S2        1 2     
D       1 2   


1. 16-bit operation (WAND and WANDP)
The logical product (AND) operation is executed to the contents of S1 and S2 in units of bit, and the result is
transferred to D .
Command
input FNC 26 S1  S2  D S1  ∧ S2  → D 
WAND
• While the command input is OFF, the data of the transfer destination D does not change.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer sources S1 and S2 do not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified in the transfer sources S1 and S2 , it is automatically converted into binary
format.
• The logical product operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∧ 1 = 1, 0 ∧ 1 = 0, 1 ∧ 0 = 0,
0 ∧ 0 = 0).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D
S1 S2
WAND (FNC 26) instruction
0 0 0
Logical operation 1 0 0
(unit: bit) 0 1 0
1 1 1
284
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND
1
2. 32-bit operation (DAND and DANDP)
Introduction
The logical product (AND) operation is executed to the contents of [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ] in units of
bit, and the result is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 26
DAND
S1  S2  D S1  +1, S1  ∧ S2  +1, S2  → D  +1, D 
2
Overview
• While the command input is OFF, the data of the transfer destination [ D +1, D ] does not change.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer source [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 ] do not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified in the transfer source [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically
converted into binary format.
• The logical product operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∧ 1 = 1, 0 ∧ 1 = 0, 1 ∧ 0 = 0,
3
0 ∧ 0 = 0).
List
Instruction
1: ON, 0: OFF
D +1, D
S1 +1, S1 S2 +1, S2
DAND (FNC 26) instruction
0 0 0 4
in Detail
Devices
(unit: bit) 0 1 0
1 1 1
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
285
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR
10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR
Outline
This instruction executes the logical sum (OR) operation of two numeric values.
D OR P 7 steps WOR
Continuous
13 steps DOR
Continuous
Operation Operation
WORP Pulse (Single) DORP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Data used for logical sum or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Data used for logical sum or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
D Word device number storing the logical sum result 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S1        1 2     
S2        1 2     
D       1 2   


1. 16-bit operation (WOR and WORP)
The logical sum (OR) operation is executed to the contents of S1 and S2 in units of bit, and the result is
transferred to D .
Command
input FNC 27 S1 S2 D S1 ∨ S2 → D
WOR
format.
• The logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∨ 1 = 1, 0 ∨ 1 = 1,
0 ∨ 0 = 0, 1 ∨ 0 = 1).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D
S1 S2
WOR (FNC 27) instruction
0 0 0
(unit: bit) 0 1 1
1 1 1
286
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR
1
2. 32-bit operation (DOR and DORP)
Introduction
The logical sum (OR) operation is executed to the contents of [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ] in units of bit,
and the result is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 27
DOR
S1  S2  D S1  +1, S1  ∨ S2  +1, S2  → D  +1, D  2
Overview
• The logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∨ 1 = 1, 0 ∨ 1 = 1,
3
List
Instruction
0 ∨ 0 = 0, 1 ∨ 0 = 1).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D +1, D
S1 +1, S1 S2 +1, S2
DOR (FNC 27) instruction
0 0 0 4
1 0 1
in Detail
Devices
Logical operation
(unit: bit) 0 1 1
1 1 1
Constant
Device &
Specified the
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
287
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR
10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR
Outline
This instruction executes the exclusive logical sum (XOR) operation of two numeric values.
D XOR P 7 steps WXOR
Continuous
13 steps DXOR
Continuous
Operation Operation
WXORP Pulse (Single) DXORP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Data used for exclusive logical sum or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Data used for exclusive logical sum or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
D Word device number storing the exclusive logical sum result 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S1        1 2     
S2        1 2     
D       1 2   


1. 16-bit operation (WXOR and WXORP)
The exclusive logical sum (XOR) operation is executed to the contents of S1 and S2 in units of bit, and the
result is transferred to D .
Command
input FNC 28 S1  S2  D S1  ∀ S2  → D
WXOR
format.
• The logical exclusive sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∀ 1 = 0, 0 ∀ 0 = 0,
1 ∀ 0 = 1, 0 ∀ 1 = 1).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D
S1 S2
WXOR (FNC 28) instruction
0 0 0
(unit: bit) 0 1 1
1 1 0
288
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR
1
2. 32-bit operation (DXOR and DXORP)
Introduction
The exclusive logical sum (XOR) operation is executed to the contents of [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ] in
units of bit, and the result is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 28
DXOR
S1  S2  D S1  +1, S1  ∀ S2  +1, S2  → D  +1, D 
2
Overview
• The exclusive logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∀ 1 = 0, 0 ∀ 0 = 0,
3
List
Instruction
1 ∀ 0 = 1, 0 ∀ 1 = 1).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D +1, D
S1 +1, S1 S2 +1, S2
DXOR (FNC 28) instruction
0 0 0 4
1 0 1
in Detail
Devices
Logical operation
(unit: bit) 0 1 1
1 1 0
Program example
By combining WXOR and CML (FNC 14) instructions, the exclusive logical sum not (XORNOT) operation can be
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
executed.
X000
FNC 28 D 10 D 12 D 14
WXOR
FNC 14
CML
D 14 D 14
6
Programming
Before
7
Instruction
Basic
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
289
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation
10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation
Outline
This instruction obtains the complement of a numeric value (by inverting each bit and adding "1").
This instruction can be used to negate the sign of a numeric value.
→ For the Floating point negation ENEG (FNC128), refer to Section 18.16.
D NEG P 3 steps NEG
Continuous
5 steps DNEG
Continuous
Operation Operation
NEGP Pulse (Single) DNEGP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
Word device number which stores data for obtaining complement and will store the
operation result (The operation result will be stored in the same word device number.)
Oper-
Type
D           

1. 16-bit operation (NEG and NEGP)
Each bit of D is inverted (0 → 1, 1 → 0), "1" is added, and then the result is stored in the original device.
Command
input FNC 29 D ( D  )+1 → D 
NEGP
2. 32-bit operation (DNEG and DNEGP)

Each bit of [ D +1, D ] is inverted (0 → 1, 1 → 0), "1" is added, and then the result is stored in the original
device.
Command
input FNC 29 D ( D  + 1, D  ) +1 = ( D  + 1, D  )
DNEGP
Caution
Note that the complement is obtained in every operation cycle in a continuous operation type instruction.
290
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation
1
Program examples
Introduction
The program examples below are provided to obtain the absolute value of a negative binary value.
1. Obtaining the absolute value of a negative value using NEG instruction

M8000
In BON (ON bit check) instruction, M0 turns ON
RUN monitor
FNC 44
BON
D 10 M 0 K 15 when the bit 15 (b15 among b0 to b15) of D10 is "1". 2
Overview
M 0
FNC 29 D10 → D10 NEGP instruction is executed for D10 only when M0
D 10 turns ON.
NEGP
2. Obtaining the absolute value by SUB (subtraction) instruction 3

Even if NEG instruction is not used, D30 always stores the absolute value of the difference.
List
Instruction
X000
FNC 10 D 10 D 20 M 10 (D 10) > (D 20) (D10) = (D 20) (D 10) < (D 20)
CMP M 10 = ON M 11 = ON M 12 = ON
M 10
FNC 21
SUB
D 10 D 20 D 30 In the case of "D10 ≥ D20",
D10 − D20 → D30. 4
in Detail
Devices
M 11
M 12
FNC 21 D 20 D 10 D 30 In the case of "D10 < D20",
SUB D20 − D10 → D30.
5
Constant
Device &
Specified the
Negative value expression and absolute value (reference)
In PLCs, a negative value is expressed in 2’s complement.
When the most significant bit is "1", it is a negative value, and its absolute value can be obtained by NEG
instruction.
(D 10) = 2 6
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Programming
Before
(D 10) = 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
(D 10) = 0 7
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Instruction
Basic
(D 10) = −1 (D 10) + 1 = 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
(D 10) = −2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
(D 10) + 1 = 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09
......
......
(D 10) = −32767 (D 10) + 1 = 32767 9

Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(D 10) = −32768 (D 10) + 1 = −32768

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The absolute value can be obtained up to 32767.

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29
291
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
11. Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39

FNC 30 to FNC 39 provide instructions for rotating and shifting bit data and word data in specified directions.
30 ROR ROR D n Rotation Right Section 11.1
31 ROL ROL D n Rotation Left Section 11.2
32 RCR RCR D n Rotation Right with Carry Section 11.3
33 RCL RCL D n Rotation Left with Carry Section 11.4
34 SFTR SFTR S D n1 n2 Bit Shift Right Section 11.5
35 SFTL SFTL S D n1 n2 Bit Shift Left Section 11.6
36 WSFR WSFR S D n1 n2 Word Shift Right Section 11.7
37 WSFL WSFL S D n1 n2 Word Shift Left Section 11.8
38 SFWR SFWR S D n Shift write [FIFO/FILO control] Section 11.9
SFRD S D n Section
39 SFRD Shift read [FIFO control]
11.10
292
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right
11
11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information rightward by the specified number of bits without the carry flag.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D ROR P 5 steps ROR
Continuous
9 steps DROR
Continuous
Operation Operation
RORP Pulse (Single) DRORP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
13
2. Set data
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D Word device number storing data to be rotated rightward 16- or 32-bit binary
Number of bits to be rotated
n 16- or 32-bit binary
[n ≤ 16 (16-bit instruction), n ≤ 32 (32-bit instruction)]*1
14
*1. Do not set a negative value to the number of bits to be rotated.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
and
Type
Unit
Index
Pointer
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D 1 1 1    2 3   
n  2  
1: In 16-bit operations, K4Y, K4M and K4S are valid.

In 32-bit operations, K8Y, K8M and K8S are valid.
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89

1. 16-bit operation (ROR and RORP)
"n" bits out of 16 bits of D are rotated rightward.
17
Command
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
input FNC 30 D n
RORP
• The final bit is stored in the carry flag (M8022).
• In a device with digit specification, K4 (16-bit instruction) is valid.
"n" bits (in the case of K4) 18
High order Low order
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
b15b14b13b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Carry flag

Before
execution 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M8022
After the "n−1" bits
instruction
is executed
once b0 to b3 (n−1) are moved. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
Rightward The status of the bit "n−1" is

"n" bits copied.
rotation
b15b14b13b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
After
execution 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Before shift Before shift
b15 to b4
Carry flag
M8022 20
b3 to b0
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
The contents of
b3 are stored.
293
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right
2. 32-bit operation (DROR and DRORP)

"n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D +1, D ] are rotated rightward.
Command
input FNC 30 D n
DRORP

"n" bits (in the case of K4)

Before b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Carry flag
execution 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M8022
After the The status of

instruction is the bit "n−1" is b0 to b3 (n−1)
executed once copied. are moved.
"n" bits The status of the bit "n−1" is

Rightward copied.
rotation
b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
After
execution 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Carry flag
Before shift Before shift M8022
b3 to b0 b31 to b4
The contents of
b3 are stored.
Related device
→ For the carry flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the lowest position is "1".
Cautions
• In the case of continuous operation type instructions (ROR and DROR)
Note that shift and rotation are executed in every scan time (operation cycle).
• When a device with digit specification is specified as D
Only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid (examples: K4Y010 or K8M0).
• Note that the 32-bit value [n+1, n] is valid when D or R is specified as "n" in a 32-bit instruction.
In the case of "DROR D100 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
294
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left
11
11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information leftward by the specified number of bits without the carry flag.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D ROL P 5 steps ROL
Continuous
9 steps DROL
Continuous
Operation Operation
ROLP Pulse (Single) DROLP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
13
2. Set data
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D Word device number storing data to be rotated leftward 16- or 32-bit binary
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R
Unit
U\G V Z Modify K
stant
H
Number ter String
E "" P
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D 1 1 1    2 3   
n  2  
1: In 16-bit operations, K4Y, K4M and K4S are valid.

In 32-bit operations, K8Y, K8M and K8S are valid.
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (ROL and ROLP)
"n" bits out of 16 bits of D are rotated leftward.
17
Command
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
input FNC 31 D n
ROLP

"n" bits (in the case of K4) 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Before Carry flag b15b14b13b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
execution M8022 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
After the
instruction
is executed
once
b12 (16−n) to
b15 are moved. 19
The status of
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
the bit "16−n" is

copied. Leftward "n" bits
rotation
After
execution 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Carry flag
M8022 Before shift
b11 to b0
Before shift
b15 to b12
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
The contents of
b12 are stored.
295
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left
2. 32-bit operation (DROL and DROLP)

"n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D +1, D ] are rotated leftward.
Command
input FNC 31 D n
DROLP

Carry High order Low order

flag b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Before
execution M8022 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
"16−n" bits After the
instruction is
executed once b28 (32−n) to b31 are moved.
The status of
the bit "32−n"
is copied. Leftward "n" bits
rotation
After b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
execution 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Carry
flag Before shift Before shift
M8022 b27 to b0 b31 to b28
The contents of
b28 are stored.
Related device
M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the highest position is "1".
Cautions
• In the case of continuous operation type instructions (ROL and DROL)
Note that shift and rotation are executed in every scan time (operation cycle).
In the case of "DROL D100 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
296
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry
11
11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information rightward by the specified number of bits together with the carry
flag. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D RCR P 5 steps RCR
Continuous
9 steps DRCR
Continuous
Operation Operation
RCRP Pulse (Single)
Operation
DRCRP Pulse (Single)
Operation 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
D Word device number storing data to be rotated rightward 16- or 32-bit binary
n
16- or 32-bit binary 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 15
Type
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D           
n    
: In 16-bit operations, K4Y, K4M and K4S are valid.

In 32-bit operations, K8Y, K8M and K8S are valid. 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (RCR and RCRP)
"n" bits out of 16 bits of D and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated rightward.
Command
input
17
FNC 32 D n
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
RCRP
High order Low order Carry flag
Before b15b14b13b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 M8022
execution 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 When M8022 is ON 18
After the b3 (n−1)
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
instruction to b0 are
is b3 (n−1)
b2 (n−2) to b0 and the head bit executed moved.
indicating the carry flag ON/OFF once The status of the final bit b3
status are moved.
(bit "n−1") is stored.
Rightward
"n" bits rotation
High order Low order 19
After
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
execution 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Before shift b3

Carry flag
Before Before shift b15 to b4 M8022
shift
b2 to b0
Before shift
Carry flag M8022
The carry flag is intervened in the rotation loop. If M8022 has been set to ON or OFF before the rotation instruction, the 20
carry flag is transferred to the destination.
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
297
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry
2. 32-bit operation (DRCR and DRCRP)

"n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D +1, D ] and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated rightward.
Command
input FNC 32 D n
DRCRP "n" bits (in the case of K4)

Before
execution 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
After the
b2 (n−2) to b0 and the head bit instruction is
indicating the carry flag ON/OFF Carry flag M8022
executed once
status are moved. When M8022 is OFF
"n" bits Rightward

rotation The status
High order Low order of the final
After b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 bit b3 (bit
"n−1") is
execution 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 stored.
Before Before shift b31 to b4
shift Carry flag M8022
b2 to b0 Before shift
Carry flag M8022 1
Before shift
b3
Related device
M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the lowest position is "1".
Cautions
• In the case of continuous operation type instructions (RCR and DRCR)
Note that shift and rotation are executed every scan time (operation cycle).
In the case of "DRCR D100 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
298
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry
11
11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information leftward by the specified number of bits together with the carry
flag. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D RCL P 5 steps RCL
Continuous
9 steps DRCL
Continuous
Operation Operation
RCLP Pulse (Single)
Operation
DRCLP Pulse (Single)
Operation 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
D Word device number storing data to be rotated leftward 16- or 32-bit binary
n
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 15
Type
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D           
n    
: In 16-bit operations, K4Y, K4M and K4S are valid.

In 32-bit operations, K8Y, K8M and K8S are valid. 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (RCL and RCLP)
"n" bits out of 16 bits of D and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated leftward.
Command
input FNC 33
17
D n
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
RCLP

Before b15 to b12
execution (16−n) are
moved.
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
18
1
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Carry flag After the

When M8022 instruction is
is ON executed once b15 to b13 (16−n+1) and the head
bit indicating the carry flag ON/OFF
Leftward "n" bits
rotation status are moved.
19
After
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
execution The status 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

of the final
bit b12 (bit
"16−n") is Before shift b11 to b0 Before shift b15 to b13
stored. Before shift
0 Carry flag M8022 Carry flag M8022
Before shift b12
20
The carry flag is intervened in the rotation loop. If M8022 has been set to ON or OFF before the rotation instruction, the
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
carry flag is transferred to the destination.
299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry
2. 32-bit operation (DRCL and DRCLP)

"n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D +1, D ] and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated leftward.
Command
input FNC 33 D n
DRCLP

Before b31 to b28
execution (b32−n) 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
are
moved.
1
b31 to b29 (32−n+1) and the head
Carry flag After the
instruction is bit indicating the carry flag ON/OFF
When M8022
is ON executed once status are moved.
Leftward
rotation
The status b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
After of the final
execution bit b28 (bit 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
"32−n") is
stored.
Before shift b27 to b0 Before shift
b31 to b29
0 Carry flag M8022
Before shift
Before shift b28 Carry flag M8022
Related device
M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the highest position is "1".
Cautions
• In the case of continuous operation type instructions (RCL and DRCL)
Note that shift and rotation are executed every scan time (operation cycle).
In the case of "DRCL D100 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
300
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right
11
11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts bit devices of the specified bit length rightward by the specified number of bits.
After shift, the bit device S is transferred by "n2" bits from the most significant bit. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
SFTR P 9 steps SFTR
Continuous

Operation
SFTRP Pulse (Single)
Operation
 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Head bit device number to be stored to the shift data after rightward shift Bit
D Head bit device number to be shifted rightward Bit 14

Bit length of the shift data n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 1024
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
n1 16-bit binary
n2 Number of bits to be shifted rightward n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 1024*1 16-bit binary
*1. Do not set a negative value to the number of bits to be shifted rightward.
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
S     1 
D     16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
n1  
n2  2  
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
301
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right

1. 16-bit operation (SFTR and SFTRP)
For "n1" bits (shift register length) starting from D , "n2" bits are shifted rightward ([1] and [2] shown below).
After shift, "n2" bits from S are transferred to "n2" bits from D +n1-n2 ([3] shown below).
Command
input
FNC 34 S D n1 n2
SFTRP
n2 (in the case of "n2=3")
S  +2 S  +1 S
Before
execution n1 (in the case of "n1=9")
D  +8 D  +7 D  +6 D  +5 D  +4 D  +3 D  +2 D  +1 D
[2] [1]
"n2" bits are Overflow (data to
[3] Copy shifted rightward be deleted)
(n2=3).
After D  +8 D  +7 D  +6 D  +5 D  +4 D  +3 D  +2 D  +1 D
execution
S  +2 to S  before shift (n2=3) D  +8 to D  +3 before shift (n2=3)
Caution
Note that "n2" bits are shifted every time the command input turns from OFF to ON in the SFTRP instruction, but that
"n2" bits are shifted in each scan time (operation cycle) in SFTR instruction.
Error
If the transfer source S is equivalent to the shifted device D in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, an operation error occurs
(error code: K6710).
An operation error does not occur in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
302
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left
11
11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts bit devices of the specified bit length leftward by the specified number of bits.
After shift, the bit device S is transferred by "n2" bits from the least significant bit. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
SFTL P 9 steps SFTL
Continuous

Operation
SFTLP Pulse (Single)
Operation

13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Head bit device number to be stored to the shift data after leftward shift Bit
D
n1
Head bit device number to be shifted leftward
Bit length of the shift data n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 1024
Bit
16-bit binary
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
n2 Number of bits to be shifted leftward n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 1024*1 16-bit binary
*1. Do not set a negative value to the number of bits to be shifted leftward.
Oper-
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S     1 
D
n1
   
 
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
n2  2  

17
1. 16-bit operation (SFTL and SFTLP)
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
For "n1" bits (shift register length) starting from D , "n2" bits are shifted leftward ([1] and [2] shown below).
After shift, "n2" bits from S are transferred to "n2" bits from D ([3] shown below).
Command
input FNC 35 S D n1 n2
SFTLP
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
S  +2 S  +1 S
Before
19
D  +8 D  +7 D  +6 D  +5 D  +4 D  +3 D  +2 D  +1 D
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
[1] [2]
Overflow (data to "n2" bits are
be deleted) shifted rightward [3] Copy
(n2=3).
After D  +8 D  +7 D  +6 D  +5 D  +4 D  +3 D  +2 D  +1 D
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
execution
D  to D  +5 before shift (n2=3) S  +2 to S  before shift (n2=3)
303
Caution
Note that "n2" bits are shifted every time the command input turns from OFF to ON in the SFTLP instruction, but that
"n2" bits are shifted in each operation cycle in the SFTL instruction.
Error
If the transfer source S is equivalent to the shifted device D in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, an operation error occurs
(error code: K6710).
An operation error does not occur in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
Program example (conditional stepping of 1-bit data)

By setting X000 to X007 to ON in turn, Y000 to Y007 are activated in turn.
If the order is wrong, activation is disabled.
X000 M8046
M0 Head data
Data
input
*1
M8046 X000
FNC 35 M0 S0 K8 K1
SFTL
S0 X001
Bit 1 of M0 is regarded as the head input, and 8-bit shift register is
constructed by S0 to S7.
S1 X002
*1 By using a state relay (S), the state under operation can be monitored
by the dynamic monitoring function of the state relay.
S7 X000
M8000
FNC 12 K2S0 K2Y000 (S7 to S0) → (Y007 to Y000)
MOV
M8047 STL monitor is valid.
END
X000
X001
Even if X000 is set to ON, Y000 is not activated.
X007
Y000
Y001
Y007
304
11
11.6.1 Replacement of SFT instruction in F1 and F2 Series
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
SFT instruction in F1/F2 PLCs corresponds to SFTL (FNC 35) instruction in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs as
shown below:
1. F1/F2 PLCs
M100: Input data 12
M101 to M117 (octal number): 15-step shift register
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
X000 data input 0000 LD X000

OUT 0001 OUT M100
X001 shift input

M100 0002
0003
LD
SFT
X001
M100
13
0004 LD X002
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
SFT 0005 RST M100
X002 reset input M117
RST
2. FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
X000 data input M101 to M115 (decimal number): 15-step shift register
M100 Fixed value
X001 shift input
FNC 35 M100 M101 K 15 K 1
SFTLP
Input data Head Number Shift by
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
device of steps 1 bit
X002 reset input
FNC 40 Shift registers M101 to M115 are reset
M101 M115 at one time.
ZRST
Head
device
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
305
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right
11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right
Outline
This instruction shifts word devices with "n1" data length rightward by "n2" words.
WSFR P 9 steps WSFR
Continuous

Operation
WSFRP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number to be stored to the shift data after rightward shift 16-bit binary
D Head word device number storing data to be shifted rightward 16-bit binary
n1 Word data length of the shift data n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 512 16-bit binary
n2 *1 16-bit binary
Number of words to be shifted rightward n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 512
*1. Do not set a negative value to the number of words to be shifted rightward.
Oper-
Type
S        1 2 
D       1 2 
n1  
n2  1  


1. 16-bit operation (WSFR and WSFRP)
For "n1" word devices starting from D , "n2" words are shifted rightward ([1] and [2] shown below).
After shift, "n2" words starting from S are shifted to "n2" words starting from [ D +n1-n2] ([3] shown below).
Command
WSFRP
S  +2 S  +1 S
Before
D  +8 D  +7 D  +6 D  +5 D  +4 D  +3 D  +2 D  +1 D
[2] [1]
"n2" bits are Overflow (data to
[3] Copy shifted rightward be deleted)
(n2=3).
After D  +8 D  +7 D  +6 D  +5 D  +4 D  +3 D  +2 D  +1 D
execution
S  +2 to S  before shift (n2=3) D  +8 to D  +3 before shift (n2=3)
306
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right
11
Caution
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Note that "n2" words are shifted when the drive input turns ON in the WSFRP instruction, but that "n2" words are
shifted in each operation cycle in the WSFR instruction.
Error
If the transfer source S is equivalent to the shifted device D , an operation error occurs (error code: K6710). 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Program example
1. Shifting devices with digit specification
S D n1 n2
X000
FNC 36
13
K1X000 K1Y000 K 4 K 2
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
WSFRP
Specify the same digit for devices with digit specification.
Make sure that the number of digits is

equivalent (Kn).
14
X007 X006 X005 X004 X003 X002 X001 X000
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
[3]
Y017 Y016 Y015 Y014 Y013 Y012 Y011 Y010 Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004 Y003 Y002 Y001 Y000
[2] [1] 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
307
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left
11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left
Outline
This instruction shifts the word data information leftward by the specified number of words.
WSFL P 9 steps WSFL
Continuous

Operation
WSFLP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number to be stored to the shift data after leftward shift 16-bit binary
D Head word device number storing data to be shifted leftward 16-bit binary
n1 Word data length of the shift data n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 512 16-bit binary
n2 Number of words to be shifted leftward n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 512*1 16-bit binary
*1. Do not set a negative value to the number of words to be shifted leftward.
Oper-
Type
S        1 2 
D       1 2 
n1  
n2  1  


1. 16-bit operation (WSFL and WSFLP)
For "n1" word devices starting from D , "n2" words are shifted leftward ([1] and [2] shown below).
After shift, "n2" words starting from S are shifted to "n2" words starting from D ([3] shown below).
Command
WSFLP
308
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
S  +2 S  +1 S
Before
execution n1 (in the case of "n1=9") 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D  +8 D  +7 D  +6 D  +5 D  +4 D  +3 D  +2 D  +1 D
[1] [2]
Overflow (data to "n2" bits are
be deleted) shifted leftward [3] Copy
(n2=3). 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
After D  +8 D  +7 D  +6 D  +5 D  +4 D  +3 D  +2 D  +1 D
execution
D  +5 to D  before shift (n2=3) S  +2 to S  before shift (n2=3)
Caution
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Note that "n2" words are shifted every time the drive input turns from OFF to ON in the WSFLP instruction, but that
"n2" words are shifted in each operation cycle in the WSFL instruction.
Error
If the transfer source S is equivalent to the shifted device D , an operation error occurs (error code: K6710). 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Program example
1. Shifting devices with digit specification
X000
S D n1 n2 16
FNC 37
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
K1X000 K1Y000 K 4 K 2
WSFLP
Specify the same digit for devices with digit specification.
Make sure that the number of digits is

equivalent (Kn).
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
X007 X006 X005 X004 X003 X002 X001 X000
[3]
Y017 Y016 Y015 Y014 Y013 Y012 Y011 Y010 Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004 Y003 Y002 Y001Y000
[1]
[2]
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
309
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control]
11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control]
Outline
This instruction writes data for first-in first-out (FIFO) and last-in first-out (LIFO) control.
SFWR P 7 steps SFWR
Continuous

Operation
SFWRP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Word device number storing data to be put in first 16-bit binary

Head word device number storing data (The first word device works as the pointer, and
D 16-bit binary
data is stored in D +1 and later)
n Number of store points plus "1"*1 2 n 512 16-bit binary
*1. "+1" is required for the pointer.
Oper-
Type
S        1 2     
D       1 2 
n  

310
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. 16-bit operation (SFWR and SFWRP)
The contents of S are written to "n-1" devices from D +1, and "1" is added to the number of data stored in
D .
For example, when D = 0, the contents of S are written to D +1. When D = 1, the contents of S 12
are written to D +2.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Command
input
FNC 38 S D n
SFWRP
S
Before
n
13
execution
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D+n ... D+10 D+9 D+8 D+7 D+6 D+5 D+4 D+3 D+2 D+1 D 
Executed at the 1st time Pointer

( D  = 0)
S D  +1 → D 
(K0) (K1) 14
D+n ... D+10 D+9 D+8 D+7 D+6 D+5 D+4 D+3 D+2 S  D
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
After Pointer
execution
Executed at the 2nd time
S D  +1 → D 
(K1) (K2)
D+n ... D+10 D+9 D+8 D+7 D+6 D+5 D+4 D+3 S  S D
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Pointer
1) When X000 turns from OFF to ON, the contents of S are stored to D +1. So the contents of D +1
become equivalent to S .
2) When the contents of S are changed and then the command input is set from OFF to ON again, the new
contents of S are stored to D +2. So the contents of D +2 become equivalent to S . (When the 16
continuous operation type SFWR instruction is used, the contents are stored in each operation cycle. Use the
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
pulse operation type SFWRP instruction in programming.)
3) Data is stored from the right end in the same way, and the number of stored data is specified by the contents of
the pointer .
Related device 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
M8022 Carry When the contents of the pointer D exceeds "n-1", no operation is executed (so data is not
written) and the carry flag M8022 turns ON.
Related instructions 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
SFRD (FNC 39) Shift read (for FIFO control)
POP (FNC212) Shift last data read (for FILO control)
Caution 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
1. In the case of continuous operation type (SFWR) instruction

Note that data is stored (overwritten) in each scan time (operation cycle).
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
311
Program example
1. Example of first-in first-out control
→ For a program example of FILO, refer to Section 27.3.
In the example below, the shift write (SFWR) and shift read (SFRD) instructions are used.
1) Contents of operation
- In this circuit example, a product number to be taken out now is output according to "first-in first-out" rule while
products which were put into a warehouse with their product numbers registered are taken out of the warehouse.
- The product number is hexadecimal, and up to 4 digits. Up to 99 products can be stored in the warehouse.
2) Program
Button for request to put a
product into warehouse
X020
FNC 12 The product number is input from X000 to X017, and
K4X000 D256 transferred to D256.
MOVP
Pointer
FNC 38 D256 D257 K100 D257: Data register for storing the product number
SFWRP D258 to D356 (99 points)
Button for request to take a
product out of warehouse
X021 The product number of a product put into first is output
FNC 39 D257 D357 K100 to D357 in response to the request to put a product out
SFRDP of the warehouse.
M8000
FNC 12 The product number to be taken out is output to Y000
D357 K4Y000 to Y017 in a four-digit hexadecimal number.
RUN MOV
monitor
Digital switch 0000 to FFFF Seven-segment display unit
Request to Request to
put a take a
1 2 3 4 product into product out
warehouse of warehouse
X017 to X000 X20 X21 Y017 to Y000

Command Command
MOV instruction
+1 −1
6 D257 5 4 Shift
1 0320 D258 0320 D357 0320 0232
2 0232 D259 0232 0462
3 0462 MOV instruction D260 0462 0539
4 0539 D261 0539 0142
5 0142 D262 0142 0
6 1234 D256 1234 D263 0 0
7 0 0
0
99 0 D355 0 0
100 0 SFWRP instruction D356 0 SFRDP instruction 0
is executed. is executed.
312
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control]
11
11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control]
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction reads data for first-in first-out control.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
SFRD P 7 steps SFRD
Continuous

Operation
SFRDP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
13
2. Set data
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Head word device number storing data
S 16-bit binary
(The first word device works as the pointer, and data is stored in S +1 and later.)
D Word device number storing data taken out first 2 ≤ n ≤ 512 16-bit binary
14
n Number of store points plus "1"*1 2 ≤ n ≤ 512 16-bit binary
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
*1. "+1" is required for the pointer.
Oper-
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S       1 2 
D       1 2   
n  
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89

1. 16-bit operation (SFRD and SFRDP)
S1 +1 written in turn by SFWR (FNC 38) instruction is transferred (read) to D , and "n-1" words from S1 +1
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
are shifted rightward by 1 word. "1" is subtracted from the number of data, stored in S .
Command
input FNC 39 S D n
SFRDP
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
313
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control]
D
n
Before
execution
S+n ... S+10 S+9 S+8 S+7 S+6 S+5 S+4 S+3 S+2 S+1 S  S =n
Pointer
Executed at the 1st time
D S+1 S −1 → S 
S+n S+n ... S+10 S+9 S+8 S+7 S+6 S+5 S+4 S+3 S+2 S
After Word data is shifted. Pointer

execution Executed at the 2nd time
D S+2 S −1 → S 
S+n S+n S+n ... S+10 S+9 S+8 S+7 S+6 S+5 S+4 S+3 S 
Word data is shifted. Pointer
1) When the command input turns ON, the contents of S +1 are transferred (read) to D .
2) Accompanied by this transfer, the contents of the pointer S decrease, and the data on the left side are shifted
rightward by 1 word. (When the continuous operation type SFRD instruction is used, the contents are stored in
turn in each operation cycle. Use the pulse operation type SFRDP instruction in programming.)
Related device
→ For the zero flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
M8020 Zero Data is always read from S +1. When the contents of the pointer S become "0", the zero flag
M8020 turns ON.
Related instructions
SFWR (FNC 38) Shift write (for FIFO/FILO control)
POP (FNC212) Shift last data read (for FILO control)
Caution
1. Data after reading was executed
The contents of S +n do not change by reading.
2. In the case of continuous operation type (SFRD) instruction

Data is read in turn in each scan time (operation cycle), but the contents of S +n do not change.
3. When pointer S is 0
Data is not processed, and the contents of D do not change.
Program example
Refer to the program example provided for SFWR (FNC 38) instruction.
→ For the program example, refer to Section 11.9.
314
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
12. Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
FNC 40 to FNC 49 provide instructions for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions FNC 12
10 to FNC 39 and for executing special processing.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
40 ZRST ZRST D1 D2 Zone Reset Section 12.1

13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
41 DECO DECO S D n Decode Section 12.2
42 ENCO ENCO S D n Encode Section 12.3
43 SUM SUM S D Sum of Active Bits Section 12.4 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
44 BON BON S D n Check Specified Bit Status Section 12.5
45 MEAN MEAN S D n Mean Section 12.6

15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
46 ANS ANS S m D Timed Annunciator Set Section 12.7
47 ANR ANR Annunciator Reset Section 12.8
48 SQR SQR S D Square Root Section 12.9

16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Section
49 FLT FLT S D Conversion to Floating Point
12.10
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
315
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset
12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset
Outline
This instruction resets devices located in a zone between two specified devices at one time.
Use this instruction for restarting operation from the beginning after pause or after resetting control data.
ZRST P Continuous 
5 steps ZRST Operation
ZRSTP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
D1 Head bit or word device number to be reset at one time D1 ≤ D2 16-bit binary
Specify same type of
D2 Last bit or word device number to be reset at one time devices. 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
D1       1 2 
D2       1 2 


1. 16-bit operation (ZRST and ZRSTP)
Same type of devices from D1 to D2 are reset at one time.
When D1 and D2 are bit devices

1) "OFF (reset)" is written to the entire range from D1 to D2 at one time.
Command
input FNC 40 D1 D2 Devices D1 through D2 are reset at one time.
ZRST
Before
D2  … D1  +9 D1  +8 D1  +7 D1  +6 D1  +5 D1  +4 D1  +3 D1  +2 D1  +1 D1 
execution
Executed
OFF
After
execution
OFF … OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
316
11
When D1 and D2 are word devices
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
"K0" is written to the entire range from D1 to D2 at one time.
Command
input FNC 40 D1 D2 Devices D1 through D2 are reset at one time.
ZRST
12
Before
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D2  … D1  +9 D1  +8 D1  +7 D1  +6 D1  +5 D1  +4 D1  +3 D1  +2 D1  +1 D1 
execution
Executed
After
K0
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
execution
K0 … K0 K0 K0 K0 K0 K0 K0 K0 K0 K0
Related instructions 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1. RST instruction
As an independent reset instruction for devices, RST instruction can be used for bit devices (Y, M and S) and word
devices (T, C, D and R).
X001
RST M0 M0 is reset.
15
The current value of T0 is
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
RST T0 reset.
RST D0 D0 is reset.
16
2. FMOV (FNC 16) instruction
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
FMOV (FNC 16) instruction is provided to write a constant (example: K0) at one time. By using this instruction, "0" can
be written to word devices (KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D and R) at one time.
X002
FNC 16 K0 D0 K100 K0 is written to D0 to D99 at one time.
FMOV
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Cautions
1. Caution on specifying devices
Specify same type of devices in D1 and D2 . The device number of D1 should be smaller than or equal to the
device number of D2 .
If the device number of D1 is larger than the device number of D2 , only one device specified in D1 is reset.
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
2. When specifying high-speed counters (C235 to C255)

The ZRST instruction is handled as the 16-bit type, but 32-bit counters can be specified in D1 and D2 .
However, it is not possible to specify a 16-bit counter in D1 and specify a 32-bit counter in D2 ; D1 and D2
should be the same type.
19
Example
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
Command Command
input FNC 40 input FNC 40
C180 C230 C180 C199
ZRST ZRST
16-bit 32-bit FNC 40
counter counter C200 C230
ZRST 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
317
3. Caution for simultaneous instances of the ZRST instruction and the PLS instruction
The ZRST instruction resets the last stage for the PLS instruction and PLF instruction of the applicable device. In
addition, the reset state of T and C is also reset.
Circuit program
M0
FNC 40 M0 M100
ZRST
X000
PLS M0
Timing chart
X000
one operation one operation
cycle cycle
M0
ZRST instruction PLS instruction

execution execution
PLS instruction ZRST instruction

execution execution
Please program in the following way to turn on M0 only once.

Circuit program
M0
FNC 40 M0 M100
ZRST
X000
M0
318
11
4. Caution on simultaneous instances of the ZRST instruction and a counter
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The ZRST instruction resets also the last stage and reset state of T and C coils.
Accordingly, if the drive contact of X000 is ON in the following program, the counter executes counting after the ZRST
instruction is executed.
Circuit program
M0 FNC 40
C0 C100
12
ZRST
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
RST M0
X000
K10 13
C0
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Timing chart
one operation one operation one operation one operation
cycle cycle cycle cycle
ON ON
14
X000 OFF OFF
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
ON
M0 OFF
3 4
2
Current
value 0
1
Counting is
15
of C0
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
executed when
X000 is ON.
OUT instruction ZRST instruction OUT instruction OUT instruction
execution execution execution execution
Program in the following way to disable counting after execution of the ZRST instruction:
Circuit program 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
M0 FNC 40
C0 C100
ZRST
RST M0
17
K10
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
X000
C0
Program example
18
1. When using devices in the latch area as non-latch type devices
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
In the program shown below, when the power to the PLC is turned ON or when the PLC mode is changed to RUN, the
specified ranges of bit devices and word devices are reset at one time.
D1 D2
M8002
Initial pulse
FNC 40
ZRST
M500 M599 M500 to M599 are reset at one time. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
D1 D2
FNC 40 C235 to C255 are reset at one time.
C235 C255 ("0" is written to them, and their contacts are reset.)
ZRST
D1 D2
FNC 40 S500 S599 S500 to S599 are reset at one time.
20
ZRST
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
319
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode
12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode
Outline
This instruction converts numeric data into ON bit.
A bit number which is set to ON by this instruction indicates a numeric value.
DECO P Continuous 
7 steps DECO Operation
DECOP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Data to be decoded or word device number storing data 16-bit binary
D Bit or word device number storing the decoding result 16-bit binary
Number of bits of device storing the decoding result (n = 1 to 8)
n 16-bit binary
(No processing is executed in the case of "n = 0".)
Oper-
Type
S        1 2     
D       1 2 
n  


1. 16-bit operation (DECO and DECOP)
One bit among D to D +2n − 1 is set to ON according to the
S value.
1) When D is a bit device (1 ≤ n ≤ 8)
The numeric value (expressed in 2n, 1 ≤ n ≤ 8) of a device specified by S is decoded to D .
-When all bits of S are "0", the bit device D turns ON.
-When "n" is "8", 28 points (= 256 bits which is the maximum value) are occupied.
Command
DECO
(1 ≤ n ≤ 8)
When it is Y, M or S
Ignored 8 bits When "n" is "8"
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 When S  is D0
← 2n
128
64
32
16
8
1
4
2
K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 ←n
Turns ON when all
bits of S  are OFF.
Up to … Up to … Up to … Up to
M255 M127 M63 M31
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 When D  is M0
M255 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
Up to 256 bits (The number of occupied bits varies depending on the specified "n" value.)
320
11
2) When D is a word device (1 ≤ n ≤ 4)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The numeric value (expressed in 2n on the low-order side) of S is decoded to D .
-When all bits of S are "0", b0 of the word device D turns ON.
-In the case of "n ≤ 3", all of high-order bits of D become "0" (turn OFF).
Command
When it is T,C,D,R,U\G 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
input FNC 41 S D n
DECO
(1 n 4)
Ignored 4 bits
When "n" is "4"
13
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 When S is D0
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2n
1
4
2
K4 K3 K2 K1 n
Turns ON when all bits
of S are OFF.
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 When D is D2
Up to 16 bits
15
Caution
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
• While the command input is OFF, the instruction is not executed. The activated decode output is held in the
previous ON/OFF status.
• When "n" is "0", the instruction executes no processing.
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
321
Program example
1. When setting bit devices to ON according to the value of a data register
The value of D0 (whose current value is "14" in this example) is decoded to M0 to M15.
S D n
M8000
FNC 41 D 0 M 0 K 4
DECO
4 bits
Ignored (D0 b0 to b3)
(D0 b4 to b15)
b15 … 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b0
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 S  When the value of b0 to
← 2n b3 of D0 is "14"
128
64
32
16
8
1
4
2
K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 ← n = K4
Turns ON when D0 is K0.

Up to Up to Up to Up to
M255 … M127 … M63 … M31
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 When D  is M0
M255 M M M M M M M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
15 14 13 12 11 10
Up to 256 bits (The number of occupied bits varies depending on the specified "n" value.)
• When the value of b0 to b3 of D0 is "14 (= 0 + 2 + 4 + 8)", M14 (which is the 15th from M0) becomes "1" (turn ON).
• When the value of D0 is "0", M0 becomes "1" (turns ON).
• When "n" is set to "K4", either one point among M0 to M15 turns ON according to the value of D0 (0 to 15).
• By changing "n" from K1 to K8, D0 can correspond to numeric values from 0 to 255.
However, because the device range of D is occupied for decoding accordingly, such device range should not
be used for another control.
2. Turning ON the bit out of word devices according to the contents of bit devices
The value expressed by X000 to X002 is decoded to D0 (X000 and X001 are ON, and X002 is OFF in this example.).
S D n
M8000
FNC 41 X000 D0 K3 X2 X1 X0
DECO
0 1 1 S
← 2n
1
4
2
K3 K2 K1 ←n
Turns ON when all
bits of S  are OFF.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 D  =D0
All of these bits are

"0" (OFF).
• When the values expressed by X000 to X002 are "3 (= 1 + 2 + 0)", b3 (which is the 4th from b0) becomes 1 (turns
ON).
• When all of X000 to X002 are "0" (OFF), b0 becomes "1" (turns ON).
322
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode
11
12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction obtains positions in which bits are ON in data.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
ENCO P Continuous 
7 steps ENCO Operation
ENCOP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
13
2. Set data
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
S Data to be encoded or word device number storing data 16-bit binary
D Word device number storing the encoding result 16-bit binary
n
Number of bits of device storing the encoding result (n = 1 to 8)
16-bit binary
14
(When "n" is "0", no processing is executed.)
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
Unit
U\G V Z Modify K
stant
H
Number ter String
E "" P
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S        1 2   
D    1 2   
n  

16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (ENCO and ENCOP)
The 2n bit of S is encoded, and the result value is stored to D .
This instruction converts data into binary data according to a bit position in the ON status. 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1) When S is a bit device (1 ≤ n ≤ 8)
ON bit positions among "2n" bits (1 ≤ n ≤ 8) from S are encoded to D .
-When "n" is "8", 28 = 256 bits (which is the maximum value) are occupied.
-The encoding result of D is "0" (OFF) from the most significant bit to the low-order bit "n".
Command
When it is Y, M or S
18
input
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
FNC 42 S D n
ENCO
(1 ≤ n ≤ 8)
M17
0
M16
0
M15
0
M14
0
M13
1
M12
0
M11
0
M10
0
When "n" is 3 19
S  = M10
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
7 6 5 4 (3) 2 1 0
b15 D10 4 (2) (1)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 D 20
b0
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
All of them are "0".
323
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode
2) When S is a word device (1 ≤ n ≤ 4)

ON bit positions among "2n" bits (1 ≤ n ≤ 4) from a device specified in S are encoded to D .
-The encoding result of D is "0" (OFF) from the most significant bit to the low-order bit "n".
When it is T, C, D, R, U \G, V or Z
Command
input
FNC 42 S D n
ENCO
(1 ≤ n ≤ 4)
D0
2n = 8 (When "n" is 3)
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 S
6 5 4 (3) 2 1 0
7
Ignored
b15 4 (2) (1)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 D
b0
All of these bits are 0.
D2
Cautions
1. When two or more bits are ON in the S data
The low-order side is ignored, and only the ON position on the high-order side is encoded.
2. While the command input is OFF

The instruction is not executed. Activated encode outputs are latched in the previous ON/OFF status.
324
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits
11
12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction counts the number of "1" (ON) bits in the data of a specified device.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D SUM P 5 steps SUM
Continuous
9 steps DSUM
Continuous
Operation Operation
SUMP Pulse (Single) DSUMP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Word device number storing the source data 16- or 32-bit binary
D Word device number storing the result data 16- or 32-bit binary
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
S        1 2      15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D       1 2   

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (SUM and SUMP)
The number of bits in the ON status in S is counted, and stored to D .
• When all bits are OFF in S , the zero flag M8020 turns ON.
Command
input FNC 43 S D
Number of bits in the
ON status in S  →
17
SUM D
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Word data
16-bit data
K21847
Before S 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
execution 9 ← 8 ← 7 ← 6 ← 5 ← 4 ← 3 2 1 (Number of "1" (ON)) 18
K0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

K21847
After S 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
execution
K9
32 16 8 4 2 1 19
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
325
2. 32-bit operation (DSUM and DSUMP)

The number of bits in the ON status in [ S +1, S ] is counted, and stored to D .
• The number of bits in the ON status are stored in D , and K0 is stored in D +1.
• When all bits are OFF in [ S +1, S ], the zero flag M8020 turns ON.
Command
input FNC 43 Number of bits in → D  +1, D 
DSUM
S D the ON status in [ S  +1, S  ]
Word data K0 is written

32-bit data
b31 … b17 b16b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
K21847
Before S 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
execution (Number of "1" (ON)) 9 ← 8 ← 7 ← 6 ← 5 ← 4 ← 3 2 1
K0 K0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b31 … b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

K21847
After S 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
execution
32 16 8 4 2 1
K0 K9
D 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 01 00 00 01 0 1 0 0 1
3. Operation result D according to the S value (in 16-bit operation)
S M8020
Bit device Word device D (zero
flag)
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Decimal Hexadecimal
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 ON
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0001 1 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0002 1 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 0003 2 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 0004 1 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 0005 2 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 0006 2 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 0007 3 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 0008 1 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 0009 2 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 000A 2 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 11 000B 3 OFF
OFF
…
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 −5 FFFB 15 OFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 −4 FFFC 14 OFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 −3 FFFD 15 OFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 −2 FFFE 15 OFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 −1 FFFF 16 OFF
326
11
Caution
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
While the command input is OFF, the instruction is not executed.
The output of the number of bits in the ON status is latched in the previous status.
Program example
When X000 is ON, the number of bits in the ON status in D0 is counted, and stored to D2. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
S D
X000
FNC 43 D 0 D 2 The number of "1" in D0 is stored to D2.
SUM
D 0 = K0 D 2 = K0 13
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
M8020=ON Zero flag
D 0 = K21847 D 2 = K9
32 16 8 4 2 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
M8020=OFF Zero flag
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
327
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status
12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status
Outline
This instruction checks whether a specified bit position in a specified device is ON or OFF.
D BON P 7 steps BON
Continuous
13 steps DBON
Continuous
Operation Operation
BONP Pulse (Single) DBONP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Word device number storing the source data 16- or 32-bit binary
D Bit device number to be driven Bit

Bit position to be checked
[n: 0 to 15 (16-bit instruction), 0 to 31 (32-bit instruction)]
Oper-
Type
S        2 3     
D    1 
n  2  

1. 16-bit operation (BON and BONP)
The status (ON or OFF) of the bit "n" in S is output to D .
[When the bit "n" is ON, D is set to ON. When the bit "n" is OFF, D is set to OFF.]
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source S , it is automatically converted into binary format.
Command
input FNC 44 S D n S D  = ON/OFF status of bit "n"
BON
(n = K0 to K15)
S

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
K15 K14 K13 K12 K11 K10 K9 K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0 ←n D  bit device
n=5
0 (OFF)
n=8
1 (ON)
328
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status
11
2. 32-bit operation (DBON and DBONP)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The status (ON or OFF) of the bit "n" in [ S +1, S ] is output to D .
[When the bit "n" is ON, D is set to ON. When the bit "n" is OFF, D is set to OFF.]
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source [ S +1, S ], it is automatically converted into binary
format.
Command 12
input FNC 44
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
S D n [ S  +1, S ] D  = ON/OFF status of bit "n"
DBON
(n = K0 to K31)
S  +1, S 
13
b31 b30 b29 … b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
1 0 1 … 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
K31 K30 K29 … K17 K16 K15 K14 K13 K12 K11 K10 K9 K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0 ←n
D  bit device
n=5
n = 29
0
1
(OFF)
(ON)
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Caution
In the case of "DBON D0 M0 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
Program example 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
When the bit 9 (n = 9) in D10 is "1" (ON), M0 is set to "1" (ON).
S D n
X000
FNC 44 D 10 M 0 K9
BON
16
D 10
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M 0 = ON
b15 b8 b7 b0
n=9
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M 0 = OFF
b15 b0
17
n=9
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
329
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean
12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean
Outline
This instruction obtains the mean value of data.
D MEAN P 7 steps MEAN
Continuous
13 steps DMEAN
Continuous
Operation Operation
MEANP Pulse (Single) DMEANP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Head word device number storing data to be averaged 16- or 32-bit binary
D Word device number storing the mean value result 16- or 32-bit binary
n Number of data to be averaged (n = 1 to 64) 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S        1 2 
D       1 2   
n  1  


1. 16-bit operation (MEAN and MEANP)
The mean value of "n" 16-bit data from S is stored to D .
• The sum is obtained as algebraic sum, and divided by "n".
• The remainder is ignored.
Command
input S + S  + 1 + ……… + S  + n − 1
FNC 45 S D D
n
MEAN n
2. 32-bit operation (DMEAN and DMEANP)

The mean value of "n" 32-bit data from [ S +1, S ] is stored to [ D +1, D ].
• The sum is obtained as algebraic sum, and divided by "n".
• The remainder is ignored.
Command
DMEAN
[ S  + 1, S  ] + [ S  + 3, S  + 2] + ……… + [{ S  + n × 2 − 1}, { S  + n × 2 − 2}]

[ D  + 1, D  ]
n
330
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean
11
Caution
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
• When a device number is exceeded, "n" is handled as a smaller value in the possible range.
In the case of "DMEAN D0 D100 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
Error 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
When "n" is any value outside the range from "1" to "64", an operation error (M8067) is caused.
Program example
The data of D0, D1 and D2 are summed, divided by "3", and then stored to D10.
X000
S D n 13
FNC 45 (D 0) + (D 1) + (D 2)
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D 0 D 10 K 3 (D 10)
MEAN 3
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
331
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set
12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set
Outline
This instruction sets a state relay as an annunciator (S900 to S999).
ANS 7 steps ANS Continuous


Operation
2. Set data
S Timer number for evaluation time 16-bit binary

m Evaluation time data [m = 1 to 32767 (unit: 100 ms)] 16-bit binary
D Annunciator device to be set Bit
Oper-
Type
S 1 
m    
D 2 
1 : T0 to T199
2 : S900 to S999

1. 16-bit operation
When the command input remains ON for equivalent to or longer than the evaluation time [m × 100 ms, timer S ],
D is set.
When the command input remains ON for less than the evaluation time [m × 100 ms] and then turns OFF, the current
value of the timer for evaluation S is reset and D is not set.
When the command input turns OFF, the timer for evaluation is reset.
Command
input Command input
FNC 46 S m D
ANS D
Less than Equivalent to or

evaluation time longer than
(m × 100 ms) evaluation time
(m × 100 ms)
Related devices
M8049 Enable annunciator When M8049 is set to ON, M8048 and D8049 are valid.
M8048 Annunciator ON When M8049 is ON and one of the state relays S900 to S999 is ON, M8048 turns ON.
Smallest state relay
D8049 Among S900 to S999, the smallest state relay number in the ON status is stored.
number in ON status
332
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set
11
Program example
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Displaying a fault number using an annunciator
When the program for external fault diagnosis shown below is created and the content of D8049 (smallest state relay
number in the ON status) is monitored, the smallest state relay number in the ON status from S900 to S999 is
displayed.
If two or more faults are present at the same time, the next smallest fault number is displayed after the fault of the 12
smallest fault number is cleared.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M8000
0 M8049 When M8049 turns ON, monitoring becomes valid.
RUN monitor
3
Y005 X000
FNC 46 T 0 K 10 S900
If the forward end detection input X000 does not turn
ON within 1 second after the forward movement output
13
ANS Y005 is driven, S900 turns ON.
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Forward Forward
movement end
X001 X002 If both the upper limit input X001 and the lower limit
12 FNC 46 T 1 K 20 S901 input X002 are OFF for 2 seconds or more due to a dog
ANS error, S901 turns ON.
Upper Lower
limit
X003
limit
X004 The switch X004 is set to ON in one operation cycle of
14
FNC 46 the machine. If the switch X004 is not set to ON while
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
21 T 2 K100 S902
ANS the continuous operation mode input X003 is ON in the
Continuous Cycle machine whose tact time is less than 10 seconds, S902
turns ON.
X005
30 Y005
Forward
movement 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
M8048
32 When one among S900 to S999 turns ON, M8048 turns
Y006 ON and the fault display output Y006 turns ON.
Annunciator ON Fault display
X007 A state relay which was set to ON by the external fault

FNC 47
34
Reset
ANRP
diagnosis program is set to OFF by the reset button
X007. Every time X007 is set to ON, an operation state
16
relay in the ON status with the smallest device number
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
36 END is reset (set to OFF) in turn.
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
333
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.8 FNC 47 – ANR / Annunciator Reset
12.8 FNC 47 – ANR / Annunciator Reset
Outline
This instruction resets an annunciator (S900 to S999) in the ON status with the smallest number.
ANR P Continuous 
1 step ANR Operation
ANRP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
⎯ There is no set data. ⎯
Oper-
Type
⎯ There are no applicable devices.

1. 16-bit operation (ANR and ANRP)
When the command input turns ON, a state relay working as annunciator (S900 to S999) in the ON status is reset.
• If two or more state relays are ON, the state relay with the smallest number is reset.
When the command input is set to ON again, the state relay with the next smallest number is reset among state
relays working as annunciators (S900 to S999) in the ON status.
Command
input FNC 47
ANRP
Related devices
M8049 Enable annunciator When M8049 is set to ON, M8048 and D8049 are valid.
M8048 Annunciator ON When M8049 is ON and either one among the state relays S900 to S999 is ON, M8048 turns ON.
Minimum state relay
D8049 Among S900 to S999, the minimum number in the ON status is stored.
number in ON status
Caution
1. Execution in each operation cycle
• When ANR instruction is used, annunciators in the ON status are reset in turn in each operation cycle.
• When ANRP instruction is used, an annunciator in the ON status is reset only in one operation cycle (only once).
Program example
Refer to ANS (FNC 46) instruction.
→ For a program example, refer to Section 12.7.
334
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.9 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root
11
12.9 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction obtains the square root.
The ESQR (FNC127) instruction obtains the square root in floating point operation. 12
→ For ESQR (FNC127) instruction, refer to Section 18.15.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D SQR P 5 steps SQR
Continuous
9 steps DSQR
Continuous
SQRP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
DSQRP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Word device number storing data whose square root is obtained 16- or 32-bit binary
D Data register number storing the square root operation result 16- or 32-bit binary 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S : K0 to K32767 in 16-bit operation, K0 to K2,147,483,647 in 32-bit operation
Oper-
and
Type
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S      
D    
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (SQR and SQRP)
The square root of the data stored in S is calculated, and stored to D .
Command
input FNC 48 S D S → D
SQR
17
2. 32-bit operation (DSQR and DSQRP)
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
The square root of the data stored in [ S +1, S ] is calculated, and stored to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 48 S D S  + 1, S  → D  + 1, D 
DSQR
18
Caution
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
1. Operation result
1) The obtained square root is an integer because the decimal point is ignored.
When the calculated value is ignored, M8021 (borrow flag) turns ON.
2) When the calculated value is true "0", M8020 (zero flag) turns ON. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
Program example
The square root of D10 is stored to D12.
The value of D10 is "100".
S D
X000
FNC 48 D 10 D 12 D 10 → D 12
20
SQR
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
= 100 → 10
335
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point
12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point
Outline
This instruction converts a binary integer into a binary floating point (real number).
D FLT P 5 steps FLT
Continuous
9 steps DFLT
Continuous
Operation Operation
FLTP Pulse (Single) DFLTP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Data register number storing binary integer 16- or 32-bit binary
D Data register number storing binary floating point (real number) Real number (binary)
Oper-
Type
S  1 2 
D  1 2 


1. 16-bit operation (FLT and FLTP)
The binary integer data of S is converted into binary floating point (real number), and stored to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 49 S → ( D  + 1, D  )
S D
FLT Binary Binary floating point
integer (real number)
2. 32-bit operation (DFLT and DFLTP)

The binary integer data of [ S +1, S ] is converted into binary floating point (real number), and stored to
[ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 49 ( S  + 1, S  ) → ( D  +1, D  )
S D
DFLT Binary integer Binary floating point
(real number)
Related instruction
INT (FNC129) Inverse of the FLT instruction, converts binary floating point into binary integer.
Caution
1. It is not necessary to convert a constant (K or H) into a floating point value.
The value of a K or H specified in each instruction for binary floating point (real number) operation is automatically
converted into binary floating point (real number). It is not necessary to convert such a constant with the FLT
instruction.
(K and H cannot be specified in RAD, DEG, EXP and LOGE instructions.)
336
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point
11
Program example
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Arithmetic operations by binary floating point operations
The sequence program shown below is constructed as follows:
1) Calculation example
× K34.5
12
(D11, D10) Binary floating point
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
(D0) ÷ (X017 to X010) operation
16-bit binary 2-digit BCD (6)
(7) (D13, D12)

(1) (2) (5) (4) Scientific notation operation
(8)
for monitoring
13
(D21, D20) (D22) (D27, D26) (D15, D14)
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Binary floating BIN Binary floating 32-bit binary integer
point operation point operation
(3)
(D25, D24)
Binary floating
point operation 14
(D29, D28)
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Binary floating
point operation
2) Sequence program
M8000 (1)
FNC 49 D0 D20
(D0) → (D21, D20)
BIN Binary floating point operation
15
FLT
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
FNC 19 (X017 to X010) → (D22)
(2) K2X010 D22 BCD BIN
BIN
FNC 49 (D22) → (D25, D24)

(3) D22 D24 BIN Binary floating point operation
FLT
K345 ÷ K 10 → (D27, D26)
16
FNC123 K345 K10 D26
(4)
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
DEDIV Binary floating point operation
(D21, D20) ÷ (D25, D24) → (D29, D28)
FNC123 D20 D24 D28 Binary floating point Binary floating point
(5)
DEDIV division operation
FNC122 (D29, D28) × (D27, D26) → (D11, D10)
(6)
DEMUL
D28 D26 D10 Binary floating point multiplication 17
(D11, D10) → (D13, D12)
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
FNC118 D10 D12 Binary floating Scientific notation operation
(7)
DEBCD point operation for monitoring
(D11, D10) → (D15, D14)
FNC129 D10 D14 Binary floating 32-bit binary integer
(8)
DINT point operation
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
337
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
13. High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59

FNC 50 to FNC 59 provide interrupt processing type high-speed instructions that execute sequence control using the
latest I/O information and utilize the high-speed processing performance of the PLC.
50 REF REF D n Refresh Section 13.1
51 REFF REFF n Refresh and filter adjust Section 13.2
52 MTR MTR S D1 D2 n Input Matrix Section 13.3
53 HSCS HSCS S1 S2 D High-speed counter set Section 13.4
54 HSCR HSCR S1 S2 D High-speed counter reset Section 13.5
55 HSZ HSZ S1 S2 S D High-speed counter zone compare Section 13.6
56 SPD SPD S1 S2 D Speed Detection Section 13.7
57 PLSY PLSY S1 S2 D Pulse Y Output Section 13.8
58 PWM PWM S1 S2 D Pulse Width Modulation Section 13.9
Section
59 PLSR PLSR S1 S2 S3 D Acceleration/deceleration setup
13.10
338
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh
11
13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction immediately outputs the latest input (X) information or the current output (Y) operation result in the
middle of a sequence program. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
REF P REF Continuous 

5 steps Operation
REFP 
13
Pulse (Single)
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
D Head bit device (X or Y) number to be refreshed Bit

n Number of bit devices to be refreshed 16-bit binary 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Special Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Constant Pointer
Unit Number ter String
Type
D 1 2
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
n 3 3
1: X000, X010 or X020: Up to the final input number (whose least significant digit number is "0")
2: Y000, Y010 or Y020: Up to the final output number (whose least significant digit number is "0")
3: FX3S PLC: K8 (H8) or K16 (H10)
FX3G/FX3GC PLCs: K8 (H8) or K16 (H10): Up to K128 (H80) (which is a multiple of 8) 16
FX3U/FX3UC PLCs: K8 (H8) or K16 (H10): Up to K256 (H100) (which is a multiple of 8)
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
339

1. 16-bit operation (REF and REFP)
1) When refreshing outputs (Y)
"n" points are refreshed from the output specified in D . ("n" must be a multiple of 8.)
Command
input
FNC 50 D n
REF
Head Number
device of points
number
K8 (H8) or K16 (H10): Up to K256 (H100) (which is a multiple of 8)
Y000, Y010 or Y020: Up to the final output number
(whose least significant digit number is "0")
- When this instruction is executed, the output latch memory is refreshed to the output status in the specified
range.
Image memory output (Y)
REF instruction (executed)
END instruction
processing (output)
Output refresh ON
 REF instruction + END processing
 Only END processing ON ON
Improved response Improved response

delay time delay time
2) When refreshing inputs (X)

"n" points are refreshed from the input specified in D . ("n" must be a multiple of 8.)
Command
input
FNC 50 D n
REF
Head Number
device of points
number
K8 (H8) or K16 (H10): Up to K256 (H100) (which is a multiple of 8)
X000, X010 or X020: Up to the final input number
(whose least significant digit number is "0")
- If the input information is turned ON approximately 10 ms (response delay time of the input filter) before the
instruction is executed, the input image memory turns ON when the instruction is executed.
- In X000 to X017*1, the response delay time of the input filter can be changed.
*1. X000 to X007 in the FX3G/FX3GC.
→ For details, refer to "13.1.1 What should be understood before using the REF instruction".
340
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Does not turn ON.
Input terminal 5ms 20ms
Input signal (X) ON

10ms 10ms 10ms
12
Filter time
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
REF instruction (executed)
END instruction (input) processing
Input refresh ON
13
 REF instruction + END processing
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
 Only END processing ON
Improved response
delay time 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Cautions
1. Setting the number of refreshed points "n"
Set a multiple of 8 such as "K8 (H8), K16 (H10) … K256 (H100)". Any other numeric value causes an error.
2. Setting the head device number D 15

Make sure that the least significant digit number is "0" such as "X000, X010, X020 …"or " Y000, Y010, Y020 …"
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Program examples
1. When refreshing inputs
Only X010 to X017 (8 points in total) are refreshed.
16
D n
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
X000
FNC 50 X010 K 8
REF
2. When refreshing outputs

Y000 to Y007, Y010 to Y017 and Y020 to Y027 (24 points in total) are refreshed.
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D n
X001
FNC 50 Y000 K 24
REF
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
341
13.1.1 What should be understood before using the REF instruction
1. Changing the input filter

The input filter value is determined by the contents of D8020 (initial value: 10 ms).
Use the MOV instruction, etc. to adjust the value in D8020, which represents the input filter value.
Target range: X000 to X017 (In inputs X020 and later, the input filter value is fixed at 10 ms and cannot be
changed.)
(The target range is X000 to X007 in the FX3G/FX3GC.)
2. Output response time

After the REF instruction is executed, the output (Y) sets the output signal to ON after the response time shown below.
→ For details, refer to the respective PLC Hardware Edition manual.
Target range: Y000 to highest connected output number

1) Relay output type
The output contact is activated after the response time of the output relay.
- Y000 and higher: Approximately 10 ms
2) Transistor output type
a) FX3S PLC
- Y000 and Y001: 5 μs or less (load current = 10 mA or more, 5 to 24V DC)
- Y002 and higher: 0.2 ms or less (load current = 200 mA, 24V DC)
b) FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type)
c) FX3G PLC (40-point and 60-point type)
- Y000, Y001 and Y002: 5 μs or less (load current = 10 mA or more, 5 to 24V DC)
d) FX3GC PLC
e) FX3U PLC
f) FX3UC(D, DSS) PLCs
g) FX3UC -32MT-LT(-2) PLC
- Y000, Y001, Y002 and Y003: 5 μs or less (load current = 10 mA or more, 5 to 24V DC)
3) Triac output type
- Y000 and higher: 1 ms or less (OFF → ON), 10 ms or less (ON → OFF).
3. When using the REF instruction between FOR and NEXT instructions or between a pointer (with
a lower step number) and CJ instruction (with a higher step number)
Inputs and outputs can be refreshed even when the input information or immediate output is required in the middle of
a routine program during control.
4. When using the input interrupt (I) function

When executing interrupt processing accompanied by I/O operations, I/O refresh can be executed in the interrupt
routine to receive the latest input (X) information and give the immediate output (Y) of the operation result so that
dispersion caused by the operation time is improved.
342
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust
11
13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
The digital input filter time of the inputs X000 to X017 can be changed using this instruction or D8020.
Using this instruction, the status of inputs X000 to X017 can be refreshed at an arbitrary step in the program for the 12
specified input filter time, and then transferred to the image memory.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
REFF P REFF Continuous 

3 steps
REFFP
Operation
Pulse (Single)  13
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
n Digital input filter time [K0 to K60 (H0 to H3C) × 1 ms] 16-bit binary
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
15
n    
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
: K0 (H0) to K60 (H3C)

1. 16-bit operation (REFF and REFFP)
16 inputs from X000 to X017 in the image memory are refreshed at the digital input filter time [n × 1 ms].
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Command
input
FNC 51 n
REFF
K0 to K60 (Filter constant from 0 to 60 ms)
17
• When the input turns ON "n × 1 ms" before the instruction is executed, the image memory is set to ON. When the
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
input turns OFF "n × 1 ms" before the instruction is executed, the image memory is set to OFF.
• When the command input is ON, the REFF instruction is executed in each operation cycle.
• When the command input is OFF, the REFF instruction is not executed, and the input filter of X000 to X017 uses
the set value of D8020 (which is the value used during input processing).
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
343
Cautions
1. Setting the filter time "n"
Set "n" within the range from K0 (H0) to K60 (H3C) [0 to 60 ms].
2. Function of the input filter

A digital filter is built into the inputs X000 to X017. The filter time can be changed in 1 ms units within the range from 0
to 60 ms using applied instructions. When the filter time is set to "0", the input filter value is as follows.
Input number Input filter value when set to "0"
X000 to X005 5 μs*1
X006, X007 50 μs
*2
X010 to X017 200 μs*2
*1. When setting the input filter time to "5 μs", perform the following actions:
- Make sure that the wiring length is 5 m or less.
- Connect a bleeder resistor of 1.5 kΩ (1 W or more) to the input terminal, and make sure that the load
current in the open collector transistor output of the external equipment is 20 mA or more including the
input current of the main unit.
*2. The filter time is fixed to 10 ms for X010 to X017 in 16-point type FX3U PLCs and 16-point type FX3UC PLCs.
Program example
1. Relationship between the program and the filter time
n When X010 is ON
X010
FNC 51 The image memory of X000 to Input
K1 processing
REFF X017 is refreshed with an input
filter of 1 ms. Set value of D8020
X000 (Initial value: 10 ms)
Sequence
program
X001 REFF instruction
1 ms
M8000
FNC 51 The image memory of X000 to X017 is REFF instruction
K20
REFF refreshed with an input filter of 20 ms.
X000 20ms
END
The image memory is refreshed with Output

END processing
the input filter value set in D8020.
344
11
13.2.1 What should be understood before using REFF instruction
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Generally, a C-R filter of approximately 10 ms is provided for inputs in PLCs as countermeasures against chattering
and noise at the input contacts.
A digital filter is provided for the inputs X000 to X017 in FX3U/FX3UC PLC. The digital filter value can be changed
ranging from 0 to 60 ms using applied instructions.
12
1. How to change the digital filter (executing END instruction)*1
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
The input filter initial value (10 ms) for X000 to X017 is set in special data register D8020.
By changing this value using the MOV instruction, etc., the input filter value for X000 to X017 which is used during
execution of the END instruction can be changed.
REFF
instruction D8020 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
When the When the END
command is ON instruction is
executed
Input terminal
X000 to X017 Digital filter
Input terminal
Initial value: 10 ms
Input image 14
memory
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
X020 and C-R filter
later Fixed to 10 ms
*1. This function is supported only in DC input type.
2. Instruction in which the digital filter is automatically changed

Regardless of the change in the filter time executed by the REFF instruction, when the following functions and 15
instruction are executed, the input filter value is automatically changed (to 5 μs in X000 to X005 and 50 μs in X006 and
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X007).
However, if the digital filter is used in any other functions or instructions than the ones listed, the digital filter uses the
time set in D8020. As a result, the program will not run correctly if the ON or OFF duration of the corresponding input
signal is less than the input filter time.
• Input of interrupt pointer specified in the input interrupt function 16
• Input used in a high-speed counter
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
• Input used in the SPD (FNC 56) instruction
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
345
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix
13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix
Outline
This instruction reads matrix input as 8-point input × "n"-point output (transistor) in the time division method.
MTR Continuous
9 steps MTR Operation 
2. Set data
Input device (X) number of matrix signal input
S X000, X010, X020 … final input device number Bit
(Only "0" is allowed in the least significant digit of device numbers.)
Head device (Y) number of matrix signal output
D1 Y000, Y010, Y020 … final output device number Bit
Head bit device (Y, M or S) number of ON output destination
Y000, Y010, Y020 … final Y number, M000, M010, M020 … final M number or S000,
D2 Bit
S010, S020 … final S number
n Number of columns in matrix input (K2 to K8 or H2 to H8) 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S 
D1 
D2   
n  

1. 16-bit operation (MTR)
An input signal of 8 points × "n" columns is controlled in the time division method using 8 inputs S and "n"
transistor outputs D1 . Each column is read in turn, and then output to D2 .
ON Number
Command Input Output output of
input number number destination columns
(normally ON)
FNC 52 S D1 D2 n
MTR
• For each output, the I/O processing is executed immediately in turn in interrupt at every 20 ms under consideration
of the input filter response delay of 10 ms.
346
11
The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink input/sink output).
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
For wiring details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each PLC.
Diode Command
D2 +10
D2 +12
D2 +13
D2 +14
D2 +15
D2 +16
D2 +17
D2 +11
0.1A(50V) contact
2nd
column 1st column input is received.
12
D1 [1] [3] [5]
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D2 +1
D2 +2
D2 +3
D2 +4
D2 +5
D2 +6
D2 +7
1st 2nd column input is received.
D2
column
D1 +1 [2] [4] [6]
20ms
24V 0V S/S S S +1 S +2 S +3 S +4 S +5 S +6 S +7 M8029 (execution 13
Input (X) [sink] complete)
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
PLC Output (Y) [sink]
COM D1 D1 +1 D1 +2 D1 +3 D1 +4 D1 +5 D1 +6 D1 +7
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
"n" points
are
occupied.
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Related device
M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON after the first cycle operation.
Cautions 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1) Eight input points are occupied from the input device number specified in S .
2) "n" output points are occupied from the output device number specified in D1 .
When specifying the output in
output specified in D2 .
D2 , make sure that "n" output numbers specified in D1 does not overlap the
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
2. Limitation in the number of instructions
The MTR instruction can be used only once in a program.
3. Wiring
One diode of 0.1 A/50 V is required for each switch.
18
4. Output format
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Use the transistor output format.

Even if an operand device is changed by write during RUN while the MTR instruction is executed, the PLC operates
using the device before change.
The changed device is reflected after the command input is set to OFF once and set to ON again. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
347
Program example
n=Three outputs (Y020, Y021 and Y022) are set to ON in turn repeatedly.
Every time an output is set to ON, eight inputs in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd columns are received in turn repeatedly, and
stored to M30 to M37, M40 to M47 and M50 to M57 respectively.
In this program example, the FX3U series main unit (sink input/sink output) is used.
S D1 D2 n
M0
FNC 52 X020 Y020 M30 K3
MTR
Input Output ON Number
number number output of
destination columns
Diode M0
M 50
M 51
M 52
M 53
M 54
M 55
M 56
M 57
0.1A(50V)
1st column input is received.
3rd
column
Y020 [1] [4]
X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027
2nd column input is received.
Diode
0.1A(50V)
M 40
M 41
M 42
M 43
M 44
M 45
M 46
M 47
Y021 [2] [5]
2nd
column 3rd column input is received.
X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027 Y022 [3] [6]
Diode 20ms
0.1A(50V)
M 30
M 31
M 32
M 33
M 34
M 35
M 36
M 37
M8029 (execution
1st complete)
column
24V 0V S/S X020X021X022X023X024X025X026X027

Sink input
PLC Sink output
COM Y020Y021Y022Y023Y024Y025Y026Y027
348
11
13.3.1 Operation and cautions for the MTR instruction
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Command input
1) Setting the command input to normally Open
For the MTR instruction, set the command input to normally Open.
12
M{{
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
(normally Open)
FNC 52 X020 Y040 M0 K8
MTR
2. Input numbers used in the MTR instruction

1) Inputs available in MTR instruction 13
Use inputs X020 and later under normal conditions.
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2) When using the inputs X000 to X017*1
The receiving speed is higher. Because the output transistor recovery time is long and the input sensitivity is high,
however, erroneous input pulses may be counted.
To prevent erroneous input pulses, connect pull-up resistors (3.3 kΩ/0.5 W) to transistor outputs used in MTR
instruction. 14
For pull-up resistors, use the power supply shown in the table below.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Power supply used for pull-up resistors transistor output
AC power type PLC Service power supply
DC power type PLC Power supply for driving PLC
The figure below shows an example of the FX3U Series main unit (sink input/sink output).
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Matrix
circuit
Refer to the
24V S/S 0V X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 previous page.
FX3U-64MT/ES 16
Transistor output
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
COM5 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y027
3.3k /0.5W
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Pull-up resistor 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
*1. X000 to X007 in the FX3G/FX3GC.
3. ON/OFF duration of input signals

Because 64 input points (8 rows × 8 columns) are received in a cycle of 80 or 160 ms, the ON/OFF duration of each
input signal should be greater than or equal to the value shown below:
When inputs X000 to When inputs X020*3 or

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
X017*2 are used later are used
80 ms 80 ms 160 ms 160 ms
*2. X000 to X007 in the FX3G/FX3GC. 20

*3. X010 and later in the FX3G/FX3GC.
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
349
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set
13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set
Outline
This instruction compares a value counted by a high-speed counter with a specified value, and immediately sets an
external output (Y) if the two values are equivalent each other.
→ For the counter interrupt using HSCS instruction, refer to Section 36.6.
D HSCS Continuous
 13 steps DHSCS Operation
2. Set data
Data to be compared with the current data value of a high-speed counter or word device
S1 32-bit binary
number.
S2 Device number of a high-speed counter [C235 to C255] 32-bit binary

Bit device number to be set to ON when the compared two values are equivalent to each
D Bit
other
Oper-
Type
S1        2 3    
S2  
D    1  4
4: When using the counter interrupt function in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, specify an interrupt pointer.
→ For counter interrupt using HSCS instruction, refer to Section 36.6.

1. 32-bit operation (DHSCS)
When the current value of a high-speed counter (C235 to C255) specified in S2 becomes the comparison value
[ S1 +1, S1 ] (for example, when the current value changes from "199" to "200" or from "201" to "200" if the
comparison value is K200), the bit device D is set to ON regardless of the operation cycle. This instruction is
executed after the counting processing in the high-speed counter.
Command
input
S2  K2,147,483,647
Comparison Comparison Output
value source destination
Set to ON.
FNC 53 S1  S2  D S1  = S2  → D 
DHSCS
350
11
Operation
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When the current value of the high-speed counter C255 changes from "99" to "100" or from "101" to "100", Y010 is set
to ON (output refresh).
M8000
C255 K2,147,483,647
RUN monitor Comparison
value
Comparison
source
Output
destination
Set to ON.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 53 K100 C255 Y010 K100 = C255 → Y010
DHSCS
The following instructions can be combined with high-speed counters: 13
Instruction FNC No. Instruction name
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
DHSCS FNC 53 High-speed counter set
DHSCR FNC 54 High-speed counter reset
DHSZ FNC 55 High-speed counter zone compare
DHCMOV FNC189 High-speed counter move
DHSCT FNC280 High-speed counter compare with data table 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Cautions
1. Selection of the count comparison method
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLC
When the HSCS instruction is used in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, hardware counters (C235, C236, C237, C238, C239, 15
C240, C244 (OP), C245 (OP), C246, C248 (OP), C251 and C253) are automatically switched to software
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
counters, and the maximum frequency and total frequency of each counter are affected.
Refer to the counting operation described below, and select according to the contents of control whether to use
HSCS instruction or general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select DHSCS instruction
- When the output should be given when the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison value
regardless of the scan time of the PLC 16
b) Cases to select a general-purpose comparison instruction
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
- When the frequency is beyond the counting performance of software counters (and below the counting
performance of hardware counters)
- When counting is regarded as important, but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in operations
according to the counting result
- When one instruction is executed in 33 or more positions at the same time 17
M8000
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
FNC189
DHCMOV C251 D100 K0
FNC229
LDD<= K100 D100 SET Y010
18
FNC 50
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
REF Y010 K8
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
351
2) FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
When the HSCS instruction is used in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the total frequency of each counter is affected.
the HSCS instruction or a general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select the HSCS instruction
- When the output should be given if the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison value
regardless of the scan time of the PLC
- When one instruction is executed in 7 or more positions at the same time
FNC229
K100 C251 SET Y010
LDD<=
FNC 50
Y010 K8
REF
2. Device specification range

Only high-speed counters (C235 to C255) can be specified as S .
3. Only 32-bit operation instructions are available.

Because instructions for high-speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits, make sure to input "DHSCS (FNC 53)".
4. Priority order in operation among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ (FNC 55)
instructions for the same high-speed counter
→ For details, refer to "6. Priority order in operations among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ (FNC
55) instructions for the same high-speed counter" in Subsection 13.4.1.
5. Reset operation by an external terminal

→ For details, refer to "5. Reset operation by an external terminal" in Subsection 13.4.1.
6. For other cautions on using HSCS instruction, refer to the description later.
→ For details, refer to the next page.
Program example
With regard to the current value of a counter, different outputs (Y) are arbitrary set to ON by two values.
Set the maximum counting value of
M8000 high-speed counter.
C255 K2,147,483,647
RUN monitor S1 S2 D
FNC 53 K100 C255 Y010 C255 = K100 → Y010 = ON
DHSCS
S1 S2 D
FNC 53 K150 C255 Y011 C255 = K150 → Y011 = ON
DHSCS
151
150
… 149
101
100
… 99
C255 0
Y010
Y011
352
11
13.4.1 Common cautions on using instructions for high-speed counter
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54), DHSZ (FNC 55) and DHSCT (FNC280) instructions are provided for high-speed
counters.
This section explains common cautions for these instructions.
1. Limitation in the number of instances of each instruction in a program and number of 12

instructions driven at the same time
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ instructions can be used as many times as necessary in the same way as general
instructions. However, the number of simultaneously driven instructions is limited. The DHSCT instruction can
only be used once in any program.
Instruction Limitation in number of instructions driven at same time 13
DHSCS
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
DHSCR 32 instructions including DHSCT instruction
DHSZ
DHSCT Only 1 (This instruction can only be used once.)
DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ instructions can be used as many times as necessary in the same way as general
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
instructions. However, the number of simultaneously driven instructions is limited.
DHSCS
DHSCR 6 instructions
DHSZ
15
2. Response frequency of high-speed counters
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
When the DHSZ or DHSCT instruction is used in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, the maximum response frequency and total
frequency of every software counter are limited.
When the DHSCS, DHSCR or DHSZ instruction is used in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the total frequency of high-speed
counters is limited.
→ For the total frequency in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, refer to Subsection 4.7.7.
→ For the maximum response frequency and total frequency in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, refer to Subsection 4.8.10.
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
3. Specification of output numbers (Y) (FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs)
When using the same instruction for high-speed counter repeatedly or when driving two or more other instructions for
high-speed counter at the same time, specify such output devices (Y) whose high-order two digits are the same (in
units of 8 devices).
1) When using devices of the same number (in units of 8 devices)
Example: When using Y000, specify Y000 to Y007. When using Y010, specify Y010 to Y017.
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
2) When using two or more instructions for high-speed counter and non-consecutive output (Y) numbers
A program example is shown below:
M8000
FNC 53 K100 C255 Y000
DHSCS
18
FNC 53 K100 C255 Y010
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
DHSCS
When C255 reaches K100, the output Y000 is driven by interrupt. Y010 is driven when END processing is
executed.
If interrupt drive is required, use an output number ranging from Y001 to Y007 whose high-order two digits are
equivalent. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
353
4. Caution on the counting operation when the current value is changed

An instruction for the high-speed counter gives the comparison result when a pulse is input to the input (X) of the high-
speed counter.
However, the comparison result is not given when the current value of the high-speed counter is changed in the
following method:
1) Change method (examples)
a) Overwriting the contents of a word device used as the comparison value using DMOV instruction, etc.
b) Resetting the current value of a high-speed counter in a program
2) Operation
Even if the condition for setting the output to ON or OFF is given as the comparison result, the comparison result
does not change when an instruction is simply driven.
5. Reset operation by an external terminal [M8025*1: HSC (external reset) mode]

For a high-speed counter equipped with an external reset terminal (R) such as C241, an instruction is executed and
the comparison result is output at the rising edge of the reset input signal.
In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, high-speed counters operate in the HSC (external reset) mode regardless of the status of
M8025.
1) Program
If an instruction for the high-speed counter is used while M8025*1 is driven, the instruction is executed again when
the current value of the high-speed counter C241 is cleared by an external reset terminal. And the comparison
result is output even if a counting input is not given.
M8000
M8025 *1 External reset mode
RUN monitor X001 External reset
K9,999 terminal for C241
C241
FNC 54 K0 C241 Y000

DHSCR
*1. M8025 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
It is not necessary to drive M8025 in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
2) Operation
When the external reset input X001 turns ON while the current value of C241 is "100", for example, the current
value of C241 is reset to "0". And Y000 is reset at this time even if a counting input is not given.
354
11
6. Priority order in operations among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ (FNC 55)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
When the same comparison value is used for the same high-speed counter in the HSCS, HSCR and HSZ
instructions, reset (self-reset) of the comparison target high-speed counter for the HSCR instruction is executed
with the highest priority (as shown in the table below).
In this case, the comparison results do not change in HSCS, HSCR, and HSZ instructions whose comparison 12
value is programmed to be the same as the comparison value for self-reset by HSCR instruction.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
To change the comparison results, set the comparison value to "K0".
In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the HSCS, HSCR and HSZ instructions are executed in the order of programming.
M8000 Processing sequence
C235 K10000
Program
sequence
FX3S/
FX3U/FX3UC FX3G/FX3GC/
FX1N/FX1NC/ 13
FX1S
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
FNC 53 FX2N/FX2NC
K500 C235 Y000 (1)
DHSCS DHSCS (1)
DHSCR (6)
DHSCS (1) DHSCS (1)
(self-reset)
FNC 53 DHSCS (2) DHSZ (4) DHSCS (2) DHSCS (2)

K500 C235 Y001 (2)
DHSCS DHSCR (3) DHSCS (1) DHSCR (3) DHSCR (3)
DHSZ (4) DHSCS (2) DHSZ (4) (Not supported) 14
FNC 54
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
K500 C235 Y002 (3) DHSCR (5) DHSCR (3) DHSCR (5) DHSCR (5)
DHSCR DHSCR (6) DHSCR (6) DHSCR (6)
DHSCR (5)
(self-reset) (self-reset) (self-reset)
M8000
FNC 55
K250 K500 C235 Y003 (4)
DHSZ
FNC 11
15
K250 K500 C235 Y003
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
DZCPP
M8000
FNC 54
K500 C235 Y006 (5)
DHSCR
FNC 54
K500 C235 C235 (6)
16
DHSCR
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Self-reset program
Operation of FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Operation of FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
FX1S/FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/FX2NC PLCs [reference]
Present value
500 Present value 17
500
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
250
250
0
0
Y000 to Y002 and Y006 do not change.*1
Y003 ON ON
Y000,Y001 ON 18
Y004 OFF
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Y002 OFF
It does not change.*2 Present value:1
Y005 OFF
*1. To change the comparison results by the instructions (1) Y003 ON ON
to (3) and (5), change the comparison value "K500" in the
instructions (1) to (3) and (5) to "K0". Y004 ON
*2. To set Y005 to ON in the HSZ instruction (4), set a value
smaller than the comparison value "K500". However, due
*3 19
Y005
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
to the response delay at the output, the output may not

operate within the short time before the counter's present Present value:1
value is reset to "0".
*3. Due to the response delay at the output, the output
may not operate within the short time before the
counter's present value is reset to "0".
7. Timing at which the instruction is executed 20
The comparison instruction for high-speed counter is executed at the END instruction for the scan in which the
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
comparison instruction is driven.

When the comparison value is changed, the changed comparison instruction also becomes effective at the END
instruction for the scan in which the comparison instruction is driven.
355
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset
13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset
Outline
This instruction compares the value counted by a high-speed counter with a specified value at each count, and
immediately resets an external output (Y) when both values become equivalent to each other.
D HSCR Continuous
 13 steps DHSCR Operation
2. Set data
Data to be compared with the current value of a high-speed counter or word device
S1 32-bit binary
number storing the data to be compared
S2 Device number of a high-speed counter [C235 to C255] 32-bit binary

Bit device number to be reset (set to OFF) when both values become equivalent each
D Bit
other.
Oper-
Type
S1        3 4    
S2  
D    1 2 
2: The same counter as S2 can be specified also. (Refer to the program example shown later.)

1. 32-bit operation (DHSCR)
When the current value of a high-speed counter (C235 to C255) specified in S2 becomes the comparison value
[ S1 +1, S1 ] (for example, when the current value changes from "199" to "200" or from "201" to "200" if the
comparison value is K200), the bit device D is reset (set to OFF) regardless of the operation cycle. In this
instruction, the comparison processing is executed after the counting processing in the high-speed counter.
Command
input
S2  K2,147,483,647
Reset.
FNC 54
S1  S2  D S1  = S2  → D 
DHSCR
Operation
When the present value of the high-speed counter C255 changes (counts) from "99" to "100" or from "101" to "100",
Y010 is reset (output refresh).
M8000 K2,147,483,647
C255
RUN Comparison Comparison Output
monitor value source destination
Reset.
FNC 54 K100 C255 Y010 K100 = C255 → Y010
DHSCR
356
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The following instructions can be combined with high-speed counters:
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
DHSCT FNC280 High-speed counter compare with data table
Cautions
1. Selection of the count comparison method 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
When the HSCR instruction is used in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, hardware counters (C235, C236, C237, C238, C239,
HSCR instruction or general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select DHSCR instruction
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
- When counting is important, but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in operations depending on the 15
counting result
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
M8000
FNC189
DHCMOV C251 D100 K0
FNC229
16
LDD<= K10000 D100 RST Y010
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
M8000
FNC 50
REF Y010 K8
2) FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs 17
When the HSCR instruction is used in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the total frequency of each counter is affected.
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
the HSCR instruction or a general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select the HSCR instruction
b) Cases to select a general-purpose comparison instruction 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

FNC229
K10000 C251 RST Y010
LDD<=
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
M8000 FNC 50
Y010 K8
REF
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
357

Because instructions for high-speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits, make sure to input "DHSCR (FNC 54)".

→ For details, refer to "5. Reset operation by an external terminal [M8025*1: HSC (external reset) mode]"
in Subsection 13.4.1.
5. Other cautions on using HSCR instruction

→ For details, refer Subsection 13.4.1.
Program example
1. Example of self-reset circuit
When the current value of C255 becomes "400", C255 is immediately reset. Its current value becomes "0", and the
output contact is set to OFF.
M8000 Reset value of DHSCR

C255 K300 400
RUN monitor Count-up value
300
FNC 54 K400 C255 C255
DHSCR
Current value
of C255
Output contact
of C255
358
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare
11
13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction compares the current value of a high-speed counter with two values (one zone), and outputs the
comparison result to three bit devices (refresh). 12
→ For the table high-speed comparison mode, refer to Subsection 13.6.2.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
→ For the frequency control mode, refer to Subsection 13.6.3.
D HSZ
 17 steps DHSZ
Continuous
Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S1
number storing data to be compared (comparison value 1)
32-bit binary 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S2 32-bit binary
number storing data to be compared (comparison value 2)
S Device number of a high-speed counter [C235 to C255] 32-bit binary

Head bit device number to which the comparison result is output based on upper and
D Bit
lower comparison values
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
S1        2 3    
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S2        2 3    
S  
D    1 
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

1. 32-bit operation (DHSZ)
The current value of a high-speed counter (C235 to C255) specified in S is compared with two comparison points 18
(comparison value 1 and comparison value 2). Based on the comparison result, "smaller than the lower comparison
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
value", "inside the comparison zone" or "larger than the upper comparison value", one among D , D +1 and
D +2 is set to ON regardless of the operation cycle.
In this instruction, the comparison processing is executed after the count processing in the high-speed counter.
Command
input
K2,147,483,647
19
S
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
Comparison Comparison Comparison Output

value 1 value 2 source destination
Set to ON.
FNC 55 S1  > S → D
S1  S2  S D
DHSZ
S1  ≤ S ≤ S2  → D  +1
S > S2  → D  +2 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
359
Comparison points
Make sure that the comparison value 1 and the comparison value 2 have the following relationship:
[ S1 +1, S1 ] ≤ [ S2 +1, S2 ]
Comparison point Contents (32 bits)
Comparison value 1 S1 +1, S1
Comparison value 2 S2 +1, S2
Operation
When the current value of the high-speed counter C251 changes (counts) as shown below, the comparison result is
output to one of the outputs Y000, Y001 or Y002.
M8000 K2,147,483,647
C251
RUN monitor Comparison Comparison Comparison Output
value 1 value 2 source destination
ON
FNC 55 K1000 K2000 C251 Y000 K1000 > C251 → Y000
DHSZ
K1000 ≤ C251 ≤ K2000 → Y001
C251 > K2000 → Y002
Change of output contact (Y)

Comparison pattern Current value of C251
Y000 Y001 Y002
1000 > S ON OFF OFF
S1 > S 999 → 1000 ON → OFF OFF → ON OFF
999 ← 1000 OFF → ON ON → OFF OFF
999 → 1000 ON → OFF OFF → ON OFF
999 ← 1000 OFF → ON ON → OFF OFF
S1 ≤ S ≤ S2 1000 ≤ S ≤ 2000 OFF ON OFF

2000 → 2001 OFF ON → OFF OFF → ON
2000 ← 2001 OFF OFF → ON ON → OFF
2000 → 2001 OFF ON → OFF OFF → ON
S < S2 2000 ← 2001 OFF OFF → ON ON → OFF
S > 2000 OFF OFF ON
The following instructions can be combined with high-speed counters:
DHSCT FNC280 High-speed counter compare with data table
360
11
Cautions
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Selection of the count comparison method
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
When the HSZ instruction is used in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, hardware counters (C235, C236, C237, C238, C239,
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
the DHSZ instruction or general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select the DHSZ instruction
b) Cases to select a general-purpose comparison instruction 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
- When counting is important, but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in operations depending on the
counting result
M8000
FNC189
C251 D100 K0
14
DHCMOV
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
FNC225
LDD > K10000 D100 Y010
FNC229 FNC238
LDD <= K10000 D100 ANDD >= K20000 D100 Y011
15
FNC226
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
LDD < K20000 D100 Y012
M8000
FNC 50
Y010 K8
REF
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
When the HSZ instruction is used in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the total frequency of each counter is affected.
the HSZ instruction or a general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select the HSZ instruction
regardless of the scan time of the PLC 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
FNC225 K10000 C251 Y010

18
LDD>
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
FNC229 K10000 FNC238

C251 K20000 C251 Y011
LDD<= ANDD>=
FNC226
K20000 C251 Y012
LDD<
19
M8000
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
FNC 50
Y010 K8
REF
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
361
2. Device specification range

Only high-speed counters (C235 to C255) can be specified as S .

Because instructions for high-speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits, make sure to input "DHSZ (FNC 55)".
4. Caution on values set in the comparison value 1 S1 and comparison value 2 S2

Make sure that S1 is smaller than or equivalent to S2 .
5. Relationship between the comparison timing and the result output

1) The DHSZ instruction executes comparison and outputs the result only when a counting pulse is input to a high-
speed counter.
(When S1 is "1000" and S2 is "1999", the output D is set to ON as soon as the current value of C235
changes from "999" to "1000" or from "1999" to "2000".)
2) Because the comparison result cannot be obtained when restoring the power or when the PLC mode switches
from STOP to RUN, the result is not output even if the comparison condition is provided.
→ For details, refer to "13.6.1. Program in which comparison result is set to ON when power is turned ON
[ZCP (FNC 11) instruction]".

→ For details, refer to "5. Reset operation by an external terminal [M8025*1: HSC (external reset) mode]"
in Subsection 13.4.1.

1) The comparison value occupies two devices from S1 or S2 respectively.
2) The output occupies three devices from D .
9. When an output (Y) is specified in D (FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC)

When Y6 or Y7 is specified as an output (Y), the refresh timing of the three outputs (Y) occupied by the DHSZ
instruction is different for each output.
To make the refresh timing of three points simultaneous, specify Y0 to Y5.
Example: When Y006 is specified as an output (Y), the refresh timing is different between Y006, Y007 and Y010.
362
11
13.6.1 Program in which comparison result is set to ON when power is turned ON
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
[ZCP (FNC 11) instruction]
DHSZ instruction outputs the comparison result only when a counting pulse is input. Even if the current value of C235
is "0", Y010 remains OFF at the time of startup.
For initializing Y010, compare the current value of C235 with K1000 and K1200 and drive Y010 by DZCPP instruction
(for general zone comparison) as pulse operation only at the time of startup.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Refer to the program example shown below.
Explanation of operation
The outputs Y010 to Y012 are as shown below:
Y010 = ON Y011 = ON Y012 = ON 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
0 1000 1200
Current value of C235
Program example
X010
14
RST C235
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
FNC 40 Y010 Y012 Y010 to Y012 are reset.
ZRST
M8000
C235 K9999 … pulse input: X000 15
RUN monitor
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X010 Immediately after start, comparison is
FNC 11 K1000 K1200 C235 Y010
DZCPP executed only once.
Start K1000 > C235 :Y010 ON
K1000 ≤ C235 ≤ K1200 :Y011 ON
K1200 < C235
S1  S2  S D :Y012 ON
After start, comparison is executed
16
FNC 55 K1000 K1200 C235 Y010
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
DHSZ when each pulse is input from X000.
K1000 > C235 :Y010 ON
K1000 ≤ C235 ≤ K1200 :Y011 ON
K1200 < C235 :Y012 ON
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
363
Timing chart
In the part [1] in the timing chart, Y010 remains OFF if the current value of a high-speed counter (C235 in the example
below) is "0" when restoring the power.
1) For initializing Y010, the current value of C235 is compared with K1000 and K1200, and Y010 is driven using the
DZCPP instruction (for general zone comparison) as pulse operation only upon startup.
2) The comparison result in Y010 is latched until an input pulse is input and the comparison output is driven by the
DHSZ instruction.
3) According to the current value of the counter, the DHSZ instruction drives the output (A), (B) or (C).
X000
(input pulse for
C235)
X010
(Start)
Y010 [1] A
(smaller than
zone)
Y011 B
(inside zone)
Y012 C
(larger than zone)
1200
1000
0
(present value of counter)
364
11
13.6.2 Table high-speed comparison mode (M8130)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
This section explains the table high-speed comparison mode (high-speed pattern output) of the DHSZ instruction.
When two or more outputs should be activated at one time, use the HSCT instruction which can change up to 16 12
outputs.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Set data
S1 Head word device number storing the data table (only data register D) 32-bit binary
S2 Number of lines in the table (only K or H) … K1 to K128 or H1 to H80 32-bit binary 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
S Device number of a high-speed counter [C235 to C255] 32-bit binary
D M8130 (special auxiliary relay for declaring the table high-speed comparison mode) Bit

1. 32-bit operation (DHSZ) 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
When the special auxiliary relay M8130 for declaring the table high-speed comparison mode is specified as D in
the DHSZ instruction, the special function shown below is provided.
Command
input
K2,147,483,647
S
Head Number Comparison 15
device of lines source
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
FNC 55 S1 S2 S M8130
DHSZ
Table high-speed comparison mode
Comparison table 16
Comparison data (32 bits) Output (Y) number SET/RST Table counter (D8130)
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
0
S1 + 1, S1 S1 +2 S1 +3
↓
1
S1 + 5, S1 +4 S1 +6 S1 +7
↓
S1 + 9, S1 +8 S1 + 10 S1 + 11
2
↓
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
…
S1 + [ S2 × 4 - 3], S1 + [ S2 × 4 - 4] S1 + [ S2 × 4 - 2] S1 +[ S2 × 4 - 1] S2 −1
↓
Repeated from "0".
1) Specify the head device number for the comparison table as S1 . 18

Because one line in the comparison table uses four devices, S2 × 4 devices are occupied from S1 .
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
2) Specify the number of lines in the comparison table as S2 .

The created table starts from the head register S1 , and has the number of lines specified in S2 .
3) Comparison data
Make sure that the comparison data is 32 bits.
4) Output (Y) number 19
Specify each digit of the (Y) number in hexadecimal form.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
Example: When specifying Y010, specify "H10".

When specifying Y020, specify "H20".
5) Specification of set and reset
These set and reset are directly controlled as interrupt.
Contents of setting 20
Set (ON) K1/H1
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
Reset (OFF) K0/H0
365
2. Operation
M8002
FNC 12 K123 D200 Comparison data
DMOV
FNC 12 H10 D202 Output (Y) number

MOV
FNC 12 Output is set or reset.

K1 D203
MOV K1: Output is set.

DMOV

MOV

K0 D207
MOV K0: Output is reset.

DMOV

MOV

K1 D211

DMOV

MOV

K0 D215
MOV K0: Output is reset.

DMOV

MOV

K1 D219
Command
input
K2,147,483,647
C251
Head Number Comparison
device of lines source
Reset FNC 55 D200 K5 C251 M8130

command DHSZ
input
RST C251 Table high-speed comparison mode
RST Y011
366
11
Comparison table
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Present value
Comparison Output (Y) of C251
SET/RST Table counter
data number
D201,D200 D 202 D 203 0 A program to reset
K123 H10 K1 ↓ the counter is
D205,D204
K234
D 206
H10
D 207
K0
1
↓
567
required.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D209,D208 D 210 D 211 2 456
K345 H11 K1 ↓
345
D213,D212 D 214 D 215 3
K456 H11 K0 ↓
234
4
D217,D216
K567
D 218
H11
D 219
K1
↓
Repeated from
123 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
"0".
1) When this instruction is executed, the top table Y010

in the data table is set as the comparison target
data. A program to reset
Y011
the output is
2) When the current value of the high-speed
counter C251 is equivalent to the comparison
required. 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
target data table, the output (Y) number
specified in the table is set or reset.
This output processing is directly executed regardless of completion of output refresh by END instruction.
3) "1" is added to the current value of the table counter D8130.
4) The comparison target data table is transferred to the next table.
5) The steps 2) and 3) are repeated until the current value of the table counter D8130 becomes "4".
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
When the current value becomes "4", the program execution returns to the step 1), and the table counter D8130 is
reset to "0".
At this time, the complete flag M8131 turns ON.
6) When the command contact is set to OFF, execution of the instruction is stopped and the table counter D8130 is
reset to "0".
16
Cautions
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. Limitation in the number of DHSZ instructions
This instruction can be programmed only once in a program.
With regard to the DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ and DHSCT instructions used for other purposes, up to 32 instructions
including the DHSZ instruction can be driven at one time.
17
2. When the command input is set to OFF in the middle of execution
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Execution of the instruction is aborted, and the table counter D8130 is reset to K0.
However, outputs which have been set or reset remain in the current status.
3. Output start timing

After the DHSZ instruction is first executed, creation of the table is completed by END instruction. After that, the DHSZ
instruction becomes valid. 18
Accordingly, the output is activated from the second scan.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
4. Current value of a high-speed counter

Make sure to execute the DHSZ instruction from a point where the current value of the high-speed counter (regarded
as the operation target) is smaller than the value in the 1st line in the comparison table.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
367
13.6.3 Frequency control mode (HSZ and PLSY instructions) (M8132)
When the special auxiliary relay M8132 for declaring the frequency control mode is specified as D in the DHSZ
instruction, the special function shown below is provided if DPLSY instruction is combined.
At this time, only a data register D can be specified as S1 , and a constant K or H can be specified as S2 . The
available range is limited to "1 ≤ K, H ≤ 128".
A high-speed counter C235 to C255 can be specified as S .
This function is different from the zone comparison described above.
PLSY instruction is as shown on the next page, and only the pulse output can be changed by users.
1. Control example
Example of table configuration and data setting
Comparison data Frequency Table counter D8131
Head device (32 bits)
D 301,D 300 D 302, D 303 0
K 20 K300 ↓
specified as S1 
D 305,D 304 D 306, D 307 1

K600 K500 ↓
Number of lines specified
D 309,D 308 D 310, D 311 2
as S2 
K700 K200 ↓
D 313,D 312 D 314, D 315 3
K800 K100 ↓
D 317,D 316 D 318, D 319 4
K 0 K 0 ↓
368
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Command
input
DMOVP
FNC 12
DMOVP
K300 D302 Frequency 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
DMOVP
FNC 12 K500 D306 Frequency

DMOVP
FNC 12
13
K700 D308 Comparison data
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
DMOVP

DMOVP

DMOVP 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
DMOVP

DMOVP
FNC 12
DMOVP
K0 D318 Frequency 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Frequency
Head Number Comparison control
device of lines source mode
FNC 55 S1  S2  S M8132
DHSZ
16
PLS M10
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Pulse quantity
(K0 specifies
continuous Pulse
Frequency output.) output
M10
FNC 57
DPLSY
D8132 K0 Y000 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
369
Output pulse characteristics

Output pulse
frequency (Hz)
500
300
200
100
0
0 20 600 700 800
→ Current value of C251
1) Write prescribed data in advance to data registers constructing the table as shown in this program example.
2) The output frequency of the PLSY instruction remains in the value (D303, D302) until the current value of a high-
speed counter specified in S becomes equivalent to (D301, D300). (D302 specifies low-order 16 bits. D303
specifies high-order 16 bits, but is always "0".)
3) The operation in the 2nd line is started after that, and then the operation in each line is executed in turn.
4) When the operation in the last line is completed, the complete flag M8133 turns ON. The program execution
returns to the 1st line, and the operation is repeated.
5) For stopping the operation in the last line, set the frequency in the last table to K0.
6) When the command input is set to OFF, the pulse output turns OFF and the table counter D8131 is reset.
7) After the DHSZ instruction is first executed, creation of the table is completed at the END instruction. The DHSZ
instruction becomes valid after that.
8) Accordingly, the contact of PLS M10 is used so that the PLSY instruction is executed from the second scan after
the command input has been set to ON.
Data can be written to the table in a program as shown in this example or directly using keys in peripheral equipment.
1) M8132
This is the special auxiliary relay for declaring the frequency control mode
2) D8132
In the frequency control mode, the frequency set in the table is received by D8132 sequentially according to the
table counter count D8131.
3) D8134 (low-order) and D8135 (high-order)
In the frequency control mode, the comparison data in the table is received sequentially according to the table
counter count.
Cautions
1) The DHSZ instruction can only be used once.
2) With regard to the DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54), DHSZ (FNC 55) and DHSCT (FNC280) instructions used
for other purposes, up to 32 instructions including the DHSZ instruction can be driven at one time.
3) Because the table is created when the END instruction is executed, it is necessary to delay execution of the PLSY
(FNC 57) instruction until creation of the table is completed.
4) Do not change the data table while the DHSZ instruction is driven.
5) In the frequency control mode, simultaneous output to Y000 to Y001 is not permitted.
370
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection
11
13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction counts the input pulse for a specified period of time as interrupt input.
The function of this instruction varies depending on the version. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D SPD 7 steps SPD

Continuous
13 steps DSPD
Continuous
Operation Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S1 Device number of pulse input (X) Bit
S2 Time data (ms) or word device number storing the data 16- or 32-bit binary
14
D Head word device number storing the pulse density data 16- or 32-bit binary
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
Unit
U\G V Z Modify K H
Number ter String
E "" P
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S1 1 
S2        2 3     
D    2   
1: Specify X000 to X007 in FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 16

Specify X000 to X005 in FX3S PLC.
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
371

1. 16-bit operation (SPD)
The input pulse S1 is counted only for S2 × 1 ms. The measured value is stored in D , the present value is
stored in D +1, and the remaining time is stored in D +2 (ms).
By repeating this operation, the measured value D will store the pulse density (which is proportional to the rotation
speed).
Command
input
FNC 56
S1  S2  D
SPD
1) Timing chart
Command
input The command contact is set to ON.
S1 
D  +1
D
Current value D  + 1 counts "OFF → ON" operation of S1  .
Measured S2  ms later, the counting result is stored to D  .
value
Accompanied by this operation, D  +1 is reset, and
then counting of the "OFF → ON" operation of S1  is
S2  ms S2  ms started again.
Counting time Counting time
S2  ms D  + 2 is used to measure the remaining time.
D  +2
Remaining time (ms)
2) The measured value D is in proportion to the number of rotations as shown below:
Input X000
N (rpm)
60 D
N= ´ 10 3(r/min)
nt
t: Measurement time duration specified as S2 (ms)
Proximity switch
"n" pulses/rotation
372
11
2. 32-bit operation (DSPD)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The input pulse S1 is counted only for [ S2 +1, S2 ] x 1 ms. The measured value is stored in [ D +1, D ],
the present value is stored in [ D +3, D +2], and the remaining time is stored in [ D +5, D +4] (ms).
By repeating this operation, the measured value [ D +1, D ] will store the pulse density (which is proportional to 12
the rotation speed).
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Command
input
FNC 56
S1  S2  D
DSPD
1) Timing chart 13
Command
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
input The command contact is set to ON.
S1 
[ D  +1, D  ]
[ D  +3, D  +2]
Measured value
[ D  +3, D  +2] counts "OFF → ON" operation
14
Current value
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
of S1 . [ S2 +1, S2 ] ms later, the counting result is
stored to [ D  +1, D  ].
Accompanied by this operation, [ D  +3, D  +2] is
reset, and then counting of the "OFF → ON" operation of
[ S2 +1, S2 ] ms [ S2 +1, S2 ] ms
Counting time Counting time
S1 is started again.
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
[ D  +5, D  +4] is used to measure the remaining
[ S2 +1, S2 ] ms
time.
[ D  +5, D  +4]
Remaining time (ms)
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
2) The measured value [ D +1, D ] is in proportion to the number of rotations as shown below:
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Input X000
N (rpm)
N=
60 [ +1,
nt
]
×103 (r/min) 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
t: Measurement time duration specified as [ +1, ] (ms)

Proximity switch
"n" pulses/rotation
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
373
Cautions
1. Input specifications of the input S1
• An input device X000 to X007 specified as S1 cannot overlap the following functions or instructions:
- High-speed counter
- Input interrupt
- Pulse catch
- Pulse width/Pulse period
- DSZR instruction
- DVIT instruction
- ZRN instruction
• For one input, this instruction can only be used once.
• The maximum input frequency of turning the inputs X000 to X007 ON and OFF is shown below:
- FX3S PLC
Used input number Maximum input frequency
X000,X001 60 kHz
X002,X003,X004,X005 10 kHz
- FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Used input number Maximum input frequency
X000,X001,X003,X004 60 kHz
X002,X005,X006,X007 10 kHz
- FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Maximum input frequency
Used input number FX3U PLC
FX3UC PLC
Main unit FX3U-4HSX-ADP
X000 to X005 100 kHz*1 100 kHz*1
200 kHz
X006,X007 10 kHz 10 kHz
*1. When receiving pulses within the response frequency range of 50 k to 100 kHz, perform the following actions:
- Make sure that the wiring length is 5 m or less.
- Connect a bleeder resistor of 1.5 kΩ (1 W or more) to the input terminal, and make sure that the load
current in the open collector transistor output of the external equipment is 20 mA or more.
2. Occupied devices
1) When using the 16-bit operation
*2
Three devices are occupied from a device specified in D .
2) When using the 32-bit operation
Six devices are occupied from a device specified in *2.
D
*2. The value is updated by interrupt processing from the CPU, not every scan time (operation cycle) of the PLC.
3. When the value of the word device S2 is changed while the SPD instruction is being executed.
When the value of the word device is changed while the SPD instruction is being executed, the operation varies
depending on the PLC model.
- FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
The changed value of the word device is reflected on the operation at every scan time (operation cycle).
- FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
The changed value of the word device is not reflected on the operation at every scan time (operation cycle), and
the PLC operates using the value specified when execution of the SPD instruction started.
The PLC operates using the changed value after the command input of the SPD instruction is turned OFF once
and turned ON again.
Function change depending on the version

Applicable version
Item Outline of function
Ver. 1.00 Ver. 1.00 Ver. 1.40 Ver. 2.20 Ver. 2.20
Addition of 32-bit instruction 32-bit operations (DSPD) are enabled.
or later or later or later or later or later
374
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output
11
13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction generates a pulse signal.
→ For the frequency control mode, refer to Subsection 13.6.3. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D PLSY 7 steps PLSY
Continuous
13 steps DPLSY
Continuous
Operation Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S1 Output pulse frequency 16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Number of output pulses 16- or 32-bit binary

14
D Device number (Y) from which pulses are output Bit
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
Unit
U\G V Z Modify K H
Number ter String
E "" P
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S1        2 3     
S2        2 3     
D 1 
1: Specify a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high-speed output adapter*1. 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
*1. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.

1. 16-bit operation (PLSY) 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
A pulse train of frequency S1 is output in the quantity S2 from the output (Y) D .
Command S2  Pulse quantity
input
FNC 57
S1  S2  D D
PLSY
S1  Frequency 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
• Specify the frequency in S1 .

Allowable setting range: 1 to 32767 (Hz)
• Specify the generated pulse quantity in S2 .
Allowable setting range: 1 to 32767 (PLS)
• Specify the output (Y) number from which pulses are to be output in D . 19
Allowable setting range: Y000, Y001
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
375
2. 32-bit operation (DPLSY)

A pulse train at the frequency [ S1 +1, S1 ] is output by the quantity [ S2 +1, S2 ] from the output (Y) D .
Command [ S2  + 1, S2  Pulse quantity ]
input
FNC 57
S1  S2  D D
DPLSY
[ S1  + 1, S1  Frequency ]
• Specify the frequency in [ S1 +1, S1 ].

- When special high-speed output adapters are used
Allowable setting range: 1 to 200,000 (Hz)
- When the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs main unit is used
• Specify the generated pulse quantity in [ S2 +1, S2 ].
Allowable setting range: 1 to 2,147,483,647 (PLS)
• Specify the output (Y) number from which pulses are output in D .
→ For the method to output pulses without any limitation, refer to the program example later.
Related devices
1. Instruction execution complete flag
The instruction execution complete flag M8029 used for PLSY instruction can be used also for other instructions.
When using other instructions, setting the M8029 flag to ON or OFF, or using two or more PLSY instructions, make
sure to use each M8029 flag just after an instruction to be monitored.
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
ON: Generation of specified number of pulses is completed.
Instruction execution com-
M8029 OFF: Generation of pulses is paused before the specified number of pulses is reached or the
plete
continuous pulse generation operation is stopped.
Command Command
input 1 input 1
FNC 57 K1000 K0 Y000 FNC 57 K1000 K0 Y000
PLSY PLSY
Command
M8029 input 2
FNC 57 K1000 K0 Y001
DPLSY
Command
Command input 1 M8029
input 2
FNC 57
DPLSY
K1000 K0 Y000 Command  Changes by DPSLY
instruction corresponding to
input 2 M8029 the command input 2.
M8029
376
11
2. Monitoring the current number of generated pulses
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The number of pulses output from Y000 or Y001 is stored in the following special data registers:
Device
High Low Description Contents of data
order order
D8141 D8140
Accumulated number of pulses
output from Y000
Accumulated number of pulses output from Y000 by PLSY and PLSR
instructions
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Accumulated number of pulses Accumulated number of pulses output from Y001 by PLSY and PLSR
D8143 D8142
output from Y001 instructions
Total accumulated number of Total accumulated number of pulses output from Y000 and Y001 by PLSY and
D8137 D8136
pulses output from Y000 and Y001 PLSR instructions
The contents of each data register can be cleared using the following program: 13
Command
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
input
FNC 12 Low-order device shown in
K0
DMOV table above
3. How to stop the pulse output

14
• When the command input is set to OFF, the pulse generation is immediately stopped. When the command input is
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
set to ON again, pulse generation operation restarts from the beginning.
• When the special auxiliary relays (M) shown below are set to ON, the pulse output is stopped.
Device
Description
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC FX3U/FX3UC
M8145, M8349 M8349 Immediately stops pulse output from Y000. 15
M8146, M8359 M8359 Immediately stops pulse output from Y001.
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
To restart pulse output, set the device (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC : M8145, M8146, M8349, M8359
FX3U/FX3UC : M8349, M8359) corresponding to the output signal to OFF, and then drive the pulse output instruction
again.
Cautions 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. When a word device is specified as S1 or S2
When the value of the word device is changed while the instruction is executed, the following operation results:
• When the data in S1 is changed, the output frequency changes accordingly.
• When the data in S2 is changed, the change (new value) becomes valid the next time the instruction is driven.
17
2. Frequency S1
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
When using transistor outputs in the main unit, set the output frequency S1 to "100,000 Hz" or less.
If the load is operated using pulses at a frequency higher than 100,000 Hz, the PLC may be damaged.
Do not set the output frequency to "0".
3. Pulse output
• Only a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high-speed output adapter*1 can be specified
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
in D .
When using the PLSY (FNC 57) instruction with a relay output type or triac output type FX3U PLC, a special high-
speed output adapter is required.
• The duty cycle of the pulse ON/OFF time is 50 % inside the PLC.
However, 50 % may not be output depending on the frequency due to the effect of the output circuit. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
• The pulse output is controlled by the dedicated hardware not affected by the sequence program (operation cycle).
• If the command input is set to OFF during continuous pulse output, the output from D turns OFF.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
377
4. Handling of pulse output terminals in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series main units

The outputs Y000 and Y001 are the high-speed
response type. Item Description
When using a pulse output instruction or
Operating voltage range 5 to 24V DC
positioning instruction, adjust the load current of
the open collector transistor output to about 10 to Operating current range 10 to 100 mA
100 mA (5 to 24V DC). Output frequency 100 kHz or less
When the load is smaller, connect a dummy

Equipment PLC
resistor in parallel to the outside of a used output Dummy (transistor output)
load
terminal (Y000 or Y001) as shown in the circuit resistor resistor [sink output]
diagram below so that the specified current External
shown above flows in the output transistor. power
supply Y000
COM1
5. Cautions on using special high-speed output adapters

1) Outputs of special high-speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.
2) Set the pulse output type setting switch in a special high-speed output adapter to the "pulse chain + direction"
(PLSDIR) side.
If the switch is set to the "forward rotation pulse chain reverse rotation pulse chain" (FPRP) side, normal
operations are disabled. The pulse output destination changes depending on the PLC output status as shown in
the table below.
Pulse output Output affecting
Operation
destination operation
While Y004 is ON, pulses are output from Y000 in the high-speed output adapter.
D = Y000 Y004
While Y004 is OFF, pulses are output from Y004 in the high-speed output adapter.
D = Y001 Y005
3) Set the pulse output type setting switch while the PLC is stopped or while the power is OFF.
Do not manipulate the pulse output form setting switch while pulses are being output.
4) When special high-speed output adapters are connected, the same output numbers in the main unit are assigned
as shown in the table below.
Only wire the appropriate output terminals.
Outputs in special high-speed output adapters and the main unit operate as shown below.
Assignment of output numbers in special high-speed output adapters

Output number
Status of output form setting Setting name in each
Signal name 1st unit 2nd unit
switch positioning instruction
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis
Forward rotation pulse
Pulse output destination Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003
chain (FP)
"FPRP" side
Reverse rotation pulse
Rotation direction signal Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007
chain (RP)
Pulse chain Pulse output destination Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003
"PLSDIR" side
Direction Rotation direction signal Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007
Output operation
Output operation
Relay output type/triac output type main While instruction is activated, relevant output is ON. (LED is also ON.)
unit Use a special high-speed adapter.
Operated. (LED is also operated.)
Special high-speed output adapter
Set the output frequency to "200kHz" or less.
Operated. (LED is ON.)
Transistor output type main unit
378
11
6. Others
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1) Types of pulse output, positioning and other relevant instructions and their target output numbers
Classification Instruction Instruction name Target output numbers
PLSY (FNC 57) Pulse Y output Y000,Y001
Pulse output
PLSR (FNC 59)
DSZR (FNC150)
Acceleration/deceleration setup
DOG search zero return
Y000,Y001
Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
DVIT (FNC151)*3 Interrupt positioning Y000,Y001,Y002,Y003*2
ZRN (FNC156) Zero return Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
Positioning
PLSV (FNC157) Variable speed pulse output Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
DRVI (FNC158) Drive to increment Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
DRVA (FNC159) Drive to absolute Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
High-speed
PWM (FNC 58) Pulse width modulation Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
processing
*1. Y002 is not available in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type) and FX3S/FX3GC PLCs.
*2. Y003 is available only when two high-speed output special adapters are connected to the FX3U PLC.
*3. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 14
2) When using the same output relay (Y000 or Y001) in several instructions.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
While a pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY) flag is ON a pulse output instruction and positioning instruction for
the same output relay cannot be executed.
While a pulse output monitor flag is ON even after the instruction drive contact is set to OFF, a pulse output
instruction or positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed.
Before executing such an instruction, wait until the pulse output monitor flag turns OFF and one or more operation
cycles pass. 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Pulse output destination device Pulse output monitor flag
Y000 M8340
Y001 M8350
3) "Frequency control mode" in which DHSZ (FNC 55) and PLSY (FNC 57) instructions are combined can only be
used once in a program. 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Program example (when outputting pulses without any limitation)
When S2 is set to K0, pulses are output without any limitation.
Command No limitation (K0)
input
FNC 57
DPLSY
K1000 K0 Y000
Y000
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1000Hz
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
379
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation
13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation
Outline
This instruction outputs pulses with a specified period and ON duration.
PWM Continuous
7 steps PWM Operation 
2. Set data
S1 Output pulse width (ms) 16-bit binary
S2 Period (ms) 16-bit binary
D Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output Bit
Oper-
Type
S1        2 3     
S2        2 3     
D 1 
1: Specify transistor output Y000, Y001, or Y002*1 on the main unit or Y000, Y001, Y002, or Y003 on a special high-
speed output adapter*2.

1. 16-bit operation (PWM)
Pulses whose ON pulse width is S1 ms are output in periods of S2 ms.
Command
input t
FNC 58 S1  S2  D D
PWM
Pulse width Period T0
t T0
• Specify the pulse width "t" in S1 .

Allowable setting range: 0 to 32767 ms
• Specify the period "T0" in S2 .
Allowable setting range: 1 to 32767 ms
• Specify the output (Y) number from which pulses are to be output in D .
Allowable setting range: Y000, Y001, Y002, Y003
380
11
Cautions
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Setting the pulse width and period
Make sure that the pulse width S1 and period S2 satisfy the relationship " S1 ≤ S2 ".
2. Pulse output
• Only the following outputs can be specified in D according to the system configuration.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
- When using special high-speed output adapters*1: Y000, Y001, Y002*2, or Y003*2
- When transistor outputs in the main unit are used: Y000, Y001, or Y002*3
Use a transistor output type PLC.
*2. When specifying Y002 or Y003 on a special high-speed output adapter, a second special high-speed output 13
adapter is required.
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
• The pulse output is controlled by interrupt processing not affected by the sequence program (operation cycle).
• If the command input is set to OFF, the output from D turns OFF.
• While a pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY) flag is ON, a pulse output or positioning instruction for the same
output relay cannot be executed. 14
While a pulse output monitor flag is ON even after the instruction drive contact is set to OFF, a pulse output or
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed.
Before executing a pulse output or positioning instruction, wait until the pulse output monitor flag turns OFF and
one or more operation cycles pass.
Y000 M8340 15
Y001 M8350
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Y002 M8360
Y003 M8370
3. Cautions on using special high-speed output adapters

1) Outputs of special high-speed output adapters work as differential line drivers. 16
2) Set the pulse output type setting switch of a special high-speed output adapter to the "pulse chain + direction"
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
(PLSDIR) side.
operations are not possible. The pulse output destination changes depending on the output status as shown in the
table below.
Pulse output
destination
Output affecting
operation
Operation 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
While Y004 is ON, pulses are output from Y000 on the high-speed output adapter.
D = Y000 Y004
While Y004 is OFF, pulses are output from Y004 on the high-speed output adapter.
D = Y001 Y005
= Y002 Y006
D While Y006 is OFF, pulses are output from Y006 on the high-speed output adapter.
18
D = Y003 Y007
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Do not adjust the pulse output type setting switch while pulses are being output.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
381
Assignment of output numbers in special high-speed output adapters

Output number
Setting status of output form Setting name in each
setting switch positioning instruction
chain (FP)
"FPRP" side
chain (RP)
"PLSDIR" side
Output operation
Output operation
Do not use the PWM (FNC 58) instruction with relay-output type main units.
Relay output type main unit (Considerable output response delay may be generated, chattering may occur in
contacts, or the contact life may be shortened.)
Do not use the PWM (FNC 58) instruction with triac-output type main units.
Triac output type main unit
(Considerable output response delay may be generated.)
Special high-speed output adapter Use a transistor output type main unit.
Transistor output type main unit Operated.
Program example
When the contents of D10 are changed ranging from "0" to "50" in the program example shown below, the average
output from Y000 will be ranging from 0 to 100%.
An error will occur if the contents of D10 exceed 50.
In this program example the FX3U series main unit (sink output) is used. For wiring details, refer to the Hardware
Edition of each PLC.
X0 D10
FNC 58 D10 K50 Y000 Y000
PWM
50ms
Example of smoothing circuit
510Ω R
1kΩ
0V 24V (1kΩ)
PLC 5V P + 10V
1kΩ 22Ω E e V
12V C
1kΩ 470μF
1kΩ
COM1 Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003
R >> P
τ = P(kΩ)  C(μF) = 470ms >> T0
The time constant of the filter should be considerably larger than the pulse cycle T0.
The ripple value "Δe" in the mean output current "e" is approximately "Δe/e ≤ T0/τ"
382
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup
11
13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This pulse output instruction has the acceleration/deceleration function.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D PLSR 9 steps PLSR
Continuous
17 steps DPLSR
Continuous
Operation Operation
2. Set data 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
S1 Maximum frequency (Hz) 16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Total number of output pulses (PLS) 16- or 32-bit binary
S3 Acceleration/deceleration time (ms) 16- or 32-bit binary
D Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output Bit 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S1        2 3     
S2        2 3     
S3        2 3     
D 1 
16
1: Specify a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high-speed output adapter*1.
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89

17
1. 16-bit operation (PLSR)
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Pulses are output from output (Y) D by the specified number S2 with acceleration/deceleration to the
maximum frequency S1 over the time S3 (ms).
Pulse frequency
Command
(Hz) Maximum frequency S1 
18
input
FNC 59
S1 S2 S3 D
PLSR
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Maximum Total Acceleration/ Output

Total number of
frequency number deceleration number
(HZ) of output time (Y000, output pulses
pulses (ms) Y001) S2  (PLS)
(PLS)
S1 : Maximum frequency (Hz)

Allowable setting range: 10 to 32767 (Hz)
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
S2 : Total number of output pulses (PLS) Acceleration/ Acceleration/

S3  deceleration time S3  deceleration time
Allowable setting range: 1 to 32767 (PLS)
S3 : Acceleration/deceleration time (ms)
Allowable setting range: 50 to 5000 (ms)
D : Pulse output number
Allowable setting range: Y000, Y001 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
383
2. 32-bit operation (DPLSR)

Pulses are output from the output (Y) D by the specified number [ S2 +1, S2 ] with acceleration/deceleration
to the maximum frequency [ S1 +1, S1 ] for the time [ S3 +1, S3 ](ms).
Command
input
FNC 59
S1  S2  S3  D
DPLSR
Maximum Total Acceleration/ Output
frequency number deceleration number
(HZ) of output time (Y000,
pulses (ms) Y001)
(PLS)
[ S1 +1, S1 ]: Maximum frequency (Hz)

- When special high-speed output adapters are used
- When the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs main unit is used
[ S2 +1, S2 ]: Total number of output pulses (PLS)
Allowable setting range: 1 to 2,147,483,647 (PLS)
[ S3 +1, S3 ]: Acceleration/deceleration time (ms)
Allowable setting range: 50 to 5000 (ms)
D : Pulse output number
3. Pulse output specifications

• Simple positioning (with the acceleration/deceleration function)
The operation pattern is as shown below:
S1  Maximum frequency (Hz)

 16-bit operation: 10 to 32767 Hz
Pulse frequency (Hz)  32-bit operation: 10 to 200,000 Hz
S2  Total number of output pulses

(PLS)
 16-bit operation
: 1 to 32767 (PLS)
 32-bit operation
: 1 to 2,147,483,647 (PLS)
S3  S3 
Acceleration/ Acceleration/
deceleration time deceleration time
50 to 5000 ms 50 to 5000 ms
• Output processing
The pulse output is controlled by the dedicated hardware regardless of the operation cycle.
• Data change while the instruction is executed
Even if operands are overwritten while the instruction is executed, such changes are not reflected immediately. The
changes become valid the next time the instruction is driven.
384
11
Related devices
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Instruction execution complete flag
OFF: The input command is OFF, or pulses are being output. (This flag does not turn ON if the
Instruction execution com- pulse output is interrupted in the middle of output.)
12
M8029
plete
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
ON: Output of the number of pulses set in S2 is completed.
2. Monitoring the number of generated pulses

The number of pulses output from Y000 or Y001 is stored in the following special data registers:
Device 13
High Low Description Contents of data
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
order order
D8141 D8140
D8143 D8142
D8137 D8136
Total accumulated number of Total accumulated number of pulses output from Y000 and Y001 by PLSY and 14
pulses output from Y000 and Y001 PLSR instructions
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
The contents of each data register can be cleared using the following program:
Command
input
FNC 12 Low-order device shown in
K0
DMOV above table
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
3. How to stop the pulse output
• When the command input is set to OFF, the pulse generation is immediately stopped. When the command input is
set to ON again, pulse generation operation restarts from the beginning.
• When the special auxiliary relays (M) shown below are set to ON, the pulse output is stopped.
Device
Description
16
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC FX3U/FX3UC
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
M8145,M8349 M8349 Immediately stops pulse output from Y000.
M8146,M8359 M8359 Immediately stops pulse output from Y001.
To restart pulse output pulses again, set the device (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC : M8145, M8146, M8349, M8359
FX3U/FX3UC : M8349, M8359) corresponding to the output signal to OFF, and then drive the pulse output instruction
again. 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Cautions
1. Frequency S1
When using transistor outputs on the main unit, set the output frequency S1 to "100,000 Hz" or less.
If the load is operated using pulses at a frequency higher than 100,000 Hz from transistor outputs in the main unit, the
PLC may be damaged. 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
2. Pulse output
• Only a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high-speed output adapter*1 can be specified
in D .
When using the PLSR (FNC 59) instruction with a relay output type or triac output type FX3U PLC, a special
high-speed output adapter is required.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
• The duty cycle of the pulse ON/OFF time is 50 % inside the PLC.
However, 50 % may not be output depending on the frequency due to the effect of the output circuit.
• The pulse output is controlled by the dedicated hardware not affected by the sequence program (operation cycle).
• If the command input is set to OFF during continuous pulse output, the output from D turns OFF.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
385
3. Handling of pulse output terminals in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series main units

The outputs Y000 and Y001 are the high-speed response type.
When using a pulse output instruction or positioning instruction, adjust the load current of the open collector transistor
output to about 10 to 100 mA (5 to 24V DC).
Item Description
Operating voltage range 5 to 24V DC
Operating current range 10 to 100 mA
Output frequency 100 kHz or less
When the load is smaller, connect a dummy resistor in parallel to the outside of a used output terminal (Y000 or Y001)
as shown in the circuit diagram below so that the specified current shown above flows in the output transistor.
Equipment PLC
load Dummy (transistor output)
resistor resistor [sink output]
External
power
supply Y000
COM1
4. Cautions on special high-speed output adapters

1) Outputs of special high-speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.
2) Set the pulse output type setting switch in a special high-speed output adapter to the "pulse chain + direction"
(PLSDIR) side.
operations are disabled. The pulse output destination changes depending on the PLC output status as shown in
the table below.
Pulse output Output affecting
Operation
destination operation
D = Y000 Y004
D = Y001 Y005
Do not manipulate the pulse output type setting switch while pulses are being output.
Assignment of output numbers in special high-speed output adapter

Output number
Setting status of output form Setting name in each
setting switch positioning instruction
chain (FP)
"FPRP" side
chain (RP)
"PLSDIR" side
Output operation
Output operation
Relay output type/triac output type main While instruction is active, associated output is ON. (LED is also ON.)
unit Use a special high-speed adapter.
Operated. (LED is also operated.)
Special high-speed output adapter
Operated. (LED is ON.)
Transistor output type main unit
386
11
5. Others
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1) Types of pulse output, positioning and other relevant instructions and their target output numbers
Classification Instruction Instruction name Target output numbers
PLSY (FNC 57) Pulse Y output Y000,Y001
Pulse output
PLSR (FNC 59)
DSZR (FNC150)
Acceleration/deceleration setup
DOG search zero return
Y000,Y001
Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
DVIT (FNC151)*3 Interrupt positioning Y000,Y001,Y002,Y003*2
ZRN (FNC156) Zero return Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
Positioning
PLSV (FNC157) Variable speed pulse output Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
DRVI (FNC158) Drive to increment Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
DRVA (FNC159) Drive to absolute Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
High-speed
PWM (FNC 58) Pulse width modulation Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
processing
*2. Y003 can be used only when two special high-speed output adapters are connected to an FX3U PLC.
2) When using the same output relay (Y000 or Y001) in several instructions.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
While a pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY) flag is ON, a pulse output or positioning instruction for the same
output relay cannot be executed.
While a pulse output monitor flag is ON, even after the instruction drive contact is set to OFF, a pulse output or
positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed.
Before executing a pulse output or positioning instruction, wait until the pulse output monitor flag turns OFF and
one or more operation cycles pass. 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Y000 M8340
Y001 M8350
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
387
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
14. Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69

FNC 60 to FNC 69 provide handy instructions which achieve complicated control in a minimum sequence program.
60 IST IST S D1 D2 Initial State Section 14.1
61 SER SER S1 S2 D n Search a Data Stack Section 14.2
62 ABSD ABSD S1 S2 D n Absolute drum sequencer Section 14.3
63 INCD INCD S1 S2 D n Incremental drum sequencer Section 14.4
64 TTMR TTMR D n Teaching Timer Section 14.5
65 STMR STMR S m D Special Timer Section 14.6
66 ALT ALT D Alternate State Section 14.7
67 RAMP RAMP S1 S2 D n Ramp Variable Value Section 14.8
68 ROTC ROTC S m1 m2 D Rotary Table Control Section 14.9
Section
69 SORT SORT S m1 m2 D n SORT Tabulated Data
14.10
388
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State
11
14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction automatically controls the initial state and special auxiliary relays in a step ladder program. 12
→ For SFC programs and step ladder, refer to Chapter 35.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
IST 7 steps IST Continuous

Operation  13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Head bit device number of the selector switch in the operation mode Bit
D1
Smallest state relay number of practical state relays in the automatic mode
Bit
14
( D1 < D2 )
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Largest state relay number of practical state relays in the automatic mode
D2 Bit
( D1 < D2 )
Oper-
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S    1 
D1 2 
D2 2 
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
2: S20 to S899 and S1000 to S4095 in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
S20 to S255 in the FX3S PLC.

Command
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
input FNC 60 S D1 D2
IST
• Specify the head input in the operation mode in S .

Selector switches in the operation mode occupy eight devices from the head device S , and the switch functions
shown in the table below are assigned to each of them.
When X020 is assigned as shown below, it is necessary to set X020 to X024 as rotary switches so that they do not
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
turn ON at the same time.

It is not necessary to wire unused switches, but they cannot be used for any other purpose because they are
occupied by IST instruction.
Source Device number (example) Switch function
S X020 Individual operation
S +1 X021 Return to zero point 19
X022 Stepping
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
S +2
S +3 X023 Cycle operation
S +4 X024 Continuous operation
S +5 X025 Zero return start
S +6 X026 Automatic start
S +7 X027 Stop 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
• Specify the smallest device number of practical state relays in D1 (for the automatic mode).
• Specify the largest device number of practical state relays in D2 (for the automatic mode).
389
1. Control of devices by switch operations (occupied devices)

While the command input is ON, the following devices are automatically switched and controlled. While the
command input is OFF, the devices are not switched.
Device number Operation function Device number Operation function
M8040 STL transfer disable S0 Individual operation initial state
M8041*1 Transfer start S1 Zero return initial state
M8042 Start pulse S2 Automatic operation initial state
M8043*1 Zero return complete
M8045 All output reset disable
M8047*2 Enable STL monitoring
*1.Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.

*2.Set to ON when END instruction is executed.
Do not program the following state relays as general state relays;

Device number Operation function
Occupied for the initial state
S0 to S9 • S0 to S2 are used for individual operation, zero return and automatic operation as shown above.
• S3 to S9 can be used arbitrarily.
S10 to S19 Occupied for zero return
If the devices are switched among individual operation (X020), zero return (X021) and automatic operation (X022,
X023 and X024) while the zero return complete device (M8043) is OFF, all outputs are set to OFF.
Automatic operation can be started again after zero return is completed.
→ For introducing IST instruction, refer to "14.1.2 Example of IST instruction introduction (example of
workpiece transfer mechanism)".
Cautions
1. Device specified as S and switches to be used
It is not necessary to use all switches for mode selection.
When some switches are not used, leave the corresponding numbers in the unused status. Such numbers cannot be
used for any other purpose.
2. Programming order of the IST instruction and STL instruction

• The IST instruction should be programmed earlier than a series of STL circuit such as state relays S0 to S2.
3. State relays used for the zero return operation

Use the state relays S10 to S19 for the zero return operation.
In the final state in the zero return operation, set M8043 to ON, and then let it be reset to OFF by itself.
4. Limitation in the number of IST instructions

The IST instruction can only be used once in a program.
390
11
14.1.1 IST instruction equivalent circuit
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The details on special auxiliary relays (M) and initial state relays (S0 to S9) which are automatically controlled by the
IST instruction are as shown in the equivalent circuit below. (Refer to the equivalent circuit below for reference.)
This equivalent circuit cannot be programmed.
1. Equivalent circuit 12
Continuous
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
operation Stepping
X024 M8041 X027 X022 operation
M8041 is set to ON when the start button
M8041 is pressed in the automatic mode.
Stop Cycle
X026 Automatic start X023 operation Transfer Especially in the continuous mode,
start M8041 holds its status by itself, and is
Continuous
X024 operation
reset when the stop button is pressed. 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
X026 Automatic start X020 *1
PLS M8042
X025 Zero return start Individual
operation Start pulse
X020 Individual operation
Zero
M8040
M8040 is set to ON in the stepping
mode, and set to OFF every time the 14
X021 return X027Stop M8042 start button is pressed.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
STL transfer
disable In the zero return operation or cycle
Start pulse operation, M8040 holds its status by
X022Stepping operation itself when the stop button is pressed,
and is reset when the start button is
X023Cycle X027Stop pressed.
operation
M8002 Initial pulse

15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
M8040 Self-holding
M8000 RUN monitor

M8047
Individual *1 Enable STL monitoring 16

X020 operation M8044
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
M8043 The initial state is switched according to
S 0 each mode input, and M8043 is
Zero point
condition Zero return controlled at the same time.
*1 complete However, it is necessary to control
X021 Zero return X025
RST M8043 M8044 and M8043 in user programs
S 1 also.
Zero return
*1
start Zero return
complete signal is 17
X022 to X024 M8043 M8041 reset
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
S 2
Automatic Zero return Transfer start
operation complete
*1. Because the above equivalent circuit is provided only for explanation, it cannot be actually programmed.
2. Switching of the operation mode

When the operation mode is switched among the individual operation, zero return operation and automatic operation, 18
all outputs and conventional states are reset at one time unless the machine is located in the zero point. (Reset of all
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
outputs*2 is not executed when M8045 is driven.)

S1 M8043
Zero return Switched
X021 Conventional states and
Zero return to X020
S2 complete (individual
corresponding outputs are
Automatic
X022 to X024
operation) reset at one time.
19
M8045
All output reset disable

Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
Individual Switched
operation
X020 to X021 When M8045 is OFF, all
S2 (zero
outputs are reset.
Automatic return
X022 to X024 operation)
Even if the mode is switched from automatic operation to zero return operation while S2 is ON, state relays 20
(except initial state relays) and outputs are not reset.
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
*2. All outputs: Outputs (Y) not driven by state relays S and outputs (Y) driven by state relays S in OUT
and SET instructions
391
14.1.2 Example of IST instruction introduction (example of workpiece transfer mechanism)
1. Operation mode
Stepping
Mechanism for transferring a workpiece from the
operation X022 point A to the point B using the robot hand
Zero return Zero return
operation mode
Cycle
operation mode Y003
PB
X021 X023 Rightward Right limit X003
X025 Y004
Left limit X004 Leftward
Individual Continuous Power supply
operation mode operation mode Upper
X020 X024 PB
Leftward limit X002 Moving down
Moving up travel Unclamping
PB PB PB PB
Y002 Y000
X005 X006 X007 Start X026
Rightward Emergency stop
Moving down travel Clamping
PB
Moving Lower
PB PB PB PB
up limit X001
X010 X011 X012 Stop X027
Clamping Y001
Pushbutton switches for individual operations Unclamping Y001
of the robot hand shown in the figure on the right Workpiece
Pushbutton switches for the external circuit to
Point A Point B
turn ON and OFF the load power supply
Operation mode Contents of operation

Individual
Each load is turned ON and OFF by an individual pushbutton switch.
Manual operation mode
mode Zero return
When the pushbutton switch for zero return is pressed, the machine automatically returns to the zero point.
operation mode
Stepping
Every time the start button is pressed, the machine performs one process.
operation mode
When the start button is pressed while the machine is located at the zero point, the machine performs one
cycle of automatic operation and stops at the zero point.
Cycle operation
Auto- If the stop button is pressed in the middle of one cycle, the machine stops immediately. When the start
mode
matic button is pressed after that, the machine performs the continuous operation from the last position, and
mode automatically stops at the zero point.
When the start button is pressed while the machine is located at the zero point, the machine starts
Continuous continuous operation.
operation mode When the stop button is pressed, the machine finishes the current cycle until the zero point, and then stops
at the zero point.
2. Transfer mechanism
Start Left limit X004
X026
(4) Rightward Y003

Zero point
(8) Leftward Y004
Upper
Right limit limit
(1) Moving X003 X002
down Upper limit X002
Y000 (1) Moving down
Y000 (7) Moving up
Lower (3) Moving up Y002
limit Y002
X001 Lower
limit
What is the zero point condition? X001
Clamping Upper limit X002 is ON, left limit Unclamping
X004 is ON and unclamping Y001
(2) Clamping is OFF. (6) Unclamping
Y001 ON Y001 OFF
The upper left position is regarded as the zero point. The machine transfers a workpiece from the left to the right in the
order "moving down → clamping → moving up → rightward travel → moving down → unclamping → moving up →
leftward travel".
Double-solenoid type solenoid valves (with two inputs for driving and non-driving) are adopted for moving down,
moving up, leftward travel and rightward travel. Single type solenoid valves (which operate only while the power is ON)
are adopted for clamping.
392
11
3. Assignment of mode selection inputs
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
For using IST instruction, it is necessary to assign inputs having consecutive device numbers as shown below for
mode inputs.
When using non-consecutive inputs or omitting some modes, change the layout by using an auxiliary relay as the
head input for mode specification as shown in the figure below.
- X020: Individual operation mode
- X021: Zero return operation mode
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
- X022: Stepping operation mode
- X023: Cycle operation mode
- X024: Continuous operation
- X025: Zero return start
- X026: Automatic mode start
- X027: Stop 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
When only the continuous When only the continuous
When inputs do not have operation mode and zero return operation mode and individual
consecutive device numbers operation mode are used operation mode are used
Example: Example: Example:
X030:Individual operation mode X030:Zero return operation mode X030:Individual operation mode
X035:Zero return operation mode
X033:Stepping operation mode
X031:Continuous operation mode
X032:Automatic mode start zero
X031:Continuous operation mode
X032:Automatic mode start 14
X040:Cycle operation mode return start X033:Stop
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
X032:Continuous operation mode X033:Stop
X034:Zero return start
X026:Automatic mode start
X041:Stop
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X030 M8000 X030
M 0 Individual M 0 Does not M 0 Individual
operation mode operate operation mode
RUN monitor
X035
M 1 Zero return
X030
M 1
Zero return
M8000
M 1
16
operation mode operation mode
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
X033 M8000
Stepping Does not
M 2 M 2 operate M 2
operation mode
X040
Cycle operation Does not
M 3 M 3 M 3
X032
mode
X031
operate
X031
17
Continuous Continuous Continuous
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
M 4 operation M 4 M 4
operation operation
X034 X032 M8000
M 5 Zero return M 5 Zero return M 5
start start
X026 X032
M 6 Automatic
mode start
M 6 Automatic
mode start
M 6 Automatic
mode start
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
X041 X033 X033

M 7 Stop M 7 Stop M 7 Stop
In this example, M0 is used as the head input for mode specification.

M8000
FNC 60 19
M 0 S 20 S 29
IST
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
RUN
monitor
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
393
4. Special auxiliary relay (M) for the IST instruction

Auxiliary relays (M) used in the IST instruction are classified into two types. Some auxiliary relays are automatically
controlled by the IST instruction itself according to the situation. Other auxiliary relays should be controlled by a
program for preparation of operation or for purpose of control.
1) Special auxiliary relays automatically controlled by the IST instruction
a) M8040: STL transfer disable
When this special auxiliary relay turns ON, transfer of every state is disabled.
Individual operation mode:
M8040 is always effective.
Zero return operation mode and cycle operation mode:
When the stop button is pressed, the operation is held until the start button is pressed.
Stepping operation mode:
M8040 is always effective except when the start button is pressed. When the start button is pressed,
M8040 is not effective and transfer of states is allowed.
Others: The operation is latched when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN, and reset when the start
button is pressed.
Even in the transfer disabled status, the operation is held for outputs in the states.
b) M8041: Transfer start
This special auxiliary relay allows transfer from the initial state S2 to the next state.
Individual operation mode and zero return operation mode:
M8041 is not effective.
Stepping operation mode and cycle operation mode:
M8041 is effective only while the start button is pressed and held.
Continuous operation mode:
The operation is latched when the start button is pressed, and cleared when the stop button is
pressed.
c) M8042: Start pulse
M8042 is activated instantaneously only when the start button is pressed.
d) M8047: Enable STL monitoring
When IST instruction is executed, M8047 is set to ON.
When the M8047 turns ON, STL monitoring becomes valid, and state relay numbers (S0 to S899) in the ON
status are stored in turn in the ascending order of device number to the special data register D8040 to D8047.
Up to eight state relay numbers in the ON status can be monitored.
If either state relay is ON, the special auxiliary relay M8046 is set to ON.
2) Auxiliary relays controlled by a sequence program
→ For details on these controls, refer to the next page.
a) M8043: Zero return complete
Set this special auxiliary relay (M) to ON by a user program when the machine returns to the zero point in the
zero return operation mode.
b) M8044: Zero point condition
Detect the zero point condition of the machine, and drive this special auxiliary relay. This signal is effective in
every mode.
c) M8045: All output reset disable
When the mode is switched among individual operation mode, zero return operation mode and automatic
mode, all outputs and operation state relays are reset if the machine is not located at the zero point.
If M8045 has been set to ON in advance, however, only operation state relays are reset.
394
11
5. Program example
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1) Circuit diagram
In the sequence circuit shown below, all areas except shaded areas are standard.
Program the shaded areas according to the contents of control.
a) Initial circuit
While the machine is operating, the operation mode can be switched arbitrarily (among stepping operation,
cycle operation and continuous operation) in the automatic mode.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
When the operation mode is switched between the individual operation mode, zero return operation mode and
automatic mode while the machine is operating, all outputs are reset once to assure safety, after which the
following mode becomes valid.
(While M8045 (All output reset disable) is ON, outputs are not reset at all.)
Ladder block Detects that the machine is located at the zero point, and
regards it as the condition to start the automatic mode. 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
X004 X002 Y001
M8044 Zero point condition
Upper
Left limit limit Unclamping
M8000
RUN
FNC 60
IST X020 S 20 S 27 Initial state 14
monitor
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
b) Individual operation mode
Programming is not required when the individual operation mode is not provided.
SFC block
State number
Clamping
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X012 Clamping command
0 SET Y001
Unclamping
X007 command
Initial state RST Y001
for individual
operation Moving-up
X005 command Y000
Moving
Y002 up
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Moving-down
X010 command Y002
Y000 Moving
down
Leftward travel
X006 command X002 Y003
Y004 Leftward
Rightward travel travel 17
X011 command X002 Y004
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Y003 Rightward
Upper limit travel
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
395
c) Zero return operation mode

Programming is not required when the zero return operation mode is not provided.
It is necessary to set M8043 (zero return complete) to ON before starting the automatic mode.
SFC block
State number
1 Initial state for zero return

X025
TRAN
Zero return start
10 RST Y001 Unclamping
RST Y000 Moving-down reset
Y002 Moving up
X002
TRAN
Upper limit
11 RST Y003 Rightward
travel reset
Y004 Leftward travel
X004
TRAN
Left limit
12 SET M8043 Zero return complete
M8043 Make sure to use the state relays

TRAN S10 to S19 for the zero return
operation. In the final state, drive
M8043, and then reset the final
state.
S 12 Reset
396
11
d) Automatic mode (stepping operation mode, cycle operation mode or continuous operation mode)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
SFC block
State number
2 Initial state for

automatic mode
M8041 M8044
12
TRAN
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Transfer Zero point
start condition
20 Y000 Moving down

X001
TRAN 13
Down limit
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
21 SET Y001 Clamping
T 0 K 10
T0
TRAN 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
22 Y002 Moving up
X002
TRAN
Upper limit
Rightward
23 Y003 travel 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X003
TRAN
Right limit
24 Y000 Moving down
X001
Down limit
TRAN
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
25 RST Y001 Unclamping
T 1 K 10
T1
TRAN
17
26 Y002 Moving up
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
X002
TRAN
Upper limit
27 Y004 Leftward travel
X004
18
TRAN
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Left limit
S2 RET END
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
397
6. List program
The list program for the circuit diagram shown on the previous page is as shown below:
0 LD X 004 32 STL S 1 70 LD T 0
1 AND X 002 33 LD X 025 71 SET S 22
2 ANI Y 001 34 SET S 10 73 STL S 22
3 OUT M8044 36 STL S 10 74 OUT Y 002
Initial circuit
5 LD M8000 37 RST Y 001 75 LD X 002

6 IST 60 38 RST Y 000 76 SET S 23
(SP) X 020 39 OUT Y 002 78 STL S 23
Zero return operation

(SP) S 20 40 LD X 002 79 OUT Y 003
(SP) S 27 41 SET S 11 80 LD X 003
13 STL S 0 43 STL S 11 81 SET S 24
Automatic mode
14 LD X 012 44 RST Y 003 83 STL S 24
15 SET Y 001 45 OUT Y 004 84 OUT Y 000
16 LD X 007 46 LD X 004 85 LD X 001
17 RST Y 001 47 SET S 12 86 SET S 25
18 LD X 005 49 STL S 12 88 STL S 25
19 ANI Y 000 50 SET M8043 89 RST Y 001
20 OUT Y 002 52 LD M8043 90 OUT T 1
21 LD X 010 53 RST S 12 (SP) K 10
Individual
operation
22 ANI Y 002 (RET) 93 LD T 1

23 OUT Y 000 55 STL S 2 94 SET S 26
24 LD X 006 56 LD M8041 96 STL S 26
25 AND X 002 57 AND M8044 97 OUT Y 002
26 ANI Y 003 58 SET S 20 98 LD X 002
27 OUT Y 004 60 STL S 20 99 SET S 27
28 LD X 011 61 OUT Y 000 101 STL S 27
29 AND X 002 62 LD X001 102 OUT Y 004
30 ANI Y 004 63 SET S 21 103 LD X 004
31 OUT Y 003 65 STL S 21 104 OUT S 2
(RET) 66 SET Y 001 106 RET
67 OUT T 0 107 END
(SP) K 10
Programming is not required.
398
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack
11
14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction searches for the same data, maximum value and minimum value in a data table. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D SER P 9 steps SER
Continuous
17 steps DSER
Continuous
Operation Operation
SERP Pulse (Single)
Operation
DSERP Pulse (Single)
Operation 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Head device number in which same data, maximum value and minimum value are
S1 16- or 32-bit binary
searched
Data to be searched for or device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
14
S2
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Head device number storing number of same data, maximum value and minimum value
detected by search
Number of data in which same data, maximum value and minimum value are searched
[16-bit instruction: 1 to 256, 32-bit instruction: 1 to 128]
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
S1        1 2 
S2        1 2     
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D       1 2 
n  1  

17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (SER and SERP)
In "n" data starting from S1 , same data as S2 is searched, and the search result is stored to D to D +4.
Command
input FNC 61 S1  S2  D n 18
SER
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
1) Contents of searched data and the search result

a) When same data was detected
Five devices starting from D store the number of same data, first position, last position, maximum value
position and minimum value position.
b) When same data was not detected 19
Five devices starting from D store the number of same data, first position, last position, maximum value
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
position and minimum value position.

In this case, however, "0" is stored in three devices starting from D (which store the number of same data,
first position and last position).
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
399
2) Operation example
a) Example of search result table configuration and data (When n=10)
Search result
Searched data Comparison data
Searched device Data Maximum value Minimum value
S1 value S2 value Same
S1 position D D
(example) (example) D
+4 +3
 (first
S1 K100 0
position)
S1 +1 K111 1
S1 +2 K100 2 
S1 +3 K 98 3
S1 +4 K123 4
K100
S1 +5 K 66 5 
 (last
S1 +6 K100 6
position)
S1 +7 K 95 7
S1 +8 K210 8 
S1 +9 K 88 9
b) Search result table

Device number Contents Search result item
D 3 Number of same data
D +1 0 Same data position (first position)
D +2 6 Same data position (last position)
D +3 5 Minimum value position (last position)
D +4 8 Maximum value position (last position)
2. 32-bit operation (DSER and DSERP)

In "n" data starting from [ S1 +1, S1 ], same data as [ S2 +1, S2 ] is searched, and the search result is stored
to [ D +1, D ] to [ D +9, D +8].
Command
input FNC 61 S1  S2  D n
DSER
S1  +1, S1  D  +1, D 
S2  +1, S2 
1) Contents of searched data and the search result
a) When same data was detected
Five 32-bit devices starting from [ D +1, D ] store the number of same data, first position, last position,
maximum value position and minimum value position.
b) When same data was not detected
Five 32-bit devices starting from [ D +1, D ] store the number of same data, first position, last position,
maximum value position and minimum value position.
In this case, however, "0" is stored in three devices starting from [ D +1, D ] (which store the number of
same data, first position and last position).
400
11
2) Operation example
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
a) Example of search result table configuration and data (When n=10)
Search result
Searched data Comparison
data Data Maximum Minimum
Searched device S1 S1 value Same
position value value
(example) S2
D +9, +8
D
D +7, +6 12
 (first
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
[ S1 + 1, S1 ] K100000 0
position)
[ S1 + 3, S1 + 2] K110100 1
[ S1 + 5, S1 + 4] K100000 2 
[ S1 + 7, S1 + 6] K 98000
K123000
3
4
13
[ S1 + 9, S1 + 8]
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
K100000
[ S1 + 11, S1 + 10] K 66000 5 
 (last
[ S1 + 13, S1 + 12] K100000 6
position)
[ S1 + 15, S1 + 14] K 95000 7
[ S1 + 17, S1 + 16] K910000 8  14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
[ S1 + 19, S1 + 18] K910000 9 
b) Search result table

Device number Contents Search result item
[ D + 1, D ] 3 Number of same data

15
[ D + 3, D + 2] 0 Same data position (first position)
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
[ D + 5, D + 4] 6 Same data position (last position)
[ D + 7, D + 6] 5 Minimum value position (last position)
[ D + 9, D + 8] 9 Maximum value position (last position)
16
Cautions
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
• Comparison of values
It is executed algebraically.
(example: −10 < 2)
• When there are two or more maximum or minimum values
When there are two or more maximum or minimum values in the searched data, the last position of the max/min is
stored respectively.
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
• Number of occupied devices
When this instruction is driven, the following number of devices are occupied for storing the search result D .
Make sure that such devices are not used in other controls for the machine.
1)In the case of 16-bit operation
Five devices, D , D +1, D +2, D +3 and D +4, are occupied. 18
2)In the case of 32-bit operation
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Ten devices, [ D +1, D ], [ D +3, D +2], [ D +5, D +4], [ D +7, D +6] and
[ D +9, D +8], are occupied.
In the case of "DSER D0 D100 D200 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
401
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer
14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer
Outline
This instruction creates many output patterns corresponding to the current value of a counter.
D ABSD 9 steps ABSD Continuous

17 steps DABSD Continuous
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Head device number storing the data table (with rising and falling point data) 16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Counter number for monitoring the current value compared with the data table 16- or 32-bit binary
D Head bit device number to be output Bit

Number of lines in the table and the number of output bit devices
n 16-bit binary
[1 ≤ n ≤ 64]
Oper-
Type
S1        2 3 
S2  
D    1 
n  

1. 16-bit operation (ABSD)
In this example, outputs are controlled to ON or OFF by one rotation (0 to 360° using the rotation angle signal of
1°/pulse).
The current value S2 of the counter is compared with the data table with "n" lines starting from S1 (which
occupies "n" lines × 2 devices), and consecutive "n" outputs starting from D are controlled to ON or OFF during
one rotation.
Command
ABSD
S2  X001
RST S2 
X001
S2  K360
Rotation angle signal of 1°/pulse
402
11
1) Write the following data to S1 to S1 +2n-1 in advance by a transfer instruction:
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Rising point Falling point
Target output
Data value (example) Data value (example)
S1 40 S1 +1 140 D
S1 +2 100 S1 +3 200 D +1 12
S1 +4 160 S1 +5 60 D +2
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
S1 +6 240 S1 +7 280 D +3
…
…
⎯ ⎯
S1 + 2n-2 S1 + 2n - 1 D +n−1
For example, store rising point data and falling point data alternately. 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2) Output pattern
When the command input is set to ON, "n" points starting from D change as shown below.
Each rising point/falling point can be changed respectively by overwriting the data in S1 to S1 +2n − 1.
40 140
D 14
100 200
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D  +1
60 160
D  +2
240 280
15
D  +3
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
z
0 180 360
2. 32-bit operation (DABSD) 16

In this example, outputs are controlled to ON or OFF by one rotation (0 to 360° using the rotation angle signal of
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1°/pulse).
The present value S2 of the counter is compared with the data table having "n" lines starting from [ S1 +1, S1 ]
(which occupies "n" lines × 4 devices), and consecutive "n" outputs starting from D are controlled to ON or OFF
during one rotation.
Command
input
17
FNC 62 S1  S2  D n
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
DABSD
S2  X001
RST S2 
X001
S2  K360 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Rotation angle signal of 1°/pulse
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
403
1) Write the following data to [ S1 , S1 +1] to [ S1 +4n-2, S1 +4n-1] in advance using a transfer instruction:
Rising point Falling point
Data value Data value Target output
(example) (example)
[ S1 + 1, S1 ] 40 [ S1 + 3, S1 + 2] 140 D
[ S1 + 5, S1 + 4] 100 [ S1 + 7, S1 + 6] 200 D +1
[ S1 + 9, S1 + 8] 160 [ S1 + 11, S1 + 10] 60 D +2
[ S1 + 13, S1 + 12] 240 [ S1 + 15, S1 + 14] 280 D +3

…
…
⎯ ⎯
[ S1 + 4n - 3, S1 + 4n - 4] [ S1 + 4n - 1, S1 + 4n - 2] D +n−1
For example, store rising point data and falling point data alternately.
2) Output pattern
When the command input is set to ON, "n" points starting from D change as shown below.
Each rising point/falling point can be changed respectively by overwriting the data in [ S1 +1, S1 ] to
[ S1 +4n-1, S1 +4n-2].
40 140
D
100 200
D  +1
60 160
D  +2
240 280
D  +3
z
0 180 360
Cautions
1. Specifying a high-speed counter (C235 to C255)
In DABSD instruction, a high-speed counter can be specified as S2 .
When the high-speed counter is specified, the output pattern contains response delay caused by the scan cycle with
regard to the current value of a counter.
When high responsivity is required in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, use the table high-speed comparison function offered by the
HSZ instruction, or use the HSCT instruction.
2. When specifying digits of a bit device as S1

1) Device number
Specify a multiple of 16 (0, 16, 32, 64 ...).
2) Number of digits
- In ABSD instruction (16-bit operation): Only K4 is available.
- In DABSD instruction (32-bit operation): Only K8 is available.
3. Other cautions
• The value "n" determines the number of target outputs (1 ≤ n ≤ 64).
• Even if the command input is set to OFF, the ON/OFF status of outputs does not change.
404
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer
11
14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction creates many output patterns using a pair of counters. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
INCD 9 steps INCD Continuous


Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S1 Head word device number storing the set value 16-bit binary
S2 Head number of counters whose current value is monitored 16-bit binary 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D Head bit device number to be output Bit
n Number of output bit devices [1 ≤ n ≤ 64] 16-bit binary
Oper-
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S1        2 3 
S2  
D    1  16
n  
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (INCD)
The current value S2 of a counter is compared with the data table having "n" lines starting from S1 (which
occupies "n" lines x 1 device). When S2 is equivalent to the table data, the current output is reset, and the next
output is set to ON. In this way, the ON/OFF status of specified outputs is controlled in turn.
Command 18
input FNC 63
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
S1  S2  D n
INCD
Count signal
K9999
S2 
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
405
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer
Operation
S1  S2  D n
X000
FNC 63 D300 C0 M0 K4
INCD
M8013
K9999
C0
1 sec clock
1) Timing chart
Suppose that the following data is written in advance by a transfer instruction:
Device storing data Output
Data value (example) Example
S1 D300 = 20 D M0
S1 +1 D301 = 30 D +1 M1
S1 +2 D302 = 10 D +2 M2
S1 +3 D303 = 40 D +3 M3
…
…
…
…
S1 +n−1 ⎯ D +n−1 ⎯
X000
30 40
20 20 20
Current 10
value of
C0
Current 3
2
value of 1 1 1
C1 0 0 0
M0
M1
M2
M3
M8029 Complete flag
2) When the command contact turns ON, the output M0 turns ON.
3) When the current value of C0 reaches the comparison value D300, the output M0 is reset. "1" is added to the
count value of the process counter C1, and the current value of the counter C0 is reset.
4) The next output M1 turns ON.
5) When the current value of C0 reaches the comparison value D301, the output M1 is reset. "1" is added to the
count value of the process counter C1, and the current value of the counter C0 is reset.
6) The current value is compared for up to "n (K4)" outputs in the same way (1 ≤ n ≤ 64).
7) When the final process specified by "n" is finished, the execution complete flag M8029 turns ON and remains ON
for one operation cycle.
M8029 is used for many instructions as the instruction execution complete flag. Use M8029 as a contact just after
a corresponding instruction.
8) The program execution returns to the beginning, and outputs are repeated.
Caution
1. When specifying digits of a bit device as S1
As a device number, specify a multiple of 16 (0, 16, 32, 64 ...).

Two devices are occupied from a device specified as S2 . Make sure not to use devices used in another control.
406
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer
11
14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction measures the period of time in which TTMR instruction is ON. 12
Use this instruction to adjust the set value of a timer by a pushbutton switch.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
TTMR 5 steps TTMR Continuous

Operation  13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
D Device number storing the teaching data 16-bit binary

14
n Magnification by which the teaching data is multiplied [K0 to K2/H0 to H2] 16-bit binary
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D
Unit
R U\G V Z Modify
stant
K H
Number ter String
E "" P
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D   
n    

1. 16-bit operation (TTMR)
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
The period of time to press and hold the command input (pushbutton switch) is measured in 1-second units, multiplied
by the magnification (10n), and then transferred to D .
Command Command
input
FNC 64 contact
D n
TTMR
D  +1 17
D  +1
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D
D
τ0 τ0
Pressing and holding time Pressing and holding time
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
The table below shows the actual value indicated by D depending on the magnification n and the pressing and
holding time t0 (unit: 1 sec).
n Magnification D
K0 τ0 D ×1
K1 10τ0 D × 10
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
K2 100τ0 D × 100
Related instruction
There is a handy instruction as follows:
Instruction Description 20
Measures the input contact ON time in 1-hour units, and outputs alarm when the measurement
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
HOUR (FNC169)
result reaches a specified value.
407
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer
Cautions
1. When the command contact turns OFF
The current value [ D +1] of the pressing and holding time is reset, and the teaching time D will not change
any more.

Two devices are occupied from a device specified as the teaching time D .
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.
• D : Teaching time
• D +1: Current value of the pressing and holding time
Program example
1. Writing the teaching time to 10 types of data registers
Suppose that the set value is written to D400 to D409 in advance.
T 0 D 400
T 1 D 401 10 timers to be set

Because the timers T0 to T9 are the 100 ms type, the actual
operating time (sec) is 1/10 of the teaching data.
…
T 9 D 409
M8000 Selecting a timer by a digital switch

FNC 19 K1X000 Z
BIN An input to the 1-digit digital switch connected to X000 to
RUN X003 is converted into binary format, and transferred to Z.
monitor
X010 Measuring the teaching time
FNC 64 D300 K 0 The time (sec) in which X010 is pressed and held is stored to
TTMR D300.
Teaching
button
PLF M 0 Recovery of the teaching time is detected.
X010
M 0 Writing the set value of a timer

FNC 12 D300 D400Z The teaching time (D300) is transferred to the register D400Z
MOV for setting a timer selected by the digital switch.
408
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer
11
14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction can easily make off-delay timers, one-shot timers and flicker timers. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
STMR 7 steps STMR Continuous


Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Used timer number [T0 to T199 (100 ms timer)] 16-bit binary

m Set value of the timer [1 to 32,767] 16-bit binary 14
D Head bit number to which the set value is output (Four devices are occupied.) Bit
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
and
Type
Unit
Index
Pointer
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S  
m    
D     
: "D.b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z). 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (STMR)
The value specified in "m" is handled as the set value of a timer specified in S , and output to four devices starting
from D .
Create a proper program according to the purpose while referring to the example shown below.
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Command
input FNC 65 S m D
STMR
Off-delay timer and one-shot timer

When T10 is set to S , and M0 is set to D
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Command
input FNC 65 T10 K100 M0
STMR
• M0 [ D ] : Off-delay timer which turns OFF with delay of the timer set value after the command contact
turned OFF 19
• M1 [ D +1] : One-shot timer which turns ON after the command contact turned OFF from ON, and turns OFF
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
after the timer set value

• M2 [ D +2] : Occupied, and can be used for flicker.
• M3 [ D +3] : Occupied.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
409
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer
Command
input
M0 D 10s 10s
M1 D  +1 10s 10s
M2 D  +2 10s
M3 D  +3
Flicker
In the program shown below which turns OFF STMR instruction at the NC contact of D +3, flicker is output to
D +1 and D +2.
D and D +3 are occupied.
S m D
Command
input M3
FNC 65 T10 K100 M0
STMR
• M0 [ D ] : Occupied (, and can be used for off-delay timer). (Refer to the previous page.)
• M1 [ D +1] : Flicker (NO contact) which turns ON and OFF repeatedly at the interval of timer set value
• M2 [ D +2] : Flicker (NC contact) which turns ON and OFF repeatedly at the interval of timer set value
• M3 [ D +3] : Occupied.
Command
input
M2 D  +2 10s 10s 10s
M1 D  +1 10s 10s
Cautions
1. Handling of a specified timer
The timer number specified in this instruction cannot be used in other general circuits (such as OUT instruction).
If the timer number is used in other general circuits, the timer malfunctions.

Four devices are occupied from a device specified in D .
Function
Device Off-delay timer
Flicker
One-shot timer
D Off-delay timer Occupied
D +1 One-shot timer Flicker (NO contact)
D +2 Occupied Flicker (NC contact)
D +3 Occupied Flicker (NC contact)
3. When the command contact is set to OFF

D , D +1 and D +3 will turn OFF after the set time. D +2 and the timer S are immediately reset.
410
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State
11
14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction alternates a bit device (from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON) when the input turns ON. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
ALT P Continuous 
3 steps ALT
ALTP
Operation
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
D Bit device number whose output is alternated Bit

14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS
   
T C D R U\G V Z Modify

K H E "" P
15
D
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
: "D.b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.

1. 16-bit operation (ALT and ALTP) 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Alternating output (1-step)
Every time the command input turns from OFF to ON, a bit device specified in D is alternated (from ON to OFF or
from OFF to ON).
Command
input Command input ON ON ON
FNC 66
ALTP
D 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D ON ON
Dividing output (by 2-step alternating output)

Multi-step dividing outputs are achieved by combination of two or more ALTP instructions.
1st step 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Command
ON ON ON ON
D input
Command
input FNC 66 M0 M0 D ON ON
ALTP
19
Specify the same device D 2nd step
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
M0
FNC 66 M1
ALTP M1 D ON
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
411
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State
Caution
1. When using (continuous operation type) ALT instruction
• When ALT instruction is used, a specified bit device is alternated in every operation cycle.
To alternate a specified device by turning the command ON or OFF, use the (pulse operation type) ALTP
instruction, or use a pulse operation type command contact such as LDP.
Program examples
1. Start and stop by one input
1) When the pushbutton switch X000 is pressed, the start output Y001 is set to ON.
2) When the pushbutton switch X000 is pressed again, the stop output Y000 is set to ON.
X000
FNC 66 M0
ALTP
M0
Y000 Stop
M0
Y001 Start
2. Flicker operation
1) When the input X006 is set to ON, the contact of the timer T2 turns ON instantaneously every 5 seconds.
2) Every time the contact of T2 turns ON, the output Y007 is set to ON or OFF alternately.
X006 T2 X006 ON
T2 K50
5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec
X006 T2
FNC 66 Y007 T2
ALT
Y007 ON ON ON
3. Alternating output operation using auxiliary relays (M) (operation equivalent to ALT instruction)
The circuit below is provided as an example of alternating operation using basic instructions and auxiliary relays (M)
which is equivalent to ALT instruction.
1) When X000 is set to ON, M0 turns ON and remains ON for only one operation cycle.
2) When M0 turns ON for the first time, Y000 is latched. When M0 turns ON the second time, Y000 becomes
unlatched.
X000 M1
M0
X000
M1
M0 Y000
Y000
M0 Y000
412
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value
11
14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction obtains the data which changes between the start value (initial value) and the end value (target value) 12
over the specified "n" times.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
RAMP Continuous

9 steps RAMP Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S1 Device number storing the initial value of ramp 16-bit binary
S2 Device number storing the target value of ramp 16-bit binary 14

D Device number storing the current value of ramp 16-bit binary
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
n Ramp transfer time (scan) [1 to 32, 767] 16-bit binary
Oper-
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
15
Type
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S1   
S2   
D
n
 
 

 
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
: This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

1. 16-bit operation (RAMP)
When the start value S1 and the end value S2 have been specified and the command input is set to ON, the 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
value obtained by adding a value divided equally by "n" times to S1 in every operation cycle is stored to D .
By combining this instruction and an analog output, the cushion start/stop command can be output.
Command
RAMP
18
1) In the case of " S1  < S2  " 2) In the case of " S1  > S2  "
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
S2  S1  D
S2 
S1  D
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
"n" scans "n" scans

Number of scans D  +1 Number of scans D  +1
• The number of scans ("0" to "n") is stored in D +1.

• The time from start to the end value is the operation cycle multiplied by "n" times. 20
• If the command input is set to OFF in the middle of operation, execution is paused. (The present data value stored
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
in D is held, and the number of scans stored in D +1 is cleared.) When the command input is set to ON
again, D is cleared, and the operation is started from S1 .
413
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value
• After transfer is completed, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON, and the D value is
returned to the S1 value.
Command
S2 
S1 
D
(M8029)
• When acquiring the operation result at a constant time interval (constant scan mode)
Write a prescribed scan time (which is longer than the actual scan time) to D8039 and set M8039 to ON to select
the constant scan mode in the PLC.
For example, when "20 ms" is written to D8039 and "n" is set to 100, the D value will change from S1 to
S2 in 2 seconds.
2. Operation of the mode flag (M8026)

In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, the contents of D are changed as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of the mode
flag M8026.
In FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the contents of D are same as the case "2) When M8026 is ON" below regardless of
the ON/OFF status of the mode flag M8026.
1) When M8026 is OFF 2) When M8026 is ON
Command Command
S2  S2 
D
S1  S1 
D
(M8029) (M8029)
Related devices
Instruction
M8029 Turns ON when D becomes equivalent to S2 after "n" operation cycles.
execution complete
M8026*1 RAMP mode Refer to the operation of the mode flag M8026 described above.
*1. M8026 is available only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, and is cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to
STOP.
Caution
1. When specifying a latched (battery backed) type device as D
When setting PLC to the RUN mode while the command input is ON, clear D in advance.
414
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control
11
14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction is suitable for efficient control of the rotary table for putting/taking a product into/out of the rotary table. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
ROTC 9 steps ROTC Continuous


Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Data register for counting 16-bit binary

m1 Number of divisions 16-bit binary 14
m2 Number of low-speed sections 16-bit binary
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D Head bit device number to be driven Bit
Oper-
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S   
m1  
m2  
D      16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
: "D.b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
415

1. 16-bit operation (ROTC)
The table rotation is controlled by "m2", S and D so that a product can be efficiently put into or taken out of
the rotary table divided into "m1" (=10) sections as shown in the figure below.
S m1 m2 D
Command
FNC 68 D200 K10 K2 M0
ROTC
Calling Number Number Calling
Port No. 0 condition of of low- condition
register divisions speed register
Zero point (word device) sections (bit device)
Product
detection
8
9 7
X000(M0)
0 6
Detection Forward rotation

switch
1 5
X001(M1)
Port No. 1
2 4
3
Rotary table
1) Register (word device) specifying the calling condition S
S Works as a register for counting.
S +1 Sets the port No. to be called. Set them in advance using a transfer instruction.
S +2 Sets the product No. to be called.
2) Register (bit device) specifying the calling condition D
D : A phase signal
D +1 B phase signal
D +2 Zero point detection signal
D +3 Forward rotation at high-speed Construct an internal contact circuit in advance which is driven
Forward rotation at low-speed by the input signal (X)
D +4
D +5 Stop
D +6 Backward rotation at low-speed
D +7 Backward rotation at high-speed
416
11
Operation conditions
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The conditions required to use this instruction are as shown in the example below.
1) Rotation detection signal: X → D
- Provide a 2-phase switch (X000 and X001) for detecting the rotation direction (forward or backward) of the table
and the switch X002 which turns ON when the product No. 0 reaches the port No. 0.
- Create the sequence program shown below. 12
2-phase switch
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D
X000 A
M0 phase
D  +1 Up-counting signal during forward rotation
X001 B
M1 phase
13
D  +2
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
X002
M2 Zero point detection switch
X000 to X002 are replaced with internal contacts of D to D +2.

An arbitrary head device number can be specified by X or D .
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
2) Specification of a register for counting: S
The counter S detects which number of product is located at the port No. 0.
3) Registers specifying the calling condition:
S +1 and S +2
a) Set the port No. to be called in S +1.
b) Set the product No. to be called in S +2. 15
4) Number of divisions m1 and number of low-speed sections m2
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Specify the number of divisions m1 of the table, and number of low-speed sections m2.
When the above conditions are specified, forward/backward rotation and high-speed/low-speed/stop are output to
D +3 to D +7 specified by the head device D .
Cautions
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. Operations caused by the command input ON/OFF status
• When the command input is set to ON and this instruction is executed, the result will be automatically output to
D +3 to D +7.
• When the command input is set to OFF, D +3 to D +7 are set to OFF accordingly.
17
2. Multiple activation of the rotation detection signal ( D to D +2) in one division
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
For example, when the rotation detection signal ( D to D +2) is activated 10 times in one division, set a value
multiplied by "10" to each division, port No. to be called and product No. to be called.
As a result, an intermediate value of the division number can be set to a low-speed section.
3. Zero point detection signal D

When the zero point detection signal (M2) turns ON while the command input is ON, the contents of the register for
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
counting S are cleared to "0".

This clear operation should be executed before starting the operation.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
417
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data
14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data
Outline
This instruction sorts a data table consisting of data (lines) and group data (columns) based on a specified group data
(column) sorted by line in ascending order. This instruction stores the group data (columns) in serial devices.
On the other hand, SORT2 (FNC149) instruction stores the data (lines) in serial devices facilitating the addition of data
(lines), and sorts a table in either ascending or descending order.
→ For SORT2 (FNC149) instruction, refer to Section 19.7.
SORT 11 steps SORT Continuous


Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing the data table [which occupies m1 × m2 points]
m1 Number of data (lines) [1 to 32]
m2 Number of group data (columns) [1 to 6] 16-bit binary
D Head device number storing the operation result [which occupies m1 × m2 points]
n Column number of the group data (column) used as the basis of sorting [1 to m2]
Oper-
Type
S  
m1  
m2  
D  
n    

1. 16-bit operation (SORT)
In the data table (sorting source) having (m1 × m2) points from S , data lines are sorted in the ascending order
based on the group data in the column No. "n", and the result is stored in the data table (sorting result) having (m1 ×
m2) points from D .
→ For operation examples, refer to the next page.
Command
input FNC 69 S m1 m2 D n
SORT
Instruction execution complete flag

M8029
M{{ Instruction execution complete flag for SORT instruction
418
11
• The data table configuration is explained in an example in which the sorting source data table has 3 lines and 4
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
columns (m1 = K3, m2 = K4). For the sorting result data table, understand S as D .
Column No. Number of groups (m2 = K4)
1 2 3 4
Line No. Control number Height Weight Age
1 S S +3 S +6 S +9
12
Number of
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
data 2 S +1 S +4 S +7 S +10
m1 = K3
3 S +2 S +5 S +8 S +11
• When the command input turns ON, data sorting is started. Data sorting is completed after "m1" scans, and the
instruction execution complete flag M8029 is set to ON.
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
When the instruction is executed with "n = K2 (column No. 2)" and "n = K3 (column No. 3) for the following sorting
source data, the operations shown below are acquired.
It is recommended to put a serial number such as a control number in the first column so that the original line number
can be estimated based on the contents.
14
Sorting source data
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1 2 3 4
S S +5 S + 10 S + 15
1
1 150 45 20 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S +1 S +6 S + 11 S + 16
2
2 180 50 40
Number of
S +2 S +7 S + 12 S + 17
data 3
m1 = K5 3 160 70 30
4
S +3 S +8 S + 13 S + 18 16
4 100 20 8
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S +4 S +9 S + 14 S + 19
5
5 150 50 45
1) Sorting result when the instruction is executed with "n = K2 (column No. 2)"
Line No.
Column No. 1
Control number
2
Height
3
Weight Age
4
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D D +5 D + 10 D +15
1
4 100 20 8
D +1 D +6 D + 11 D + 16
2
1 150 45 20
3
D +2 D +7 D + 12 D + 17 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
5 150 50 45
D +3 D +8 D + 13 D + 18
4
3 160 70 30
D +4 D +9 D + 14 D + 19
5
2 180 50 40
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
419
Column No. 1 2 3 4
D D +5 D + 10 D + 15
1
4 100 20 8
D +1 D +6 D + 11 D + 16
2
1 150 45 20
D +2 D +7 D + 12 D + 17
3
2 180 50 40
D +3 D +8 D + 13 D + 18
4
5 150 50 45
D +4 D +9 D + 14 D + 19
5
3 160 70 30
Related device
Instruction
M8029 Turns ON when sorting is completed.
execution complete
Cautions
• Do not change the contents of operands and data while the instruction is executed.
• Before executing the instruction again, set the command input to OFF.
• Limitation in the number of instructions
Only one instruction can be used in a program.
• When the same device is specified in S and D
The source data is overwritten by the data acquired by sorting.
Take special care so that the contents of S are not changed until execution is completed.
420
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
15. External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
FNC 70 to FNC 79 provide instructions to receive data from and send data to external devices mainly using inputs and 12
outputs in PLC.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Because these instructions easily achieve complicated controls with a minimum required sequence program and
external wiring, they are similar to handy instructions described in the preceding chapter.
FROM and TO instructions, essential for controlling special units and special blocks, are included in this group. (In
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, transfer can be also executed using a MOV instruction.)
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
70 TKY TKY S D1 D2 Ten Key Input Section 15.1
71 HKY HKY S D1 D2 D3 Hexadecimal Input Section 15.2

14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
72 DSW DSW S D1 D2 n Digital switch (thumbwheel input) Section 15.3
73 SEGD SEGD S D Seven Segment Decoder Section 15.4
74 SEGL SEGL S D n Seven Segment With Latch Section 15.5

15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
75 ARWS ARWS S D1 D2 n Arrow Switch Section 15.6
76 ASC ASC S D ASCII code data input Section 15.7

16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
77 PR PR S D Print (ASCII Code) Section 15.8
78 FROM FROM m1 m2 D n Read From A Special Function Block Section 15.9
Section
17
79 TO TO m1 m2 S n Write To A Special Function Block
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
15.10
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
421
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input
15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input
Outline
This instruction sets data for timers and counters through ten key inputs ranging from "0" to "9".
D TKY 7 steps TKY Continuous
13 steps DTKY Continuous
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Head bit device number from which one of the ten keys is input [10 devices are occupied] Bit
D1 Word device number storing the data 16- or 32-bit binary
D2 Head bit device number storing the key pressing information [11 devices are occupied] Bit
Oper-
Type
S      
D1           
D2     

1. 16-bit operation (TKY)
D1 stores a numeric value input from S to S +9 connected to the ten keys. Output information for key
pressing and key sensing are output to D2 to D2 +10.
1) Input numeric value D1
- When an input value is larger than "9999", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- An input numeric value is stored in binary format.
- When the ten keys are pressed in the order "[1] → [2] → [3] → [4]" in the figure shown on the next page, "2130"
is stored in D1 .
422
11
2) Key pressing information [ D2 to D2 +10]
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
- For the key pressing information, D2 to D2 +9 turn ON or OFF according to the pressed keys.
- For the key sensing output, D2 +10 turns ON when any key is pressed.
Command S [4]
input FNC 70
TKY
S D1  D2 
12
Input form ten keys

S  +1 [2]
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
The figure below shows an example of FX3U PLC (sink input). S  +2 [1]
For wiring details, refer to the following manual.
→ FX3U Hardware Edition.
→ FX3UC Hardware Edition. S  +3 [3]
Ten keys → 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
13
S  +9
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D2 
Output information for key

24V 0V S/S S S S S S S S S S S
pressing information
+1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 D2  +1
14
D2  +2
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
PLC
D2  +3
D2  +9 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D2  +10 [1] [2] [3] [4]
Key sensing output
"2130" is stored in D1  .
2. 32-bit operation (DTKY)

16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
[ D1 +1, D1 ] store a numeric value input from S to S +9 connected to the ten keys.
Output information for key pressing and key sensing are output to D2 to D2 +10.
1) Input numeric value [ D1 ]
- When an input value is larger than "99,999,999", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- An input numeric value is stored in binary format. 17
2) Key pressing information [ D2 to D2 +10]
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
- For the key pressing information, D2 to D2 +9 turn ON or OFF according to the pressed keys.
- For the key sensing output, D2 +10 turns ON when any key is pressed.
Command
input FNC 70
DTKY
S D1  D2 
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
For the ten-key connection example and key pressing information, refer to the 16-bit operation (TKY) shown above.
Cautions
1. When two or more keys are pressed at the same time
In such a case, only the first key pressed is valid. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Though the contents of D1 do not change, all of D2 to D2 +10 turn OFF.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
423
3. Number of occupied device

1) Ten bit devices are occupied from S for connecting the ten keys.
Because these devices are occupied even if the ten keys are not connected, they cannot be used for any other
purpose.
2) Eleven bit devices are occupied from D2 for outputting the key pressing information.
- D2 to D2 +9: Turn ON or OFF according to input of the ten keys "0" to "9".
- D2 +10: Is ON while either one among "0" to "9" keys is pressed (key sensing output).

The TKY or DTKY instruction can only be used once in a program.
When the TKY and/or DTKY instruction need to be used two or more times, use the indexing (V, Z) function.
Program example
In the program example shown below, the input X000 is set as the head bit device, and the ten keys "0" to "9" are
connected.
1. Program
S D1  D2 
X030
FNC 70 X000 D0 M10
TKY
2. Connection diagram
This connection diagram shows an example of FX3U PLC (sink input).
→ FX3U Hardware Edition
→ FX3UC Hardware Edition
Ten keys → 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V 0V S/S X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 X010 X011
PLC
3. Timing chart
X000 [4]
1) When the ten keys are pressed in the order "[1] → [2] → [3]
→ [4]" shown in the figure, "2130" is stored in (D0). X001 [2]
When an input value is larger than "9999", it overflows from
the most significant digit. X002 [1]
(An input numeric value is stored in binary format in D0).
2) When X002 is pressed, M12 turns ON and remains ON until X003 [3]
another key is pressed. Other keys work in the same way.
In this way, M10 to M19 turn ON and OFF according to the X011
inputs X000 to X011.
3) When pressing a key, the key sensing output M20 is ON only M 10
while it is pressed.
M 11
M 12
M 13
M 19
M 20 [1] [2] [3] [4]

Key sensing output
424
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input
11
15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction multiplexes four X-devices and four Y-devices to allow for 16 key (0 to F) 4-digit (byte) input. Keys 0 to
9 stores numerical values, and keys A to F represent function keys. 12
When the extension function is set to ON, hexadecimal keys 0 to F all store their corresponding numerical values.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D HKY
13
Continuous Continuous
9 steps HKY Operation 17 steps DHKY Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Head X device number to be used (Four devices occupied.) Bit
D1 Head Y device number to be used (Four devices occupied.) Bit

14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D2 Device number storing the numerical input from the 16 keys 16- or 32-bit binary
Head bit device number storing the key pressing information
D3 Bit
(Eight devices are occupied.)
15
Oper-
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S  
D1  
16
D2        
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D3     
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (HKY)
signals [ S to S +3] and [ D1 to D1 +3] connected to the 16 key input (0 to F) are scanned.
When a key 0 to 9 is pressed, the corresponding numeric value is shifted into D2 from the least significant byte, and
D3 +7 turns ON.
When a key A to F is pressed, the corresponding key press information bit [ D3 to D3 +5] turns ON, and D3 +6
turns ON.
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Command
input FNC 71 S D1  D2  D3 
HKY
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
425
1) Input of a numeric value through keys 0 to 9:

- When an input value is larger than "9999", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- The numeric value input is stored to D2 in binary.
- The key sensing output D3 +7 turns ON when any key 0 to 9 is pressed.
2) Key pressing information for the keys A to F:
- Six devices starting from D3 corresponding to keys A through F turn ON.
- The key sensing output D3 +6 turns ON when any key A through F is pressed.
Key Key pressing information Key Key pressing information
A D3 D D3 +3
B D3 +1 E D3 +4
C D3 +2 F D3 +5
2. 32-bit operation (DHKY)

Signals [ S to S +3] and [ D1 to D1 +3] connected to the 16 key input (0 to F) are scanned.
When a key 0 to 9 is pressed, the corresponding numeric value is shifted into [ D2 +1, D2 ] from the least
significant byte, and D3 +7 turns ON.
When a key A to F is pressed, the corresponding key press information bit [ D3 to D3 +5] turns ON. and D3 +6
turns ON.
Command
input FNC 71 S D1  D2  D3 
DHKY
1) Input of a numeric value through keys 0 to 9:

- When an input value is larger than "99,999,999", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- The numeric value input is stored to [ D2 +1, D2 ] in binary.
- The key sensing output D3 +7 turns ON when any key 0 to 9 is pressed.
2) Key pressing information for the keys A to F:
Six devices starting from D3 corresponding to keys A to F turn ON.
The key sensing output D3 +6 turns ON when any key A to F is pressed.
Extension function
When M8167 is set to ON making the extension function valid, the numerical values for keys 0 to F are stored in
binary.
When the extension function is valid, the function and operation are the same except for the following.
1. 16-bit operation (HKY)

Hexadecimal numerical value data input using keys 0 to F is shifted into D2 from the least significant byte.
1) Input of a numeric value using keys 0 to F:
- When the input value is larger than "FFFF", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- Example:
When "1 → 2 → 3 → B → F" is input, numerical value "23BF" is stored in D2 in binary.
"1" overflows when "F" is input.
Command
input
M8167
FNC 71 S D1  D2  D3 
HKY
426
11
2. 32-bit operation (DHKY)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Hexadecimal numerical value data input using keys 0 to F is shifted into [ D2 +1, D2 ] from the least significant
byte.
1) Input of a numeric value using keys 0 to F:
- When the input value is larger than "FFFFFFFF", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- Example: 12
When "9 → 2 → 3 → B → F → A → F" is input, numerical value "923BFAF" is stored in [ D2 +1, D2 ] in
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
binary.
Command
input
M8167
FNC 71
13
S D1  D2  D3 
DHKY
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Related devices
Device Name Description 14
Turns ON/OFF the hexadecimal data handling function of HKY (FNC 71) instruction.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
M8167 Extension function flag OFF: Ten-keys and function keys
ON: Hexadecimal keys
OFF: Data is being output to D1 to D1 +3 or the instruction is not executed yet.

M8029 ON: A cycle operation of outputting data to D1 to D1 +3 (scan of the keys 0 to F) is
plete flag
completed.
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Cautions
The HKY or DHKY instruction can only be used once in a program.
When the TKY and/or DTKY instruction should be used two or more times, use the indexing (V, Z) function.
16
2. When two or more keys are pressed at the same time
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
In such a case, the first key pressed is valid.

Though the contents of D2 do not change, D3 to D3 +7 turn OFF.
4. Number of devices occupied 17

1) Four devices are occupied from the head X device for connecting 16 keys.
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
S
2) Four devices are occupied from the head Y device D1 for connecting 16 keys.
3) Eight devices are occupied from the head device D3 for outputting the key pressing information.
Make sure that these devices are not used by other machine controls.
-
-
D3 to D3 +5: Key pressing information for the keys A to F
+6: Key sensing output for the keys A to F
18
D3
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
- D3 +7: Key sensing output for the keys 0 to 9
5. Key input receiving timing

HKY and DHKY instructions are executed in synchronization with the operation cycle of the PLC.
8 scan cycles are required to finish reading the keys.
To prevent key input receiving errors caused by the filter delay, utilize the "constant scan mode" and "timer interrupt" 19
function.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
6. Caution on use in timer interrupt programs

When the HKY instruction is used in a timer interrupt program, it turns ON M8029 in the interrupt program.
7. Output format
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
427
Program example
S D1  D2  D3 
X004
FNC 71 X000 Y000 D 0 M 0
HKY
→ FX3U Hardware Edition
→ FX3UC Hardware Edition
External
wiring C D E F
8 9 A B
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
24V 0V S/S X000 X001 X002 X003

PLC
Transistor output
COM1 Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003
428
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)
11
15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction reads the set value of digital switches.
This instruction can read a set of 4 digits (n = K1) or two sets of 4 digits (n = K2). 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
DSW Continuous
9 steps DSW Operation 
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Head device (X) number connected to a digital switch
S Bit
(Four devices are occupied.)
D1
Head device (Y) number to which the strobe signal is output
(Four devices are occupied.)
Bit 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Device number storing the numeric value of a digital switch
D2 16-bit binary
("n" devices are occupied.)
n Total number of 4-digit switch sets (4 digits/set) (n = 1 or 2) 16-bit binary
15
Oper-
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S  
D1  
16
D2    1 2   
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
n  

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (DSW)
The value of each digital switch connected to S is input by the time division method (in which the value is input in
turn from the 1st digit by the output signal at the interval of 100 ms), and stored to D2 .
Strobe
Command
input
signal 18
FNC 72 S D1  D2  n
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
DSW
1) Data D1
- A numeric value from 0 to 9999 (up to 4 digits) can be read.
- A numeric value is stored in binary format.
- The first set is stored to D2 , and the second set is stored to D2 +1. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
429
2) Specification of the number of sets ("n")

- When using one set of 4 digits [n = k1]
A 4-digit BCD digital switch connected to S to S +3 is read in turn by the strobe signal D1 to
D1 +3, and stored in binary format to D2 .
- When using two sets of 4 digits [n = k2]
A 4-digit BCD digital switch connected to S to S +3 is read in turn by the strobe signal D1 to
D1 +3, and stored in binary format to D2 .
A 4-digit BCD digital switch connected to S +4 to S +7 is read in turn by the strobe signal D1 to
D1 +3, and stored in binary format to D2 +1.
Related devices
OFF: Data is being output to D1 to D1 +3 or the instruction is not executed yet.

M8029 ON: A cycle operation of outputting data to D1 to D1 +3 (scan of the 1st to 4th
plete flag
digits) is completed.
Cautions
Though the contents of D2 do not change, all of D1 to D1 +3 turn OFF.

1) When two sets of 4 digits (n = K2) are used, two devices are occupied starting from D2 .
2) When one set of 4 digits is used, four devices are occupied starting from S . When two sets of 4 digits are
used, eight devices are occupied starting from S .
3. When connecting a digital switch of up to 3 digits

It is not necessary to wire the strobe signal (output for digit specification) D1 to unused digits. Because unused
digits are occupied also by this instruction, however, they cannot be used for any other purpose. Make sure to leave
unused outputs are left vacant.
4. Transistor output type is recommended

For continuously receiving digital switch values, make sure to use a transistor output type PLC.
→ For a relay type PLC, refer to "4. How to use this instruction in a relay output type PLC" later.
5. Digital switches
Use BCD output type digital switches.
Program example
In the program example shown below, digital switches are connected to inputs starting from X010 and outputs from
Y010.
1. Program
S D1  D2  n
X000
FNC 72 X010 Y010 D 0 K 1
DSW
430
11
2. Connection diagram
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
100 To
101 second
102 set
103 12
BCD type 100 101 102 103
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
digital
switch BCD type
digital
Diode of switch
0.1 A, 50 V
is required. 13
1 To
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2 second
3 set
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8 4
24V 0V S/S X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017
Inputs of first set Inputs of second set
14
PLC
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
COM3 Y010 Y011 Y012 Y013
100 101 102 103
3. Timing chart 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X000
Repeated
Y010 0.1 sec operation 0.1 sec 0.1 sec
Y011 0.1 sec
Y012 0.1 sec Pause 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Y013 0.1 sec
M8029 Complete flag

While X000 is ON, Y010 to Y013 turn ON in turn at every 100 ms. After one cycle is finished, the execution complete
flag M8029 turns ON.
4. How to use this instruction in a relay output type PLC

17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
By providing a "digital switch read input", this instruction can be used in a relay output type PLC.
When the push button switch (X000) is pressed, DSW (FNC 72) instruction executes a series of operations.
Accordingly, with regard to this program, it is not necessary to consider the relay contact life even if Y010 to Y013 are
relay outputs.
X000
18
SET M 0
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
M 0
FNC 72 X010 Y010 D 0 K 1
DSW
M8029
RST M 0 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
1) While M0 (digital switch read input) is ON, DSW (FNC 72) is driven.
2) DSW (FNC 72) completes one cycle of operation, and remains driven until the execution complete flag (M8029)
turns ON.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
431
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder
15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder
Outline
This instruction decodes data, and turns the seven-segment display unit (1 digit) ON.
SEGD P 5 steps SEGD
Continuous

Operation
SEGDP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S Head word device to be decoded 16-bit binary
D Word device number storing the data to be displayed in the seven-segment display unit 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S              
D           

1. 16-bit operation (SEGD and SEGDP)
"0" to "F" (hexadecimal numbers) in low-order 4 bits (1 digit) of S are decoded to data for the seven-segment
display unit, and stored in the low-order 8 bits of D .
Command
SEGD
432
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder
11
2. Seven-segment decoding table
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
S D
Hexadeci- Seven-segment Display
mal num- b3 b2 b1 b0 configuration B15 ... B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 data
ber
0 0 0 0 0 − − 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1 0 0 0 1 − − 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 − − 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1
3 0 0 1 1 − − 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
4 0 1 0 0 − − 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
5 0 1 0 1 − − 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0 − − 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
14
7 0 1 1 1 − − 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
8 1 0 0 0 − − 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 1 0 0 1 − − 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
A 1 0 1 0 − − 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
B 1 0 1 1 − − 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
C 1 1 0 0 − − 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
D 1 1 0 1 − − 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
E 1 1 1 0 − − 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1
F 1 1 1 1 − − 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
17
The head bit device or the least significant bit
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
of a word device is handled as B0.
Caution
Low-order 8 bits of D are occupied, and high-order 8 bits do not change.
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
433
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch
15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch
Outline
This instruction controls one or two sets of 4-digit seven-segment display units having the latch function.
SEGL Continuous
7 steps SEGL Operation 
2. Set data
S Head word device converted into the BCD format 16-bit binary
D Head Y number to be output Bit

n Parameter number [setting range: K0 (H0) to K7 (H7)] 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S        1 2     
D  
n  


1. 16-bit operation (SEGL)
The 4-digit numeric value stored in S is converted into BCD data, and each digit is output to the seven-segment
display unit with the BCD decoder by the time division method.
Command
SEGL
When using one set of 4 digits (n = K0 to K3)

→ For selection of "n", refer to Subsection 15.5.2.
1) Data and strobe signal
A 4-digit numeric value stored in S is converted from binary into BCD, and each digit is output in turn from
D to D +3 by the time division method.
The strobe signal is output in turn from D +4 to D +7 by the time division method also to latch one set of 4-
digit seven-segment display unit.
2) For S , binary data ranging from 0 to 9999 is valid.
434
11
3) Example of connecting one seven-segment display unit
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink output).
PLC (transistor output type)

12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
COM D  D  +1 D  +2 D  +3 D  +4 D  +5 D  +6 D  +7
1 2 4 8 100 101 102 103
103 102 101 100 13

V+
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
1
2
4
8
1st set
14
When using two sets of 4 digits (n = K4 to K7)
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
→ For selection of "n", refer to Subsection 15.5.2.
1) Data and strobe signal
a) 1st set of 4 digits
A 4-digit numeric value stored in S is converted from binary into BCD, and its each digit is output in turn
from D to D +3 by the time division method.
The strobe signal is output in turn from D +4 to D +7 by the time division method also to latch the first
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
set of 4-digit seven-segment display unit.
b) 2nd set of 4 digits
A 4-digit numeric value stored in S +1 is converted from binary into BCD, and its each digit is output in turn
from D +10 to D +13 by the time division method.
The strobe signal is output in turn from D +4 to D +7 by the time division method also to latch the
second set of 4-digit seven-segment display unit. (The strobe signal outputs D +4 to D +7 are shared
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
by the 1st and 2nd sets.)
2) For S and S +1, binary data ranging from 0 to 9999 is valid.
3) Example of connecting two seven-segment display units
The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink output).
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
PLC
(transistor output type)
COM D  D  +1 D  +2 D  +3 D  +4 D  +5 D  +6 D  +7 COM D  +10 D  +11 D  +12 D  +13
1 2 4 8 100 101 102 103 1 2 4 8
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
103 102 101 100 103 102 101 100

V+ V+
1 1
2 2
4
4
8 8 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
1st set 2nd set
Related devices
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

M8029 Turns ON when output of 4 digits is finished.
plete flag
435
Cautions
1. Time to update the 4-digit seven-segment display
The scan time (operation cycle) multiplied by 12 is required to update (one or two sets of) the 4-digit display.
2. Operation when the command input turns OFF

While the command input is ON, the operation is repeated.
When the command contact is set to OFF in the middle of an operation, the operation is paused. When the command
contact is set to ON again, the operation is started from the beginning.

When one set of 4 digits is used: 1 device is occupied from the head device specified in S .
8 devices are occupied from the head device specified in D . Even if the
number of digits is smaller than 4, unused devices cannot be used for any
other purpose.
When two sets of 4 digits are used: 2 devices are occupied from the head device specified in S .
Twelve devices are occupied from the head device specified in D . Even if
the number of digits is smaller than 4, unused devices cannot be used for any
other purpose.
4. Scan time (operation cycle) and the display timing

SEGL instruction is executed in synchronization with the scan time (operation cycle) of the PLC.
For achieving a series of display, the scan time of the PLC should be 10 ms or more.
If the scan time is less than 10 ms, use the constant scan mode so that the scan time exceeds 10 ms.

When the SEGL instruction is used in a timer interrupt program, it turns ON M8029 in the interrupt program.
6. Output type of the PLC

436
11
15.5.1 How to select a seven-segment display unit
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When selecting a seven-segment display unit based on its electrical characteristics, refer to the manual below:
→ For the wiring, refer to the Hardware Edition of the PLC used.
1. Points to be checked for the seven-segment specifications

1) The input voltage and current characteristics of the data input and strobe signal satisfy the output specifications of 12
the PLC.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
- The input signal voltage (Lo) is approximately 1.5 V or less
- The input voltage is from 5V DC to 30V DC
2) The seven-segment display unit has the BCD decoding and latch functions
15.5.2 How to select parameter "n" based on seven-segment display specifications 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
The value set to the parameter "n" varies depending on the signal logic of the seven-segment display. Select "n" as
described below.
The check column is provided at the bottom of the table. Check a corresponding type of logic (positive or negative),
and utilize it for parameter setting.
1. Role of the parameter "n" 14

The parameter "n" should be determined according to the data input logic (positive or negative) of the seven-segment
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
display unit, the logic (positive or negative) of the strobe signal and the number of sets of 4 digits to be controlled (1 or
2).
2. Checking the output logic of the PLC

Transistor outputs in PLCs are classified into the sink output type and source output type. The table below shows the
specifications for each type. 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Logic Negative logic Positive logic
Output type Sink output (− common) Source output (+ common)
Pull-up V+
+V0
resistor ON
16
Logic 1 HIGH
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Output circuit Y000 Logic 1
Y000
ON
LOW Pull-
down
COM1 resistor
PLC PLC
17
Because transistor output (sink) is provided, the output Because transistor output (source) is provided, the output
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Description becomes low level (0 V) when the internal logic is "1 (ON becomes high level (V+) when the internal logic is "1 (ON
output)". This is called "negative logic". output)". This is called "positive logic".
Check
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
437
3. Confirming the logic of the seven-segment display unit

1) Data input
D H L H L D H H
1 1
D  +1 2
H L D  +1 2
H
H
Timing chart D  +2 4 D  +2 4
D  +3 8 H
D  +3 8
Seven-segment Seven-segment
display display
Description BCD data at low level BCD data at high level
Check
2) Strobe signal
D 1 H D 1 H
...
...
...
...
D  +3 8 D  +3 8
Timing chart
D  +4 to D  +7 L H L H D  +4 to D  +7 H H
Change in Change in
strobe display Nothing Nothing strobe display Nothing Nothing
Latch Latch
Description Data latched at low level is held. Data latched at high level is held.
Check
4. Setting the parameter "n"

Set a proper value according to the logic (positive or negative) of the PLC and the logic (positive or negative) of the
seven-segment display unit as shown in the table below:
Parameter "n"
PLC output logic Data input Strobe signal
4 digits × 1 set 4 digits × 2 sets
Negative logic (match) 0 4
Negative logic (match)
Positive logic (mismatch) 1 5
Negative logic
Positive logic (mismatch)
Positive logic (match) 0 4
Positive logic (match)
Negative logic (mismatch) 1 5
Positive logic
Positive logic (match) 2 6
Negative logic (mismatch)
Negative logic (mismatch) 3 7
5. Explanation of the parameter "n" setting method according to an actual example

When the following seven-segment display unit is selected, "n" should be "1" when one display unit is connected (4
digits × 1 set) or "5" when two display units are connected (4 digits × 2 sets).
1) Transistor output of PLC
- Sink output = Negative logic
- Source output = Positive logic
2) Seven-segment display unit
- Data input = Negative logic
- Strobe signal = Positive logic
Parameter "n"
PLC output logic Data input Strobe signal
4 digits × 1 set 4 digits × 2 sets
Negative logic (match)
Negative logic
Positive logic (mismatch)
438
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch
11
15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction inputs data through arrow switches used for shifting the digit and incrementing/decrementing the
numeric value in each digit. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
ARWS Continuous
9 steps ARWS Operation 
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Head bit device number to be input Bit
D1 Word device number storing data converted into BCD 16-bit binary
14
D2 Head bit device (Y) number connected to seven-segment display unit Bit
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
n Number of digits of seven-segment display unit [setting range: K0 to K3] 16-bit binary
Oper-
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 15
Type
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S      
D1        
16
D2  
n  
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89

Four arrow switches are connected to the inputs S to S +3, a seven-segment display unit having the BCD
decoder is connected to the outputs D2 to D2 +7, and a numeric value is input to D1 . 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (ARWS)
D1 actually stores a 16-bit binary value ranging from 0 to 9999, but the value is expressed in the BCD format in the
explanation below for convenience.
When the command input is set to ON, the ARWS instruction executes the following operation.
Command
input
FNC 75
18
S D1  D2  n
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
ARWS
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
439
Contents of the display and operation part
Display/operation panel
103
D2  +7
Strobe output
102
D2  +6
To outputs in
101
D2  +5 PLC
100
D2  +4
← Display for
selected digit
Seven-segment display unit

Equipped with the latch function so that a
numeric value being set can be seen.
Numeric value
D2  +3
4
output
Increment D2  +2 To outputs in
2 PLC
D2  +1
S  +1 1
D2 
Higher Lower S  +3
digit digit
Switches
S  +3 S  +2 S  +2 To inputs in
S PLC
S  +1
Decrement S
Arrow switches
Provided to select a digit and increment or
decrement the numeric value in the selected digit.
1) Specifying the number of digits of the seven-segment display unit having the BCD decoder n
In the explanation below, "n" is set to "4" (up to the 103 digit).
2) Operation of the digit selection switches ( S +2 and S +3)
- Operation when the lower digit input S +2 turns ON
Every time the lower digit switch is pressed, the digit specification changes in the way "103 → 102 → 101 → 100
→ 103".
- Operation when the higher digit input S +3 turns ON
Every time the higher digit switch is pressed, the digit specification changes in the way "103 → 100 → 101 → 102
→ 103".
3) Operation of the LED for displaying a selected digit ( D2 +4 to D2 +7)
A specified digit can be displayed by the LED offered by the strobe signals D2 +4 to D2 +7.
4) Operation of the switches for changing data in each digit ( S and S +1)
In a digit specified by a digit selection switch described above, data is changed as follows:
- When the increment input turns ON
Every time the increment switch is pressed, the contents of D1 change in the way "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 8 → 9
→ 0 → 1".
- When the decrement input turns ON
Every time the decrement switch is pressed, the contents of D1 change in the way "0 → 9 → 8 → 7 ... 1 → 0
→ 9".
The contents can be displayed in the seven-segment display unit.
As described above, a target numeric value can be written to D1 using a series of operation while looking at
the seven-segment display unit.
440
11
Cautions
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Setting of the parameter "n"
Refer to the explanation of parameter setting in the SEGL (FNC 74) instruction. The setting range is from 0 to 3 for the
ARWS instruction.
→ For the parameter setting, refer to Subsection 15.5.2.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
3. Scan time (operation cycle) and the display timing

ARWS instruction is executed in synchronization with the scan time (operation cycle) of the PLC.
For achieving a series of display, the scan time of the PLC should be 10 ms or more.
If the scan time is less than 10 ms, use the constant scan mode so that the scan time exceeds 10 ms. 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
1) Four input devices are occupied starting from S .
2) Eight output devices are occupied starting from D2 .
5. Limitation in the number of the instruction

ARWS instruction can only be used once in a program.
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
When ARWS instruction should be used two or more times, use the indexing (V, Z) function.
Program example
1. When changing the timer number and displaying the current value
1) Specifying the timer number using a 3-digit digital switch 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X010
X011
X012
X013
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
102 101 100

Y012 Y011 Y010
2) Setting the constant of the timer using the arrow switches 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004
Read 1
Y000
Y014 2
Y001
4
Y015 8
Y002 18
Write Y003
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Read
Set
Write
X004 X003 X002 X000 X001
Explanation of operation 19
Every time the read/write key is pressed, the read/write LED lights alternately.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
• In reading
Set the timer number using the digital switch, and then press the set switch (X003).
• In writing
Set a numeric value using the arrow switches while looking at the seven-segment display unit, and then press the
switch X003. 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
441
Program
T0 D300
T1 D301 Practical
timer circuit
T99 D399
X000
M0 Decrement
X001
M1 Increment
X002
M2 Higher digit
M8000
M3 Lower digit
RUN monitor
X004
FNC 66 M100
Read/write ALTP
M100
Y014 Read indication
M100
Y015 Write indication
Y014 X003
FNC 72 X010 Y010 Z K1
Read Set DSW
Digital switch → Z 4 digits × 1 set
Y014
FNC 74 T0Z Y000 K 1 4 digits × 1 set
Read SEGL Negative logic
T0Z → Seven-segment display unit
Y015
FNC 12 D300Z D511
Write MOVP
FNC 75 M0 D511 Y000 K1
ARWS
(M 0 to M 3) → (D511) → (Y000 to Y007)
→ Seven-segment display unit
4 digits × 1 set
Y015 X003
FNC 12 D511 D300Z
Write Set MOVP
442
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input
11
15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction converts a half-width alphanumeric character string into ASCII codes.
Use this instruction for selecting one among two or more messages and displaying it on an external display unit. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
ASC Continuous
11 steps ASC Operation 
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Character string
S Eight half-width alphanumeric characters input from a personal computer*1
(only ASCII codes)
D Head word device number storing ASCII data 16-bit binary 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
*1. The number of characters is fixed to 8. When ASCII code less than 8 characters is input, the space character
(H20) is stored in remaining D .
Oper-
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S *2
D      
*2. It is not necessary to attach quotes (" ") to the character string specified in S .
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (ASC)
The half-width alphanumeric characters specified in S are converted into ASCII codes, and each ASCII code is
transferred in turn to D . 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
• S can handle half-width characters A to Z, 0 to 9 and symbols (, but cannot handle regular-width characters).
A character string is entered when a program is created with a programming tool.
• D stores converted ASCII codes in the order of low-order 8 bits and high-order 8 bits by 2 characters/byte at
one time.
Command
input FNC 76
High-order 8
bits
Low-order 8
bits
18
S D
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
ASC D 42 (B) 41 (A)
Example: ABCDEFGH
D  +1 44 (D) 43 (C)
D  +2 46 (F) 45 (E)
19
D  +3 48 (H) 47 (G)
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
443
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input
Extension function
When M8161 is set to ON for making the extension function valid, a half-width alphanumeric character string specified
in S is converted into ASCII codes, and transferred in turn only to low-order 8 bits (1 byte) of D .
Command
input
M8161
FNC 76 S D
ASC
M8000 Example: ABCDEFGH

M8161
"H00" is stored in high-order 8 bits.
D S
High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits Character string
D 00 41 A
D +1 00 42 B
D +2 00 43 C
D +3 00 44 D
D +4 00 45 E
D +5 00 46 F
D +6 00 47 G
D +7 00 48 H
Related devices
8-bit processing mode for ASC (FNC 76), RS (FNC 80), ASCI (FNC 82), HEX (FNC 83) and
CCD (FNC 84) instructions
M8161 Extension function flag OFF: Two characters are stored to low-order 8 bits and high-order 8 bits in this order at one
time (2 characters/word).
ON: One character is stored to low-order 8 bits at one time (1 character/word).
Caution
1) While the extension function is OFF
- Four devices are occupied from D .
2) While the extension function is ON
- Eight devices are occupied from D .
2. When using RS (FNC 80), ASCI (FNC 82), HEX (FNC 83) and/or CCD (FNC 84) instructions
The extension function flag M8161 is also used for other instructions.
When using an instruction described above and the ASC instruction in the same program, make sure to set M8161 to
ON or OFF just before the ASC instruction so that M8161 does not apply to another instruction.
444
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code)
11
15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction outputs ASCII code data to outputs (Y) in parallel.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
PR Continuous
5 steps PR Operation 
2. Set data
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Character string
S Head device number storing ASCII code data
(only ASCII codes)
D Head output (Y) number to which ASCII code data is output Bit
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
S      15
D  
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
1. 16-bit operation (PR)
ASCII codes stored of S to S +3 are output to D to D +7 in turn by one character at a time in the time 16
division method.
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Command
PR
Eight bytes are sent from the low-order 8 bits (1 byte) of S first to the high-order 8 bits (1 byte) of S +3 at the end.
When data is stored from S to S +3 as shown in the table below, data is sent in the order of A to H of "2. 17
Timing chart".
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
S S +1 S +2 S +3
high-order 8 bits low-order 8 bits high-order 8 bits low-order 8 bits high-order 8 bits low-order 8 bits high-order 8 bits low-order 8 bits
B (H42) A (H41) D (H44) C (H43) F (H46) E (H45) H (H48) G (H47)
2. Timing chart 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Command input
D to D +7 Data A B C D H
T0
T0
T0
T0: Scan time (ms) 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
D +8 Strobe
D +9 Execution flag
Types of output signals

• D to D +7: Sending output ( D handles low-order bits, and D +7 handles high-order bits.) 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
• D +8: Strobe signal

• D +9: Execution flag which operates as shown in the above timing chart
445
Extension function
1. 16-byte serial output
The number of output characters varies depending on the ON/OFF status of the special auxiliary relay M8027.
While M8027 is OFF, 8-byte serial output (fixed to 8 characters) is executed. While M8027 is ON, 16-byte serial output
(1 to 16 characters) is executed.
In the example shown below, up to 16 characters (1 character/byte) are output to the display unit (external display unit
A6FD*1, for example).
It is supposed that data to be displayed is stored in hexadecimal codes in D300 to D307.
1) Program
X000
M8027
FNC 77
D300 Y020
PR
2) Connection example of the external display unit A6FD*1

The PLC shown in the example below is the FX2N-16EYT (sink output) connected to the FX3U-32M.
PLC
COM1 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y027 COM2 Y030 Y031 Y032 Y033
NC
12V
24V AC100/200V
∼
COM D 0 D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 STR AC AC
External display unit A6FD*1

LG
*1. A6FD was distributed only inside Japan, however, production of the external display unit A6FD was
terminated in November 2002.
3) Timing chart (while M8027 is ON)

Operation is started when X000 turns ON from OFF.
Drive input X000
Head Last
Data Y020 to Y027 character character*2
T T T T: Operation cycle
or interrupt time
Strobe Y030
Execution flag Y031
Execution complete flag M8029
*2. If "H00 (NULL code)" is contained in the data (16 characters), the character just before "H00 (NULL code)" is
handled as the last character.
Related devices
OFF: 8-byte serial output (fixed to 8 characters)
M8027*3 PR mode
ON: 16-byte serial output (1 to 16 characters)
*3. Cleared when the PR mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
446
11
Cautions
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Command input and instruction operation
While the command input is ON: Even if the command input is continuously ON, execution is completed after a
series of outputs.
M8029 turns ON when the command input turns OFF after M8027 turns ON and
execution is completed. 12
While the command input is OFF: All outputs are OFF.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
2. Relationship with the scan time (operation cycle)
This instruction is executed in synchronization with the scan time.
If the scan time is short, the constant scan mode can be used. If the scan mode is too long, the timer interrupt function
can be used.
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
4. When "00H (NULL code)" is contained in the data (while M8027 is ON)
The instruction is executed completely, and the data after "00H" is not output.
M8029 remains ON during one operation cycle.
5. Limitation in number of instructions

14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
The PR instruction can only be executed twice in a program.
If it is necessary to use the PR instruction 3 times or more, use the indexing (V, Z) function in programming.

When the PR instruction is used in a timer interrupt program, it turns ON M8029 in the interrupt program.
→ For details, refer to Subsection 36.5.2. 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
447
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block
15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block
Outline
This instruction reads the contents of buffer memories (BMF) in a special function unit/block attached to a PLC.
When a large capacity of buffer memory (BFM) data is read by this instruction, a watchdog timer error may occur.
When bad effect is not given to the control even if data to be read is divided, use RBFM (FNC278) instruction.
→ For RBFM (FNC278) instruction, refer to Section 31.1.
D FROM P 9 steps FROM
Continuous
17 steps DFROM
Continuous
Operation Operation
FROMP Pulse (Single) DFROMP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
Unit number of a special extension unit/block
m1 16- or 32-bit binary
(K0 to K7 from the right side of the main unit)
m2 Transfer source buffer memory (BFM) number 16- or 32-bit binary
D Transfer destination device number 16- or 32-bit binary

n Number of transfer points 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
m1    
m2    
D          
n    

1. 16-bit operation (FROM and FROMP)
→ For the common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction,
Special extension unit/block (BFM) → PLC (word device)

"n"-point 16-bit data starting from the buffer memory (BFM) # m2 inside a special function unit/block No. m1 are
transferred (read) to "n"-point 16-bit data starting from D inside a PLC.
Command
input FNC 78 m1 m2 D n
FROM
Number of transfer points
n = 1 to 32767
Transfer destination (PLC)
Transfer source BFM#
(Special extension unit/block)
m2 = 0 to 32766
Unit No.
m1 = 0 to 7
448
11
2. 32-bit operation (DFROM and DFROMP)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Special extension unit/block (BFM) → PLC (word device)
"n" 32-bit data starting from the buffer memory (BFM) # [m2+1, m2] inside a special extension unit/block No. m1 are
transferred (read) to "n" devices starting from [ D +1, D ] inside a PLC.
Command
input FNC 78
12
m1 m2 D n
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
DFROM
n = 1 to 16383
Transfer destination (PLC)
Transfer source BFM#
(Special extension unit/block)
m2 = 0 to 32765
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Unit No.
m1 = 0 to 7
Related devices
Disables or enables interrupts while FROM/TO instruction is executed.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
→ For details, refer to "Acceptance of interrupts while FROM/TO instruction is executed
(M8028)" on the next page.
M8028 Enable interrupt flag
OFF: Disables interrupts.
(Interrupts are executed after FROM/TO instruction is executed.)
ON: Enables interrupts.
15
Cautions
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
• Digit specification in bit device D
For the 16-bit operation instruction, specify K1 to K4. For the 32-bit operation instruction, specify K1 to K8.
• Note that the 32-bit values [m1+1, 1], [m2+1, m2] and [n+1, n] are valid when D or R is specified as "m1", "m2" or
"n" in a 32-bit instruction.
In the case of "DFROM D0 D2 D100 R0", "m1" is [D1, D0], "m2" is [D3, D2], and "n" is [R1, R0]. 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
449
Program examples
In programs, the contents of buffer memories (BFMs) in special extension units/blocks are read (transferred) to data
registers (D), extension registers (R) and auxiliary relays (M) with digit specification using the FROM instruction and
direct specification of buffer memories*1.
Example: When the BFM#4 (abnormal station information) in the CC-Link/LT master unit (whose unit number is fixed
to "0") built in the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) is read to D0
-In case of FROM instruction
M8000 FNC 78 K0 K4 D0 K1
FROM
Unit BFM#4 Transfer Number of
No. 0 destination transfer
points
-In case of MOV instruction

M8000 FNC 12 U0\G4 D0
MOV
Unit No. 0 Transfer
BFM#4 destination
Example: When the BFMs#0 to 3 (remote station connection information) in the CC-Link/LT master unit (whose unit
number is fixed to "0") built in the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) are read to D10 to D13
-In case of FROM instruction
M0 FNC 78 K0 K0 D10 K4
FROMP
No. 0 destination transfer
points
-In case of BMOV instruction

M0 FNC 15 U0\G0 D10 K4
BMOVP
Unit No. 0 Transfer Number of
BFM#0 destination transfer
points
450
11
15.9.1 Common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction (details)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Contents specified by operands
1. Unit number "m1" of a special extension unit/block
Use the unit number to specify which equipment FROM/TO instruction works for.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Setting range: K0 to K7
Unit
No. 0
Built-in Unit Unit Unit
CC-Link/LT No.1 No.2 No.3
FX3UC-
I/O Special Special I/O Special
13
32MT-
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
extension extension extension extension extension
LT(-2)
block block block block block
main unit
A unit number is automatically assigned to each special extension unit/block connected to a PLC.
The unit number is assigned in the way "No. 0 → No. 1 → No. 2 ..." starting from the equipment nearest to the main
unit. 14
When the main unit is the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2), the unit number is assigned in the way "No. 1 → No. 2 → No. 3 ..."
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
starting from the equipment nearest to the main unit because the CC-Link/LT master is built into the FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2).
2. Buffer memory (BFM) number "m2"

Up to 32767 16-bit RAM memories are built into a special extension unit/block, and they are called buffer memories.
Buffer memory numbers range from "0" to "32766" and their contents vary depending on the function of the extension 15
equipment.
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
• When BFMs are handled in a 32-bit instruction, a specified BFM stores low-order 16 bits, and a consecutive BFM
stores high-order 16-bits.
High-order Low-order
16 bits
BFM#10
16 bits
BFM#9 ← Specified BFM number
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
3. Number of transfer points "n"
Specify the number of transferred word devices in "n".

"n =2" in a 16-bit instruction indicates the same meaning with "n = 1" in a 32-bit instruction. 17
Specified devices Specified BFMs Specified devices Specified BFMs
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D100 BFM#5
D100 BFM#5
D101 #6
D101 #6
D102 #7
D103 #8
D102
D103
#7
#8 18
D104 #9
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
In the case of "n = 5" in a 16-bit In the case of "n = 2" in a 32-bit
instruction instruction
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
451
Acceptance of interrupts while FROM/TO instruction is executed (M8028)

1. While M8028 is OFF
While a FROM/TO instruction is being executed, interrupts are automatically disabled. Input interrupts and timer
interrupts are not executed.
Interrupts generated during the execution of FROM/TO instructions are immediately executed after the FROM/TO
instruction completes.
FROM/TO instructions can be used in interrupt programs.
2. While M8028 is ON
When an interrupt is generated during the execution of a FROM/TO instruction, the FROM/TO operation is
momentarily paused while the interrupt program executes. FROM/TO instructions cannot be used in interrupt
programs.
Action against watchdog timer error

1. Cause of watchdog timer error
A watchdog timer error may occur in the following cases:
1) When a large number of special extension equipment is connected
When a large number of special extension equipment (such as positioning units, cam switches, link units and
analog units) are connected, considerable time may be required to initialize buffer memories when the PLC mode
is set to RUN, the operation time may be long, and a watchdog timer error may occur.
2) When many FROM/TO instructions are driven at the same time
When many FROM/TO instructions are driven at the same time or when many buffer memories are transferred,
the operation time may be long, and a watchdog timer error may occur.
2. Countermeasures
1) Using RBFM (FNC278) or WBFM (FNC279) instruction [Ver. 2.20 or later]
→ For divided BFM read [RBFM (FNC278) instruction], refer to Section 31.1.
→ For divided BFM write [WBFM (FNC279) instruction], refer to Section 31.2.
2) Changing the watchdog timer time
By overwriting the contents of D8000 (watchdog timer time), the watchdog timer detection time can be changed.
When the program shown below is input, the sequence program after the input will be monitored with the new
watchdog timer time.
M8002
0
MOV
Initial pulse
FNC 07 If WDT (FNC 07) instruction is not programmed, the value of
WDT D8000 is valid during END processing.
3) Changing FROM/TO instruction execution timing

Shift FROM/TO instruction execution timing to make the operation time shorter.
Handling of special extension units/blocks

For the special extension unit/block connection method, number of connectable special extension units/blocks and
handling of I/O numbers, refer to the manuals of the PLC and each special extension unit/block.
452
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block
11
15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction writes data from a PLC to buffer memories (BFM) in a special function unit/block.
When a large capacity of data is written to buffer memories (BFM) by this instruction, a watchdog timer error may 12
occur. When splitting the data to be written does not affect the control, use WBFM (FNC279) instruction.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
→ For WBFM (FNC279) instruction, refer to Section 31.2.
D TO P 9 steps TO
Continuous
Operation 17 steps DTO
Continuous
Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
TOP Pulse (Single) DTOP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
m1
Unit number of a special extension unit/block
14
(K0 to K7 from the right side of the main unit)
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
m2 Transfer destination buffer memory (BFM) number 16- or 32-bit binary
S Device number storing the transfer source data 16- or 32-bit binary
n Number of transfer points 16- or 32-bit binary
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
m1    
m2     16
         
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S
n    

1. 16-bit operation (TO and TOP) 17
→ For the common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction, refer to Subsection 15.9.1.
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
PLC (word device) → Special extension unit/block (BFM)
"n"-point 16-bit data starting from S inside a PLC are transferred (written) to "n"-point buffer memories starting
from the buffer memory (BFM) # m2 inside a special function unit/block No. m1.
Command
input FNC 79 m1 m2 S n
18
TO
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

n = 1 to 32767
Transfer source (PLC)
Transfer destination (Special
extension unit/block) BFM#
m2 = 0 to 32766 19
Unit No.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
m1 = 0 to 7
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
453
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block
2. 32-bit operation (DTO and DTOP)

PLC (word device) → Special extension unit/block (BFM)
"n"-point 32-bit data starting from [ S , S +1] inside a PLC are transferred (written) to "n"-point buffer memories
starting from the buffer memory (BFM) # [m2+1, m2] inside a special extension unit/block No. m1.
Command
input FNC 79 m1 m2 S n
DTO
n = 1 to 16383
Transfer source (PLC)
Transfer destination (Special
extension unit/block) BFM#
m2 = 0 to 32765
Unit No.
m1 = 0 to 7
Related devices
Disables or enables interrupts while FROM/TO instruction is executed.
→ For details, refer to "Acceptance of interrupt while FROM/TO instruction is executed
(M8028)" in Subsection 15.9.1.
M8028 Enable interrupt flag
OFF: Disables interrupts.
(Interrupts are executed after FROM/TO instruction is executed.)
ON: Enables interrupts.
Cautions
• Digit specification in bit device S
For the 16-bit operation instruction, specify K1 to K4. For the 32-bit operation instruction, specify K1 to K8.
• Note that the 32-bit values [m1+1, 1], [m2+1, m2] and [n+1, n] are valid when D or R is specified as "m1", "m2" or
"n" in a 32-bit instruction.
In the case of "DTO D0 D2 D100 R0", "m1" is [D1, D0], "m2" is [D3, D2], and "n" is [R1, R0].
Program examples
In programs, the contents of data registers (D), extension registers (R), auxiliary relays (M) with digit specification and
constants (K and H) are written (transferred) to buffer memories (BFMs) in special extension units/blocks using the TO
instruction and direct specification of buffer memories*1.
Example: When writing "H0" to the BFM#27 (command) in the CC-Link/LT master unit (whose unit number is fixed to
"0") built in the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
-In case of TO instruction
M1 FNC 79 K0 K27 H0 K1
TOP
No. 0 source Transfer
data points
-In case of MOV instruction
M1 FNC 12 H0 U0\G27
MOVP
Transfer Unit No. 0
source BFM#27
data
454
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
16. External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
FNC 80 to FNC 89 provide control instructions for special adapters mainly connected to serial ports. 12
PID control loop instruction is included in this group.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
80 RS RS S m D n Serial Communication Section 16.1

13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
81 PRUN PRUN S D Parallel Run (Octal Mode) Section 16.2
82 ASCI ASCI S D n Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion Section 16.3
83 HEX HEX S D n ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Section 16.4 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
84 CCD CCD S D n Check Code Section 16.5
85 VRRD VRRD S D Volume Read Section 16.6

15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
86 VRSC VRSC S D Volume Scale Section 16.7
87 RS2 RS2 S m D n n1 Serial Communication 2 Section 16.8
88 PID PID S1 S2 S3 D PID Control Loop Section 16.9

16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
89 – –
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
455
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication
16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication
Outline
This instruction sends and receives data using non-protocol communication by way of a serial port (only ch1) in
accordance with RS-232C or RS-485 provided in the main unit.
RS 9 steps RS Continuous

Operation
2. Set data
16-bit binary or
S Head device of data registers storing data to be sent
character string
m Number of bytes of data to be sent [setting range: 0 to 4096] 16-bit binary
16-bit binary or
D Head device of data registers storing received data when receiving is completed
character string
n Number of bytes to be received [setting range: 0 to 4096] 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S   
m    
D   
n    

1. 16-bit operation (RS)
This instruction sends and receives data in non-protocol communication by way of serial ports in accordance with
RS-232C or RS-485 provided in the main unit.
→ For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
Command
input FNC 80 S m D n
RS
456
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication
11
Related devices
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Device Name Device Name
M8063*1 Serial communication error 1 D8063*1 Error code number of serial communication error
M8121*2 Sending wait flag D8120*3 Communication format setting

12
M8122*2 Sending request D8122*4 Remaining amount of data to be sent
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M8123*2 Receiving complete flag D8123*4 Amount of data already received
M8124 Carrier detection flag D8124 Header
M8129 Time-out check flag D8125 Terminator
*4
M8161 8-bit processing mode D8129*3 Time-out time setting
D8405 Communication parameter display 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D8419 Operation mode display
*1. Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs).
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN (in other PLCs).
*2. Cleared in the following cases:
• When the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP
• When the RS instruction is not driven
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
*3. Latched (battery or EEPROM backed).
*4. Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
System configuration
To use this instruction, it is necessary to attach one of the products shown in the table below to the main unit.
→ For the system configuration, refer to the respective PLC Hardware Edition manual.
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
PLC Communication type Option
RS-232C communication FX3G-232-BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB) (with FX3S-CNV-ADP)
FX3S
RS-485 communication FX3G-485-BD(-RJ) or FX3U-485ADP(-MB) (with FX3S-CNV-ADP)
FX3G
RS-232C communication
RS-485 communication
FX3G-232-BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB) (with FX3G-CNV-ADP)
FX3G-485-BD(-RJ) or FX3U-485ADP(-MB) (with FX3G-CNV-ADP)
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
FX3GC, RS-232C communication FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3UC(D,DS,DSS) RS-485 communication FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3U, RS-232C communication FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB) (with FX3U-CNV-BD)
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) RS-485 communication FX3U-485-BD or FX3U-485ADP(-MB) (with FX3U-CNV-BD)
17
Differences between the RS (FNC 80) instruction and RS2 (FNC 87) instruction
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Item RS2 instruction RS instruction Remarks
Up to 1 character
Header size 1 to 4 characters (bytes)
(byte) For the RS2 instruction, up to 4 characters (bytes)
Up to 1 character can be specified as a header or terminator.
Terminator size 1 to 4 characters (bytes)
(byte) 18
For the RS2 instruction, the check sum can be
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
automatically attached to the sent and received

The check sum should be
Attachment of check The check sum can be data.
attached by a user
sum automatically attached. In this case, however, make sure to use a
program.
terminator with the communication frame to be
sent and received.
For the RS2 instruction:
Ch0 is available only in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
19
Used channel number ch0, ch1, ch2 ch1
Ch2 is not available in FX3G PLC (14-point and
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
24-point type) and FX3S PLC.
Cautions
→ For other cautions, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
• The RS (FNC 80) instruction can be used for ch1 only (cannot be used for ch0/ch2). 20
• Do not drive two or more RS (FNC 80) and/or RS2 (FNC 87) instructions for the same port at the same time.
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
• It is not permitted to use an "RS (FNC 80)/RS2 (FNC 87)" instruction and an "IVCK (FNC270) to IVMC (FNC275)",
"ADPRW (FNC276)", "FLCRT (FNC300) to FLSTRD (FNC305)" instruction for the same port.
457
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode)
16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode)
Outline
This instruction handles the device number of S with digit specification and the device number of D as octal
numbers, and transfers data.
D PRUN P 5 steps PRUN
Continuous
9 steps DPRUN
Continuous
Operation Operation
PRUNP Pulse (Single) DPRUNP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Digit specification*1 16- or 32-bit binary
D Device number of transfer destination*1 16- or 32-bit binary
*1. Make sure that the least significant digit of a specified device number is "0".
Oper-
Type
S   
D   

1. 16-bit operation (PRUN and PRUNP)
Octal bit device → Decimal bit device
S D
Command
input FNC 81 K4X000 K4M0 X000 to X017 → M0 to M7, M10 to M17
PRUN
Octal bit device (X)

X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

Decimal bit device (M)
M8 and M9 do not change
458
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode)
11
Decimal bit device → Octal bit device
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Command S D
input
FNC 81 K4M0 K4Y000 M0 to M7, M10 to M17 → Y0 to Y17
PRUN

Not transferred 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

Octal bit device (Y) 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. 32-bit operation (DPRUN and DPRUNP)
Octal bit device → Decimal bit device
S D
Command
input FNC 81 K6X000 K6M0 X000 to X027 → M0 to M7, M10 to M17, M20 to M27
14
DPRUN
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Octal bit device (X)
X27 … X20 X17 … X10 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
M27 … M20 M19 M18 M17 … M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
M18 and M19 do not change

Decimal bit device → Octal bit device

16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S D
Command
input FNC 81 K6M0 K6Y000 M0 to M7, M10 to M17, M20 to M27 → Y000 to Y027
DPRUN

Not transferred Not transferred 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
M27 … M20 M19 M18 M17 … M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
Y27 … Y20 Y17 … Y10 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

Octal bit device (Y)
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
459
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion
16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion
Outline
This instruction converts hexadecimal code into ASCII code.
On the other hand, BINDA (FNC261) instruction converts binary data into ASCII code, and ESTR (FNC116) instruction
converts binary floating point data into ASCII code.
→ For BINDA (FNC261) instruction, refer to Section 29.6.
→ For ESTR (FNC116) instruction, refer to Section 18.4.
ASCI P Continuous 
7 steps ASCI Operation
ASCIP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing hexadecimal code to be converted 16-bit binary

Character string
D Head device number storing converted ASCII code
(only ASCII code)
Number of characters (digits) of hexadecimal code to be converted [setting range: 1 to
n 16-bit binary
256]
Oper-
Type
S        1 2     
D       1 2 
n  1  


1. 16-bit operation (ASCI and ASCIP)
"n" hexadecimal code characters (digits) stored in S and later are converted into ASCII code, and then stored to
the devices D and later.
The 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode options are available for this instruction. For operation in each mode, refer to the
proceeding pages.
Command
ASCI
460
11
2. 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF) (M8161 is also used for the RS, HEX, CCD and CRC
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
instructions.)
Each digit of hexadecimal data stored in S and later is converted into ASCII code, and transferred to the high-
order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of each device D and later. The number of digits (characters) to be converted is
specified by "n".
Each ASCII code is stored in either the high-order 8 bits or low-order 8 bits of each device D and later. 12
M8161 is used also for RS, HEX, CCD and CRC instructions. When using the 16-bit mode, set M8161 to normally
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
OFF. M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode
Command
input FNC 82
ASCI
S D n 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation
In the following program, conversion is executed as follows:
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode 14
X010
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
FNC 82 D100 D200 K4
ASCI
Devices after S
D100 = 0ABCH
D101 = 1234H
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D102 = 5678H
Number of specified digits (characters) and conversion result

n
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9
D
Low-order 8 bits of D200 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1] [8]
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
High-order 8 bits of D200 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1]
Low-order 8 bits of D201 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2]
High-order 8 bits of D201 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3]
Low-order 8 bits of D202 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4]
High-order 8 bits of D202
Low-order 8 bits of D203 Does not change
[C] [B]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[0]
[A]
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
High-order 8 bits of D203 [C] [B]
Low-order 8 bits of D204 [C]
Bit configuration in the case of "n = K4"

D 100 = 0ABCH
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
18
ASCII code
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
0 A B C [0] = 30H [1] = 31H [5] = 35H

[A] = 41H [2] = 32H [6] = 36H
D 200 [B] = 42H [3] = 33H [7] = 37H
[C] = 43H [4] = 34H [8] = 38H
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
[A] → 41H [0] → 30H 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
D 201
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
[C] → 43H [B] → 42H
• When outputting data in the BCD format for a printer, for example, it is necessary to convert binary data into BCD
data before executing this instruction. 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
461
3. 8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON)

(M8161 is used also for the RS, HEX, CCD and CRC instructions.)
Each digit of hexadecimal data stored in S and later is converted into an ASCII code, and transferred to low-order
8 bits of each device D and later. The number of digits (characters) to be converted is specified by "n". "0" is
stored in high-order 8 bits of each device D and later.
M8161 is used also for the RS, HEX, CCD and CRC instructions. When using the 8-bit mode, set M8161 to normally
ON. M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
M8000 When M8161 is set to ON, the 8-bit mode
M8161 8-bit mode is selected. The conversion processing is
Command
executed as follows
input 16 bits
FNC 82 S D n
ASCI 0 Low-order 8 bits
Destination
Operation
M8000
M8161 8-bit mode
X010
FNC 82 D100 D200 K4
ASCI
Devices after S
D100 = 0ABCH
D101 = 1234H
D102 = 5678H
Number of specified digits (characters) and conversion result

n
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9
D
D 200 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1] [8]
D 201 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1]
D 202 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2]
D 203 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3]
D 204 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4]
D 205 [C] [B] [A] [0]
D 206 Does not change [C] [B] [A]
D 207 [C] [B]
D 208 [C]
Bit configuration in the case of "n = K2"

D 100 = 0ABCH
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 ASCII codes
0 A B C [0] = 30H [1] = 31H [5] = 35H
[A] = 41H [2] = 32H [6] = 36H
D200 = B → ASCII code = 42H [B] = 42H [3] = 33H [7] = 37H
[C] = 43H [4] = 34H [8] = 38H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
4 2
D201 = C → ASCII code = 43H

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 3
• When outputting data in the BCD format for a printer, for example, it is necessary to convert binary data into BCD
data before executing this instruction.
462
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion
11
16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction converts ASCII codes into hexadecimal codes. 12
On the other hand, DABIN (FNC260) instruction converts ASCII codes into binary data, and EVAL (FNC117)
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
instruction converts ASCII codes into binary floating point data.
→ For DABIN (FNC260) instruction, refer to Section 29.5.
→ For EVAL (FNC117) instruction, refer to Section 18.5.
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
HEX P Continuous 
7 steps HEX Operation
HEXP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Character string
S Head device number storing ASCII code to be converted
(only ASCII code)*1
D Head device number storing converted hexadecimal code 16-bit binary

n Number of ASCII codes (bytes) to be converted [setting range: 1 to 256] 16-bit binary
15
*1. Make sure to use only ASCII codes "0" to "9" and "A" to "F".
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
Unit
U\G V Z Modify
stant
K H
Number ter String
E "" P
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S        1 2   
D       1 2   
n  1  

17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (HEX and HEXP)
Among the ASCII codes stored in S and later, "n" characters are converted into hexadecimal codes, and then
stored to the devices D and later. 18
The 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode are available for this instruction. For operation in each mode, refer to the proceeding
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
pages.
Command
input
FNC 83 S D n
HEX
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
463
2. 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF)

(M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, CCD, and CRC instructions.)
Each ASCII code stored in high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of devices S and later is converted into a
hexadecimal code, and transferred to devices D and later in units of 4 digits. The number of characters to be
converted is specified by "n".
M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, CCD and CRC instructions. When using the 16-bit mode, set M8161 to normally
OFF.
M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode
Command
HEX
Operation
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode
X010
FNC 83 D200 D100 K4
HEX
Conversion source data

S ASCII code Hexadecimal code
Low-order 8 bits of D200 30H 0
High-order 8 bits of D200 41H A
Low-order 8 bits of D201 42H B
High-order 8 bits of D201 43H C
High-order 8 bits of D202 32H 2
High-order 8 bits of D203 34H 4
Number of specified characters and conversion result

" • " indicates "0".
D In the case of "n = K4"

D 102 D 101 D 100
n D 200 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 •••0H
41H → [A] 30H → [0]
2 ••0AH
Does not change
3 •0ABH D 201 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
4 0ABCH 43H → [C] 42H → [B]
5 •••0H ABC1H
6 ••0AH BC12H D 100 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
7 •0ABH C123H 0 A B C
8 0ABCH 1234H
9 •••0H ABC1H 2345H
• When the input data is in BCD format, it is necessary to convert BCD data into binary data after executing this
instruction.
• If ASCII code is not stored in S in the HEX instruction, an operation error occurs and conversion into
hexadecimal code is disabled. Especially, note that ASCII code should be stored in high-order 8 bits of S also
when M8161 is OFF.
464
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
(M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, CCD and CRC instructions.)
Each ASCII code stored in the low-order 8 bits of each device S and later is converted into a hexadecimal code,
and transferred to device D and later in 4-digits units. The number of characters to be converted is specified by
"n".
M8161 is also used for the RS, ASCI, CCD and CRC instructions. When using the 8-bit mode, set M8161 to normally
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M8000
M8161 8-bit mode 16 bits
Command Ignored Low-order 8 bits
input FNC 83 S D n Source data
HEX
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation
M8000
M8161 8-bit mode
X010
FNC 83
14
D200 D100 K4
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
HEX
Conversion source data

S ASCII code Hexadecimal code
D 200
D 201
30H
41H
0
A
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D 202 42H B
D 203 43H C
D 204 31H 1
D 205 32H 2
D 206 33H 3 16
D 207 34H 4
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D 208 35H 5
Number of specified characters and conversion result

" • " indicates "0".
D
D 102 D 101 D 100
In the case of "n = K2" 17
n D 200 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1 •••0H
30H → [0]
2 ••0AH
Does not change
3 •0ABH D 201 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
4 0ABCH 41H → [A]
5 •••0H ABC1H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
18
D 100
6 ••0AH BC12H
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
7 •0ABH C123H 0 A
8 0ABCH 1234H
9 •••0H ABC1H 2345H
• When the input data is in BCD format, it is necessary to convert BCD data into binary data after executing this
instruction.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
465
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code
16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code
Outline
This instruction calculates the horizontal parity value and sum check value in the error check methods used in
communication. There is another check method, CRC (cyclic redundancy check) also. For obtaining CRC value, use
CRC instruction.
→ For CRC instruction, refer to Section 24.4.
→ For complement [NEG (FNC 29) instruction], refer to Section 10.10.
CCD P Continuous 
7 steps CCD Operation
CCDP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
16-bit binary or
S Head device number of applicable device
character string
16-bit binary or
D Head device number storing the calculated data
character string
n Number of data [setting range: 1 to 256] 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S        1 2 
D       1 
n  1  


1. 16-bit operation (CCD and CCDP)
The addition data and horizontal parity value of data stored in S to S +n-1 are calculated. The addition data is
stored to D , and the horizontal parity value is stored to D +1.
The 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode are available in this instruction. For the operation in each mode, refer to the
proceeding pages.
Command
input
FNC 84 S D n
CCD
466
11
2. 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF)
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
(M8161 is also used for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions.)
With regard to "n" data starting from S , the addition data and horizontal parity data of high-order 8 bits and low-
order 8 bits are stored to D and D +1 respectively.
M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions. When using the 16-bit mode, set M8161 to normally
OFF. M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP. 12
M8000
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M8161 16-bit mode
Command
input
FNC 84 S D n
CCD
13
Example of 16-bit conversion
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode
X010
FNC 84 D100 D0 K10 14
CCD
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S Example of data contents
Low-order 8 bits of D100 K100 = 01100100
High-order 8 bits of D100 K111 = 0110111 (1) ←
Low-order 8 bits of D101 K100 = 01100100 15
High-order 8 bits of D101 K 98 = 01100010
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Low-order 8 bits of D102 K123 = 0111101 (1) ←
Low-order 8 bits of D103 K100 = 01100100
High-order 8 bits of D103 K 95 = 0101111 (1) ←
Low-order 8 bits of D104 K210 = 11010010 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Total K1091
Horizontal parity 1000010 (1) ← When the number of "1" is odd, the horizontal parity is "1".
When the number of "1" is even, the horizontal parity is "0".
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 "1091" in BCD
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Horizontal parity
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
467

(M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions.)
With regard to "n" data starting from S , the addition data and horizontal parity data of only low-order 8 bits are
stored to D and D +1 respectively.
M8161 is also used for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions. When using the 8-bit mode, set M8161 to normally
M8000
M8161 8-bit mode 16 bits
Command
input Ignored Low-order 8 bits
FNC 84 S D n Source data
CCD
Example of 8-bit conversion

M8000
M8161 8-bit mode
X010
FNC 84 D100 D0 K10
CCD
S Example of data contents

D 100 K100 = 01100100
D 101 K111 = 0110111 (1) ←
D 102 K100 = 01100100
D 103 K 98 = 01100010
D 104 K123 = 0111101 (1) ←
D 105 K 66 = 01000010
D 106 K100 = 01100100
D 107 K 95 = 0101111 (1) ←
D 108 K210 = 11010010
D 109 K 88 = 01011000
Total K1091
Horizontal parity 1000010 (1) ← When the number of "1" is odd, the horizontal parity is "1".
When the number of "1" is even, the horizontal parity is "0".
D0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 "1091" in BCD
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Horizontal parity
468
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read
11
16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction reads the analog value of a variable analog potentiometer board attached to the PLC main unit. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
VRRD P Continuous 
5 steps VRRD Operation

VOLUME READ VRRDP Pulse (Single)
Operation 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Volume number [setting range: 0 to 7] 16-bit binary
D Device to which the read analog value is transferred 16-bit binary 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
S     
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D          
: This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

This instruction reads the analog value of a variable analog potentiometer board attached the PLC main unit.
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
This instruction converts the analog value of the variable analog potentiometer specified in S into binary 8-bit data,
and transfers the numeric value ranging from 0 to 255 to D .
Command
input FNC 85
VRRD
S D
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Program example
1. Example in which the read analog value is used as the set value of an analog timer
The analog value of the variable analog potentiometer No.0 is converted into binary 8-bit data, and the value ranging
from 0 to 255 is transferred to D0. 18
The value of D0 is used as the set value of a timer.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Volume Read
number destination
X000
FNC 85 K0 D0
VRRD
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
X001
D0
T0
When a value larger than 255 is required as the set value of a timer, the read value multiplied by a constant using the
MUL (FNC 22) instruction can be set indirectly as the timer constant.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
469
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read
2. Example in which the analog values of the variable analog potentiometers Nos. 0 to 7 are read in
turn, and used as analog timers
K0 to K7 are specified in S of the VRRD instruction in accordance with the values of the variable potentiometers
VR0 to VR7.
Index (Z = 0 to 7) is used for indexing in the sequence below, and K0Z indicates K0 to K7.
M8000
0 RST Z The index register Z is reset.
RUN
monitor
FNC 08
4 FOR K8 The routine "FOR ~ NEXT" is repeated 8 times.
M8000 Analog values of variable

FNC 85
7 VRRD K0Z D200Z potentiometers are stored in data
registers D200 to D207.
FNC 24
INC Z Z+1→Z
FNC 09
16
NEXT
X000
D200
17 T0 Analog timer of VR0
T0
21 Y000
X001
D201
Because T0 to T7 are 100
T1 ms timers, 0 to 25.5 sec are
27 Y001 obtained from the set values
0 to 255.
X007
D207
T7
63 Y007
Cautions
• In FX3S PLC, the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected to the option connector.
In this case, the communication function is not available when the VRRD or VRSC instruction is used.
• In 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs, the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected to the option
connector 1, and occupies communication channel ch1.
In this case, the communication function using communication channel ch1 is not available when the VRRD or
VRSC instruction is used.
• In 40-point and 60-point type FX3G PLCs, the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected only to the
option connector 2, and occupies communication channel ch2.
• The communication function is not available for ch1 when the VRRD or VRSC instruction is used in the program in
FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
→ For details, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
• FX3S/FX3G PLCs support the FX3G-8AV-BD.
• FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLCs support the FX3U-8AV-BD.
470
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale
11
16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction reads the value of a variable analog potentiometer on the variable analog potentiometer board 12
attached to the PLC main unit as a numeric value ranging from 0 to 10.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
VRSC P Continuous 
5 steps VRSC
VOLUME SCALE VRSCP
Operation
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Volume number [setting range: 0 to 7] 16-bit binary

14
D Device to which the read analog value is transferred 16-bit binary
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
and
Type
Unit
Index
Pointer
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S     
D          
: This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
This instruction reads the value of a variable analog potentiometer on the variable analog potentiometer board
attached to the main unit as a numeric value ranging from 0 to 10.
However, the actual scale value does not always correspond to the switching position of the variable analog
potentiometer scale (0 to 10).
This instruction converts into a binary value the scale value of a variable analog potentiometer specified in S , and
transfers the converted binary value to D .
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Command
VRSC
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
471
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale
Program example
1. Example in which the scale value is used as a rotary switch
One of the auxiliary relays from M0 to M10 turns ON in accordance with the scale value ranging from 0 to 10 of the
specified variable analog potentiometer.
X000
FNC 86
VRSC K1 D1
X001 The FNC 41 (DECO)

FNC 41
D1 M0 K4 instruction occupies auxiliary
DECO
relays M0 to M15.
M0
M0 turns ON when the scale value is "0".
M1
M10
Cautions
• In FX3S PLC, the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected to the option connector.
In this case, the communication function is not available when the VRRD or VRSC instruction is used.
• In 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs, the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected to the option
connector 1, and occupies communication channel ch1.
• In 40-point and 60-point type FX3G PLCs, the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected only to the
option connector 2, and occupies communication channel ch2.
• The communication function is not available for ch1 when the VRRD or VRSC instruction is used in the program in
FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
• FX3S/FX3G PLCs support the FX3G-8AV-BD.
• FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLCs support the FX3U-8AV-BD.
472
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2
11
16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction sends and receives data using non-protocol communication by way of serial ports in accordance with 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, data can be sent and received using non-protocol communication by way of the standard built-
in port (RS-422).
RS2 Continuous

Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
11 steps RS2 Operation
2. Set data
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
16-bit binary or
S Head device of data registers storing data to be sent
character string
m Number of bytes of data to be sent [setting range: 0 to 4,096] 16-bit binary
16-bit binary or
D Head device of data registers storing received data when receiving is completed
character string
n Number of bytes to be received [setting range: 0 to 4,096] 16-bit binary 15
n1 Used channel number [contents of setting: K0 = ch0, K1 = ch1, K2 = ch2]*1 16-bit binary
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
*1. Ch0 is available only in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
Ch2 is not available in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type) and FX3S PLC.
Oper-
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Type
S   
m  
17
 
D   
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
n    
n1  

Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
1. 16-bit operation (RS2)

This instruction sends and receives data using non-protocol communication by way of serial ports in accordance with
→ For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition.
Command
input FNC 87 S m D n n1
19
RS2
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
473
Related devices
→ For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition.
Device Device
Name Name
ch0*1 ch1 ch2*1 ch0*1 ch1 ch2*1
M8371 M8401 M8421 Sending wait flag*2 D8370 D8400 D8420 Communication format setting
M8372 M8402 M8422 Sending request*2 – − − −
M8373 M8403 M8423 Receiving complete flag*2 D8372 D8402 D8422 Remaining number of data to be sent*2
– M8404 M8424 Carrier detection flag D8373 D8403 D8423 Monitor for number of received data*2
– M8405 M8425 Data Set Ready (DSR) Flag*3 – D8405 D8425 Communication parameter display
– – – – D8379 D8409 D8429 Time-out time setting
M8379 M8409 M8429 Time-out check flag D8380 D8410 D8430 Header 1, 2
D8381 D8411 D8431 Header 3, 4
D8382 D8412 D8432 Terminator 1, 2
D8383 D8413 D8433 Terminator 3, 4
– − − − D8384 D8414 D8434 Receiving sum (received data)
D8385 D8415 D8435 Receiving sum (calculation result)
D8386 D8416 D8436 Sending sum
D8389 D8419 D8439 Operation mode display
M8062 M8063 M8438 Serial communication error*4 D8062 D8063 D8438 Serial communication error code*4
*1. Ch0 is available only in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.

Ch2 is not available in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type) and FX3S PLC.
*3. Available in all FX3G/FX3GC PLCs and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.30 or later.
*4. Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.
System configuration
For using this instruction, it is necessary to attach one of the products shown in the table below to the main unit.
→ For the system configuration, refer to the respective PLC Hardware Edition manual.
PLC Communication type Option
RS-232C communication FX3G-232-BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB) (with FX3S-CNV-ADP)
FX3S
RS-485 communication FX3G-485-BD(-RJ) or FX3U-485ADP(-MB) (with FX3S-CNV-ADP)
FX3G-232BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB) (which requires FX3G-CNV-ADP)
RS-232C communication RS-232C/RS-422 converter*5
FX3G
(FX-232AW, FX232AWC and FX-232AWC-H)
RS-485 communication FX3G-485-BD(-RJ) or FX3U-485ADP(-MB) (which requires FX3G-CNV-ADP)
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
RS-232C communication RS-232C/RS-422 converter*5
FX3GC
(FX-232AW, FX232AWC and FX-232AWC-H)
RS-485 communication FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3U, RS-232C communication FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) RS-485 communication FX3U-485-BD or FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
RS-232C communication FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3UC(D,DS,DSS)
RS-485 communication FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
*5. Required to use ch0 (standard built-in RS-422 port) in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
474
11
Differences between the RS (FNC 80) instruction and RS2 (FNC 87) instruction
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Item RS2 instruction RS instruction Remarks
Header size 1 to 4 characters (bytes) Up to 1 character (byte) For the RS2 instruction, up to 4 characters (bytes) can be
Terminator size 1 to 4 characters (bytes) Up to 1 character (byte) specified as a header or terminator.
For the RS2 instruction, the check sum can be
Attachment of The check sum can be
The check sum should be
attached by a user
automatically attached to the sent and received data. 12
check sum automatically attached. In this case, however, make sure to use a terminator in the
program.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
communication frame to be sent and received.
For the RS2 instruction:
Used channel Ch0 is available only in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
ch0, ch1, ch2 ch1
number Ch2 is not available in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point
type) and FX3S PLC.
13
Cautions
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
→ For other cautions, refer to the Data Communication Edition.
• Do not drive two or more RS (FNC 80) and/or RS2 (FNC 87) instructions for the same port at the same time.
• It is not permitted to use an "RS (FNC 80)/RS2 (FNC 87)" instruction and an "IVCK (FNC270) to IVMC (FNC275)",
"ADPRW (FNC276)", "FLCRT (FNC300) to FLSTRD (FNC305)" instruction for the same port.
• When using a header and terminator, set the data in the header and terminator to corresponding special data
register (D) before executing the RS2 instruction. Do not change the values of the header and terminator while the
RS2 instruction is being executed.
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Compatible Versions
ch1 Turns M8405 ON when the DR (DSR)
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Ver. 1.00 Ver. 1.00 Ver. 1.40 Ver. 2.30 Ver. 2.30 Data Set Ready (DSR) Flag signal of ch1 is ON.
or later or later or later or later or later ch2 Turns M8425 ON when the DR (DSR)
Data Set Ready (DSR) Flag signal of ch2 is ON.
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
475
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop
16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop
Outline
This instruction executes PID control which changes the output value according to the input variation.
→ For details, refer to the Analog Control Edition.
PID 9 steps PID Continuous


Operation
2. Set data
S1 Data register number storing the target value (SV) 16-bit binary
S2 Data register number storing the measured value (PV) 16-bit binary
S3 Data register number storing a parameter 16-bit binary
D Data register number storing the output value (MV) 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S1  1 2
S2  1 2
S3  1
D  1 2


1. 16-bit operation (PID)
When the target value S1 , measured value S2 , and parameters S3 to S3 +6 are set and a program is
executed, the operation result (MV) is stored to the output value D at every sampling time S3 .
Command
input FNC 88 S1 S2 S3 D
PID
Output value (MV)
Parameter
Measured value (PV)
Target value (SV)
476
11
2. Set items
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Number of
Set item Description occupied
points
• Set the target value (SV).
Target value
•
•
PID instruction does not change the contents of setting.
Caution on using the auto tuning (limit cycle method)
1
12
S1 (SV) If the target value for auto tuning is different from the target value for PID control, it is
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
necessary to set a value including the bias value first, and then store the actual target
value when the auto tuning flag turns OFF.
Measured value
S2 This is the input value in PID control loop. 1
(PV)
1) Auto tuning: In the case of limit cycle method
Twenty-nine devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 29 13
2) Auto tuning: In the case of step response method
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
S3 Parameter*1 a) Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 5 are not all "0"
Twenty-five devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 .
25
b) Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 5 are all "0"
Twenty devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 20
1) In case of PID control (normal processing)
Before driving PID instruction, the user should set the initial output value.
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
After that, the operation result is stored.
2) Auto tuning: In the case of limit cycle method
Output value
D During auto tuning, the ULV or LLV value is output automatically. 1
(MV)
When auto tuning is finished, the specified MV value is set.
3) Auto tuning: In the case of step response method
Before driving PID instruction, the user should set the initial output value.
During auto tuning, PID instruction does not change the MV output. 15
*1. When auto tuning is not used, the number of points is the same as the number in the step
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
response method are occupied.
3. List of parameters S3 to S3 +28

Set item Setting Value Remarks
S3 Sampling time (Ts) 1 to 32767 (ms) It cannot be shorter than the operation cycle. 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
0: Forward operation,
bit0 Operation direction
1: Backward operation
0: Input variation alarm is invalid.
bit1
1: Input variation alarm is valid.
0: Output variation alarm is invalid.
bit2 Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at the same time.
bit3
1: Output variation alarm is valid.
Not available
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Operation 0: Auto tuning is not executed.
S3 +1 bit4
setting (ACT) 1: Auto tuning is executed.
0: Upper and lower limits of output
value are not valid.
bit5 Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at the same time.
1: Upper and lower limits of output
value are valid.
18
0: Step response method
bit6 Select the auto tuning mode.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
1: Limit cycle method

bit7 to bit15 Not available
S3 +2 Input filter constant (α) 0 to 99 (%) When "0" is set, the input filter is not provided.
S3 +3 Proportional gain (KP) 1 to 32767 (%)
S3 +4 Integral time (TI) 0 to 32767 (× 100 ms)

When "0" is set, it is handled as "\" (no 19
integration).
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
When "0" is set, the derivative gain is not

S3 +5 Derivative gain (KD) 0 to 100 (%)
provided.
When "0" is set, the derivative operation is not
S3 +6 Derivative time (TD) 0 to 32767 (× 10 ms)
executed.
S3 +7
: These devices are occupied for internal processing in PID control loop. Do not change the data.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
S3 +19
477
Set item Setting Value Remarks

Input variation (incremental) It is valid when bit 1 is set to "1" in S3 +1 for
S3 +20*1 0 to 32767
alarm set value the operation setting (ACT).
Input variation (decremental) It is valid when bit 1 is set to "1" in S3 +1 for
S3 +21*1 0 to 32767
alarm set value the operation setting (ACT).
Output variation (incremental) It is valid when bit 2 is set to "1" and bit 5 is set to
0 to 32767
alarm set value "0" in S3 +1 for the operation setting (ACT).
S3 +22*1
It is valid when bit 2 is set to "0" and bit 5 is set to
Output upper limit set value −32768 to 32767
"1" in S3 +1 for the operation setting (ACT).
Output variation (decremental) It is valid when bit 2 is set to "1" and bit 5 is set to
0 to 32767
alarm set value "0" in S3 +1 for the operation setting (ACT).
S3 +23*1
It is valid when bit 2 is set to "0" and bit 5 is set to
Output lower limit set value −32768 to 32767
"1" in S3 +1 for the operation setting (ACT).
0: Input variation (incremental) is not
exceeded.
bit0
1: Input variation (incremental) is
exceeded.
0: Input variation (decremental) is not
exceeded.
bit1
1: Input variation (decremental) is
exceeded. It is valid when bit 1 is set to "1" or bit 2 is set to
S3 +24*1 Alarm output
0: Output variation (incremental) is not "1" in S3 +1 for the operation setting (ACT).
exceeded.
bit2
1: Output variation (incremental) is
exceeded.
0: Output variation (decremental) is
not exceeded.
bit3
1: Output variation (decremental) is
exceeded.
The setting below is required when the limit cycle method is used (when bit 6 is set to "ON" in the operation setting (ACT)).
PV value threshold Set it according to the fluctuation of the
S3 +25
(hysteresis) width (SHPV) measured value (PV).
Set the maximum value (ULV) of the
S3 +26 Output value upper limit (ULV)
output value (MV).
They are occupied when bit 6 is set to "ON (limit
Set the minimum value (LLV) of the cycle method)" in the operation setting (ACT).
S3 +27 Output value lower limit (LLV)
output value (MV).
Wait setting from end of tuning
S3 +28 cycle to start of PID control −50 to 32717%
(Kw)
*1. S3 +20 to S3 +24 are occupied when any bit 1, 2 or 5 is set to "1" in S3 +1 for operation setting
(ACT).
478
11
Cautions
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. When using two or more PID instructions
Two or more PID instructions can be executed at the same time. (There is no limitation in the number of loops.)
However, make sure that S3 , D and other operands specified in each instruction are different to each other.
2. Number of devices occupied for parameters starting from S3

12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1) In the limit cycle method
- Twenty-nine devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 .
2) In the step response method
- Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 5 are not all "0"
Twenty-five devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 13
- Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 5 are all "0"
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Twenty devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 .
3. When specifying a device in the latched area backed up against power failure
For the output value (MV) in the PID instruction, specify a data register outside the latched area.
When specifying a data register in the latched area, make sure to clear the latched (backed up) contents when the
PLC mode is set to RUN using the following program. 14
Program example
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
M8002
RST D***
Initial pulse
Data register number in the latched area specified in D 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Error
When an operation error occurs, the special auxiliary relay M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in the special
data register D8067.
→ For the error code, refer to Section 38.4.
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
479
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109
17. Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109

FNC100 to FNC109 provide instructions for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions
and for executing special processing.
100 –
101 –
102 ZPUSH ZPUSH D Batch Store of Index Register Section 17.1
103 ZPOP ZPOP D Batch POP of Index Register Section 17.2
104 –
105 –
160 –
107 –
108 –
109 –
480
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register
11
17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction temporarily batch-stores the present value of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7. 12
For restoring the present value of temporarily batch-stored index registers, use the ZPOP (FNC103) instruction.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
→ For the ZPOP (FNC103) instruction, refer to Section 17.2.
ZPUSH P 3 steps ZPUSH
Continuous
Operation
 13
ZPUSHP Pulse (Single) 
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation
2. Set data
Head device number batch-storing the present value of the index registers V0 to V7 and 14
Z0 to Z7
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D D : Number of times of batch-storage 16-bit binary
D +1 to D +16 × Number of times of batch-storage: Batch-stored data storage
destination
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
D  
: Except special data register (D) 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (ZPUSH/ZPUSHP)
Command
input FNC102
ZPUSH
D 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1) The contents of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are batch-stored temporarily to D and later. When
the contents of index registers are batch-stored, the number of times of batch-storage D is incremented by
"1".
2) For restoring the batch-stored data, use the ZPOP (FNC103) instruction.
Use the ZPUSH (FNC102) and ZPOP (FNC103) instruction as a pair.
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
3) By specifying the same device to D , ZPUSH (FNC102) and ZPOP (FNC103) instructions can be used in the
nest structure.
In this case, the occupied points are incremented by "16" after D every time the ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction
is executed. Secure sufficient area for the number of the next structure in advance.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
481
4) The figure below shows the data structure batch-stored in D and later.
· When the nest structure is not used Batch- · When the nest structure is used Batch-
Index register stored data Index register stored data
[1] ZPUSH *1 *1
Z0 D +0 Z0 [1] ZPUSH D +0
instruction
V0 Number of times +1 Z0 V0 instruction +1 Z0
Number of times
Z1 of batch-storage +2 V0 Z1 of batch-storage 1st nesting +2 V0
V1 D is +3 Z1 V1 D :0 →1 Number of +3 Z1
incremented by "1". times of 16 points
Z2 +4 V1 Z2 batch- +4 V1
[4] ZPOP for 1
V2 +5 Z2 storage +5 Z2
...
instruction nesting
[2] ZPOP Number of times D =1
+6 V2 Z7
...
...
...
instruction of batch-storage
Z7 Number of times of V7 D : →0 +15 Z7
...
...
V7 batch-storage +15 Z7 [2] ZPUSH instruction +16 V7
D is Number of times
+16 V7 +17 Z0
decremented by of batch-storage 2nd nesting
"1". D :1 →2 Number of +18 V0
times of +19 Z1
batch-
[3] ZPOP instruction storage +20 V1
Number of times of D =2
*1 Number of times of batch-storage
...
...
batch-storage
D : 2 → 1
Related instruction
Restores the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 which were batch-stored temporarily by the ZPUSH
ZPOP (FNC103)
Cautions
• When not using the nest structure, clear the number of batch-storage times D before executing ZPUSH
• When using the nest structure, clear the number of batch-storage times D before executing ZPUSH (FNC102)
instruction the first time.
Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in
D8067.
• When the range of points used after D in ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction exceeds the corresponding device
range (error code: K6706)
• When the number of batch-storage times D stores a negative value while the ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction is
executed (error code: K6706)
482
11
Program example
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program shown below, the contents of the index registers Z0 to Z7 and V0 to V7 before execution of subroutine
program are batch-stored in D0 and later when index registers are used in the subroutine after the pointer P0.
M8002
RST D0
X005
12
FNC 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
K5 V0
MOVP
X005 FNC 12
K10 V0
MOVP
X000 V0
Y000 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
X000 FNC 01 P0
CALL
FNC 06
FEND
Label
P0 M8000 FNC102 D0
14
ZPUSH
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
RUN monitor
X006 FNC 12
K5 V0
MOVP
X006 FNC 12 Program using index
MOVP
K10 V0
registers 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X030
T0
D100V0
M8000
FNC103
V0
ZPOP
16
FNC 02
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
SRET
END
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
483
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.2 FNC103 – ZPOP/Batch POP of Index Register
17.2 FNC103 – ZPOP/Batch POP of Index Register
Outline
This instruction restores the contents of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z8 which were batch-stored temporarily
by ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction.
→ For ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction, refer to Section 17.1.
ZPOP P 3 steps ZPOP
Continuous
Operation

ZPOPP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Head device number temporarily batch-storing the contents of the index registers V0 to V7
and Z0 to Z7
D D : Number of times of batch-storage 16-bit binary
D +1 to D +16 × Number of times of batch-storage: Batch-stored data storage
destination
Oper-
Type
D  
: Except special data register (D)

1. 16-bit operation (ZPOP/ZPOPP)
→ For the function and operation, refer also to Section 17.1.
Command
input FNC103
D
ZPOP
1) The contents of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 which were batch-stored temporarily to D and later
are restored to the original index registers. When the contents of the index registers are restored, the number of
times of batch-storage D is decremented by "1".
2) For temporarily batch-storing the data, use ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction.
Use ZPUSH (FNC102) and ZPOP (FNC103) instruction as a pair.
Related instruction
ZPUSH (FNC102) Temporarily batch-stores the present value of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7.
Errors
D8067.
• When the number of times of batch-storage (D) stores "0" or a negative value while ZPOP (FNC103) instruction is
executed (error code: K6706)
Program example
→ For a program example, refer to Section 17.1.
484
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
18. Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
FNC110 to FNC119, FNC120 to FNC129 and FNC130 to FNC139 provide instructions for conversion, comparison, 12
arithmetic operations, square root operation, trigonometry, etc. for floating point operations.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
110 ECMP ECMP S1 S2 D Floating Point Compare Section 18.1
13
111 EZCP EZCP S1 S2 S D Floating Point Zone Compare Section 18.2
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
112 EMOV EMOV S D Floating Point Move Section 18.3
113 – – 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
114 – –
115 – –
15
Floating Point to Character String
ESTR S1 S2 D
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
116 ESTR Section 18.4
Conversion
Character String to Floating Point

117 EVAL EVAL S D Conversion
Section 18.5
118 EBCD EBCD S D

Floating Point to Scientific Notation
Conversion
Section 18.6 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Scientific Notation to Floating Point
119 EBIN EBIN S D Conversion
Section 18.7
120 EADD EADD S1 S2 D Floating Point Addition Section 18.8

17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
121 ESUB ESUB S1 S2 D Floating Point Subtraction Section 18.9
Section
122 EMUL EMUL S1 S2 D Floating Point Multiplication
18.10
123 EDIV EDIV S1 S2 D Floating Point Division

Section 18
18.11
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Section
124 EXP EXP S D Floating Point Exponent
18.12
Section
125 LOGE LOGE S D Floating Point Natural Logarithm
18.13
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
Section
126 LOG10 LOG10 S D Floating Point Common Logarithm
18.14
Section
127 ESQR ESQR S D Floating Point Square Root
18.15
128 ENEG ENEG D Floating Point Negation

Section 20
18.16
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
485
Section
129 INT INT S D Floating Point to Integer Conversion
18.17
Section
130 SIN SIN S D Floating Point Sine
18.18
Section
131 COS COS S D Floating Point Cosine
18.19
Section
132 TAN TAN S D Floating Point Tangent
18.20
Section
133 ASIN ASIN S D Floating Point Arc Sine
18.21
Section
134 ACOS ACOS S D Floating Point Arc Cosine
18.22
Section
135 ATAN ATAN S D Floating Point Arc Tangent
18.23
Floating Point Degrees to Radians Section

136 RAD RAD S D Conversion 18.24
Floating Point Radians to Degrees Section

137 DEG DEG S D Conversion 18.25
138 – –
139 – –
486
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare
11
18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction compares two data values (binary floating point), and outputs the result (larger, same or smaller) to 12
three consecutive bit devices.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.
D ECMP P 13 steps DECMP
Continuous

DECMPP
Operation
Pulse (Single) 13
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S1 Device number storing binary floating point data to be compared

Real number (binary)*1
S2 Device number storing binary floating point data to be compared 14
Head bit device number to which the comparison result is output (Three devices are
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D Bit
occupied.)
*1. When a constant (K or H) is specified, it is automatically converted from binary into binary floating point (real
number) when the instruction is executed.
Oper-
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S1  2 3    
S2  2 3    
D    1  16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1: "D.b" is available only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, and cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

1. 32-bit operation (DECMP and DECMPP)
The comparison value [ S1 +1, S1 ] is compared with the comparison source [ S2 +1, S2 ] as floating point
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
data, and one of the bits among D , D +1 and D +2 turns ON according to the result (smaller, same or
larger).
• When a constant (K or H) is specified as [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted from
binary into binary floating point (real number) when the instruction is executed.
Command
input FNC110
S1 S2 D
18
DECMP
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
D Turns ON in the case of

" [ S1 +1, S1 ] > [ S2 +1, S2 ] ".
D +1 Turns ON in the case of

" [ S1 +1, S1 ] = [ S2 +1, S2 ] ".
19
D +2
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

" [ S1 +1, S1 ] < [ S2 +1, S2 ] ".
Even if the command input turns OFF before the DECMP instruction is fully executed, D to D +2 hold the status.
Caution
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

Three devices are occupied from D ( D , D +1 and D +2).
Make sure that these devices are not used for any other purpose.
487
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare
18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare
Outline
This instruction compares data (binary floating point) with two values (one zone), and outputs the comparison result to
three consecutive bit devices.
D EZCP P 17 steps DEZCP
Continuous
 Operation
DEZCPP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S1 Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compared
S2 Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compared Real number (binary)*1
S Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compared

Head bit device number to which the comparison result is output (Three devices are
D Bit
occupied.)
*1. When a constant (K or H) is specified, it is automatically converted from binary into binary floating point (real
number) when the instruction is executed.
Oper-
Type
S1       
S2       
S       
D     
488
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. 32-bit operation (DEZCP and DEZCPP)
The comparison values [ S1 +1, S1 ], [ S2 +1, S2 ] are compared with the comparison source [ S +1,
S ] as floating point data, and one of the bits among D , D +1, and D +2 turns ON according to the
result (smaller, same or larger). 12
• When a constant (K or H) is specified as [ S1 +1, S1 ], [ S2 +1, S2 ], or [ S +1, S ], it is
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
automatically converted into binary floating point when the instruction is executed.
Command
input FNC 111 S1 S2 S D
DEZCP
D Turns ON in the case of 13
" [ S1 +1, S1 ] > [ S +1, S ] ".
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
" [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S +1, S ] [ S2 +1, S2 ] ".

" [ S +1, S ] > [ S2 +1, S2 ] ".
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Even if the command input turns OFF before the DEZCP instruction is fully executed, D to D +2 will hold their
previous status.
Cautions 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Three devices are occupied from D ( D , D +1 and D +2).
Make sure that these devices are not used for any other purpose.
+1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2

2. Comparison values [ S1
Make sure that two comparison values have the following relationship:
]
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
[ S1 +1, S1 ] ≤ [ S2 +1, S2 ]
In the case of "[ S1 +1, S1 ] > [ S2 +1, S2 ]", the value [ S2 +1, S2 ] is regarded as [ S1 +1, S1 ]
value during comparison.
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
489
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.3 FNC112 – EMOV / Floating Point Move
18.3 FNC112 – EMOV / Floating Point Move
Outline
This instruction transfers binary floating point data.
D EMOV P  9 steps DEMOV
Continuous
Operation
 DEMOVP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S Binary floating point data (transfer source) or device number storing data
Real number (binary)
D Device number receiving floating point data
Oper-
Type
S  1 2  
D  1 2 


1. 32 bit operation (DEMOV and DEMOPV)
The contents (binary floating point data) of the transfer source [ S +1, S ] are transferred to [ D +1, D ].
A real number (E) can be directly specified as S .
Command S  +1 S D  +1 D
input FNC112 S D Transfer
DEMOV
4.23542 4.23542
Binary floating point Binary floating point

(real number) (real number)
Program examples
1. In the program example shown below, a real number stored in D11 and D10 is transferred to D1
and D0 when X007 turns ON
X007
FNC112 D10 D0
DEMOVP D11 D10 D1 D0
36.475 36.475
END
2. In the program shown below, a real number "-1.23" is transferred to D11 and D10 when X007
turns ON
X007
FNC112 E−1.23 D10
DEMOVP D11 D10
−1.23 −1.23
END
490
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion
11
18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction converts binary floating point data into a character string (ASCII codes) having a specified number of 12
digits.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
On the other hand, STR (FNC200) instruction converts binary data into a character string (ASCII codes).
→ For a character string, refer to Section 5.3.
→ For STR (FNC200) instruction, refer to Section 26.1.
1. Instruction format 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D ESTR P  13 steps DESTR
Continuous
Operation
 DESTRP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S1 Binary floating point data to be converted or device storing data Real number (binary)
S2 Head device number storing the display specification of a numeric value to be converted 16-bit binary
D Head device number storing converted character string Character string

15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D
 
R U\G V

Z Modify

K H E

"" P
16
S1
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S2          
D         

1. 32-bit operation (DESTR and DESTRP)
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
The contents (binary floating point data) of [ S1 +1, S1 ] are converted into a character string according to the
contents specified by S2 , S2 +1 and S2 +2, and then stored to devices D and later. A real number can
be directly specified as S1 .
Command
input FNC116 S1  S2  D
18
DESTR
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
• The data after conversion varies depending on the display specification stored in S2 .
0: Decimal point The data after conversion varies
format
S2  depending on the display
1: Exponent
format
Total number of
specification stored in S2  . 19
S2  +1 2 to 24 can be set.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
digits
Number of digits
S2  +2 of decimal part
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
491
2. In the case of decimal point format

Decimal point
S2  format b15 b8 b7 b0
Total number of ASCII code in "(specified
S2  +1 digits total number of digits - 1)"th ASCII code for sign
D
Number of digits digit
ASCII code in "(specified ASCII code in "(specified
D  +1 total number of digits - 3)"th total number of digits - 2)"th
digit digit
ASCII code in "(specified ASCII code for decimal point

D  +2 total number of digits - 5)"th (.)
digit (decimal part) (2EH)
Sign
S1  +1 S1  digit (decimal part) digit (decimal part)
D  +4 0000H
Binary floating point

(real number) 0000H is automatically stored at the end of the
character string.
• The total number of digits which can be specified by S2 +1 is as follows (24 digits maximum):
When the number of digits of the decimal part is "0", Total number of digits ≥ 2
When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than "0", Total number of digits ≥ (Number of digits
of decimal part + 3)
• The number of digits of the decimal part which can be specified by S2 +2 is from 0 to 7.
However, the following must be satisfied, "Number of digits of decimal part ≤ (Total number of digits - 3)"
For example, when the total number of digits is "8", the number of digits of the decimal part is "3", and
"-1.23456" is specified, data is stored in D and later as shown below:
Total
S2  0 number
of digits Number of
S2  +1 8 digits of
decimal part
b15 b8 b7 b0
S2  +2 3
D 20H(space) 2DH(-)
D  +1 31H(1) 20H(space)
1 2 3 5
D  +2 32H(2) 2EH(.)
Sign D  +3 35H(5) 33H(3)
S1  +1 S1  D  +4 0000H
−1.23456
0000H is automatically stored at the end of the
Binary floating point character string.
(real number)
• The character string data after conversion is stored in the devices D and later as shown below:
- For the sign, "20H (space)" is stored when the binary floating point data is positive, and "2DH (-)" is stored when
the data is negative.
- If the decimal part of the binary floating point data cannot be accommodated in the number of digits of the
decimal part, low-order digits of the decimal part are rounded.
0: Decimal point
S2  format Total
8 (Total number of
number of
S2  +1 digits) digits
2 (Number of digits
S2  +2 of decimal part) 1 2 3 4 5 6
Low-order
S1  +1 S1  digits of Rounded.
decimal part
−1.23456
492
11
- When the number of digits of the decimal part is set to any value other than "0", "2EH (.)" is automatically stored
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
in "specified number of digits of decimal part + 1"th digit.
When the number of digits of the decimal part is "0", "2EH (.)" is not stored.
0: Decimal point
S2  format Total
number of
S2  +1
8 (Total number of
digits) digits
12
2 (Number of digits
S2  +2
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
of decimal part) 1 2 3
Low-order digits of decimal

S1  +1 S1  part
Automatically added.
−1.23456
- When the total number of digits subtracted by the digits for sign, decimal point and decimal part is larger than the 13
integer part of the binary floating point data, "20H (space)" is stored between the sign and the integer part.
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
S2  0 Total
number of
S2  +1 8 digits
S2  +2 2 1 2 3
14
Low-order digits of decimal
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S1  +1 S1  part
"20H (space)" is stored.
−1.23456
- "00H" or "0000H" is automatically stored at the end of the converted character string.
3. In the case of exponent format 15

b15 b8 b7 b0
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
ASCII code in "(specified
Exponent format D total number of digits - 1)"th ASCII code for sign
S2  digit
Total number of
S2  +1 digits ASCII code for decimal point ASCII code in "(specified
Number of digits D  +1 (.) (2EH)
total number of digits - 2)"th
digit

16
D  +2
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
total number of digits - 5)"th total number of digits - 4)"th
digit (decimal part) digit (decimal part)
E ASCII code in "(specified ASCII code in "(specified
digit (decimal part) digit (decimal part)
Sign (integer part) Sign (exponent part)
S1  +1 S1  Automatically
D  +4
ASCII code of sign
(exponent part) 45H(E) 17
added.
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D  +5 total number of digits - total number of digits -
11)"th digit (exponent part) 10)"th digit (exponent part)
(real number) D  +6 0000H
0000H is automatically stored at the end of the 18

character string.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
• The total number of digits which can be specified by S2 +1 is as follows (24 digits maximum):
When the number of digits of the decimal part is "0" Total number of digits ≥ 6
When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than "0" Total number of digits ≥ (Number of digits
of decimal part + 7)
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
493
• The number of digits of the decimal part which can be specified by S2 +2 is from 0 to 7.
However, the following must be satisfied, "Number of digits of decimal part ≤ (Total number of digits - 7)"
For example, when the total number of digits is "12", the number of digits of the decimal part is "4", and
"-12.34567" is specified, data is stored in D and later as shown below:
S2  1 Total number
of digits b15 b8 b7 b0
S2  +1 12
Number of D 20H space 2DH(-)
digits of
S2  +2 4 decimal
part D  +1 2EH(.) 31H(1)
D  +2 33H(3) 32H(2)
1 2 3 4 6E+ 0 1 D  +3 36H(6) 34H(4)
Fixed to 2 digits
D  +4 2BH(+) 45H(E)
Sign (integer part) Sign (exponent part)
D  +5 31H(1) 30H(0)
S1  +1 S1 
D  +6 0000H
−12.34567
Binary floating point 0000H is automatically stored at the end of the

(real number) character string.
• The character string data after conversion is stored in the devices D and later as shown below:
- For the sign of the integer part, "20H (space)" is stored when the binary floating point data is positive, and "2DH
(-)" is stored when the data is negative.
- The integer part is fixed to 1 digit.
"20H (space)" is stored between the integer part and the sign.
S2  1 Total number of digits (12)
S2  +1 12 Fixed to 1 digit
S2  +2 4 1 2 3 4 6E+ 0 1
S1  +1 S1  "20H (space)" is stored.

−12.34567
- If the decimal part of the binary floating point data cannot be accommodated in the number of digits of the
decimal part, low-order digits of the decimal part are rounded.
S2  1
S2  +1 12 Total number of digits (12)
S2  +2 4 1 2 3 4 6 6 7E+ 0 1
Number of digits of Cut by rounding.

S1  +1 S1  decimal part (4)
−12.34567
- When the number of digits of the decimal part is set to any value other than "0", "2EH (.)" is automatically stored
in "specified number of digits of decimal part + 1"th digit.
When the number of digits of the decimal part is "0", "2EH (.)" is not stored.
S2  1
S2  +1 12 Total number of digits (12)
S2  +2 4 1 2 3 4 6E+ 0 1
Number of digits of
S1  +1 S1  decimal part (4)
−12.34567 Automatically added.
- For the sign of the exponent part, "2BH (+)" is stored when the exponent is positive, and "2DH (-)" is stored when
the exponent is negative.
494
11
- The exponent part is fixed to 2 digits.
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When the exponent part is 1 digit, "30H (0)" is stored after the sign of the exponent part.
S2  1 Total number of digits (12)
S2  +1 12 Fixed to 2 digits.
S2  +2 4 1 2 3 4 6E+ 0 1
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
S1  +1 S1  "30H (0)" is stored.
−12.34567
- "00H" or "0000H" is automatically stored at the end of the converted character string.
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
EVAL (FNC117) Converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary floating point data.
STR (FNC200) Converts binary data into a character string (ASCII codes).
VAL (FNC201) Converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data.
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Errors
D8067.
• When S1 is not located within the following range (error code: K6706)
0, ±2−126 ≤ S1 < ±2128 15
• When the format specified by S2 is any value other than "0" or "1" (error code: K6706)
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
• When the total number of digits specified by S2 +1 is not located within the following range (error code: K6706)
In the case of decimal point format:
When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than "0", Total number of digits ≥ (Number of
digits of decimal part + 3) 16
In the case of exponent format:
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than "0", Total number of digits ≥ (Number of
digits of decimal part + 7)
• When the number of digits of the decimal part specified by S2 +2 is not located within the following range (error
code: K6706)
In the case of decimal point format: Number of digits of decimal part ≤ (Total number of digits - 3) 17
In the case of exponent format: Number of digits of decimal part ≤ (Total number of digits - 7)
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
• When the devices storing a character string specified by D exceeds the allowable device range (error code:
K6706)
• When the conversion result exceeds the specified total number of digits (error code: K6706)
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
495
Program examples
1) In the program example shown below, the contents (binary floating point data) of R0 and R1 are converted
according to the contents specified by R10 to R12, and then stored to D0 and later when X000 turns ON
X000
FNC116 R0 R10 D0
DESTRP
END
Conversion b15 b8 b7 b0
R10 0 format
Total number Total number D0 20H(space) 20H(space)
R11 7 of digits of digits
Number of digits D1 2EH(.) 30H(0)
R12 3 of decimal part 0 0 3 3
D2 33H(3) 30H(0)
Space Number of
R1 R0 digits of D3 00H 33H(3)
decimal part
0.0327457
00H is automatically stored at
the end of the character string.
2) In the program shown below, the contents (binary floating point data) of R0 and R1 are converted according to the
contents specified by R10 to R12, and then stored to D10 and later when X000 turns ON
X000
FNC116 R0 R10 D10
DESTRP
END
1 (exponent Conversion
R10 format) format
Total number Total number
R11 12 of digits of digits
Number of digits
R12 4 of decimal part 3 2 7 4 6E 0 2
Space Number of digits

R1 R0 of decimal part b15 b8 b7 b0
0.0327457 D10 20H(space) 20H(space)
D11 2EH(.) 33H(3)
D12 37H(7) 32H(2)
D13 36H(6) 34H(4)
D14 2DH(-) 45H(E)
D15 32H(2) 30H(0)
D16 0000H
0000H is automatically stored at the

end of the character string.
496
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion
11
18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary floating point data. 12
On the other hand, the VAL (FNC201) instruction converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
→ For a character string, refer to Section 5.3.
→ For VAL (FNC201) instruction, refer to Section 26.2.
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D EVAL P  9 steps DEVAL
Continuous
Operation
 DEVALP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Head device number storing character string data to be converted into binary floating point
S Character string
data
D Head device number storing converted binary floating point data Real number (binary)
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
S          
D    
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 32-bit operation (DEVAL and DEVALP)
A character string stored in S and later is converted into binary floating point, and stored to [ D +1, D ].
17
Command
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
input FNC117
S D
DEVAL
A specified character string may be in the decimal point format or exponent format. A character string in either format
can be converted into binary floating point data.
b15 b8 b7 b0 18
ASCII code for 1st character ASCII code for sign
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
S
D  +1 D
S  +1 ASCII code for 3rd character ASCII code for 2nd character
S  +2 ASCII code for 5th character ASCII code for 4th character
S  +3 ASCII code for 7th character ASCII code for 6th character
S  +4 00H
(real number)
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
Indicates the end of the character string.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
497
a) In the case of decimal point format

b15 b8 b7 b0
S 31H(1) 2DH(-)
D  +1 D
S  +1 30H(0) 2EH(.)
−1.07812
S  +2 38H(8) 37H(7)
32H(2) 31H(1) Binary floating point
S  +3 (real number)
S  +4 00H
1 0 7 8 1 2
b) In the case of exponent format

b15 b8 b7 b0
S 20H(space) 2DH(-)
S  +1 2EH(.) 31H(1)
D  +1 D
S  +2 32H(2) 33H(3)
−1.3201E+10
S  +3 31H(1) 30H(0)
2BH(+) 45H(E) Binary floating point

S  +4 (real number)
S  +5 30H(0) 31H(1)
S  +6 00H
1 3 2 0 1E+ 1 0
• When a character string to be converted into binary floating point specified by S has 7 digits or more excluding
the sign, decimal point and exponent part, the conversion result may contain rounding error.
a) In the case of decimal point format
b15 b8 b7 b0
S  +1 31H(1) 20H(space)
S  +2 33H(3) 2EH(.) D  +1 D
S  +3 31H(1) 30H(0) −1.30156
S  +4 36H(6) 35H(5) Up to 6 digits are securely
equivalent.
S  +5 31H(1) 38H(8)
S  +6 00H 32H(2) (real number)
1 3 0 1 5 6 8 1 2
Rounded.
498
11
b) In the case of exponent format
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
b15 b8 b7 b0
S 20H(.) 2DH(-)
S  +1 2EH(.) 31H(1)
S  +2 35H(5) 33H(3)
D  +1 D 12
S  +3 33H(3) 30H(0)
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
−1.35034E−2
S  +4 31H(1) 34H(4) Up to 6 digits are
securely equivalent.
S  +5 45H(E) 32H(2)
S  +6 30H(0) 2DH(-) (real number)
00H 32H(2)
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
1 3 5 0 3 4 1 2E 0 2
Rounded.
• When "2BH (+)" is specified as the sign in the floating point format or when the sign is omitted, a character string is
14
converted into a positive value.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
When "2DH (-)" is specified as the sign, a character string is converted into a negative value.
• When "2BH (+)" is specified as the sign in the exponent format or when the sign is omitted, a character string is
converted into a positive exponent.
When "2DH (-)" is specified as the sign, a character string is converted into a negative exponent.
• When "20H (space)" or "30H (0)" exists between numbers except the first "0" in a character string specified by 15
S , "20H" or "30H" is ignored during conversion.
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
b15 b8 b7 b0
S  +1 31H(1) 30H(0) D  +1 D
S  +2 32H(2) 2EH(.) −1.231 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S  +3 31H(1) 33H(3)
(real number)
S  +4 00H
0 1 2 3 1
Ignored.
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
• When "30H (0)" exists between a number and "E" in a character string in the exponent format, "30H" is ignored
during conversion.
b15 b8 b7 b0
20H(space) 2DH(-)
18
2EH(.) 31H(1)
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
34H(4) 30H(0) D  +1 D
33H(3) 35H(5) −1.0453E+3
2BH(+) 45H(E)
33H(3) 30H(0) 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
00H
1 0 4 5 3E+ 0 3
Ignored.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
• A character string can consist of up to 24 characters.

"20H (space)" and "30H (0)" in a character string are counted as one character respectively.
499
Related devices
→ For the use methods of the zero, borrow and carry flags, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Description
Device Name
Condition Operation
The conversion result is true "0".
M8020 Zero flag The zero flag M8020 turns ON.
(The mantissa part is "0".)
The absolute value of the conversion result The value of D is the minimum value (2−126) of 32-bit
M8021 Borrow flag
is less than "2−126". real numbers and the borrow flag M8021 turns ON.
The absolute value of the conversion result The value of D is the maximum value (2128) of 32-bit
M8022 Carry flag
is not less than "2128". real numbers and the carry flag M8022 turns ON.
ESTR (FNC116) Converts binary floating point data into a character string (ASCII codes).
STR (FNC200) Converts binary data into a character string (ASCII codes).
Errors
D8067.
• When any character other than "30H (0)" to "39H (9)" exists in the integer part or decimal part (error code: K6706)
• When "2EH (.)" exists in two or more positions in a character string specified by S (error code: K6706)
• When any character other than "45H (E)", "2BH (+)" or "2DH (-)" exists in the exponent part, or when two or more
exponent parts exist (error code: K6706)
• When "00H" does not exist in the corresponding device range starting from S (error code: K6706)
• When the number of characters after S is "0" or more than "24" (error code: K6706)
Program examples
1) In the program example shown below, a character string stored in R0 and later is converted into binary floating
point, and stored to D0 and D1 when X000 turns ON
X000
FNC117 R0 D0
DEVALP
END
b15 b8 b7 b0
R0 20H(space) 2DH(-)
R1 31H(1) 30H(0)
R2 32H(2) 2EH(.) D1 D0
−1.23452
R3 34H(4) 33H(3)
R4 32H(2) 35H(5)
R5 00H 31H(1)
0 1 2 3 4 5 2 1
Ignored. Rounded.
500
11
2) In the program shown below, a character string stored in D10 and later is converted into binary floating point, and
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
stored to D100 and D101 when X000 turns ON
X000
FNC117 D10 D100
DEVALP
END 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
b15 b8 b7 b0
D10 20H(space) 20H(space)
D11 2EH(.) 31H(1)
D12 33H(3) 32H(2)

13
D101 D100
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D13 35H(5) 34H(4) 1.2345E−2
D14 2DH(-) 45H(E)
D15 32H(2) 30H(0)
D16 00H 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1 2 3 4 5E 0 2
Ignored. Rounded.
Operations at overflow, underflow and zero 15

Condition Operation
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
The absolute value of the conversion The value of D is the minimum value (2−126) of 32-bit real numbers and the borrow flag
result is less than "2−126". M8021 turns ON.
The absolute value of the conversion The value of D is the maximum value (2128) of 32-bit real numbers and the carry flag M8022
result is not less than "2128". turns ON.
The conversion result is true "0".
16
The zero flag M8020 turns ON.
(The mantissa part is "0".)
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
501
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.6 FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion
18.6 FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion
Outline
This instruction converts binary floating point into scientific notation.
D EBCD P 9 steps DEBCD
Continuous
 Operation
DEBCDP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S Data register number storing binary floating point Real number (binary)
D Data register number storing converted scientific notation Real number (decimal)
Oper-
Type
S    
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DEBCD and DEBCDP)
Binary floating point stored in [ S +1, S ] is converted into scientific notation, and transferred to [ D +1,
D ].
Command
input FNC118
S D [ S  +1, S  ] → [ D  +1, D ]
DEBCD
Binary floating point Scientific notation
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Before
execution Exponent part (8 bits) Mantissa part (23 bits)
Sign (1 bit)
S  +1 S
After execution

After
execution Exponent part Mantissa part
D  +1 D
D  +1
D
× 10
Caution
1. Handling of floating point
In floating point operations, all data is handled in binary floating point.
Because binary floating point is difficult to understand (requiring a dedicated monitoring method), it is converted into
scientific notation so that monitoring can be easily executed by peripheral equipment.
GX Works2, GX Developer and GOT have the function to directly monitor and display binary floating point.
502
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion
11
18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction converts scientific notation stored in devices into binary floating point. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D EBIN P 9 steps DEBIN
Continuous

DEBINP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
13
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Data register number storing scientific notation data

Real number
(decimal) 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D Data register number storing converted binary floating point. Real number (binary)
Oper-
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 15
Type
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S    
D    
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 32-bit operation (DEBIN and DEBINP)
Scientific notation stored in [ S +1, S ] is converted into binary floating point, and transferred to [ D +1,
D ].
Command
input FNC119
S D [ S  +1, S  ] → [ D  +1, D ] 17
DEBIN
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Scientific notation Binary floating point
Before
execution Exponent part Mantissa part
S  +1 S 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
S  +1
S
× 10
After execution
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

After
execution Exponent part (8 bits) Mantissa part (23 bits)
Sign (1 bit)
20
D  +1 D
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
503
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion
Program example
By DEBIN instruction, a numeric value containing the decimal point can be directly converted into binary floating point.
Example: Converting "3.14" into binary floating point

3.14 = 314 × 10−2 (scientific notation)
X002
FNC 12 K314 D0 K314 → D0 [D1]
MOVP
314 × 10−2
FNC 12 [D0]
K -2 D1 K -2 → D1
MOVP
FNC119 (D1,D0) → (D11,D10)

D0 D 10
DEBIN 314 × 10−2 Binary floating point
→ For program examples of floating point operations, refer to Section 12.10.
504
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.8 FNC120 – EADD / Floating Point Addition
11
18.8 FNC120 – EADD / Floating Point Addition
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction executes addition of two binary floating point data. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
→ For flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
D EADD P 13 steps DEADD
Continuous
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
 Operation
DEADDP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S1 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in addition
Real number
S2 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in addition
(binary)*1
D Data register number storing the addition result
*1. When a constant (K or H) is specified, it is automatically converted into binary floating point (real number)
when the instruction is executed. 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
 1 2    
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S1
S2  1 2    
D  1 2 

2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 32-bit operation (DEADD and DEADDP)
Binary floating point data [ S2 +1, S2 ] is added to binary floating point data [ S1 +1, S1 ], and the addition
result in the binary floating point format is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
18
input
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
FNC120
S1  S2  D [ S1  +1, S1  ] + [ S2  +1, S2  ] → [ D  +1, D  ]
DEADD
Binary floating point Binary floating point Binary floating point
When a constant (K or H) is specified as [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted into

binary floating point.
Command 19
input FNC120
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
S1  S2  D [ S1  +1, S1  ] + [ K2346 ] → [ D  +1, D  ]

DEADD
Binary floating point Automatically Binary floating point
converted into binary
floating point
Caution
1. When the same device is specified
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
The same device number can be specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ],[ S2 +1, S2 ] and [ D +1, D ].
In this case, note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle when the continuous operation type
instruction (DEADD) is used.
505
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.9 FNC121 – ESUB / Floating Point Subtraction
18.9 FNC121 – ESUB / Floating Point Subtraction
Outline
This instruction executes subtraction of two binary floating point data.
D ESUB P 13 steps DESUB
Continuous
 Operation
DESUBP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S1 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in subtraction
S2 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in subtraction Real number (binary)*1
D Data register number storing the subtraction result
when the instruction is executed.
Oper-
Type
S1  1 2    
S2  1 2    
D  1 2 


1. 32-bit operation (DESUB and DESUBP)
Binary floating point data [ S2 +1, S2 ] is subtracted from binary floating point data [ S1 +1, S1 ], and the
subtraction result in the binary floating point format is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC121
S1  S2  D [ S1  +1, S1  ] − [ S2  +1, S2  ] → [ D  +1, D  ]
DESUB

Command
input FNC121
S1  S2  D [ S1  +1, S1  ] − [ K2346 ] → [ D  +1, D  ]
DESUB
floating point
Caution
1. When the same device is specified
The same device number can be specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ],[ S2 +1, S2 ] and [ D +1, D ].
In this case, note that the subtraction result changes in every operation cycle when the continuous operation type
instruction (DESUB) is used.
506
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.10 FNC122 – EMUL / Floating Point Multiplication
11
18.10 FNC122 – EMUL / Floating Point Multiplication
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction executes multiplication of two binary floating point data. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D EMUL P
 13 steps DEMUL
Continuous
Operation
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
DEMULP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
Operand Type
S1
Description
Word device number storing binary floating point data used in multiplication
Data Type
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S2 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in multiplication Real number (binary)*1
D Data register number storing the multiplication result
when the instruction is executed. 15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
S1  1 2    
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S2  1 2    
D  1 2 

17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 32-bit operation (DEMUL and DEMULP)
Binary floating point data [ S1 +1, S1 ] is multiplied by binary floating point data [ S2 +1, S2 ], and the
multiplication result in the binary floating point format is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
18
input
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
FNC122 S1  S2  D [ S1  +1, S1  ] × [ S2  +1, S2  ] → [ D  +1, D  ]

DEMUL

Command 19
input FNC122
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
S1  S2  D [ S1  +1, S1  ] × [ K100 ] → [ D  +1, D  ]

DEMUL
floating point
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
507
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.11 FNC123 – EDIV / Floating Point Division
18.11 FNC123 – EDIV / Floating Point Division
Outline
This instruction executes division of two binary floating point.
D EDIV P 13 steps DEDIV
Continuous
 Operation
DEDIVP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S1 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in division
S2 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in division Real number (binary)*1
D Data register number storing binary floating point data obtained by division
Oper-
Type
S1  1 2    
S2  1 2    
D  1 2 


1. 32-bit operation (DEDIV and DESDIVP)
Binary floating point data [ S1 +1, S1 ] is divided by binary floating point data [ S2 +1, S2 ], and the division
result in the binary floating point format is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command Dividend Divisor
input FNC123
S1  S2  D [ S1  +1, S1  ] ÷ [ S2  +1, S2  ] → [ D  +1, D  ]
DEDIV Binary floating point Binary floating point Binary floating point

Command Dividend Divisor
input FNC123
S1  K100 D [ S1  +1, S1  ] ÷ [ K100 ] → [ D  +1, D  ]
DEDIV Binary floating point Automatically Binary floating point
floating point
508
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent
11
18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction executes exponential operation whose base is "e (2.71828)". 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D EXP P  9 steps DEXP
Continuous
 DEXPP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
13
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Head device number storing binary floating point data used in exponential operation.
14
D Head device number storing the operation result.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
and
Type
Unit
Index
Pointer
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S     
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DEXP and DEXPP)
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
The exponent of [ S +1, S ] is calculated, and the operation result is stored to [ D +1, D ].
A real number can be directly specified as S .
Command
input
FNC124
DEXP
S D 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
• In the exponential operation, the base (e) is set to "2.71828".
S  +1 S D  +1 D
e Binary floating point

(real number)
(real number)
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Error
An operation error occurs in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
• When the operation result is outside the following range (error code: K6706)
2−126 ≤ | Operation result | < 2128 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
509
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent
Program example
In the program example shown below, the exponential operation is executed for a value set in the 2-digit BCD format
in X020 to X027, and the operation result is stored in the binary floating point format to D0 and D1 when X000 turns
ON.
X000
FNC 19 K2X20 D20 Data used in the exponential operation is input ([1]).
BIN
FNC224 The range of the value to be operated is checked.

D20 K88 M0
LD > (Refer to 1) in "Points" below.)
M0
FNC 49 The input data is converted into binary floating point
D20 D10
FLT (real number) ([2]).
FNC124 D10 D0 The exponential operation is executed ([3]).

DEXP
END
Operation when "13" is specified in X020 to X027

[1] D20 [2] Conversion into [3]
Conversion binary floating point Exponential
X027 X020 into binary b15 b0 (real number) D11 D10 operation D1 D0
1 3 13 13 442413.4
BCD value BIN FLT Binary floating point EXP Binary floating point
Binary value (real number) value (real number) value
Points
1) The operation result becomes less than "2128" when the BCD value set in X020 to X027 is "88" or less because of
"loge2128 = 88.7".
If a value "89" or more is set, an operation error occurs. To prevent this operation error, when a value more than
"89" is set, M0 is set to ON so that the exponential operation is not executed.
2) Conversion from natural logarithm into common logarithm
In the CPU, operations are executed in natural logarithm.
For obtaining a value in common logarithm, specify a common logarithm value divided by "0.4342945" in
[ S +1, S ].
X
10X= e 0.4342945
510
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm
11
18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction executes the natural logarithm operation. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D LOGE P  9 steps DLOGE
Continuous
 DLOGEP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
13
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S
Head device number storing binary floating point data used in the natural logarithm
operation Real number (binary)
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D Head device number storing the operation result
Oper-
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 15
Type
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S     
D    
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 32-bit operation (DLOGE and DLOGEP)
Natural logarithm [logarithm whose base is "e (2.71828)"] of [ S +1, S ] is calculated, and the operation result
is stored to [ D +1, D ]. A real number can be directly specified as S .
input
FNC125
DLOGE
S D loge
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
• Only a positive value can be set in [ S +1, S ]. (The natural logarithm operation cannot be executed for a
negative value.)
18
Errors
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
D8067.
• When a negative value is specified in S (error code: K6706)
• When "0" is specified in S (error code: K6706) 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
511
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm
Program example
In the program example shown below, natural logarithm of "10" set in D50 is calculated, and stored to D30 and D31
when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 12 Data used in the natural logarithm operation is set
K10 D50
MOV ([1]).
FNC 49 The data to be used is converted into binary floating

D50 D40
FLT point (real number) ([2]).
FNC125 D40 D30 The natural logarithm operation is executed ([3]).

DLOGE
END
D50 [2] Conversion into

binary floating point [3] Logarithm
[1] b15 b0 (real number) D41 D40 operation D31 D30
10 10 10 2.302585
MOV Binary value FLT Binary floating point LOGE Binary floating point
(real number) value (real number) value
512
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm
11
18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction executes the common logarithm operation. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D LOG10 P  9 steps DLOG10
Continuous
 DLOG10P
Operation
Pulse (Single)
13
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S
Head device number storing binary floating point data used in the common logarithm
operation Real number (binary)
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 15
Type
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S     
D    
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 32-bit operation (DLOG10 and DLOG10P)
Common logarithm [logarithm whose base is "10"] of [ S +1, S ] is calculated, and the operation result is
stored to [ D +1, D ]. A real number can be directly specified as S .
input FNC126
S D log10
17
DLOG10
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
• Only a positive value can be set in [ S +1, S ]. (The common logarithm operation cannot be executed for a
negative value.)
18
Errors
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
An operation error occurs in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in
D8067.
• When a negative value is specified in S (error code: K6706)
• When "0" is specified in S (error code: K6706) 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
513
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm
Program example
In the program example shown below, common logarithm of "15" set in D50 is calculated, and stored to D30 and D31
when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 12 Data used in the common logarithm operation is set
K15 D50
MOV ([1]).
FNC 49 The data to be used is converted into binary floating

D50 D40
FNC126 D40 D30 The common logarithm operation is executed ([3]).

DLOG10
END
D50 [2] Conversion into

binary floating point [3] Logarithm
[1] b15 b0 (real number) D41 D40 operation D31 D30
10 15 15 1.176091
MOV Binary value FLT Binary floating point DLOG10 Binary floating point
514
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.15 FNC127 – ESQR / Floating Point Square Root
11
18.15 FNC127 – ESQR / Floating Point Square Root
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction obtains the square root of binary floating point. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D ESQR P 9 steps DESQR
Continuous

DESQRP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
13
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Word device number storing binary floating point data whose square root is calculated
Real number (binary)*1 14
D Data register number storing the square root of binary floating point data
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S  1 2    
D  1 2 
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89

1. 32-bit operation (DESQR and DESQRP) 17
The square root of [ S1 +1, S1 ] is calculated (in the binary floating point operation), and the result is transferred
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC127
S D [ S +1, S ] → [ D +1, D ]
DESQR Binary floating point Binary floating point
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
Related device
M8020 Zero flag Turns ON when the operation result is true "0".
19
Error
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
The contents of [ S1 +1, S1 ] are valid only when a positive value is set. When a negative value is set, the
operation error flag M8067 turns ON, and the instruction is not executed.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
515
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.16 FNC128 – ENEG / Floating Point Negation
18.16 FNC128 – ENEG / Floating Point Negation
Outline
This instruction inverts the sign of binary floating point (real number) data.
D ENEG P  5 steps DENEG
Continuous
Operation
 DENEGP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
D Head device number storing binary floating data whose sign is to be inverted Real number (binary)
Oper-
Type
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DENEG and DENEGP)
The sign of binary floating point stored in [ D +1, D ] is inverted, and the negation result is stored to [ D +1,
D ].
Command
input FNC128
D
DENEG
Program example
In the program example shown below, the sign of floating point data stored in D100 and D101 is inverted, and the
negation result is stored to D100 and D101 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC128 D100
DENEGP
END
D101 D100 D101 D100

1.2345 −1.2345
516
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion
11
18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction converts binary floating point data into a binary integer which is a normal data format inside PLCs 12
(binary floating point → binary integer).
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D INT P 5 steps INT
Continuous
9 steps DINT
Continuous
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation Operation
INTP Pulse (Single) DINTP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Data register number storing binary floating point data to be converted into a binary
S Real number (binary)
integer
D Data register number storing a converted binary integer 16- or 32-bit binary
15
Oper-
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Type
S  1 2 
D  1 2 
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89

1. 16-bit operation (INT and INTP) 17
Binary floating point stored in [ S +1, S ] is converted into a binary integer, and transferred to D .
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Command
input FNC129
S D S  +1, S  → D
INT Binary floating 16-bit binary integer
point The decimal part is cut.
Instruction for inverse conversion

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
The inverse conversion is executed by FLT (FNC 49) instruction.

→ For FLT (FNC 49) instruction, refer to Section 12.10.
2. 32-bit operation (DINT and DINTP)

Binary floating point stored in [ S +1, S ] is converted into a binary integer, and transferred to [ D +1,
D ]. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
Command
input FNC129
S D S  +1, S  → D  +1, D 
DINT Binary floating 32-bit binary integer
point The decimal part is cut.
Instruction for inverse conversion 20

The inverse conversion is executed by DFLT (FNC 49) instruction.
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
→ For FLT (FNC 49) instruction, refer to Section 12.10.
517
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion
Related devices
→ For the methods of zero, borrow and carry flags, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
M8020 Zero flag Turns ON when the operation result is 0
M8021 Borrow flag Turns ON when the conversion result is cut in the decimal part.
Turns ON when the operation result is outside the range from −32768 to 32767
M8022 Carry flag (in 16-bit operation) or from −2,147,483,583 to 2,147,483,583 (in 32-bit operation) and overflow
occurs. (The operation result is not reflected.)
Caution
1. Caution in the operation
• Values after the decimal point are rounded.
518
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine
11
18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction obtains the sine value of an angle (in radians). 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D SIN P 9 steps DSIN
Continuous
 Operation
DSINP Pulse (Single)
Operation 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
S Device number storing an angle (in radians) in binary floating point

D Device number storing the sine value in binary floating point
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
Type
S      15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DSIN and DSINP)
A value of angle (binary floating point) specified in [ S +1, S ] is converted into the sine value, and transferred 16
to [ D +1, D ].
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Command
input FNC130 [ S  +1, S  ] RAD → [ D  +1, D  ] SIN
S D Binary floating point Binary floating point
DSIN
Value in radians (Value in degrees × π /180)
S S  +1 S Binary floating point
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D D  +1 D Sine value
Program example 18
X001
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
FNC 12 K 45 D 0 (K45) → (D 0)
MOVP An angle is selected by the inputs
X002 X001 and X002.
FNC 12 K 90 D 0 (K90) → (D 0)
MOVP
M8000
FNC 49 D0 D 4
(D 0) → (D5, D4) Binary floating point 19
RUN FLTP value
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
monitor (π/180) → (D21, D20)

FNC123 K31415926 K1800000000 D 20
DEDIV Binary floating point
FNC122 (D5, D4) Degrees × (π/180) → (D31, D30) Radians

D 4 D 20 D 30 Binary floating point
DEMUL
20
S D
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
FNC130 (D31, D30) RAD → (D101, D100) SIN

D 30 D100 Binary floating point
DSIN
519
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.19 FNC131 – COS / Floating Point Cosine
18.19 FNC131 – COS / Floating Point Cosine
Outline
This instruction obtains the cosine value of an angle (in radians).
D COS P 9 steps DCOS
Continuous
 Operation
DCOSP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data

D Device number storing the cosine value in binary floating point
Oper-
Type
S     
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DCOS and DCOSP)
A value of angle (binary floating point) specified in [ S +1, S ] is converted into the cosine value, and
transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC131 [ S  +1, S  ] RAD → [ D  +1, D  ] COS
S D
DCOS Binary floating point Binary floating point

D D  +1 D Cosine value
520
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.20 FNC132 – TAN / Floating Point Tangent
11
18.20 FNC132 – TAN / Floating Point Tangent
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction obtains the tangent value of an angle (in radians). 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D TAN P 9 steps DTAN
Continuous

DTANP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
13
Operation
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data

14
D Device number storing the tangent value in binary floating point
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Oper-
and
Type
Unit
Index
Pointer
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S     
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DTAN and DTANP)
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
A value of angle (binary floating point) specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] is converted into the tangent value, and
transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input [ S  +1, S  ] RAD → [ D  +1, D  ] TAN
FNC132
DTAN
S D
Binary floating point Binary floating point 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D D  +1 D Tangent value 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
521
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine
18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine
Outline
This instruction executes SIN−1 (arc sine) operation.
D ASIN P  9 steps DASIN
Continuous
Operation
 DASINP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing a sine value used in SIN−1 (arc sine) operation.
Oper-
Type
S     
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DASIN and DASINP)
An angle is obtained from the sine value stored in [ S +1, S ], and stored to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC133 S D
DASIN
S  +1 S D  +1 D
−1
SIN

• The sine value stored in [ S +1, S ] can be set ranging from −1.0 to +1.0.
• The angle (operation result) stored in [ D +1, D ] is expressed in radians (from −π/2 to π/2).
For conversion between radians and degrees, refer to the RAD (FNC136) and DEG (FNC137) instructions.
→ For the RAD (FNC136) instruction, refer to Section 18.24.
→ For the DEG (FNC137) instruction, refer to Section 18.25.
Error
An operation error is caused in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in
D8067.
• When a value specified in S is outside the range from −1.0 to +1.0 (error code: K6706)
522
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine
11
Program example
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, the SIN−1 value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is calculated,
and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC133 The angle (in radians) is calculated by the SIN−1
D0 D10
DASIN operation ([1]).
12
FNC137 The value in radians is converted into the value in
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D10 D20
DDEG degrees ([2]).
FNC129 The angle expressed in binary floating point (real

D20 D30
INT number) is converted into an integer (binary) ([3]).
FNC 18
BCD
D30 K4Y40
The angle expressed in integer (binary) is output to
the display unit ([4]).
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
END
Operation when "0.5" is stored in D0 and D1

[1]
14
Conversion
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
by SIN−1
D1 D0 operation D11 D10
0.5 0.5235988
Binary floating point DASIN Binary floating point
[2] Conversion into degrees 15
DDEG
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
[3]
Conversion D30 [4] BCD
D21 D20 into binary b15 b0 operation Y057 Y040
30 30 0 0 3 0
Binary floating point INT Binary BCD BCD
(real number) value value value 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
523
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine
18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine
Outline
This instruction executes COS−1 (arc cosine) operation.
D ACOS P  9 steps DACOS
Continuous
Operation
 DACOSP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing a cosine value used in COS−1 (arc cosine) operation
Oper-
Type
S     
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DACOS and DACOSP)
An angle is obtained from the cosine value stored in [ S +1, S ], and stored to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC134
S D
DACOS
S  +1 S D  +1 D
−1
COS

• The cosine value stored in [ S +1, S ] can be set ranging from −1.0 to +1.0.
• The angle (operation result) stored in [ D +1, D ] is expressed in radians (from 0 to π).
For conversion between radians and degrees, refer to the RAD (FNC136) and DEG (FNC137) instructions.
→ For the RAD (FNC136) instruction, refer to Section 18.24.
→ For the DEG (FNC137) instruction, refer to Section 18.25.
Error
D8067.
• When a value specified in S is outside the range from −1.0 to +1.0 (error code: K6706)
524
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine
11
Program example
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, the COS−1 value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is
calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC134 The angle (in radians) is calculated by the COS−1
D0 D10
DACOS operation ([1]).
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D10 D20
DDEG degrees ([2]).
FNC129 The angle expressed in the binary floating point (real

D20 D30
FNC 18
BCD
D30 K4Y40
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
END
Operation when "0.5" is stored in D0 and D1

[1]
14
Conversion
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
by COS−1
0.5 1.047198
Binary floating point DACOS Binary floating point
DDEG
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
[3]
60 60 0 0 6 0
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
525
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent
18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent
Outline
This instruction executes the TAN−1 (arc tangent) operation.
D ATAN P  9 steps DATAN
Continuous
Operation
 DATANP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing a tangent value used in the TAN−1 (arc tangent) operation
Oper-
Type
S     
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DATAN and DATANP)
An angle is obtained from the tangent value stored in [ S +1, S ], and stored to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC135
S D
DATAN
S  +1 S D  +1 D
−1
TAN

• The angle (operation result) stored in [ D +1, D ] is expressed in radians (from −π/2 to +π/2).
For conversion between radians and degrees, refer to RAD (FNC136) and DEG (FNC137) instructions.
→ For RAD (FNC136) instruction, refer to Section 18.24.
→ For DEG (FNC137) instruction, refer to Section 18.25.
526
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent
11
Program example
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, the TAN−1 value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is
calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC135 The angle (in radians) is calculated by the TAN−1
D0 D10
DATAN operation ([1]).
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D10 D20
DDEG degrees ([2]).
FNC129 The angle expressed in binary floating point (real

D20 D30
FNC 18
BCD
D30 K4Y40
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
END
Operation when "1" is stored in D0 and D1

[1]
14
Conversion
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
by TAN −1
1 0.785398
Binary floating point DATAN Binary floating point
DDEG
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
[3]
45 45 0 0 4 5
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
527
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion
18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion
Outline
This instruction converts a value in degrees into a value in radians.
D RAD P  9 steps DRAD
Continuous
Operation
 DRADP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing a value in degrees to be converted into a value in radians
D Head device number storing a value in radians acquired by conversion
Oper-
Type
S     
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DRAD and DRADP)
The unit of [ S +1, S ] is converted from degrees into radians, and the operation result is stored to [ D +1,
D ].
Command
input FNC136
S D
DRAD
S  +1 S D  +1 D
° rad

• The conversion from degrees into radians is executed as follows:

π
Radians = Degrees ×
180
528
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion
11
Program example
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, a 4-digit BCD value set in degrees in X020 to X037 is converted into a binary
floating point value in radians, and stored to D20 and D21 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 19 K4X20 D0 Angle to be converted into radians is input ([1]).
BIN
12
FNC 49 The input angle is converted into binary floating
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D0 D10
FNC136 The angle is converted from degrees into radians

D10 D20
DRAD ([3]).
END 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation when "120" is specified in X020 to X037
[1] [2] Conversion into [3]
Conversion D0 binary floating point Conversion
X037 X020 into binary b15 b0 (real number) D11 D10 into radians D21 D20
0 1 2 0 120 120 2.094395 ... 14
BCD Binary
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
BIN FLT DRAD
value value
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
529
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion
18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion
Outline
This instruction converts a value in radians into a value in degrees.
D DEG P  9 steps DDEG
Continuous
Operation
 DDEGP Pulse (Single)
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing a value in radians to be converted into a value in degrees
D Head device number storing a value in degrees acquired by conversion
Oper-
Type
S     
D    

1. 32-bit operation (DDEG and DDEGP)
The unit of [ S +1, S ] is converted from radians into degrees, and the operation result is stored to [ D +1,
D ].
input FNC137
S D rad °
DDEG
• The conversion from radians into degrees is executed as follows:
180
Degrees = Radians ×
π
Program example
In the program example shown below, a binary floating point value set in radians in D20 and D21 is converted into a
BCD value in degrees, and stored to Y040 and Y057 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC137 A value in radians is converted into a value in
D20 D10
DDEG degrees ([1]).
FNC129 The angle in binary floating point (real number) is

D10 D0
INT converted into an integer ([2]).
FNC 18 The converted integer is output to the display unit

D0 K4Y40
BCD ([3]).
END
Operation when "1.435792" is specified in D20 and D21

[2]
[1] Conversion [3]
Conversion into binary D0 Conversion
D21 D20 into degrees D11 D10 value b15 b0 into BCD Y057 Y040
1.435792 82.26482 82 0 0 8 2
Binary floating point DDEG Binary floating point INT Binary BCD BCD
value (real number) value (real number) value value
530
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
19. Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
FNC140 to FNC149 provide instructions for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions 12
and for executing special processing.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
140 WSUM WSUM S D n Sum of Word Data Section 19.1

13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
141 WTOB WTOB S D n WORD to BYTE Section 19.2
142 BTOW BTOW S D n BYTE to WORD Section 19.3
143 UNI UNI S D n 4-bit Linking of Word Data Section 19.4 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
144 DIS DIS S D n 4-bit Grouping of Word Data Section 19.5
145 −
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
146 −
147 SWAP SWAP S Byte Swap Section 19.6
148 −
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
149 SORT2 SORT2 S m1 m2 D n Sort Tabulated Data 2 Section 19.7
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
531
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data
19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data
Outline
This instruction calculates the sum of consecutive 16-bit or 32-bit data.
When calculating the addition data (sum value) in units of byte (8 bits), use the CCD (FNC 84) instruction.
→ For CCD (FNC 84) instruction, refer to Section 16.5.
D WSUM P 7 steps WSUM
Continuous
13 steps DWSUM
Continuous
Operation Operation
WSUMP Pulse (Single) DWSUMP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing data whose sum is calculated 16- or 32-bit binary
D Head device number storing sum 32- or 64-bit binary

n Number of data (0 < n) 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S      
D      
n    

1. 16-bit operation (WSUM and WSUMP)
The sum of "n" 16-bit data starting from S is stored as 32-bit data in [ D +1, D ].
Command
input
FNC140 S D n
WSUM
S  +0 K4444
+1 K3333
Sum of
+2 K1234 "n"
"n" data [  +1, D ]
D
+3 K-5426 points
(n = 6) K13911
+4 K326
+5 K10000
2. 32-bit operation (DWSUM and DWSUMP)

The sum of "n" 32-bit data starting from [ S +1, S ] is stored as 64-bit data in [ D +3, D +2, D +1,
D ].
Command
input FNC140 S D n
DWSUM
[ S  +1, S  ] K32767000
[ S  +3, S  +2] K6000 Sum of
"n"
[ S  +5, S  +4] K35392000 "n" data [ D  +3, D  +2, D  +1, D  ]
points
[ S  +7, S  +6] K-11870000 (n = 5) K68640000
[ S  +9, S  +8] K12345000
532
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data
11
Related instruction
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Check code
CCD (FNC 84)
Calculates the sum of 16-bit data in units of byte (8 bits) and the horizontal parity.
Caution 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
• In the 32-bit operation, the acquired sum is 64-bit data. FX3U and FX3UC PLCs cannot handle 64-bit data. When the
sum is within the numeric range of 32-bit data (K-2,147,483,648 to K2,147,483,647), however, FX3U and FX3UC
PLCs can handle the low-order 32 bits of 32-bit data as the sum while ignoring the high-order 32 bits.
In the case of "DWSUM D0 D100 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
13
Errors
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D8067.
• When "n" points starting from S are outside the specified device range (error code: K6706)
• When "n" is smaller than or equivalent to "0" (error code: K6706)
14
• When D are outside the specified device range. (error code: K6706)
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Program example
In the program shown below, the sum of 16-bit data stored in D10 to D14 is stored in [D101, D100].
X010 D10 K4500
FNC140
WSUMP
D10 D100 K5 D11 K2500 WSUMP 15
D12 K-3276 instruction [D101,D100]
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D13 K6780 K14948
END
D14 K4444
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
533
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE
19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE
Outline
This instruction separates consecutive 16-bit data in byte units (8 bits).
WTOB P Continuous 
7 steps WTOB Operation
WTOBP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing data to be separated in byte units
D Head device number storing result of separation in byte units 16-bit binary
n Number of byte data to be separated (0 ≤ n)
Oper-
Type
S     
D     
n    

1. 16-bit operation (WTOB and WTOBP)
1) "n/2" 16-bit data stored in S and later is separated into "n" bytes, and stored in "n" devices starting from
D as shown below.
Command
WTOBP
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S  +0 High-order byte Low-order byte D  +0 00H Low-order byte
+1 High-order byte Low-order byte +1 00H High-order byte
+2 00H Low-order byte
...
...
+n/2
*1 High-order byte Low-order byte +3 00H High-order byte "n" bytes
...
...
*1 When "n" is an odd number, "n/2" is +n-2 00H Low-order byte

rounded up. +n-1 00H High-order byte
When "n" is "5", for example, " S 
+3" is used. "00H" is stored.
2) "00H" is stored in the high-order byte (8 bits) of each device ( D and later) storing the separated byte data.
534
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE
11
3) When "n" is an odd number, only the low-order byte (8 bits) of the final separation source device is regarded as
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
the target data as shown in the figure below.
For example, when "n" is "5", the data from S to the low-order byte (8 bits) of S +2 is stored in D to
D +4.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S  +0 12H 39H D  +0 00H 39H 12
+1 56H 78H +1 00H 12H
When "n"
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
+2 FEH DCH +2 00H 78H is "5"
+3 00H 56H
It is ignored when
"n" is "5". +4 00H DCH
"00H" is stored.
4) When "n" is "0", WTOB instruction is not executed. 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Related instruction
BTOW (FNC142) Combines the low-order 8 bits (low-order byte) of consecutive 16-bit data.
Caution 14
Devices storing the separation source data can overlap devices storing the separated data.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
When "n" is an odd number, however, the high-order byte (8 bits) of the final separation source device is overwritten
and erased.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S  =D12 32H 31H D  =D12 00H 31H
D13
D14
34H
36H
33H
35H
D13
D14
00H
00H
32H
33H
When "n" 15
is "5"
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
"36H" is ignored when "n" is "5". D15 00H 34H
Because D14 is also used in the D16 00H 35H
separation result destination devices D
and later, "36H" is erased and
overwritten. "00H" is stored.
16
Errors
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D8067.
• When the separation source devices S to S +n/2 are outside the specified device range (error code:
K6706)
When "n" is an odd number, the number of a rounded up value decides the number of devices. (error code: K6706) 17
• When the separated data destination devices D to D +n-1 are outside the specified device range (error
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
code: K6706)
Program example
In the program shown below, the data stored in D10 to D12 is separated in byte units, and stored in D20 to D25.
X000
FNC141 D10 D20 K6
18
WTOBP
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
END
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D10 FDH 58H D20 00H 58H 19
D11 57H E2H D21 00H FDH
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
D12 34H 44H D22 00H E2H 6 bytes

D23 00H 57H
D24 00H 44H
D25 00H 34H
"00H" is stored. 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
535
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD
19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD
Outline
This instruction combines the low-order 8 bits (low-order byte) of consecutive 16-bit data.
BTOW P Continuous 
7 steps BTOW Operation
BTOWP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing data to be combined in byte units
D Head device number storing data acquired by combination in byte units 16-bit binary
n Number of byte data to be combined (0 ≤ n)
Oper-
Type
S     
D     
n    

1. 16-bit operation (BTOW and BTOWP)
1) The low-order byte (8 bits) of "n" 16-bit data starting from S is combined, and stored in "n/2" devices starting
from D as shown below.
Command
BTOWP
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S  +0 1st byte data D  +0 2nd byte 1st byte
+1 2nd byte data +1 4th byte 3rd byte
"n" +2 3rd byte data
...
...
bytes +n/2
*1
"n"th byte "n-1"th byte
...
...
+n-1 "n"th byte data

*1 When "n" is an odd number,
The high-order byte is ignored. refer to "3)" below
2) The high-order byte (8 bits) of each combination source 16-bit data ( S and later) is ignored.
3) When "n" is an odd number, "00H" is stored in the high-order byte (8 bits) of the final one among the combination
result destination devices as shown below.
For example, when "n" is "5", the low-order byte (8 bits) of S to S +4 is stored in D to D +2, and
"00H" is stored in the high-order byte (8 bits) of D +2.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S  +0 ABH 12H D  +0 34H 12H
+1 CDH 34H +1 78H 56H
When
"n" is +2 EFH 56H +2 00H 9AH
"5" +3 ABH 78H
When "n" is "5",
+4 CDH 9AH "00H" is stored.
The high-order bytes is ignored.
4) When "n" is "0", the BTOW instruction is not executed.
536
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD
11
Related instruction
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
WTOB (FNC141) Separates consecutive 16-bit data in byte units (8 bits).
Caution
Devices storing the combination source data may be equivalent to devices storing the combined data.
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
After combination, however, the high-order byte (8 bits) of the combination source data stored in the devices used for
the combination destination data is erased and overwritten with the data acquired by combining the high-order byte (8
bits).
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S  =D11 ABH 12H D  =D10 34H 12H
D12 CDH 34H D11 78H 56H 13
When D13 EFH 56H D12 BCH 9AH
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
"n" is D14 ABH 78H D13 EFH 56H
"6" D15 CDH 9AH D14 ABH 78H
D16 EFH BCH D15 CDH 9AH
D16 EFH BCH
Because these combination source devices are
It is not changed. 14
also used for the combination destination, "ABH"
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
and "CDH" are erased and overwritten.
Errors
D8067.
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
• When the combination source devices S to S +n-1 are outside the specified device range (error code:
K6706)
• When the combined data destination devices D to D +n/2 are outside the specified device range (error
code: K6706)
When "n" is an odd number, the number of a rounded up value decides the number of devices. (error code: K6706)
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Program example
In the program shown below, the low-order byte (8 bits) data stored in D20 to D25 is combined, and stored in D10 to
D12.
X000
FNC142
BTOWP
D20 D10 K6
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
END
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D20 00H 78H D10 12H 78H
D21 31H 12H D11 55H 49H 18
6 bytes D22 36H 49H D12 31H 67H
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
D23 44H 55H

D24 48H 67H
D25 49H 31H

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
537
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data
19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data
Outline
This instruction combines the low-order 4 bits of consecutive 16-bit data.
UNI P Continuous 
7 steps UNI Operation
UNIP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing data to be combined
D Device number storing combined data 16-bit binary
n Number of data to be combined (0 to 4, When "n" is "0", UNI instruction is not executed.)
Oper-
Type
S     
D     
n    

1. 16-bit operation (UNI/UNIP)
1) The low-order 4 bits of "n" 16-bit data starting from S are combined, and stored in D as shown below.
Command
UNIP
b15 b4 b3 b0
S  +0 Low-order 4 bits
"n" 1 Low-order 4 bits
points 2 Low-order 4 bits b15 b12b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
3 Low-order 4 bits D
Ignored Combined data
2) Specify a number 1 to 4 in "n".

In the case of "n = 0", UNI instruction is not executed.
3) In the case of "1 ≤ n ≤ 3", the high-order {4 × (4-n)} bits of D are set to "0".
For example, when "n" is "3", the low-order 4 bits of S to S +2 are stored in b0 to b11 of D , and the
high-order 4 bits of D are set to "0".
b15 b4 b3 b0
S  +0 Low-order 4 bits
+1 Low-order 4 bits b15 b12b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
+2 Low-order 4 bits D 0 0 0 0
Ignored Combined data When "n" is "3", b12

to b15 are set to "0".
538
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data
11
Related instruction
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
DIS (FNC144) Separates 16-bit data in 4-bit units.
Errors
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D8067.
• When S to S +n are outside the specified device range (error code: K6706)
• When "n" is outside the range from "0 to 4" (error code: K6706)
Program example 13
In the program below, the low-order 4 bits of D0 to D2 are combined and stored in D10 when X000 turns ON.
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
X000
FNC143 D0 D10 K3
UNIP
END
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
b15 b4 b3 b0 b15 b12b11 b4 b3 b0
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 D10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
D2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
15
Combined data Because "n" is "K3",
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
they are set to "0".
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
539
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data
19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data
Outline
This instruction separates 16-bit data into 4 bit units.
DIS P Continuous 
7 steps DIS Operation
DISP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Device number storing data to be separated
D Head device number storing separated data 16-bit binary
n Number of data to be separated (0 to 4) (When "n" is "0", DIS instruction is not executed.)
Oper-
Type
S     
D     
n    

1. 16-bit operation (DIS and DISP)
1) 16-bit data stored in S is separated in 4-bit units, and stored in D as shown below.
Command
DISP
b15 b12b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 b15 b4 b3 b0

S D  +0 Low-order 4 bits
+1 Low-order 4 bits "n"
+2 Low-order 4 bits points
+3 Low-order 4 bits
They are set to Data storage area

"0".
2) Specify a number 1 to 4 in "n".

In the case of "n = 0", DIS instruction is not executed.
3) High-order 12 bits of "n" devices starting from D are set to "0".
Related instruction
UNI (FNC143) Combines low-order 4 bits of 16-bit data.
540
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data
11
Errors
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
D8067.
• When D to D +n are outside the specified device range (error code: K6706)
• When "n" is outside the range from "0 to 4" (error code: K6706)
12
Program example
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
In the program below, D0 is separated into 4 bit units and stored in D10 to D13 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC144 D0 D10 K4
DISP
13
END
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
b15 b12b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 b15 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D10 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 D10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
D11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
14
D12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
They are set to "0". Data storage

area
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
541
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.6 FNC147 – SWAP / Byte Swap
19.6 FNC147 – SWAP / Byte Swap
Outline
This instruction swaps the high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of a word device.
D SWAP P 3 steps SWAP
Continuous
5 steps DSWAP
Continuous
Operation Operation
SWAPP Pulse (Single) DSWAPP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Word device whose high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits are swapped for each other 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S           

1. 16-bit operation (SWAP and SWAPP)
High-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits are swapped for each other.
Command S
input FNC147 S High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits
SWAPP
2. 32-bit operation (DSWAP and DSWAPP)

High-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits are swapped for each other in each word device.
Command S  +1 S
input
FNC147 S High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits , High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits
DSWAPP
Caution
When the continuous operation type instruction is used, swapping is executed in each operation cycle.
This instruction works in the same way as the extension function of the XCH (FNC 17) instruction.
542
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2
11
19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction sorts a data table consisting of data (lines) and group data (columns) based on a specified group data 12
(column) sorted by line in either ascending or descending order. This instruction stores the data (lines) in serial
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
devices facilitating the addition of data (lines).
On the other hand, the SORT (FNC 69) instruction stores the group data (columns) in serial devices, and sorts a table
in ascending order only.
→ For SORT (FNC 69) instruction, refer to Section 14.10.
1. Instruction format 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D SORT2 11 steps SORT

Continuous
21 steps DSORT2 Continuous
Operation Operation
14
2. Set data
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S Head device number storing the data table [which occupies m1 × m2 points]
m1 Number of data (lines) [1 to 32]
m2 Number of group data (columns) [1 to 6]
D Head device number storing the operation result [which occupies m1 × m2 points]
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
n Column number of group data (column) used as the basis of sorting [1 to m2]
Oper-
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 16
Type
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S  
m1    
m2  
D   17
n
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
   

1. 16-bit operation (SORT2)
In the data table (sorting source) having (m1 x m2) points from S , data lines are sorted in the ascending or 18
descending order based on the group data in column No. "n", and the result is stored in the data table (occupying m1
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
x m2 points) from D .
→ For operation examples, refer to Page 545.
Command
input FNC149
SORT2
S m1 m2 D n
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

M8029
Instruction execution complete
M{{ flag for SORT2 instruction
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
543
The data table configuration is explained in an example in which the sorting source data table has 3 lines and 4
1 2 3 4
1 S S +1 S +2 S +3
Number of
data 2 S +4 S +5 S +6 S +7
m1 =K3
3 S +8 S +9 S +10 S +11
• Set the sorting order by setting M8165 to ON or OFF.

Sorting order
M8165=ON Descending order
M8165=OFF Ascending order
2. 32-bit operation (DSORT2)

In the data table (sorting source) having (m1 × m2) points from [ S +1, S ], data lines are sorted in the
ascending or descending order based on the group data in the column No. "n", and the result is stored in the data table
(sorting result) having (m1 × m2) points from [ D +1, D ].
→ For operation examples, refer to next page.
Command
input FNC149 S m1 m2 D n
DSORT2

M8029
M{{ flag for SORT2 instruction
The data table configuration is explained in an example in which the sorting source data table has 3 lines and 4
1 2 3 4
1 [ S +1, S ] [ S +3, S +2] [ S +5, S +4] [ S +7, S +6]
Number of
data 2 [ S +9, S +8] [ S +11, S +10] [ S +13, S +12] [ S +15, S +14]
m1 =K3
3 [ S +17, S +16] [ S +19, S +18] [ S +21, S +20] [ S +23, S +22]
• Set the sorting order by setting M8165 to ON or OFF.

Sorting order
M8165=ON Descending order
M8165=OFF Ascending order
• When a data register D or extension register (R) is used for "m1", the data length is 32 bits.
For example, when "m1" is specified in D0, "m1" is 32-bit data stored in [D1, D0].
544
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When the instruction is executed with "n = K2 (column No. 2)" and "n = K3 (column No. 3)" for the following sorting
source data, the operations shown below result.
The operation examples below indicate 16-bit operations. In the case of 32-bit operation, construct the data table with
32-bit binary data.
It is recommended to put a serial number such as a control number in the first column so that the original line number
can be estimated based on the contents. 12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Sorting source data
1 2 3 4
1
S S +1 S +2 S +3 13
1 150 45 20
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
S +4 S +5 S +6 S +7
2
2 180 50 40
Number of
S +8 S +9 S +10 S +11
data 3
m1 =K5 3 160 70 30
14
S +12 S +13 S +14 S +15
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
4
4 100 20 8
S +16 S +17 S +18 S +19

5
5 150 50 45
(in the case of ascending order)
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Column No. 1 2 3 4
D D +1 D +2 D +3
1
4 100 20 8
2
D +4 D +5 D +6 D +7 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1 150 45 20
D +8 D +9 D +10 D +11
3
5 150 50 45
D +12 D +13 D +14 D +15

4
3 160 70 30 17
D +16 D +17 D +18 D +19
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
5
2 180 50 40
(in the case of descending order)
Column No.
Line No.
1
Control number
2
Height
3
Weight Age
4
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
D D +1 D +2 D +3
1
3 160 70 30
D +4 D +5 D +6 D +7
2
2 180 50 40
D +8 D +9 D +10 D +11
19
3
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
5 150 50 45
D +12 D +13 D +14 D +15

4
1 150 45 20
D +16 D +17 D +18 D +19

5
4 100 20 8 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
545
Related devices
M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON when data sorting is completed.
Sorts data in the descending order when set to ON.
M8165 Descending order
Sorts data in the ascending order when set to OFF.
Related instruction
Sort tabulated data
This instruction sorts a data table consisting of data (lines) and group data (columns) based on a specified
SORT (FNC 69)
group data (column) sorted by line in ascending order. This instruction stores the group data (columns) in
serial devices.
Cautions
• Do not change the contents of operands and data during operation.
• To execute SORT2 instruction again, set the command input to OFF once, then ON again.
• Limitation in number of SORT2 instructions
Up to two SORT2 instructions can be simultaneously driven in a program.
• Writing during RUN is disabled for a circuit block including SORT2 instruction.
• When the same device is specified in S and D
The source data is overwritten with the data acquired by sorting.
Pay close attention not to change the contents of S until execution of SORT2 instruction is completed.
• Ensure that the sorted data does not overlap with the source data.
D10 D30 D10 D30
Source Data Source Data
D2 D22 D20 D40

Sorted Data Sorted Data
D10 D30 D10 D30

Source Data Source Data
D10 D30 D35 D55

Sorted Data Sorted Data
D50 D70
Source Data
D20 D40
Sorted Data
• Note that the 32-bit values [m1+1, m1] and [n+1, n] are valid when D or R is specified as "m1" or "n" in a 32-bit
instruction.
In the case of "DSORT2 D0 D50 K4 D100 R0", "m1" is [D51, D50], and "n" is [R1, R0].
546
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
20. Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
FNC150 to FNC159 provide positioning instructions using the built-in pulse output function of the PLC. 12
→ For details, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
150 DSZR DSZR S1 S2 D1 D2 DOG Search Zero Return Section 20.1
13
151 DVIT DVIT S1 S2 D1 D2 Interrupt Positioning Section 20.2
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
152 TBL TBL D n Batch Data Positioning Mode Section 20.3
153 − − 14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
154 − −
155 ABS ABS S D1 D2 Absolute Current Value Read Section 20.4
15
ZRN S1 S2 S3 D
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
156 ZRN Zero Return Section 20.5
157 PLSV PLSV S D1 D2 Variable Speed Pulse Output Section 20.6
158 DRVI DRVI S1 S2 D1 D2 Drive to Increment Section 20.7 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
159 DRVA DRVA S1 S2 D1 D2 Drive to Absolute Section 20.8
Caution on writing during RUN

During RUN, avoid writing while any positioning control instruction (FNC150, FNC151, or FNC156 to 17
FNC159) is executed (that is, while pulses are output).
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
If program write is executed during RUN to a circuit block including a target instruction below while pulses are being
output, the PLC executes the operation shown below.
PLC operation when writing executed during RUN while instruction is
Target instruction
executed
DSZR (FNC150)
DVIT (FNC151)
Decelerates and stops pulse output. 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
TBL (FNC152) Disables writing during RUN.

ZRN (FNC156) Decelerates and stops pulse output.
During operation with
Decelerates and stops pulse output.
acceleration/deceleration
PLSV (FNC157)
During operation without
acceleration/deceleration
Immediately stops pulse output. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
DRVI (FNC158)
Decelerates and stops pulse output.
DRVA (FNC159)
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
547
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return
20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return
Outline
This instruction executes a zero return, and aligns the mechanical position with a present value register inside the
PLC.
In addition, this instruction enables the following functions not supported by the ZRN (FNC156) instruction:
• DOG search function
• Zero return by the near-point (dog) signal and zero-phase signal
It is not possible, however, to count the zero-phase signal and then determine the zero point.
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
→ For cautions on using special high-speed output adapters,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
DSZR 9 steps DSZR Continuous


Operation
2. Set data
S1 Device number for near-point signal (dog)
S2 Input number for zero-phase signal

Bit
D1 Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output
D2 Device number to which rotation direction signal is output
Oper-
Type
S1     1 

S2 
2

D1 
3

D2   1 
4
1 : "D.b" is available only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
2 : In the case of FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, specify X000 to X007.
In the case of FX3S PLC, specify X000 to X005.
3 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3 or Y003*3
from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*3. To use Y002 and Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connected a second high-speed output
special adapter.
Points
• When using a relay output type or triac output type FX3U PLC, a special high-speed output adapter is required.
• Outputs of special high-speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.
548
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return
11
4 : When using a special high-speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX3U PLC, the rotation
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
direction signal must be used by the following table output.
When using a built-in transistor output for the pulse output destination in an FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
PLCs, the rotation direction signal must use transistor output.
Special high-speed output adapter No. Pulse output Rotation direction output
No. 1 (1st unit)

D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004 12
D1 D2
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
=Y001 =Y005
D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006
No. 2 (2nd unit)
D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Command
input FNC150 S1  S2  D1  D2 
DSZR
Caution on writing during RUN 14

During RUN, avoid writing while the DSZR (FNC150) instruction is executed (that is, while a pulse is output).
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including the FNC150 instruction while pulses are output,
the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.

The function of FNC150 instruction is changed depending on the version as shown in the table below.
→ For explanation of the instruction and the contents of function change,
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
refer to the Positioning Control Edition.
Applicable version
When a special auxiliary relay corresponding to D1 is

Clear signal output
destination
specification function
set to ON, the clear signal output destination is changed to
an output number specified by a special data register 16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
corresponding to D .
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
549
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning
20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning
Outline
This instruction executes one-speed interrupt constant quantity feed.
D DVIT 9 steps DVIT Continuous
17 steps DDVIT Continuous
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Number of output pulses (incremental address) after interrupt*1

S2 Output pulse frequency*2

Bit
*1. Setting range: −32768 to +32767 (except 0) in 16-bit operation

−999,999 to +999,999 (except 0) in 32-bit operation
*2. Setting range: 10 to 32767 Hz in 16-bit operation
Following range in 32-bit operation
Pulse output destination Setting range
FX3U PLC Special high-speed output adapter 10 to 200,000 (Hz)
FX3U/FX3UC PLC Main unit (transistor output) 10 to 100,000 (Hz)
Oper-
Type
S1            
S2            

D1 
1

D2   3 
2
1 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*4 or Y003*4 from
a high-speed output special adapter*3.
special adapter.
Points
550
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When using a built-in transistor output for the pulse output destination in an FX3U/FX3UC PLC, the rotation
direction signal must use transistor output.
No. 1 (1st unit)

D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004 12
D1 D2
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
=Y001 =Y005
D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006
No. 2 (2nd unit)
D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007
3 : "D.b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Command
input FNC151 S1  S2  D1  D2 
DVIT
14
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
During RUN, avoid writing while the DVIT (FNC151) instruction is executed (that is, while a pulse is output).
Function change depending on the version 15

The functions of FNC151 instruction are changed depending on the version as shown in the table below.
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Applicable version
FX3U FX3UC
Ver. 2.20 or later Ver. 1.30 or later

Interrupt input signal
When M8336 is set to ON, the interrupt input signal corresponding to Y000
to Y003 is changed to an input number (X000 to X007) specified by D8336.
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
When using a transistor output in the main unit, Y003 cannot be specified.
When "8" is specified by D8336 to the interrupt input signal corresponding
to Y000 to Y003 and M8336 is set to ON, the interrupt input signal is
changed to a special auxiliary relay. When this changed special auxiliary
relay is set to from OFF to ON in an input interrupt program, the PLC starts
Ver. 2.20 or later Ver. 2.20 or later User interrupt mode
the interrupt operation. When this function is used, however, the logic of
the interrupt input cannot be inverted. 17
In addition, when using a transistor output in the main unit, Y003 cannot be
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
specified.
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
551
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.3 FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode
20.3 FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode
Outline
This instruction executes one specified table operation from the data table set in GX Works2 etc.
*1 Interrupt positioning
DVIT (FNC151)
PLSV (FNC157) Variable speed pulse output
DRVI (FNC158) Drive to increment
DRVA (FNC159) Drive to absolute
D TBL  17 steps DTBL Continuous
Operation
2. Set data
D Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output Bit

n Table entry number [1 to 100] to be executed 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type

D 1
n  
*2. Y002 is not available in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type) and FX3GC PLC.
special adapter.
Points

Command
input FNC152 D n
DTBL

Writing is disabled to a circuit block including the TBL (FNC152) instruction during RUN.
552
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.4 FNC155 – ABS / Absolute Current Value Read
11
20.4 FNC155 – ABS / Absolute Current Value Read
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction reads the absolute position (ABS) data when the servo amplifier (equipped with the absolute position 12
detection function) MR-J4A, MR-J3A, MR-J2(S)A, or MR-HA is connected. The data is converted into a pulse
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
when being read.
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition.
D ABS Continuous
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
 13 steps DABS Operation
2. Set data
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Head device number inputting absolute (ABS) data output signal sent from servo amplifier
S
Three points are occupied from S .
Bit
Head device number outputting absolute (ABS) data control signal to servo amplifier
D1
Three points are occupied from D1 .
D2 Device number storing absolute (ABS) data (32-bit value) 32-bit binary
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Type
S
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T
    2
C D R U\G V Z Modify K

H E "" P
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89

D1   2 
1
D2       3 4  
1: Specify a transistor output.

2: "D.b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available. 17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

Command
input FNC155 S D1  D2 
18
DABS
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
553
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return
20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return
Outline
This instruction executes a zero return, and aligns the mechanical position with a present value register inside the
PLC.
When the dog search function is required, use DSZR (FNC150) instruction.
D ZRN 9 steps ZRN Continuous
17 steps DZRN Continuous
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Initial zero return speed*1

S2 Creep speed [10 to 32767 Hz]
S3 Device number for near-point signal (dog)

Bit
D Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output
*1. Setting range: 10 to 32767 Hz for 16-bit operation

Following range for 32-bit operation
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Main unit (transistor output) 10 to 100,000 (Hz)
Oper-
Type
S1        3 4     
S2        3 4     
S3     1 

D 
2
1 : "D.b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
special adapter.
Points
3 : This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
4 : This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
554
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Command
input FNC156 S1  S2  S3  D
ZRN
12
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
During RUN, avoid writing while the ZRN (FNC156) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output).

The function of FNC156 instruction is changed depending on the version as shown in the table below.
13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Applicable version
Clear signal output
When a special auxiliary relay corresponding to D is
set to ON, the clear signal output destination is changed
14
destination
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
or later or later or later or later or later to an output number specified by a special data register
corresponding to D .
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
555
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output
20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output
Outline
This instruction outputs variable speed pulses with an assigned rotation direction.
D PLSV 7 steps PLSV Continuous
13 steps DPLSV Continuous
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Device number for output pulse frequency*1 16- or 32-bit binary

Bit
*1. Setting range: −32768 to −1, +1 to +32767 (except 0) Hz*2 for 16-bit operation
FX3U PLC Special high-speed output adapter −200,000 to −1, +1 to 200,000 (Hz)
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Main unit (transistor output) −100,000 to −1, +1 to 100,000 (Hz)*3
*2. When operation without acceleration/deceleration (M8338 = OFF), setting range of FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLC is
-32,768 to -10 Hz, +10 to 32,767 Hz.
*3. When operation without acceleration/deceleration (M8338 = OFF), setting range of FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLC is
-100,000 to -10 Hz, +10 to 100,000 Hz.
Oper-
Type
S1        4 5     

D1 
1

D2   3 
2
*4. 002 is not available in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type) and FX3S/FX3GC PLC.
*6. To use Y002 or Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connected a second high-speed output
special adapter.
Points
D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004
No. 1 (1st unit)
D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005
D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006
No. 2 (2nd unit)
D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007
556
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output
11
3 : "D.b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39

Command
input
12
FNC157 S1  D1  D2 
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
PLSV

During RUN, avoid writing while PLSV (FNC157) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output).
Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including FNC157 instruction while pulses are output, the 13
PLC executes the operation shown below.
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59
PLC operation when writing is executed during RUN while instruction is
executed
During operation with acceleration/deceleration*1 Decelerates and stops pulse output.
During operation without acceleration/deceleration Immediately stops pulse output.
14
*1. Only available for FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U PLCs.
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
The function of the FNC157 instruction is changed depending on the version as shown in the table below.
15
Applicable version
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Acceleration/ When M8338 is set to ON, the PLC accelerates or

deceleration decelerates up to S1 in the acceleration or deceleration
operation function time corresponding to D1 if S1 changes.
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
557
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment
20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment
Outline
This instruction executes one-speed positioning by incremental drive. The movement distance from the present
position can be specified, positive or negative.
D DRVI 9 steps DRVI Continuous
17 steps DDRVI Continuous
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Number of output pulses (relative address)*1


Bit
*1. Setting range: −32768 to +32767 (except 0) for 16-bit operation

−999,999 to +999,999 (except 0) for 32-bit operation
Oper-
Type
S1        4 5     
S2        4 5     

D1 
1

D2   3 
2
1 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002*3 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*5, or Y003*5
*3. Y002 is not available in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type) and FX3S/FX3GC PLC.
special adapter.
Points
558
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment
11
2 :When using a special high-speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX3U PLC, the rotation
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
D2
12
D1 =Y000 =Y004
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
No. 1 (1st unit)
D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005
D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006
No. 2 (2nd unit)
D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007
3 : "D.b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available. 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59

Command
input FNC158 S1  S2  D1  D2 
14
DRVI
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
During RUN, avoid writing while DRVI (FNC158) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output).
Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including FNC158 instruction while pulses are output, the
PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
559
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute
20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute
Outline
This instruction executes one-speed positioning by absolute drive. The movement distance from the zero point can be
specified.
D DRVA 9 steps DRVA Continuous
17 steps DDRVA Continuous
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Number of output pulses (absolute address)*1


Bit
*1. Setting range: −32768 to +32767 for 16-bit operation

−999,999 to +999,999 for 32-bit operation
Oper-
Type
S1        4 5     
S2        4 5     

D1 
1

D2   3 
2
1 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002*3 transistor output from main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*5 or Y003*5 from a
high-speed output special adapter*4.
*3. Y002 is not available in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type) and FX3S/FX3GC PLC.
special adapter.
Points
560
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute
11
Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
D2
12
D1 =Y000 =Y004
Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
No. 1 (1st unit)
D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005
D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006
No. 2 (2nd unit)
D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007
3 : "D.b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available. 13
Processing
High-Speed
FNC50-FNC59

Command
input FNC159 S1  S2  D1  D2 
14
DRVA
Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
During RUN, avoid writing while DRVA (FNC159) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output).
Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including FNC159 instruction while pulses are output, the
PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.
15
Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16
Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17
Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159
561
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
21. Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169

FNC160 to FNC169 provide operation and comparison instructions for the time data.
These instructions can set the time of the built-in PLC real time clock, and converts the format of the time data.
160 TCMP TCMP S1 S2 S3 S D RTC data compare Section 21.1
161 TZCP TZCP S1 S2 S D RTC data zone compare Section 21.2
162 TADD TADD S1 S2 D RTC data addition Section 21.3
163 TSUB TSUB S1 S2 D RTC data subtraction Section 21.4
164 HTOS HTOS S D Hour to second conversion Section 21.5
165 STOH STOH S D Second to hour conversion Section 21.6
166 TRD TRD D Read RTC data Section 21.7
167 TWR TWR S Set RTC data Section 21.8
168 − −
169 HOUR HOUR S D1 D2 Hour Meter Section 21.9
562
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare
21
21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction compares the comparison time with the time data, and turns ON or OFF bit devices according to the
comparison result. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
TCMP P TCMP Continuous 

11 steps Operation

TCMPP Pulse (Single)
Operation 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S1 Specifies "hour" of the comparison time [setting range: 0 to 23]. 16-bit binary
S2 Specifies "minute" of the comparison time [setting range: 0 to 59]. 16-bit binary 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S3 Specifies "second" of the comparison time [setting range: 0 to 59]. 16-bit binary
Specifies "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, and second).
S 16-bit binary
(Three devices are occupied.)
Turns ON or OFF according to the comparison result.
D Bit
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
Type
S1        2 3      26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S2        2 3     
S3        2 3     
S    2 3 
   1 
D
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
563
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare

1. 16-bit operation (TCMP)
The comparison time (hour, minute, and second) stored in S1 , S2 , and S3 is compared with the time data
(hour, minute, and second) stored in S , S +1, and S +2. Three devices starting from D turn ON or
OFF according to the comparison result.
Command
input
FNC160 S1  S2  S3  S D
TCMP
D S1  (hour) S (hour)
Turns ON in the case of " S2  (minute) > S  +1 (minute) "
S3  (second) S +2 (second)
S1  (hour) S (hour)
D  +1
Turns ON in the case of " S2  (minute) = S  +1 (minute) "
D  +2 S1  (hour) S (hour)
Turns ON in the case of " S2  (minute) < S  +1 (minute) "
↑
Even if the command contact turns OFF from ON and TCMP instruction is not
executed, D  , D  +1 and D  +2 hold the status before the command
contact turned OFF.
Cautions
Three devices are occupied respectively by S and D .
2. When utilizing the time (hour, minute, and second) of the built-in PLC real time clock
Read the values of special data registers by TRD (FNC166) instruction, and then specify those word devices as the
operands.
Program example
S1  S2  S3  S D
X000
FNC160 K10 K30 K50 D0 M0
TCMP
10:30:50
D0 (hour)
M0
Turns ON in the case of "10:30:50 > D1 (minute) "
S1  : Specifies "hour" of the comparison
D2 (second)
time.
S2  : Specifies "minute" of the
M1 D0 (hour)
comparison time.
Turns ON in the case of "10:30:50 = D1 (minute) " : Specifies "second" of the comparison
S3 
D2 (second) time.
S : Specifies "hour" of the time data.
M2 D0 (hour)
S  +1 : Specifies "minute" of the time data.
Turns ON in the case of "10:30:50 < D1 (minute) "
S  +2 : Specifies "second" of the time data.
D2 (second)
↑ D  , D  +1, D  +2
: Three bit devices turn ON or OFF
Even if X000 is OFF and TCMP instruction is not executed, M0 to
according to the comparison result.
M2 hold the status before X000 turned OFF.
564
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare
21
21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction compares two comparison time (comparison time zone) with the time data, and turns ON or OFF the
specified bit devices according to the comparison results. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
TZCP P TZCP Continuous 

9 steps Operation
TZCPP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Specifies "hour" of the lower limit comparison time (hour, minute, and second).
S1 16-bit binary
Specifies "hour" of the upper limit comparison time (hour, minute, and second).
S2 16-bit binary
S
Specifies "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, and second).
16-bit binary 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Turns ON or OFF according to the comparison result.
D Bit
Oper-
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 25
Type
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S1    2 3 
S2    2 3 
S    2 3 
D    1 
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209

1. 16-bit operation (TZCP) 27
The lower limit and upper limit comparison time (hour, minute, and second) are compared with the time data (hour,
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
minute, and second) stored in three devices S , S +1, and S +2. Three devices starting from D turn
ON or OFF according to the comparison result.
Command
input This instruction compares the
FNC161 S1  S2  S D comparison time zone specified by two
TZCP
points with the time data. 28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
D S1  (hour) S (hour)
Turns ON in the case of " S1  +1 (minute) > S  +1 (minute) ".
S1  +2 (second) S  +2 (second)
D  +1 S1  (hour) S (hour) S2  (hour)

29
≤ ≤
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
Turns ON in the case of " S1  +1 (minute) S  +1 (minute) S2  +1 (minute) ".

S1  +2 (second) S  +2 (second) S2  +2 (second)
D  +2 S (hour) S2  (hour)
Turns ON in the case of " S  +1 (minute) > S2  +1 (minute) ".
30
↑
S +2 (second) S2  +2 (second)
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
Even if the command contact turns OFF from ON and TZCP instruction is not executed, D ,
D  +1 and D  +2 hold the status before the command contact turned OFF.
565
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare
Cautions
Three devices are occupied respectively by S1 , S2 , S3 , and D .
Read the values of special data registers by TRD (FNC166) instruction, and then specify those word devices as the
operands.
Program example
S1  S2  S D
X000
FNC161 D 20 D 30 D0 M3
TZCP
D20 (hour) D0 (hour)

M3
Turns ON in the case of " D21 (minute) > D1 (minute) ".
D22 (second) D2 (second)
M4 D20 (hour) D0 (hour) D 30 (hour)

Turns ON in the case of " D21 (minute) ≤ D1 (minute) ≤ D 31 (minute) ".
D22 (second) D2 (second) D 32 (second)
M5 D0 (hour) D 30 (hour)
Turns ON in the case of " D1 (minute) > D 31 (minute) ".
D2 (second) D 32 (second)
↑
Even if X000 is OFF and TZCP instruction is not executed, M0
to M2 hold the status before X000 turned OFF.
S1  , S1  +1 and S1  +2 : Specify the lower limit of the comparison time zone in "hour", "minute" and "second.
S2  , S2  +1 and S2  +2 : Specify the upper limit of the comparison time zone in "hour", "minute" and "second.
S , S  +1 and S  +2 : Specify the time data in "hour", "minute" and "second.

D , D  +1 and D  +2 : Turn ON or OFF according to the comparison result.
The setting range of "hour" is from 0 to 23.

The setting range of "minute" is from 0 to 59.
The setting range of "second" is from 0 to 59.
566
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition
21
21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction executes addition of two time data, and stores the addition result to word devices.
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
TADD P Continuous 
7 steps TADD Operation
TADDP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Specifies "hour" of the first time data (hour, minute, and second) used in addition.
S1 16-bit binary
S2
Specifies "hour" of the second time data (hour, minute, and second) used in addition.
16-bit binary 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Stores the addition result (hour, minute, and second) of two time data.
D 16-bit binary
Oper-
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Type
S1    1 2 
S2    1 2 
D    1 2 
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209

1. 16-bit operation (TADD) 27
The time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in S2 , S2 +1, and S2 +2 is added to the time data (hour,
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
minute, and second) stored in S1 , S1 +1, and S1 +2, and the addition result (hour, minute, and second) is
stored in D , D +1, and D +2.
Command
input ( S1  , S1  +1, S1  +2)+( S2  , S2  +1, S2  +2)
FNC162 S1  S2  D
TADD →( D  , D  +1, D  +2) 28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
S1  (hour) S2  (hour) D (hour) The setting range of "hour" is from 0 to 23.

S1  +1 (minute) + S2  +1 (minute) → D  +1 (minute) The setting range of "minute" is from 0 to 59.
S1  +2 (second) S2  +2 (second) D  +2 (second) The setting range of "second" is from 0 to 59.
29
• When the operation result exceeds 24 hours, the carry flag turns ON, and the value simply acquired by addition
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
subtracted by 24 hours is stored as the operation result.

• When the operation result becomes "0" (0:0:0), the zero flag turns ON.
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
567
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition
Cautions
Three devices are occupied by S1 , S2 and D respectively.
Read the values of special data registers using the TRD (FNC166) instruction, and then specify those word devices as
the operands.
Program example
S1  S2  D
X000
FNC162 (D10, D11, D12)+(D20, D21, D22)
D 10 D 20 D 30
TADD → (D30, D31, D32)
S1  10 (hour) S2  3 (hour) D 13 (hour)

S1  +1 30 (minute) + S2  +1 10 (minute) → D  +1 40 (minute)
S1  +2 10 (second) S2  +2 5 (second) D  +2 15 (second)
10:30:10 3:10:5 13:40:15
When the operation result exceeds 24 hours

S1  S2  D
18 (hour) 10 (hour) 4 (hour) ← 18+10=28(≥24)
10 (minute) + 20 (minute) → 30 (minute)
30 (second) 5 (second) 35 (second)
18:10:30 10:20:5 4:30:35
568
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction
21
21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction executes subtraction of two time data, and stores the subtraction result to word devices.
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
TSUB P Continuous 
7 steps TSUB Operation
TSUBP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Specifies "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, and second) used in subtraction.
S1 16-bit binary
S2
Specifies "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, and second) used in subtraction.
16-bit binary 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Stores the subtraction result (hour, minute, and second) of two time data.
D 16-bit binary
Oper-
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Type
S1    1 2 
S2    1 2 
D    1 2 
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209

1. 16-bit operation (TSUB) 27
The time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in S2 , S2 +1, and S2 +2 is subtracted from the time data
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
(hour, minute, and second) stored in S1 , S1 +1, and S1 +2, and the subtraction result (hour, minute, and
second) is stored in D , D +1, and D +2.
Command
input ( S1  , S1  +1, S1  +2)−( S2  , S2  +1, S2  +2)
FNC163
TSUB
S1  S2  D
→ ( D  , D  +1, D  +2)
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
S1  (hour) S2  (hour) D (hour) The setting range of "hour" is from 0 to 23.

S1  +1 (minute) − S2  +1 (minute) → D  +1 (minute) The setting range of "minute" is from 0 to 59.
S1  +2 (second) S2  +2 (second) D  +2 (second) The setting range of "second" is from 0 to 59.
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
When the operation result is smaller than 0 hour, the borrow flag turns ON, and the value simply acquired by
subtraction added by 24 hours is stored as the operation result.
When the operation result becomes "0" (0:0:0), the zero flag turns ON.
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
569
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction
Cautions
Three devices are occupied by S1 , S2 and D respectively.
Read the values of special data registers using the TRD (FNC166) instruction, and then specify those word devices as
the operands.
Program example
S1  S2  D
X000
FNC163 D 10 D 20 D 30 (D10, D11, D12) − (D20, D21, D22)
TSUB → (D30, D31, D32)
D 10 10 (hour) D 20 3 (hour) D 30 7 (hour)

D 11 30 (minute) − D 21 10 (minute) → D 31 20 (minute)
D 12 10 (second) D 22 5 (second) D 32 5 (second)
10:30:10 3:10:5 7:20:5
When the operation result is smaller than "00:00:00"

S1  S2  D
5 (hour) 18 (hour) 11 (hour) ← 5−18=−13 (<0)
20 (minute) − 10 (minute) → 10 (minute)
40 (second) 5 (second) 35 (second)
5:20:40 18:10:5 11:10:35
570
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion
21
21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction converts the time data in units of "hour, minute, and second" into data in units of "second".
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D HTOS P 5 steps HTOS
Continuous
9 steps DHTOS
Continuous
Operation Operation
HTOSP Pulse (Single) DHTOSP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S Head device number storing the time data (hour, minute and second) before conversion 16-bit binary
Device number storing the time data (second) after conversion 16- or 32-bit binary
D
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Oper-
Type
S          
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D         

1. 16-bit operation (HTOS and HTOSP)
The time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in , +1, and +2 is converted into data in units of
26
S S S
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
"second", and stored to D .
Command
HTOS
D 27
S hour (0 to 9)
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
S  +1 minute (0 to 59) second
S  +2 second (0 to 59)
For example, when "4 hours 29 minutes 31 seconds" is specified, the operation is as follows:
D
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
S 4
S  +1 29 16171
S  +2 31
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
571
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion
2. 32-bit operation (DHTOS and DHTOSP)

The time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in S , S +1, and S +2 is converted into data in units of
"second", and stored to D +1, D .
Command
DHTOS
D  +1 D
S hour (0 to 32767)
S  +1 minute (0 to 59) second

S  +2 second (0 to 59)
For example, when "35 hours 10 minutes 58 seconds" is specified, the operation is as follows:
D  +1 D
S 35
S  +1 10 126658
S  +2 58
Error
D8067.
• When the data of S , S + 1 or S + 2 is outside the allowable range (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program shown below, the time data read from the built-in PLC real time clock is converted into data in units of
"second", and stored to D100 and D101 when X020 turns ON.
X020
FNC166 D10
TRD
FNC164 D13 D100

DHTOS
END
Operation
• Clock data reading operation by TRD (FNC166) instruction
Real time D10 2004 Year

clock
D11 1 Month
D12 31 Day
D13 20 Hour Clock data
D14 21 Minute Time data
D15 23 Second
D16 6 Day of week
• Conversion operation into "second" by DHTOS (FNC164) instruction
D13 20 D101,D100
D14 21 73283
D15 23
572
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion
21
21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction converts the time data in units of "second" into data in units of "hour, minute, and second".
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D STOH P 5 steps STOH
Continuous
9 steps DSTOH
Continuous
Operation Operation
STOHP Pulse (Single) DSTOHP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S Device number storing the time data (second) before conversion 16- or 32-bit binary
Head device number storing the time data (hour, minute and second) after conversion 16-bit binary
D
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Oper-
Type
S          
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D         

1. 16-bit operation (STOH and STOHP)
The time data in units of "second" stored in S is converted into data in units of "hour, minute, and second", and
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
stored to D , D +1, and D +2 (hour, minute, and second).
Command
STOH
S 27
D Hour (0 to 9)
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Second (0 to 32767) D  +1 Minute (0 to 59)
D  +2 Second (0 to 59)
For example, when "29,011 seconds" is specified, the operation is as follows:

S
28
D 8
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29011 D  +1 3
D  +2 31
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
573
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion
2. 32-bit operation (DSTOH and DSTOHP)

The time data in units of "second" stored in S +1 and S is converted into data in units of "hour, minute, and
second", and stored to three devices D , D +1, and D +2 (hour, minute, and second).
Command
DSTOH
S  +1 S
D Hour (0 to 32767)
Second (0 to 117964799) D  +1 Minute (0 to 59)
D  +2 Second (0 to 59)
For example, when "45,325 seconds" is specified, the operation is as follows:

S  +1 S
D 12
45325 D  +1 35
D  +2 25
Error
An operation error is caused in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is store in
D8067.
• When the data of S is outside the allowable range (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program shown below, the time data in units of "second" stored in D0 and D1 is converted into data in units of
"hour, minute, and second", and stored to D100, D101, and D102 when X020 turns ON.
X020
FNC165 D0 D100
DSTOH
END
Operation
• Converting the data in second into the data in hour, minute and second using STOHP instruction
(when "40,000 seconds" is specified by D1 and D0)
D100 11
D1,D0 40000 D101 6
D102 40
574
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.7 FNC166 – TRD / Read RTC data
21
21.7 FNC166 – TRD / Read RTC data
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction reads the clock data of the built-in PLC real time clock.
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
TRD P 3 steps TRD

Continuous
Operation
TRDP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Specifies the head device number storing the clock data.
D 16-bit binary
(Seven devices are occupied.)
24
Oper-
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Type
D    1 2 

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
1. 16-bit operation (TRD)
The clock data stored in D8013 to D8019 of the built-in PLC real time clock is read in the following format, and stored
to D to D +6.
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Command
input FNC166 This instruction reads the real time clock data in a PLC, and transfers it to seven
D
TRD data registers.
Device Item Clock data Device Item 27

0 to 99
→
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
D8018 Year D0 Year
(lower two digits)
D8017 Month 1 to 12 → D1 Month
→ 28
Special data register
D8016 Day 1 to 31 D2 Day
→
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
D8015 Hour 0 to 23 D3 Hour
D8014 Minute 0 to 59 → D4 Minute
29
D8013 Second 0 to 59 → D5 Second
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
D8019 Day of week

0 (Sunday) to
6 (Saturday) → D6 Day of week
Caution 30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
Seven devices are occupied by D .

575
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data
21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data
Outline
This instruction writes the clock data to the built-in PLC real time clock.
TWR P 3 steps TWR

Continuous
Operation
TWRP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
Specifies the head device number to which the clock data is written.
S 16-bit binary
(Seven devices are occupied.)
Oper-
Type
S    1 2 


The clock data stored in S to S +6 is written to D8013 to D8019 for the built-in PLC real time clock.
Command
input FNC167 S
TWRP
- D8018 (year data) can be converted into the 4-digit mode. (Refer to the program example shown later.)
Device Item Clock data Device Item
D 10 Year
0 to 99
(lower two digits) → D8018 Year
D 11 Month 1 to 12 → D8017 Month
→
Special data register
Time data to be set
D 12 Day 1 to 31 D8016 Day
D 13 Hour 0 to 23 → D8015 Hour
D 14 Minute 0 to 59 → D8014 Minute
D 15 Second o to 59 → D8013 Second
D 16 Day of week
0 (Sunday) to
6 (Saturday) → D8019 Day of week
- When TWR (FNC167) instruction is executed, the clock data of the real time clock is immediately changed.
Accordingly, transfer the clock data several minutes ahead to S to S +6 in advance, and then execute
FNC167 instruction when the accurate time has come.
- When setting the clock data (time) using this instruction, it is not necessary to control the special auxiliary relay
M8015 (time stop and time setting).
- If a numeric value indicating impossible date/time is set, the clock data is not changed.
Set the correct clock data, and then write it.
- The day of the week (D8019) is automatically corrected in accordance with the date without regard to the written
numeric value.
576
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data
21
Caution
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Seven devices are occupied by S .
Program example
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Example of setting the clock data (time)
In the program example shown below, the real time clock is set (to 15:20:30 on Tuesday, April 25, 2001).
X000
FNC 12
MOV
K1 D0 Year (lower two digits)
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
FNC 12 K4 D1 Month
MOV
FNC 12 K25 D2 Day

MOV
FNC 12 K15 D3 Hour 24

MOV
Others
FNC181-FNC189
FNC 12 K20 D4 Minute
MOV
FNC 12 K30 D5 Second

MOV
25
FNC 12 K2 D6 Day of week
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
MOV
FNC167 The current value of the built-in

D0
TWR real time clock is updated.
X001
The current value is
M8017
corrected by ±30 seconds. 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
• The shaded area indicates the set value of each item.
• When setting the time, it is recommended to set the time to several minutes ahead in advance, and then set X000
to ON when the accurate time is reached. The set time is then immediately written to the real time clock, and the
clock data is updated. 27
• Every time X001 is set to ON, the current time can be corrected by ±30 seconds.
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
• When handling the year in the 4-digit mode, add the following program.
D8018 will specify the 4-digit year mode in the second scan and later after the PLC mode is changed to RUN.
M8002
FNC 12 K2000 D8018
Initial pulse MOV 28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
- A PLC is normally operating in the 2-digit year mode. When the above instruction is executed and "K2000 (fixed
value)" is transferred to D8018 (year) in only one operation cycle after the PLC mode was changed to RUN, the
year mode is switched to the 4-digit mode.
- Execute this program every time the PLC mode is changed to RUN. Even if "K2000" is transferred, only the
display format is changed to the 4-digit year mode. The current date and time are not affected.
- In the 4-digit year mode, the set values "80 to 99" correspond to "1980 to 1999", and "00 to 79" correspond to 29
"2000 to 2079".
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
Examples:
"80" indicates 1980. "99" indicates 1999. "00" indicates 2000. "79" indicates 2079.
• When the data access unit FX-10DU-E/20DU-E/25DU-E is connected, select the 2-digit year mode. If the 4-digit
year mode is selected, the year is not correctly displayed in the current version of the FX-10DU-E/20DU-E/25DU-E.
Note that the clock is changed to the 2-digit year mode when the clock is set from the FX-10DU-E/20DU-E/25DU-E
while the PLC is operating in the 4-digit year mode. 30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
577
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter
21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter
Outline
This instruction measures the ON time of the input contact in units of hour.
D HOUR 7 steps HOUR Continuous

13 steps DHOUR Continuous
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Time after which D2 is set to ON (unit: hour) 16- or 32-bit binary

Current value (unit: hour) (latched (battery backed) type data register latched (battery
D1 16- or 32-bit binary
backed))
D2 Head device number to which alarm is output Bit
Oper-
Type
S        2 3     
D1  2 
D2    1 
1: D.b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.

1. 16-bit operation
Command When the accumulated ON time of the command input reaches
input FNC169 or exceeds the time stored in D1 , S is set to ON.
S D1  D2 
HOUR The current value less than one hour is stored in D1 +1
(unit: second).
S : Time after which D2 is set to ON
Specify a value in units of hour.
D1 : Current value in units of hour
D1 + 1 : Current value less than one hour (unit: second)
D2 : Alarm output destination
It turns ON when the current value D1 reaches or exceeds the time specified in S .
• Specify a latched (battery backed) type data register as D1 so that the current value data can be continuously
used even after the PLC turns OFF.
If a general type data register is used, the current value data is cleared when the power to the PLC is turned OFF or
when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
• Even after the alarm output D2 turns ON, the measurement is continued.
To begin measuring the ON time again, clear the current value stored in D1 and D1 +1.
When the current value is cleared, alarm output is turned OFF.
• When the current value D1 reaches the maximum value of 16-bit data, the measurement is stopped.
For continuing the measurement, clear the current value stored in D1 and D1 +1.
578
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter
21
2. 32-bit operation
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Command
DHOUR
[ S +1, S ] : Time after which D2 is set to ON

Specify the high-order side in S1 +1, and the low-order side in S1 .
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
[ D1 +1, D1 ] : Current value in units of hour
The high-order side is stored in D1 +1, and the low-order side is stored in D1 .
D1 +2 : Current value less than one hour (unit: second)
D2 : Alarm output destination
It turns ON when the current value D1 and D1 +1 reaches or exceeds the time specified in 23
S .
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
• Specify a latched (battery backed) type data register as D1 so that the current value data can be continuously
used even after the PLC turns OFF.
If a general data type register is used, the current value data is cleared when the power to the PLC is turned OFF or
when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
• Even after the alarm output D2 turns ON, the measurement is continued. 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
When measures the ON time beginning again, clear the current value stored in D1 to D1 +2.
When the current value is clear, alarm output is turned OFF.
• When the current value [ D1 +1, D1 ] reaches the maximum value of 32-bit data, the measurement is stopped.
For continuing the measurement, clear the current value stored in D1 to D1 +2.
Caution
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Two (16-bit operation) or three (32-bit operation) devices are occupied by D1 .
Program example 26
In the program example shown below, when the accumulated X000 ON time exceeds 300 hours, Y005 turns ON.
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
The current value less than one hour is stored in D201 in units of second.
S D1  D2 
X000
FNC169 K300 D 200 Y005
HOUR
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
S : Time after which D2 is set to ON
Specify a value in units of hour.
D1 : Current value in units of hour
D1 +1 : Current value less than one hour (unit: second)
D2 : Alarm output destination 28
It turns ON when the current value D1 reaches or exceeds the time specified in S .
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
(In this example, it turns ON when the current value becomes 300 hours.)
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
579
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179
22. External Device – FNC170 to FNC179

FNC170 to FNC179 provide conversion instructions for gray codes used in absolute type rotary encoders and
instructions dedicated to analog blocks.
170 GRY GRY S D Decimal to Gray Code Conversion Section 22.1
171 GBIN GBIN S D Gray Code to Decimal Conversion Section 22.2
172 − −
173 − −
174 − −
175 − −
176 RD3A RD3A m1 m2 D Read form Dedicated Analog Block Section 22.3
177 WR3A WR3A m1 m2 S Write to Dedicated Analog Block Section 22.4
178 − −
179 − −
580
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.1 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion
21
22.1 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction converts a binary value into a gray code, and transfers it. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D GRY P 5 steps
GRY Continuous
9 steps
DGRY Continuous
Operation Operation
GRYP DGRYP
Pulse (Single)
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S Conversion source data or word device storing conversion source data 16- or 32-bit binary
D Word device storing data after conversion 16- or 32-bit binary 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Oper-
Type
   1 2
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S         
D       1 2   

26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (GRY and GRYP)
Command
input This instruction converts and transfers data from
FNC170 S D
GRY the source (binary) to the destination (gray code). 27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
When S  is K1234 and D  is K3Y10
b15 b0
BIN 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
28
Y23 Y20 Y17 Y10
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
GRY 1234 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
- S can store a value from 0 to 32767.
2. 32-bit operation (DGRY and DGRYP)

- A binary value can be converted into a gray code of up to 32 bits.
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
- S can store a value from 0 to 2,147,483,647.
Caution
The data conversion speed depends on the scan time of the PLC.
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
581
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.2 FNC171 – GBIN / Gray Code to Decimal Conversion
22.2 FNC171 – GBIN / Gray Code to Decimal Conversion
Outline
This instruction converts a gray code into a binary value, and transfers it.
D GBIN P 5 steps
GBIN Continuous
9 steps
DGBIN Continuous
Operation Operation
GBINP Pulse (Single) DGBINP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Conversion source data or word device storing conversion source data 16- or 32-bit binary
D Word device storing data after conversion 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S        1 2     
D       1 2   


1. 16-bit operation (GBIN and GBINP)
Command
input
FNC171 This instruction converts and transfers data from
S D
GBIN the source (gray code) to the destination (binary).
When S  is K3X000 and D  is D10

X13 X10 X7 X0
GRY 1234 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
b15 b0
D10 BIN 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
- This instruction can be used for detecting an absolute position by a gray code type encoder.
- S can store a value from 0 to 32,767.
2. 32-bit operation (DGBIN and DGBINP)

- A gray code can be converted into a binary value of up to 32 bits.
- S can store a value from 0 to 2,147,483,647.
Caution
When an input relay (X) is specified as S , the response relay will be “Scan time of PLC + Input filter constant”.
The input filter value in X000 to X017*1 can be converted using the REFF (FNC51) instruction or D8020 (filter
adjustment) so that the delay caused by the filter constant is eliminated.
*1. X000 to X007 in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
582
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.3 FNC176 – RD3A / Read form Dedicated Analog Block
21
22.3 FNC176 – RD3A / Read form Dedicated Analog Block
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction reads an analog input value from the analog block FX0N-3A*1 or FX2N-2AD. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
RD3A P 7 steps
RD3A Continuous
Operation
RD3AP Pulse (Single)
Operation
 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Special block number
m1  - FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLCs: K0 to K7
- FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) : K1 to K7
16-bit binary
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
m2  Analog input channel number 16-bit binary
D Word device storing the read data 16-bit binary
Oper-
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Type
m1              
m2              
D          
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (RD3A)
Command
input
FNC176 m1 m2 D
27
RD3A
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
m1  : Special block number
FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLCs : K0 to K7
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) : K1 to K7 (K0 indicates the built-in CC-Link/LT master.)
m2  : Analog input channel number 28
FX0N-3A*1 : K1 (ch 1) or K2 (ch 2)
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
FX2N-2AD : K21 (ch 1) or K22 (ch 2)

D : Read data
A value read from the analog block is stored.
FX0N-3A*1 : 0 to 255 (8 bits)
*1.
FX2N-2AD : 0 to 4095 (12 bits)
The FX0N-3A is available only for the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
583
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.4 FNC177 – WR3A / Write to Dedicated Analog Block
22.4 FNC177 – WR3A / Write to Dedicated Analog Block
Outline
This instruction writes a digital value to the analog block FX0N-3A*1 or FX2N-2DA.
WR3A P 7 steps
WR3A Continuous
Operation
WR3AP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
Special block number
m1  - FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLCs: K0 to K7 16-bit binary
- FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) : K1 to K7
m2  Analog output channel number 16-bit binary
S Data to be written or word device storing data to be written 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
m1              
m2              
S          

1. 16-bit operation (WR3A)
Command
input
FNC177 m1 m2 S
WR3A
m1  : Special block number

FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLCs : K0 to K7
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) : K1 to K7 (K0 indicates the built-in CC-Link/LT master.)
m2  : Analog output channel number
FX0N-3A*1 : K1 (ch 1)
FX2N-2DA : K21 (ch 1) or K22 (ch 2)
S : Data to be written
Specify a value output to the analog block.
FX0N-3A*1 : 0 to 255 (8 bits)
FX2N-2DA : 0 to 4095 (12 bits)
*1. The FX0N-3A is available only for the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
584
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 23 Introduction of Alternate Instructions – FNC180
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 23.1 Instruction correspondence table
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
23. Introduction of Alternate Instructions – FNC180
22
23.1 Instruction correspondence table
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
Outline
EXTR instruction is provided for FX2N/FX2NC PLCs.
For FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs equipped with the built-in inverter communication function, dedicated
instructions shown below are provided. (EXTR instruction is not provided.)
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Instruction correspondence table
FX2N/FX2NC FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Description
EXTR K10
EXTR K11
→
→
FNC270
FNC271
IVCK
IVDR
Inverter status check
Inverter drive
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
EXTR K12 → FNC272 IVRD Inverter parameter read
EXTR K13 → FNC273 IVWR Inverter parameter write
– – FNC274 IVBWR*1 Inverter parameter block write
– – FNC275 IVMC Inverter multi command

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
585
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
24. Others – FNC181 to FNC189

FNC181 to FNC189 provide instructions for generating random numbers, executing CRC data operations, and
processing data in high-speed counter operations.
181 – –
182 COMRD COMRD S D Read device comment data Section 24.1
183 – –
184 RND RND D Random Number Generation Section 24.2
185 – −
186 DUTY DUTY n1 n2 D Timing pulse generation Section 24.3
187 – −
188 CRC CRC S D n Cyclic Redundancy Check Section 24.4
189 HCMOV HCMOV S D n High-speed counter move Section 24.5
586
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data
21
24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction reads the comment data for registered devices written to the PLC by programming software such as 22
GX Works2.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
COMRD P Continuous 
5 steps COMRD Operation
COMRDP Pulse (Single)
Operation

23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S Device number for which comment to be read is registered Device name
D Head device number storing read comment Character string

24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Oper-
Type
S          25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D     

1. 16-bit operation (COMRD and COMRDP)
1) The comment registered for device S is read, and stored in ASCII code in D and later. 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Command
COMRDP
b15 b8 b7 b0
D  +0 ASCII code of 2nd character ASCII code of 1st character
+1 ASCII code of 4th character ASCII code of 3rd character 27
+2 ASCII code of 6th character ASCII code of 5th character 16
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Comment of device specified in S 
+3 ASCII code of 8th character ASCII code of 7th character characters
can be
.......
...
ASCII code of 14th character ASCII code of 13th character stored.

+7 ASCII code of 16th character ASCII code of 15th character
+8 0000H
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
- When M8091 is OFF, "0000H" is written to the device following the final character.
- When M8091 is ON, the device following the final character does not change.
For example, when the comment of S is "LineNo.1Start", it is stored in D and later as shown below.
b15 b8 b7 b0
D  +0 69H(i) 4CH(L) 29
Comment of S  +1 65H(e) 6EH(n)
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
LineNo.1Start +2 6FH(o) 4EH(N)

+3 31H(1) 2EH(.)
+4 74H(t) 53H(S)
+5 72H(r) 61H(a)
+6 20H(space) 74H(t)
+7 20H(space) 20H(space) 30
+8 0000H
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
- When M8091 is OFF, "0000H" is written to the next device following the final character.
- When M8091 is ON, the device following the final character does not change.
587
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data
2) The final device of D is as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of M8091.

ON/OFF status Contents of processing
M8091 = OFF When M8091 is OFF, "0000H" is written to in the device following the final character.
M8091 = ON When M8091 is ON, the device following the final character does not change.
Related device
M8091 Output character number selector signal Refer to the above explanation.
Caution
• Specify a device number in device S for which a comment is registered in the PLC.
If a comment is not registered for the device S , "20H" (space) is stored in D and later for the number of
characters in the comment (16 half-width characters).
Errors
D8067.
• When a comment is not registered for the device S (error code: K6706)
• When the range of points used from D for the comment exceeds the corresponding device range
(error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program shown below, the comment "Target Line A" registered to D100 is stored in ASCII code in D0 and later
when X010 is set to ON. And since M8091 is OFF "0000H" is written to the device following the last character.
X010
RST M8091
FNC182 D100 D0
COMRDP
END
b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 61H(a) 54H(T)
D1 67H(g) 72H(r)
Comment of D100 D2 74H(f) 65H(e)
Target Line A D3 4CH(L) 20H(space)
D4 6EH(n) 69H(i)
D5 20H(space) 65H(e)
D6 20H(space) 41H(A)
D7 20H(space) 20H(space)
D8 0000H
588
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.2 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation
21
24.2 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction generates random numbers. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
RND P RND Continuous

3 steps Operation
RNDP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
23
2. Set data
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
D Head device number storing a random number 16-bit binary
Oper-
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Type
D         

1. 16-bit operation (RND and RNDP)
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
This instruction generates a pseudo-random number ranging from 0 to 32767, and stores it as a random number to
D .
In the pseudo-random number sequence, the source value of a random number is calculated at every time, and this
instruction calculates a pseudo-random number using the source value.
Command
input
FNC 184
26
D
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
RND
Pseudo-random number calculation equation:

(D8311, D8310) = (D8311, D8310) *1 × 1103515245 + 12345.....(1)
D = “([D8311, D8310]>>16)&<logical product>00007FFFh”
*1. To (D8311, D8310), write a non-negative value (0 to 2,147,483,647) only once when the PLC mode switches
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
from STOP to RUN.
[K1 is written to (D8311, D8310) as the initial value when the power is restored.]
Program example
In the program example shown below, a random number is stored to D100 every time X010 turns ON.
When the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN, the time data converted into seconds and added by the value
“(Year + Month) × Day” is written to D8311 and D8310.
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
M8002
FNC166 D0 The clock data is read.
TRD
FNC164 D3 D14 Data in hour, minute and second → Data in second
DHTOS
FNC 20 D0 D1 D10
29
ADD
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
FNC 23 The data in second is added by the value “(Year +

D10 D2 D12 Month) × Day”, and written to D8311 and D8310.
MUL
FNC 20 D14 D12 D8310
DADD
X010
FNC184 D100
30
RNDP
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
END
589
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation
24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation
Outline
This instruction generates the timing signal whose one cycle corresponds to the specified number of operation cycles.
DUTY 7 steps DUTY Continuous


Operation
2. Set data
n1 Number of scans (operation cycles) to remain ON [n1 > 0]
16-bit binary
n2 Number of scans (operation cycles) to remain OFF [n2 > 0]
D Timing clock output destination Bit
Oper-
Type
n1      
n2      
D  
: Specify either one among M8330 to M8334.

1. 16-bit operation (DUTY)
1) The timing clock output destination D is set to ON and OFF with the ON duration for "n1" scans and OFF
duration for "n2" scans.
Command
input FNC186 n1 n2 D
DUTY
Timing clock output OFF ON

destination D  "n1" scans "n2" scans
Timing clock output 0

destination "n1+n2" scans
2) Specify either one among M8330 to M8334 as the timing clock output destination device D .
3) The counted number of scans is stored among D8330 to D8334 in accordance with the timing clock output
destination device D .
The counted number of scans stored among D8330 to D8334 is reset when the counted value reaches "n1+n2" or
when the command input (instruction) is set to ON.
Timing clock output destination device D Scan counting device

M8330 D8330
M8331 D8331
M8332 D8332
M8333 D8333
M8334 D8334
590
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation
21
4) When the command input is set to ON, the operation is started. The timing clock output destination device D
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
is set to ON or OFF by the END instruction.
Even if the command input is set to OFF, the operation is not stopped.
In the STOP mode, the operation is suspended. When the power to the PLC is turned OFF, the operation is
stopped.
5) When "n1" and "n2" are set to "0", the device D is set to the following status: 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
n1/n2 status D ON/OFF status
n1 = 0, n2 ≥ 0 D Fixed to OFF
n1 > 0, n2 = 0 D Fixed to ON
Related devices 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
M8330 Timing clock output 1
M8331 Timing clock output 2
M8332 Timing clock output 3 Timing clock output in the DUTY (FNC186) instruction
M8333
M8334
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Counted number of scans for
D8330 Counted number of scans for timing clock output 1 in the DUTY (FNC186) instruction
timing clock output 1
D8332
Counted number of scans for timing clock output 3 in the DUTY (FNC186) instruction
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Caution 26
• The DUTY (FNC186) instruction can be used up to 5 times (points).
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
It is not permitted, however, to use the same timing clock output destination device D for two or more DUTY
(FNC186) instructions.
Errors
D8067.
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
• When "n1" and/or "n2" is less than "0" (error code: K6706)
• When any device other than M8330 to M8334 is set to D (error code: K6705)
Program example
In the program shown below, when X000 is set to ON, M8330 is set to ON for 1 scan and OFF for 3 scans. 28
X000
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
FNC186 K1 K3 M8330
DUTY
END
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
X000 OFF ON
M8330 OFF ON
1 scan 3 scans
3 30
2
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
D8330 1 1
current value 0 0
591
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check
24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check
Outline
This CRC instruction calculates the CRC (cyclic redundancy check) value which is an error check method used in
communication.
In addition to CRC value, there are other error check methods such as parity check and sum check. For obtaining the
horizontal parity value and sum check value, CCD (FNC 84) instruction is available.
For the generation of CRC value (CRC-16), the CRC instruction uses “X16 + X15 + X2 + 1” as a polynomial and uses
"FFFFH" as a default value.
→ For CCD instruction (check code), refer to Section 16.5.
CRC P CRC Continuous

7 steps Operation
CRCP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing data for which the CRC value is generated
D Device number storing the generated CRC value 16-bit binary

Number of 8-bit (1-byte) data for which the CRC value is generated or the device number
n
storing the number of data
Oper-
Type
S          
D         
n    
: Make sure to specify four digits (K4) when specifying the digits of a bit device.

1. 16-bit operation
CRC value is generated for “n” 8-bit data (unit: byte) starting from a device specified in S , and stored to D .
The 8-bit conversion mode and 16-bit conversion mode are available in this instruction, and the mode can be switched
by turning ON or OFF M8161. For the operation in each mode, refer to the following pages.
Command
input
FNC188 S D n
CRC
592
21
16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF)
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In this mode, the operation is executed for high-order 8 bits (1 byte) and low-order 8 bits (1 byte) of a device specified
in S .
The operation result is stored to one 16-bit device specified in D .
M8000
M8161 16-bit conversion mode 22
Command
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
input
FNC188 S n
D
CRC
Example: S = D100
D = D0 23
n= 6
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Contents of target data
Device
8 bits 16 bits
Low-order byte Low-order bits of D100 01H
S 0301H
High-order byte High-order bits of D100 03H
S
0203H
24
+1
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Device storing data for which
the CRC value is generated S +2 1400H
–
...
...
Low-order byte
S +n/2-1
High-order byte
–
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Device storing the generated Low-order byte Low-order bits of D0 E4H
D 41E4H
CRC value High-order byte High-order bits of D0 41H
8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON)

In this mode, the operation is executed only for low-order 8 bits (low-order 1 byte) of a device specified by S .
With regard to the operation result, low-order 8 bits (1 byte) are stored to a device specified by D , and high-order 26
8 bits (1 byte) are stored to a device specified by D +1.
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
M8000
M8161 8-bit conversion mode
Command
input
FNC188
CRC
S D n
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Example: S = D100
D = D0
n= 6
Device Contents of target data
S Low-order byte Low-order bits of D100 01H 28

Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
S +1 Low-order byte Low-order bits of D101 03H

Device storing data for Low-order byte Low-order bits of D103 02H
S +3
which the CRC value is
generated S +4 Low-order byte Low-order bits of D104 00H
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
–
...
S +n-1 Low-order byte –
Device storing the D Low-order byte Low-order bits of D0 E4H

generated CRC value
D +1 Low-order byte Low-order bits of D1 41H 30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
593
2. Related device
Related device Description
ON CRC instruction operates in the 8-bit mode.
M8161*1
OFF CRC instruction operates in the 16-bit mode.
Caution
In this instruction, “X16 + X15 + X2 + 1” is used as a polynomial for generating the CRC value (CRC-16). There are
many other standard polynomials for generating the CRC value. Note that the CRC value completely differs if an
adopted polynomial is different.
Reference: Major polynomials for generating the CRC value

Name Polynomial
CRC-12 X12 + x11 + X3 + X2 +X+1
16
CRC-16 X + X15 + X2 +1
CRC-32 X32 + X26 + X23 + X22 + X16 + X12 + X11 + X10 + X8 + X7 + X5 + X4 + X2 + X + 1
CRC-CCITT X16 + X12 + X5 + 1
Errors
D8067.
• When any digits other than 4 digits are specified as S or D in digit specification of bit device (error code:
K6706)
• When n is outside the allowable range (1 to 256) (error code: K6706)
• When a device specified by S +n-1 or D +1 is outside the allowable range (error code: K6706)
594
21
Program example
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the program example shown below, the CRC value of the ASCII code “0123456” stored in D100 to D106 is
generated and stored to D0 when M0 turns ON.
1. In the case of 16-bit mode

M8000
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
M0
FNC188 D100 D0 K7
CRC
Contents of data 23
Target data
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Low-order byte 30H
D100 3130H
High-order byte 31H
Low-order byte 32H
D101 3332H
Device storing data for which CRC High-order byte 33H
value is generated
D102 3534H
Low-order byte 34H 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
High-order byte 35H
Low-order byte 36H
D103 3736H
– –
Low-order byte CFH
Device storing generated CRC value D0 2ACFH
High-order byte 2AH
25
2. In the case of 8-bit mode
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
M8000
M0
FNC188
CRC
D100 D0 K7
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Contents of target data
D100 Low-order byte 30H
Device storing data for which the

D102 Low-order byte 32H 27
CRC value is generated
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Device storing the generated CRC D0 Low-order byte CFH
value D1 Low-order byte 2AH 28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
595
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move
24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move
Outline
This instruction updates the current value of a specified high-speed counter or ring counter.
The function of this instruction varies depending on the PLC version.
D HCMOV  13 steps DHCMOV

Continuous
Operation
 
2. Set data
S Device number of high-speed counter or ring counter*1 handled as transfer source

32-bit binary
D Device number handled as transfer destination
Specification to clear the current value of high-speed counter or ring counter*1 (transfer
n 16-bit binary
source) after transfer [clear (K1), no clear (K0)]
*1. Ring counters (D8099 and D8398) cannot be specified in FX3UC PLCs before Ver. 2.20.
Oper-
Type
S  
D  
n  
: Only high-speed counters (C235 to C255) and ring counters (D8099 and D8398) can be specified.

1. 32-bit operation (DHCMOV)
Command
input
FNC189 S D n
DHCMOV
• The current value of a high-speed counter or ring counter specified in S is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Device S [ D +1, D ] after instruction is executed

High-speed counter C235 to C255 Current value of high-speed counter S →[ D +1, D ]
D8099 → D
D8099
Ring counter "0" is stored in D +1.
D8398 Current value of [D8399, D8398] → [ D +1, D ]
• After transfer, the current value of the high-speed counter or ring counter is processed as shown in the table below
depending on the set value of "n":
"n" set value Operation
K0 (H0) Does not clear the current value (no processing).
K1 (H1) Clears the current value to "0".
596
21
2. High-speed counter current value update timing and the effect of DHCMOV instruction
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1) High-speed counter current value update timing
When a pulse is input to an input terminal for a high-speed counter (C235 to C255), the high-speed counter
executes up-counting or down-counting.
If the current value of a high-speed counter is handled in an applied instruction such as the normal MOV
instruction, the current value is updated at the timing shown in the table below. As a result, it is affected by the
program scan time.
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
Current value update timing
Hardware counter When OUT instruction for the counter is executed
Software counter Every time a pulse is input
By using DHCMOV instruction, the current value can be updated and transferred when it is executed.
2) Effect of DHCMOV instruction 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
• By using both input interrupt and DHCMOV instruction, the current value of a high-speed counter can be
received at the rising edge or falling edge of an external input (at reception of input interrupt).
→ Refer to the Program example 2.
• When DHCMOV instruction is used just before a comparison instruction (CMP, ZCP or comparison contact
instruction), the latest value of a high-speed counter is used in comparison. The following points must be kept
in mind when using the DHCMOV command. 24
- When the current value of a high-speed counter is compared using CMP, ZCP or comparison contact
Others
FNC181-FNC189
instruction (not using a designated high-speed counter comparison instruction), a hardware counter does
not change into a software counter.
→ For the condition in which a hardware counter is handled as a software counter, refer to Subsection 4.8.9.
- When the number of high-speed software counter comparison instructions is reduced, the total frequency
limitation is decreased.
→ For the limitation in software counters by the total frequency, refer to Subsection 4.8.10. 25
- When it is necessary to execute comparison and change an output contact (Y) as soon as the current value
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
of a high-speed counter changes, use a designated high-speed counter comparison instruction (HSCS,
HSCR or HSZ).
- DHCMOV instruction can be used as many times as necessary.
Cautions 26
When programming DHCMOV instruction in an input interrupt program, the following points should be observed.
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
For assignment of pointers for input interrupt and inputs, refer to the table shown in 5) below.
1) Program EI (FNC 04) and FEND (FNC 06) instructions in the main program. They are necessary to execute an
input interrupt program.
→ For EI (FNC 04) and FEND (FNC 06) instructions, refer to Section 8.5 and Section 8.7.
2) When programming DHCMOV instruction in the 1st line in an input interrupt program, make sure to use the
pattern program shown below. Make sure to use the command contact M8394. Do not add, change, or delete this
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
pattern program when writing during RUN. Interrupt programs may not operate normally.
I M8394 Pattern program for using the
FNC189 S D n DHCMOV instruction in an interrupt
DHCMOV program
Program to be processed as input

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
interrupt
FNC 03
IRET
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
597
3) If two or more DHCMOV instructions are used in one input interrupt program, only the first instruction (just after
the interrupt pointer) is executed when the interrupt is generated.
The rest of the interrupt, including additional DHCMOV instructions, is executed according to normal interrupt
processing.
Do not use M8394 as the command contact for the DHCMOV instructions following the first.
I301 M8394 When the input X003 turns from OFF
FNC189 S D n to ON (that is, when input interrupt is
DHCMOV accepted):
M8000 S → [ D +1, D ]
FNC189 S ' D ' n'
DHCMOV When this instruction is executed in
interrupt program:
FNC 03 S ' → [ D ' +1, D ' ]
IRET
4) It is not permitted to use DHCMOV instruction for the same counter in two or more input interrupt programs.
I000 M8394
FNC189 C236 D0 K0
DHCMOV
FNC03
Same counter IRET
I200 M8394
FNC189 C236 D2 K1
DHCMOV
FNC03
IRET
5) While input interrupts are disabled by the interrupt disable flags (shown in the table below), DHCMOV instructions
are not executed when they are placed inside a corresponding interrupt.
Interrupt disable flag Corresponding interrupt pointer Input number corresponding to interrupt pointer
M8050*1 I000,I001 X000
M8051*1 I100,I101 X001
M8052*1 I200,I201 X002
M8053*1 I300,I301 X003
M8054*1 I400,I401 X004
M8055*1 I500,I501 X005
*1.Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.

6) If an input interrupt is generated while input interrupts are disabled by something other than the interrupt disable
flags M8050 to M8055 (after execution of DI instruction and before execution of EI instruction), DHCMOV
instruction is immediately executed, but execution of the interrupt program is held. The interrupt program will be
executed after EI instruction is executed and interrupts are enabled.

The function of FNC189 instruction changes depending on the version as shown in the table below.
Applicable version
FX3U FX3UC
Ver. 2.20 or Ver. 2.20 or
Target device Ring counter (D8099 and D8398) can be specified in S .
later later
Error
An operation error occurs in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
• When a device specified in S or [ D +1, D ] is outside the allowable range (error code: K6705)
598
21
Program examples
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1. Program example 1
In the program example below, the current value of the high-speed counter C235 is compared in each operation cycle,
and then the output Y000 is set to ON if the current value is "K500" or more (when the current value of C235 is not
cleared).
The current value of C235 is
22
M8000
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC189 transferred to D1 and D0.
C235 D0 K0*1 (The current value of C235 is not
DHCMOV cleared.)
FNC238 D0 K500 In the case of "(D1, D0) ≥ K500",
Y000
DAND>= Y000 is set to ON.
END
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
*1. K0: The current value of the high-speed counter is not cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed.
K1: The current value of the high-speed counter is cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed.
In the program example shown below, the current value of C235 is transferred to D201 and D200, and the current 24
value of C235 is cleared when X001 turns from OFF to ON.
Others
FNC181-FNC189
0 FNC 04
EI
FNC 06
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
FEND
M8394  When X001 turns from OFF to ON, the
I101 FNC189 C235 D200 K1*2 interrupt program from I101 to IRET is
DHCMOV executed.
 The current value of C235 is
FNC 03
transferred to D201 and D200.
(The current value of C235 is cleared 26
IRET to “0”.)
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
*2. K0: The current value of the high-speed counter is not cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed.
K1: The current value of the high-speed counter is cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed.
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
599
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
25. Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199

FNC190 to FNC199 provide instructions for adding, subtracting and comparing block data.
190 – –
191 – –
192 BK+ BK+ S1 S2 D n Block Data Addition Section 25.1
193 BK– BK- S1 S2 D n Block Data Subtraction Section 25.2
194 BKCMP= BKCMP= S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 = S2 Section 25.3
195 BKCMP> BKCMP> S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 > S2 Section 25.3
196 BKCMP< BKCMP< S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 < S2 Section 25.3
197 BKCMP<> BKCMP<> S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 ≠ S2 Section 25.3
198 BKCMP<= BKCMP<= S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 ≤ S2 Section 25.3
199 BKCMP>= BKCMP>= S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 ≥ S2 Section 25.3
600
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition
21
25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction adds binary block data. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D BK+ P 9 steps
BK+ Continuous
17 steps
DBK+ Continuous
Operation Operation
BK+P DBK+P
23
Operation Operation
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S1 Head device number storing addition data
S2 Added constant or head device number storing addition data

D Head device number storing operation result
Others
FNC181-FNC189
n Number of data
Oper-
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Type
S1     
S2       
D     
26
n    
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (BK+ and BK+P)
Command
input
FNC192
27
S1  S2  D n
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
BK+
1) "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S2 are added to "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S1 , and the
operation result is stored in "n" points starting from D .
b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0
S1 +0 K1234 S2 +0 K4000 D +0 K5234 28
+1 K4567 +1 K1234 +1 K5801
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
+2 K-2000 "n" +2 K-1234 "n" +2 K-3234 "n"

points + points points
+(n-2) K-1234 +(n-2) K5000 +(n-2) K3766
+(n-1) K4000 +(n-1) K4321 +(n-1) K8321
29
2) A (16-bit) constant from -32768 to +32767 can be directly specified in S2 .
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
b15 b0 b15 b0
S1 +0 K1234 D +0 K5555
+1 K4567 +1 K8888
+2 K-2000 "n" +2 K2321 "n"
points +
S2 K4321
points
30
+(n-2) K-1234 +(n-2) K3087
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
+(n-1) K4000 +(n-1) K8321
601
2. 32-bit operation (DBK+ and DBK+P)

Command
input
FNC192 S1  S2  D n
DBK+P
1) "2n" 32-bit binary data starting from [ S2 +1, S2 ] are added to "2n" 32-bit binary data starting from
[ S1 +1, S1 ], and the operation result is stored in "2n" points starting from [ D +1, D ].
b31 b0 b31 b0
[ S1 +1, S1 ] K1234 [ S2 +1, S2 ] K4000
[ S1 +3, S1 +2] K40000 [ S2 +3, S2 +2] K1234
[ S1 +5, S1 +4] K-2000 "n" [ S2 +5, S2 +4] K-1234 "n"
points + points
[ S1 +2n-3, S1 +2n-4] K-1234 [ S2 +2n-3, S2 +2n-4] K5000
[ S1 +2n-1, S1 +2n-2] K4000 [ S2 +2n-1, S2 +2n-2] K4321
b31 b0
[ D +1, D ] K5234
[ D +3, D +2] K41234
[ D +5, D +4] K-3234 "n"
points
[ D +2n-3, D +2n-4] K3766
[ D +2n-1, D +2n-2] K8321
2) A (32-bit) constant from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 can be directly specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ].

b31 b0
[ S1 +1, S1 ] K1234
[ S1 +3, S1 +2] K40000
[ S1 +5, S1 +4] K-2000 "n"
points + [ S2 +1, S2 ] K4321
[ S1 +2n-3, S1 +2n-4] K-1234

b31 b0
[ S1 +2n-1, S1 +2n-2] K4000
[ D +1, D ] K5555
[ D +3, D +2] K44321
[ D +5, D +4] K2321 "n"
points
[ D +2n-3, D +2n-4] K3087
[ D +2n-1, D +2n-2] K8321
Related instruction
BK- (FNC193) Subtracts binary block data.
Caution
• When underflow or overflow occurs in the operation result, the following processing is executed. At this time, the
carry flag does not turn ON.
- In the case of 16-bit operation
K32767(H7FFF) + K2(H0002) → K-32767(H8001)
K-32768(H8000) + K-2(HFFFE) → K32766(H7FFE)

K2,147,483,647(H7FFFFFFF) + K2(H00000002) → K-2,147,483,647(H80000001)
K-2,147,483,648(H80000000) + K-2(HFFFFFFFE) → K2,147,483,646(H7FFFFFFE)
In the case of "DBK+ D0 D100 D200 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
602
21
Errors
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
D8067.
• When "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) devices starting from S1 , S2 , and/or D exceed the corresponding
device range (error code: K6706)
• When "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) devices starting from S1 overlap "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) devices
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
starting from D (error code: K6706)
Program example 23
In the program shown below, the specified number of data stored in D150 to D0 are added to the specified number of
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
data stored in D100 to D0 when X020 is set to ON, and the operation result is stored in D200 and later.
X020
FNC192 D100 D150 D200 D0 When D0 is "4"
BK+
END 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0
D100 6789 D150 1234 D200 8023
D101 7821 D151 2032 D201 9853
+
D102
D103
5432
3520
D152
D153
-3252
-1000
D202
D203
2180
2520
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D0 4
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
603
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction
25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction
Outline
This instruction subtracts binary block data.
D BK P 9 steps
BK Continuous
17 steps
DBK Continuous
Operation Operation
BKP Pulse (Single) DBKP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Head device number storing subtraction data
S2 Subtracted constant or head device number storing subtraction data

D Head device number storing operation result
n Number of data
Oper-
Type
S1     
S2       
D     
n    

1. 16-bit operation (BK- and BK-P)
Command
input FNC193 S1  S2  D n
BK-P
1) "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S2 are subtracted from "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S1 , and the
operation result is stored in "n" points starting from D .
b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0
S1 +0 K8765 S2 +0 K1234 D +0 K7531
+1 K8888 +1 K5678 +1 K3210
+2 K9325 "n" +2 K9876 "n" +2 K-551 "n"
points − points points
+(n-2) K5000 +(n-2) K4321 +(n-2) K679
+(n-1) K4352 +(n-1) K4000 +(n-1) K352
2) A (16-bit) constant from -32768 to +32767 can be directly specified in S2 .

b15 b0 b15 b0
S1 +0 K8765 D +0 K-115
+1 K8888 +1 K8
+2 K9325 "n" +2 K445 "n"
points −
S2 K8880
points
+(n-2) K5000 +(n-2) K-3880
+(n-1) K4352 +(n-1) K-4528
604
21
2. 32-bit operation (DBK- and DBK-P)
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Command
DBK-P
1) "2n" 32-bit binary data starting from [ S2 +1, S2 ] are subtracted from "2n" 32-bit binary data starting from 22
[ S1 +1, S1 ], and the operation result is stored in "2n" points starting from [ D +1, D ].
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
b31 b0 b31 b0
[ S1 +1, S1 ] K8765 [ S2 +1, S2 ] K1234
[ S1 +3, S1 +2] K8888 [ S2 +3, S2 +2] K5678
[ S1 +5, S1 +4] K9325 "n" [ S2 +5, S2 +4] K9876 "n"
points − points 23
[ S1 +2n-3, S1 +2n-4] K50000 [ S2 +2n-3, S2 +2n-4] K4321
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
[ S1 +2n-1, S1 +2n-2] K4352 [ S2 +2n-1, S2 +2n-2] K4000
b31 b0
[ D +1, D ] K7531
[ D +3, D +2] K3210
[ D +5, D +4] K-551 "n" 24
points
Others
FNC181-FNC189
[ D +2n-3, D +2n-4] K45679
[ D +2n-1, D +2n-2] K352
2) A (32-bit) constant from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 can be directly specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ].

b31 b0
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
[ S1 +1, S1 ] K8765
[ S1 +3, S1 +2] K8888
[ S1 +5, S1 +4] K9325 "n"
points − [ S2 +1, S2 ] K8880
[ S1 +2n-3, S1 +2n-4] K50000

[ S1 +2n-1, S1 +2n-2] K4352
[ D +1, D ]
b31
K-115
b0 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
[ D +3, D +2] K8
[ D +5, D +4] K445 "n"
points
[ D +2n-3, D +2n-4] K41120
[ D +2n-1, D +2n-2] K-4528
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Related instruction
BK+ (FNC192) Adds binary block data.
28
Caution
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
• When underflow or overflow occurs in the operation result, the following processing is executed. At this time, the
carry flag does not turn ON.
K-32768(H8000) – K2(H0002) → K32766(H7FFE)
K32767(H7FFF) – K-2(HFFFE) → K-32767(H8001) 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

K-2,147,483,648(H80000000) – K2(H00000002) → K2,147,483,646(H7FFFFFFE)
K2,147,483,647(H7FFFFFFF) – K-2(HFFFFFFFE) → K-2,147,483,647(H80000001)
In the case of "DBK - D0 D100 D200 R0", "n" is [R1, R0]. 30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
605
Errors
D8067.
• When "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) devices starting from S1 , S2 , and/or D exceed the corresponding
device range (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program shown below, the constant "8765" is subtracted from the data stored in D100 to D102 when X010 is set
to ON, and the operation result is stored in D200 and later.
X010
FNC193 D100 K8765 D200 K3
BK-P
END
b15 b0 b15 b0
D100 K12345 b15 b0 D200 K3580
D101 K8701 − K8765 D201 K-64
D102 K3502 D202 K-5263
606
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare
21
25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
These instructions compare block data in the comparison condition set in each instruction. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D BKCMP= P 9 steps
BKCMP= Continuous
17 steps
DBKCMP= Continuous
Operation Operation
BKCMP=P DBKCMP=P
Pulse (Single)
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
D BKCMP> P 9 steps
BKCMP> Continuous
17 steps
DBKCMP> Continuous
Operation Operation
BKCMP>P Pulse (Single) DBKCMP>P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
D BKCMP< P 9 steps
BKCMP< Continuous
17 steps
DBKCMP< Continuous
Operation Operation
BKCMP<P Pulse (Single) DBKCMP<P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
D BKCMP<> P 9 steps
BKCMP<> Continuous
Operation 17 steps
DBKCMP<> Continuous
Operation
25
BKCMP<>P Pulse (Single) DBKCMP<>P Pulse (Single)
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Operation Operation
D BKCMP<= P 9 steps
BKCMP<= Continuous
17 steps
DBKCMP<= Continuous
Operation Operation
BKCMP<=P Pulse (Single)
Operation
DBKCMP<=P Pulse (Single)
Operation 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
D BKCMP>= P 9 steps
BKCMP>= Continuous
17 steps
DBKCMP>= Continuous
Operation Operation
BKCMP>=P Pulse (Single) DBKCMP>=P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
2. Set data (common among FNC194 to FNC199)
S1 Comparison value of device number storing comparison value

S2 Head device number storing comparison source data
D Head device number storing comparison result Bit

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
n Number of compared data 16- or 32-bit binary
3. Applicable devices (common among FNC194 to FNC199)

Oper-
and
Type
Special
Unit
Index
Con-
stant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
S1       
S2     
D     
n     30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
607

1. 16-bit operation (BKCMP=, >, <, <>, <=, >= / BKCMP=P, >P, <P, <>P, <=P, and >=P)
1) "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S1 are compared with "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S2 , and the
comparison result is stored in "n" points starting from D .
Command *1 The number out of 194 to 199 is put in "OOO".
input FNCOOO*1 *2 The symbol out of "=", ">", "<", "<>", "<=", or
S1  S2  D n ">=" corresponding to the FNC No. is put in .
BKCMP*2
Comparison result
S1 +0 K1234 S2 +0 K5321 D +0 OFF(0)
+1 K5678 +1 K3399 +1 ON(1)
*3
+2 K5000 "n" +2 K5678 "n" +2 OFF(0) "n"
points > points points
+n-2 K7777 +n-2 K6543 +n-2 ON(1)
+n-1 K4321 +n-1 K1200 +n-1 ON(1)
*3 An operation example of BKCMP>
(FNC195) instruction is shown here.
2) A constant can be directly specified in S1 .

Comparison result
S2 +0 K32000 D +0 ON(1)
+1 K4321 +1 OFF(0)
*4
+2 K32000 "n" +2 ON(1) "n"
S1 K32000 = points points
*4 An operation example of BKCMP= +n-2 K1234 +n-2 OFF(0)
(FNC194) instruction is shown
+n-1 K5678 +n-1 OFF(0)
here.
3) The table below shows the comparison result in each instruction:

Instruction Comparison result ON (1) condition Comparison result OFF (0) condition
BKCMP= (FNC194) S1 = S2 S1 <> S2
BKCMP> (FNC195) S1 > S2 S1 <= S2
BKCMP< (FNC196) S1 < S2 S1 >= S2
BKCMP<> (FNC197) S1 <> S2 S1 = S2
BKCMP<= (FNC198) S1 <= S2 S1 > S2
BKCMP>= (FNC199) S1 >= S2 S1 < S2
4) When the comparison result is ON (1) in all of "n" points starting from D , M8090 (block comparison signal)
turns ON.
608
21
2. 32-bit operation (DBKCMP=, >, <, <>, <=, >= / DBKCMP=P, >P, <P, <>P, <=P, and >=P)
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1) "n" 32-bit binary data starting from [ S1 +1, S1 ] are compared with "n" 32-bit binary data starting from
[ S2 +1, S2 ], and the comparison result is stored in "n" points starting from [ D +1, D ].
Command *1 The number out of 194 to 199 is put in "OOO".
input FNCOOO*1
DBKCMP *2
S1  S2  D n *2 The symbol out of "=", ">", "<", "<>", "<=", or
">=" corresponding to the FNC No. is put in . 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
[ S1 +1, S1 ] K1234 [ S2 +1, S2 ] K5321
[ S1 +3, S1 +2] K5678 [ S2 +3, S2 +2] K3399
*3
[ S1 +5, S1 +4] K5000 "n" [ S2 +5, S2 +4] K5678 "n"
points > points
[ S1 +2n-3, S1 +2n-4] K40000 [ S2 +2n-3, S2 +2n-4] K6543 23
[ S1 +2n-1, S1 +2n-2] K4321 [ S2 +2n-1, S2 +2n-2] K1200
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Comparison result
*3 An operation example of DBKCMP>
(FNC195) instruction is shown here. D +0 OFF(0)
+1 ON(1)
+2 OFF(0) "n"
points 24
+n-2 ON(1)
Others
FNC181-FNC189
+n-1 ON(1)
2) A constant can be directly specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ].
[ S2 +1, S2 ]

[ S2 +3, S2 +2]
K32000
K4321
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
*4
[ S2 +5, S2 +4] K32000 "n"
[ S1 +1, S1 ] K32000 = points
*4 An operation example of DBKCMP= [ S2 +2n-3, S2 +2n-4] K1234
(FNC194) instruction is shown here. [ S2 +2n-1, S2 +2n-2] K5678
Comparison result
D +0 ON(1) 26
+1 OFF(0)
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
+2 ON(1) "n"
points
+n-2 OFF(0)
+n-1 OFF(0)
27
3) The table below shows the comparison result for each instruction:
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Instruction Comparison result ON (1) condition Comparison result OFF (0) condition
DBKCMP= (FNC194) [ S1 +1, S1 ] = [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] ≠ [ S2 +1, S2 ]
DBKCMP> (FNC195) [ S1 +1, S1 ] > [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] <= [ S2 +1, S2 ]
DBKCMP< (FNC196) [ S1 +1, S1 ]< [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] >= [ S2 +1, S2 ]

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
DBKCMP<> (FNC197) [ S1 +1, S1 ] ≠ [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] = [ S2 +1, S2 ]
DBKCMP<= (FNC198) [ S1 +1, S1 ] <= [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] > [ S2 +1, S2 ]
DBKCMP>= (FNC199) [ S1 +1, S1 ] >= [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] < [ S2 +1, S2 ]
4) When the comparison result is ON (1) in all of "n" points starting from [ D +1, D ], the M8090 (block 29
comparison signal) turns ON.
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
Related device
→ For the block comparison signal use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Turns ON when all comparison results are "ON (1)" in a block data instruction. 30
M8090 Block comparison signal DBKCMP= (FNC194), DBKCMP> (FNC195), DBKCMP< (FNC196), DBKCMP<> (FNC197),
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
DBKCMP<= (FNC198), and DBKCMP>= (FNC199)
609
Caution
• When using 32-bit counters (including 32-bit high-speed counters)
For comparing 32-bit counters and 32-bit high-speed counters (C200 to C255), make sure to use an instruction for
32-bit operation (DBKCMP=, DBKCMP>, DBKCMP<, DBKCMP<>, DBKCMP<=, or DBKCMP>=).
If an instruction for 16-bit operation (BKCMP=, BKCMP>, BKCMP<, BKCMP<>, BKCMP<=, or BKCMP>=) is used,
an operation error is caused (error code: K6705).
In the case of "DBKCMP = D0 D100 M0 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
Errors
D8067.
• When the range of "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) points starting from S1 and/or S2 exceeds the
corresponding device range (error code: K6706)
• When the range of "n" points starting from D exceeds the corresponding device range (error code: K6706)
• When data registers starting from D specified as "D.b" overlap "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) points starting
from S1 (error code: K6706)
• When data registers starting from D specified as "D.b" overlap "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) points starting
from S2 (error code: K6706)
• When a 32-bit counter (C200 to C255) is specified in S1 and/or S2 in 16-bit operation (error code: K6705)
For comparing 32-bit counters, make sure to use an instruction for 32-bit operation (DBKCMP=, DBKCMP>,
DBKCMP<, DBKCMP<>, DBKCMP<=, or DBKCMP>=).
Program example
1) In the program shown below, four 16-bit binary data starting from D100 are compared with four 16-bit binary data
starting from D200 by BKCMP= (FNC194) instruction when X020 is set to ON, and the comparison result is stored
in four points starting from M10.
When the comparison result is "ON (1)" in all of the four points starting from M10, Y000 is set to ON.
X020
FNC194 D100 D200 M10 K4
BKCMP=
M8090
Y000
Block comparison signal
END
Comparison
result
D100 K1000 D200 K1000 M10 ON
D101 K2000 D201 K2000 M11 ON
D102 K3000
= D202 K5000 M12 OFF
D103 K4000 D203 K4000 M13 ON
Y000 OFF
(When all of M10 to M13 are ON, Y000 is set to ON.)
2) In the program shown below, the constant K1000 is compared with four data starting from D10 when X010 is set
to ON, and the comparison result is stored in b4 to b7 of D0.
X010
FNC197 K1000 D10 D0.4 K4
BKCMP<>
END
b15 b7 b4 b0
D0 before
D10 K2000 operation 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
D11 K1000
K1000 <>
D12 K1000
D13 K2222 b15 b7 b4 b0
D0 after
operation 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
610
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
26. Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
FNC200 to FNC209 provide instructions for controlling character strings such as linking character string data, 22
replacing some characters and extracting character string data.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
200 STR STR S1 S2 D BIN to Character String Conversion Section 26.1
23
201 VAL VAL S D1 D2 Character String to BIN Conversion Section 26.2
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
202 $+ $+ S1 S2 D Link Character Strings Section 26.3
203 LEN LEN S D Character String Length Detection Section 26.4 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Extracting Character String Data from the
204 RIGHT RIGHT S D n Right
Section 26.5
Extracting Character String Data from the

205 LEFT LEFT S D n Left
Section 26.6
25
MIDR S1 D S2
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
206 MIDR Random Selection of Character Strings Section 26.7
207 MIDW MIDW S1 D S2 Random Replacement of Character Strings Section 26.8
208 INSTR INSTR S1 S2 D n Character string search Section 26.9 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Section
209 $MOV $MOV S D Character String Transfer
26.10
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
611
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion
26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion
Outline
This instruction converts binary data into character strings (ASCII codes).
On the other hand, the ESTR (FNC116) instruction converts floating point data into character strings.
→ For character strings, refer to Section 5.3.
→ For ESTR (FNC116) instruction, refer to Section 18.4.
D STR P 7 steps STR
Continuous
13 steps DSTR
Continuous
Operation Operation
STRP Pulse (Single) DSTRP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Head device number storing the number of digits of a numeric value to be converted 16-bit binary
S2 Device number storing binary data to be converted 16- or 32-bit binary
D Head device number storing converted character string Character string
Oper-
Type
S1     
S2              
D     
612
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1. 16-bit operation (STR and STRP)
1) All digits (specified by S1 ) of 16-bit binary data stored in S2 are converted into ASCII codes while the
decimal point is added to the position specified by the device storing the number of digits of the decimal part
( S1 +1), and stored in D and later. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
Command
STR
b15 b8 b7 b0
Number of all ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code
S1 +0 digits
+1 Number of digits
D +0 specifying number of all
digits - 1)"th digit indicating sign 23
ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code in "(Value
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
of decimal part +1 specifying number of all specifying number of all For number of
digits - 3)"th digit digits - 2)"th digit all digits
+2 specifying number of all specifying number of all For value
digits - 5)"th digit digits - 4)"th digit stored in S1
+3 specifying number of all specifying number of all
Sign digits - 7)"th digit
0000H
digits - 6)"th digit
24
+4
Others
FNC181-FNC189
16-bit binary
S2 0000H is automatically stored at
data
the end of a character string.
S1 +0 5
+1 1 b15 b8 b7 b0
D +0 31H(1) 2DH(-)
For number of
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
- 1 2 3 +1 2EH(.) 32H(2) all digits
16-bit binary S1 =5
+2 00H 33H(3)
data
S2 -123 00H is automatically stored at the
end of a character string.
2) Set the number of all digits S1 ranging from 2 to 8.

26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
3) Set the number of digits of the decimal part S1 +1 ranging from 0 to 5.
Make sure to satisfy "Number of digits of decimal part <= (Number of all digits -3)".
4) 16-bit binary data to be converted stored in S2 should be ranging from -32768 to +32767.
5) Converted character string data is stored in D and later as shown below.
- As the sign, "space" (20H) is stored when the 16-bit binary data stored in S2 is positive, and "-" (2DH) is 27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
stored when the 16-bit binary data stored in S2 is negative.
- When the number of digits of the decimal Number of
part S1 +1 is set to any value other all digits 6
than "0", the decimal point "." (2EH) is Number of 2
digits of 1 2 3 4
automatically added in "number of digits of decimal part
decimal part + 1"th digit. 16-bit 1234
Number of digits of
decimal part
28
When the number of digits of the decimal binary data
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
It is automatically
part S1 +1 is set to "0", the decimal added.
point is not added.
- When the number of digits of the decimal
Number of
part S1 +1 is larger than the number of all digits 6
digits of 16-bit binary data stored in Number of
digits of
3
0 0 1 2 29
S2 , "0" (30H) is automatically added, decimal part
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
and the data is shifted to the right end 16-bit 12 It is automatically

during conversion. binary data added.
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
613
- When the number of all digits stored in Number of

S1 excluding the sign and decimal all digits 8
point is larger than the number of digits of Number of 1
digits of - 1 2 3
16-bit binary data stored in S2 , decimal part
"space" (20H) is stored in each digit 16-bit -123 "20H" (space) is
between the sign and the numeric value. binary data stored in each digit.
When the number of all digits stored in
S1 excluding the sign and decimal point is smaller than the number of digits of 16-bit binary data stored in
S2 , an error is caused.
- "00H" indicating the end of a character string is automatically stored at the end of a converted character string.
When the number of all digits is even, "0000H" is stored in the device after the last character.
When the number of all digits is odd, "00H" is stored in the high-order byte (8 bits) of the device storing the final
character.
2. 32-bit operation (DSTR and DSTRP)

1) All digits (specified by S1 ) of 32-bit binary data stored in [ S2 +1, S2 ] are converted into ASCII codes
while the decimal point is added to the position specified by the device storing the number of digits of the decimal
part ( S1 +1), and stored in D and later.
Command
DSTR
b15 b8 b7 b0
Number of all ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code
S1 +0 digits D +0 specifying number of all
digits - 1)"th digit indicating sign
Number of digits
+1 of decimal part ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code in "(Value
+1 specifying number of all specifying number of all
digits - 3)"th digit digits - 2)"th digit
+2 specifying number of all specifying number of all For number of
digits - 5)"th digit digits - 4)"th digit all digits
ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code in "(Value For value
Sign +3 specifying number of all specifying number of all stored in S1
digits - 7)"th digit digits - 6)"th digit
S2 +1 S2 +4 specifying number of all specifying number of all
b31 b16 b15 b0 digits - 9)"th digit digits - 8)"th digit
ASCII code in "(Value
S2 High-order 16 bits Low-order 16 bits +5 00H specifying number of all
digits - 10)"th digit
32-bit binary data 00H is automatically stored at the
S1 +0 8 end of a character string.
+1 3 b15 b8 b7 b0
D +0 36H(6) 2DH(-)
+1 34H(4) 35H(5) For number of
- 6 5 4 3 2 1 33H(3) 2EH(.) all digits
+2
S1 =8
S2 +1 S2 +3 31H(1) 32H(2)
32-bit
-654321 +4 0000H
binary data
0000H is automatically stored at
the end of a character string.
2) Set the number of all digits S1 ranging from 2 to 13.

3) Set the number of digits of the decimal part S1 +1 ranging from 0 to 10.
Make sure to satisfy "Number of digits of decimal part <= (Number of all digits -3)".
4) 32-bit binary data to be converted stored in [ S2 +1, S2 ] should be ranging from -2,147,483,648 to
+2,147,483,647.
614
21
5) Converted character string data is stored in D and later as shown below.
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
- For the sign, "space" (20H) is stored when the 32-bit binary data stored in S2 is positive, and "- (2DH)" is
stored when the 32-bit binary data stored in S2 is negative.
- When the number of digits of the Number of
decimal part S1 +1 is set to any all digits 10
value other than "0", the decimal point Number of 3 22
digits of 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
"." (2EH) is automatically added in
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
decimal part
"number of digits of decimal part + 32-bit Number of digits of
12345678 decimal part
1"th digit. binary data
It is automatically added.
When the number of digits of the
decimal part S1 +1 is set to "0",
the decimal point is not added.
- When the number of digits of the decimal
23
Number of
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
part S1 +1 is larger than the number of all digits 13
digits of 32-bit binary data stored in Number of 10
digits of 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 4 3 2 1
[ S2 +1, S2 ], "0" (30H) is decimal part
automatically added, and the data is shifted 16-bit 54321
to the right end during conversion. binary data
- When the number of all digits stored in

It is automatically added.
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Number of
S1 excluding the sign and decimal point all digits 13
is larger than the number of digits of 32-bit Number of 2
digits of - 5 4 3 2 1 0
binary data stored in [ S2 +1, S2 ], decimal part
"space" (20H) is stored in each digit 32-bit -543210
"20H" (space) is stored in
between the sign and the numeric value. binary data each digit.
When the number of all digits stored in 25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S1 excluding the sign and decimal point is smaller than the number of digits of 32-bit binary data stored in
[ S2 +1, S2 ], an error is caused.
- "00H" indicating the end of a character string is automatically stored at the end of a converted character string.
When the number of all digits is even, "0000H" is stored in the device after the last character.
When the number of all digits is odd, "00H" is stored in the high-order byte (8 bits) of the device storing the final
character. 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
ESTR (FNC116) Converts binary floating point data into a character string (ASCII codes) with a specified number of digits.
EVAL (FNC117) Converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary floating point data.
VAL (FNC201) Converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data. 27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Errors
D8067.
• When the number of all digits stored in S1 is outside the following range (error code: K6706)
Setting range 28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
16-bit operation 2 to 8
• When the number of digits of the decimal part stored in S1 +1 is outside the following range (error code: K6706)
Setting range
16-bit operation 0 to 5 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
• When the relationship between the number of all digits stored in S1 and the number of digits of the decimal part
stored in S1 +1 does not satisfy the following (error code: K6706)
(Number of all digits -3) ≥ Number of digits of decimal part
• When the number of all digits stored in S1 including the digit for sign and the digit for decimal point is smaller 30
than the number of digits of the binary data stored in [ S2 +1, S2 ] (error code: K6706)
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
• When the devices D and later storing a character string exceeds the corresponding device range (error code:
K6706)
615
Program example
In the program below, the 16-bit binary data stored in D10 is converted into a character string in accordance with the
digit specification by D0 and D1 when X000 is set to ON, and then stored in D20 to D23.
X000
FNC 12 K12672 D10 Data to be converted is set.
MOVP
FNC 12 K6 D0 The number of all digits is set.

MOVP
FNC 12 The number of digits of the decimal

K0 D1 part is set.
MOVP
FNC200 D0 D10 D20

STRP
END
b15 b8 b7 b0
16-bit binary data D10 12672 " 12672" D20 31H(1) 20H(space)
D21 36H(6) 32H(2)
Number of all digits D0 6 D22 32H(2) 37H(7)
Number of digits of D1 0 D23 0000H
decimal part
616
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion
21
26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data. 22
On the other hand, EVAL (FNC117) instruction converts a character string (ASCII codes) into floating point data.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
→ For character strings, refer to Section 5.3.
→ For EVAL (FNC117) instruction, refer to Section 18.5.
D VAL P 7 steps VAL
Continuous
13 steps DVAL
Continuous
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Operation Operation
VALP Pulse (Single) DVALP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
Head device number storing a character string to be converted into binary data Character string
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S
Head device number storing the number of all digits of the binary data acquired by
D1 16-bit binary
conversion
D2 Head device number storing the binary data acquired by conversion 16- or 32-bit binary
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
Type
    
S
D1     
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
D2         

1. 16-bit operation (VAL and VALP) 27
1) A character string stored in S and later is converted into 16-bit binary data. The number of all digits of the
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
binary data acquired for conversion is stored in D1 , the number of digits of the decimal part is stored in
D1 +1, and the converted binary data is stored in D2 .
In converting a character string into binary data, the data from S to a device number storing "00H" is handled
as a character string in byte units.
Command
28
input
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
FNC201 S D1  D2 
VAL
Number of all
b15 b8 b7 b0 D1 +0 digits
S +0 ASCII code of 1st character ASCII code indicating sign +1 Number of digits
of decimal part
+1 ASCII code of 3rd character ASCII code of 2nd character
Integer value in
29
+2 ASCII code of 5th character ASCII code of 4th character - D2
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
which decimal
ASCII code of 7th character ASCII code of 6th character point is ignored
+3
Sign
1st character
2nd character
7th character
+4 00H
16-bit binary data
It indicates the end of character string.

30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
617
For example, when a character string "-123.45" is specified in S and later, the conversion result is stored in
D1 and D2 as shown below.
b15 b8 b7 b0 D1 +0 7
S +0 31H(1) 2DH(-) +1 2
+1 33H(3) 32H(2)
+2 34H(4) 2EH( ) - 1 2 3 4 5 D2 -12345
+3 00H 35H(5)
It indicates the end of the character string.
2) Character string to be converted

a) Number of characters of character string and the numeric range when the decimal point is ignored
Description
Number of all characters (digits) 2 to 8
Number of characters (digits) of decimal part 0 to 5 and smaller than "number of all digits -3"
−32768 to +32767
Numeric range when decimal point is ignored
Example: 123.45 → 12345
b) Character types used in characters to be converted

Character type
Positive numeric value "Space" (20H)
Sign
Negative numeric value "–" (2DH)
Decimal point "." (2EH)
Number "0" (30H) to "9" (39H)
3) D1 stores the number of all digits. The number of all digits indicates the number of all characters (including the
number, sign and decimal point).
4) D1 +1 stores the number of digits of the decimal part. The number of digits of the decimal part indicates the
number of all characters after the decimal point "." (2EH).
5) D2 stores 16-bit data (bin) converted from a character string with the decimal point ignored.
In the character string located in S and later, "space" (20H) and "0" (30H) characters between the sign and
the first number other than "0" are ignored in the conversion to 16-bit binary data.
Number of all Number of all
digits 8 digits 7
Number of digits 2 Number of digits 4
- 1 2 3 4 5 of decimal part 0 0 0 1 2 of decimal part
16-bit binary -12345 16-bit binary 12
Ignored data Sign Ignored data
618
21
2. 32-bit operation (DVAL and DVALP)
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1) A character string stored in S and later is converted into 32-bit binary data. The number of all digits of the
binary data acquired for conversion is stored in D1 , the number of digits of the decimal part is stored in
D1 +1, and the binary data is stored in [ D2 +1, D2 ].
In conversion from a character string into binary data, the data from
handled as a character string in byte units.
S to a device number storing "00H" is
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
Command
DVAL
Number of all
b15 b8 b7 b0 D1 +0 digits
S +0 ASCII code of 1st character ASCII code indicating sign +1 Number of digits
of decimal part
23
+1 ASCII code of 3rd character ASCII code of 2nd character
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
D2 +1 D2
+2 ASCII code of 5th character ASCII code of 4th character - Integer value in
which decimal
+3 ASCII code of 7th character ASCII code of 6th character point is ignored
Sign
1st character
2nd character
12th character
32-bit binary
data 24
+6 00H ASCII code of 12th character
Others
FNC181-FNC189
For example, when a character string "-12345.678" is specified in S and later, the conversion result is stored
in D1 and D2 as shown below.
25
b15 b8 b7 b0
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
31H(1) 2DH(-) D1 +0 10
S +0
+1 3
+1 33H(3) 32H(2)
+2 35H(5) 34H(4)
- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -12345678
+3 36H(6) 2EH(.)
+4 38H(8) 37H(7)
D2 +1 D2 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
+5 00H
2) Character string to be converted

a) Number of characters of character string and the numeric range when the decimal point is ignored
Number of all characters (digits) 2 to 13

Description
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Number of characters (digits) of decimal part 0 to 10 and smaller than "number of all digits −3"
−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Numeric range when decimal point is ignored
Example: 12345.678 → "12345678"
b) Character types used in characters to be converted

Character type 28
Positive numeric value "Space" (20H)
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
Sign
Negative numeric value "–" (2DH)
Decimal point "." (2EH)
Number "0" (30H) to "9" (39H)
3) D1 stores the number of all digits. The number of all digits indicates the number of all characters (including the 29
number, sign and decimal point).
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
4) D1 +1 stores the number of digits of the decimal part. The number of digits of the decimal part indicates the
number of all characters after the decimal point "." (2EH).
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
619
5) [ D2 +1, D2 ] stores 16-bit data (bin) converted from a character string with the decimal point ignored.
For the character string located in S and later, the "space" (20H) and "0" (30H) characters between the sign
and the first number other than "0" are ignored in the conversion to 32-bit binary data.
Total number of digits 12

Number of digits after 2
- 6 5 4 3 2 1 the decimal point
32-bit binary data -654321
Ignored
Total number of digits 11

Number of digits after 8
0 0 0 0 5 4 3 2 1 the decimal point
Ignored 32-bit binary data 54321

Sign
ESTR (FNC116) Converts binary floating point data into a character string (ASCII code) with a specified number of digits.
EVAL (FNC117) Converts a character string (ASCII code) into binary floating point data.
STR (FNC200) Converts binary data into a character string (ASCII code).
Caution
Store sign data, "space (20H)" or "- (2DH)", must be stored in the 1st byte (lower order 8 bits of the head device set
in S ).
Only the ASCII code data "0 (30H)" to "9 (39H)", "space (20H)" and "decimal point (2EH)" can be stored from the 2nd
byte to the "00H" at the end of the character string in S .
If "- (2DH)" is stored in the 2nd byte or later, an operation error (error code: K6706) occurs.
Errors
D8067.
• When the number of characters of the character string to be converted ( S and later) is outside the following
ranges (error code: K6706)
Setting range
• When the number of characters after the decimal point of the character string to be converted ( S and later) is
outside the following ranges (error code: K6706)
Setting range
• When the relationship between the number of all characters in the character string to be converted ( S and
later) and the number of characters after the decimal point does not satisfy the following (error code: K6706)
(Number of all characters -3) ≥ Number of characters after the decimal point
• When the sign is set to any ASCII code other than "space" (20H) and "-" (2DH) (error code: K6706)
• When a digit of a number is set to any ASCII code other than "0" (30H) to "9" (39H) or a decimal point "." (2EH)
(error code: K6706)
• When the decimal point "." (2EH) is set two or more times in the character string to be converted ( S and later)
(error code: K6706)
• When the binary data acquired by conversion is outside the following range (error code: K6706)
Setting range
16-bit operation −32768 to 32767
32-bit operation −2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
• When "00H" is not present in the location from S to the final device number (error code: K6706)
620
21
Program example
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1) In the program below, the character string data stored in D20 to D22 is regarded as an integer value, converted
into a binary value, and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON.
X000
FNC201 D20 D10 D0
VALP 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
END
b15 b8 b7 b0
D20 31H(1) 2DH(-) D0 -1654
D21 2EH(.) 36H(6)
D22 34H(4) 35H(5) D10 6 Number of all digits 23
D23 00H D11 2 Number of digits of decimal part
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
"00H" is stored here.
2) In the program below, the character string data stored in D20 to D24 is regarded as an integer value, converted
into a binary value, and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON.
X000 24
FNC201 D20 D10 D0
Others
FNC181-FNC189
DVALP
END
b15 b8 b7 b0 D1 D0
D20 37H(7) 20H(space) D0 7910 0611
25
D21 31H(1) 39H(9)
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D22 30H(0) 30H(0) D10 10 Number of all digits
D23 36H(6) 2EH(.) D11 3 Number of digits of decimal part
D24 31H(1) 31H(1)
D25 00H
"00H" is stored here. 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
621
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings
26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings
Outline
This instruction links a character string to another character string.
→ For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3.
$+ P $+ Continuous

7 steps Operation
$+P Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
Head device number storing the link source data (character string) or directly specified
S1 character string
Head device number storing the link data (character string) or directly specified character Character string
S2 string
D Head device number storing the linked data (character string)
Oper-
Type
S1           
S2           
D         

1. 16-bit operation ($+ and $+P)
The character string data stored in S2 and later is linked to the end of the character string data stored in S1 and
later, and the linked data is stored to devices starting from D .
A character string stored in S1 or S2 or later indicates the data from the specified device to the first "00H" in
units of byte.
Command
input
FNC202 S1  S2  D
$+
b15---b8 b7----b0 b15---b8 b7----b0 b15---b8 b7---b0

S1  46H(F) 48H(H) S2  35H(5) 31H(1) D 46H(F) 48H(H) S1 
S1  +1 2DH(-) 41H(A) + S2  +1 39H(9) 33H(3) D  +1 2DH(-) 41H(A) S1  +1
S1  +2 00H S2  +2 00H 41H(A) D  +2 35H(5) 31H(1) S2 
D  +3 39H(9) 33H(3) S2  +1
D  +4 00H 41H(A) S2  +2
“00H” is automatically
stored.
• In linking, “00H” indicating the end of a character string specified in S1 is ignored, and a character string
specified in S2 is linked to the last character specified in S1 .
When a character string is linked, “00H” is automatically added at the end.
- When the number of characters after linking is odd, “00H” is stored in the high-order byte of the device storing
the last character.
- When the number of characters after linking is even, “0000H” is stored in the device after the last character.
622
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings
21
Cautions
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
• When directly specifying a character string, up to 32 characters can be specified (input).
However, this limitation in the number of characters is not applied when a word device is specified in S1 or
S2 .
• When the values in both S1 and S2 start from "00H" (that is, when the number of characters is “0”), "0000H" 22
is stored in D .
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
Errors
D8067.
• When the number of devices after a device number specified by D is smaller than the number of devices 23
required to store all linked character strings (that is, when “00H” cannot be stored after all character strings and the
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
last character) (error code: K6706)
• When the same device is specified in S1 , S2 and D as a device for storing a character string (error
code: K6706)
• When “00H” is not set within the corresponding device range after the device specified by S1 or S2 (error
code: K6706) 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Program example
In the program example shown below, a character string stored in D10 to D12 (abcde) is linked to the character string
“ABCD”, and the result is stored to D100 and later when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC202
$+
D10 “ABCD” D100 25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
END
b15---b8 b7----b0 b15---b8 b7----b0

D10 62H(b) 61H(a) D100 62H(b) 61H(a) 26
D11 64H(d) 63H(c) + “ABCD” D101
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
64H(d) 63H(c)
D12 00H 65H(e) D102 41H(A) 65H(e)
D103 43H(C) 42H(B)
D104 00H 44H(D)
“00H” is automatically stored. 27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
623
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection
26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection
Outline
This instruction detects the number of characters (bytes) of a specified character string.
LEN P LEN Continuous

5 steps Operation
LENP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing a character string whose length is to be detected Character string
D Device number storing the detected character string length (number of bytes) 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S          
D         

1. 16-bit operation (LEN and LENP)
The length of a character string stored in S and later is detected, and stored to D . Data starting from S
until the first device storing "00H" is handled as a character string in units of byte.
Command
input
FNC203 S D
LEN
b15----------b8 b7-------------b0
S 2nd character 1st character
S  +1 4th character 3rd character b15---------------b0
D Character string
S  +2 6th character 5th character length
S  +n 00H “n”th character

For example, when “ABCDEFGHI” is stored in S and later as shown below, K9 is stored to D .
b15----------b8 b7-------------b0
S 42H(B) 41H(A)
S  +1 44H(D) 43H(C) “ABCDEFGHI” b15---------------b0
S  +2 46H(F) 45H(E) D 9
S  +3 48H(H) 47H(G)
S  +4 00H 49H(I)
624
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection
21
Caution
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
• This instruction can handle character codes other than ASCII codes, but the character string length is handled in
byte units (8 bits). Accordingly, in the case of character codes in which 2 bytes express 1 character such as shift
JIS codes, the length of 1 character is detected as “2”.
Errors 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D8067.
• When “00H” is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by S (error code: K6706)
• When the detected number of characters is “32768” or more (error code: K6706)
Program example 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
In the program example shown below, the length of a character string stored in D0 and later is output in 4-digit BCD to
Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC203 D0 D10
LEN
FNC 18 D10 K4Y40

The length of the character
string is output to the display
24
BCD unit.
Others
FNC181-FNC189
END
b15---b8 b7----b0
49H(I) 4DH(M)
25
D0 Conversion
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D1 53H(S) 54H(T) D10 into BCD Y057 to Y040
D2 42H(B) 55H(U) 10 0 0 1 0
D3 53H(S) 49H(I) “MITSUBISHI” BCD BCD value
(Characters
D4 49H(I) 48H(H)
D5 41H(A) 00H
“ ABC.......”
after “00H” are 26
ignored.)
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
D6 43H(C) 42H(B)
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
625
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right
26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right
Outline
This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from the right end of a specified character string.
RIGHT P 7 steps
RIGHT Continuous

Operation
RIGHTP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing a character string

Character string
D Head device number storing extracted character string
n Number of characters to be extracted 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S          
D         
n    

1. 16-bit operation (RIGHT and RIGHTP)
“n” characters are extracted from the right end (that is, from the end) of the character string data stored in S and
later, and stored to D and later.
If the number of characters specified by “n” is “0”, the NULL code (0000H) is stored to D .
When characters are extracted from a character string, “00H" is automatically added at the end of the extracted
characters.
- When the number of extracted characters is odd, “00H” is stored in the high-order byte of a device storing the
last character.
- When the number of extracted characters is even, “0000H” is stored in the device after the last character.
Command
input
FNC204 S n
D
RIGHT
b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
ASCII code for 2nd ASCII code for 1st D ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last
S
character character character -n+2)”th character character -n+1)”th character
ASCII code for 4th ASCII code for 3rd D  +1 ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last
S  +1
character character character -n+4)”th character character -n+3)”th character
ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last
character -n+2)”th character character -n+1)”th character character -1)”th character character -2)”th character
ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last

00H ASCII code for last
character -n+4)”th character character -n+3)”th character character
ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last

character -1)”th character character -2)”th character
ASCII code for last
00H character
626
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the case of “n = 5”
b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
S 42H(B) 41H(A) D 32H(2) 31H(1)
S  +1 44H(D) 43H(C) D  +1 34H(4) 33H(3)
S  +2 46H(F) 45H(E) D  +2 00H 35H(5) 22
“12345”
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
S  +3 32H(2) 31H(1)
S  +4 34H(4) 33H(3) ASCII code for 5th character
S  +5 00H 35H(5)
“ABCDEF12345”
ASCII code for 1st character
• A character string stored in S and later indicates data stored in devices from the specified device until "00H" is
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
first detected in byte units.
Cautions
When handling character codes other than ASCII codes, note the following contents:
• The number of characters is handled in byte units (8 bits). Accordingly, in the case of character codes in which 2
bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS codes, the length of 1 character is detected as “2”.
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
• When extracting characters from a character string including character codes in which 2 bytes express 1 character
such as shift JIS codes, consider the number of characters to be extracted in units of character codes for 1
character.
Note that the expected character code is not given if only 1 byte is executed out of a 2-byte character code.
Errors 25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D8067.
• When “n” exceeds the number of characters specified by S (error code: K6706)
• When the number of devices after a device number specified by D is smaller than the number of devices
required to store extracted “n” characters (that is, when “00H” cannot be stored after all character strings and the
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
• When “n” is a negative value (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program example shown below, 4 characters are extracted from the right end of the character string data stored
in R0 and later, and stored to D0 and later when X000 turns ON.
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
X000
FNC204 R0 D0 K4
RIGHTP
END
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
R0 41H(A) 42H(B) D0 45H(E) 30H(0)
R1 31H(1) 32H(2) D1 41H(A) 46H(F)
R2 45H(E) 30H(0) D2 0000H
R3 41H(A) 46H(F) “0EFA”
29
R4 00H
ASCII code for 4th character
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
“BA210EFA”
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
627
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left
26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left
Outline
This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from the left end of a specified character string.
LEFT P LEFT Continuous

7 steps Operation
LEFTP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing a character string

Character string
n Number of characters to be extracted 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S          
D         
n    

1. 16-bit operation (LEFT and LEFTP)
“n” characters are extracted from the left end (that is, from the head) of the character string data stored in S and
later and stored to D and later.
If the number of characters specified by “n” is “0”, the NULL code (0000H) is stored to D .
When characters are extracted from a character string, "00H” is automatically added at the end of the extracted
characters.
- When the number of extracted characters is odd, “00H” is stored in the high-order byte of a device storing the
last character.
- When the number of extracted characters is even, “0000H” is stored in the device after the last character.
Command
input
FNC205 S n
D
LEFT
b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
ASCII code for 2nd ASCII code for 1st D ASCII code for 2nd ASCII code for 1st
S
character character character character
ASCII code for 4th ASCII code for 3rd D  +1 ASCII code for 4th ASCII code for 3rd
S  +1
ASCII code for n-1 ASCII code for n-2 ASCII code for n-1 ASCII code for n-2
ASCII code for n+1 ASCII code for n 00H ASCII code for n
character character character
00H ASCII code for last

character
628
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the case of "n = 7" ASCII code for 1st character
b15----------------------b8b7----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
S 42H(B) 41H(A) D 42H(B) 41H(A)
S  +1 44H(D) 43H(C) D  +1 44H(D) 43H(C)
S  +2 46H(F) 45H(E) D  +2 46H(F) 45H(E) 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
S  +3 32H(2) 31H(1) D  +3 00H 31H(1)
S  +4 34H(4) 33H(3) "ABCDEF1"
S  +5 00H 35H(5)
"ABCDEF12345"
• A character string stored in S and later indicates data stored in devices from the specified device until "00H" is 23
first detected in byte units.
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Cautions
bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS codes, the length of 1 character is detected as “2”. 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
character.
Errors 25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D8067.
• When “n” exceeds the number of characters specified by S (error code: K6706)
required to store extracted “n” characters (that is, when “00H” cannot be stored after all character strings and the
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
• When “n” is a negative value (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program example shown below, the number of characters which is equivalent to the number stored in D0 are
extracted from the left end of the character string data stored in D100 and later, and stored to R10 and later when 27
X010 turns ON.
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
X010
FNC205 D100 R10 D0
LEFTP
END
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
D100 51H(Q) 53H(S) R10 51H(Q) 53H(S)
D101 4EH(N) 4FH(O) R11 4EH(N) 4FH(O)
D102 44H(D) 48H(H) R12 44H(D) 48H(H)
29
D103 42H(B) 41H(A) R13 0000H
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
D104 00H “SQONHD”

“SQONHDAB” D0 6
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
629
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings
26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings
Outline
This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from arbitrary positions of a specified character string.
MIDR P MIDR Continuous

7 steps Operation
MIDRP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S1 Head device number storing a character string

Character string
Head device number specifying the head position and number of characters to be
extracted
S2 16-bit binary
S2 : Head character position
S2 +1 : Number of characters
Oper-
Type
S1          
D         
S2          
630
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1. 16-bit operation (MIDR and MIDRP)
" S2 +1" characters are extracted leftward from the position specified by S2 of the character string data stored
in S1 and later, and stored to D and later.
When characters are extracted from a character string, "00H" is automatically added at the end of the extracted
characters.
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
- When the number of extracted characters specified by S2 +1 is odd, "00H" is stored in the high-order byte of
a device storing the last character.
- When the number of extracted characters specified by S2 +1 is even, "0000H" is stored in the device after the
last character.
Command
input
23
FNC206
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
S1  D S2 
MIDR
Target character string (extraction source) Extracted character string

1st character
S1 
b15-----------------b8b7-------------------b0
42H(B) 41H(A) D
b15------------------b8b7-------------------b0
46H(F) 45H(E)
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S1  +1 44H(D) 43H(C) D  +1 48H(H) 47H(G)
S1  +2 46H(F) 45H(E) D  +2 00H 49H(I)
S1  +3 48H(H) 47H(G) 5th character "EFGHI"
S1  +4 4AH(J) 49H(I) S2 
S1  +5 00H 4BH(K)
5 characters starting from 5th character
25
"ABCDEFGHIJK"
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S2  +1
S2  5
S2  +1 5
• A character string stored in S1 and later indicates data stored in devices from the specified device until “00H” is
first detected in units of byte. 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
• When the number of characters to be extracted specified by S2 +1 is “0”, the extraction processing is not
executed.
• When the number of characters to be extracted specified by S2 +1 is “-1”, the entire character string stored in
S1 and later is stored to D and later.
b15-----------------b8 b7-------------------b0 b15-----------------b8b7-------------------b0 27
S1  42H(B) 41H(A) D 46H(F) 45H(E)
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
S1  +1 44H(D) 43H(C) D  +1 48H(H) 47H(G)
S1  +2 46H(F) 45H(E) D  +2 4AH(J) 49H(I)
S1  +3 48H(H) 47H(G) D  +3 00H 4BH(K)
S1  +4 4AH(J) 49H(I)
5th character S2 
“FEGHIJK”
28
S1  +5 00H 4BH(K)
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
“ABCDEFGHIJK”
S2  5
S2  +1 -1
29
Cautions
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS code, the length of 1 character is regarded as 2 characters.
character.
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
631
Errors
D8067.
• When “00H” is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by S1 (error code: K6706)
• When the value specified by S2 +1 exceeds the number of characters specified by S1 (error code: K6706)
• When the number of characters specified by S2 +1 from the position specified by D exceeds the device
range specified by D (error code: K6706)
required to store extracted characters as many as the number specified by S2 +1 (that is, when “00H” cannot be
stored after all character strings and the last character) (error code: K6706)
• When S2 specifies a negative value (error code: K6706)
• When S2 +1 specifies “-2” or less (error code: K6706)
• When S2 +1 specifies a number larger than the number of characters specified by S1 (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program example shown below, four characters are extracted from the 3rd character from the left end of the
character string data stored in D10 and later, and then stored to D0 and later when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC206 D10 D0 R0
MIDRP
END
3rd character
b15---------------------b8 b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
D10 41H(A) 42H(B) D0 31H(1) 32H(2)
D11 31H(1) 32H(2) D1 46H(E) 33H(3)
D12 46H(E) 33H(3) D2 0000H
D13 00H 45H(D) “213E”
“BA213ED”
Four characters
starting from 3rd character Extracted characters
R0 3
R1 4
632
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings
21
26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction replaces the characters in arbitrary positions inside designated character string with a specified 22
character string.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
MIDW P MIDW Continuous
7 steps
MIDWP
Operation
Pulse (Single)


23
Operation
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S1 Head device number storing a character string used in overwriting
D Head device number storing character string to be overwritten

Character string
24
Head device number specifying the head position and number of characters to be
Others
FNC181-FNC189
overwritten
S2 16-bit binary
S2 : Head character position to be overwritten
S2 +1 : Number of characters to be overwritten
Oper-
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Type
S1          
D         
26
S2          
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (MIDW and MIDWP)
“ S2 +1” characters are extracted from the left end (that is, the head) of the character string data stored in S1
and later, and stored to the position specified by S2 and later of the character string data stored in D and later. 27
Command
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
input
FNC207 S1  D S2 
MIDW
Before execution
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0 b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
1st 1st
S1  31H(1) 30H(0) character D 42H(B) 41H(A) character
3rd
28
S1  +1 33H(3) 32H(2) D  +1 44H(D) 43H(C) character
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
S1  +2 35H(5) 34H(4) D  +2 46H(F) 45H(E)

S1  +3 37H(7) 36H(6) D  +3 48H(H) 47H(G)
S1  +4 00H 38H(8) D  +4 00H 49H(I)
“012345678” “ABCDEFGHI”
6th character
After execution
29
Position from the left end in the
S2  3
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
character string stored in D  and later b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0

S2  +1 6 Number of characters from the left end D 42H(B) 41H(A)
in the character string stored in S1 
3rd
and later D  +1 31H(1) 30H(0) character
D  +2 33H(3) 32H(2)
D  +3 35H(5) 34H(4) 30
D  +4 00H 49H(I)
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
“AB012345I”
Six characters starting from 3rd
character (overwritten character string)
633
• The character string stored in S1 and later or D and later indicates data stored in devices from the
specified device until “00H” is first detected in byte units.
• When the number of characters to be overwritten specified by S2 +1 is “0”, the overwriting processing is not
executed.
• When the number of characters to be overwritten specified by S2 +1 exceeds the last character of the character
string stored in D and later, data is stored up to the last character.
Before execution
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0 b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
S1  31H(1) 30H(0) 1st D 42H(B) 41H(A)
character
S1  +1 33H(3) 32H(2) D  +1 44H(D) 43H(C)
5th
S1  +2 35H(5) 34H(4) D  +2 46H(F) 45H(E) character
S1  +3 37H(7) 36H(6) D  +3 48H(H) 47H(G)
S1  +4 00H 38H(8) D  +4 00H 49H(I)
“012345678” “ABCDEFGHI”
8th character
After execution
Position from the left end in the
S2  5 character string stored in D  and later b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
S2  +1 8 Number of characters from the left end D 42H(B) 41H(A)
in the character string stored in S1 
and later D  +1 44H(D) 43H(C)
5th
D  +2 31H(1) 30H(0) character
D  +3 33H(3) 32H(2)
D  +4 00H 34H(4)
“ABCD01234”
Characters from the 5th character to the last
character are overwritten. Excessive
characters, “35H (5)” to “37H (7)” , are not
stored.
• When S2 +1 (the number of characters to be extracted) is “-1”, the entire character string stored in S1 and
later is stored to D and later.
2nd
character Before execution
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
1st
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0 42H(B) 41H(A) character
S1  1st
31H(1) 30H(0) character D  +1 44H(D) 43H(C)
S1  +1 33H(3) 32H(2) D  +2 46H(F) 45H(E)
S1  +2 35H(5) 34H(4) D  +3 48H(H) 47H(G)
S1  +3 00H D  +4 4AH(J) 49H(I)
“012345” D  +5
Last character 00H 4BH(K)
Position from the left end in the “ABCDEFGHIJK”
S2  2 character string stored in D  and later 2nd
Number of characters from the left end character After execution
S2  +1 -1
in the character string stored in S1  b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
and later
30H(0) 41H(A)
D  +1 32H(2) 31H(1)
D  +2 34H(4) 33H(3)
D  +3 48H(H) 35H(5)
D  +4 4AH(J) 49H(I)
D  +5 00H 4BH(K)
“A012345HIJK”
Six characters from the 2nd
character are overwritten.
634
21
Cautions
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
This instruction can handle character codes other than ASCII codes, but please note the following:
bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS code, the length of 1 character is regarded as 2 characters.
• When overwriting a character string including character codes in which 2 bytes express 1 character such as shift
JIS codes, consider the number of characters to be extracted in units of character codes for 1 character. 22
Note that the expected character code is not given if only 1 byte is overwritten out of a 2-byte character code.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
Errors
D8067.
• When “00H” is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by S1 or D (error 23
code: K6706)
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
• When the value specified by S2 exceeds the number of characters of the character string stored in D and
later (error code: K6706)
• When the number of characters specified by S2 +1 exceeds the number of characters specified by S1 (error
code: K6706)
• When S2 specifies a negative value (error code: K6706)
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
• When S2 +1 specifies “-2” or less (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program example shown below, 4 characters are extracted from the character string data stored in D0 and later,
and stored to the 3rd character (from the left end) and later for the character string data stored in D100 and later when 25
X010 turns ON.
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
X010
FNC207 D0 D100 R0
MIDWP
END
26
4th
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
character Before execution
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0 b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
1st 1st
D0 31H(1) 32H(2) D100 53H(S) 55H(U) character
character
3rd
D1 45H(E) 46H(F) D101 59H(Y) 43H(C) character
D2 33H(3) 30H(0) D102 31H(1) 5AH(Z) 27
D3 00H D103 42H(B) 30H(0)
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
“21FE03” D104 0000H
R0 3 “USCYZ10B”
R1 4
After execution
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
D100 53H(S) 55H(U)

3rd
D101 31H(1) 32H(2) character
D102 45H(E) 46H(F)
D103 42H(B) 30H(0)
D104 0000H 29
“US21FE0B”
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
The 1st to 4th characters are stored.
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
635
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search
26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search
Outline
This instruction searches a specified character string within another character string.
INSTR P 9 steps
INSTR Continuous

Operation
INSTRP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
S1 Head device number storing a character string Character string
S2 Head device number storing a character string to be searched Character string
D Head device number storing search result 16-bit binary

n Search start position 16-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S1      
S2     
D     
n    

1. 16-bit operation (INSTR and INSTRP)
1) The character string stored in S1 and higher is searched for within the character string S2 and higher. The
search begins at the "n"th character from the left end (head character) of S2 and the search result is stored in
D . The search result provides the first matching character (located from the left end (head character)) in
S2 .
Command
INSTR
Character string to be searched S2 Character string S1
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S2 +0 42H(B) 41H(A) Search is started from S1 +0 46H(F) 45H(E)
+1 44H(D) 43H(C) the 3rd character (n = 3). +1 48H(H) 47H(G)
+2 46H(F) 45H(E) Fifth character from +2 00H
+3 48H(H) 47H(G) the head character
"EFGH"
+4 4AH(J) 49H(I) The position where the
first detected character
+5 00H 4BH(K) is located from the
"ABCDEFGHIJK" head character in the
D 5 character string data
stored in S2 .
2) When the searched character string is not detected, "0" is stored in D .

3) When the search start position "n" is a negative number or "0", search processing is not executed.
636
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search
21
4) A character string can be directly specified in the character string S1 .
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Character string to be searched S2 Character string S1
b15 b8 b7 b0 "AB"
S2 +0 32H(2) 31H(1) Search is started from
+1 34H(4) 33H(3) the 3rd character (n = 3).
+2 42H(B) 41H(A) Fifth character from D100 5
22
+3 36H(6) 35H(5) the head character
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
+4 42H(B) 41H(A)
+5 00H
"1234AB56AB"
23
Errors
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
D8067.
• When the search start position "n" exceeds the number of characters stored in S2 (error code: K6706)
• When "00H (NULL)" is not located within the corresponding device range starting from S1 (error code: K6706)
• When "00H (NULL)" is not located within the corresponding device range starting from S2 (error code: K6706)
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Program example
1) In the program example below, the character string "CI23" (D0 and later) is searched from the 5th character from
the left end (head character) of the character string "CI2312CIM" (R0 and later) when X000 is set to ON. The
search result is stored in D100
25
X000
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
FNC208 D0 R0 D100 K5
INSTR
END
Character string to be searched R0 Character string D0 26

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
R0 These characters are not D0
49H(I) 43H(C) searched because the 49H(I) 43H(C)
R1 33H(3) 32H(2) search start position is "5". D1 33H(3) 32H(2)
R2 32H(2) 31H(1) The search source D2 00H
R3 49H(I) 43H(C) character string is searched
from the 5th character. "CI23"
R4 00H 4DH(M)
"CI2312CIM"
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
D100 0
Because the searched
character string is not
detected, "0" is stored.
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
637
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer
26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer
Outline
This instruction transfers character string data.
$MOV P 5 steps
$MOV Continuous

Operation
$MOVP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
Directly specified character string (up to 32 characters) or head device number storing
S
character string which is handled as the transfer source Character string
D Head device number storing transferred character string
Oper-
Type
S           
D         

1. 16-bit operation ($MOV and $MOVP)
The character string data stored in the device specified by S and later is transferred to the device specified by
D and later.
From the device number specified by S to a device after that which stores “00H” in its high-order or low-order byte
are transferred at one time.
Command
input
FNC209 S D
$MOV
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S 2nd character 1st character D 2nd character 1st character
S  +1 4th character 3rd character D  +1 4th character 3rd character
S  +2 6th character 5th character D  +2 6th character 5th character
00H “n”th character 00H “n”th character
00H indicates the end of

character string.
Even if the device range “ S to S +n” storing the transfer source character string data overlaps the device
range “ D to D +n/2” storing the transferred character string data, transfer is executed.
For example, when a character string stored in D10 to D13 is transferred to D11 to D14, the transfer is executed as
shown below:
Command
input
FNC209 D10 D11
$MOV
638
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D10 32H(2) 31H(1) D10 32H(2) 31H(1) ... It is the same as the
character string
D11 34H(4) 33H(3) D11 32H(2) 31H(1) before transfer.
D12 36H(6) 35H(5) D12 34H(4) 33H(3) 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D13 00H D13 36H(6) 35H(5)
D14 D14 0000H
Caution
When “00H” is stored in the low-order byte of S +n, “00H” is stored to both the high-order byte and low-order byte
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
of D +n.
Command
input
FNC209 S D
$MOV
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S 42H(B) 41H(A) D 42H(B) 41H(A)
S  +1 44H(D) 43H(C) D  +1 44H(D) 43H(C)
S  +2 45H(E) 00H 00H 00H

D  +2
25
The high-order byte is “00H” is automatically
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
not transferred. stored in the high-order
byte.
Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in 26
D8067.
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
• When “00H” does not exist in the range specified from device S (error code: K6706)
• When the specified character string cannot be stored in devices from the device specified by D to the last
device (error code: K6706)
Program example 27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
In the program example shown below, character string data stored in D10 to D12 is transferred to D20 through D22.
X000
FNC209 D10 D20
$MOV
END
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D10 4DH(M) 2AH(*) D20 4DH(M) 2AH(*)
D11 45H(E) 45H(E) D21 45H(E) 45H(E)
D12 00H D22 0000H

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
639
27. Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219

FNC210 to FNC219 provide instructions for reading last-in data and controlling leftward/rightward shift instructions
with carry.
210 FDEL FDEL S D n Deleting Data from Tables Section 27.1
211 FINS FINS S D n Inserting Data to Tables Section 27.2
212 POP POP S D n Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] Section 27.3
16-bit data n
213 SFR SFR D n Bit Shift Right with Carry
Section 27.4
16-bit data n
214 SFL SFL D n Bit Shift Left with Carry
Section 27.5
215 − −
216 − −
217 − −
218 − −
219 − −
640
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables
21
27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction deletes an arbitrary data value from a data table. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FDEL P 7 steps
FDEL Continuous

Operation
FDELP Pulse (Single) 
Operation 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S Device number storing deleted data value
D Head device number in data table 16-bit binary 24

n Position of deleted data in table
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Oper-
and
Type
Unit
Index
Pointer
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S     
D     
n    

26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (FDEL and FDELP)
The "n"th data value is deleted from a data table (stored in D and later), and the deleted value is stored in S .
"n+1"th data value and later in the data table are shifted forward one by one, and the number of stored data is
subtracted by "−1".
Command
input
27
FNC210 S D n
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
FDELP
Data table Data table

Number of -1 Number of
stored data D +0 5 D +0 4
stored data
+1 5432 +1 5432
Data table
+2 3333
When "n" is "2"
+2 4444 Data table 28
Device range used in +3 4444 +3 1234 range
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
data table (having D

+4 1234 +4 5678
data starting
+5 5678 +5 0 "0" is stored.
from D +1)
...
...
...
...
0
Deleted data
S 3333 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
Caution
The device range used in a data table should be controlled by the user.
The data table has D number of stored data starting from ( D +1).
→ Refer to the program example.
30
Related instruction
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
FINS (FNC211) Inserts data into an arbitrary position in a data table.
641
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables
Errors
D8067.
• When the table position "n" of the data to be deleted exceeds the amount of data stored (error code: K6706)
• When the value "n" exceeds the device range of the data table D (error code: K6706)
• When the FDEL (FNC210) instruction is executed under the condition "n ≤ 0" (error code: K6706)
• When the amount of data stored specified in D is "0" (error code: K6706)
• When the data table range exceeds the corresponding device range (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program shown below, the 2nd data value entry is deleted from the data table stored in D100 to D105, and the
deleted data is stored in D0.
When the amount of data stored is "0", however, the FDEL (FNC210) instruction is not executed. (The device range
used in the data table is D100 to D107).
X010
FNC234 K0 D100 FNC237 D100 K7 FNC210 D0 D100 K2
AND< AND<= FDELP
END
X010:ON

Amount of -1 Amount of
D100 5 D100 4
data stored data stored
D101 -123 D101 -123
Data D102 4444 D102 3210 Data table
Device range used in table D103 3210 D103 1234 range
data table range D104 1234 D104 5432
D105 5432 D105 0
D106 0 D106 0
D107 0 D107 0
D0 4444 Deleted data
642
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables
21
27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction inserts a data value into an arbitrary position in a data table. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FINS P 7 steps
FINS Continuous

Operation
FINSP 
Pulse (Single)
Operation 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S Device number storing data to be inserted
D Head device number in data table 16-bit binary

24
n Data insertion position in table
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Oper-
Type
Unit stant Number ter String 25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S       
D     
n    

26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (FINS and FINSP)
16-bit data S is inserted in the "n"th position in a data table (stored in D and later).
"n"th data and later in the data table are shifted backward one by one, and the number of stored data is added by "1".
Command
27
FINSP
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Number of +1
D +0 3 D +0 4
stored data
+1 5432 +1 5432
Data table
+2 1234 +2 4444 Data table
Device range used in
range
+3 -123 +3 1234 range 28
+4 0 +4 -123
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
data table
+5 0 +5 0
...
...
...
...
0 0
When "n" is "2"
S 4444 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
Caution
The device range used in a data table should be controlled by the user.
The data table has D number of stored data starting from ( D +1).
→ Refer to the program example.
30
Related instruction
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
FDEL (FNC210) Deletes an arbitrary data entry from a data table.
643
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables
Errors
D8067.
• When the table position "n" for data insertion exceeds the amount of stored data plus 1 (error code: K6706)
• When the value "n" exceeds the device range of the data table D (error code: K6706)
• When FNC211 instruction is executed under the condition "n ≤ 0" (error code: K6706)
• When the data table range exceeds the corresponding device range (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program shown below, data stored in D100 is inserted into the 3rd position of the data table stored in D0 to D4.
When the amount of data stored exceeds "7", however, the FINS (FNC211) instruction is not executed. (The device
range used in the data table is D0 to D7).
X010
FNC237 K0 D0 FNC234 D0 K7 FNC211 D100 D0 K3
AND<= AND< FINSP
END
X010:ON
Amount of Data table Data table

+1 Amount of
data stored D0 4 D0 5
data stored
D1 1234 D1 1234
Data D2 4444 D2 4444
table Data table
Device range used in range D3 -123 D3 -3210
range
data table D4 5000 D4 -123
D5 0 D5 5000
D6 0 D6 0
D7 0 D7 0
D100 -3210 When "n" is "3"
644
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control]
21
27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control]
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction reads the last data written by a shift write (SFWR) instruction for FILO control. 22
→ For SFWR (FNC 38) instruction, refer to Section 11.9.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
POP P POP Continuous

7 steps
POPP
Operation
Pulse (Single)  23
Operation
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S Head device number storing first-in data (including pointer data)

24
D Device number storing last-out data
Others
FNC181-FNC189
16-bit binary
Length of data array
n (Add "1" because pointer data is also included.)
2 ≤ n ≤ 512
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
Type
S         
D            26
n  
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (POP and POPP)
Command 27
input
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
FNC212 S D n
POPP
Data for FILO control

Description 28
S Pointer data (amount of data stored)
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
S +1
S +2
S +3
Data area
29
...
(First-in data written by shift write (SFWR) instruction)

S
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
+n-3
S +n-2
S +n-1
• Every time the instruction is executed for the word devices S to S +n-1, a device “ S + Pointer data
S ” is read to D . (The last data entry written by the shift write (SFWR) instruction for first-in first-out control
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
is read to D .) Specify “n” ranging from “2” to “512”.
645
• Subtract “1” from the value of the pointer data S .

Data area
Pointer
S  +n-1 S  +n-2 S  +6 S  +5 S  +4 S  +3 S  +2 S  +1 S
In the case of K4
No data area
Pointer
S  +n-1 S  +n-2 S  +6 S  +5 S  +4 S  +3 S  +2 S  +1 S D
K4→K3
Related device
M8020 Zero flag Turns ON when the instruction is executed while the pointer S is “0”.
SFWR (FNC 38) Shift write [for FIFO/FILO control]
SFRD (FNC 39) Shift read [for FIFO control]
Cautions
• When this instruction is programmed in the continuous operation type, the instruction is executed in every operation
cycle. As a result, an expected operation may not be achieved.
Usually, program this instruction in the “pulse operation type”, or let this instruction be executed by a “pulsed
command contact”.
• When the current value of the pointer S is “0”, the zero flag M8020 turns ON and the instruction is not
executed.
Check in advance using a comparison instruction whether the current value of S satisfies “1 ≤ S ≤ n-1”,
and then execute this instruction.
• When the current value of the pointer S is “1”, “0” is written to S and the zero flag M8020 turns ON.
Error
D8067.
• When S is larger than “n-1” (error code: K6706)
• When S is smaller than “0” (error code: K6706)
646
21
Program example
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Among values stored in D20 input first to D101 to D106, the last value input is stored to D10, and “1” is subtracted
from the number of stored data (pointer D100) every time X000 turns ON.
First-in command
FNC 38 D20 D100 K7
Last-in read command

SFWR
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
X000 FNC212 D100 D10 K7
POP
END
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
When the first-in data is as shown in the table below
Pointer D100 K3
D101 H1234
D102 H5678
Data
D103
D104
HABCD
H0000
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
D105 H0000
D106 H0000
D20
D100: D100: D100:
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
First-in command K2→K3 K1→K2 K0→K1
D106 D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D100
H0000 H0000 H0000 HABCD H5678 H1234 K3 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Last-in read command
X000: OFF→ON
D106 D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D100 D10
H0000 H0000 H0000 HABCD H5678 H1234 K3→K2 HABCD
Do not change
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
647
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry
27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry
Outline
This instruction shifts 16 bits stored in a word device rightward by “n” bits.
SFR P 5 steps
SFR Continuous

Operation
SFRP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
D Device number storing data to be shifted

16-bit binary
n Number of times of shift (0 ≤ n ≤ 15)
Oper-
Type
D           
n             

1. 16-bit operation (SFR and SFRP)
Command
input
FNC213 D n
SFRP
1) 16 bits stored in a word device D are shifted rightward by “n” bits.

Specify a value ranging from “0” to “15” as “n”.
If “16” or larger value is specified as “n”, 16 bits are shifted rightward by the remainder of “n/16”.
For example, when “n” is set to “18”, 16 bits are shifted rightward by 2 bits (18/16 = 1 ... 2).
2) The ON (1)/OFF (0) status of the “n”th bit (bit “n-1”) in the word device D is transferred to the carry flag
M8022.
3) “0” is set to “n” bits from the most significant bit.
D 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
In the case of “n = 6” Carry flag

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 M8022
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
Become “0”.
648
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry
21
When a bit device is specified by digit specification
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
4K bits are shifted according to the data bit specification.
Command
input
FNC213 K3M0 K4
SFRP
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
M11 M8 M7 M4 M3 M0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Carry flag 23
M11 M8 M7 M4 M3 M0 M8022
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Become “0”.
24
Related device
Others
FNC181-FNC189
M8022 Carry flag Shifts the ON/OFF status of bit “n-1”.
Error 25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D8067.
• When a negative value is set to “n” (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program example shown below, the contents of Y010 to Y023 are shifted rightward by the number of bits 26
specified by D0 when X020 turns ON.
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
X020
FNC213 K3Y010 D0
SFRP
END
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Y23 Y20 Y17 Y14 Y13 Y10
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D0 4 28
Carry flag
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
Y23 Y20 Y17 Y14 Y13 Y10 M8022

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Become “0”.
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
649
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry
27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry
Outline
This instruction shifts 16 bits stored in a word device leftward by “n” bits.
SFL P 5 steps
SFL Continuous

Operation
SFLP Pulse (Single) 
Operation
2. Set data
D Device number storing data to be shifted

16-bit binary
n Number of times of shift (0 ≤ n ≤ 15)
Oper-
Type
D           
n             

1. 16-bit operation (SFL and SFLP)
Command
input
FNC214 D n
SFLP
1) 16 bits stored in a word device D are shifted leftward by “n” bits.

Specify a value ranging from “0” to “15” as “n”.
If “16” or larger value is specified as “n”, 16 bits are shifted leftward by the remainder of “n/16”.
For example, when “n” is set to “18”, 16 bits are shifted leftward by 2 bits (18/16 = 1 ... 2).
2) The ON (1)/OFF (0) status of the “n+1”th bit (bit “n”) in the word device D is transferred to the carry flag
M8022.
3) “0” is set to “n” bits from the least significant bit.

D 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Carry flag In the case of “n = 8”

M8022 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 D 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Become “0”.
650
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry
21
When a bit device is specified by digit specification
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
4K bits are shifted according to the data of bit specification.
Command
input
FNC214 K2M10 K3
SFL
22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
M17 M14M13 M10
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Carry flag 23
M8022 M17 M14M13 M12 M10
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Become “0”.
24
Related device
Others
FNC181-FNC189
M8022 Carry flag Shifts the ON/OFF status of bit “n”.
Error 25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D8067.
• When a negative value is set to “n” (error code: K6706)
Program example
In the program example shown below, the contents of Y010 to Y017 are shifted leftward by the number of bits 26
specified by D0 when X020 turns ON.
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
X020
FNC214 K2Y10 D0
SFLP
END
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Y17 Y14 Y13 Y10
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
3 D0 28
Carry flag
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
M8022 Y17 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y10

1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Become “0”.
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
651
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
28. Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249

FNC220 to FNC249 provide data comparison instructions which can be handled as contact symbols in programming
such as LD, AND and OR.
220 − −
221 − −
222 − −
223 − −
224 LD= LD= S1 S2 Load Compare S1 = S2 Section 28.1
225 LD> LD> S1 S2 Load Compare S1 > S2 Section 28.1
226 LD< LD< S1 S2 Load Compare S1 < S2 Section 28.1
227 − −
228 LD<> LD<> S1 S2 Load Compare S1 ≠ S2 Section 28.1
229 LD<= LD<= S1 S2 Load Compare S1 <= S2 Section 28.1
230 LD>= LD>= S1 S2 Load Compare S1 >= S2 Section 28.1
231 − −
232 AND= AND= S1 S2 AND Compare S1 = S2 Section 28.2
233 AND> AND> S1 S2 AND Compare S1 > S2 Section 28.2
234 AND< AND< S1 S2 AND Compare S1 < S2 Section 28.2
235 − −
236 AND<> AND<> S1 S2 AND Compare S1 ≠ S2 Section 28.2
237 AND<= AND<= S1 S2 AND Compare S1 <= S2 Section 28.2
238 AND>= AND>= S1 S2 AND Compare S1 >= S2 Section 28.2
652
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
239 − −
240 OR=
OR= S1 S2
OR Compare S1 = S2 Section 28.3 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
241 OR> OR Compare S1 > S2 Section 28.3
OR> S1 S2
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
242 OR< OR Compare S1 < S2 Section 28.3
OR< S1 S2
243 − −
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
244 OR<> OR Compare S1 ≠ S2 Section 28.3
OR<> S1 S2
245 OR<= OR Compare S1 <= S2 Section 28.3

OR<= S1 S2
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
246 OR>= OR Compare S1 >= S2 Section 28.3
OR>= S1 S2
247 − −
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
248 − −
249 − −
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
653
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison
28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison
Outline
These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees so that an operation is
started.
D LD= 5 steps LD= Continuous

9 steps LDD= Continuous
Operation Operation
D LD> 5 steps LD> Continuous

9 steps LDD> Continuous
Operation Operation
D LD< 5 steps LD< Continuous

9 steps LDD< Continuous
Operation Operation
D LD<> 5 steps LD<> Continuous

9 steps LDD<> Continuous
Operation Operation
D LD<= 5 steps LD<= Continuous

9 steps LDD<= Continuous
Operation Operation
D LD>= 5 steps LD>= Continuous

9 steps LDD>= Continuous
Operation Operation

S1 Device number storing comparison data 16- or 32-bit binary

Oper-
Type
S1        1 2     
S2        1 2     

654
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
FNC224 to FNC230 are data comparison instructions connected to bus lines.
The contents of S1 are compared with the contents of S2 in binary format, and a contact becomes conductive
(ON) or non-conductive (OFF) depending on the comparison result.
FNC No. 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction ON condition OFF condition
224 LD= LDD= S1 = S2 S1 ≠ S2 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
225 LD> LDD> S1 > S2 S1 <= S2
226 LD< LDD< S1 < S2 S1 >= S2
228 LD<> LDD<> S1 ≠ S2 S1 = S2
229 LD<= LDD<= S1 <= S2 S1 > S2
230 LD>= LDD>= S1 >= S2 S1 < S2
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Cautions
1. Negative value
When the most significant bit is "1" in the data stored in S1 or S2 , it is regarded as a negative value in
comparison.
• In the 16-bit operation: bit 15
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
2. When using 32-bit counters (including 32-bit high-speed counters)
Make sure to execute the 32-bit operation (such as "LDD=", "LDD>" and "LDD<") when comparing 32-bit counters
(C200 to C255).
If a 32-bit counter is specified in the 16-bit operation (such as "LD=", "LD>" and "LD<"), a program error or operation
error will occur. 25
3. Programming of data comparison instructions
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
When programming in GX Works2 and GX Developer, symbols "≤" and "≥" cannot be input.
Separate "≤" into "<" and "=", and separate "≥" into ">" and "=".
<Input example for 16-bit operation>
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Program example
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
S1 S2
FNC224 When the current value of the counter C10 is "200", Y010
K200 C10 Y10
LD= is driven.
FNC225
LD>
D200 K-30
X001
SET Y11 When the contents of D200 are "-29" or higher and X001 is
ON, Y011 is set.
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
FNC225 K678493 When the contents of the counter C200 are less than
C200 M50
LDD> "K678,493" or when M3 turns ON, M50 is driven.
M3
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
655
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison
28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison
Outline
These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees.
D AND= 5 steps AND= Continuous

9 steps ANDD= Continuous
Operation Operation
D AND> 5 steps AND> Continuous

9 steps ANDD> Continuous
Operation Operation
D AND< 5 steps AND< Continuous

9 steps ANDD< Continuous
Operation Operation
D AND<> 5 steps AND<> Continuous

9 steps ANDD<> Continuous
Operation Operation
D AND<= 5 steps AND<= Continuous

9 steps ANDD<= Continuous
Operation Operation
D AND>= 5 steps AND>= Continuous

9 steps ANDD>= Continuous
Operation Operation


Oper-
Type
S1        1 2     
S2        1 2     

656
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
FNC232 to FNC237 are data comparison instructions connected to other contacts in series.
232 AND= ANDD= S1 = S2 S1 ≠ S2 22
233 AND> ANDD>
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
S1 > S2 S1 <= S2
234 AND< ANDD< S1 < S2 S1 >= S2
236 AND<> ANDD<> S1 ≠ S2 S1 = S2
237 AND<= ANDD<= S1 <= S2 S1 < S2
238 AND>= ANDD>= S1 >= S2 S1 > S2
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Cautions
1. Negative value
comparison.
• In the 16-bit operation: bit 15 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Make sure to execute the 32-bit operation (such as "ANDD=", "ANDD>" and "ANDD<") when comparing 32-bit
counters (C200 to C255).
If a 32-bit counter is specified in the 16-bit operation (such as "AND=", "AND>" and "AND<"), a program error or
operation error will occur.
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Program example 28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
S1 S2
X000
FNC232 When X000 is ON and the current value of the counter
K200 C10 Y10
AND= C10 is "200" Y010 is driven.
X001
FNC236
AND<>
K-10 D0 SET Y11
When X001 is OFF and the contents of the data register
D0 are not "-10", Y011 is set. 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
X002 When X002 is ON, and the contents of the data registers
FNC233 K678493 D10 M50 D11 and D10 are less than "K678,493", or when M3 turns
ANDD> ON, M50 is driven.
M3
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
657
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison
28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison
Outline
These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees.
D OR= 5 steps OR= Continuous

9 steps ORD= Continuous
Operation Operation
D OR> 5 steps OR> Continuous

9 steps ORD> Continuous
Operation Operation
D OR< 5 steps OR< Continuous

9 steps ORD< Continuous
Operation Operation
D OR<> 5 steps OR<> Continuous

9 steps ORD<> Continuous
Operation Operation
D OR<= 5 steps OR<= Continuous

9 steps ORD<= Continuous
Operation Operation
D OR>= 5 steps OR>= Continuous

9 steps ORD>= Continuous
Operation Operation


Oper-
Type
S1        1 2     
S2        1 2     

658
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
FNC240 to 246 are data comparison instructions connected to other contacts in parallel.
240 OR= ORD= S1 = S2 S1 ≠ S2 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
241 OR> ORD> S1 > S2 S1 <= S2
242 OR< ORD< S1 < S2 S1 >= S2
244 OR<> ORD<> S1 ≠ S2 S1 = S2
245 OR<= ORD<= S1 <= S2 S1 > S2
246 OR>= ORD>= S1 >= S2 S1 < S2
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Cautions
1. Negative value
comparison.
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Make sure to execute the 32-bit operation (such as "ORD=", "ORD>" and "ORD<") when comparing 32-bit counters
(C200 to C255).
If a 32-bit counter is specified in the 16-bit operation (such as "OR=", "OR>" and "OR<"), a program error or operation
error will occur. 25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Program example
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
X001
When X001 turns ON or when the current value of the
Y000
counter C10 is "200", Y000 is driven.
S1  S2 
FNC240
OR=
K200 C10 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
X002 M30 When X002 and M30 turn ON or when the contents of the
M60 data registers D101 and D100 are more than "K100,000"
M60 is driven.
FNC246
ORD>=
D100 K100000
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
659
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
29. Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269

250 − −
251 − −
252 − −
253 − −
254 − −
255 − −
256 LIMIT LIMIT S1 S2 S3 D Limit Control Section 29.1
257 BAND BAND S1 S2 S3 D Dead Band Control Section 29.2
258 ZONE ZONE S1 S2 S3 D Zone Control Section 29.3
259 SCL SCL S1 S2 D Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) Section 29.4
260 DABIN DABIN S D Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion Section 29.5
261 BINDA BINDA S D BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion Section 29.6
262 − −
263 − −
264 − −
265 − −
266 − −
267 − −
268 − −
269 SCL2 SCL2 S1 S2 D Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data) Section 29.7
660
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control
21
29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction provides the upper limit value and lower limit value for an input numeric value, and controls the output 22
value using these limit values.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D LIMIT P LIMIT Continuous DLIMIT Continuous

9 steps 17 steps
23
Operation Operation
LIMITP Pulse (Single) DLIMITP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S1 Lower limit value (minimum output value)
S2 Upper limit value (maximum output value) 24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
S3 Input value controlled by the upper and lower limit values
Head device number storing the output value controlled by the upper and lower limit
D values
Oper-
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Type
S1            
S2            
S3          
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
D         

1. 16-bit operation (LIMIT and LIMITP)
Depending on how the input value (16-bit binary value) specified by S3 compares to the range between S1
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
and S2 , the output value D is controlled.
The output value is controlled as shown below:
Command
input
FNC256 S1  S2  S3  D
LIMIT
28
In the case of “ S1  Lower limit value > S3  Input value” .... S1  Lower limit value → D  Output value
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
In the case of “ S2  Upper limit value < S3  Input value” .... S2  Upper limit value → D  Output value
In the case of “ S1  Lower limit value ≤ S3  Input value ≤ S2  Upper limit value”
.... S3  Input value → D  Output value
Output Output ( D  ) 29
value value
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
S2  Specified
Input Input ( S3  )
value value
30
S1  Specified
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
• When controlling the output value using only the upper limit value, set “-32768” to the lower limit value specified in
S1 .
661
• When controlling the output value using only the lower limit value, set “32767” to the upper limit value specified
in S2 .
2. 32-bit operation (DLIMIT and DLIMITP)

Depending on how the input value (32-bit binary value) specified by [ S3 +1, S3 ] compares to the range
between [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ], the output value [ D +1, D ] is controlled.
Command
input
FNC256 S1  S2  S3  D
DLIMIT
S1  +1, S1  S3  +1, S3  S1  +1, S1  D  +1, D 

In the case of “Lower limit value > Input value” .................................... Lower limit value → Output value
S2  +1, S2  S3  +1, S3  S2  +1, S2  D  +1, D 

In the case of “Upper limit value < Input value” .................................... Upper limit value → Output value
S1  +1, S1  S3  +1, S3  S2  +1, S2  S3  +1, S3  D  +1, D 

In the case of “Lower limit value ≤ Input value ≤ Upper limit value” .... Input value → Output value
Output Output
value ( D  +1, D  )
value
S2  +1, S2 
Specified
Input
Input value
value
( S3  +1, S3  )
S1  +1, S1 
Specified
• When controlling the output value using only the upper limit value, set “-2,147,483,648” to the lower limit value
specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ].
• When controlling the output value using only the lower limit value, set “2,147,483,647” to the upper limit value
specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ].
Error
An operation error is caused when the instruction is executed in the setting status shown below; The error flag M8067
turns ON, and the error code (K6706) is stored in D8067.
Relationship
16-bit operation S1 ≤ S2
32-bit operation [ S1 +1, S1 ] ≤ [ S2 +1, S2 ]
662
21
Program examples
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the limit values “500” to
“5000”, and the controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 19 K4X020 D0
22
BIN
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC256 K500 K5000 D0 D1
LIMIT
END
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Operation
• In the case of “D0 < 500”, “500” is output to D1. Output (D1)
• In the case of “500 ≤ D0 ≤ 5000”, the value of D0 is output to D1.
• In the case of “D0 > 5000”, “5000” is output to D1. 5000
500
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Input (D0)
500 5000
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the limit values “10000” and 25
“1,000,000”, and the controlled value is output to D11 and D10 when X000 turns ON.
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
X000
FNC 19 K8X020 D0
DBIN
FNC256 K10000 K1000000 D0 D10

DLIMIT 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
END
Operation
• In the case of “(D1, D0) < 10000”, “10000” is output to (D11,
D10).
Output (D11,D10) 27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
• In the case of “10000 ≤ (D1, D0) ≤ 1,000,000”, the value of (D1,
1,000,000
D0) is output to (D11, D10).
10000
• In the case of “(D1, D0) > 1,000,000”, “1,000,000” is output to
(D11, D10). Input (D1,D0)
10000 1,000,000
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
663
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control
29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control
Outline
This instruction provides the upper limit value and lower limit value of the dead band for an input numeric value, and
controls the output value using these limit values.
D BAND P BAND Continuous DBAND Continuous

BANDP Pulse (Single) DBANDP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Lower limit value of the dead band (no-output band)
S2 Upper limit value of the dead band (no-output band)

S3 Input value controlled by the dead band
D Device number storing the output value controlled by the dead band
Oper-
Type
S1            
S2            
S3          
D         

1. 16-bit operation (BAND and BANDP)
Depending on how the input value (16-bit binary value) specified by S3 compares to the dead band range between
S1 and S2 , the output value D is controlled.
Command
input
FNC257 S1  S2  S3  D
BAND
 " S1  > S3  " .... S3  - S1  → D
 " S2  < S3  " .... S3  - S2  → D
 " S1  ≤ S3  ≤ S2  " ............0 → D
Output value Output value ( D  )

Lower limit value of
dead band Output
( S1  )
Input
Input value ( S3  )
value
Output Upper limit value of
( S2  )
dead band
Output value = 0
664
21
2. 32-bit operation (DBAND and DBANDP)
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Depending on how the input value (32-bit binary value) specified by [ S3 +1, S3 ] compares to the dead band
range between [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ], the output value [ D +1, D ] is controlled.
The output value is controlled as shown below:
Command
input 22
FNC257 S1  S2  S3  D
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
DBAND
S1  +1, S1  S3  +1, S3  S3  +1, S3  S1  +1, S1  D  +1, D 

In the case of “Lower limit value > Input value” ...............Input value − Lower limit value → Output value
S2  +1, S2  S3  +1, S3  S3  +1, S3  S2  +1, S2  D  +1, D 

23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
In the case of “Upper limit value < Input value” ..............Input value − Upper limit value → Output value
S1  +1, S1  S3  +1, S3  S2  +1, S2  D  +1, D 

In the case of “Lower limit value ≤ Input value ≤ Upper limit value” ................................ 0 → Output value
Output value Output

[ D  +1, D  ]
24
value
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Lower limit value of
dead band
[ S1  +1, S1  ] Output
Input
Input value
value
[ S3  +1, S3  ]
Output Upper limit value of
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Output value = 0 dead band [ S2  +1, S2  ]
Caution
• When the output value overflows, it is handled as follows:
- In the 16-bit operation
26
The output value is a 16-bit binary value with sign. Accordingly, if the operation result is outside the range from -
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
32768 to +32767, it is handled as follows:
Lower limit value of dead band S1  = 10 Output value = -32768-10

= 8000H-AH
Input value S3  = -32768 = 7FF6H
= 32758 27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
The output value is a 32-bit binary value with sign. Accordingly, if the operation result is outside the range from -
2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647, it is handled as follows:
Lower limit value of dead band [ S1 +1, S1 ] = 1000 Output value = -2,147,483,648-1000
Input value [ S3 +1, S3 ] = -2,147,483,648
= 80000000H-000003E8H 28
= 7FFFFC18H
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
= 2,147,482,648
Error
An operation error is caused when the instruction is executed in the setting status shown below; The error flag M8067
turns ON, and the error code (K6706) is stored in D8067. 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
Relationship
16-bit operation S1 > S2
32-bit operation [ S1 +1, S1 ] > [ S2 +1, S2 ]
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
665
Program examples
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the dead band from “-1000”
to “+1000”, and a controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.
X000 Output
FNC 19 K4X020 D0
BIN
FNC257 K-1000 K1000 D0 D1

BAND Input
END
Operation
• In the case of “D0 < -1000”, “D0 - (-1000)” is output to D1.
• In the case of “-1000 ≤ D0 ≤ +1000”, “0” is output to D1. Output
• In the case of “D0 > +1000”, “D0 - 1000” is output to D1.
-1000 0
Input
1000
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the dead band from “-10000”
to “+10000”, and a controlled value is output to D11 and D10 when X000 turns ON.
Output
X000
FNC 19 K8X020 D0
DBIN
FNC257 K-10000 K10000 D0 D10

DBAND Input
END
Operation
• In the case of “(D1, D0) < -10000”, “(D1, D0) - (-10000)” is output to
(D11, D10). Output
• In the case of “-10000 ≤ (D1, D0) ≤ +10000”, “0” is output to (D11,
D10).
• In the case of “(D1, D0) > +10000”, “(D1, D0) - 10000” is output to
-10000 0
(D11, D10). Input
+10000
666
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control
21
29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
Depending on how the input value compares to positive or negative, the output value is controlled by the bias value 22
specified.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D ZONE P ZONE Continuous DZONE Continuous

9 steps 17 steps
ZONEP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
DZONEP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S1 Negative bias value to be added to the input value

24
S2 Positive bias value to be added to the input value
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S3 Input value controlled by the zone
D Head device number storing the output value controlled by the zone
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
Type
S1            
S2             26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S3          
D         

1. 16-bit operation (ZONE and ZONEP)
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
The bias value specified by S1 or S2 is added to the input value specified by S3 , and output to the device
specified by D .
The bias value is added as shown below:
Command
input
FNC258 S1  S2  S3  D
28
ZONE
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
In the case of “ S3  Input value < 0” ..... S3  Input value + S1  Negative bias value → D  Output value
In the case of “ S3  Input value = 0” ...........................................................................0 → D  Output value
In the case of “ S3  Input value > 0” ..... S3  Input value + S2  Positive bias value → D  Output value
29
Output Output ( D  )
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
value value
Positive bias value
( S2  )
Input 0 Input ( S3  )
value value 30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
Negative bias value

( S1  )
667
2. 32-bit operation (DZONE and DZONEP)

The bias value specified by [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ] is added to the input value specified by [ S3 +1,
S3 ], and output to the device specified by [ D +1, D ].
The bias value is added as shown below:
Command
input
FNC258 S1  S2  S3  D
DZONE
S3  +1, S3  S3  +1, S3  S1  +1, S1  D  +1, D 

In the case of “Input value < 0” .................................. Input value + Negative bias value → Output value
S3  +1, S3  D  +1, D 
In the case of “Input value = 0” ...........................................................................................0 → Output value
S3  +1, S3  S3  +1, S3  S2  +1, S2  D  +1, D 

In the case of “Input value > 0” .................................. Input value + Positive bias value → Output value
Output
value
Output value [ D  +1, D  ]
Positive bias value
[ S2  +1, S2  ]
Input
0 Input value
value
[ S3  +1, S3  ]
Negative bias value

[ S1  +1, S1  ]
Caution
• When the output value overflows, it is handled as follows:
The operation result is a 16-bit binary value with sign. Accordingly, if the output value is outside the range from
-32768 to +32767, it is handled as follows:
Negative bias value S1  = -100 Output value = -32768+(-100)

= 8000H+FF9CH
Input value S3  = -32768 = 7F9CH
= 32668

The output value is a 32-bit binary value with sign. Accordingly, if the operation result is outside the range from
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647, it is handled as follows:
Negative bias value [ S1 +1, S1 ] = -1000 Output value = -2,147,483,648+(-1000)

= 80000000H+FFFFFC18H
Input value [ S3 +1, S3 ] = -2,147,483,648 = 7FFFFC18H
= 2,147,482,648
668
21
Program examples
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the zone from “-1000” to
“+1000”, and the controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 19 K4X020 D0
22
BIN
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC258 K-1000 K1000 D0 D1
ZONEP
END
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Operation
• In the case of “D0 < 0”, “D0 + (-1000)” is output to D1. Output
• In the case of “D = 0”, “0” is output to D1.
• In the case of “D0 > 0”, “D0 + 1000” is output to D1.
1000
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
-1000 0
Input
1000
-1000
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the zone from “-10000” to
“+10000”, and the controlled value is output to D11 and D10 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 19 K8X020
DBIN
D0
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
FNC258 K-10000 K10000 D0 D10
DZONEP
END
27
Operation
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
• In the case of “(D1, D0) < 0”, “(D1, D0) + (-10000)” is output to (D11, Output
D10).
• In the case of “(D1, D0) = 0”, the “0” is output to (D11, D10).
• In the case of “(D1, D0) > 0”, “(D1, D0) + 10000” is output to (D11,
D10).
10000
28
-10000 0
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
Input
10000
-10000
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
669
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data)
29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data)
Outline
This instruction executes scaling of the input value using a specified data table, and outputs the result.
SCL2 (FNC269) is also available with a different data table configuration for scaling.
→ For SCL2 (FNC269) instruction, refer to Section 29.7.
D SCL P SCL Continuous DSCL Continuous

SCLP Pulse (Single) DSCLP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Input value used in scaling or device number storing the input value
S2 Head device number storing the conversion table used in scaling 16- or 32-bit binary
D Device number storing the output value controlled by scaling
Oper-
Type
S1            
S2   
D         

1. 16-bit operation (SCL and SCLP)
The input value specified in S1 is processed by scaling for the specified conversion characteristics, and stored to a
device number specified in D . Conversion for scaling is executed based on the data table stored in a device
specified in S2 and later.
If the output data is not an integer, however, the number in the first decimal place is rounded.
→ For the method to set the conversion table for scaling, refer to the next page.
Command Conversion setting data table for scaling

input Device assignment in
FNC259 S1  S2  D Set item
setting data table
SCL
Number of coordinate points
Y (“5” in the case shown in the left S2
Point 2 figure)
Output Point 5 X coordinate S2 +1
value Point 1
( D ) Point 3 Y coordinate S2 +2
X coordinate S2 +3
Point 1 Point 4 Point 2
Y coordinate S2 +4
X X coordinate
Input value ( S1  ) S2 +5
Operation Point 3
Operation Y coordinate S2
error Operation is enabled. +6
error
X coordinate S2 +7
Point 4
Y coordinate S2 +8
X coordinate S2 +9
Point 5
Y coordinate S2 +10
670
21
2. 32-bit operation (DSCL and DSCLP)
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
The input value specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] is processed by scaling for the specified conversion characteristics,
and stored to a device number specified in [ D +1, D ]. Conversion for scaling is executed based on the data
table stored in a device specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ] and later.
Conversion setting data table for scaling
22
Command
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC259 Set item
S1  S2  D setting data table
DSCL
(“5” in the case shown in the left [ S2 +1, S2 ]
Y figure)
Point 2
Point 5 Point 1
X coordinate [ S2 +3, S2 +2] 23
Output
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Y coordinate [ S2 +5, S2 +4]
value
( D ) Point 3
X coordinate [ S2 +7, S2 +6]
Point 2
Point 1 Point 4 Y coordinate [ S2 +9, S2 +8]
X Point 3
24
Operation Operation
Others
FNC181-FNC189
error Operation is enabled. error X coordinate [ S2 +15, S2 +14]
Point 4
Point 5
Y coordinate [ S2 +21, S2 +20] 25
3. Setting the conversion table for scaling
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
The conversion table for scaling is set based on the data table stored in a device specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ] and
later.
The data table has the following configuration:
→ For a setting example, refer to the following.
Set item
Device assignment in setting data table 26
16-bit operation 32-bit operation
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Number of coordinate points S2 [ S2 +1, S2 ]
X coordinate S2 +1 [ S2 +3, S2 +2]
Point 1
Y coordinate S2 +2 [ S2 +5, S2 +4]
X coordinate S2 +3 [ S2 +7, S2 +6]
27
Point 2
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Y coordinate S2 +4 [ S2 +9, S2 +8]
...
...
...
...
X coordinate S2 +2n-1 [ S2 +4n-1, S2 +4n-2]

Point n (last)
Y coordinate S2 +2n [ S2 +4n+1, S2 +4n] 28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
Setting example of the conversion table for scaling

A setting example for the 16-bit operation is shown below.
For the 32-bit operation, set each item using a 32-bit binary value.
In the case of the conversion characteristics for scaling shown in the figure below, set the following data table.
Y
Point 3 Point 6(200,250)
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
(50,100) Point 7
Point 5 (250,90) Point 8(350,90)
(200,70)
Point 2
(20,30) Point 9
(350,30)
Point 4(200,25) Point 10(400,7)
Point 1(5,7)
X
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
671
Setting the conversion setting data table for scaling

Setting device and setting contents
Set item When R0 is specified in Setting Remarks
S2 contents
Number of coordinate points S2 R0 K10
X coordinate S2 +1 R1 K5
Point 1
Y coordinate S2 +2 R2 K7
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Y coordinate S2 +8 R8 K25 When coordinates are specified using three points in this
way, the output value can be set to an intermediate value.
X coordinate S2 +9 R9 K200 In this example, the output value (intermediate value) is
Point 5
Y coordinate R10 K70 specified by the Y coordinate of the point 5.
S2 +10
If the X coordinate is the same at three points or more,
X coordinate S2 +11 R11 K200 the value at the second point is also output.
Point 6

Point 7

Point 8 When coordinates are specified using two points in this
Y coordinate S2 +16 R16 K90 way, the output value is the Y coordinate at the next point.
X coordinate R17 K350 In this example, the output value is specified by the Y
S2 +17
Point 9 coordinate of the point 9.

Point 10
Errors
D8067.
• When the Xn data is not set in the ascending order in the data table (error code: K6706)
The data table is searched from the low-order side of device numbers in the data table in the operation.
Accordingly, even if only some Xn data is set in the ascending order in the data table, the instruction is executed
without operation error up to the area of the data table in which the Xn data is set in the ascending order.
• When S1 is outside the data table (error code: K6706)
• When the value exceeds the 32-bit data range in the middle of operation (error code: K6706)
In this case, verify that the distance between points is not “65535” or more.
If the distance is “65535” or more, reduce the distance between points.
672
21
Program example
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the program example shown below, the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion table for
scaling set in R0 and later, and output to D10.
Program
M8000
FNC259
22
D0 R0 D10
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
SCL
END
Operation 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Y Point 3
(30,100) Setting
Set item Device
contents
Number of coordinate points R0 K6
X coordinate R1 K0
Point 2
Point 4
(40,45)
Point 1
Y coordinate R2 K0 24
Output value (10,50) X coordinate R3 K10
Others
FNC181-FNC189
(D10)=35 Point 5 Point 2
(50,30) Y coordinate R4 K50
Point 1 X coordinate R5 K30

Point 3
(0,0) Y coordinate R6 K100
X
Input value(D0)=7 Point 6 X coordinate R7 K40
(60,0)
Point 4
Y coordinate R8 K45 25
X coordinate R9 K50
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Point 5
Y coordinate R10 K30
X coordinate R11 K60
Point 6
Y coordinate R12 K0
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
673
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion
29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion
Outline
This instruction converts numeric data expressed in decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H) into binary data.
D DABIN P DABIN Continuous DDABIN Continuous

DABINP Pulse (Single) DDABINP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S Head device number storing data (ASCII codes) to be converted into binary data Character string
D Device number storing conversion result 16- or 32-bit binary
Oper-
Type
S     
D           

1. 16-bit operation (DABIN and DABINP)
1) Data stored in S to S +2 expressed in decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H) is converted into 16-bit binary
data, and stored in D .
Command
DABINP
b15 b8 b7 b0
S  +0 ASCII code for 10000's digit Sign data b15 b0
+1 ASCII code for 100's digit ASCII code for 1000's digit D
+2 ASCII code for 1's digit ASCII code for 10's digit
16-bit binary data
For example, when S to S +2 store ASCII codes expressing "-25108", 16-bit binary data is stored in
D as follows:
b15 b8 b7 b0
S  +0 32H(2) 2DH(-) b15 b0
+1 31H(1) 35H(5) D -25108
+2 38H(8) 30H(0)
2) The numeric range of data stored in S to S +2 is from -32768 to +32767.

3) As "sign data" (low-order byte of S ), "20H (space)" is set when the data to be converted is positive, and "2DH
(-)" is set when the data to be converted is negative.
4) An ASCII code for each digit is ranging from "30H" to "39H".
5) When an ASCII code for each digit is "20H (space)" or "00H (NULL)", it is handled as "30H".
674
21
2. 32-bit operation (DDABIN and DDABINP)
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1) Data stored in S to S +5 expressed in decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H) is converted into 32-bit binary
data, and stored in [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC260
DDABINP
S D 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
b15 b8 b7 b0
S  +0 ASCII code for 1,000,000,000's digit Sign data
D  +1 D
+1 ASCII code for 10,000,000's digit ASCII code for 100,000,000's digit
b31 b16 b15 b0
+2 ASCII code for 100,000's digit ASCII code for 1,000,000's digit
High-order 16 bits Low-order 16 bits
+3
+4
ASCII code for 1000's digit
23
32-bit data
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
+5 (Ignored) ASCII code for 1's digit
For example, when S to S +5 store ASCII codes expressing "-1,234,543,210", 32-bit binary data is
stored in [ D +1, D ] as follows:
b15 b8 b7 b0
S  +0 31H(1) 2DH(-) 24
+1 33H(3) 32H(2)
Others
FNC181-FNC189
D  +1 D
+2 35H(5) 34H(4)
-1234543210
+3 33H(3) 34H(4)
+4 31H(1) 32H(2)
+5 (Ignored) 30H(0)
25
2) The numeric range of data stored in S to S +5 is from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647.
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
The high-order byte of S +5 is ignored.
3) As "sign data" (low-order byte of S ), "20H (space)" is set when the data to be converted is positive, and "2DH
(-)" is set when the data to be converted is negative.
4) An ASCII code for each digit is ranging from "30H" to "39H".
5) When an ASCII code for each digit is "20H (space)" or "00H (NULL)", it is handled as "30H". 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
ASCI (FNC 82) Converts hexadecimal codes into ASCII codes.
HEX (FNC 83)
STR (FNC200)
Converts ASCII codes into hexadecimal codes.
Converts binary data into a character string (ASCII codes).
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
BINDA (FNC261) Converts binary data into decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H).
Errors
D8067.
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
• When the sign data stored in S is any value other than "20H (space)" or "2DH (-)" (error code: K6706)
• When an ASCII code for each digit stored in S to S +2(5) is any value other than "30H" to "39H", "20H
(space)", or "00H (NULL)" (error code: K6706)
• When the numeric range of S to S +2(5) is outside the following range (error code: K6706)
Setting range
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
16-bit operation −32768 to 32767

32-bit operation −2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
• When S to S +2(5) exceeds the device range (error code: K6706)
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
675
Program example
In the program below, the sign and decimal ASCII codes in five digits stored in D20 to D22 are converted into a binary
value and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON.
X000
FNC260 D20 D0
DABINP
END
b15 b8 b7 b0
D20 20H(space) 2DH(-) D0
D21 32H(2) 20H(space) -276
D22 36H(6) 37H(7) (It is regarded as Binary
"- 276" "-00276".) value
676
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion
21
29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction converts binary data into decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H). 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D BINDA P BINDA Continuous DBINDA Continuous

BINDAP DBINDAP
Pulse (Single)
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S Device number storing binary data to be converted into ASCII codes 16- or 32-bit binary
D Head device number storing conversion result Character string 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Oper-
Type
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S              
D     

1. 16-bit operation (BINDA and BINDAP)
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1) Each digit of 16-bit binary data stored in S is converted into an ASCII code (30H to 39H), and stored in
D and later.
Command
BINDAP 27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
b15 b8 b7 b0
D +0 ASCII code for 10000's digit Sign data
b15 b0
S
+3 0000H or source data M8091=OFF: 0000H
16-bit binary data
M8091=ON: Does 28
not change.
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
For example, when S stores "-12345", the conversion result is stored in D and later as follows:
b15 b8 b7 b0
D +0 31H(1) 2DH(-)
b15 b0
S -12345
+1
+2
33H(3)
35H(5)
32H(2)
34H(4)
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
+3 0000H or source data M8091=OFF: 0000H

M8091=ON: Does not change.
2) The numeric range of 16-bit binary data stored in S is from -32768 to +32767.
3) The conversion result stored in D is as follows:
30
a) As "sign data" (low-order byte of D ), "20H (space)" is set when the 16-bit binary data stored in S is
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
positive, and "2DH (-)" is set when 16-bit binary data stored in S is negative.
677
b) "20H (space)" is stored for "0" on the left side of the effective digits (zero suppression).
00 325
Effective digits
20H
c) D +3 is set as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of M8091.

M8091=OFF D +3 is set to "0000H (NULL)".
M8091=ON D +3 does not change.
2. 32-bit operation (DBINDA and DBINDAP)

1) Each digit of 32-bit binary data stored in [ S +1, S ] is converted into an ASCII code (30H to 39H), and
stored in D and later.
Command
DBINDAP
b15 b8 b7 b0
D +0 ASCII code for 1,000,000,000's digit Sign data
+1 ASCII code for 10,000,000's digit ASCII code for 100,000,000's digit
S +1 S
+2 ASCII code for 100,000's digit ASCII code for 1,000,000's digit
High-order 16 bits Low-order 16 bits
32-bit binary data
+5 00H or 20H ASCII code for 1's digit
M8091=OFF:00H
M8091=ON:20H
For example, when [ S +1, S ] stores "-12,345,678", the conversion result is stored in D and later as
follows:
b15 b8 b7 b0
D +0 20H(space) 2DH(-)
+1 31H(1) 20H(space)
S +1 S
+2 33H(3) 32H(2)
-12345678
+3 35H(5) 34H(4)
+4 37H(7) 36H(6)
+5 00H or 20H 38H(8)
M8091=OFF:00H
M8091=ON:20H
2) The numeric range of 32-bit binary data stored in [ S +1, S ] is from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647.
3) The conversion result stored in D is as follows:
a) "sign data" (low-order byte of D ) "20H (space)" is set when the 32-bit binary data stored in [ S +1,
S ] is positive, and "2DH (-)" is set when 32-bit binary data stored in [ S +1, S ] is negative.
b) "20H (space)" is stored for "0" on the left side of the effective digits (zero suppression).
00 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 0
Effective digits
20H
c) The high-order byte of D +5 is set as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of M8091.
M8091=OFF The high-order byte of D +5 is set to "00H (NULL)".
M8091=ON The high-order byte of D +5 is set to "20H (space)".
678
21
Related devices
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
• For 16-bit operation
- When M8091 is OFF, D +3 is set to "0000H (NULL)".
Output character quantity - When M8091 is ON, D +3 does not change.
M8091
selector signal • For 32-bit operation 22
- When M8091 is OFF, the high-order byte of D +5 is set to "00H (NULL)".
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
- When M8091 is ON, the high-order byte of D +5 is set to "20H (space)".
ASCI (FNC 82) Converts hexadecimal values into ASCII code. 23
HEX (FNC 83) Converts ASCII code into hexadecimal values.
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
STR (FNC200) Converts binary data into a character string (ASCII code).
VAL (FNC201) Converts a character string (ASCII code) into binary data.
DABIN (FNC260) Converts numeric data expressed in decimal ASCII code (30H to 39H) into binary data.
Cautions 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
1. Occupied device points
The table below shows the occupied device points of D for 16-bit operation(BINDA/BINDAP) when M8091 is ON/
OFF and 32-bit operation (DBINDA/DBINDAP).
Occupied Points of D
M8091=ON 3 25
16-bit operation
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
M8091=OFF 4
32-bit operation 6
Errors
D8067. 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
• When the occupied device point of D storing the ASCII code character string exceeds the corresponding
device rang (error code: K6706).
Program example
In the program below, 16-bit binary data stored in D1000 is converted into decimal ASCII codes when X000 is set to
ON, and the ASCII codes converted by the PR (FNC 77) instruction are output one by one by the time division method 27
to Y040 to Y051.
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
By turning to OFF the output character selector signal M8091 and setting to ON PR mode flag M8027, ASCII codes up
to "00H" are output.
→ For PR mode flag and the PR (FNC 77) instruction, refer to Section 15.8.
X000
RST M8091
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
SET M8027
FNC261 D1000 D0
BINDAP
FNC 77
PR
D0 Y040 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
END
b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 20H(space) 20H(space) PR (FNC 77)
D1000
5126
D1 31H(1) 35H(5)
instruction
Y040 to Y051
30
D2 36H(6) 32H(2)
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
16-bit binary " 5126" is

D3 0000H output.
data
M8091=OFF
679
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)
29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)
Outline
This instruction executes scaling of the input value using a specified data table, and outputs the result.
SCL (FNC259) is also available with a different data table configuration for scaling.
SCL2 instruction is supported in the FX3UC Series Ver. 1.30 or later.
→ For SCL (FNC259) instruction, refer to Section 29.4.
D SCL2 P SCL2 Continuous DSCL2 Continuous

SCL2P Pulse (Single) DSCL2P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
2. Set data
S1 Input value used in scaling or device number storing the input value
S2 Head device number storing the conversion table used in scaling 16- or 32-bit binary
D Device number storing the output value controlled by scaling
Oper-
Type
S1            
S2   
D         

1. 16-bit operation (SCL2 and SCL2P)
The input value specified in S1 is processed by scaling for the specified conversion characteristics, and stored to a
device number specified in D . Conversion for scaling is executed based on the data table stored in a device
specified in S2 and later.
→ For the method to set the conversion table for scaling, refer to the next page.
Command Conversion setting data table for scaling

FNC 269 Set item
SCL2
Y (“5” in the case shown in the left S2
Point 2 figure)
Output Point 5
Point 1 S2 +1
value
Point 2 S2 +2
( D ) Point 3
X coordinate Point 3 S2 +3
Point 1 Point 4 Point 4 S2 +4
X Point 5 S2 +5
Operation Operation Point 1 S2 +6
error Operation is enabled. error Point 2 S2 +7
Y coordinate Point 3 S2 +8
Point 4 S2 +9
Point 5 S2 +10
680
21
2. 32-bit operation (DSCL2 and DSCL2P)
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
The input value specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] is processed by scaling for the specified conversion characteristics,
and stored to a device number specified in [ D +1, D ]. Conversion for scaling is executed based on the data
table stored in a device specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ] and later.
22
Command
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 269 Set item
DSCL2
(“5” in the case shown in the left [ S2 +1, S2 ]
Y figure)
Point 2
Point 1 [ S2 +3, S2 +2] 23
Output Point 5
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Point 2 [ S2 +5, S2 +4]
value
( D ) Point 3 X coordinate Point 3 [ S2 +7, S2 +6]
Point 1 Point 4 Point 4 [ S2 +9, S2 +8]

Point 5 [ S2 +11, S2
X
Point 1 [ S2 +13, S2
+10]
+12]
24
Operation Operation
Others
FNC181-FNC189
error Operation is enabled. error Point 2 [ S2 +15, S2 +14]
Y coordinate Point 3 [ S2 +17, S2 +16]
Point 4 [ S2 +19, S2 +18]
Point 5 [ S2 +21, S2 +20] 25
3. Setting the conversion table for scaling
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
The conversion table for scaling is set based on the data table stored in a device specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ] and
later.
The data table has the following configuration:
→ For a setting example, refer to the next page.
Set item
Device assignment in setting data table 26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
16-bit operation 32-bit operation
Number of coordinate points S2 [ S2 +1, S2 ]
Point 1 S2 +1 [ S2 +3, S2 +2]
Point 2 S2 +2 [ S2 +5, S2 +4]
X coordinate
27
...
...
...
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Point n (last) S2 +n [ S2 +2n+1, S2 +2n]
Point 1 S2 +n+1 [ S2 +2n+3, S2 +2n+2]
Point 2 S2 +n+2 [ S2 +2n+5, S2 +2n+4]
Y coordinate
...
...
...
Point n (last) S2 +2n [ S2 +4n+1, S2 +4n] 28

Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
Setting example of the conversion table for scaling

A setting example for the 16-bit operation is shown below.
For the 32-bit operation, set each item using 32-bit binary value.
In the case of the conversion characteristics for scaling shown in the figure below, set the following data table.
Y
Point 6(200,250)
29
Point 3
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
(50,100) Point 7
Point 5 (250,90) Point 8(350,90)
(200,70)
Point 2
(20,30) Point 9
(350,30)
Point 1(5,7) Point 4(200,25) Point 10(400,7)
30
X
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
681
Setting the conversion setting data table for scaling

Setting device and setting contents
Set item Setting Remarks
When R0 is specified in S2 contents
Number of coordinate points S2 R0 K10
Point 1 S2 +1 R1 K5
Point 2 S2 +2 R2 K20
Point 3 S2 +3 R3 K50
Point 4 S2 +4 R4 K200
Point 5 S2 +5 R5 K200 Refer to *1.

X coordinate
Point 6 S2 +6 R6 K200
Point 7 S2 +7 R7 K250
Point 8 S2 +8 R8 K350
Refer to *2.
Point 9 S2 +9 R9 K350
Point 10 S2 +10 R10 K400
Point 1 S2 +11 R11 K7
Point 2 S2 +12 R12 K30
Point 3 S2 +13 R13 K100
Point 4 S2 +14 R14 K25
Point 5 S2 +15 R15 K70 Refer to *1.

Y coordinate
Point 6 S2 +16 R16 K250
Point 7 S2 +17 R17 K90
Point 8 S2 +18 R18 K90

Refer to *2.
Point 9 S2 +19 R19 K30
Point 10 S2 +20 R20 K7
*1. When coordinates are specified using three points as shown in the points 4, 5 and 6, the output value can be
set to an intermediate value.
In this example, the output value (intermediate value) is specified by the Y coordinate of the point 5.
If the X coordinate is same at three points or more, the value at the second point is output also.
*2. When coordinates are specified using two points as shown in the points 8 and 9, the output value is the Y
coordinate at the next point.
In this example, the output value is specified by the Y coordinate of the point 9.
Errors
D8067.
• When the Xn data is not set in the ascending order in the data table (error code: K6706)
The data table is searched from the low-order side of the device numbers in the data table in the operation.
Accordingly, even if only some Xn data is set in the ascending order in the data table, the instruction is executed
without operation error up to the area of the data table in which the Xn data is set in the ascending order.
• When S1 is outside the data table (error code: K6706)
• When the value exceeds the 32-bit data range in the middle of operation (error code: K6706)
In this case, verify that the distance between points is not “65535” or more.
If the distance is “65535” or more, reduce the distance between points.
682
21
Program example
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the program example shown below, the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion table for
scaling set in R0 and later, and output to D10.
Program
M8000
FNC 269
22
D0 R0 D10
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
SCL2
END
Operation 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Y Point 3 Setting
Set item Device
(30,100) contents
Number of coordinate points R0 K6
Point 1 R1 K0
Point 4 Point 2 R2 K10 24

Point 2 (40,45) Point 3 R3 K30
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Output value (10,50) X coordinate
Point 5 Point 4 R4 K40
(D10)=35
(50,30) Point 5 R5 K50
Point 1 Point 6 R6 K60
(0,0)
X Point 1 R7 K0
Input value(D0)=7 Point 6
(60,0)
Point 2 R8 K50 25
Point 3 R9 K100
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Y coordinate
Point 4 R10 K45
Point 5 R11 K30
Point 6 R12 K0
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
683
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276
30. External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276

FNC270 to FNC276 provide instructions for executing inverter communication and MODBUS communication.
270 IVCK IVCK S1 S2 D n Inverter Status Check Section 30.1
271 IVDR IVDR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Drive Section 30.2
272 IVRD IVRD S1 S2 D n Inverter Parameter Read Section 30.3
273 IVWR IVWR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Parameter Write Section 30.4
274 IVBWR IVBWR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Parameter Block Write Section 30.5
275 IVMC IVMC S1 S2 S3 D n Inverter Multi Command Section 30.6
276 ADPRW ADPRW S S1 S2 S3 S4/D MODBUS Read / Write Section 30.7
684
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check
21
30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction reads the operation status of an inverter to a PLC using the computer link operation function of the 22
inverter. Applicable inverters vary depending on the version.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
This instruction corresponds to the EXTR (K10) instruction in the FX2N/FX2NC Series.
→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
IVCK IVCK Continuous

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
9 steps Operation
 
2. Set data
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S1 Inverter station number (K0 to K31)
S2 Inverter instruction code (shown on the next page)

16-bit binary
D Device number storing the read value
n Channel to be used (K1: ch 1, K2: ch 2)*1

25
*1. Ch2 is not available in FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type) and FX3S PLC.
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
Type
Unit
U\G V Z Modify
stant
K H
Number ter String
E "" P
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S1  1 2   
S2  1 2   
D     1 2 
n  
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

1. 16-bit operation (IVCK) 28

Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
The operation status corresponding to the instruction code*2 specified in S2 of an inverter connected to
communication port n whose station number is specified in S1 is read and transferred to D .
Command
input
FNC270
IVCK
S1  S2  D n
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
*2. Refer to the instruction code list shown on the next page.
Refer to the pages in the inverter manual on which the computer link function is explained in detail.
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
685
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check
2. Inverter instruction codes

The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 . Only use the instruction codes
shown below. Use of instruction codes not shown below may cause communication errors.
Do not use instruction codes not shown in the table below. They may cause communication errors.
For the instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.
S2 Applicable inverter
Inverter Instruction Read contents F700, A700, E700,
V500 F500, A500 E500 S500
code (hexadecimal) D700, F800, A800
H7B Operation mode     
Output frequency
H6F
(speed)
 *1   
H70 Output current     

H71 Output voltage     –
H72 Special monitor    – –
H73 Special monitor selection No.    – –
H74 Alarm definition     
H75 Alarm definition     
H76 Alarm definition     –
H77 Alarm definition     –
H79 Inverter status monitor (expansion)  – – – –
H7A Inverter status monitor     
H6E Set frequency (EEPROM)  *1   
H6D Set frequency (RAM)  *1   
H7F Link parameter extended setting These codes cannot be specified in S2 of the IVCK instruction. They
are automatically processed when a "second parameter specification
H6C Second parameter changing
code" is specified the IVRD instruction.
*1. Please write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just before the IVCK instruction
when reading frequency.
When "0" is not written, reading of the frequency may not be executed normally.
3. Related devices
Number Number
Description Description
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2
M8029 Instruction execution complete D8063 D8438 Error code of serial communication error*2
M8063 M8438 Serial communication error*2 D8150 D8155 Response wait time in inverter communication*2
M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating D8151 D8156 Step number in inverter communication*4
M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error*3 D8152 D8157 Error code of inverter communication error*3
Latch of inverter communication error occurrence
M8153 M8158 Inverter communication error latch*3 D8153 D8158
step*3*4
*3
M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error D8154 D8159 IVBWR instruction error parameter number*3*4
*3. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
*4. Initial value: -1
Cautions
• It is not permitted to use an "RS (FNC 80)/RS2 (FNC 87)"/"ADPRW (FNC276)"/"FLCRT (FNC300) to FLSTRD
(FNC305)" instruction and an "IVCK (FNC270) to IVMC (FNC275)" instruction for the same port.
• Two or more inverter communication instructions (FNC270 to FNC275) can be driven for the same port at the same
time.
PLC applicable version

The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter.
FREQROL-V500/F500/A500/
PLC FREQROL-F700/A700 FREQROL-E700/D700 FREQROL-F800/A800
E500/S500
FX3S Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 1.10 or later
FX3G Ver. 1.10 or later Ver. 2.22 or later
FX3GC Ver. 1.40 or later Ver. 2.22 or later
FX3U Ver. 2.20 or later Ver. 2.32 or later Ver. 3.11 or later
FX3UC Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 2.20 or later Ver. 2.32 or later Ver. 3.11 or later
686
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive
21
30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction writes a inverter operation required control value to an inverter using the computer link operation 22
function of the inverter.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
IVDR IVDR Continuous

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
9 steps Operation
 
2. Set data
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S2 Inverter instruction code (shown on the next page)

16-bit binary
Set value to be written to the inverter parameter or device number storing the data to be
S3
set
n Channel to be used (K1: ch 1, K2: ch 2)*1 25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
and
Type
Unit
Index
Pointer
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S1  1 2   
S2  1 2   
S3      1 2 
n   27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

1. 16-bit operation (IVDR)

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
The control value specified in S3 is written to the instruction code*2 specified in S2 of an inverter connected to
a communication port n whose station number is specified in S1 .
Command
input
FNC271
IVDR
S1  S2  S3  n
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
*2. Refer to the instruction code list shown on the next page.
Refer to the pages in the inverter manual on which the computer link function is explained in detail.
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
687
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive
2. Inverter instruction codes

The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 .
For instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.
S2 Applicable inverter
Inverter Instruction Write contents F700, A700, E700,
V500 F500, A500 E500, S500
code (hexadecimal) D700, F800, A800
HFB Operation mode    
Special monitor selection
HF3    –
number
HF9 Run command (expansion)  – – –
HFA Run command    
HEE Set frequency (EEPROM)  *3  
HED Set frequency (RAM)  *3  
HFD*1 Inverter reset*2    
HF4 Alarm definition batch clear  –  
HFC Parameter all clear    
HFC User clear – –  –
HFF Link parameter extended setting    
*1. The instruction code "HFD (inverter reset)" does not request a response from the inverter.
Accordingly, even if inverter reset is executed to a station number at which an inverter is not connected, error
does not occur.
It takes about 2.2 seconds to complete execution of inverter reset.
*2. When resetting the inverter, please specify H9696 as the operand S3 of the IVDR instruction.
Do not use H9966.
*3. Please write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just before the IVDR instruction
when writing frequency.
When "0" is not written, writing of the frequency may not be executed normally.
3. Related devices
Number Number
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2
step*5*6
M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*5 D8154 D8159 IVBWR instruction error parameter number*5*6
Cautions
time.

E500/S500
688
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read
21
30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction reads an inverter parameter to the PLC using the computer link operation function of the inverter. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
IVRD 9 steps
IVRD Continuous
Operation
 23
 
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S1 Inverter station number (K0 to K31) 24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S2 Inverter parameter number
16-bit binary
D Device number storing the read value
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
Type
S1  1 2    26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S2  1 2   
D  1 2 
n  

27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
1. 16-bit operation (IVRD)

The value of the parameter S2 is read from an inverter connected to a communication port n whose station 28
number is S1 , and output to D .
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
Command
input
FNC272 S1  S2  D n
IVRD
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
689
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read
2. Related devices
Number Number
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2
M8063 M8438 Serial communication error *1 D8150 D8155 Response wait time in inverter communication*1
step*2*3
Cautions
time.

E500/S500
690
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write
21
30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction writes an inverter parameter of an inverter using the computer link operation function of the inverter. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
IVWR 9 steps
IVWR Continuous
Operation
 23
 
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type

Description Data Type
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S2 Inverter parameter number
16-bit binary
Set value to be written to the inverter parameter or device number storing the data to be
S3
set
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
Type
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S1  1 2   
S2  1 2   
S3  1 2   
n  

27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

1. 16-bit operation (IVWR) 28

A value specified in S3 is written to a parameter S2 in an inverter connected to a communication port n whose
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
station number is S1 .
Command
input
FNC273 S1  S2  S3  n
IVWR
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
691
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write
2. Related devices
Number Number
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2
step*2*3
Cautions
time.
• Cautions when using the password function for inverter.
1) When a communication error occurs
When a communication error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, the FX PLC automatically retries
communication up to 3 times*4.
Hence, when a password disable error occurs in the inverter in which "display of the number of times of password
disable error"*5 is enabled using Pr297, please note that the number of times of password disable error displayed
in accordance with the setting of Pr297 may not be the same as the actual number of times of password input
error as described below.
Do not execute automatic retry (re-driving of an inverter instruction) using a sequence program when writing data
to Pr297.
Cases in which a password reset error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, and the actual number of
times of reset error in such cases.
- When a wrong password is written to Pr297 due to a password input error
When the writing instruction is executed once, a password reset error occurs 3 times.
- When the password cannot be written correctly to Pr297 due to noise, etc.
A password reset error occurs up to 3 times.
2) When registering the password

When registering the password in the inverter using an inverter communication instruction, write the password to
Pr297, read Pr297, and then confirm that registration of the password is completed normally*6.
If writing of the password to Pr297 is not completed normally due to noise, etc., the FX PLC automatically retries
writing, and the registered password may be reset by the retry.
*4. The FX PLC executes the first communication, and then retries communication twice (3 time in total).
*5. When "display of the number of times of password disable error" is enabled using Pr297 and when a
password disable error occurs 5 times, the "reading/writing restriction" cannot be disabled even if the right
password is input. For recovery from this status, it is necessary to all-clear all parameters.
*6. When the value given as a result of reading Pr297 is "0" to "4", registration of the password is completed
normally.

E500/S500
692
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write
21
30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction writes parameters of an inverter at one time using the computer link operation function of the inverter. 22
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
IVBWR IVBWR Continuous


9 steps Operation
  23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S1 Station number of an inverter (K0 to K31)
S2 Number of parameters in an inverter to be written at one time

16-bit binary
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S3 Head device number of a parameter table to be written to an inverter
n Used channel (K1: ch 1, K2: ch 2)
Oper-
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Type
S1      
S2      
S3     26
n  
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (IVBWR)
A data table*1 (parameter numbers and set values) specified in S2 and S3 is written to an inverter connected to
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
a communication port n whose station number is S1 all at once.
Command
input
FNC274 S1  S2  S3  n
IVBWR
*1. The table below shows the data table format. 28

Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
S2 : Number of parameters to be written

S3 : Head device number of data table
Device Parameter numbers to be written and set values
S3 Parameter number
S3 +1
1st parameter
Set value 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
S3 +2 Parameter number
2nd parameter
S3 +3 Set value
...
...
...
S3 +2 S2 -4
“ S2 -1”th parameter
Parameter number
Set value
30
S3 +2 S2 -3
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
S3 +2 S2 -2 Parameter number
“ S2 ”th parameter
S3 +2 S2 -1 Set value
693
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write
2. Related devices
Number Number
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2
step*2*3
Cautions
time.
Applicable models depending on the PLC version

E500/S500
694
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.6 FNC275 – IVMC / Inverter Multi Command
21
30.6 FNC275 – IVMC / Inverter Multi Command
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction writes 2 types of settings (operation command and set frequency) to the inverter, and reads 2 types of 22
data (inverter status monitor, output frequency, etc.) from the inverter at the same time.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
IVMC 11 steps
IVMC Continuous
Operation
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
S2 Multiple instructions for inverter: Send/receive data type specification 24

16-bit binary
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S3 Head device which stores data to be written to the inverter (Occupies 2 points.)
D Head device which stores values to be read from the inverter (Occupies 2 points.)
n Channel to be used (K1: ch1, K2: ch2)*1
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
Type
S1  1 2   
S2  1 2   
26
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S3  1 2 
D  1 2 
n  

2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
1. 16-bit operation (IVMC)
This instruction executes multiple commands of an inverter connected to a communication port n whose station
number is specified in S1 . Specify the send/receive data type using S2 , the head device which stores data to 28
be written to the inverter using S3 , and the head device which stores values to be read from the inverter using
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
D .
Command
input
FNC275
S1 S2 S3 D n
IVMC
2. Send/receive data type S2

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
The table below shows valid send data 1 and 2 and receive data 1 and 2 specified by the send/receive data type
S2 .
Send data Receive data
S2
(Write contents to Inverter) (Read contents from Inverter)
Send/receive
data type
H0000
Data 1 ( S3 ) Data 2 ( S3 +1) Data 1 ( D ) Data 2 ( D +1)
Output frequency (speed)
30
Set frequency (RAM)
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
H0001 Inverter status monitor Special monitor

Run command (expansion)
H0010 Set frequency (expansion) Output frequency (speed)
H0011 (RAM, EEPROM) Special monitor
695
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.6 FNC275 – IVMC / Inverter Multi Command
3. Related devices
Number Number
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2
M8153 M8158 Inverter communication error latch*2 D8153 D8158 Latch of inverter communication error occurrence step*2*3
M8154 M8159 Inverter instruction error*2 D8154 D8159 IVBWR instruction error parameter number*2*3
Cautions
time.
• Number of occupied devices
Two devices are occupied respectively by S3 and D .
Make sure not to use those devices in another control.
• If a device number outside the range due to indexing, etc. is specified in D , the receive data from the inverter
is not stored in D . However, values set in S3 and S3 +1 may be written to the inverter.
• If any unspecified value is set in S2 , unexpected data may be written to and read from the inverter, and values
of D and D +1 may be updated.
• IVMC instruction reads the inverter status at the time of communication with the inverter, and stores the read status
to D . Accordingly, the status written by the IVMC instruction can be read by a next or later read instruction
(IVCK or IVMC).
Applicable inverters
This instruction is applicable to the following inverters:
- FREQROL-F800(Applicable in all)
- FREQROL-A800(Applicable in all)
- FREQROL-E700 (February 2009 and later)
- FREQROL-D700 (Applicable in all)
→ For details, refer to the respective inverter manual
Applicable programming tool
This instruction is applicable to the following programming tools:
• FX3S Series PLC
Product name Model name Compatible Versions Remarks
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.492N or later
-
FX-30P Ver. 1.50 or later
• FX3G Series PLC

GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.62Q or later
-
• FX3GC Series PLC

GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.77F or later
-
• FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs

GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.48A or later
-
696
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.7 FNC276 - MODBUS Read/Write Instruction
21
30.7 FNC276 - MODBUS Read/Write Instruction
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline 22
This instruction allows the MODBUS Master to communicate (read/write data) with its associated Slaves.
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the MODBUS Communication Edition.
1. Instruction Format
ADPRW 11 steps
ADPRW Continuous
Operation
23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set Data
Slave Node Address (K0 to K32) 16-bit binary
S
Command Code 16-bit binary

24
S1
Others
FNC181-FNC189
S2 Command Parameter depending on the Command Code (See Subsection 30.7.1) 16-bit binary
S3 Command Parameter depending on the Command Code (See Subsection 30.7.1) 16-bit binary
S4 / D Command Parameter depending on the Command Code (See Subsection 30.7.1) Bit or 16-bit binary
3. Applicable Devices
25
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Operand Type System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
S 1 2    26
S1 1 2   
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S2 1 2   
S3 1 2   
S4 / D   1  1 2   
1: Except special auxiliary relay (M) and special data register (D).
27
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
2: Only available for FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

1. 16-bit operation (ADPRW) 28
, S3
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249
Command Code S1 is operated on Slave Node S according to Parameters S2 , and S4 / D .

Use 0 as the Slave Node Address for Broadcast commands.
Slave Command Code Parameters
Node Command
Command Address code
input
FNC276
ADPRW
S S1  S2  S3  S4  / D 
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269
Command Parameters
depending on the
Command Code
Command Code
Slave Node Address 30

K0 to K32 (00H to 20H)
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
697
30.7.1 Command Code and Command Parameters

The following table shows the required command parameters for each command code.
S1 S2 S3 S4 / D
PLC Destination Device (head address)
1H MODBUS Address: Applicable Devices D•R•M•Y•S
Device Count:1~2000
Read Coils 0000H~FFFFH
Block Length ( S3 + 15)÷16*1
2H
MODBUS Address: Applicable Devices D•R•M•Y•S
Read Discrete Device Count:1~2000
0000H~FFFFH
Inputs Block Length ( S3 + 15)÷16*1
3H
MODBUS Address: Applicable Devices D•R
Read Holding Device Count:1~125
0000H~FFFFH
Register Block Length S3

4H
MODBUS Address: Applicable Devices D•R
Read Input Device Count:1~125
0000H~FFFFH
Register Block Length S3
PLC Source Device (head address)

D•R•K•H•M•X•Y•S
5H MODBUS Address:
0 (fixed) Applicable Devices (D•R•M•X•Y•S can be
Write Single Coil 0000H~FFFFH
indexed.)
Block Length 1 Point
6H
MODBUS Address: D•R•K•H
Write Single 0 (fixed) Applicable Devices
0000H~FFFFH (D•R can be indexed.)
Register
7H PLC Destination Device (head address)
Read Exception Applicable Devices D•R
State
0 (fixed) 0 (fixed)
(Available only
in FX3U and Block Length 1 Point
FX3UC PLCs.)
Loop-back Test Data
Sub-function: 0H Sub-function Data (Slave response: echo of S3 )
Loop-back Test (loop-back data):0~65535 Applicable Devices D•R
Sub-function Data: (Slave response: echo of S3 )
Sub-function: 1H
0x0000: Do Not Reset
Restart Applicable Devices D•R
Event Log
Communication
0xFF00: Reset Event Log Block Length 1 Point
8H Sub-function: 2H PLC Destination Device (head address)
Diagnosis Return 0 (fixed) Applicable Devices D•R
(Available only Diagnostic Register Block Length 1 Point
in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs.) Sub-function: 3H Sub-function Data (ASCII (Slave response: echo of S3 )
Change ASCII Input Mode End of Message Applicable Devices D•R
Delimiter Character): 00H~FFH
Sub-function: 4H 0 (fixed)
Force Listen Only 0 (fixed) Applicable Devices D•R
Mode Block Length 0
Sub-function: AH (Slave response: echo of S3 )

Clear Counter and 0 (fixed) Applicable Devices D•R
Diagnostic Register
698
21
Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
S1 S2 S3 S4 / D
Sub-function: BH PLC Destination Device (head address)

Return Bus Message 0 (fixed) Applicable Devices D•R
Counter Block Length 1 Point
Sub-function: CH PLC Destination Device (head address) 22
Return Bus Applicable Devices D•R
0 (fixed)
External Device
FNC170-FNC179
Communication Error
Counter Block Length 1 Point
Sub-function: DH PLC Destination Device (head address)

Return Bus Exception 0 (fixed) Applicable Devices D•R
Error Counter Block Length 1 Point 23
Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Sub-function: EH
8H Return Slave 0 (fixed) Applicable Devices D•R
Diagnosis Message Counter Block Length 1 Point
(Available only
in FX3U and Sub-function: FH PLC Destination Device (head address)
FX3UC PLCs.) Return Slave No
Response Counter
0 (fixed) Applicable Devices D•R
24
Others
FNC181-FNC189
Sub-function: 10H
0 (fixed) Applicable Devices D•R
Return NAK Counter
Sub-function: 11H
Return Slave Busy 0 (fixed) Applicable Devices D•R 25
Counter
Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Sub-function: 12H PLC Destination Device (head address)
Return Character 0 (fixed) Applicable Devices D•R
Overrun Counter Block Length 1 Point
BH PLC Destination Device (head address) 26
Get Comm. D : Programming State
Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Event Counter 0 (fixed) 0 (fixed) D +1: Event Counter
(Available only
in FX3U and Applicable Devices D•R
FX3UC PLCs.) Block Length 2 Point
D : Programming State
27
CH
Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
D +1: Event Counter
Get Comm.
Event Log D +2: Bus Message Counter
0 (fixed) 0 (fixed)
(Available only D +3: Log Length
in FX3U and D +4~35: Up to 64 Bytes Event Log
FX3UC PLCs.)
Applicable Devices D•R 28
Block Length 4~36 Point
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

FH MODBUS Address: D•R•K•H•M•X•Y•S
Write Multiple Device Count:1~1968 Applicable Devices (D•R•M•X•Y•S can be
Coils 0000H~FFFFH indexed.)
Block Length ( S3 + 15)÷16*1
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

10H D•R•K•H
MODBUS Address: Applicable Devices
Write Multiple Device Count:1~123 (D•R can be indexed.)
0000H~FFFFH
Registers
Block Length S3
30
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC276
699
S1 S2 S3 S4 / D
11H
Report Slave ID D : Slave ID
(Available only 0 (fixed) 0 (fixed) D +1: RUN/STOP State
in FX3U and Applicable Devices D•R
FX3UC PLCs.)
16H OR Mask: 0000H~FFFFH
Mask Write D•R•K•H
MODBUS Address: AND Mask: Applicable Devices
Register (D•R can be indexed.)
(Available only
0000H~FFFFH 0000H~FFFFH
in FX3U and Block Length 1 Point
FX3UC PLCs.)
PLC Destination Device
(head address)
S4 : Write Data 1
MODBUS Address: S4 +1: Write Data 2
17H Device Count: S4 + (Write Count S3 ) -1: Write
Read/Write
S2: Write Address Data ( S3 )
Multiple S3 : Write Count
0000H~FFFFH S4 + S3 : Read Data 1
Registers 1~121
(Available only S4 + S3 +1: Read Data 2
in FX3U and S2 +1: Read
S3 +1: Read Count S4 + S3 + (Read Count S3 +1) -1:
FX3UC PLCs.) Address
1~125 Read Data ( S3 +1)
0000H~FFFFH
Applicable Devices D•R
Write Count S3 +
Block Length
Read Count S3 +1
*1. This calculation formula is applicable when the applicable device is D or R.
700
31
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
31. Data Transfer 3 – FNC277 to FNC279
FNC277 to FNC279 provide instructions for executing more complicated processing for fundamental applied 32
instructions and for special processing.
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
277 –
33
278 RBFM RBFM m1 m2 D n1 n2 Divided BFM Read Section 31.1
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
279 WBFM WBFM m1 m2 S n1 n2 Divided BFM Write Section 31.2
34
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
35
Programming
SFC•STL
36
Function
Interrupt
37
Special Device
38
Error Code
A
Information
Version Up
B
Execution Times
701
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read
31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read
Outline
This instruction reads data from continuous buffer memories (BFM) in a special function unit/block over several
operation cycles by the time division method. This instruction is convenient for reading receive data, etc. stored in
buffer memories in a special function unit/block for communication by the time division method.
FROM (FNC 78) instruction is also available to read the buffer memory (BFM) data.
→ For FROM (FNC 78) instruction, refer to Section 15.9.
RBFM Continuous
11 steps RBFM Operation 
2. Set data
m1 Unit number [0 to 7]
m2 Head buffer memory (BFM) number [0 to 32766]
D Head device number storing data to be read from buffer memory (BFM) 16-bit binary
n1 Number of all buffer memories (BFM) to be read [1 to 32767]
n2 Number of points transferred in one operation cycle [1 to 32767]
Oper-
Type
m1    
m2    
D   
n1    
n2    

1. 16-bit operation (RBFM)
"n1" buffer memory (BFM) units at location # "m2" in special function unit/block No. "m1" are read to D in the PLC.
While transferring, "n1" is divided by "n2" so n1/n2 buffer memories (rounded up when there is a remainder) are
transferred per scan time.
→ For the unit No., buffer memory (BFM) #, cautions, and program example,
Command
input FNC278 Unit No. "m1" PLC
m1 m2 D n1 n2 *1
RBFM Read
BFM#(m2) D
M8029
Instruction execution
M{{
complete
M8328 BFM#(m2+n1-1) D +n1-1
Instruction
M
non-execution *1 "n2" buffer memories are read in
M8329 each operation cycle. Reading is
M executed in "n1/n2" times. ("n1/n2"
abnormally complete
is rounded up if it is not an integer.)
• When the instruction is finished normally, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON. When the
instruction is finished abnormally, the instruction execution abnormally complete flag M8329 turns ON.
• When RBFM (FNC278) or WBFM (FNC279) instruction is executed in another step for the same unit number, the
instruction non-execution flag M8328 is set to ON, and execution of such an instruction is paused.
When execution of the other target instruction is complete, the paused instruction resumes.
702
31
Related devices
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
→ For the flag use methods for instruction execution complete and instruction execution
abnormally complete, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished normally.
M8328 Instruction non-execution

Turns ON when RBFM (FNC278) or WBFM (FNC279) instruction in 32
another step is executed for the same unit number.
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
M8329 Instruction execution abnormally complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished abnormally.
Instruction
FROM (FNC 78) Read from a special function block
Description
33
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
TO (FNC 79) Write to a special function block
WBFM (FNC279) Divided BFM write
Errors
D8067.
34
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
• When the unit number "m1" does not exist (error code: K6708)
31.1.1 Common items between RBFM (FNC278) instruction and WBFM (FNC279) instruction
Specification of unit number of special function unit/block and buffer memory 35
Programming
SFC•STL
→ For the connection method of special function units/blocks, number of connectable units/blocks,
and handling of I/O numbers, refer to the manual of the PLC used and special function unit/block.
1. Unit number "m1" of a special function unit/block

Use the unit number to specify to which equipment the RBFM/WBFM instruction works.
36
Unit No. 0
Function
Interrupt
Built-in Unit Unit Unit
CC-Link/LT No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
FX3UC- I/O Special Special I/O Special
32MT-LT extension function function extension function
(-2)
main unit
block block block block block 37
Special Device
A unit number is automatically assigned to each special function unit/block connected to the PLC.
The unit number is assigned in the way "No. 0 → No. 1 → No. 2 ..." starting from the equipment nearest the main unit.
When the main unit is the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2), the unit number is assigned in the way "No. 1 → No. 2 → No. 3 ..."
starting from the equipment nearest to the main unit because the CC-Link/LT master is built into the FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2).
38
2. Buffer memory (BFM) number "m2"
Error Code
Up to 32767 16-bit RAM memories are built in a special function unit/block, and they are called buffer memories.
The buffer memory number is from "0" to "32766", and the contents are determined according to each special function
unit/block.
→ For the contents of buffer memories, refer to the manual of the special function unit/block used.
A
Information
Version Up
B
Execution Times
703
Cautions
• A watchdog timer error may occur when many numbers of points are transferred in one operation cycle. In such a
case, take one of the following countermeasures:
- Change the watchdog timer time
By overwriting the contents of D8000 (watchdog timer time), the watchdog timer detection time is changed (initial
value: K200).
When the program shown below is input, the sequence program will be monitored with the new watchdog timer
time.
M8002
0
MOV
Initial pulse
FNC 07 When WDT (FNC 07) instruction is not programmed, the value
WDT of D8000 becomes valid during END processing.
- Change the number of transferred points "n2" in each operation cycle

Change the number of transferred points "n2" in each operation cycle to a smaller value.
• Do not stop the driving of the instruction while it is being executed. If driving is stopped, the buffer memory (BFM)
reading/writing processing is suspended, but the data acquired in the middle of reading/writing processing is stored
in D and later and buffer memories (BFM).
Command
input
SET M{{
M{{
FNC278 m1 m2 D n1 n2
RBFM
M8029
RST M{{
• When indexing is executed, the contents of index registers at the beginning of execution are used.
Even if the contents of index registers are changed after the instruction, such changes do not affect the process of
the instruction.
• The contents of "n1" devices starting from D change while the RBFM (FNC278) instruction is executed. After
execution of the instruction is completed, execute another instruction for "n1" devices starting from D .
• Do not update (change) the contents of "n1" devices starting from S while the WBFM (FNC279) instruction is
executed. If the contents are updated, the intended data may not be written to the buffer memories (BFM).
• Do not update (change) the contents of "n1" buffer memories (BFM) starting from the buffer memory No. "m2" while
the RBFM (FNC278) instruction is executed. If the contents are updated, the intended data may not be read.
704
31
Program example
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
In the example shown below, data is read from and written to the buffer memories (BFM) in the unit No. 2 as follows:
• When X000 is set to ON, data stored in D100 to D179 (80 points) are written to the buffer memories (BFM) #1001
to 1080 in the special function unit/block whose unit number is No. 2 by 16 points in each operation cycle.
• When X001 is set to ON, the buffer memories (BFM) #2001 to 2080 (80 points) in the special function unit/block
whose unit number is No. 2 are written to D200 to D279 by 16 points in each operation cycle. 32
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
X000 The BFM write start flag is set
SET M0
to ON.
BFM write
start
D100 to D179 (80 points) are written to
M0
BFM write
FNC279
WBFM
K2 K1001 D100 K80 K16 the buffer memories #1001 to 1080 in
the unit No. 2 (in 5 operation cycles). 33
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
start M8029
RST M0 The BFM write start flag is set to OFF.
M8328
Execution of the WBFM instruction is
Y000
waited.
Instruction non-execution
34
M8329
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
RST M0 The BFM write start flag is set to OFF.
abnormally complete
X001
SET M5 The BFM read start flag is set to ON.
BFM read
start
35
Programming
SFC•STL
M5 The buffer memories #2001 to 2080 (80
FNC278 K2 K2001 D200 K80 K16 points) in the unit No. 2 are read to
RBFM D200 to D279 (in 5 operation cycles).
BFM read
start M8029
RST M5 The BFM read start flag is set to OFF.
M8328
Execution of the RBFM instruction is
36
Y001
Function
Interrupt
waited.
Instruction non-execution
M8329
RST M5 The BFM read start flag is set to OFF.
abnormally complete
END
37
Special Device
38
Error Code
A
Information
Version Up
B
Execution Times
705
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write
31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write
Outline
This instruction writes data to continuous buffer memories (BFM) in a special function unit/block over several operation
cycles by the time division method. This instruction is convenient for writing send data, etc. to buffer memories in a
special function unit/block for communication by the time division method.
TO (FNC 79) instruction is also available for writing data to the buffer memory (BFM).
→ For TO (FNC 79) instruction, refer to Section 15.10.
WBFM Continuous
11 steps WBFM Operation 
2. Set data
m1 Unit number [0 to 7]
m2 Head buffer memory (BFM) number [0 to 32766]
S Head device number storing data to be written to buffer memory (BFM) 16-bit binary
n1 Number of all buffer memories (BFM) to be written [1 to 32767]
n2 Number of points transferred in one operation cycle [1 to 32767]
Oper-
Type
m1    
m2    
S   
n1    
n2    

1. 16-bit operation (WBFM)
"n1" word units from S in the PLC are written to buffer memory (BFM) location # "m2" in special function unit/
block No. "m1". While transferring, "n1" is divided by "n2" so n1/n2 words (rounded up when there is a remainder) are
transferred per scan time.
→ For the unit No., buffer memory (BFM) No., cautions, and program example,
Command
input FNC279 PLC Unit No. "m1"
m1 m2 S n1 n2 *1
WBFM Write
S BFM#(m2)
M8029
M{{
complete
M8328 S +n1-1 BFM#(m2+n1-1)
Instruction
M
non-execution *1 "n2" points are written in each
M8329 operation cycle. Writing is executed
M in "n1/n2" transfers. ("n1/n2" is
abnormally complete
rounded up if it is not an integer.)
• When the instruction is finished normally, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON. When the
instruction is finished abnormally, the instruction execution abnormally complete flag M8329 turns ON.
• When the RBFM (FNC278) or WBFM (FNC279) instruction is executed in another step for the same unit number,
the instruction non-execution flag M8328 is set to ON, and execution of such an instruction is paused.
When execution of the first target instruction is complete, the paused instruction resumes.
706
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write
31
Related devices
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
→ For the flag use methods for instruction execution complete and instruction execution
abnormally complete, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished normally.
M8328 Instruction non-execution

Turns ON when the RBFM (FNC278) or WBFM (FNC279) instruction 32
in another step is executed for the same unit number.
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
M8329 Instruction execution abnormally complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished abnormally.
Instruction
FROM (FNC 78) Read from a special function block
Description
33
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
TO (FNC 79) Write to a special function block
RBFM (FNC278) Divided BFM read
Errors
D8067.
34
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
• When the unit number "m1" does not exist (error code: K6708)
35
Programming
SFC•STL
36
Function
Interrupt
37
Special Device
38
Error Code
A
Information
Version Up
B
Execution Times
707
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289
32. High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289
High-Speed Counter Compare With Data

280 HSCT HSCT S1 m S2 D n Table
Section 32.1
281 − −
282 − −
283 − −
284 − −
285 − −
286 − −
287 − −
288 − −
289 − −
708
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table
31
32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
Outline
This instruction compares the current value of a high-speed counter with a data table of comparison points, and then 32
sets or resets up to 16 output devices.
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
D HSCT  DHSCT Continuous

21 steps

Operation
33
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
2. Set data
S1 Head device number storing the data table 16- or 32-bit binary
m Number of comparison points in data table [1≤m≤128] 16-bit binary 34
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
S2 High-speed counter number (C235 to C255) 32-bit binary
D Head device number to which the operation status is output Bit

n Number of devices to which the operation status is output [1≤n≤16] 16-bit binary
Programming
SFC•STL
Oper-
Type
S1   
m   36
 
Function
Interrupt
S2
D    
n  
Only a high-speed counter C235 to C255 can be specified in "".

37
Special Device
1. 32-bit operation (DHSCT)
The current value of a high-speed counter specified in S2 is compared with the data table shown below which has
(3m) points stored in S1 and later, and the operation output set value (ON or OFF) specified in the data table is
output to D to D +n-1. 38
Command
Error Code
input
FNC280 S1  m S2  D n
DHSCT
Data table used for comparison

Comparison
Comparison value
Operation output set value
Operation output destination
A
point number (SET [1] or RESET [0])
Information
Version Up
0 S1 +1, S1 S1 +2
1 S1 +4, S1 +3 S1 +5
2 S1 +7 S1 +6 S1 +8
D to D +n-1
B
...
...
...
m-2 S1 +3m-5, S1 +3m-6 S1 +3m-4

Execution Times
m-1 S1 +3m-2, S1 +3m-3 S1 +3m-1
709
Operation output setting (SET [1] or RESET [0]) [Up to 16 points]

A 7 1 6
Operation
output setting 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
Operation output setting When the current value of the high-speed counter
= HA716 becomes equivalent to the comparison value, the
operation output setting pattern is output.
In the case of " D = :ON
Y000, n = K10" Y Y Y Y Y Y YYYY :OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D +n-1 D
1) When this instruction is executed, the data table is set as the comparison target.
2) When the current value of the high-speed counter, specified in S2 , becomes equivalent to the
comparison value in the data table, the corresponding operation output specified in the data table is output to
D to D +n-1.
If an output (Y) is specified in D , the output processing is executed immediately without waiting for the output
refresh executed by the END instruction.
When specifying an output (Y), make sure that the least significant digit of the device number is “0”.
Examples: Y000, Y010 and Y020
3) Immediately after step 2), “1” is added to the current table counter value D8138.
4) The next comparison point is set as the comparison target data.
5) Steps 2) and 3) are repeated until the current value of the table counter D8138 becomes "m".
When the current value becomes "m", the instruction execution complete flag M8138 turns ON, and the execution
returns to step 1). At this time, the table counter D8138 is reset to "0".
6) When the command contact is set to OFF, execution of the instruction is stopped and the table counter D8138 is
reset to “0”.
710
31
Operation example
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
X010
FNC280 D200 K5 C235 Y010 K3
DHSCT
M8000
FNC 54 K900 C235 C235
DHSCR 32
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
Comparison data SET/RESET pattern
Comparison
Comparison Operation output Table counter D8138
point number Device Device
value set value
0 D201,D200 K321 D202 H0001 0↓
1
2
D204,D203
D207,D206
K432
K543
D205
D208
H0007
H0002
1↓
2↓
33
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
3 D210,D209 K764 D211 H0000 3↓
4 D213,D212 K800 D214 H0003 4↓ (Repeated from “0↓”)
Current value
of C235 34
900 900
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
900 800
800 764
675 764
543 543
450 432
321
432
35
321
Programming
SFC•STL
225
0
Command Time
contact
X010 OFF
ON
36
Function
Interrupt
Y010 OFF*1 ON Because DHSCT
instruction is not
executed, the
Y011 OFF*1 ON operation outputs are
not changed by this
Y012 OFF*1 ON instruction.
37
4
Special Device
HSCT table 3 3
counter 2 2
D8138 0 1 0 1 0
HSCT
instruction
execution
complete flag
38
Error Code
M8138 OFF ON
*1. If this instruction is not executed, no processing is executed for outputs.

In the operation example shown above, the command contact is “OFF”.
2. Related device
A
Information
Version Up
HSCT (FNC280) instruction

M8138 Turns ON when the operation for the final table No. "m-1" is completed.
execution complete flag
D8138 HSCT (FNC280) table counter Stores the comparison point number handled as the comparison target.
B
Execution Times
711
Cautions
• This instruction can be executed only once in a program.
If this instruction is programmed two or more times, an operation error is caused by the second instruction and
later, and the instruction will not be executed. (error code: K6765)
• This instruction constructs the data table at the END instruction of the first execution of the instruction. Accordingly,
the operation output works after the second scan and later.
• With regard to DHSCT (FNC280), DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54) and DHSZ (FNC 55) instructions, up to 32
instructions can be executed in one operation cycle. An operation error is caused by the 33rd instruction and later,
and the instruction will not be executed. (error code: K6705)
• If an output (Y) is specified in D , the output processing is executed immediately without waiting for the output
refresh executed by END instruction.
When specifying an output (Y), make sure that the least significant digit of the device number is “0”.
Examples: Y000, Y010 and Y020
• When a high-speed counter specified in S2 is indexed with index, all high-speed counters are handled as
software counters.
• For this instruction, only one comparison point (one line) is handled as the comparison target at one time.
Processing will not move to the next comparison point until the current counter value becomes equivalent to the
comparison point currently selected as the comparison target.
If the current value of a high-speed counter executes up counting using the comparison data table shown in the
operation example on the previous page, make sure to execute the instruction while the current value of the high-
speed counter is smaller than the comparison value in comparison point No. 1.
• When the DHSCT instruction is used with a hardware counter (C235, C236, C237, C238, C239, C240, C244 (OP),
C245 (OP), C246, C248 (OP), C251, C253), the hardware counter is automatically switched to a software counter,
and the maximum frequency and total frequency are affected.
Errors
D8067.
• When any devices other than high-speed counters C235 to C255 are specified in S2 (error code: K6706)
• When the “3m-1”th device from a device specified in S1 exceeds the last number of the device (error code:
K6706)
• When the “n”th device from a device specified in D exceeds the last number of the device (error code: K6706)
• When this instruction is used two or more times in a program (error code: K6765)
• With regard to DHSCT (FNC280), DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54) and DHSZ (FNC 55) instructions, up to 32
instructions can be executed in one operation cycle. An operation error is caused by the 33rd instruction and later,
and the instruction will not be executed. (error code: K6705)
712
31
Program example
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
In the program shown below, the current value of C235 (counting X000) is compared with the comparison data table
set in R0 and later, and a specified pattern is output to Y010 to Y013.
M8000
M8235 C235 is used as an up counter.
M8000
32
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
C235
K0
FNC 12 H0008 K1Y010 Initial output
MOVP
FNC 54
DHSCR
K400 C235 C235 Ring length: 0 to 400 33
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
FNC280 R0 K5 C235 Y010 K4
DHSCT
END
34
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
Operation example
Comparison data SET/RESET pattern
Comparison
Comparison Operation output Table counter D8138
point Device Device
value set value
0
1
R1,R0
R4,R3
K100
K150
R2
R5
H0007
H0004
0↓
1↓
35
Programming
SFC•STL
2 R7,R6 K200 R8 H0003 2↓
3 R10,R9 K250 R11 H0006 3↓
4 R13,R12 K300 R14 H0008 4↓ (Repeated from “0↓”)
36
400
Function
Interrupt
300
250
200
150 37
100
Special Device
0
Time
Y010 OFF ON
Y011 OFF ON
38
Error Code
Y012 OFF ON
Y013 ON OFF
4
Table 3 3
counter
D8138 0 1
2
0 1
2 A
Information
Version Up
B
Execution Times
713
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
33. Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
290 LOADR LOADR S n Load From ER Section 33.1
291 SAVER SAVER S m D Save to ER Section 33.2
292 INITR INITR S n Initialize R and ER Section 33.3
293 LOGR LOGR S m D1 n D2 Logging R and ER Section 33.4
294 RWER RWER S n Rewrite to ER Section 33.5
295 INITER INITER S n Initialize ER Section 33.6
296 − −
297 − −
298 − −
299 − −
714
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER
31
33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
Outline
This instruction reads the current values of extension file registers (ER) stored in the attached memory cassette (flash
memory or EEPROM) or EEPROM built into the PLC, and transfers them to extension registers (R) stored in the RAM 32
in the PLC.
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
LOADR P LOADR Continuous 

5 steps
LOADRP
Operation
Pulse (Single)  33
Operation
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
2. Set data
Device number of extension register to which data is to be transferred
S
(The extension file register with the same number is handled as the data transfer source.)
Number of points to be read (transferred)
16-bit binary 34
n
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
[FX3G/FX3GC: 1 ≤ n ≤ 24000, FX3U/FX3UC: 0 ≤ n ≤ 32767]
Oper-
and
Type
Unit
Index
Pointer
35
Programming
SFC•STL
S  
n   

1. 16-bit operation (LOADR and LOADRP)
Function
Interrupt
1) In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
The contents (current values) of extension file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (flash memory) with the
same numbers as the extension registers specified by S to S +n-1 are read, and transferred to the
extension registers specified by S to S +n-1 stored in the PLC's built-in RAM.
Command
37
input
Special Device
FNC290 S n
LOADRP
Extension file registers (ER) Extension registers (R)

inside memory cassette Read inside built-in RAM
E S
(transfer)
S 38
Error Code
E S  +1 S  +1
E S  +2 S  +2
E S  +3 S  +3
A
E S  +n-2 S  +n-2
Information
Version Up
E S  +n-1 S  +n-1
• Reading (transferring) is executed in device units. Up to 32,768 devices can be read (transferred).
• As apposed to the SAVER (FNC291), INITR (FNC292) and LOGR (FNC293) instructions, it is not necessary to
execute this instruction in sector units. B
Execution Times
• If “n” is set to “0”, it is handled as “32768” when the instruction is executed.
715
2) In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
a) When a memory cassette is connected (A memory cassette can be connected only to FX3G PLC.)
The contents (current values) of extension file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (EEPROM) with the
same numbers as the extension registers specified by S to S +n-1 are read, and
transferred to the extension registers specified by S to S +n-1 stored in the PLC's built-in RAM.
Command
input
FNC290 S n
LOADRP

inside memory cassette Read inside built-in RAM
(transfer)
E S S
E S +1 S +1
E S +2 S +2
E S +3 S +3
E S +n-2 S +n-2
E S +n-1 S +n-1
•Reading (transferring) is executed in device units. Up to 24,000 devices can be read (transferred).
b) When a memory cassette is not connected

In the program example below, the contents (current value) of extension file registers (ER) which are stored in
the EEPROM built in the PLC and have the same device numbers as extension registers S to S +n-
1 are read, and transferred to extension registers (R) which are stored in the RAM built in the PLC and have
the device numbers S to S +n-1.
Command
input
FNC290 S n
LOADRP

inside built-in EEPROM Read inside built-in memory
(transfer)
E S S
E S +1 S +1
E S +2 S +2
E S +3 S +3
E S +n-2 S +n-2
E S +n-1 S +n-1
•Reading (transferring) is executed in device units. Up to 24,000 devices can be read (transferred).
716
31
Caution
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
Data can be written to the memory cassette (flash memory) up to 10,000 times.
32
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
write to the memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable writes.
Execution of the LOADR (FNC290), SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction is not counted as a write to
33
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
Every time the INITR (FNC292) or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is counted as a number of times of
writing to the memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
• In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs
Data can be written to the memory cassette (EEPROM) up to 10,000 times, and to the built-in memory (EEPROM) 34
up to 20,000 times.
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
Every time the RWER (FNC294) instruction is executed, it is counted as a write to the memory. Make sure not to
exceed the allowable number of writes.
(programming software, handy programming panels, and display units). 35
Programming
SFC•STL
Execution of the LOADR (FNC290)instruction is not counted as a write to the memory.
Errors
D8067.
• When the last device number to be transferred exceeds “32767” (error code: K6706)
36
Function
Interrupt
At this time, devices up to R32767 are read and transferred.
• When a memory cassette is not connected (error code: K6771)*1
*1. An operation error is not caused in FX3G PLC because the contents of extension file registers stored in the
EEPROM built in the PLC are read if a memory cassette is not connected.
37
Program example
Special Device
In the program example shown below, the contents (current value) of 4,000 extension file registers ER1 to ER4000
inside the memory cassette are read, and transferred to 4,000 extension registers R1 to R4000 inside the built-in RAM.
M0
FNC290 R1 K4000
LOADR
38
Error Code

inside memory cassette inside built-in RAM
Device Current Device Current
number value Read number value
(transfer)
ER1 K100 R1 K100
ER2 K50 R2 K50 A
Information
Version Up
ER3 H0003 R3 H0003

ER4 H0101 R4 H0101
ER3999 K55 R3999 K55

B
ER4000 K59 R4000 K59
Execution Times
717
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER
33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER
Outline
This instruction writes the current values of the extension registers (R) stored in the PLC's built-in RAM to extension
file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (flash memory) in sector units (2048 points).
The RWER (FNC294) instruction provided in FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later and FX3U PLC only writes (transfers) a
arbitrary number of points. It is not necessary to execute the INITR (FNC292) or the INITER (FNC295) instruction
when RWER instruction is used.
→ For RWER instruction, refer to Section 33.5.
SAVER SAVER Continuous


7 steps Operation
 
2. Set data
Head device number of extension register sector to which data is to be written
S
(Only the head device number of a sector of extension registers can be specified.)
n Number of points written (transferred) in one operation cycle [0 ≤ n ≤ 2048] 16-bit binary
D Device number storing the number of already written points
Oper-
Type
S  
n  
D  

1. 16-bit operation (SAVER)
The contents (current values) of extension registers (R) specified by S to S +2047 are written (transferred) to
extension file registers (ER) inside a memory cassette (flash memory) with the same device numbers in “2048/n”
operation cycles (“2048/n+1” cycles if there is a remainder).
While the instruction is being executed, the number of points already written is stored in D .
Command
input
FNC291 S n D
SAVER
M8029
M Instruction execution complete
flag for SAVER instruction
Extension registers (R) Extension file registers (ER)

inside built-in RAM Write *1 inside memory cassette
(transfer)
S E S
S +1 E S +1
S +2 E S +2
S +2047 E S +2047
*1 “n” points are written (transferred) in each operation cycle.
718
31
• Extension file registers are written in sector units (2048 points).
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
The table below shows the head device number in each sector:
Sector Sector
Head device number Written device range Head device number Written device range
number number
Sector 0 R0 ER0 to ER2047 Sector 8 R16384 ER16384 to ER18431
Sector 1 R2048 ER2048 to ER4095 Sector 9 R18432 ER18432 to ER20479 32
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
Sector 7 R14336 ER14336 to ER16383 Sector 15 R30720 ER30720 to ER32767 33
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
• If "n" is set to "0", it is handled as "2048" when the instruction is executed.
• When writing (transferring) of 2,048 points is finished, execution of the instruction is completed and the instruction
execution complete flag M8029 turns ON.
• The number of already written points is stored in D .
2. Related device 34
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
Device number Name Description
When execution of the target instruction is completed, the instruction execution complete
flag M8029 turns ON.
M8029 In a program, however, there may be two or more instructions which use the flag M8029.
complete flag
To avoid confusion, make sure to use the NO contact of this flag immediately under the
SAVER instruction so that this flag works only for the SAVER instruction.
35
Programming
SFC•STL
Cautions
1. Cautions on writing data to a memory cassette
Memory cassettes use flash memory. Note the following when writing data to extension file registers in a memory
cassette with the FNC291 instruction. 36
• It takes about 340ms to write 2,048 points. If “n” is set to K0 or K2048, the operation cycle for executing this
Function
Interrupt
instruction becomes longer than about 340ms.
If the operation cycle is severely affected, write data in two or more operation cycles.
When writing data in two or more operation cycles, set “n” ranging from K1 to K1024.
• Do not abort execution of this instruction in the middle of operation. If execution is aborted, unexpected data may
be written to extension file registers.
If execution of this instruction is aborted by turning OFF the power, execute the instruction again using step 2
37
Special Device
described below after turning the power ON again.
Write
command
SET M
M
FNC295
INITERP
S n 38
Error Code
FNC291 S n D
SAVER
M8029
RST M
A
Information
Version Up
B
Execution Times
719
2. Initialization of extension file registers

Execute the INITER (FNC295) or INITR (FNC292) instruction to target extension file registers (ER) before executing
the SAVER instruction. If the SAVER instruction is driven before the INITER (FNC295) or INITR (FNC292) instruction
is executed, an operation error (error code: K6770) may occur.
To avoid this an operation error, make a program executing the SAVER instruction as shown in the following
sequence:
• If the FX3U/FX3UC PLC is Ver. 1.30 or later
[1] When storing sectors of 2,048 extension registers (R) to extension file
registers (ER)
1) Execute the INITER (FNC295) instruction to the target extension file registers (ER) specified as targets in
the SAVER instruction.
2) Execute the SAVER instruction.
[2] When storing an arbitrary number of extension registers (R) to extension file registers (ER)
Use the RWER instruction.
→ For RWER (FNC294) instruction, refer to Section 33.5.
• When the FX3UC PLC is before Ver. 1.30
[1] When storing sectors of 2,048 extension registers (R) in one sector to
extension file registers (ER)
If the extension registers (R) have data to be stored in extension file registers (ER), use the procedure [2].
1) Execute the INITR (FNC292) instruction to extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER)
specified as targets of the SAVER instruction.
2) Store data to extension registers (R) specified as targets.
[2] When storing sector of 2,048 extension registers (R) in one sector to extension file registers (ER)
1) Temporarily withdraw the data of the extension registers (R) specified as targets of the SAVER instruction
to data registers or 2048 unused extension registers (R) by using the BMOV (FNC 15) instruction.
2) Execute the INITR (FNC292) instruction to extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER)
specified as targets of the SAVER instruction.
3) Return the data of 2048 points temporarily withdrawn in step 1) to extension registers (R) specified as
targets by using the BMOV (FNC 15) instruction.

• Data can be written to the memory cassette (flash memory) up to 10,000 times.
write to the memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
• Execution of the LOADR (FNC290), SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction is not counted as a write to
Every time the INITR (FNC292) or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is counted as a write to the memory.
Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
720
31
Errors
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
D8067.
• When any device number other than the head device number of a sector of extension file registers is set to S
(error code: K6706)
• When a memory cassette is not connected (error code: K6771) 32
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
• When the protect switch of the memory cassette is set to ON (error code: K6770)
• When the collation result after data writing is a "mismatch" due to omission of initialization or for another reason
(error code: K6770)
When this error occurs, the current values (data) of extension registers (R) may be lost. To avoid the data loss,
back up the data of extension registers (R) in advance using the following procedure:
1) Set the PLC mode to STOP. 33
2) Create a new project in GX Works2.
Register Control
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
This step is not necessary if it is alright to overwrite the current project.
3) Read the contents of extension registers (R) to GX Works2.
[1] Select “Online” → “Read from PLC..." to
display the Online Data Operation dialog box.
[2] Click "PLC Parameter/Network Parameter"
and "Device Data/File Register" to check
34
FX3U-CF-ADP
FNC300-FNC305
mark each of them.
[3] Click [Execute] button.
[4] When reading is completed, save the project.
4) Change the current program inside the PLC to
the program shown in “Cautions on writing data to
a memory cassette” in “Cautions” on the previous 35
page.
Programming
SFC•STL
36
Function
Interrupt
5) Write the data which was temporarily withdrawn to GX Works2 to the PLC.
[1] Select “Online” → “Write to PLC...” to display
the Online Data Operation dialog box.
[2] Click "PLC Parameter/Network Parameter"
and “MAIN” to check mark each of them.
[3] Click [Execute] button.
37
Special Device
38
Error Code
6) Change the PLC mode from STOP to RUN, execute the program, and store the data to the extension file
registers inside the memory cassette. A
Information
Version Up
B
Execution Times
721
Program examples
1) In the case of FX3U PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later
In the example shown below, only extension registers R10 to R19 (in sector 0) need to be updated in the
extension file registers (ER). When X000 is set to ON, sector 0 (head device R0) is written to the extension file
registers 128 points at a time. (128 points are written in one operation cycle)
Program
X000
SET M0
M0
FNC295 R0 K1 (1)
INITERP
FNC 07
WDTP
FNC291 R0 K128 D0 (2)

SAVER
M8029
RST M0
END
Operation
Setting data Setting backup data Setting backup data
Extension registers (R) Extension file registers (ER) Extension file registers (ER)
Device number Current

value Device number Current value Device number Current value
R0 K100 ER0 K100 ER0 HFFFF

. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Changed data
R11 K215 ER11 K330 (1) ER11 HFFFF (2)

Setting data (A)

. . . . INITER . .
. . . . . . SAVER
. . . . instruction . . instruction
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
R99 K1000 ER99 K1000 ER99 HFFFF
R100 HFFFF ER100 HFFFF ER100 HFFFF
. . . . . .
Unused
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
R2047 HFFFF ER2047 HFFFF ER2047 HFFFF
To the next page
722
31
Transfer 3
Data
FNC277-FNC279
Setting data Setting backup data
Extension file registers Number of
Extension registers (R) (ER)
already written
Current Current points (D0)
Device number value Device number value
R0 K100 ER0 K100
32
Processing 2
High-Speed
FNC280-FNC289
R1 K105 ER1 K105
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
R10 K200 ER10 K200
Setting data
Changed data
R11 K215
1st operation
ER11 K215
33
(2) R12 K400 cycle ER12 K400
Register Control
Extension File

Jy997d16601r PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Jy997d16601r PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Jy997d16601r PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

Manual No. JY997D16601

© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Related manuals ............................................................................................................................. 14

1.1 Programming Language in PLCs ........................................................................................................... 23

2. Overview (Sequence Program) 25

2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions..................................................................................................... 25

3.1 Basic Instructions ................................................................................................................................... 71

4.1 Device Number List................................................................................................................................ 84

4.4 State Relay [S] ....................................................................................................................................... 95

5. How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions 154

6. What to Understand before Programming 166

6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions ............................................................................................. 166

7. Basic Instruction 181

7.1 LD, LDI ................................................................................................................................................. 183

8. Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 220

8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump.......................................................................................................... 221

9. Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 244

9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare ................................................................................................................... 245

10. Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 270

10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition ................................................................................................................... 271

11. Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 292

11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right ......................................................................................................... 293

12. Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 315

12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset............................................................................................................ 316

13. High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 338

13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh .................................................................................................................... 339

14. Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 388

14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State ................................................................................................................ 389

15. External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 421

15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input .......................................................................................................... 422

16. External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 455

16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication................................................................................................ 456

17. Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 480

17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register.............................................................................. 481

18. Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 485

18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare....................................................................................... 487

19. Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 531

19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data.............................................................................................. 532

20. Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 547

20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return...................................................................................... 548

21. Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 562

21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare............................................................................................. 563

22. External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 580

22.1 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion ........................................................................ 581

23. Introduction of Alternate Instructions – FNC180 585

23.1 Instruction correspondence table ....................................................................................................... 585

24. Others – FNC181 to FNC189 586

24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data ........................................................................... 587

25. Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 600

25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition................................................................................................. 601

26. Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 611

26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion ....................................................................... 612

26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings ........................................................ 633

27. Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 640

27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables.................................................................................... 641

28. Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 652

29. Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 660